JP2021133071A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suppressing malfunctions of electronic components.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a main control board for controlling the progress of a game. The main control board includes control means for controlling the progress of the game, and signal communication means capable of sequentially inputting a signal necessary for controlling the progress of the game to the control means in response to a request from the control means. The signal communication means inputs the same signal again, after inputting the signal requested from the control means to the control means. The control means compares the signal input first from the signal communication means with the signal input later, and if they are matched, determines that the communication has been performed normally.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

In recent game machines, complicated game control is required. A plurality of electronic components required for game control are arranged on a main control board that controls the progress of the game (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-023717

When the number of electronic components mounted on the main control board increases, noise is generated due to the arrangement (wiring) of the electronic components, and there is a risk that the electronic components may malfunction.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing the occurrence of malfunction of electronic components.

In the invention according to claim 1, in order to achieve the above-mentioned object,
A gaming machine equipped with a main control board that controls the progress of a game.
The main control board
A control means for controlling the progress of the game and
A signal communication means capable of sequentially inputting signals necessary for controlling the progress of the game to the control means in response to a request from the control means, and a signal communication means.
With
The signal communication means inputs the signal requested by the control means to the control means, and then inputs the same signal again.
The control means is characterized in that the signal input first from the signal communication means is compared with the signal input later, and if they match, it is determined that the communication is normally performed.

In the above configuration, the signal output on the main control board (main control board 1310) according to the request from the control means (main control MPU 1311) is output twice (multiple times), and is output separately from the initially output signal. By comparing the signal with the signal, it is possible to detect the erroneous transmission of the signal due to noise or the like and suppress the malfunction of the electronic component.

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the above problems can be solved and malfunctions of electronic components can be suppressed.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a top view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a perspective view of the game board seen from the front right. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. It is a front view which cut the front component and the front unit of a game board at the substantially center of the game area in the front-rear direction. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the structure in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the arithmetic circuit in a main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the serial communication circuit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the accessory ratio calculation / display process of FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the program (code) and data stored in ROM, RAM built in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the structure of the accessory ratio display. It is a figure which shows the structure of a driver circuit. It is a timing diagram of the data input to a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the positional relationship between the main control MPU and the accessory ratio indicator. It is a figure which shows the load register selection table. It is a figure which shows the character generator decoding table. It is a state transition diagram of a driver circuit. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the display example of the accessory ratio. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of base calculation / display processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls, and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a figure which shows another example of the update timing of the prize ball number and the calculation timing of a base value. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the base calculation area. It is a front view which shows another example of a game board. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a flowchart which shows an example of peripheral control part V blank interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the peripheral control part 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the display selection process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of base calculation / display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the area update process for base calculation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows an example of base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 1. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 2. It is a flowchart which shows another example of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 3. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base display process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 3. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base calculation process 4. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the base display processing. It is a block diagram which shows schematic | control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the frame side discharge ball sensor. It is a figure which shows the connection example of a discharge ball sensor and a main control board. It is a front view which shows an example of a game board. It is a figure which shows the structure of the main control input circuit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the main control I / O port. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the main control I / O port. It is a timing diagram in the configuration example of the main control I / O port shown in FIG. 97. It is a figure which shows the change of the state (interval) to calculate the base value. It is a figure which shows the example of the character displayed on a base display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of FIG. 101. It is a figure which shows the structure of the base calculation area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a base calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the base calculation process of FIG. 105. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the base display data generation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of the base calculation process. It is a figure which shows the calculation of the base when the game state is switched. It is a figure which shows the structure which concerns on the storage area among the internal structure of the main control MPU 1311. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the program of timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the arrangement of the program (code) and data stored in ROM, RAM built in the main control MPU. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recorded in the game machine. It is a figure which shows the example of the error screen. It is a figure which shows the example of an error signal. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a figure which shows the example of an error. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the processing at the time of power-on of a peripheral control unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game history. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of a peripheral control board and its surroundings. It is a block diagram which shows the peripheral structure of the peripheral control SRAM. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history recording condition setting table. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history. It is a figure which shows the modification of the game history. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which has a setting part from the back with the door open. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 as viewed from behind with the door closed. It is a figure which shows the setting part of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130. It is a figure which shows the modification of the setting part. It is a block diagram which shows schematic the control structure of the pachinko machine which has a setting part. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board which has a setting part from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown in FIG. 135 from the back. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of setting change processing and setting display processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination processing. (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram showing an example of an effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 1, 2, and 30 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit. It is a figure which shows the mounting example of the main control board. It is a figure which shows another mounting example of a main control board. FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA'in FIG. 151 (B). It is a figure which shows another mounting example of a main control board. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a setting confirmation process. It is a timing diagram of a security signal. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the initialization process. It is a flowchart which shows another example of a setting confirmation process. This is another example of the fluctuation pattern table. This is an example of the final reserved color table. A table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 1 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 3 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is an example. A table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 5 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is an example. This is an example of a notice production table. This is an example of a dialogue production table. This is another example of the notice production table. This is an example of a setting suggestion effect table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the outline of the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect. (A) is an example of the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode, and (B) is an example of the effect limit table when an error occurs. This is an example of a new start prize production restriction table. This is an example of the processing table 1. This is an example of the processing table 2. This is an example of the processing table 3. This is an example of the processing table 4. This is an example of the processing table 5. This is an example of the processing table 6. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the performance display processing of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the notification mode of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the notification priority of another example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 1. It is the flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the initialization process at the time of RAM abnormality of another example 1. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the setting process of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the setting display processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the setting process at the time of power-on of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the random number update process 2 of another example 1. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 1. It is a flowchart of the switch input process 1 of another example 1. FIG. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch winning information data table of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area of the alternative example 1. be. FIG. 199 (A) is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 199 (B) is another configuration example of the switch input level / edge data area of the alternative example 1. It is a figure which shows. It is a flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process of another example 1. FIG. 201 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2 of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 201 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of the alternative example 1. FIG. 202 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on operation command of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 202 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on state command of the alternative example 1. FIG. 202 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on return destination command of the alternative example 1, and FIG. 202 (D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting value command of the alternative example 1. It is a figure which shows the transmission order of the command of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the state transition of the setting state management area of another example 1. FIG. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode of another example 1. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold table of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold table of another example 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot determination threshold table of another example 1. FIG. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting value confirmation processing of another example 2. It is the flowchart of the RAM confirmation processing outside the game area at the time of power-on of another example 2. It is the flowchart of the RAM abnormality out-of-game area processing of another example 2. It is the flowchart of the RWM initialization process outside the use area of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting process at the time of power-on of another example 2. FIG. 220 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area of the alternative example 2, and FIG. 220 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the power-on operation command of the alternative example 2. 220 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command of another example 2. It is the flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the process at the time of power-off of another example 2. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting process of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the setting display processing of another example 2. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 3. It is a flowchart of the power-on processing of another example 3. It is the flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 3. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing of another example 3. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing for the normal game of another example 3. It is the flowchart of the main control side main processing of another example 4. It is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing of another example 4. It is an exploded perspective view of the center accessory of the front unit of the game board and the front production unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is a front view which shows the state which the 1st picture is light-emitting and displayed in the front effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which the 2nd picture is light-emitting and displayed in the front effect unit. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of the reflection part provided in the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the structure of a light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the pattern projected on the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the state that the pattern which is viewed in a plane is displayed by the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the state that the pattern which is viewed in a plane is displayed by the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the picture which is stereoscopically viewed by the light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure which shows the appearance that the picture which is stereoscopically viewed by the light guide plate is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display performed using the light guide plate. It is a circuit diagram around the synchronous serial interface of the main control board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the connection between a serial-parallel conversion circuit and an LED. It is a figure which shows the arrangement on the main control board of a main control MPU and peripheral parts. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of a port in a main control MPU. It is a figure which shows the timing of the output and acquisition of data by a synchronous serial signal. It is a figure which shows another arrangement of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a figure which shows another arrangement of the main control board in a main control board box. It is a perspective view of a slot machine. It is a perspective view of the slot machine with the front member open. It is a block diagram which shows the structure of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operation members, etc. provided in a slot machine. It is a figure which shows the detail of the storage area provided by ROM, RAM and the like in this embodiment, and the ROM area. It is a figure which shows the detail of the RAM area in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the data stored in the area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is a figure which shows the detail of the parameter information setting area of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the system reset start process which is executed when a slot machine is reset. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a periodic process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of information signal N output processing. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a game board. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of a character accessory. It is a perspective view which shows the shape of a snowman accessory, (A) is a view from the front, (B) is a view seen from the rear. It is an exploded perspective view of a character accessory. It is the figure which looked at the cover member of a character accessory from the back side. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory board of a character accessory. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory substrate in the cover member of a character accessory, and shows the back side side of the character accessory substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship between a light emitting body and a transmissive portion and a non-transmissive portion of a cover member in a character accessory. It is a figure which shows an example of the light guide member which diffuses the light from a light emitting body in a character accessory. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of modification 1, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate. It is a figure explaining the positional relationship between a light emitting body and a transmissive portion and a non-transmissive portion of a cover member in a character accessory of a modified example. It is a figure which shows the front side of the character accessory substrate of the character accessory of the modification 2, and shows the state which the character accessory substrate and the light guide member overlap. It is a figure which shows the state which accommodated the character accessory substrate in the cover member of the character accessory of modification 2, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate. It is a figure which shows the state which attached the character accessory of the modification 2 to a game board. It is a figure which shows the cross-sectional view of a snowman accessory. It is a figure which shows the front side cover member of a snowman accessory. It is a figure which shows the back side cover member of a snowman accessory. It is a figure which shows the front side of the snowman substrate of a snowman accessory. It is a figure which shows the back side side of the snowman substrate of a snowman accessory. It is the figure which looked at the horizontal cross section of a snowman accessory from the top. It is the figure which looked at the cross section in the horizontal direction of a snowman accessory in a modification from the top. It is a functional block diagram explaining the structure and outline of the function for executing an effect control. It is a figure which shows an example of effect block data, scheduler data and effect device drive data, (A) shows effect block data, (B) shows scheduler data, (C) shows effect device drive data. It is a figure which shows an example of the module structure in the peripheral control part of a game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the basic concept of production control in a game machine. It is a figure explaining the structure until the data necessary for the production control of a game machine is acquired. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal drawing effect of a step-up notice. It is a figure explaining the flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of a sound module. It is explanatory drawing which shows the function of a lamp module. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of the sequence control in the effect control of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the function of a lamp and a sound in the production control of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the function such as a sound and a motor in the production control of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a scheduler definition. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation of the accessory controlled by using the scheduler data. It is a figure which shows the execution timing of the advance notice effect which is executed in a series of fluctuation display from the change start to stop of a special symbol, and shows an example of the scheduler and the scheduler data used. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" which controls lighting and blinking of a lamp in a step-up notice. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" which controls a lamp in a button cut-in notice. It is a figure explaining the overall flow in the star accessory notice, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" that controls the left star accessory. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" which controls a right star accessory in a star accessory notice. It is a figure explaining the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" which controls a middle star accessory in a star accessory notice. It is a figure explaining the content of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" which controls a motor in the logo accessory fall notice. It is a drawing explaining the scheduler data which is executed when the power of a game machine is turned on. It is a figure explaining the configuration for processing a command and scheduler data in the peripheral control board of a game machine, and the relationship between these configurations. It is a figure explaining the process of executing scheduler data at the time of power-on. It is a figure which shows an example of the advance notice effect in a series of variation display from the change start to stop of a special symbol, (A) is the effect executed from the change start to the end, and the scheduler data for executing the effect. And the scheduler to be executed, (B) is a figure explaining the position of the hatchet accessory in the hatchet accessory fall notice. It is a figure explaining the content of the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" which controls a motor in the button hatchet first half fall notice which is the first half part of the hatchet accessory fall notice. It is a figure explaining the first half of the hatchet second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which controls a motor in the hatchet second half fall notice which is the latter half of the hatchet fall notice. It is a figure explaining the latter half of the hatchet character latter half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" which controls a motor in the hatchet character second half fall notice which is the latter half part of the hatchet character fall notice. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal display block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command. It is a figure explaining the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern which stores the combination of the liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variation pattern command. It is a figure explaining the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern which stores the combination of the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command. It is a figure explaining the outline of the effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern "10H03H" in this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a sub-effect block data control update process. It is a figure explaining the procedure of executing the advance notice effect in the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern "10H03H", (A) is the timing to execute the advance notice effect and the execution time of the advance notice effect, and (B) is execution of the advance notice effect. The scheduler data driven by each scheduler is shown. It is a figure explaining the relationship between the liquid crystal display block data for each variation pattern, and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern. It is a figure which shows the image which creates the drawing data file in the step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) by the image composition / motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for liquid crystal display. It is a figure explaining the structure of the effect block data of a step-up notice, (A) shows the structure of a step-up notice liquid crystal display block data, and (B) shows the structure of a step-up notice sub-effect block data. It is a figure explaining an example of the effect control based on the effect block data of a modification, (A) is an example of effect block data, (B) is a figure explaining the execution timing of each scheduler data. It is a figure which shows an example of the scheduler function for liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal display. It is a figure which shows an example of the parameter for the scheduler function for liquid crystal display. It is a flowchart of the initialization process of another Example 5. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the initialization process of another example 5 of FIG. 339. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing of another Example 5. It is a figure explaining an example of winning information transmitted from a main control board to a ball information control board. It is a figure explaining an example of the table which defines the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning opening. It is a figure which shows the example when the number of prize balls is included in the prize information, (A) is totaling the number of prizes for each general prize opening, (B) is totaling the general prizes and totaling the number of prizes. The case. It is a figure which shows the example which stored the winning information in the order of winning. It is a figure which shows an example of the game information transmitted from a main control board to a ball information control board, (A) is an example of a prize information, (B) is an example of a main control recognition information. It is a figure which shows another example of the game information which is transmitted from the main control board to the ball information control board. It is a figure explaining the communication between a main control board and a ball information control board at the time of starting a game machine. It is a figure which shows the case where there is no response from a sphere information control board in response to a notification from a main control board in communication between a main control board and a sphere information control board. It is a figure which shows another example when there is no response from a sphere information control board in response to a notification from a main control board in communication between a main control board and a sphere information control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the storage area allocated to the main control built-in RAM in game control. It is a figure which shows an example of the data area included in the input information storage area, (A) shows input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), (B) shows a prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the switch input process which acquires the information detected by the sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining the procedure of the big prize opening opening processing. It is a timing chart explaining the processing of each configuration when a game ball wins a prize in a big winning opening. It is a timing chart explaining the processing of each configuration when a game ball wins a prize in a second start opening. It is a timing chart explaining the processing of each configuration when a game ball wins a prize in a probability variation area (V-AT area). It is a figure explaining the outline of a bit transfer procedure. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the instruction code for executing a bit transfer instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of the kind of a bit transfer instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of the flowchart of the process which uses a bit transfer instruction "RBT". It is a figure which shows an example of the program corresponding to the flowchart (FIG. 361) of the process which uses a bit transfer instruction "RBT". It is an example of a flowchart in which the index creation process is made into a subroutine, (A) is a process of a caller of the index creation process, and (B) is a subroutine-like index creation process. It is a figure explaining an example of a table structure. It is a figure explaining the detailed procedure of a bit transfer instruction, and is the figure explaining the case of reading a single data from a reference table. It is a figure explaining the detailed procedure of a bit transfer instruction, and is the figure explaining the case where data is continuously read from a reference table. It is a figure explaining the bit transfer instruction for the data larger than 1 byte, (A) is the figure which shows the table to refer to, and (B) is the figure which explains the procedure. It is a figure explaining the application example of a bit transfer instruction, (A) is a figure explaining the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the corresponding range, (B) is the program code which shows the fluctuation pattern table, (C) is (B). It is a figure explaining an example of the structure of the table before compression and the table after compression about the corresponding variation pattern table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure for selecting a variation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the program which selects a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows an example of the address map which shows the structure of the storage area of the main control board of a game machine. It is a figure which shows the program implementation example of the processing address table which stores the address of processing (subroutine). It is a figure which shows an example of the program code which defines the index which identifies the process which is stored in the address stored in the process address table. It is a figure explaining the operation at the time of executing an INVD instruction. It is a figure explaining the procedure of specifying the process to be called by an INVD instruction. It is a figure which shows the program example of the port read processing (PORT_RD). It is a figure which shows the program example of the data setting process (DAT_SET). It is a figure which shows the program example of the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD). It is a figure which shows the program example of the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL). It is a figure which shows the program example of the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL). It is a figure which shows the program example of the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET), command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and command storage process (COM_SET). It is a figure which shows the program example of the output determination common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1). It is a figure which shows the program example of the output determination common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2). It is a figure which shows the program example of the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET). It is a figure which shows the program example of the variation information number search processing (TI_SRH). It is a figure which shows the program example of fraudulent notification setting processing (ILG_OUTSET). It is a figure which shows the program example of the data search process (HLA_SRCH). It is a figure which shows the program example of the multiplication value addition address acquisition processing (MUL_WA_HL). It is a figure which shows the program example of SPI2 byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA). It is the figure which excerpted a part of the program which calls a process by an INVS instruction, (A) is a program excerpted part which calls a solenoid drive process and a motor drive process, (B) is a program example of a solenoid drive process (1). Part) and (C) show a program example (part) of the motor drive processing. It is a figure explaining the procedure of an INVI instruction. It is a figure which shows an example of PSW, (A) is the structure of PSW, (B) is the description of each structure. It is a figure which shows the program example explaining the arrangement of the process called by an INVI instruction, (A) shows the program example of the area to read the process, and (B) shows the program example of the substance of a process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a timer interrupt process using various process call instructions. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing. This is an example of the program code for processing when the game is stopped in timer interrupt processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory map of the area about a program / data in the ROM area of the main control board of a game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select). It is a figure which shows an example of the mounting drawing of the main control board of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram of the structure for performing SPI communication to the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the operation mode of SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining the structure of various registers for setting SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment, (A) is control register 1 (SPICNA0), (B) is control register 2 (SPICNA1), (C ) Are prescaler registers (SPICPSA0, SPICPSA1, SPIPPSA2, SPICPSA3). It is a time chart which shows the state from the initialization of the gaming machine of this embodiment to the start of SPI communication. It is a figure explaining the structure of the SPI communication B buffer register in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) at the time of SPI common output of this embodiment. It is a circuit diagram centering on the structure for receiving a signal by SPI communication in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the switch input process which acquires the information detected by the sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of the switch input process of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 407. This is an example of the program code of the setting data (setting data at the time of SPI input; SPI_SWRX_B) at the time of starting the reception of the input signal by the SPI communication of the present embodiment. This is an example of the program code of the setting data (SPI restart setting data; SPI_RESTART_B) when initializing the communication circuit of the SPI communication of the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of SPI switch input information data of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the structure of the area which stores the level data and edge data of this embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 412. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the level edge data creation processing of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the program code of the level edge data creation processing of this embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 414. It is a time chart which shows the process from the start of the switch input process of this embodiment to the completion of data transmission by SPI communication in chronological order. It is a time chart which shows the process from the completion of data transmission by SPI communication to the start of a switch input process by the next timer interrupt in the switch input process of this embodiment in chronological order.

The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 9. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a plan view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame 3 opened from the main body frame and the main body frame 4 opened from the outer frame 2. FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into the door frame 3, the game board 5, the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and viewed from the front. FIG. 9 shows the pachinko machine as the door frame 3, the game board 5, It is an exploded perspective view which was disassembled into the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 and seen from the back.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and can be visually recognized from the player side through the door frame 3. It is provided with a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 which are vertically separated and extend to the left and right, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are connected to each other at both ends of the 20 and extend vertically, are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front and rear. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

Further, the outer frame 2 is attached to the curtain plate member 50 which connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in the front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a square outer shape in front view and having through openings 111 penetrating the front and rear, and a game attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100. A plate unit 200 having an upper plate 201 and a lower plate 202 capable of storing balls, a top unit 350 attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and a left side attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The unit 400, the right side unit 450 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100, and the game ball attached to the lower right part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 through the plate unit 200 and stored in the upper plate 201. The handle unit 500 that can be operated by the player to drive the door frame 5 into the game area, and the plate unit 200 that receives the game ball that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and fails to hit into the game area. A foul cover unit 520 that discharges to the lower plate 202, a ball feed unit 540 that is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the door frame base unit 100 and for sending the game ball of the upper plate 201 to the ball launcher 680, and a door frame base unit 100. It includes a glass unit 560 that is attached to the rear surface and closes the through hole 111, and a security cover 580 that covers the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 560.

The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 and a main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70, respectively, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 are attached. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4 attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base when viewed from the front. , And the locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the reverse L that is attached to the rear side along the front view upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out the game ball to the player side. A character-shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. It is provided with a back cover 980 that covers the rear side.

Inside the back cover 980, a main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game performed by the pachinko machine 1 is provided. The main control unit 1300 is provided with an accessory ratio indicator 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by the liquid crystal display device. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be provided not in the main control unit 1300 but in the payout control board unit 950.

Further, the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244 may display the accessory ratio without separately providing a display device for displaying the accessory ratio. In this case, if the accessory ratio is constantly displayed on any of the liquid crystal displays 1600, 3114, and 244, the accessory ratio can be notified to the player, and the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine.

As will be described later, the bonus ball ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of bonus balls acquired by the total number of balls acquired. Since it has been obtained, it can be said that it is in good condition. On the other hand, a pachinko machine with a low value of the accessory ratio (for example, 10%) has few jackpot games and few prize balls during the jackpot, so it can be said that the pachinko machine is not in good condition. Therefore, the player can select the pachinko machine to play in consideration of the numerical value of the accessory ratio.

As a mode for notifying the player of the accessory ratio, the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the numerical value is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the numerical value is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in green. do. The numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in such a manner that it is not mistaken for a decorative pattern. For example, it may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the display position of the decorative symbol when it does not fluctuate, or the size of the number indicating the accessory ratio may be smaller than that of the decorative symbol. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, the player may be notified of the accessory ratio by changing the mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the numerical value of the accessory ratio. For example, when the accessory ratio is 70% or more, the decorative pattern is displayed in red and the frame lamp is lit or blinking in red, and when it is 69% to 30%, the decorative pattern is displayed in green and the frame lamp is lit in green. Or flashes. The display mode may be divided into any number of stages.

Further, it may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 provided in the door frame 3. At that time, the above-mentioned display mode may be changed, or the display may be performed together with other information as well as the accessory ratio. Other information includes the number of big hits, the number of consecutive big hits (so-called number of consecutive chans), the number of balls held, and the remaining balance.

Further, not only the accessory ratio but also the continuous accessory ratio and the base value, which will be described later, may be displayed in different modes as described above. The display mode of the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the base value may be changed.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is enclosed in a transparent resin main control board box 1320 sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed, and is arranged on the printed circuit board. You can see the parts that have been made from the outside. Further, for example, when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, the main control unit 1300 can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided in the main control unit 1300 is pachinko. It can be seen from the back side of the machine 1. By enclosing the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in the main control board box 1320, it is possible to prevent unauthorized modification of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 to make the pachinko machine 1 look low in gambling, and the pachinko machine 1 is accurate. Can display gambling.

When the back cover 980 is made of opaque resin, pachinko can be made by making a hole in the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 or by making the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 transparent. The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be viewed from the back side of the machine 1.

Further, even when the back cover 980 is made of a transparent resin, by forming the surface of the back cover 980 at the position of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 flat or by forming the back cover 980 thinly, the accessory ratio indicator is formed. The ratio display 1317 may be easily seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

Below the back surface of the pachinko machine 1, there is provided a discharge port for collecting game balls that have flowed out of the game area 5a via the out ports 1111 and winning ports 2001, 2005, 2006, etc., and discharging them to the outside of the pachinko machine 1. ing. The game balls discharged from the discharge port are supplied to the ball tank 802 through the island equipment. The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a discharge ball sensor 3060 that detects a game ball discharged from the discharge port.

As shown in FIG. 13, the main control unit 1300 is provided with a display switch 1318. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole through which the display switch 1318 can be operated. It is preferable to indicate on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the main control board box 1320 that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio (printing, engraving, sticker, etc.). It is desirable that the display switch 1318 is provided near the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, the effect control board 4700). , Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. It may be provided on the peripheral control unit 1500, the relay board provided separately from the main control unit 1300, the power supply board in the power supply board box 930 on the frame side, or the payout control board unit 950. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the upper part of the inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from island equipment that is not shown in a box shape, and a game ball that is attached to the payout unit base 801 under the ball tank 802 and the game balls in the ball tank 802 are viewed to the left in the front view. A tank rail 803 extending to the left and right to guide, a ball guiding unit 820 attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the front view of the payout unit base 801 and guiding the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a serpentine manner, and a ball guiding unit 820. The game ball, which is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guide unit 820, is instructed from the payout control board 951 (see FIG. 17) housed in the payout control board unit 950. Based on this, the payout device 830 and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are guided downward, and the storage state of the game balls in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. From the upper full tank path unit 850 that discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port or the full tank discharge port according to the situation, and from the normal discharge port of the upper full tank path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the payout unit base 801. The released game ball is guided forward and guided from the front end to the through ball passage 526 of the door frame 3. The normal guide path and the game ball released from the full tank discharge port are guided forward and the door frame 3 is guided from the front end. It is provided with a lower full tank path unit 860 having a full tank guide path for guiding to the full tank receiver 530.

The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 is mounted on the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side of the front view of the board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and the speaker for bass inside. The speaker unit 920 having 921, the power supply board box 930 mounted on the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodating the power supply board inside, and the power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920 and inside. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 which is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball are housed therein. It includes a payout control board unit 950.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game ball is hit, and the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 is placed on the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 to guide the player, a flat plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, and a game panel 1100. It has a box-shaped board holder 1200 attached to the lower part on the rear side and opened upward, and a main control board 1310 attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 to control the game of the pachinko machine 1. A table unit having a main control unit 1300 and a plurality of winning openings mounted in the game area 5a on the front side of the game panel 1100 and capable of receiving a game ball driven into the game area 5a (not shown). ), And a back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 on the upper side of the board holder 1200.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle lever 504 with the game balls stored in the upper plate 201, the ball launcher 680 plays the game with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle lever 504. The ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls driven into the game area 5a are received in a winning opening (not shown), a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 by the payout device 830 according to the received winning openings. .. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall configuration of the game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front right, FIG. 12 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the front left, and FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 14 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 16 is a front view of the front component and the front unit of the game board cut at substantially the center in the front-rear direction in the game area.

The game board 5 of the present embodiment has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by a player operating the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 to be partitioned, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 by driving the game ball into the game area 5a. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 17) that controls the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a (not shown).

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of 1100, main liquid crystal display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and mounted on the front of the game panel 1100. The front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 that is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that game balls driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are played at different positions in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002, which is always open so that the ball can be received, the gate portion 2003, which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. The second start port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery, and the first special, which is drawn by accepting the game balls to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first major winning opening 2005 and a second major winning opening 2006, which can accept game balls according to the lottery result or the second special lottery result. The second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which the game balls are distributed (Fig.). 16).

Further, the front unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

The back unit 3000 is arranged in a box-shaped back box 3010 which is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has an open front and has a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, and a predetermined position in the back box 3010. A plurality of general winning opening sensors 3015 for detecting game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 of the cage front unit 2000, and a lock for detachably attaching the main liquid crystal display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010. The mechanism 3020, the right ball passage unit 3030 for discharging the game balls received in the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the center accessory 2500, which are attached to the right end of the front view in the back box 3010. A lower right ball passage unit that is installed near the front end of the lower right corner of the front view inside the back box 3010 and for discharging the game balls received in the second major winning opening 2006 and the second out opening 2543c of the center accessory 2500. It is equipped with 3035.

Further, the back unit 3000 is rotatably attached to the upper relay board 3040 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, the upper relay board cover 3041 covering the rear side of the upper relay board 3040, and the rear surface of the back box 3010. The box-shaped effect drive board box 3042, the effect drive board 3043 housed in the effect drive board box 3042, the panel relay board 3044 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010, and the panel relay board 3044. It includes a panel relay board cover 3045 that covers the rear side.

Further, the back unit 3000 is a back left middle decorative unit 3050 attached upward from the center in the vertical direction on the left side side of the front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and the back unit 3000 below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back bottom rear movable production unit 3100 mounted near the rear wall of the box 3010, the back top left movable production unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010 and on the left side of the front view, and the back box. The back left movable effect unit 3300 installed on the left side of the front view of the opening 3010a in 3010, and the back top middle mounted from the center in the left-right direction to the right end of the front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. It includes a movable effect unit 3400 and a back lower front movable effect unit 3500 attached in front of the back lower rear movable effect unit 3100 below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

[2-1. Front component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the outer circumference of the game area 5a is divided by the inner circumference of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with a game ball that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

On the back surface side of the game board 5 near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 (preferably immediately after passing through the backflow prevention member 1007), a launch ball sensor 1020 for detecting the game ball driven into the game area 5a is provided. For example, the launch ball sensor 1020 is composed of a magnetic sensor, and when it detects a game ball that has passed through the backflow prevention member 1007 and has flowed into the game area 5a, it outputs a signal. The launch ball sensor 1020 may be provided at a position in the game area where the game ball always passes. By fixing the position of the launch ball sensor 1020 on the game board 5, the specifications can be standardized among a plurality of models, and the inspection at the manufacturing site and the inspection after installation in the hall become easy.

Further, the launch ball sensor 1020 provided upstream of the game area 5a such as near the exits of the rails 1001 and 1002 detects the out ball before the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball. That is, since the game balls are detected in the order of the out balls and the prize balls, the prize balls caused by the game balls that are not counted as the out balls are not detected, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

[2-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 and 15. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 which is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface. The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed with an out port 1111 penetrating back and forth at the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction and for mounting the table unit 2000.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 holds the panel plate 1110 detachably from the rear side. Further, the panel holder 1120 is formed with a plurality of mounting holes and positioning holes for mounting the back unit 3000 on the rear surface.

When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, the out port 1111 of the panel plate 1110 is opened on the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component 1000. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1111 by the out guide unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111.

[2-3. Board holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. When assembled on the game board 5, the board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below. As a result, all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1111 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received and formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged unit 1201 (see FIG. 14).

[2-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 15 and 17. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 that controls game contents, payout of game balls, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. ..

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

[2-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. This function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 1). The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of one LED for displaying the game status, and two LEDs based on the result of a normal lottery drawn by the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display that displays these two LEDs in a lighting mode according to the normal lottery result after the normal symbol is variablely displayed by controlling blinking, and a variable display of the normal symbol related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003. Of these, a normal hold indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of holds, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the acceptance of game balls into the first starting port 2002 (starting prize). By controlling the blinking of eight LEDs based on the result of the first special lottery drawn by (occurrence), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and then these eight LEDs are displayed in a lighting mode according to the result of the first special lottery. Among the fluctuation display of the first special symbol and the fluctuation display of the first special symbol related to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002, the number of pending numbers, which is the number of fluctuation displays for which the start condition of the fluctuation display has not yet been satisfied. Eight LEDs blink based on the first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs to display and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball to the second starting port 2004 (occurrence of starting prize). A second special symbol display that displays these eight LEDs in a lighting mode according to the result of the second special lottery after variable display of the second special symbol by control, and acceptance of a game ball into the second starting port 2004. The second special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds, which is the number of change displays for which the start condition of the change display has not yet been satisfied, and the first special When the lottery result or the second special lottery result is "big hit" etc., a round indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. And, mainly equipped. A part of the display (for example, the first special symbol display) of the function display unit 1400 may be composed of a 7-segment LED.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[2-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 15. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 17) that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. It is equipped with a box 1520. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, etc., and a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 for controlling the effect image (FIG. 17). reference).

[2-7. Main liquid crystal display device]
Next, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 16. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 is a full-color display device backed by a white LED, and can display a still image or a moving image.

As shown in FIGS. 14 and 15, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 projecting outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece projecting outward from the right side surface in front view. It is equipped with 1602. The main liquid crystal display device 1600 has two fixing grooves 3010c opened on the left inner peripheral surface of the front view in the frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion of the back box 3010, which will be described later, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 diagonally from the rear of the box 3010, move the right fixing piece 1602 side forward, insert the right fixing piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and lower the lock mechanism 3020. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to.

[2-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10 to 12 and 14 to 16. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. It protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110. The table unit 2000 of the present embodiment has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open and can accept game balls driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are in the game area 5a. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions, the gate portion 2003, which is installed at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is a gate. A lottery is made by accepting game balls into the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which enables the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing through the section 2003. It is provided with a first special winning opening 2005 and a second special winning opening 2006 that can accept game balls depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

Three (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a, and the remaining one is arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111. The gate portion 2003 is arranged in the game area 5a at the upper right of the front view and substantially directly below the abutment portion 1006. The second starting port 2004 is arranged on the right side of the front view from directly below the gate portion 2003. Of the plurality of general winning openings 2001 described above, the general winning openings 2001 arranged in the vicinity of the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a are arranged directly above the second starting opening 2004. The first big winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1111. The second major winning opening 2006 is arranged on the right side of the front view of the first starting opening 2002 and above the first winning opening 2005.

As shown in FIG. 16, the second major winning opening 2006 in the table unit 2000 includes the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged along one flow path through which the game balls circulate. It is composed of. In the second major winning opening 2006, the second upper winning opening 2006a is arranged near the lower right of the front view in the game area 5a, and the second lower winning opening 2006b is the front view of the second upper winning opening 2006a. It is located below on the left side.

Further, the front unit 2000 is started with a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1111 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has a first start port 2002 and a first prize winning port 2005. It is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the mouth unit 2100, and is mounted above the left end of the front view of the side unit lower 2200 having three general winning openings 2001 and the side unit lower 2200. A frame-shaped frame that is mounted on the side unit 2300 and substantially in the center of the game area 5a and has one general winning opening 2001, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a second large winning opening 2006. It is equipped with a center accessory 2500.

[2-8a. Starting port unit]
Next, the start port unit 2100 of the table unit 2000 will be described. The start port unit 2100 is arranged in the game area 5a near the lower end portion in the center in the left-right direction and directly above the out port 1111, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 and a first winning opening 2005.

The starting port unit 2100 is a flat plate-shaped unit base 2101 having a first large winning opening 2005 that is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and has a rectangular shape extending to the left and right and penetrates back and forth, and the first unit base 2101. The ball receiving portion 2102, which protrudes forward from the upper part of the center in the left-right direction to form the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port, which is attached to the rear side of the unit base 2101, above the large winning opening 2005. The ball guiding unit 2103 that guides the game ball received in 2002 downward, the first starting port sensor 2104 that is attached to the ball guiding unit 2103 and detects the game ball received in the first starting port 2002, and the first It includes a first attacker unit 2110 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the big winning opening 2005.

The first attacker unit 2110 of the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the rear surface of the unit base 2101 so as to close the first winning opening 2005 from the rear, and the front end is opened forward with approximately the same size as the first winning opening 2005. The box-shaped unit case 2111 and the first prize opening 2005 can be opened and closed. The member 2112, the first attacker solenoid 2113 installed in the unit case 2111 and driving the opening and closing of the door member 2112, and the first large winning opening 2005 installed in the unit case 2111. The first big winning opening sensor 2114 that detects the game ball, the first starting opening sensor 2104, the first attacker solenoid, and the first big winning opening sensor 2114 and the main control board 1310 that are mounted on the upper surface of the unit case 2111. It is provided with a start port unit relay board 2115 that relays the connection with the device, and a start port unit decoration board (not shown) that is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 and is attached to the lower part of the unit case 2111 to illuminate the first prize opening 2005. ing.

The ball receiving portion 2102 forming the first starting port 2002 is opened upward with a size capable of receiving only one game ball at a time. The first large winning opening 2005 penetrating the unit base 2101 opens forward in a size capable of accepting a plurality of game balls (for example, 4 to 6) at a time.

In the starting port unit 2100, the first starting port 2002 formed by the ball receiving portion 2102 opens upward, and the game ball received in the first starting port 2002 is unit-based by the ball guiding unit 2103. It can be guided downward on the rear side of 2101, detected by the first start port sensor 2104, and then discharged downward through the first attacker unit 2110. In the present embodiment, two first start port sensors 2104 are provided, and on the main control board 1310, when the two first start port sensors 2104 detect a game ball within a predetermined time range, the first start port sensor 2104 is provided. It is determined that the game ball was accepted in 2002. Thereby, it is possible to detect an illegal act due to an illegal insertion of a tool into the first starting port 2002.

In the start port unit 2100, by attaching the first attacker unit 2110 to the rear surface of the unit base 2101, the first prize opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 is opened to the unit base 2101. It is inserted into the mouth 2005 from behind to close the first prize opening 2005. In the upright state where the first prize opening door member 2112 is closed, the left and right ends of the lower side are rotatably attached by the unit case 2111, and the upper side is forward and By rotating the door so as to move downward, the first prize opening 2005 can be changed from the closed state to the open state.

The first large winning opening door member 2112 of the first attacker unit 2110 stands upright in a normal state (a state in which the first attacker solenoid 2113 is not energized) and closes the first large winning opening 2005. Then, when the first attacker solenoid 2113 is energized according to the gaming state, the first large winning opening door member 2112 rotates so that the upper side moves forward and downward, and the upper side moves slightly above the lower side. It will be in the positioned state. That is, the first grand prize opening door member 2112 is in a state of being inclined so as to be higher from the lower side of the first grand prize opening 2005 toward the front.

In this state, when the game ball flows down in front of the first prize opening 2005 and comes into contact with the first prize opening door member 2112, the distribution direction of the game ball is from below due to the inclination of the first prize opening door member 2112. It changes to the rear and is accepted by the first prize opening 2005 and enters the unit case 2111. Then, the game ball received in the first prize opening 2005 is discharged downward from the lower surface of the unit case 2111 after being detected by the first prize opening sensor 2114.

[3. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 951 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effect devices during a game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 and a precision liquid crystal display based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the display of the effect image on the display device 244 or the like. The payout control board 951 includes a payout control unit 952 that controls payout of the game ball and the like, and a launch control unit 953 that controls the launch of the game ball by the rotation operation of the handle lever 504.

[3-1. Main control board]
The main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 1311 that is a microprocessor in which a ROM 1313 that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM 1312 that temporarily stores data, and the like are built, and an input / output device (I). / O device) main control I / O port 1314, main control input circuit 1315 to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, main control solenoid drive circuit 1316 for driving various solenoids, and main control It is provided with a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the MPU 1311. In addition to its built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU 1311 also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 2104 that detects a game ball received in the first start port 2002 and a second start port sensor that detects a game ball received in the second start port 2004. 2551 The first big winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening 2006a as the second big winning opening 2006, and the second upper winning opening sensor 2554 that detects the game ball received in the second lower big winning opening 2006b. Detection signals from the second lower prize opening sensor 2557, the ejection ball sensor 3060, the launch ball sensor 1020, the magnetic detection sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, etc. are transmitted via the main control I / O port 1314, respectively. Is entered.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port 1314 to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2550, the first attacker solenoid 2113, and the second upper attacker A drive signal is output to the solenoid 2553 and the second lower attacker solenoid 2556, and the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display, and the first special symbol memory of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control I / O port 1314. A drive signal is output to a display, a second special symbol storage display, a normal symbol display, a normal symbol storage display, a game status display, a round display, and the like.

In this embodiment, the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, the gate sensor 2547, the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening The sensor 2557 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, whereas the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 2104 and the second start port sensor 2551, Also, the detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 2547 frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 2104, the second start port sensor 2551, and the gate sensor 2547. In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 are opened (or expanded), and the game ball is frequently played. In order to enter the ball, the detection of the game ball by the first large winning opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also frequently occurs. For this reason, the first grand prize opening sensor 2114, the second upper winning opening sensor 2554, and the second lower winning opening sensor 2557 also use proximity switches with high durability and long life. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3015 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3015 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 951, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951. Or Further, the main control MPU 1311 sends various commands related to the control of the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the like and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. It may be transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511. When the main control MPU 1311 receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board in the power supply board box 930. The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. To do.) With this capacitor, the main control MPU 1311 can store various information in the RAM 1312 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM 1312. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 951.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the main control I / O port 1314, and is also output to the payout control board 951 and the like.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is attached to the main control board 1310 at a position visible from the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. The accessory ratio display 1317 displays the accessory ratio calculated by the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a display switch 1318. The display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, and the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration in the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 includes CPU 13111, RAM 1312, ROM 1313, random number generation circuit 13112, parallel input port 13113, serial communication circuit 13114, timer circuit 13115, interrupt controller 13116, external bus interface 13117, clock circuit 13118, collation block 13119, and unique. It has information 13120, arithmetic circuit 13121, and reset circuit 13122.

The CPU 13111 executes the program stored in the ROM 1313. The RAM 1312 stores data required when the program is executed.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with one or more random number generation circuits 13112. The random number generation circuit 13112 provides a random number for determining the lottery result of the result of the variable display game (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) and the effect content of the variable display game. The random number generation circuit 13112 is, for example, a so-called hard random number generation means that outputs a random number updated at the timing of the clock period (or a signal obtained by dividing the clock period) supplied to the main control MPU 1311. The hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is used for a lottery for winning a special symbol, a lottery for a winning symbol in a special symbol variation display game, and a lottery for winning a normal symbol.

The parallel input port 13113 is a port to which detection signals from various detection switches are input via the main control input circuit 1315.

The serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to and from the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits and receives various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to the payout of the game ball to and from the payout control board 951 via the main control I / O port 1314. Further, the serial communication circuit 13114 transmits data for displaying the accessory ratio to the accessory ratio display 1317. The detailed configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The timer circuit 13115 is a timer for timer interrupts and various time controls. The interrupt controller 13116 controls various interrupts (general interrupts, NMIs that cannot be masked by software) to the CPU 13111. That is, when the interrupt controller 13116 detects an interrupt, it refers to the processing address table defined for each type of interrupt and jumps to the address set in the processing address table.

The external bus interface 13117 is an interface for connecting the internal bus of the main control MPU 1311 to an external device. From the external bus interface 13117, I / O request (IORQ), read (RD), write (WR), 16-bit address (A0 to A15), and 8-bit data (D0 to D7) can be input and output.

The clock circuit 13118 generates the internal clock of the main control MPU 1311 from the input external clock signal (for example, 32 MHz). Further, the clock circuit 13118 divides the input clock signal by a set number and outputs the clock signal to the outside from the CLKO terminal. For example, the clock signal supplied to the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 28) of the accessory ratio display 1317 may be output.

The collation block 13119 is a functional block that collates the ROM 1313 with a predetermined code to see if it has been tampered with. The unique information 13120 is an ID unique to the main control MPU 1311 and is written in a non-rewritable manner when the chip is manufactured.

The arithmetic circuit 13121 provides an arithmetic function that does not depend on the program recorded in the ROM 1313. This arithmetic function is fixedly written at the time of manufacturing the chip.

The reset circuit 13122 has a non-designated running prohibition circuit, a watchdog timer, and a user reset function. When the CPU 13111 accesses an address other than the predetermined address of the ROM 1313, the non-designated travel prohibition circuit presumes that the access is by an illegal program and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The watchdog timer outputs a timeout signal when a predetermined timer time has elapsed, and resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311. The user reset function resets the operation of the main control MPU 1311 by the reset signal input to the SRST terminal.

FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing a detailed configuration of the arithmetic circuit 13121.

The calculation circuit 13121 provides a calculation function that does not depend on a program for the calculation result, and has a multiplication circuit 131211 and a division circuit 131215.

The multiplication circuit 131211 is an arithmetic circuit that multiplies two values of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 16 bits) and outputs a product of 32 bits, and converts an input value (multiplier, multiplicand) into a product by a multiplication function. Functions as an output conversion circuit.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a multiplier and a multiplicand of 16 bits or less in the multiplication input register A131212 and the multiplication input register B131213. The multiplication circuit 131211 reads the values stored in the two 16-bit multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 at predetermined timings, and stores the result of multiplying the two values in the multiplication result register 131214. The CPU 13111 acquires the multiplication result from the multiplication result register 131214. The process from writing the value to the multiplication input registers 131212 and 131213 to storing the calculation result in the multiplication result register 131214 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, one clock), and the CPU 13111 is configured to complete the multiplication input register 131212. , 131213, and after a predetermined number of clocks have elapsed, the multiplication result can be obtained by referring to the multiplication result register 131214.

The division circuit 131215 is an arithmetic circuit that outputs a quotient of 32 bits and a remainder of 32 bits by dividing a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits) by a divisor of a predetermined number of bits (for example, 32 bits). It functions as a conversion circuit that converts input values (divisors and divisors) into quotients and remainders by a function and outputs them.

The CPU 13111 of the main control MPU 1311 stores a division number of 32 bits or less in the division input register A131216, and stores a division of 32 bits or less in the division input register B131217. When the division circuit 131215 detects that a value is stored in both the two 32-bit division input registers 131216 and 131217, it reads the stored value at a predetermined timing and divides the divisor by the divisor to obtain the quotient. The division result register A131218 stores the remainder, and the division result register B131219 stores the remainder. Further, when the division circuit 131215 reads the value stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217, the read value may be erased and the register may be cleared. Further, the division circuit 131215 may read the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 at the timing when the start instruction is input, and store the division result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219. In this case, the values stored in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 do not have to be erased at the read timing. Further, the division input registers 131216 and 131217 may be able to overwrite the value even if the value is already stored (without clearing the stored value).

The CPU 13111 acquires the division result from the division result registers 131218 and 131219. The process from writing the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to storing the calculation result in the division result registers 131218 and 131219 is configured to be completed in a predetermined time (for example, 32 clocks), and the CPU 13111 is configured to complete the division input. The values can be stored in the registers 131216 and 131217, and after the predetermined number of clocks has elapsed, the quotient and the remainder can be obtained by referring to the division result registers 131218 and 131219, respectively.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as will be described later, a division process is required to calculate the base value, and the division executed by the CPU 13111 by the CPU 13111 is executed by a plurality of multiplications and subtractions, so that a considerable amount of time is required. This is the case. Therefore, it is difficult to execute the base calculation process for each timer interrupt process, and it is difficult to display the base value without delay. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, and the base value can be calculated multiple times in one timer interrupt process (see FIGS. 75 and 80). .. Further, since the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218, other processing can be executed. Base calculation processing during timer interrupt processing can be executed efficiently.

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the serial communication circuit 13114.

The serial communication circuit 13114 has four data transmission / reception circuits, and each data transmission / reception circuit transmits / receives data for one channel to / from a predetermined device. Note that FIG. 20 illustrates only the data transmission circuit, and the description of the data reception circuit (for example, one channel is implemented) will be omitted.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, as described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 has channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and a bonus ratio. Three channels of channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the display 1317 are used, and channel 3 is unused.

The serial communication circuit 13114 includes a data register 3141, a transmission data register 3142, a parity generation circuit 3143, a transmission shift register 3144, a command status register 3145, a communication setting register 3146, a transmission trigger setting level register 3147, a baud rate register 3148, and a baud rate generation circuit. It has 3149.

The data input from the CPU 13111 is stored in the data register 3141 and then stored in the transmission data register 3142. The transmission data register 3142 is composed of a FIFO having a predetermined capacity (for example, 64 bytes). The transmission data register 3142 adds an error detection code generated by the parity generation circuit 3143 for each data transmission unit to the data to be transmitted, and stores the error detection code in the transmission shift register 3144.

The baud rate generation circuit 3149 generates a transmission clock signal for transmitting data at a rate set in the baud rate register 3148 from the clock signal supplied from the clock circuit 13118. Then, the transmission shift register 3144 transmits data according to the transmission clock signal.

The command status register 3145 is a register referred to for confirming the transmission status.

The communication setting register 3146 stores commands for controlling data transmission. The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 stores a threshold value for controlling the amount of data in which the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. The baud rate register 3148 stores a baud rate setting for defining a data transmission rate. The communication setting register 3146, the transmission trigger setting level register 3147, and the baud rate register 3148 are set for each of the four channels as initial settings in step S28 of FIG.

Hereinafter, these settings will be described in detail. The communication format of each channel is set in the communication setting register. Specifically, the presence / absence of use of FIFO (FIFO mode, normal mode), the number of stop bit bits, and parity (whether parity is used, even parity, or odd parity) are set. For example, in channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510 and channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, the FIFO mode, stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1010B meaning even parity. Is set, and in the channel 2 used for communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the even-number display 1317, the FIFO mode, the stop bit = 1 bit, and 1 ××× 1000B meaning that parity is not used are set.

In the FIFO mode, data is transmitted using the FIFO of the transmit data register 3142. Further, since the gaming machine is in a noisy environment, it is desirable to set the parity when transmitting data to the outside of the main control board 1310 at high speed.

Since the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is mounted on the main control board 1310, it is less affected by noise as compared with communication with other boards via communication wires. Further, since the amount of data to be transmitted / received is small, the communication speed may be low, and there is little need to use parity. In addition, along the pattern of transmitting a signal between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 (for example, in the left-right and / or thickness direction of the signal line provided on the surface or inner layer of the printed circuit board). A ground pattern is provided on the layer adjacent to the ground pattern, and the noise superimposed on the signal transmission pattern can be reduced by the shielding effect of the ground pattern.

The transmission trigger setting level register 3147 determines the amount of data that the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 generates an interrupt. Specifically, when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is smaller than the set number of bytes, a predetermined bit of the status register corresponding to each channel is set. By determining the relevant bit in the status register, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a vacancy in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142, and it is possible to determine the transmission timing of the data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.

The bit in the status register can be used to determine whether the transmit FIFO has an abnormality. For example, even if data is not written to the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142 for a predetermined period, if the bit of the status register is not set, there is no free space in the FIFA of the transmission data register 3142, so that the transmission data register 3142 It may be determined that no data has been transmitted from the FIFA, and error processing (for example, error notification) may be executed.

The baud rate register 3148 determines the data transmission rate. For example, 19200 bps is set for channel 0 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, 1200 bps is set for channel 1 used for communication with the payout control board 951, and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is set. 1200 bps is set for the channel 2 used for communication with.

In this way, the transmission rate is changed according to the data transmitted in each channel. This is because the gaming ball is rolling inside the gaming machine, and the electronic circuit of the gaming machine is in an environment that is easily affected by noise. Therefore, the data is transmitted to the payout control board 951 at a low speed so that the data for controlling the ball ejection directly related to the profit given to the player is surely transmitted. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 transmits data at a high rate because the amount of data to be transmitted is large and has nothing to do with the exit of the ball. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 verifies whether the received command is abnormal, and when it is determined that the command is abnormal, the peripheral control board 1510 is not operated or abnormal processing (for example, communication error notification) is executed, and the command is executed. Request to resend. Then, when it is determined that the retransmitted command is normal, the state of the peripheral control board 1510 is restored by using the normal command. Therefore, in communication with the peripheral control board 1510, data can be transmitted at a high rate. Further, if the communication rate with the peripheral control board 1510 is lowered, the player can recognize the delay from the winning of the starting port to the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, which may reduce the interest.

Communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 can be performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) or at a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). good. Further, communication with the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is performed at a high rate (19200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the peripheral control board 1510) and a low rate (1200 bps, which is the data transmission rate with the payout control board 951). A rate between and may be adopted. This is because when the data transmission rate is increased, there is a possibility that other circuits may malfunction due to switching noise of the transistor of the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. On the other hand, even if an abnormality occurs in the transmitted data due to noise, the same data is retransmitted for each timer interrupt unless the transmitted data is updated, and if the retransmitted command is normal, the display content of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Is returned to normal, so it is not necessary to make the transmission rate extremely slow.

The command status register 3145 is a register that is referred to for confirming the transmission status. For example, each bit is defined as follows.
Bit 7: A flag indicating SnTC transmission completion, 0 indicating transmission in progress, and 1 indicating transmission completion. Bit 6: In SnTDBE normal mode (communication mode that does not use FIFO), it is a flag indicating transmission data emptyness, 0 indicates that it has not been transferred to the transmission shift register, and 1 indicates that it has been transferred to the transmission shift register. That is, when the data is transferred from the transmission data register 3142 to the transmission shift register 3144 and the transmission data is not stored in the transmission data register 3142, the data is set.

In the SnTFL FIFO mode, it is a flag indicating the transmission FIFO trigger level. 0 is the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is equal to or higher than the trigger level, and 1 is stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142. Indicates that the amount of transmitted data is less than the trigger level. That is, it is set when the amount of transmission data stored in the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142 is less than the number of bytes set in the transmission trigger level setting register. Therefore, at the time of communication in the FIFO mode, after confirming that the bit is 1, data is written to the FIFO of the transmission data register 3142.
Bits 5 to 2: Unused (fixed to 0)
Bit 1: A bit for clearing the SnTCL transmission buffer and break code transmission, emptying the transmission data, or setting the transmission FIFO trigger level (SnTFL), which is written from the outside. For example, when forcibly clearing the contents of the buffer, 1 is set in the relevant bit. More specifically, it is used when a command is written to the FIFO, but the transmission of the written command is stopped due to some reason (for example, an abnormality occurs). Even if bit 1 is set, the data in the transmission shift register is not cleared.

With the configuration described above, the serial communication circuit 13114 is capable of synchronous communication (asynchronous communication), but outputs a clock signal for synchronous communication (not shown). In this case, the clock signal supplied to the communication partner (driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317) is output from the serial communication circuit 13114 instead of the clock circuit 13118. Each transmission / reception circuit of the serial communication circuit 13114 may be capable of synchronous communication by setting at least one channel, and a serial communication circuit for pacing synchronization and a serial communication circuit for synchronous communication may be separately provided.

Further, although not shown, the serial communication circuit 13114 outputs a signal (LOAD) indicating a data acquisition timing used during synchronous communication.

[3-2. Payout control board]
Returning to FIG. 17, the description of the control configuration of the pachinko machine will be continued. Although detailed illustration of the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of the game ball is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to the payout, the launch control by the launch solenoid 682, and the ball by the ball feed solenoid 551 are performed. A launch control unit 953 that performs feed control, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, a ball tank 802, and a tank rail. The 803, the ball guidance unit 820, and the ball removing switch for discharging the game ball in the payout device 830 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 and starting the ball removing operation are provided.

[3-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 951 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the device 830, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 is input, and the ball burnout detection sensor 827 is paid out. The detection signals from the detection sensor 842 and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 are input.

The detection signals from the ball-out detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the blade rotation detection sensor 840 of the payout device 830 are input to the payout control input circuit and input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port. NS.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535 of the foul cover unit 520 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 to the payout motor 834 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal plate 784 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1. Of the signals output from the external terminal board 784, the signal generated by the main control board 1310 is output from the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. The signal generated by the main control board 1310 may be output from the external terminal board 784 without passing through the payout control board 951.

The error LED display is a segment display, and displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to display the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the payout device 830, and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, the blade). Based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the number "3" is displayed to notify that the payout blade and the game ball are engaged with each other in the payout passage of the payout device 830 and the payout blade is difficult to rotate). If there is, a "count switch error" is notified (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842), and the number "5" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that it is a "retry error" (specifically, it means that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and when the number "6" is displayed, it is "full tank". (Specifically, the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535), and the number "7" is displayed. When it is, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit), and the number "9" is displayed. Occasionally, it notifies that it is "in stock" (specifically, that the number of game balls that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined number).

The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port and input to the payout control MPU. Will be done. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls, and outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the display unit, and this signal is displayed on the display unit. It is entered and displayed.

[3-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 953, which performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 551, is not shown in detail, but is a launch control input to which detection signals from various detection switches related to launch are input. A circuit, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching a game ball toward the game region 5a based on this clock signal, and this launch reference pulse. A launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 682 based on the above, and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 551 based on the launch reference pulse are provided. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. A ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number is generated and output to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 500, a contact detection sensor 509 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle lever 504, and a stop that detects whether or not the launch of the game ball is forcibly stopped by the player's will. The detection signal from the button is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle operation sensor 507 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle lever 504 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle operation sensor 507, the launch reference pulse inputs the drive current for launching the game ball toward the game area 5a with the launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle lever 504. When this is done, the output is output to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 551 when the ball feed reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is balled. One ball is received in the feed unit 540, and when the input of the ball feed reference pulse is completed, the received game ball is sent to the ball launcher 680 side by stopping the output of the constant current. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 682 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 551 is controlled to be constant. ing.

The power supply board that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 951 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 951.

[3-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 17, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and a main liquid crystal display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. , A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

[3-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing the above and a sound ROM for storing sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the game board. The game board side drive data for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating the various effect units provided in 5 is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to the effect drive board 3043, or the door. Door-side drive data for outputting drive signals to electrical drive sources such as the vibration exciter 242 provided in the frame 3 and the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, and the collar provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to an LED or the like, and door-side drive light emission data composed of the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port to the door frame 3 side Control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or the precision liquid crystal display device 244 can be transmitted from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. In addition, a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from the various position detection sensors for detecting the positions of the various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. .. Further, the detection signals from the touch panel 246 of the effect operation unit 220 provided on the door frame 3 and the effect button pressing sensor 258 are input to the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, and the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and music and music according to various effects from the speaker 921 and the like provided on the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and the like. Control so that sound effects etc. flow. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box 1520 in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the sound signal as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or By sending 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has the built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, a plurality of commands different from the initial data, the door frame side lighting / blinking command, the game board side lighting / blinking command, the movable body drive command, and the display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board 3043 attached to the rear surface of the back box. In this embodiment, the bit rate is set to 250 kbps.

The effect drive board 3043 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting / blinking command to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or receives a game board side lighting / blinking command. A lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the above is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the effect drive board 3043 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the vibration device 242 provided in the door frame 3, the lower right drive motor 272 of the door, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[3-3b. Various control processes of the peripheral control unit]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 60. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 17 performs a power-on processing of the peripheral control unit as shown in FIG. 60. When the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting processing under the control of the peripheral control MPU (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the effect control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining a hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, and the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands and pachinko related to control of game production output from the main control board 1310. It is in a state where various commands such as commands related to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the effect control program performs the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC control unit, and the calendar information storage unit is stored in the peripheral control RAM as the current calendar information. At the same time, it is set in the time information storage unit as the current time information.

Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is set to a value of 0 when is not executed. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V-blank signal indicating that screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input, which will be described later. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG.

Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed, the value 1 is first set in the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Following step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to a value of 1, and the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the effect control program performs lamp data output processing (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. 119. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller of the peripheral control MPU is used to continuously transmit the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

Following step S1012, the effect control program performs the effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the operation of the operation button 220C based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220, etc. Based on the various information obtained from the above, the presence / absence of operation of the operation button 220C is monitored, and it is appropriately determined whether or not the operation state of the operation button 220C is reflected in the game effect.

Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, the sound source built-in VDP displays the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP in the display data creation process described later by the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side. Output to the decorative substrate 233. As a result, various screens are drawn on the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side.

Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP in the sound data creation process described later to the speaker 921, and notifies the speaker 921 in addition to the music and sound effects. Sound data of sound and notification sound is output to speaker 921.

Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the peripheral control RAM. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is output to the sound source built-in VDP among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. Update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which light emission data from the first light emission data to be the light emission mode of various LEDs among the light emission data arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. , Update the pointer.

In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound command data for instructing the sound data of the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in the time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation. The pointer is updated to indicate the number of sound command data to be output to the sound source built-in VDP from the command data.

In the scheduler update process, the output target is the drive data from the first drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in the time series that compose the electrical drive source schedule data. Update the pointer to indicate if you want to.

Following step S1020, the effect control program performs reception command analysis processing (step S1022). In this reception command analysis process, the effect control program is information transmitted from the game board side decorative board 3053 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310, and is a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command) described later. The various commands received by the receiving means) are analyzed (command analysis means).

Following step S1022, the effect control program performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, further, when the command analyzed by the received command analysis process in step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into predetermined notification displays, the effect control program issues various abnormality notifications. The peripheral control ROM of the peripheral control unit 1511 can display the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electrical drive source schedule data, etc., which are set in the abnormal display mode for execution. Alternatively, it is extracted from the peripheral control RAM and set in the peripheral control RAM. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in descending order of priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transitioned to. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on, the commands analyzed by the effect control program in the received command analysis process (step S1022) described above are classified into various commands, for example, status displays. In the case of the error release navigation command (second error release command), by controlling the mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, the game board side decorative board 3053 (effect device), the door frame side. A decorative board 233 (effect device) and a lamp (effect device) are used to visually warn the outside, and a speaker is used to audibly warn the outside (error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player attempts to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch of the payout control board 951 even though the player is in the gaming state, Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to give a warning to the outside, fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310, which may affect the progress of the game, are suppressed.

Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the effect control program is stored in the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit and the time information storage unit acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and set in the peripheral control RAM. Update the time information. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year and month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

Following step S1026, the effect control program performs a lamp data creation process (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates the light emission data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Peripheral control of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 based on the light emission data to be generated. It is created by extracting from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of unit 1511, set in the peripheral control RAM, and lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3. The door-side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511, created, and set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1028, the effect control program performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts character data from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create sprite data, and creates sprite data on the game board side decorative board 3053. And the drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed on the door frame side decorative board 233 is generated on the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the effect control program performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer indicates among the sound command data arranged in time series that constitutes the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM or peripheral control RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 and output to the sound source built-in VDP. When sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source built-in VDP extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM and controls the built-in sound source to control the sound command. Sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated according to the track number specified in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

Following step S1032, the effect control program performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program copies the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backs them up. The contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control SRAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up.

Following step S1034, the WDT clear process is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control built-in WDT1511af and the peripheral control external WDT1511e so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. The value 0 is set in −FLG for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB—FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, it waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

This peripheral control unit steady processing starts from the effect control program first setting a value 1 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. The interrupt timer start processing is performed, each processing of step S1012, step S1014, ..., And step S1036 is performed, and finally, in step S1038, the value 0 is set to the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed. If you set, it will be completed. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequencies (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 are set to approximately 30 fps per second, and thus a V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

Next, the V-blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 61 can be accepted is input from the sound source built-in VDP of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above as an opportunity will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 61 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60 is being executed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

When the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing flag SP-FLG is a value 0 in step S1045, that is, when the execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed, the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1050). Exit this routine. As described above, this V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, and peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the steady processing is not executed.

Next, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60 will be described. .. When the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 62 (step). S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60 in this routine. A peripheral control unit 1ms timer A counter that counts the number of times interrupt processing is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequencies (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side decorative board 3053 and the door frame side decorative board 233 are set to approximately 30 fps per second, and thus a V blank signal. The interval at which is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt is generated first, the second, ..., And the 32nd 1 ms timer interrupt is sequentially performed. It will occur.

When the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is terminated as it is. When the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has the peripheral control unit V as the priority of the interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, when the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, , The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt is newly started. ing.

On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 in step S1100, a value 1 is added (incremented, step S1102) to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 60. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one time.

Following step S1102, a motor and solenoid drive process is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the peripheral control MPU and the peripheral control RAM. Drives electric drive sources such as various motors and solenoids according to the drive data instructed by, updates the pointer to the next drive data specified in time series, and executes this motor and solenoid drive process each time. Update the pointer.

Following step S1104, the movable body information acquisition process is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, in-situ history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the peripheral control RAM. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM, it is possible to acquire the original position, the movable position, and the like of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Following step S1106, the effect operation unit information acquisition process is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, operation) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 220 are input. (Operation history information of button 220C, etc.) is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. Whether or not the operation button 220C is operated can be acquired from the history information of the detection signals from various detection switches set in the peripheral control RAM.

Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition process, the history information of the LOCKN signal output from the door frame side effect receiver IC of the door frame side decorative board 233 is created and set in the peripheral control RAM. As for the LOCKN signal, as described above, the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the door frame side decorative board 233 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is judged, it is a signal to be output to convey that fact.

Following step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine is terminated. In this backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup first area and the backup second area, respectively, and backed up, and the contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM are backed up. Make a backup by copying to one area and the second backup area, respectively.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 described above are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 60, various processes related to the production of steps S1012 to S1032 described above are executed as the progress of the production within a period of about 33.3 ms. doing. In the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit due to this 33rd 1ms timer interrupt Peripheral control by forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process, restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then newly generating the 1 ms timer interrupt. Part 1ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is not broken. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal size of the decorative board 3053 on the game board side and the decorative board 233 on the door frame side, and the peripheral control MPU and the VDP with a built-in sound source are mounted. Even in the production lot of the peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the generation of the next V blank signal, peripheral control is performed. The start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the unit V blank interrupt processing. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb the time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V-blank signal is output.

[3-4. Liquid crystal display control unit]
Next, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 on the peripheral control board 1510 is not shown in detail, but is used as a microprocessor. A display control MPU, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, a VDP (abbreviation for Video Display Processor) that displays and controls the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and a main liquid crystal display. An image ROM that stores various data on the screen displayed on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. And have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Drawing control is performed on the sub liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244, as well as control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511. It stores a plurality of schedule data corresponding to the above, its control data (display command) and the corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data. The schedule data is composed of screen data that defines the screen configuration arranged in chronological order, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Has been done. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. The non-resident area transfer data is various types of screen data drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 according to the progress of the schedule data from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in advance. The order in which data is transferred is specified.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM, outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data, and extracts the sprite data from the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate. Drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 244 is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. Further, when the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 do not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. do. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that one line of drawing data for drawing the left and right directions of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 is held in the line buffer, and the line buffer holds the drawing data. This is a method of outputting the held drawing data for one line to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the main liquid crystal display. This will affect the speed of drawing on the display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded in the bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244. For example, when displaying various characters on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are arranged on the screen and have a vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "sprite superposition order"), and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sub liquid crystal display device are set. It is drawn on the 3114 or the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244.

The sprite is composed of a plurality of rectangular areas having 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a length of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 sequentially set the display state for each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front. And a sub-scan that repeats the main scan in the direction intersecting the one direction. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is input to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, When viewed from the front of the sub-liquid crystal display device 3114 and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244, the output is sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right. When the output for one line is completed, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the upper plate liquid crystal display device 244 shift to the line directly below as a sub scan, and similarly, the drawing data for the next line is input. Then, based on the drawing data for the next line, one line is sequentially displayed from left to right when viewed from the front of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the sub liquid crystal display device 3114, and the precision liquid crystal display device 244 as the main scan. Output to each minute pixel.

[4. Game content]
Next, the content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 10, 16, 16, 17, and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game ball stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. However, the game is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game by the game ball is started. The game ball driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle lever 504, and the stronger the ball can be driven by rotating it in the clockwise direction, the maximum of 100 game balls per minute can be continuously driven. That is, the game ball can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball becomes an obstacle nail. By abutting, the flow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are nailed. The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 will flow down while contacting the center. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500, the center accessory 2500 passes through the warp passage 2521. It is supplied to the stage 2530 from the warp outlet 2522, which is open in the frame of 2500, through the guide passage 2523.

The game ball supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530 and moves back and forth from side to side to the central guide portion 2531 in the center in the left-right direction or the side guide portions 2532 on the left and right sides thereof. It is emitted backward from any of the above. When the game ball is released into the game area 5a from the central guide portion 2531 of the stage 2530, since the central guide portion 2531 is located directly above the first starting port 2002, the game released from the central guide portion 2531. The ball has a high probability of being accepted into the first starting port 2002. When the game balls are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released from the side guide portion 2532 into the game area 5a, it flows down toward the start port unit 2100. The game ball released into the game area 5a from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the first grand prize opening 2005 in the open state, or the like.

By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, it is moved toward the center side in the left-right direction by the shelf portion 2302 of the side unit upper 2300, and the general winning opening of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility that it will be accepted in 2001, the first starting port 2002, and the like. Then, when the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

On the other hand, in the game area 5a, the game ball driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters (is driven) to the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the front peripheral wall portion 2512 of the center accessory 2500. ), And enter the upper right distribution space 2541 of the right-handed game area 2540. Although not shown, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the upper right distribution space 2541, and the game ball comes into contact with the obstacle nails and circulates while changing the flow direction thereof in various ways. In the upper right distribution space 3541, a gate portion 2003 is provided at the upper part, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting port 2004 which is normally closed by a second starting port door member 2549 are provided at the lower part.

The game ball that has flowed down in the upper right distribution space 2541 enters the lower right distribution space 2543 through the right flow passage 2542 on the downstream side thereof. The game ball that has entered the lower right distribution space 2543 closes the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize 2006b that are lined up side by side as the second prize 2006. The upper surface of the door member 2552 and the second lower prize opening door member 2555 passes through the second attacker passage 2543a forming the bottom surface, and from the left end of the lower discharge plate portion 2559 on the left side of the front view into the game area 5a. Be released. The downstream end (discharge plate portion 2559) of the second attacker passage 2543a is opened so that the game ball faces the first prize opening 2005 of the starting port unit 2100, and when the first prize opening 2005 is in the open state. When the game ball is released from the second attacker passage 2543a into the game area 5a, the game ball is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 with a high probability.

The game ball flowing through the right flow passage 2542 and the lower right distribution space 2543 flows down while the increase in the distribution speed is suppressed by the plurality of deceleration ribs 2546. In rare cases, in the lower right distribution space 2543, the game ball that has entered the discharge passage 2543b that branches near the upstream end of the second attacker passage 2543a may enter the game area 5a. It is discharged to the outside of the game board 5 from the second out port 2543c without being returned to the inside.

When a game ball that hits right and enters the upper right distribution space 2541 passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2547, it is an ordinary random number updated in a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. An ordinary lottery is performed by acquiring one ordinary random number from among them and collating the acquired ordinary random number with a predetermined ordinary hit determination table. If the result of this normal lottery is "normal hit" when the time reduction control described later is not executed, the second start port door member 2549 rotates only once in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the second start port. With 2004 in the open state, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined time (0.5 seconds in this example). On the other hand, when the time reduction control is executed, a lottery is performed in the ordinary lottery to determine whether the "ordinary hit" is "first ordinary hit", "second ordinary hit", or "third ordinary hit". Then, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is any of "first normal hit", "second normal hit", and "third normal hit" when the time reduction control is executed, the second start door member 2549 Front view After rotating in the counterclockwise direction to open the second starting port 2004, the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 for a predetermined period, and then viewed from the front. By rotating in the counterclockwise direction to close the second starting port 2004, the opening / closing control that makes it impossible to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004 is performed a predetermined number of times (5 in this example). Repeat over (times). In addition, when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "first normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted, and the period of each of the five times is "0.3 seconds". , "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "second normal hit" "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "0.28 seconds" as the period of each of the five times that the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. , "0.3 seconds", and when the normal lottery result of the normal lottery is "third normal hit", the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. The period is "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "0.3 seconds", "0.28 seconds", "1.1 seconds", "second normal hit" and "third normal". The "hit" is more advantageous to the player than the "first normal hit" (it is easy to accept the game ball into the second starting port 2004). When the game balls are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. NS.

In the present embodiment, in the variation display of the normal symbol performed by the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 based on the passage of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, the normal symbol is displayed after the variation display of the normal symbol is started. A certain amount of time is set until the stop display is displayed (until the result of the normal lottery is suggested) (for example, 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as the normal fluctuation time). At the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door member 2549 rotates to be in the open state after the lapse of the normal fluctuation time. During the execution of the time reduction control described later, the control that normally shortens the fluctuation time is executed as compared with the normal state (the state in which the time reduction control is not executed). Further, the opening time for rotating the second starting port door member 2549 to open the second starting port 2004 may be changed according to the gaming state, for example, time saving control is executed. If not, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 may be changed to a longer time than when the time saving control is executed.

In addition, a new game ball is placed in the gate section between the time when the game ball passes through the gate section 2003 and the time when the normal symbol that is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display is stopped and displayed (until the normal lottery result is suggested). After passing through 2003, it is not possible to newly start the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display, so the variable display of the normal symbol is started until the variable display of the previous normal symbol is completed (of the normal lottery result). I try to put it on hold (until the suggestion is finished). Specifically, the ordinary random numbers acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball passing through the gate portion 2003 by the gate sensor 2547 are stored, and the variation display of the ordinary symbol can be started. The start of variable display of normal symbols is suspended until. The number of ordinary random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, and more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. .. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball received in the first start port 2002 is detected by the first start port sensor 2104, the pachinko machine 1 is updated within a predetermined numerical range on the main control board 1310. By acquiring one first special random number from one special random number and collating the acquired first special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit"). , "Small hit", etc.), the first special lottery result will be drawn. Then, based on the lottery first special lottery result, the eight LEDs of the first special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the first special lottery result. The result of the first special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the first special lottery after displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner). In addition, "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit" are included in the first special lottery result that is drawn when the game ball is accepted at the first starting port 2002. Yes, by collating the acquired first special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and after the jackpot game, it is normal (low probability state: in this example, there is a probability of about 1/395). Probability improvement control (high probability state (also called probabilistic state): in this example, the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) that improves the probability of winning the jackpot (winning probability) than (winning the jackpot). Whether or not to execute (probability variation big hit or not) and whether or not to execute time saving control (time saving state) that shortens the fluctuation time than usual when at least the first special lottery result is out of order (whether or not it is a time saving big hit) The time reduction control period (number of time reductions: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)) is also determined. The winning probability of "small hit" is always constant regardless of the gaming state (about 1/300 in this example).

Further, when the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is detected by the second starting port sensor 2551, one of the second special random numbers updated in the numerical range predetermined in the main control board 1310 is selected. By acquiring the second special random number of the above and collating the acquired second special random number with a predetermined jackpot determination table, an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, "big hit", "small hit", etc. ) Is generated. The lottery of the second special lottery result is performed. Then, based on the result of the second special lottery drawn, the eight LEDs of the second special symbol display are controlled to blink for a predetermined fluctuation time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds), and then the second special lottery result is obtained. The result of the second special lottery is suggested to the player by displaying the lighting mode according to the above (displaying the stop symbol according to the result of the second special lottery after displaying the second special symbol in a variable manner). The results of the second special lottery, which is drawn when the game ball is accepted at the second starting port 2004, include "missing", "2R jackpot", "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", and so on. There are "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", and "16R jackpot", and by collating the acquired second special random number with the jackpot judgment table, it is determined which of these is, and further, after the jackpot game, it is normal ( Low probability state: Probability improvement control that improves the probability of winning a big hit (winning probability) rather than winning a big hit with a probability of about 1/395 in this example (high probability state (also called probability variation state): this example Then, whether or not to execute (whether or not the jackpot is won with a probability of about 1/44) (whether or not it is a probability variation jackpot), and at least when the second special lottery result is out of order, the time reduction control that shortens the fluctuation time than usual It is also determined whether or not (time reduction state) is executed (whether or not it is a time reduction jackpot) and the period during which time reduction control is executed (time reduction number: special symbol (number of fluctuations of the first special striking symbol and the second special symbol)). It is supposed to be done.

When the special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is a special lottery result that causes an advantageous gaming state. , After the lapse of a predetermined fluctuation time, eight LEDs of the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are displayed in a lighting mode according to the special lottery result, and then the first prize opening Either 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When a game ball is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 A predetermined number from the payout device 830 (for example, 11 when the game ball is received in the first prize opening 2005, or 15 when the game ball is received in the second prize opening 2006). The game ball is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 allow the game balls to be accepted, by allowing the 1st Grand Prize 2005 and the 2nd Grand Prize 2006 to accept the game balls, many games can be played. The ball can be paid out and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit", the first big winning opening 2005 will play the game ball for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern of closing after becoming an acceptable open state is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, if the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot", the first jackpot A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is opened so that the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 is predetermined. When either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006, either condition is satisfied. , The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, "4R jackpot" is repeated for 4 rounds, "5R jackpot" is for 5 rounds, and "16R jackpot" is for 16 rounds, respectively, to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player. In addition, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds)). In the open / close pattern in which the game ball is closed after it is in an open state in which the game ball can be accepted), it is practically difficult to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005. On the other hand, the opening / closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "4R jackpot", "5R jackpot", "6R jackpot", "7R jackpot", "8R jackpot", "10R jackpot", "16R jackpot". (A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has elapsed after the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first prize opening 2005 Either a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls will be accepted, or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted for the second prize opening 2006. When the above conditions are satisfied, it is easy to insert the game ball into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 in the opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is in an unacceptable closed state. If the special lottery result is "4R big hit", "5R big hit", "6R big hit", "7R big hit", "8R big hit", "10R big hit", "16R big hit", the above first big prize A predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) has passed after the opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball can be accepted, or the first big winning opening 2005 is predetermined. Either the number of game balls (for example, 7) is accepted, or the predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted for the second prize opening 2006. Then, the number of rounds in which the opening / closing pattern that makes the game ball unacceptable is executed may be the actual special lottery result, and the number (for example,) predetermined to the first large winning opening 2005 as the special lottery result. , 7) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls will be accepted in the second prize opening 2006, if any of the conditions is satisfied, the game balls will be accepted. An opening / closing pattern that makes the closed state unacceptable and an opening / closing pattern that is executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (the first big winning opening 2005 is a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds) For ~ 0.6 seconds), a device may be provided to perform a plurality of rounds including an opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed. For example, as a result of the special lottery, a "8R jackpot with a real 4R" is provided, and a predetermined number (for example, 7) of game balls are accepted in the first prize opening 2005, or the second prize opening. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is accepted in 2006, or if any of the conditions is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern for closing the game balls in an unacceptable closed state is repeated four times, and then the game balls are closed. Opening and closing pattern executed when the special lottery result is "small hit" or "2R big hit" (for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds) in the first big winning opening 2005) The opening / closing pattern (opening / closing pattern) in which the game ball is opened and then closed may be repeated four times.

By the way, in the present embodiment, the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b arranged side by side, and the second major winning opening 2006 is used. In the case of "big hit", for example, in the first round (1st round), the second upper prize opening 2006a opens to allow the game ball to be accepted, and the game ball is closed due to the satisfaction of the conditions for making it unacceptable, and then accepted. Until (during the interval), the second lower prize opening 2006b is opened to start the next round (2R) in which the game ball can be accepted, and when the second lower prize opening 2006b becomes unacceptable, Since the interval period has passed in the meantime, the second upper prize opening 2006a is opened again so that the game ball can be accepted. Then, the second upper prize opening 2006a and the second lower prize opening 2006b are alternately opened and closed until a predetermined number of rounds are exhausted. As a result, in the second attacker passage 2543a, either the second upper prize opening 2006a or the second lower prize opening 2006b is in a state where the game ball can be accepted during the "big hit". If you hit right with and distribute the game ball in the second attacker passage 2543a, the game ball will always be accepted in the second big prize opening 2006, and the player will be entertained by eliminating the missing game ball. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, in some of the above-mentioned plurality of types of jackpots, whether or not the above-mentioned time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot game is different depending on the game state at the time of winning the jackpot. For example, in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the first special lottery result is an 8R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the first special lottery result is the 8R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. Further, in the non-time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is not executed), when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal big hit that does not execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game, the time saving control is not executed after the big hit game. On the other hand, when the second special lottery result is a 2R normal jackpot in the time saving state (the state in which the time saving control is executed), the time saving control is executed after the big hit game. In addition, in the low probability non-time saving state (the state in which both the probability improvement control and the time saving control are not executed: also referred to as the normal state), the probability improvement control is executed after the big hit game with the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result. In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the time saving control is not executed after the jackpot game. On the other hand, the probability improvement control is executed or the time saving control is executed, that is, the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result execute the probability improvement control after the big hit game in a state other than the normal state. In the case of a big hit, the time saving control is executed after the big hit game.

In the present embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol executed by the first special symbol display by the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 are performed. (Ii) The variable display of the second special symbol executed by the special symbol display is not executed at the same time, and only one of them is executed. Therefore, until the first special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the first starting port 2002, is stopped and displayed (until the first special lottery result is suggested) and the first. (Ii) The first start is performed until the second special symbol, which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display due to the acceptance of the game ball into the start port 2004, is stopped and displayed (until the result of the second special lottery is suggested). When a new game ball is received in the opening 2002 or the second starting port 2004, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display newly starts the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Because it is not possible, the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is started until the variable display of the previous special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is completed (first special lottery). (Until the result and the suggestion of the result of the second special lottery are completed), it is put on hold. Specifically, the first special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received by the first start port 2002 by the first start port sensor 2104, and the second start port sensor 2551. The second special random number acquired by the main control board 1310 based on the detection of the game ball received in the second starting port 2004 is stored, and the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is stored. The start of the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended until the variable display of the symbol) can be started. The number of reserved first special random numbers and second special random numbers that can be stored in the main control board 1310 is limited to four, respectively, and for more than that, games are played in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the ball is accepted, it is discarded without being held. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold. Further, the first special random number and the second special random number stored in the main control board 1310 are digested with priority given to the second special random number. That is, regardless of the timing of accepting the game ball to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, if the second special random number is stored and the start of the variable display of the second special symbol is suspended, the first special The variable display of the second special symbol is prioritized over the symbol.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (sub liquid crystal display device 3114 may also be used). In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is that the above eight LEDs constituting the special symbol display (first special symbol display, second special symbol display) are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time. It blinks, then stops in a predetermined lighting mode, and the combination of LEDs lit at the time of this stop suggests a special lottery result.

On the other hand, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls the control signals (variation pattern command, determination result notification command, etc.) from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is obtained by the effect image. Suggestions are made. Specifically, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a series of decorative symbol rows consisting of a plurality of different symbols are displayed in a plurality of rows (for example, three rows of a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol). The variable display of the decorative symbol sequence is started, and then the display is stopped in sequence (in this example, the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative symbol is stopped and displayed), and finally all the decorative symbol rows are stopped. When it is displayed, the lottery result of the special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) extracted by the combination of the stopped and displayed symbols is suggested to the player side. That is, a plurality of decorative symbol rows change according to the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result) based on the special random number (first special random number, second special random number) acquired when the start prize occurs. After being displayed, the effect image that is stopped and displayed is displayed so as to suggest the special lottery result (first special lottery result, second special lottery result). It should be noted that the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is larger than the first special symbol which is variablely displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol which is variablely displayed on the second special symbol display. Since it is large and easy to see, the player generally pays attention to the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the main liquid crystal display device 1600 (the symbol sequence fluctuates to confirm the image). Is different from the time until is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a shorter time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative body of the center accessory 2500, the back left, according to the lottery special lottery result. The middle decoration unit 3050, the back bottom rear movable production unit 3100, the back top left movable production unit 3200, the back left movable production unit 3300, the back top middle movable production unit 3400, the back bottom front movable production unit 3500, etc. are appropriately used. , Light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. can be performed, and the player can be entertained by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from being lowered.

[5. Various control processes on the main control board]
Next, the process executed by the main control board 1310 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. Specifically, the system / user reset process executed when the power of the game machine is turned on and the timer interrupt process executed in a predetermined cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) by the timer started by the system / user reset process. explain.

[5-1. Initialization process]
21 and 22 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the initialization process of the main control board according to the embodiment of the present invention.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. When the initialization process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission so that the RAM 1312 can be written (step S10). Specifically, "00H" indicating write permission is output to the RAM protect register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12). Specifically, first, "03H" indicating the mode setting is written in the watchdog timer control register, and further, "03H" indicating the activation of the watchdog timer is written. Further, the watchdog timer is cleared and reset (step S14).

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the predetermined wait time has elapsed (step S16). Since the voltage does not rise immediately after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time the power is turned on and the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit A power failure warning signal is input from. In the wait process, a predetermined monitoring wait value is set, and the watchdog timer is activated while waiting for the process for a predetermined time (for example, 200 milliseconds).

If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, the time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start has elapsed, so it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). .. When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is deleted (step S30). ), Proceed to step S24. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20). The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off through normal processing such as the occurrence of a power failure (see step S56 in FIG. 22).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is deleted (step). S30), the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( The area (other than the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area for calculating the accessory ratio 13128) is normal using the check code (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may not be correct, so the data stored in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is deleted (step S26).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup area 1 is used. It is preferable to duplicate the data in the backup area, which is determined in the order of 2, 2 and N, and which is first determined to be normal, in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

Regarding the accessory ratio calculation area, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted at predetermined time intervals, separately from the determination result of the check code when the power is turned on. In addition, for each predetermined operating amount (for example, for each predetermined number of launched balls, for each predetermined number of winning balls, for each predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, for each jackpot of a predetermined number of special symbol variation display games, etc.) The data in the ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is different for each data type (game control data 13132 and accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136). Erase with conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control data 13132 is erased, but the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased. When the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the staff of the game hall is prevented. , It is possible to prevent the concealment of the state where the accessory ratio is abnormal. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect a gaming machine modified to a state in which the accessory ratio is high or low.

The main control MPU 1311 executes the initial setting for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when the power recovery setting or the RAM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed (step S28). In the initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, first, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) is initially set to allow interrupts. Furthermore, the serial communication port and the test signal output port are initially set. Start the hardware random number generation circuit. Then, the serial communication circuit 13114 used for communication with the peripheral control board 1510, the payout control board 951 and the accessory ratio display 1317 is set. Further, after the operation of the serial communication circuit 13114 is started, the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 is initially set.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a process of setting a power-on command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S32). In the power-on command creation process, the game information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. To generate the power-on command, the power-on state reference command is set as the reference command data, and the command addition data corresponding to the generated command is added.

The power-on commands include the power-on state buffer command and the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command. The power-on state buffer command is a command for notifying the game state when returning after the power is turned off, and notifies the winning probability of the special lottery and the operation mode of the ordinary electric accessory. On the other hand, the special symbol / electric accessory operation number command notifies the execution status of the variable display of the special symbol.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 permits execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing (step S34). The initial setting of the pachinko machine 1 is completed by the processing from the power-on of the pachinko machine 1 to step S34 (initial setting means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36) and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), that is, the random number update process is executed (step S40). In the random number update process of step S46, a random number other than the random number for determining the winning is mainly updated in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery. The random number update process for determining the winning in the special lottery or the normal lottery is executed by the timer interrupt process described later. The processes from step S36 to step S40 are executed until the power failure warning signal is detected, and these processes are set as the main process on the main control side (normal means after initial setting).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power outage process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42). As a result, the timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM 1312 can be prevented, and rewriting of game information can be protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S44). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is set in the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption of the time until the main board side power off processing is completed can be reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46). Further, the checksum calculation result is stored in the checksum area of the RAM 1312 (step S48). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal.

Subsequently, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) (step S50). If the check code is a fixed value, it is not necessary to calculate the check code in step S50. The check code may be calculated and stored each time the data is updated by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the main board power is turned off.

Subsequently, the calculated check code (or a predetermined value used as the check code) is stored in a predetermined area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S52).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the accessory ratio calculation work (accessory ratio calculation area 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) by the accessory ratio calculation / display process instead of the process when the main board side power is turned off.

In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the accessory ratio in the backup area together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code, the data for calculating the accessory ratio is retained even when the power is turned off. , It is possible to calculate the accessory ratio in long-term operation.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the write of the RAM 1312 is prohibited by outputting "01H" indicating write prohibition to the RAM protect register (step S58), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure (infinite loop).

[5-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the initialization process shown in FIGS. 21 and 22. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70). The main control board 1310 in the present embodiment has a bank 0 and a bank 1, and is switched and used each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, detection signals from various sensors that detect game balls that have entered a winning opening such as a general winning opening, detection signals from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, and prize ball control processing. The payer ACK signal and the like from the payout control board 951 that conveys that the payout control board 951 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the above are read and stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer update process (step S76). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, and the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process determined by the ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the symbol variation display pattern, there is a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not an input has been made, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the random number update process 1 (step S78). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the small hit, which are updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S40 in the system / user reset process (main process on the main control side) shown in the figure. The random number for determining the initial value for the symbol is also updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio of the main control built-in RAM 1312. (See FIG. 26) is updated (step S81). The process of step S81 can be skipped when there is no prize ball to be paid out in step S80, and the load on the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the frame command reception process (step S82). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and transmits the above-mentioned transmission information. Store in the information storage area. Further, in the prize ball discharge process, the number of prize balls discharged is recorded in the storage area (see FIG. 27) determined by the game state of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128.

The accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) may be executed in any order as long as it is after the prize ball control process (step S80) and before the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89). ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. Further, it is determined whether or not to shift to the probability fluctuation state based on the jackpot symbol random value. Then, when the probability variation transition condition is satisfied, the process shifts to the probability variation state, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability variation state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" "Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start opening door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted by the start port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the state.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) to call the accessory ratio. The bonus ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the calculation area 13128. Then, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S89). In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (gambling of the pachinko machine 1) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

Regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, if the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio may be displayed. .. Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. May be good. Since the display switch 1318 is provided on the back surface side of the game board, if the display switch 1318 is displayed, the main body frame 4 is normally open and the progress of the game is stopped. In this way, if the bonus ratio is calculated at the timing when the progress of the game is stopped, the CPU resource can be reduced without consuming CPU resources by division or subtraction for calculating the bonus ratio during the game.

Details of the accessory ratio calculation / display process will be described later in FIGS. 24 and 25. Further, a specific example of the display method of the accessory ratio will be described later. When the display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (role ratio, continuous accessory ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but they are displayed for each operation of the display switch 1318. You may only calculate the value. Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

Even when the pachinko machine 1 detects fraud and stops the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S81) and the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89) are executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not fraud is detected, the accessory ratio can be confirmed even during fraud notification.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a jackpot game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output Various information (game information) signals and security signals related to the game such as signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals are output to the payout control board 951.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process (step S74) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal for output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol (information signal output means).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information such as commands and data is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and the transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. Various commands created by timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, are stored in the transmission information. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation processing of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio in the timer interrupt processing, and the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 performs the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus. The calculation process of the object ratio may be executed. In this case, a command for displaying the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command to the peripheral control unit 1511. You may send a command to display the accessory ratio or the continuous accessory ratio.

[5-3. Character ratio calculation / display processing]
24 and 25 are flowcharts showing an example of the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The main control MPU 1311 executes the accessory ratio calculation / display process. The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 may execute the accessory ratio calculation / display process. When the peripheral control unit 1511 calculates the accessory ratio, the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. For example, when the calculated accessory ratio is within (or outside the range) of a predetermined range, the effect in the game may be changed. Specifically, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined threshold value (threshold value smaller than the reference value), the advance notice effect may be changed to perform a notice effect that is more interesting than the normal advance notice effect.

First, a check code is calculated from the main area of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 (step S140), and the calculated check code is the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether they match (step S142). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the main area is normal, so the accessory ratio calculation process is executed and the combination is obtained from the data in the main area. The object ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S156). Specifically, the bonus ratio is calculated by dividing the number of acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls, and the continuous bonus ratio is calculated by dividing the number of consecutive acquired balls by the total number of acquired balls. The fractional part (value after the decimal point) of the calculated bonus ratio and continuous bonus ratio may be rounded down or rounded off. Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

In step S156, the updated value may be duplicated in the backup area each time the accessory ratio and / or the continuous accessory ratio of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is updated.

If the number of bits in which the number of acquired balls is stored is large and the number of bits that can be calculated by the main control MPU 1311 is insufficient, the lower bits of the number of acquired balls are omitted and the bonus ratio is calculated. May be calculated. For example, if the storage area for the number of acquired balls is 32 bits, a numerical value from 0 to 4,294,967,295 can be stored. However, when the main control MPU is an 8-bit processor and can perform 8-bit or 16-bit operations, 16 bits below the most significant bit having a value of 1 are extracted from the number of acquired balls stored in 32 bits for operation. It is advisable to store it in a register (16 bits) and divide it. When the number of acquired balls is equal to or less than the maximum number of bits that can be used in the calculation (32767, which is the maximum value of 16 bits), the lower 16 bits may be taken out and used in the calculation.

Further, if the total number of acquired balls is divided by 100 (rounded down to the nearest whole number) and used as the number to be divided (the number to be divided) to calculate the accessory ratio, the calculation with a decimal number can be avoided.

Further, the upper limit of the accessory ratio is set to 99, and when the calculation result of the accessory ratio is 100 or more, it may be 99.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the main area is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 1. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 1 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S144), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S146). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 1 is duplicated in the main area (step S148). ), The bonus ratio calculation process is executed, and the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are calculated from the data in the main area (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

On the other hand, if the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 do not match, the data in the backup area 1 is abnormal, and the accessory ratio is calculated from the data in the backup area 2. Try. Specifically, a check code is calculated from the backup area 2 of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S150), and the calculated check code matches the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. It is determined whether or not (step S152). If the calculated check code and the check code stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 match, the data in the backup area 1 is normal, and the data in the backup area 2 is duplicated in the main area (step S154). ), The accessory ratio calculation process is executed, the data in the main area is read out, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated (step S156). Then, the process proceeds to step S160.

If there is another backup area, it is similarly determined whether the data in the backup area is normal, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated from the data in the normal backup area.

If the data in the main area and all the backup areas is abnormal, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio (area 13128 for calculating the accessory ratio) is initialized and the abnormality is notified (step S158).

Subsequently, a check code is calculated from the main area (step S160), and the calculated check code is stored in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 (step S162). The check code is calculated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the RAM 1312 in the initialization process because the power failure flag and checksum are not calculated when the main board side power is turned off. The backed up data is initialized, but if the check code is periodically calculated and stored in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, even if the pachinko machine is turned on again, the accessory ratio calculation work area This is because the data in (the accessory ratio calculation area 13128) can be left without being erased.

Subsequently, 1 is added to the backup area distribution counter value to update (step S164), and it is determined whether the backup area distribution counter value is odd (step S166). If the backup area distribution counter value is odd, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 1 (step S168). On the other hand, if the backup area distribution counter value is an even number, the data in the main area is duplicated in the backup area 2 (step S170). By allocating the copy destination of the data in the main area by the backup area distribution counter value and writing the data to only a part of the backup areas, it is possible to prevent an abnormal value from being written to a plurality of backup areas.

When 3 or more backup areas are provided, the backup area for writing data may be distributed by the remainder obtained by dividing the backup area distribution counter value by the number of backup areas.

Subsequently, the calculated accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 (step S172). Specifically, using the calculated type of accessory ratio and the calculated value, the data to be displayed in each digit of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is acquired by referring to the conversion table (not shown). The acquired data is sent to the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317. For example, if the type of the bonus ratio is the bonus ratio (cumulative), A7 is displayed in the first two digits, and if the calculated bonus ratio is 66%, 66 is displayed in the last two digits.

The bonus ratio calculation process (step S156) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the data of the number of acquired balls from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 (that is, the bonus ratio calculation work area shown in FIG. 27). , Data cannot be written in the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. That is, as will be described later, when the processes of steps S156 and S172 are configured by the common program module, the common program module does not have the authority to write data to the storage area related to the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. Data can be written in the storage area of the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio.

As explained above, since the data for calculating the accessory ratio is duplicated in the backup area in the accessory ratio calculation / display processing, when the normal power off processing is not executed due to an abnormal reset or the like. , The data for calculating the accessory ratio can be protected.

Since the processes of steps S156 and S172 are common regardless of the type of gaming machine, it is preferable to configure one or a plurality of common program modules. In this case, the process of determining whether the check code of the main area and the check code of the backup area are correct may be configured on the non-common side separately from the common program module. This is because the data check and backup methods differ depending on the model. However, if the data check and backup methods are standardized among the models, they may be placed in the common program module.

[6. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the arrangement of the program and the data stored in the ROM 1313 will be described. FIG. 26A is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The ROM 1313 contains the game control code 13131, the game control data 13132, the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the debug (inspection function) data 13134, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135, and the accessory ratio calculation / display. An area for storing the data 13136 is included. The ROM 1313 of the present embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. And, the bonus ratio calculation area (third storage area) that stores programs used for the purpose of calculating the bonus ratio, such as the bonus ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136. Is assigned.

When a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135. When displayed in the dump list format, the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value which is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game area and the debug area or a value having a low frequency. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code in which the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the accessory ratio calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, even if the debug (inspection function) area and the accessory ratio calculation area are not separated and the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 are stored in a part of the debug area. good. That is, the game control area and other areas need only be clearly distinguished. By clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas in this way, the accessory ratio calculation area (the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 and the accessory), which is a process that is not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. The ratio calculation / display data 13136) is arranged separately from the game control area to avoid the risk that a defect (bug or the like) of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 affects the game control.

The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1 other than the game control of the pachinko machine 1. The code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) code 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. In addition, a program for calculating the bonus ratio, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area.

Further, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read and written to the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured to be executable and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be performed. As described above, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. The process based on the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be executed from the debug (inspection function) code. Is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The bonus ratio calculated by the bonus ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection and game control code 13131 of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored. The inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be performed separately, and the labor of the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

FIG. 26B is a diagram showing details of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the accessory ratio is stored. The backup area may be one or more. A check code is added to each area to detect data errors. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or is the process when the main control side is turned off (Fig. It may be set in steps S50 to S54) of 22. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power cutoff process (step S50 in FIG. 20). You may set it. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area (step of FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the process of power off on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, each time the value in the main area is updated, the updated data may be duplicated in the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 27 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128. The data of the number of acquired balls in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is written in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) timed by the main control MPU 1311, and the accessory ratio calculation process of the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step in FIG. 24). It is read in S156). In this way, the bonus ratio calculation / display process reads the acquired ball number data from the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the timer interrupt process (game control program) reads the acquired ball number data in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. By writing, the game control program and the program that executes the character ratio calculation / display processing can be completely separated, and the program for the character ratio calculation / display processing can be standardized even for game machines with different specifications. ..

In the bonus ratio calculation process (step S156 in FIG. 24) of the bonus ratio calculation / display process, the calculated bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are converted into the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128. Write to the ratio storage area. The calculated accessory ratio and continuous accessory ratio data are read out in the accessory ratio display process (step S170 in FIG. 25) of the accessory ratio calculation / display process when displaying the accessory ratio. The game control program does not access the storage area of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio of the bonus ratio calculation area 13128.

FIG. 27 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest way. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. The number of winning balls is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in a moving accessory (for example, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the opening is open, and the second starting opening 2004 when the second starting opening door member 2549 is open). be. The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a winning character while the character is continuously operating (for example, the winning opening is open during the big hit consecutive chan). The total number of balls won is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of winning balls by the total number of winning balls. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of consecutive winning balls by the total number of winning balls. The number of winning balls, the number of consecutive winning balls, and the total number of winning balls are updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt processing, and the bonus ratio and the continuous winning ball ratio are calculated in step S91 of the timer interrupt processing. Stored.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (A), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls correspond to the total cumulative total of FIG. 27 (B), which will be described later, and are 3 or each. It is a 4-byte storage area and can store numbers up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

FIG. 27B shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, n = 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total acquisition balls. When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls for the character, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol variation display games, the number of jackpots of the special symbol variation display game, etc.) becomes a predetermined number, You may move the write pointer.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using the latest data for 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data. Therefore, even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared in order to write new data after the ring buffer makes a round, the total cumulative value including the data of the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 27 (B), the number of winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (A). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize in a prize opening other than the accessory (a winning opening that does not open and close, for example, a general winning opening 2001). The total number of acquired balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves. Regarding the number of winning balls, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, and the total number of winning balls, the data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated in step S81 of the timer interrupt process, and the bonus ratio and the continuous winning combination are obtained. The object ratio is calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

FIG. 27C shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. With the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 27 (C), more detailed data can be acquired than that shown in FIG. , Others The number of winning openings, the number of consecutive winning balls, the total number of winning balls, the winning ratio, and the continuous winning ratio are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 storage areas for every 6000 prize balls), and the total number of acquired balls is When the number reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. In addition, when the data other than the total number of acquired balls (the number of acquired balls of special electric accessory, the number of launched balls, the number of winning balls, the number of special symbol fluctuation display games, the number of jackpots of special symbol fluctuation display games, etc.) becomes a predetermined number. You may move the write pointer to.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIGS. 27B and 27C, the number of winning balls in the ring buffer, the number of other winning balls, the number of continuous winning balls, the total number of winning balls, and the normal electric bonus winning balls. The number, the number of balls acquired by the special electric accessory, the number of balls acquired by the starting port, and the number of balls acquired by the other winning openings are each in a 2-byte storage area, and a numerical value up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. Number of winning balls, other winning balls, continuous winning balls, total winning balls, normal electric bonus winning balls, special electric bonus winning balls, starting opening winning balls and other winning opening winning balls The cumulative number is a storage area of 3 bytes each, and can store numbers up to 16777215 in decimal. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. Number of winning balls, other winning balls, continuous winning balls, total winning balls, bonus ratio, continuous bonus ratio, normal electric bonus winning balls, special electric bonus winning balls, starting port The total number of acquired balls and the total number of other winning openings won is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 249497295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. In addition, the cumulative and total cumulative totals of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and up to 255 decimal numbers can be stored.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 27 (C), the total number of acquired balls, the bonus ratio, and the continuous bonus ratio are the same as those described in FIG. 27 (B). The number of other winning balls is the number of winning balls by winning a prize other than the accessory (the winning opening that does not open and close). The number of balls acquired by the ordinary electric accessory is the prize ball acquired by winning a prize in the ordinary electric accessory (the second starting opening 2004 in which the second starting opening door member 2549 is open) that is operating according to the result of the lottery by the ordinary symbol. It is a number. The number of balls acquired for the special electric accessory is the number of prize balls obtained by winning a prize in the special electric accessory (for example, the opening large winning openings 2005, 2006) that is operating according to the result of the lottery by the special symbol. The number of balls acquired at the starting port is the number of winning balls acquired by winning a prize at the starting port (first starting port 2002). The number of balls won by other winning openings is the number of winning balls acquired by winning a prize in the winning opening (general winning opening 2001), which is not a character (does not operate) and does not trigger a lottery of special symbols. The number of normal electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of special electric accessory acquisition balls, the number of starting port acquisition balls, the number of other winning opening acquisition balls, the number of continuous accessory acquisition balls, and the total number of acquisition balls are determined in step S81 of the timer interrupt process. The data in the storage area where the write pointer is located is updated, and the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are calculated and stored in step S91 of the timer interrupt process.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 27 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 is deleted in step S116 of the initialization process. The data is not erased at the opportunity of. Therefore, the data in the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, January, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIGS. 25 (B) and 25 (C) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , The number of acquired balls for the accessory> the total number of acquired balls, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, when the data of the accessory ratio calculation area 13128 or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the accessory ratio is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[7. Configuration of accessory ratio display]
FIG. 28 is a diagram showing the configuration of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a driver circuit 13171 and a plurality of 7-segment LEDs 13172. For example, the 7-segment LED 13172 is composed of 4 digits.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed together in one package, but both may be housed in different packages.

The driver circuit 13171 and the main control MPU 1311 are connected by three signal lines (DATA, LOAD, CLOCK).

The DATA line transfers data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 and a signal for setting the operating state of the accessory ratio display 1317, and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The LOAD line transfers a signal indicating the data acquisition timing and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311. The CLOCK line transfers a clock signal that defines the operation cycle of the driver circuit 13171 and is connected to the serial communication circuit 13114 of the main control MPU 1311.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are connected by four digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 and eight segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp. The segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp transmit signals for lighting each LED element (7-segment and decimal point) of the 7-segment LED 13172. The digit selection signal lines IDIG-0 to IDIG-3 transmit a control signal indicating which digit of the 7-segment LED13172 the signal transmitted by the segment lighting signal lines ISEG-a to ISEG-Dp is. The direction of the signal (current) shown differs depending on whether the 7-segment LED 13172 is an anode common type or a cathode common type, but an example of the anode common type is shown.

A resistor 13174 that determines the current value to be passed through each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 is connected to the R-EXT terminal of the driver circuit 13171. By changing the resistance value of the resistor 13174, the emission brightness of each LED element of the 7-segment LED 13172 can be changed.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a configuration of a driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 includes a 16-bit shift register 3171, a 16-bit data latch 3172, an 8-bit data latch 3173A to D, an 8 × 4 data selector 3174, a decoder 3175, a 2 × 8 data selector 3176, a constant current driver 3178, and a driver 3179. It has a latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, a Digit-Limit control unit 3181, a duty ratio control unit 3182, a data selector control unit 3183, a standby mode control unit 3184, and an oscillator 3185.

The 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal, holds the data for 16 bits, and sends it to the 16-bit data latch 3172 as parallel data. The 4 bits of D15 (MSB) to D12 are data for selecting the operation mode of the driver circuit 13171 (see FIG. 35), and the 4 bits of D11 to D8 are data for selecting the register corresponding to the operation mode. (See FIG. 33), and D7 to D0 (LSB) are the detailed setting data.

The 16-bit data latch 3172 latches data at the timing of the LOAD signal, and controls D15 to D8 in each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control). It sends to unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184), and sends D7 to D0 to 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 30, the 16-bit shift register 3171 takes in the serial data input to the DATA IN terminal at the rising timing of the CLOCK signal and shifts the data. The 16-bit data latch 3172 acquires 16-bit data as parallel data from the 16-bit shift register 3171 at the rising timing of the LOAD signal, and latches the data. Then, D15 to D8 are sent to each control unit (latch selector / load pulse distributor 3180, Digit-Limit control unit 3181, duty ratio control unit 3182, data selector control unit 3183, standby mode control unit 3184). Further, the 16-bit data latch 3172 sends D7 to D0 of the latched data to the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at the falling timing of the LOAD signal.

The LOAD signal is also input to the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180. The latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 acquires D15 to D8 and selects an 8-bit data latch 3173 for storing display data (8 bits of D7 to D0). Specifically, as shown in the load register selection table (see FIG. 33), if D15 to D8 are 00100010B, the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180 has data register 0, that is, 8 bits of Digit-A. It sends a signal to select the 8-bit data latch 3173 so that the data latch 3173A stores the data.

The 8-bit data latch 3173 is provided as many as the number of 7-segment LEDs 13172 (the number of display digits), and according to the selection signal from the latch selector load pulse distributor 3180, the data to be displayed on each 7-segment LED is captured. Hold. The 8-bit data latch 3173 sends the held data to the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The 8x4 data selector 3174 selects the data sent from each of the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D at a predetermined display timing of each digit, and sends the data to the decoder 3175 and the 2x8 data selector 3176.

The decoder 3175 uses the character generator decoding table (see FIG. 34) to convert the input data into characters to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172, and generates data for lighting each segment. The generated data is input to the 2 × 8 data selector 3176.

The 2x8 data selector 3176 refers to the decoding settings and selects data from the decoder 3175 if it is set to a mode that uses a decoder, and 8x if it is set to a mode that does not use a decoder. 4 Select the data from the data selector 3174. The selected data is input to the constant current driver 3178.

The constant current driver 3178 uses the data from the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to output current signals for lighting each segment from the data output terminals OUTa to OUTDp. As described above, the current output from the constant current driver 3178 is controlled by the resistance value of the resistor connected to the R-EXT terminal.

The driver 3179 receives a sink current of the current output from the constant current driver 3178 to light each segment of the 7-segment LED 13172. The driver 3179 controls the current suction timing of the terminals DIG-0 to DIG-3 to determine which 7-segment LED (digit) is to be displayed.

The Digit-Limit control unit 3181 controls the number of display digits of the 7-segment LED 13172 controlled by the driver circuit 13171. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the number of lit digits from 1 to 4 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to XXX0011B, all four digits are used in the digit register (DIGITREGISTER) of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181. Is written. Note that x indicates that either H or L data may be used, and whether the input data is H or L does not affect the truth table.

The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio when lighting the 7-segment LED 13172. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can control the duty ratio by setting from the outside, and controls the brightness at which the 7-segment LED 13172 lights up. The duty ratio control unit 3182 controls the duty ratio by controlling the pulse width of at least one of the timing signals sent to the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179. Specifically, D15 to D8 are set to 00100000B, and by inputting arbitrary data to D3 to D0, the duty register (DUTY REGISTER) of the duty ratio control unit 3182 has 16 steps of duty of 0/16 to 15/16. The ratio setting is written.

The data selector control unit 3183 controls the decoder settings. That is, the driver circuit 13171 controls whether or not to use the decoder 3175 by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D8 are set to 00100001B and D7 to D0 are set to 0001 ×××× B, the setting for using the decoder is written in the decode register, and D7 to D0 are set to 0000 ××. By inputting the data set to XXB, the setting of NO DECODER that does not use the decoder is written. The data selector control unit 3183 controls the 2 × 8 data selector 3176 to select data from the decoder 3175 when the decoder is set to be used, and 2 when the decoder is not used. The × 8 data selector 3176 controls to select data from the 8 × 4 data selector 3174.

The standby mode control unit 3184 controls the standby mode setting and the data clear setting. That is, the driver circuit 13171 can shift to the standby mode by setting from the outside. Specifically, the standby mode can be set by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0000B. In the standby mode, the setting at that time is maintained as it is, the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172 is cut off, and the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171 is suppressed.

Further, the driver circuit 13171 can clear all the data held inside by setting from the outside. Specifically, by inputting data in which D15 to D12 are set to 0100B and D3 to D0 are set to 0001B, all the data held in the registers and latches are cleared and initialized.

Oscillator 3185 produces the clock used in driver circuit 13171.

FIG. 31 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration on the main control board 1310 is shown by a dotted line.

FIG. 31 (A) shows the main control board box 1320 of the mounting example 1. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed, and the model number of the main control board 1310 is displayed on the surface thereof. (Seal sticking, engraving, printing, etc.) and opening sticker are stuck. The opening seal is a seal that records the history of opening the seal of the main control board 1310.

The mounting example 1 shown in FIG. 31 (B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In mounting example 1, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 may be mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are in the same direction.

The main control board 1310 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320 to form the main control unit 1300. The main control MPU 1311 is arranged at a position where it can be confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged so that it can be easily confirmed from the outside that no improper modification has been made by not arranging the parts around the main control MPU 1311.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 is arranged on the main control board 1310 at a position that can be visually recognized from the outside. The direction of the numbers displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317 may be the same as the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the model number display of 1320 on the main control board box. Further, it is preferable that the components are mounted so that the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310, and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 are the same. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the game machine in a horizontally long direction, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311 and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are in the same direction. It is preferable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to be. When the main control board 1310 is mounted on the game machine in a vertically long direction, the longitudinal direction of the accessory ratio indicator 1317, the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, and the longitudinal direction of the main control board 1310 are 90 degrees. It is advisable to mount the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 so as to face each other.

Further, the connectors CN1 and CN2 for drawing out the signal line from the main control board 1310 are end portions (upper length in the figure) along the long side of the main control board 1310 in the direction of being aligned with the accessory ratio display 1317. It is the upper end along the side, but it may be mounted at the lower end along the lower long side or the end along the left and right sides). That is, it is desirable that the connectors CN1 and CN2 are arranged at positions where the wiring (harness) connected to the connectors CN1 and CN2 overlaps with the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and does not interfere with the visibility of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. ..

Further, the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening sticker attached to the main control board box 1320 are attached at positions that do not overlap with either the main control MPU or the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

By mounting the accessory ratio indicator 1317 in this way, the model number display of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 is displayed in the correct orientation, improving their visibility and improving the visibility in the manufacturing process and the amusement park. Even in the inspection after installation, it is possible to confirm the ratio of accessories and the presence or absence of modification of the main control MPU 1311 without taking an unreasonable posture.

In another mounting example shown in FIG. 31 (C), the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the numerical display of the accessory ratio display 1317 are mounted so as to be in the same direction, but circuits other than the main control MPU 1311 are used. The direction of the model number display of the module (for example, IC) is different from the direction of the model number display of the main control MPU 1311 and the number display direction of the accessory ratio display 1317. Further, the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged at a position overlapping the model number display of the main control board box 1320 and the opening seal attached to the main control board box 1320. This is because the circuit modules other than the main control MPU 1311 are less important when inspecting for unauthorized modification, and therefore it is of little significance to make the orientations arranged on the main control board 1310 the same.

FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

As shown in FIG. 32 (A), the signal line 13173 between the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may become unstable due to the influence of noise. Therefore, it is desirable that the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 are arranged as close to each other as possible.

For example, as shown in the figure, the distance between the driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 (the length L2 of the wiring 13173) is the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio display 1317 (the length of the wiring 13191). Arrange so that it is shorter than L1). That is, L1 is larger than L2.

Further, as described above, as shown by the dotted line, no parts are arranged around the main control MPU 1311 in order to easily confirm from the outside that no improper modification has been made. Therefore, the wiring length L1 becomes a certain length, but L2 is made as short as possible.

The driver circuit 13171 and the 7-segment LED 13172 may be housed in one package or another package, and in either case, L1 is mounted so as to be larger than L2.

32 (B) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317 in another mounting example, and FIG. 32 (C) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the main control MPU 1311 and the accessory ratio display 1317, and FIG. 32 (C) is the mounting example shown in FIG. 32 (B). It is sectional drawing of a printed circuit board.

As shown in FIG. 32 (B), ground patterns 13192 are provided on both sides of the signal line 13191 between the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit 13171 of the accessory ratio indicator 1317. Further, in the printed circuit board, a prohibited area 13196 in which no signal pattern is provided is provided on the back surface and the inner layer of the signal line 13191. A ground pattern 13197 or a power supply pattern as a guard pattern may be provided on at least one of the back surface and the inner layer of the printed circuit board in the prohibited area 13196.

Explaining the arrangement of other signal lines in this implementation example, for example, the signal line 13193 that supplies the clock signal from the oscillator to the main control MPU 1311 avoids the prohibited area 13196 (that is, the signal line 13193 and the signal line 13191 are arranged. Arranged (so that they do not intersect). Further, the signal line 13194 connected to the main control MPU 1311 may be arranged so as to pass through the back surface or the inner layer through the through hole 13195. Also in this case, the signal line 13194 is arranged so as to avoid the prohibited area 13196 (that is, the signal line 13194 and the signal line 13191 do not intersect).

The main control board 1310 is generally composed of a two-layer board having a pattern on the front surface and the back surface and having no inner layer from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification. It can also be applied to a multilayer substrate having an inner layer (4 layers, 6 layers, etc.).

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a load register selection table of the driver circuit 13171.

The load register selection table is a table for determining a register for storing the data input to the driver circuit 13171.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has seven registers. The duty register is used by the duty ratio control unit 3182, and the duty ratio for lighting the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100000B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for setting the duty ratio and is written in the duty register of the duty ratio control unit 3182.

The decode register is used by the data selector control unit 3183 or the Digit-Limit control unit 3181, and the use of the decoder 3175, that is, the presence / absence of decoding and the number of display digits are set. The decode register and the digit number register may be configured as one register. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100001B, the data set in D7 to D0 is data for setting the presence or absence of decoding or data for setting the number of display digits, and is decoded by the data selector control unit 3183. It is written to the register or the digit register of the Digit-Limit control unit 3181.

The data register is used by the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D, and the data to be displayed in each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is set. For example, when D15 to D8 are 00100010B to 00100101B, the data set in D7 to D0 is the data for lighting the 7-segment LED, and is written to the data register in the 8-bit data latches 3173A to D.

The duty ratio, the presence / absence of decoding, and the number of display digits set in the registers described above do not need to be set each time the accessory ratio is displayed, and may be set once. Therefore, the initial setting is performed in step S28 of FIG. Is set as. If the initial setting is set only once, the setting may be changed due to the influence of noise or the like after the initial setting. Therefore, every time a predetermined condition (for example, the opening of the main body frame 4 is detected, a switching button is detected) It may be reset every time (is pressed). As a result, even if the setting is switched due to noise, the correct display can always be performed.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a character generator decoding table. The character generator decode table is used by the decoder 3175 to convert the input data into character data to be displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172. By using the character generator decoding table, characters such as numbers and some alphabets can be displayed without considering the font. Further, when displaying numbers, since D5 to D0 match the displayed numbers, the calculation result can be input to the driver circuit 13171 and displayed on the 7-segment LED 13172 without conversion.

The lighting of the decimal point of each digit of the 7-segment LED 13172 is controlled by D6.

FIG. 35 is a state transition diagram of the driver circuit 13171, and FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a display example of the accessory ratio indicator 1317.

The driver circuit 13171 of this embodiment has five states, that is, an initial state, a data input state, an LED lighting state (0000), an LED lighting state (lighting according to input data), and an LED lighting state (all lighting). Is being prepared.

In order to control these five states, there are blank, normal operation, register write, full lighting, and standby mode setting commands. The blank instruction cuts off the output of the constant current driver 3178 and the output of the driver 3179. The normal operation command displays the 7-segment LED 13172 after the completion of each setting. If a normal operation command is input without setting the display data, the 7-segment LED 13172 displays the number 0 in all digits. The register write instruction sets the number of digits used, sets the duty ratio, sets whether the decoder is used or not, and inputs display data. Select the register to write data in D11 to D8, and input the contents to be set in the register in D7 to D0 (see FIG. 33). The all lighting command turns on the output of the constant current driver 3178 on the data side and lights all segments of the 7-segment LED 13172. The standby instruction is divided into two according to the parameters, and there are a standby instruction that transitions to the standby state and a clear instruction that transitions to the initial state. The standby instruction maintains the setting at that time, stops the operation of the constant current driver 3178 and the driver 3179, cuts off the current output to the 7-segment LED 13172, and suppresses the power consumption of the driver circuit 13171. In addition, the clear instruction clears and initializes all the data held in the register or latch, and the display is also turned off.

Since the blank instruction is also a kind of display instruction, in the present specification, "display" includes any state of all lighting of the 7-segment LED, lighting of some segments, and all extinguishing.

A display example in each of the above-described states will be described with reference to FIG. 36.

When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the initial setting of the driver circuit 13171 is not completed or the display data is not set, so that the initial state (ALL BLANK) is set. As shown in FIG. 36 (A), the 7-segment LED 13172 All segments of are turned off and are not lit. Further, since the accessory ratio display 1317 cannot be visually recognized when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, it is preferable to set the standby mode and turn off the 7-segment LED 13172 to reduce the power consumption of the game machine.

Then, after the control data is set in the various control registers in the driver circuit 13171 and the initial setting is completed, the display data is input, and the 7-segment LED 13172 displays a predetermined display. As shown in FIG. 36B, this predetermined display may display “−” in all digits or light all segments. It is preferable that the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 can be confirmed by this predetermined display.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is advisable to display a predetermined value on all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the accessory ratio display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), “−” may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the LED is lit (lights according to the input data). Specifically, the accessory ratio is displayed, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits of the 7-segment LED13172, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (C), "y175" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 1 is 75%. If the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, it is preferable to display it so that it can be identified. For example, all digits (or numbers) are blinked and displayed, and the decimal point is lit or blinked.

Further, when the display switch 1318 is operated and the display data is input to the driver circuit 13171, the display content of the 7-segment LED 13172 is changed. That is, another kind of accessory ratio is displayed. Also in this case, the code indicating the display content is displayed in the left two digits, and the numerical value of the accessory ratio is displayed in the right two digits. In the example shown in FIG. 36 (D), "y263" is displayed, indicating that the accessory ratio 2 is 63%. In this case as well, it is preferable to display so as to be able to identify that the displayed accessory ratio is an abnormal value outside the specified range, as described above. A more specific display example of the accessory ratio will be described later with reference to FIG. 37.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the accessory ratio indicator 1317 is performed (FIG. 36 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned on. It is recommended to turn off the lights to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This accessory ratio non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed, but may be a different mode, as long as it can be distinguished from the accessory ratio display.

FIG. 36 (E) is a display example in which the accessory ratio display 1317 and the main control MPU 1311 have an abnormality and the accessory ratio cannot be displayed. The decimal point may be lit or blinking, or may be displayed differently for each digit. Further, the abnormal display may be in a mode different from that shown in the drawing, and may be in a mode that can be distinguished from the normal bonus display in order to indicate that the bonus ratio display is not possible.

Further, when the all lighting command is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are lit. Further, when a blank instruction or a standby instruction is input in any of the states, all the segments of the 7-segment LED 13172 are turned off while retaining the data. Further, when a data clear command is input in any of the states, all the data held in the register or the latch is cleared, all the segments of the 7-segment LED13172 are turned on, and the initial state is returned.

[8. Display of accessory ratio]
Next, a method of calculating and displaying the accessory ratio will be described.

As described above, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 provided on the main control board 1310. As described above, the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED and a liquid crystal display device, displays the value of the accessory ratio in the last 2 digits, and the type of the numerical value in the first 2 digits. Is displayed.

Further, the accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a 2-digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the numerical value of the accessory ratio and the type of the numerical value may be displayed alternately.

The display mode of the numerical value of the accessory ratio may be displayed in a different display mode depending on the comparison result between the accessory ratio and the predetermined reference value. For example, when the accessory ratio exceeds a predetermined reference value, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the reference is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. By changing the display mode according to the comparison result with the reference value, it is possible to easily recognize that the accessory ratio is abnormal.

The accessory ratio indicator 1317 may be composed of one or a plurality of LED lamps. When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of one LED lamp, the comparison result between the accessory ratio and the predetermined reference value is displayed in different modes. For example, if the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it is displayed in green, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference value, it is displayed in red. If the accessory ratio is smaller than the reference value, it lights up, and if the accessory ratio is larger than the reference threshold, it blinks.

When the accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of a plurality of (for example, 10) LED lamps, the accessory ratio is displayed with one LED lamp as 10%. For example, if the accessory ratio is 70% or more and less than 80%, seven LEDs are turned on. In this case, different display modes (display colors) may be displayed depending on the display content (proporty ratio or continuous bonus ratio, latest data display or medium-term data display, etc.).

In addition, when the total number of acquired balls is less than 6000, the collection period of the prize ball data is short and the value of the accessory ratio may not have converged, so that the display is displayed in a different display mode (display color, blinking, etc.). You may. It is desirable that the display mode when the total number of acquired balls is less than the threshold value is different from the display mode when the total number of acquired balls exceeds the above-mentioned reference value.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may switch between the latest data display, the medium-term data display, and the long-term data display. The latest data display is the accessory ratio calculated by using the previous counter value currently being written in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The medium-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the cumulative total in the ring counters shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C). The long-term data display is the accessory ratio calculated using the total cumulative total in the ring counter shown in FIGS. 27 (B) and 27 (C).

The accessory ratio display 1317 may also be used by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio. The display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, but it is preferable that the progress of the game continues. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the accessory ratio can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main frame 4 is opened during the special symbol variation display game, the accessory ratio is displayed, but if the main frame 4 is closed before the variation time elapses, the variation display for the remaining time can be performed. can. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the accessory ratio, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display a value other than the accessory ratio. For example, the number of prizes won or the number of prize balls paid out for each type of prize opening per unit time may be displayed. The unit time may be switched and displayed by operating the display switch 1318, such as 1 minute, 10 minutes, 1 hour, and 10 hours.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may display the base. The base is the normal ball output rate excluding the special prize (during the big hit), and can be calculated by dividing the number of safe balls by the number of out balls. The number of launch balls (number of out balls) is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020. As described above, the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided near the exits (backflow prevention member 1007) of the rails 1001 and 1002 that guide the game ball from the ball launcher to the game area 5a (see FIGS. 10 and 16). Further, the number of out balls may be detected by the discharge ball sensor 3060. As described above, the discharge ball sensor 3060 is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). Further, an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 (see FIG. 53) for detecting a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a is provided, and the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 is determined. The number of out balls may be detected by the total of the number of game balls detected by the start opening sensors 2104 and 2551 and the number of game balls detected by the various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554 and 2557. Further, a launch supply ball sensor (not shown) that detects a game ball supplied to the ball launcher 680, and a game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 but not reaching the game area 5a (so-called foul ball). A foul ball sensor (not shown) is provided to detect the number of foul balls, and the number of out balls (number of launched balls) is calculated by subtracting the number of foul balls from the number of game balls supplied to the ball launching device 680 detected by the launch supply ball sensor. It may be detected.

The number of out balls may be counted by any of the methods described above. That is, among the illustrated sensors, it is sufficient if either the discharge ball sensor 3060 or the launch ball sensor 1020 is provided.

In addition, the number of safe balls is equal to the number of prize balls paid out. In addition, the base may be defined as the ball output rate for each game state (during normal game, during electric power support, during probability fluctuation, during time reduction), and may be calculated by the number of safe balls divided by the number of out balls for each game state. .. By displaying the base on the accessory ratio display 1317, it is possible to check the deviation of the ball ejection performance from the design value during operation on the spot for each gaming machine. In addition, since the ball ejection performance can be confirmed without using a hall controller, it becomes easy to inspect each gaming machine at the time of on-site inspection of the game hall.

The accessory ratio display 1317 provides information on other prizes and prize balls in the base (the number of prizes in the general prize opening 2001 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, the number of prizes in the starting port 2002 and the number of prize balls due to the prize, etc. The number of prizes won in the large prize openings 2005 and 2006, the number of prize balls due to the prizes, etc.) may be displayed.

The accessory ratio display 1317 may always display the accessory ratio, or may display the accessory ratio by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the accessory ratio is started, the display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the accessory ratio display 1317 may display the accessory ratio. good. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame is open, the accessory ratio indicator 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, the display content may be changed for each operation of the display switch 1318. For example, as shown in FIG. 37, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, A7, which means the accessory ratio (cumulative), is displayed in the first two digits, and the accessory for a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls. The ratio is displayed in the last two digits. When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to A6, which means the continuous bonus ratio (cumulative), and the continuous bonus ratio to a predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is lowered by 2. It may be displayed in digits (FIG. 37 (B)). Furthermore, when the display switch 1318 is operated once, y7, which means the accessory ratio (6000 prize balls), is displayed in the first two digits, and the accessory ratio based on the latest data is displayed in the last two digits (latest data display). (Fig. 37 (C)). When the display switch 1318 is operated once again, the display of the first two digits switches to y6, which means the bonus ratio (cumulative), and the bonus ratio to the predetermined number (for example, 60,000) of prize balls is changed to the last two digits. The display (medium-term data display) may be performed (FIG. 37 (D)).

The display switch 1318 may not be provided as an independent switch, but may also be used as a RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. That is, the switch functions as a RAM clear switch when operated when the power is turned on, and functions as a display switch 1318 when operated during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. By consolidating the functions of the RAM clear switch and the display switch 1318 into one switch, the number of switches operated by the staff in the amusement park becomes one, and erroneous operations by inexperienced staff can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accurately calculate the accessory ratio of the operating gaming machine, and to confirm the gambling of the operating gaming machine.

In addition, the data of the number of prize balls is accumulated as the data for calculating / displaying the prize ball 13136, and when the check code is abnormal, the data for calculating / displaying the prize ratio 13136 is deleted, so that the wrong character ratio is displayed. Can be avoided.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is deleted under a condition different from the deletion condition of the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311, the accurate prize ball number data is retained. , You can calculate the exact prize ratio.

In addition, since the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not accidentally erased by the operation of the staff in the game hall. Since the data for calculating and displaying the object ratio is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the data is not erased by the erroneous operation of the staff of the game hall. Further, since the playground cannot intentionally delete the data for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio, the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is improved, and it is possible to prevent the state where the accessory ratio is high from being concealed.

[9. View base]
[9-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
Up to this point, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays the accessory ratio has been described. Next, an example of a pachinko machine that calculates and displays a base value will be described. In this embodiment, the pachinko machine that calculates and displays the base value will be described exclusively, but the accessory ratio may be calculated and displayed together with the base value.

In the pachinko machine described below, as described above, when a game ball wins a prize at the starting port (first starting port 2002, second starting port 2004), a lottery is performed by a random number and a special symbol variation display game is executed. .. The fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol fluctuation display game is a fluctuation pattern of a relatively short time (normal fluctuation pattern of about 10 seconds, shortened fluctuation pattern of about 2 to 5 seconds that is easily selected when the number of holds is large). Or, there is a fluctuation pattern for a relatively long time (a fluctuation pattern such as super reach exceeding 1 minute). When calculating the base value with a pachinko machine, the notification of the base value requires less urgency than the notification of the error, so that the notification can be performed at the timing when the special symbol variation display game is switched to the next variation display game. However, if the variable display time is long, the number of out balls (number of launched balls) and the number of prize balls (paid balls) are met when the predetermined conditions are met without waiting for the end of one special symbol variable display game. It is better to calculate the base value and update the display when the number) changes). Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied during the game (for example, even in the special symbol variation display game) (for example, the number of out balls (number of launch balls) or the number of prize balls (number of payout balls)). ) Changes), the base value is calculated and displayed. Next, a specific configuration of a pachinko machine that performs such an operation will be described.

FIG. 38 is a block diagram showing a configuration around the main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 that calculates and displays the base value.

The pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 38 has substantially the same configuration as the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 17, but the configuration represented by reference numeral 1317 is not a bonus ratio indicator but a base indicator. The base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may use, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED as shown in FIGS. 4 and 28, and may have another number of digits (for example, 2 digits). A 7-segment LED may be used.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment acquires data on the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the area update process (step S81) for calculating the accessory ratio of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated and displayed. In the following description, the “accessory ratio calculation area update process” in step S81 of FIG. 23 is read as the “base calculation area update process”, and the “accessory ratio calculation / display process” in step S89 is “base”. The explanation will be read as "calculation / display processing". Further, the "character ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is read as "base calculation area 13128", and the "character ratio calculation / display code 13135" is read as "base calculation / display code 13135". The description will be described by replacing "data for calculating / displaying accessory ratio 13136" with "data for calculating / displaying 13136".

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls is calculated using the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value each time for each timer interrupt cycle. Is directly updated (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822).

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open and the player can win many prize balls, but even if the opening and ending times of the big hit game are included. good. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric power support may be included in the special prize. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric power support, from the opening of the starting port 2004 to the predetermined time after closing (for example, the ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The required number of seconds) may be included in the special prize.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, the special prizes related to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 in the gaming machine of this embodiment are during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending). Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize, the normal (so-called big hit) prizes to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used to calculate the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (large winning openings 2005, 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls as the base value regardless of the playing state (whether or not they are in the special prize). Not used, other accessories (starting port 2004) can switch whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the calculation of the base value or not, depending on the game state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). It will be. Not using the number of winning balls and the number of prize balls in the calculation of the base value means that the paid out prize balls are not counted in (the number of prize balls other than the special prize which is the division number in the calculation of the base value). Even if a winning signal is input, it also includes not creating edge information for paying out the winning ball by the winning signal.

Further, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, small hits occur during a short time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated except during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during the time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and the winning balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 reports that the payout is completed. This variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. Further, although the game balls have won the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit value, and even if the winning to the starting opening is not held, the prize balls are paid out, so that the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a sensor detection signal, the out balls are out. Acquire the number of balls = 1. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the total number of out spheres used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out sphere is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. You can judge whether the base is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described later, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of the base. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the examples described later). Further, even if information on winning a prize in a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Further, when the player is operating the firing handle, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the palm or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or cheating that detects the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value. Further, when the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that the cost increase of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39, the base was calculated by excluding the number of prize balls during the special prize and the number of out balls. , The base value may be calculated by counting the number of out balls by excluding the number of balls that have won the big prize opening.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Furthermore, when an abnormal base value is calculated (for example, when the total number of winning balls is larger than the total number of outs and a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value), the base value is not calculated. May be good. When the base value is expressed as a percentage, the base value is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls ÷ the total number of out balls by 100. Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217.

The predetermined number to be multiplied by the total number of prize balls stored in the division input register A131216 controls the number of digits of the calculated base value. For example, if this predetermined number is 100, the base value is calculated up to the 1st place in 100%, and the minority or less is not calculated. If this predetermined number is 10000, the base value is calculated in parts per hundred to two decimal places. That is, by dividing the quotient output from the arithmetic circuit by 100, the base value of a fraction of two decimal places can be calculated.

Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. During the wait time of 32 clocks from writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 to reading data from the division result register A131218, the main control MPU 1311 waits for other processing even if it waits without performing processing. May be done. For example, a random number for determining a jackpot may be updated between writing data to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and reading data from the division result register A131218. More specifically, since the hard random number generated by the random number generation circuit 13112 is updated at the timing of the clock period (or the signal obtained by dividing the clock period) supplied to the main control MPU 1311, the wait time Hard random numbers are also updated.

That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, even while the arithmetic circuit 13121 is executing the base arithmetic processing, other processing related to the game can be executed in parallel. Other processes related to the game include at least a process of updating a random number for determining a win. Further, during the calculation (division) process in the calculation circuit 13121, the random numbers that affect the result of the game are updated one or more times.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

There are various methods for base notification, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may notify the base value at all times or at a predetermined timing. By notifying the player of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the condition of the pachinko machine. At that time, the display mode described in the accessory ratio may be applied to the base value. When notifying the base value, the calculated base value is displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display or display device. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded up, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

When displaying the base value on the base display 1317 composed of the 7-segment LED, the main control MPU 1311 inputs the display data to a predetermined register provided in the driver circuit 13171 of the base display 1317. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates display data set in the register of the driver circuit 13171 as a base notification command. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the digit for displaying the numerical value in D15 to D8 in the "data n setting", and the display content is specified in D7 to D0. Is generated and written to the shift register 3171.

When displaying a base value on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, a predetermined reference value (for example, 50%) may be provided for the base value, and if the reference value is exceeded, the display mode may be changed. .. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, when the standard is exceeded, red, etc.) is displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. Also, at each stage, you may display self-deprecating comments such as "I'm feeling good", "I'm feeling down", "I'm not bad", "It's amazing in a sense", etc. when the base value is low. If the base value exceeds the reference value, the pachinko machine is operating differently than expected, and there is a possibility that fraud has been performed. For this reason, it is desirable to display in a manner that indicates a warning such as red. Further, the display mode may be the same as or similar to the weak error that does not stop the progress of the game. Here, the same means that at least one of the display, the lamp, and the sound is the same.

In addition, various lamps, liquid crystal displays, sounds, and the like may notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.). Further, when the base cannot be calculated (Yes in step S902) and there is no base value calculated in the past, a base notification command for displaying the base notification failure on the liquid crystal display device may be generated. By transmitting the notification command to the generated sub-board, the state of the base can be notified by the effect device controlled by the sub-board, so that a wider variety of notifications can be made than the main board, and the load on the main board can be increased. Can be reduced. Further, by notifying that the base display is not possible when nothing is displayed on the base display 1317, it is possible to distinguish between the failure of the base display 1317 and the absence of the base value to be displayed. Further, by displaying the abnormality of the base value on the liquid crystal display device, it is possible to know the abnormality of the base value without looking at the back surface side of the game board provided with the base display 1317.

The function display unit 1400 may also serve as the base display 1317. In this case, a specific LED lamp (or 7-segment LED) of the function display unit 1400 may be used for constant notification. Further, it may be notified at a predetermined timing (for example, when the main body frame 4 is opened, while the special symbol variation display game is not being executed, the timing at which the special symbol variation display game ends).

The base information may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. In this case, as in the base calculation / display processing (FIGS. 47, 49, etc.) described later, when the base information is output at a predetermined timing (for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls). good.

The base information output from the external terminal board 784 may be a binary signal (high, low) indicating whether the calculated base value is high or low with respect to a predetermined threshold value. Further, a signal having a length indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, a pulse of 30 milliseconds when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%). Further, a number of continuous pulses indicating an outline of the calculated base value may be output (for example, three continuous pulses when the base value is 30% or more and less than 40%).

Even if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may be generated, and if the base value is not updated, the base notification command may not be generated. The display of the base value continues even if the base notification command is not generated.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 56 and the like, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal, a base notification command for notifying the abnormality of the base value is generated, and the player or the hall employee is notified of the abnormality of the base. It may be notified.

Further, whether or not to notify the player of the base may be determined according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the base value is constantly notified to the player, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Is.

Further, based on the calculated base value, the effect of the special symbol variation display game being executed or executed in the future may be changed. For example, it is preferable to prepare a plurality of display selection tables and select an effect from the display selection tables (see FIGS. 64 to 68) that differ depending on the base value.

In addition, the base value may exceed or fall below a predetermined threshold value (for example, 30%) during the special symbol variation display game. Therefore, when the threshold value is exceeded or falls during the special symbol variation display game, the effect of the special symbol variation display game may be changed. The effect may be changed in the same manner or the effect may be changed in a different manner depending on whether the base value exceeds a predetermined threshold value or decreases.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value. As shown in FIG. 23, in this embodiment, the number of prize balls is updated in the base calculation area update process in step S81, and the base value is calculated in the base ratio calculation / display process in step S89.

Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base. The prize ball number buffer is updated in the area update process (step S81). After that, the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89), and the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. Of the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80), the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951. When the payout control board 951 backs up the number of unpaid prize balls, the payout control board 951 needs to send a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310, but it is necessary to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout. No. On the other hand, when backing up the number of unpaid prize balls on the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951 needs to notify the main control board 1310 of the completion of ball payout, but sends a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. No need.

In the pachinko machine according to the embodiment described above, the base value is calculated without delay during the game, and the state of the game machine can be known in real time. Therefore, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the gaming machine at an early stage. For example, when it is determined that the base is abnormal when the base value is lower or higher than the predetermined threshold value, the base value is calculated multiple times during one special symbol variation display game, and the base value moves up and down across the predetermined threshold value and becomes abnormal. Even if it is determined to be, the game is not stopped, and the calculation process of the base value is continuously executed regardless of the determination of abnormality. For example, there are short-term games such as normal fluctuations and long-term games such as reach fluctuations in special symbol fluctuation display games, and the base value is calculated from the start to the end of one special symbol fluctuation display game. When the conditions to be performed are satisfied multiple times, the base value should be calculated each time, and the base value should be updated and displayed each time. This is because if the calculation of the base value during the special symbol variation display game is restricted (for example, the base value is calculated and updated only once at the end of the variation display), the change of the base value may be long depending on the calculation timing of the base value. This is because the hall may be inconvenienced because the information necessary for the operation of the hall is not output at an appropriate timing without noticing the time.

Also, if the launched game ball has not won a prize in the starting opening or the general winning opening, the base value will decrease. In this state, the player is losing money, so for example, an additional effect (for example, an effect related to a win that is not related to a change in the base value, or an effect related to a change in the base value) appears in addition to the effect performed on the liquid crystal display. A notice effect with a high degree of expectation for a big hit (a notice effect with a high degree of expectation such as the next notice effect among the effects not related to the change in the base value, or a change in the base value) Of the specific effects that appear, a notice effect with a high degree of expectation (for example, the base value is displayed in a rainbow display) may be performed. As a result, the player can reduce the discomfort felt by not winning the starting opening and the general winning opening, and can motivate the player to continue the game.

On the other hand, if many of the launched game balls win the starting opening or the general winning opening (if more than the average number of winnings in the past), the base value increases. In this state, even if the result of the big hit lottery is wrong, the player is paid out more game balls than usual, so that the player's disappointment is reduced. The production of the variable display game may be changed to a production with a low degree of expectation.

[9-2. Variations in the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value]
Next, variations of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 to 44. The outline of the update timing of the number of prize balls and the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 41: Calculation of the number of prize balls-> Update the number of prize balls-> Calculate the base value-> Send the payout command-Fig. 42: Calculate the number of prize balls-> Update the number of prize balls-> Send the payout command-> Calculate the base value-Fig. 43: Calculate the number of prize balls → Send payout command → Update prize balls → Calculate base value ・ Figure 44: Calculate prize balls → Send payout command → Confirm command reception → Update prize balls → Calculate base value ・ Figure 45: Calculate prize balls → Send payout command → Notification of completion of payout → Update of number of prize balls → Calculation of base value The variations of FIGS. 41 to 44 include not only the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39 and the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40, but also described later. It can be applied to any of the base calculation area update processing and the base calculation / display processing.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 42, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the base calculation area update process (step S81) is executed at the indicated position, and the base ratio is calculated after the output data setting process (step S90). -The display process (step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and calculates the base calculation area. In the update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated. After that, the payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951 in the output data setting process (step S90), and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 43, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, the output data setting process (step S90) is followed by the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89). To execute.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or the prize ball number buffer in the embodiment described later) is updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command, and the base ratio is calculated. The base value is updated in the display process (step S89). The prize ball number buffer may be updated with the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command (even if the payout command has not been transmitted) instead of the number of prize balls corresponding to the transmitted payout command.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. As described above, depending on whether the number of unpaid prize balls among the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is backed up by the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951, the payout command reception confirmation or Either of the ball payout completion may be omitted.

The timing at which the main control MPU 1311 receives the command reception confirmation and the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951 depends on the processing speed of the payout control board 951 and the operating speed of the payout device 830. The order of the step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89) does not matter.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the payout command reception confirmation from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls is the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command for which the command reception confirmation is received (step S81). Alternatively, in the embodiment described later, the prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout. In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, since the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the payout control board 951. Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the command reception from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, but the ball payout completion notification may be omitted.

In the procedure shown in FIG. 45, unlike the timer interrupt processing procedure shown in FIG. 23, after receiving the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base ratio calculation / display process are performed. (Step S89) is executed.

That is, the main control MPU 1311 detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), calculates the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening in the prize ball control process (step S80), and outputs data setting process. In (step S90), a payout command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

When the payout control board 951 stores the received payout command in the memory, the payout control board 951 transmits a payout command reception confirmation to the main control board 1310. Then, when the payout control board 951 pays out the prize ball according to the payout command, the payout control board 951 notifies the main control board 1310 of the completion of the ball payout.

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the ball payout completion notification from the payout control board 951, in the base calculation area update process (step S81), the total number of prize balls (or, in the embodiment described later) is the number of prize balls for which the payout is completed. The prize ball number buffer) is updated, and the base value is updated in the base ratio calculation / display process (step S89).

In the procedure shown in FIG. 44, the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is backed up by the main control board 1310 so that the data of the number of unpaid prize balls is not lost when a power failure occurs. Therefore, although it is necessary to notify the completion of ball payout from the payout control board 951 to the main control board 1310, the command reception confirmation may be omitted.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment updates the number of prize balls and the number of out balls, which are parameters used for calculating the base value, when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, in the process shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls is updated. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 43, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout command is transmitted. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 44, the number of prize balls is updated when the receipt of the payout command is confirmed. Further, in the process shown in FIG. 45, the number of prize balls is updated when the payout of the prize balls is completed.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of prize balls during the special prize may not be accurately counted due to the difference between the timing of determining whether the game state is in the special prize and the timing of updating the number of prize balls. In particular, the problem becomes greater when the time from winning the winning opening to updating the number of winning balls is long. Therefore, a flag is attached to the prize during the special prize, and the flag is inherited in the number of prize balls, the payout command, the reception confirmation, and the payout completion notification due to the prize. Then, using the flag, it is determined at each stage whether or not the prize ball is a special prize. In this way, even if it takes a long time from winning the prize to the winning opening to updating the number of prize balls, the number of prize balls in the special prize can be accurately counted and updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are updated at these triggers, and the base value is calculated and displayed. That is, since the base value can be known by the gaming machine alone, the time required for nail adjustment in the manufacturing process and the inspection process can be shortened, and the gaming machine can be efficiently manufactured.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls.

When the main control board 1310 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected is not yet obtained. Add to the number of payout balls. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of unpaid balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the number of prize balls to be paid out is calculated. Further, the number of prize balls may be updated after the payout command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951.

On the other hand, when the payout control board 951 holds the number of unpaid balls, when the winning opening sensor detects the winning of the game ball in the switch input process (step S74), the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening in which the winning is detected. Is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Even if the pachinko machine is out of balls and the prize balls cannot be paid out, the payout command is transmitted and the number of unpaid balls is held by the payout control board 951. In this case, it is advisable to update the prize ball number buffer or the total prize ball number for calculating the base value each time the payout command is transmitted.

Further, when the payout control board 951 receives the payout command, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated. A predetermined upper limit may be set for the number of prize balls, but the upper limit may not be set. In addition, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value may be updated each time the prize balls are actually paid out. The payout control board 951 transmits the number of prize balls for calculating the base value to the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 calculates the base value using the received number of prize balls.

Further, as will be described later in FIG. 47, without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1, every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning, or every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). , Steps S891 and S892 may be executed.

As explained above, the number of prize balls for calculating the base value can be updated at various timings, but when the number of prize balls is updated, the base value is calculated without delay and the base display 1317 is displayed in real time. The base value may be calculated and displayed at a predetermined timing (for example, every minute).

[9-3. Timing of updating the number of prize balls and calculating the base value]
Next, variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 39 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 46 and Fig. 47: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls-Fig. 48 and Fig. 49: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of out-balls Calculation ・ Fig. 50 and Fig. 51: The base value is updated when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S813). In FIG. 46, the same step number as the above-described base calculation area update process (FIG. 39) is assigned the same step number, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. If the game state is during the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S824 without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811).

Then, it is determined whether there are prize balls, that is, whether the number of acquired prize balls is 1 or more (step S812). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813). Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815). For example, an abnormal number of prize balls is a prize equivalent to 10 or more prizes per minute considering the number of prize balls at a predetermined time other than during the special prize (for example, the number of prize balls at the general prize opening or the starting opening). For example, when a ball) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. If the number of prize balls is abnormal, the acquired number of prize balls does not have to be added to the prize ball buffer in step S813, and the number of prize balls added to the prize ball buffer in step S813 is subtracted. May be good.

As a result, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the player or the hall employee is notified that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. For example, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be notified by various lamps, a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, a sound, or the like. Further, an abnormality in the number of prize balls may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park. Further, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal in the calculation of the base value. In this case, the prize ball may be paid out to the player. Further, when the number of prize balls is determined to be abnormal and the notification is performed by the above-mentioned notification means (sound, lamp, LED, liquid crystal display device, information output from the external terminal plate 784, etc.), the number of prize balls determined to be abnormal is determined. It may be used to calculate the base value. Further, the game may be temporarily stopped. Specifically, the main control board 1310 initializes all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 and initializes all the data of the RAM of the peripheral control unit 1511 even if the RAM clear switch is not operated. Then, in the initial state, the game is started from the operation check. As another method of stopping the game, the game is temporarily stopped (for example, the variable display of the special symbol is stopped), and then the error notification is stopped, the game returns to the original state, and the game is restarted. Therefore, the power failure monitoring circuit outputs a power failure detection signal even if the power failure monitoring circuit does not detect a drop in the power supply voltage, and the main control MPU 1311 backs up all the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 to stop the game. Then, after the error notification is completed, the data of the main control built-in RAM 1312 is restored from the backup area, and the game is restarted. At this time, since the peripheral control unit 1511 waits for a command from the main control board 1310 as it is, the interrupted game is restarted by restarting the operation of the main control board 1310. However, 100 game balls (that is, out balls) are launched into the game area 5a, and all the game balls may win a prize at the general winning opening or the starting opening, so that an abnormality in the number of winning balls is notified. It is desirable that the mode to be performed is a gentle mode (for example, a lower volume or a lower amount of light than a normal error notification), which is less urgent than a normal error (magnetic sensor error, etc.). Also, the display time may be the same as a normal error or may be shorter. In some cases, the notification time may be set to 0 seconds and the notification may not be performed.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S817), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822).

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S817 has timed up (step S824). Then, when the time is up for the prize ball abnormality notification timer, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S825). In step S824, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. You may. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 46, it was determined in step S985 whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, but after the number of out balls is acquired, the number of prize balls is abnormal in comparison with the number of out balls. (That is, whether there is an abnormality in the base value) may be determined. For example, when the number of prize balls exceeding the number of out balls is counted in a predetermined time, or considering the number of prize balls at the general winning opening or the starting opening, the out balls are won at a high rate (for example, 50% or more). For example.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 47, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 47, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display process (FIG. 40), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, the determination result of comparing the number of prize balls and the threshold value Th1 in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 47), the prize ball number buffer value is set by the flag. May be determined whether is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1.

If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold value Th1 or more, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). That is, if the number of prize balls counted from a predetermined starting point satisfies a predetermined condition (the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than the threshold Th1), the fractional portion of the number of prize balls is used. Leave (the fraction obtained by subtracting the threshold Th1 from the prize ball number buffer is left in the prize ball number buffer), store the other part in the memory (add the threshold value Th1 to the total prize ball number), and use it to calculate the base value. Execute the process to be performed. Specifically, when the threshold Th1 is 100, the prize ball number buffer value is 99, and when 5 prize balls are generated by winning a prize in the general winning opening, the prize ball number buffer value is 104 pieces. However, 100 pieces are moved to the total number of prize balls and used for calculating the base value, and the remaining 4 pieces are left in the prize ball number buffer. In this case, the count of the four prize balls left in the prize ball number buffer is used in the calculation of the base value when the prize ball number buffer value becomes the threshold value Th1 or more next time. Further, although the threshold value Th1 = 100 is described, other numerical values such as 1000 may be used. However, if a large threshold Th1 is set so that the base is not calculated even if a jackpot is obtained, the detection of fraud may be delayed. Therefore, the threshold Th1 is less than or equal to the number of prize balls paid out in one jackpot (multiple types). If there is a big hit (for example, 4 rounds and 8 rounds of big hits), it is better to set it to the minimum value or less of the number of prize balls of the big hit. Also, from the viewpoint of detecting fraud at an early stage, it is advisable to update the base value frequently. For example, it is preferable that the threshold value Th1 is 10 instead of 100 because the base value is updated frequently.

In addition, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) of winning without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. Further, steps S891 and S892 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1. This predetermined time may be measured by a timer operated by the main control MPU 1311, or may be measured by the output of an RTC (real-time clock).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. If the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the arithmetic circuit 13121 will result in an error (or indefinite), so that it does not have to be stored in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

Further, when the total number of out balls is 0 or when the calculated base value becomes an abnormal value, the base value may not be calculated and the base calculation area 13128 may not be updated. For example, when the total number of out balls is less than or equal to the total number of prize balls, the base value is 100% or more, the number of prize balls equal to or more than the number of fired balls (out balls) is obtained, and the game is normally performed. Since it is not in the present state, it is not necessary to store the numerical value in the division input registers 131216 and 131217 and calculate the base value. Further, when the base value is calculated and the value read from the division result register A131218 is 100% or more, it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the abnormality of the base value may be determined with 1500% as a threshold value. Since the upper limit of the theoretical base value of a pachinko machine with a maximum number of prize balls of 15 for the winning opening is 1500%, a base value exceeding 1500% is an impossible value, and the gaming machine is abnormal. It can be determined that there is. In this case as well, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, or it is not necessary to update the base calculation area 13128 with the value read from the division result register A131218.

Further, the threshold value for determining the abnormality of the base value may be another value. A normal value (for example, 30% to 50%) of the base value in the normal operation of the pachinko machine is determined, and if it is out of the range of the normal value, the base calculation area 13128 is set to the value read from the division result register A131218. It is not necessary to update the display of the base value without updating.

Although the case where the base value is not displayed has been described above, even if the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal base value may be displayed.

As will be described later in FIG. 52, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are the same. It may be initialized at the timing (for example, every predetermined number of prize balls, every predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

As described above, the pachinko machine of the present embodiment determines whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal each time the number of prize balls is acquired, so that fraudulent activity can be detected at an early stage. This is because, in a normal game, a considerable number of game balls (for example, 50% of the number of launched balls) do not win a prize in the general winning openings 2001 and the starting openings 2002 and 2004 with a high probability. Therefore, an abnormality in winning a prize in the winning openings (general winning openings 2001 and starting openings 2002, 2004) that are always open is determined and notified.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls satisfies a predetermined condition, an accurate base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 46 and 47, since the base value is calculated when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, compared to the case where the base value is calculated for each prize ball). The load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 48, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls as a result of the determination in step S812, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 48, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls. Therefore, for example, when it is determined that the game ball wins a prize at the starting port to generate a look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a mode different from the usual mode (blinking display, red hold, etc.), The player expects the special symbol variation display game corresponding to the pre-read hold to be a big hit, but the player is discouraged if the special symbol variation display game is lost. Even in such a case, if the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of prize balls as in the present embodiment, the disappointment of the player as described above can be reduced. This is because the calculation of the base value is delayed from the timing when the prize ball is generated, so that the base value increased by the prize ball due to winning the winning opening is notified. That is, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed at the time of winning the starting port, even if the number of prize balls paid out at the time of winning the starting port is added, the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, threshold Th1 = 100) is obtained. If not reached, the base value will not be updated. That is, the base value displayed to the player has not changed. However, since the prize ball was obtained, the base value should rise (only the lower numerical value changes due to the number of displayed digits, and the display may not change). Therefore, even if the above-mentioned look-ahead effect is out of order, the player thinks that the base value will rise later (that is, the condition is good), and the decline in interest can be suppressed. In other words, even if it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed, the base value is not updated if the prize ball buffer value does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th1). Further, when it is determined that the look-ahead effect is executed and the prize ball buffer value reaches a predetermined number, the calculation of the base value may be delayed until the prize ball buffer value reaches the predetermined number next time. ..

The player may be able to select whether to delay the calculation of the base value or to calculate without delay. For example, at the start of the game, the operation button 220C can be used for selection. Further, the calculation timing of the base value may be determined by lottery. Further, when it is decided to perform the look-ahead effect, it is preferable to execute the effect capable of notifying the delay of the calculation of the base value. If the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game has reached the upper limit, the jackpot lottery will not be executed even if the starting port is won. Even in this case, since the prize balls are paid out with the winning of the starting port, the number of the prize balls is counted and used for the calculation of the base value. In addition, at the time of a specific error, even if you win a prize at the start opening or general winning opening, if it is treated as if there was no prize and the prize balls are not paid out, the number of prize balls will not be counted, and depending on the prize, the base value Is not updated.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 49, the base value is updated at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 49, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). Various methods can be used to determine whether the out-ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the number of out balls may be compared with the threshold value Th2, or the value of a predetermined bit in the storage area for the number of out balls may be used for determination (specifically, the storage area for the number of out balls is composed of 8 bits. , If the most significant bit becomes 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more). Further, the determination result of comparing the number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 in the base calculation area update process (FIG. 48) is recorded in a flag, and in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 49), the number of out balls is determined by the flag. It may be determined whether or not the threshold value is Th2 or more.

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation / display process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the threshold Th2 is added to the total out-ball number (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out-ball number buffer (step S900). In addition, steps S899 and S900 may be executed every predetermined time (for example, 1 minute) without comparing the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th2.

After that, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

The total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are cumulative values since the pachinko machine 1 started operation, but the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are set at the same timing (for example, a predetermined prize). It may be initialized for each number of balls and for each predetermined number of out balls).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value, notify the base value by a specific effect, or notify an abnormality of the base value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value can be updated and displayed every time the number of out balls (number of launched balls) reaches a predetermined number. Therefore, the base value can be displayed at an appropriate timing. In addition, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which fun is pursued.

In addition, the number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls each time a prize ball (winning detection, payout command transmission, payout command arrival, prize ball payout completion, etc.) is performed. This is because the base value may not be calculated correctly if it is confirmed whether a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, whether there is an out ball corresponding to the prize ball) when adding the number of prize balls. For example, even if the firing is not performed for a predetermined time (about 1 minute), the slinging state caused by the game ball being caught by the nail arranged in the game area is resolved, and the game ball is delayed in the winning opening. This is because there are cases where a prize is won. Therefore, it is desirable to update the number of prize balls regardless of the presence or absence of out balls.

When both the out-ball number and the out-ball number buffer value are smaller than the threshold value Th2, it may be displayed that the out-ball number buffer value is a fraction smaller than the threshold value Th2, or the out-ball number buffer value may be displayed.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 48 and 49, since the base value is calculated when the number of out balls reaches a predetermined number, it is required to calculate the base value rather than calculating the base value every time an out ball is detected. The amount of calculation (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced. When a new base value is calculated, a base notification command for notifying the calculated base value is generated and the new base value is notified, but until then, the conventional base value is notified. Will be done.

FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 50, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , Record the number of out balls in the out ball number buffer. In FIG. 50, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 51, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold value Th1 or more, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. The base notification command may simply notify the base value or notify an abnormality of the base value. It should be noted that the base notification command may be generated every time the base value is calculated, the base value may be calculated, or the base notification command may not be generated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 51, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the base calculation area 13128.

The data of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process (FIGS. 39, 46, 47, 48, and 48) executed by the main control MPU 1311. It is written in FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.) and read out in the base calculation / display process (FIG. 40, FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Further, the data of the prize ball number buffer and the out ball number buffer of the base calculation area 13128 are written in the base calculation area update process (FIGS. 46, 48, 50, etc.) executed by the main control MPU 1311, and the base calculation is performed. -Read by display processing (FIG. 47, FIG. 49, FIG. 51, etc.). Therefore, the base calculation area update process and the base calculation / display process can be configured separately from the timer interrupt process (game control program), and the programs for the accessory ratio calculation / display process can be shared even for game machines with different specifications. can.

FIG. 52 (A) shows an example of the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the prize ball number buffer, the specific prize ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. The prize ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize, and is based on the case where the number of prize balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of prize balls). Is used to calculate. The total number of prize balls is the total number of prize balls paid out to the player other than during the special prize. The out ball number buffer is the number of game balls fired by the player other than during the special prize, and is used to calculate the base when the number of out balls meets a predetermined condition (for example, for each predetermined number of out balls). Be done. The winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of winning balls in the general winning opening and the starting opening. The specific winning ball number buffer temporarily stores the number of balls won in a specific general winning opening or starting opening. The winning ball number buffer is used when counting the number of out balls based on the number of balls passing through the out port (FIGS. 55 and 56). The specific winning ball number buffer is used when the number of out balls is corrected by the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening (FIGS. 71 and 72). The total number of out-balls is the total number of game balls fired by the player except during the special prize. The base is calculated by multiplying the total number of prize balls by the total number of out balls × 100, and is a numerical value expressed as a percentage, which is calculated in step S903 of the base calculation / display process.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (A), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls correspond to each area of the total cumulative total of FIG. 52 (B) described later, and each has a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes. It is possible to store a numerical value up to 167727215 or 42949677295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the base is a 1-byte storage area corresponding to the total cumulative total of the base shown in FIG. 52 (B), which will be described later, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. A capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

FIG. 52B shows another example of the structure of the work area using the ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), the prize ball number buffer, the total prize ball number, the out ball number buffer, the prize ball number buffer, the specific prize ball number buffer, the total out ball number and the base are stored. Each data item is the same as the description in FIG. 52 (A). The storage area for the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is n storage areas (for example, every 6000 prize balls) for each predetermined number of prize balls (or for each predetermined number of out balls or for each predetermined time). It is composed of a ring buffer having n = 10 storage areas), and when the number of prize balls reaches a predetermined number (6000), the write pointer of all the data moves and the storage area where the data is updated changes. .. Then, after the data for a predetermined number of prize balls is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area. The write pointer may be moved when the number of data other than the number of prize balls (number of out balls, predetermined time, etc.) reaches a predetermined number.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointers of all the data strings move for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to the storage area immediately before the write pointer. This is because the base value is calculated using the latest data of 6000 prize balls.

The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the base is the total number of total prize balls and the total number of out balls. It is a value calculated from the value, and when the ring buffer goes around and one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated by excluding the data in the cleared area. It will be recalculated. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of all the data collected in the past, and the total cumulative value of the base calculated from the cumulative value is the value calculated from the total cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer Even if one storage area of the ring buffer is cleared to write new data in one round, the total cumulative value including the original data of the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 52 (B), the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each, and numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the cumulative total is the total of the data for 6000 prize balls x n (60,000 prize balls when n = 10), a large storage area is prepared. The cumulative total of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 167727215 or 42949677295 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the cumulative total of the base and the total cumulative total are storage areas of 1 byte each, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal. A capacity that can record a decimal number of base values may be allocated.

In the data structure shown in FIG. 52 (A), the stored data is not deleted, so even if the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). good. Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 52 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

Further, when the data in the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is an abnormal value, the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the base calculation area 13128 may be deleted. Further, it may be notified that the data of the base calculation area 13128 or the calculated base value is abnormal. Alternatively, the data in the backup area may be inspected using a check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the base value may be calculated again.

[9-4. Display base value]
The base value calculated as described above may be continuously displayed while the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, but when the main body frame 4 is closed and the game is possible, the base display 1317 is visually recognized. Therefore, the 7-segment LED 13172 may be turned off to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. As a matter of course, even when the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off, the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation / display process (step S89) are executed.

Further, the base display 1317 may always display the base value, or may display the base value by operating the display switch 1318. For example, when the display switch 1318, which is a push button switch, is pressed, the display of the base value is started, the display is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the display is turned off. If the display switch 1318 is operated while the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the base value may be displayed on the base display 1317. That is, even if the display switch 1318 is operated unless the main body frame 4 is open, the base display 1317 does not display the accessory ratio.

Further, when the main body frame 4 is opened, it is preferable to display a predetermined display on all the digits so that it can be confirmed that the base display 1317 is operating normally. For example, as shown in FIG. 36 (B), “−” may be displayed in all digits, or all segments may be lit.

Then, when the main body frame 4 is closed, a predetermined display for confirming the normal operation of the base display 1317 is performed (FIG. 36 (E)), and after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed, the 7-segment LED 13172 is turned off. , It is good to reduce the power consumption of the gaming machine. This base non-display state is the same mode as after the initial setting is completed (FIG. 36 (B)), but may be a different mode as long as it is distinguishable from the displayed base value.

The base display 1317 may also be used by the function display unit 1400. The function display unit 1400 normally displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, but when the main body frame release switch (not shown) detects that the main body frame 4 has been released from the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 has been released. The control board 1310 switches the display so that the function display unit 1400 displays the base value. Even if the display of the function display unit 1400 is switched by opening the main body frame 4, the progress of the game may be continued. By continuing the progress of the game, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the display of the base display can be quickly switched to the display of the game state. For example, if the main body frame 4 is opened during the special symbol fluctuation display game, the base value is displayed, but if the main body frame 4 is closed before the fluctuation time elapses, the fluctuation display for the remaining time can be performed. .. Since the special symbol displayed on the function display unit 1400 is synchronized with the decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbol is stopped at the timing when the special symbol variation display of the function display unit 1400 is stopped. Therefore, even if the function display unit 1400 displays the base value, it can be configured so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the calculated base value (in the above-described embodiment, the accessory ratio) may be displayed on the base display (accessory ratio indicator) 1317. In this way, since the base value (role ratio) can be confirmed without opening the main body frame 4, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operation of the gaming machine. Further, it is not necessary to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open. Further, in an island facility where pachinko machines are installed on both sides, when the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side is opened, the back surface of the pachinko machine installed on the opposite side can be seen. In such a game machine, by opening the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine on one side, the bases (role ratio) of the two pachinko machines installed back to back can be confirmed. Further, when the base value is displayed even when the main body frame 4 is closed, the base value is displayed in a form that can be recognized by the player (for example, on a display device for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game or a display device attached to the frame). Should be displayed. This is because the base value can be used as a barometer for expressing the condition of the pachinko machine and is worth seeing by the player. When calculating the base value on the main control board 1310, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the payout control board 951 calculates the base value, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a signal for displaying the base value may be transmitted via the relay board.

Further, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the light amount (luminance) of the base display 1317 is not changed even when the mode is changed to the energy saving mode. This is because if the amount of light of the base display 1317 is reduced during the energy saving mode, it becomes difficult to confirm the base value by the base display 1317 when adjusting the pachinko machine other than the opening time.

Specifically, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is in a standby state when a predetermined time elapses after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted without the gaming ball winning in any of the winning openings. .. In the standby state, the peripheral control unit 1511 continuously outputs the BGM that is output in the so-called normal fluctuation. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the standby state, the demo state is entered. In the demo state, a video showing the motif of the gaming machine is played, and the gaming machine is explained. Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses in the demo state, the mode shifts to the energy saving mode (note that it is not necessary to distinguish between the demo state and the energy saving mode). In the energy saving mode, the amount of light of the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, 244 and various lamps controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced in order to suppress power consumption. However, since the power consumption of the display devices (function display unit 1400 and base display 1317) controlled by the main control board 1310 is smaller than the power consumption of the entire pachinko machine, it is not necessary to reduce the amount of light of these display devices. May be good. Further, if the amount of light of the function display unit 1400 is not reduced, a player who intends to play on an empty platform can easily visually recognize the result of the previous lottery.

In addition, even if the game ball does not win at the start opening or the general winning opening, when the game ball is launched toward the game area and an out ball is detected, the displayed base value can be recalculated and updated. There is sex. If the number of prize balls does not increase even if the number of out balls is increased after the game balls are launched, the calculated base value will decrease, but some players will burn with revenge.

By notifying such a player of the state of the game with the function display unit 1400 that also serves as the base display 1317, the interest of the game can be revived. That is, even if the player shifts to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, the player can maintain the display mode of the display on which the base value is displayed before shifting to the demo mode or the energy saving mode, or increase the light amount. It is good to be able to confirm the base value properly.

Although the maintenance or increase of the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed has been described in this way, even if the light intensity of the display on which the base value is displayed is decreased or turned off with an emphasis on the viewpoint of reducing energy consumption. good. For example, a predetermined operation (a launch stop button that forcibly stops firing, an operation button that changes the appearance of the effect, a RAM clear button that clears the contents of the RAM, and a power supply to the gaming machine) during the energy saving mode. When the operation of the operation means provided in the gaming machine such as the supply adjustment button for switching the presence / absence of the base value is detected, it is preferable to reduce the amount of light of the display on which the base value is displayed. Furthermore, not only in the energy saving mode, but also when the above-mentioned predetermined operation is performed, the amount of light of both the lamp or the like that reduces the power consumption and the display that displays the base value is reduced or turned off during the energy saving mode. May be good.

When reducing or turning off the light amount of both the lamp and the display on which the base value is displayed, reduce the light amount of the lamp etc. that reduces power consumption during the energy saving mode before the display on which the base value is displayed. It may be turned off or off. In this case, the amount of light from a lamp or the like having a large power consumption is reduced first, and the power consumption is greatly reduced. Further, the indicator on which the base value is displayed may be turned off or the amount of light of the indicator on which the base value is displayed may be reduced or turned off before the lamp or the like. In this case, the gorgeousness of the gaming machine is maintained even in the energy saving mode. It works. Further, during the energy saving mode, the lamp or the like that reduces power consumption and the display that displays the base value may be reduced or turned off at the same time. In this case, the amount of power consumption reduction can be increased and the energy saving effect is high. .. In addition, before and after the time in these explanations (meaning "first" and "simultaneously") includes the order of the timing of internal processing and the order of appearance from the player.

Further, the display mode of the base value may be set in a plurality of stages, and the display mode of each stage may be changed. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. Divide into multiple stages. The display for displaying the base value may be configured by a multi-color LED, and the emission color may be changed such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage. In addition, the display device that displays the base value is composed of a liquid crystal display device, and the base value is low, such as "I like it", "I'm getting worse", "It's not bad", "It's amazing in a sense", etc. at each stage. Sometimes you may want to display a self-deprecating comment. Further, the effect of adding a comment as described above to the main liquid crystal display device 1600 on which the decorative design is displayed may be executed without changing the display mode of the display device that displays the base value.

[9-5. Calculation of base value using the number of balls passing through the out port]
Next, further variations of the base calculation area update process (step S81) and the base calculation display process (step S89) will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 56. In the process described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56, the number of out balls is calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is calculated. The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation is as follows.
-Fig. 54 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 55 and Fig. 56: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 54 to 56.

When the out ball is detected by the out port passing ball sensor 1021 provided near the out port 1111, there is a problem that the number of out balls cannot be accurately counted. This is because the game ball launched toward the game area 5a flows out from the game area 5a via the general winning opening 2001, the starting opening 2002, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006, in addition to the out opening 1111. Therefore, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 cannot accurately count the number of game balls launched toward the game area 5a. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the number of out balls is accurately calculated using the number of winning balls and the number of balls passing through the out port, and the base value is accurately calculated.

FIG. 53 is a front view showing another example of the game board.

The game board of the pachinko machine of this embodiment has substantially the same structure as the game board shown in FIG. 10, but is provided at the lower part of the game area 5a, passes through the out port 1111 and flows out from the game area 5a (out). An out-mouth passing ball sensor 1021 for detecting the number of mouth-passing balls) is provided. The out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111. By installing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 at a position where the player can see through the out-port 1111, it is possible to make the player aware that the out-balls are counted, that is, the base is calculated.

Further, the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 may be installed at a position not seen by the player, such as a gutter in which game balls flowing down from the game area 5a passing through the out-port 1111 are aligned. If it is installed in a position invisible to the player, it is not necessary to make the player aware of the counting of out balls. Further, by providing the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 on the back side of the out-port 1111, a sufficient place for arranging the liquid crystal display device and the accessory (movable body) can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the game board 5 is improved. can. Further, in order to prevent double counting of the game balls, the rolling surface on which the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 roll so that the game balls that have passed through the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 do not bounce off. It is good to make it sloped or curved.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54 acquires the number of prize balls, the number of balls passing through the out port, and the number of winning balls in order to calculate the base value using the number of balls passing through the out port for each timer interrupt cycle. In FIG. 54, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820). Then, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to the total number of out balls (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, the number of prize balls is recorded in the prize ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. , The number of balls passing through the out port is recorded in the out ball number buffer, and the number of winning balls is recorded in the winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 55, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of balls passing through the out port is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of balls passing through the out port is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired (step S820), and the acquired number of winning balls is added to the number of winning balls buffer (step S821).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 54, the sum of the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is added to one storage area (total number of out balls), and the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55 is performed. Then, the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are added to another storage area (out ball number buffer, winning ball number buffer). In this way, the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls may be recorded in one storage area or in another storage area.

Further, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 55, when the acquired number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls are recorded in different storage areas, the number of out balls increases by 1 when the winning opening is won. The counting of the number of balls passing through the out port and the counting of the number of winning balls are executed at the same time (within one timer interrupt process), but the base value is calculated after updating both the number of out balls buffer and the number of winning balls buffer. At that time, if both the out ball number buffer and the winning ball number buffer cannot be updated within one timer interrupt process, whether to count the number of balls passing through the out port with priority or to count the number of winning balls with priority. It is better to determine in advance rather than determining by lottery as appropriate. At that time, if the processing related to the prize ball is prioritized over other processing, the prize ball payout processing can be executed quickly, but it may be appropriately determined according to the specifications of the gaming machine.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 56, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, and the process proceeds to step S896. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold value Th1 or more, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S896). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold value Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, the winning ball number buffer value is added to the out ball number buffer, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted (step S901). .. In addition, steps S896 to S901 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the number of out balls (buffer value of the number of out balls + the buffer value of the number of winning balls) with the threshold value Th2.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 56, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the number of winning balls is added to the number of balls passing through the out port to calculate the number of out balls. Therefore, the number of out balls is accurately counted and the base value is calculated accurately. can. Further, by confirming the base value in the manufacturing process and the inspection process of the gaming machine, it is possible to confirm whether the winning opening switch, the base display 1317, and the process of calculating the base value are normal.

[9-6. Notification of base abnormality]
The process described above generates a command for notifying the calculated base value. Next, a process of determining an abnormality of the base value and notifying the abnormality will be described.
-Fig. 57: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 58: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out-balls A pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls, predetermined Although the description of the pattern for calculating the base value for each number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 57 and 58.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, the base value is calculated every time (every timer interrupt cycle).

First, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated. As a method for notifying the abnormality of the base, the same method as the above-mentioned notification of the base can be adopted.

For example, one of the methods described below may be used, or two or more may be combined. Specifically, the base display (7-segment LED) 1317, the liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, or the like may be used to notify the abnormality of the base value. When the player is notified of the abnormality of the base value, the player may be able to confirm the abnormality of the pachinko machine. The calculated base value may be displayed as a percentage notation on the above-mentioned display or display device to notify an abnormality of the base value. The value after the decimal point may be rounded down, rounded up, or rounded up, and on a display device capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244, the value is displayed to the first decimal place and displayed in more detail. You may.

Further, when the base value is displayed on the liquid crystal display devices 1600, 3114, and 244, if the base value is abnormal, the display mode may be changed. For example, the numerical value is blinked or the color is changed (normally green, abnormally red, etc.) and displayed. Further, the display mode of the base value may be changed in a plurality of steps. Specifically, the displayed base values are 30% or more, 25% or more and less than 30%, 20% or more and less than 25%, 15% or more and less than 20%, 10% or more and less than 15%, and less than 10%. It may be divided into a plurality of stages and displayed with different emission colors such as white, blue, and yellow at each stage.

In addition, various lamps, liquid crystal displays, sounds, and the like may notify the range of the base value (whether the base value is high or low, abnormal value or normal value, etc.). The function display unit 1400 may notify an abnormality of the base value. Further, the information on the abnormality of the base may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 57, for example, as shown in FIGS. 50 and 55, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process to be updated.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is updated at the timing when either the number of prize balls or the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition. In FIG. 58, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold value Th1 or more, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, and the base value maintains the same value. On the other hand, if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, the base value is updated to a different value.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 58, for example, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 54, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are directly updated using the acquired number of prize balls and out balls. It may be used in combination with the base calculation area update process.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the calculated base value is abnormal, the abnormality is notified, so that the player can know the state of the gaming machine and the hall employee can know the state of the gaming machine. It is possible to know the possibility of unauthorized operation on the gaming machine. In addition, it is possible to detect and notify an abnormality of a gaming machine that cannot be detected by conventional error detection.

[9-7. Notification of changes in the base]
Next, an example of a gaming machine that notifies a change in the calculated base value will be described.

The base value calculated by the pachinko machine naturally fluctuates. Since the base value represents the condition of the gaming machine, the player during the game is concerned about the change in the base value as well as the base value itself. Therefore, it is desired to notify the player of the change in the base value. When a display that serves as a guide for the top and bottom of the base value appears, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 59, the history of the calculated base value is recorded in order to compare the history of the current base value with the history of the past base value. In FIG. 59, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold value Th1 or more, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). If the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the threshold Th2 is added to the total number of out balls (step S899), and the threshold Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether or not the base value management timer has timed up (step S904). If the base value management timer has not timed up, it is not the timing to store the base value in the base history, so the base calculation / display process ends. On the other hand, if the base value management timer is timed up, the base value is stored in the base history (step S905), and the base value management timer is reset (step S906).

The base value management timer is a timer used to record a base value at predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes), and stores the current base value in the base history every time the base value management timer times up. The base history is stored in the base calculation area 13128. Only one base history may be stored in the base calculation area 13128, or a plurality of base histories may be stored in the base calculation area 13128. When a plurality of base histories are stored in the base calculation area 13128, a ring buffer may be configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × 10 base values may be stored. Further, as shown in FIG. 52, a ring buffer of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is configured in the base calculation area 13128, and for example, a predetermined time × n number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are stored. The base value may be calculated if necessary.

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the display selection process. The display selection process is called from the display data creation process (step S1030) of the peripheral control unit power-on process (FIG. 60).

First, the MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 selects a specific base history (for example, the latest past base value) stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value. (Step S10301). As a result, if the selected base history value is smaller than the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is referred to, and it is determined whether a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the decrease of the base value. (Step S10302). Then, if a predetermined time has not elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table during the lowering of the base is selected (step S10303). On the other hand, if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of lowering the base, the effect table in which the lowering of the base is continuing is selected (step S10304).

On the other hand, if the selected base history value is not less than (equal to or greater than) the current base value, the base decrease duration measurement timer is reset (step S10305) and the display selection table during base increase is selected (step S10306). ).

In the display selection process described above, in step S10301, it is determined whether the current base value is smaller than the base history value, but the current base value and the base history value are compared to determine whether they are large, equal, or small. You may. The base value is generally a decimal value because it is calculated by division. Therefore, it is advisable to determine whether the base history value and the current base value are equal in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

64 to 68 are views showing an example of a display selection table. These display selection tables are used to select the effect of the special symbol variation display game by the random numbers selected when the starting port is won (or before the start of the special symbol variation display game). The display selection table 1 shown in FIGS. 64 to 66 is selected when the base value is rising or the base value does not change, and the display selection tables 2 and 3 shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 are selected while the base value is decreasing. Be selected. In particular, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the base value decreasing.

Each display selection table includes each item of effect number, effect content, fluctuation time, remarks, and distribution. The effect number is an identifier for uniquely identifying the effect selected in the display selection table. The content of the production is the name of the production. The fluctuation time is the time from the start to the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol due to the effect. The remarks are information that describes the outline of the production so that the designer can understand it. The distribution is the probability that the effect is selected, and is defined by the numerator with 65536 as the denominator.

The display selection table 1 (outside) shown in FIG. 64 is selected when the result of the big hit lottery is out of order and the base value is rising or does not change. The display selection table 1 (outside) shown in FIG. 65 is selected. Is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a normal jackpot that does not derive a probability change state, and the base value is rising or does not change. The display selection table 1 (win 2) shown in FIG. 66 is selected when the result of the jackpot lottery is a probability variation jackpot that derives a probability variation state, and the base value is rising or does not change.

The display selection table 2 shown in FIG. 67 is selected while the base value is decreasing. Further, the display selection table 3 shown in FIG. 68 is selected when the base value has decreased even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value began to decrease.

As shown in the figure, the display selection tables 2 and 3 include freeze effects 1 and 2, which are effects in which the symbols do not change, and the freeze effects are selected with high probability. The freeze effect is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) elapses after the effect is determined.

If the base value is still decreasing even after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed since the base value started to decrease, the effect is selected using the display selection table 3 to obtain the selected effect. You may switch.

Further, it may be determined whether to display a specific effect for notifying the change of the base value according to the game state (game situation). This is because if the player is constantly notified of changes in the base value, the player's attention to the production of the special symbol variation display game, which is the original pleasure of the pachinko machine, may be distracted, and the player's consciousness may be dispersed. Because there is.

For example, during the execution of the special symbol variation display game (game situation in which the result of the jackpot lottery is not shown), the production of the special symbol variation display game is executed with priority, and when it is not variable, the base value is increased. It is advisable to display a specific effect (an effect that serves as a guide for a change in the base value) at the time of time or descent.

The specific effect may be displayed at a timing in which the special symbol variation display game is not executed for a predetermined time. This is because if the specific effect is displayed immediately after the end of the special symbol variation display game, the player's tension will continue and fatigue will accumulate. If a game ball wins a prize at the start port while the specific effect is displayed, the display of the specific effect is stopped and the effect of the special symbol variation display game is executed. This is because a big hit lottery is held and a special symbol variation display game is started when a prize is won at the starting port, so it is better to have the player pay close attention to the special symbol variation display game.

The specific effect may be displayed even in a situation where the number of prize balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th1) or the number of out balls does not reach a predetermined number (threshold value Th2). Further, the specific effect may be displayed according to the result of the lottery, but it may be executed without fail if the same conditions are satisfied.

Further, the specific effect may not be displayed when the base value rises, but may be displayed only when the base value falls. This is because when the player is notified of the increase in the base value, the player's expectation rises, and if the base value does not rise to the extent expected by the player, the player may be discouraged due to the gap with the expectation. be. On the other hand, when the player is notified of the decrease in the base value, some players increase their fighting spirit in order to increase the base value.

Further, in this embodiment, the display selection table is changed depending on whether the base value is decreasing or not (increasing, steady state), but the display is divided into three states of the base value decreasing, steady state, and increasing. A selection table may be defined to notify the player that the base is rising. In this case, it is advisable to determine whether the base value is steady (whether the base history value and the current base value are equal) in consideration of a predetermined allowable range (for example, 3%).

Further, the specific effect may be displayed during the special symbol variation display game. In this case, the base value is more likely to decrease when it is displayed outside the special symbol variation display game than when it is displayed during the special symbol variation display game.

In addition, when the game ball does not win a prize at the starting port and the special symbol variation display game is not played, the base value usually decreases. Further, if the special symbol variation display game is not played for a predetermined time, a demo screen is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

FIG. 69 (A) is a display example of the normal reach, in which the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. FIG. 69B is a display example of Special Reach 1, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed in the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing rock-paper-scissors, and the middle design is determined by the result of rock-paper-scissors. FIG. 69C is a display example of the special reach 2, in which the left symbol and the right symbol displayed in the upper left of the screen are stopped at 7, and the middle symbol is fluctuating. In the center of the screen, the player and the opponent are playing against each other, and the middle symbol is determined by the result of the battle.

FIG. 69 (D) is a display example of the freeze effect 1, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower right of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Make a recognizable display. FIG. 69 (E) is a display example of the freeze effect 2, in which the stopped decorative symbol is displayed in the center of the screen, and the base value is lowered at a position (for example, the lower part of the screen) that does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative symbol. Display a recognizable continuation. In the freeze effect, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be any position as long as it does not interfere with the recognition of the decorative pattern. Further, the display indicating the decrease in the base value may be displayed at a position overlapping the decorative pattern. For example, a display that pops up in the center of the display screen may be used.

Although the example of displaying the degree of change in the base value on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 has been described above, the lighting mode of the decorative lamp may be changed. Further, the change in the base value may be displayed numerically instead of the tendency of the base value to move up and down.

The change in the displayed base value is the total cumulative total of the base values calculated before the specified time, even in the comparison result between the base value calculated in the time interval before the specified time and the base value calculated in the current time interval. May be the result of comparison with the total cumulative total of the latest base values.

[9-8. Calculation of the base considering a specific general winning opening]
Next, a process of accurately calculating the base value in consideration of winning a specific general winning opening will be described.

In the pachinko machine, the player aims to win a prize in a specific winning opening (for example, the open winning opening 2005, 2006) in which the game ball is easily won during the jackpot. Adjust the firing strength. Even during a big hit, a game that shoots a game ball aiming at the same place as the so-called normal hit and aims at the big prize opening 2005, or a game that aims at the big prize opening 2006 by so-called right-handed hit that strengthens the firing strength to the maximum There are variations. In such a variation, a game board may be designed so that a starting port and a general winning opening are arranged downstream of the large winning opening to pick up a ball spilled from the large winning opening.

Here, the downstream (lower part) of the pachinko machine that hits right during a big hit will be described in detail. During the big hit, the player hits right in order to win the game ball in the open big prize opening. Most of the game balls launched toward the game area win the open large prize opening 2006. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, a general winning opening 2001 is provided on the right side of the large winning opening 2005, and the right-handed game ball is open. When the big winning opening 2006 is not won, the general winning opening 2001 is won. That is, it can be said that the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 wins only when the right-handed game ball does not win the opening large winning opening 2006.

The base value is the number of prize balls paid out by winning the starting port and the general winning port when 100 game balls are launched toward the game area 5a (that is, paid for the number of 100 out balls). The number of balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting opening and the general winning opening (there is a high possibility of winning the big winning opening) to show the number of winning balls issued. When counted in (number of out balls), it is expected that the actual base value will deviate when calculated as the base value.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the general winning opening 2001 on the right side of the large winning opening 2005 is defined as a specific general winning opening, and the number of balls won in the specific general winning opening during the special prize is excluded from the number of out balls. To calculate the base value.

The outline of the calculation timing of the base value in each variation of the gaming machine that calculates the base value in consideration of a specific general winning opening is as follows.
-Fig. 70 and Fig. 40: Calculate the base value for each timer interrupt cycle-Fig. 71 and Fig. 72: Calculate the base value for each predetermined number of prize balls and for each predetermined number of out balls. Although the description of the pattern for calculating the above and the pattern for calculating the base value for each predetermined number of out balls is omitted, it can be realized by combining FIGS. 70 to 72.

FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the number of winning balls and the out are calculated in order to calculate the base value using the number of out balls corrected by the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening for each timer interrupt cycle. Obtain the number of balls and the number of specific winning balls. In FIG. 70, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated. It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the number of winning balls to a specific general winning opening (specific winning number of balls) is acquired (step S820). Then, the value obtained by subtracting the specific winning ball number from the out ball number is added to the total out ball number (step S822). That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the total number of out balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out ball or a winning ball is detected.

As in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825 of FIG. 46, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated and the prize is awarded. The ball abnormality notification may be stopped.

After recording the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 70, the base value can be calculated by the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 40.

FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 71, the number of prize balls is recorded in the number of prize balls buffer and the number of out balls is recorded in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of prize balls and the number of out balls satisfy a predetermined condition. Record the number in the out ball count buffer. In FIG. 71, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there are prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer (step S813).

Then, it is determined whether or not the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816) and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817). ).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer (step S819). Then, the number of winning balls is acquired, it is determined whether or not the winning opening related to the acquired number of winning balls is a specific general winning opening, and the number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is acquired (step S820). Then, the acquired number of winning balls to the specific general winning opening is added to the specific winning ball number buffer (step S823).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation / display process (step S89). In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated in consideration of the specific number of winning balls recorded in the specific winning ball number buffer. In FIG. 72, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-mentioned base calculation / display processing, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold Th1 (step S890). If the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to update the total prize ball number, so the process proceeds to step S895. On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold value Th1 or more, the threshold value Th1 is added to the total prize ball number (step S891), and the threshold value Th1 is subtracted from the prize ball number buffer (step S892). Then, the out-ball number buffer value is added to the total out-ball number (step S893), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S894). In addition, steps S891 to S894 may be executed every predetermined number of winnings or at predetermined time without comparing the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th1.

After that, it is determined whether the sum of the number of balls passing through the out port stored in the out ball number buffer and the number of winning balls stored in the winning ball number buffer is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S895). ). The total of the number of balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls is the number of game balls that have flowed into the game area, and is the number of out balls. As a result of the determination, if the calculated out-ball number is smaller than the threshold Th2, it is not the timing to update the total out-ball number, so the process proceeds to step S902. On the other hand, if the calculated out-ball number is the threshold Th2 or more, the prize-ball number buffer value is added to the total prize-ball number (step S897), and the prize-ball number buffer is set to 0 (step S898). Then, the specific winning ball number is subtracted from the total number of out balls and the threshold value Th2 is added (step S899), the winning ball number buffer is set to 0, and the threshold value Th2 is subtracted from the out ball number buffer (step S900).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S902). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation / display process is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the base value is calculated by dividing the total number of out balls by the total number of out balls (step S903). Specifically, the total number of prize balls is multiplied by a predetermined number (for example, 100) and stored in the division input register A131216, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Then, after 32 clocks have elapsed, the quotient is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value. When the total number of out balls is 0, even if the base value is calculated, the return value from the calculation circuit 13121 results in an error, so that it is not necessary to store the base value in the base calculation area 13128. In this case, the base value displayed on the base display 1317 is not updated.

After that, it is determined whether the calculated base value is abnormal (step S907). The abnormality of the base value is, for example, when the calculated base value becomes larger or smaller than the design value (normal value) beyond a predetermined allowable range. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation of the base value by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages. Then, if the base value is abnormal, a base notification command is generated (step S908), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee. On the other hand, if the base value is not abnormal, the base calculation / display process is terminated.

In the base calculation / display process shown in FIG. 72, the base value is calculated every time even if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated. That is, if the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls are not updated, the same value is calculated as the base value, the base value is maintained at the same value, and if the total number of prize balls or the total number of out balls is updated, then The base value is updated to a different value. The base value may be calculated at the timing when one of the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls is updated, or the base value may be calculated at the timing when both are updated.

Further, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, the base value is calculated excluding the game balls that have flowed into the game area but are unlikely to win the starting port and the general winning port, so that the deviation from the actual base value is large. A small base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, the case where the general winning opening 2001 is located downstream of the large winning opening 2006 in the pachinko machine that hits right during the big hit has been described, but the invention according to this embodiment aims at the big winning opening 2005 by hitting normally during the big hit. It can be applied to pachinko machines as well as gaming machines in which a starting port or a general winning opening is provided downstream of the large winning opening 2005.

Further, in the game area 5a, there are large winning openings 2005 and 2006 that do not normally accept game balls but can accept game balls according to the result of the big hit lottery. The prize balls from winning the grand prize openings 2005 and 2006 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball wins the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the special symbol variation display game starts, and the big winning opening is from the time when the special symbol is confirmed until the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (big hit opening). The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls during the period from the closing of 2005 and 2006 to the start of the next special symbol variation display game (big hit ending). In this way, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls during the special prize can be counted without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 as shown in FIG. 39. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. That is, during the special prize, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction. Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric power support may be included in the special prize. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric power support, from the opening of the starting port 2004 to the predetermined time after closing (for example, the ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The required number of seconds) may be included in the special prize.

Further, in the game area 5a, a second starting port 2004 is arranged, which normally does not accept the game ball, but can accept the game ball according to the lottery result of the normal symbol. The prize ball due to winning the second starting port 2004 may be excluded from the calculation of the base value. In this case, the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, a lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol variation display game starts, and the normal symbol is confirmed and opened (opening) until the second start port 2004. The detected out-balls are excluded from the number of out-balls, with the period from the closing of the game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game (ending) as a special prize. When the second starting port 2004 repeats opening and closing depending on the lottery result of the normal symbol, the time between the closing of the second starting port 2004 and the next opening (closing interval) may be included in the special prize. In this way, not only during the time saving, but all the winnings to the second starting port 2004 can be excluded from the calculation of the base value.

By doing so, it is possible to accurately count the number of prize balls and the number of out balls other than during the special prize (big hit, shortened working hours, etc.) without determining whether or not the special prize is being awarded in step S810 as shown in FIG. 39.

In this way, the number of out balls and the number of prize balls while the player is hitting right can be accurately excluded, and the base value can be calculated accurately.

Further, depending on the pachinko machine, it is recommended to play the game by left-handed in a state where neither the big hit nor the time is shortened (so-called normal state), and to play the game by right-handed during the big hit or the time is shortened. In such a gaming machine, a general winning opening 2001 and a first starting opening 2002 for winning a left-handed hit, and a general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 for winning a right-handed hit are provided. In such a gaming machine, the number of winning openings in the left side to the center of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting left) and the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) The ball entry rate to each winning opening differs depending on the arrangement and the arrangement position of the nails. In other words, the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right are different.

The base value of the pachinko machine is set on the assumption that the player strikes left in the normal state. However, for the reason mentioned above, when the base value is different between left-handed and right-handed (for example, when the base value at right-handed in the normal state is designed to be lower than that at left-handed). , When the player hits right in the normal state, a low base value is calculated.

Hall considers that a pachinko machine with a low base value is abnormal and inspects it, or judges that it is a game machine with poor ball ejection performance. Even in pachinko machines that are judged to have poor ball ejection performance (lower than the expected base), the hall determines that the player is hitting left, so the starting port that acts on the base when hitting left Make adjustments to increase the winning rate of general winning openings. Then adjust the abnormal nail to increase the base value. If you hit left with a gaming machine adjusted in this way, you can get a lot of prize balls even in the normal state. In other words, you can get a lot of lottery for a small amount. In other words, even if the base at the time of left-handed hit is not different from what the hole expected, the hole misunderstands and makes adjustments to increase the entry rate of the starting opening and the general winning opening that win at the time of left-handed hit. Since the hole may suffer a disadvantage due to the malicious intent of such a player, it is necessary to accurately calculate the base value when hitting left and the base value when hitting right.

By the way, in the pachinko machine that hits right in a short time, the second start port 2004 that opens and closes depending on the game state and the gate portion 2003 for performing a normal symbol lottery for opening the second start port 2004 are at the time of right hit. It is placed in the area where the game ball rolls. In addition, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 by hitting right in the normal state, even if the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the probability of winning the normal symbol is extremely low so that the second starting port 2004 does not open, or it is normal. Even if the symbol lottery is won, the opening time of the second starting port 2004 is shortened, which makes it difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 2004 in the normal state.

Here, in order to increase the base value in the right-handed state in the normal state, the ball entry rate to the second starting port 2004 is increased. However, since the second starting port 2004 is generally set to be more advantageous than the first starting port 2002, increasing the ball entry rate into the second starting port 2004 puts pressure on the profit of the hall. Therefore, when counting the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state and calculating the base value, it is preferable to calculate the base value corrected by using the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003.

Specifically, the number of game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 in the normal state is subtracted from the number of out balls (the number of game balls driven toward the game area 5a) as the number of specific winning balls. By reducing the number of out balls, a high base calculation value can be obtained. For example, when a considerable number of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003, an extremely high base value will be calculated. The degree of correction processing may be appropriately determined based on the design value (performance) of the gaming machine.

Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is monitored and the game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 (for example, when a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls pass through the gate portion 2003 without winning a prize at the starting port). After passing through the gate portion 2003 (or before and after), the number of out balls counted at a predetermined time or a predetermined number of shots may not be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the base value can be calculated more accurately. When the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, a display such as "Please return to left-handed" or a voice may be output without actively notifying the player that it is not reflected in the calculation result of the base value. Further, when the passage of the gate portion 2003 is detected, the hole may be notified that the ball is hit right. For example, a specific lamp may be turned on, the lighting mode may be changed, or the external terminal board 784 may output that the hall computer installed in the amusement park is hitting right.

As described above, by excluding the number of passing balls of the gate portion 2003 provided on the right side of the game area 5a (the area where the game ball rolls when hitting right) from the number of out balls, the ball is hit right in the normal state. The base value of time can be corrected to a large value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fluctuations in the calculated value of the base depending on the player's game style.

[9-9. Initialize base value]
Considering the role of the base value for checking the operating status of the pachinko machine 1, it is desirable that the calculated base value be maintained for a long period of time. Further, it is desirable that the calculated base value cannot be easily erased. Therefore, the base calculation / display data 13136 is erased under a condition different from the condition for erasing the data related to the progress of the game backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, it is possible to retain accurate data on the number of prize balls and calculate an accurate bonus ratio.

Specifically, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch (first operation), but the backup power supply supplied to the main control MPU 1311 is cut off, and the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is used. By the second operation of shutting off, all the data backed up in the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311 can be erased. In the second operation, one switch for realizing this operation may be provided, or the employee of the game store disconnects the connector of the backup power supply line supplied to the main control board 1310, and the pachinko machine 1 The power supply may be cut off.

In other words, two operations are prepared to erase the RAM 1312 of the main control MPU 1311. In the first operation, only the data related to the progress of the game is erased, but in the second operation, the calculated base value. And delete all data including data related to the progress of the game.

With this configuration, the base calculation / display data 13136 is not erased due to an erroneous operation by a staff member of the amusement park, so that the reliability of the displayed accessory ratio is increased and it is possible to prevent concealment of a state in which the accessory ratio is high. ..

[9-10. Base calculation considering winning abnormalities]
73 and 74 are flowcharts of the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality.

In the pachinko machine 1, in addition to the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 described above, an abnormality in winning may be detected. For example, when a prize is detected other than during the opening of the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 due to the derivation of the jackpot in the special symbol variation display game, or the start opening 2004 due to the derivation of the winning in the normal symbol variation display game. If a prize is detected other than during the opening of, the prize is abnormal. That is, the abnormality in the number of prize balls determined in step S815 is an abnormal operation detected from the number of prize balls, and is mainly a case where a large number of prize balls are obtained in a predetermined time. On the other hand, the winning abnormality is an abnormal operation detected from the number of winning balls, and is mainly a case where a winning is not possible or a large number of winnings are detected at a predetermined time.

Since the winning ball related to this winning abnormality is counted as an out ball, it is desirable to correct this amount and calculate the base accurately. Therefore, in the base calculation area update process in consideration of the winning abnormality, the total number of out balls is corrected so as to reduce the number of winning balls related to the detected winning abnormality.

Normally, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 and the starting opening 2004 are won only during the special prize, so the winning balls to these winning openings are not counted as out balls for calculating the base and are won. There is no need to consider anomalies.

FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). The base calculation area update process determines the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and updates the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. do. In particular, the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73 is the prize ball control process (step S80) in order to calculate the base value each time for each timer interrupt cycle, similarly to the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 39. The total number of prize balls is directly updated using the number of prize balls calculated in (step S814), and the total number of out balls is directly updated using the number of out balls (step S822). In FIG. 73, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded.

If the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base calculation area update process is terminated without updating the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S811). The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation area update process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 reports that the payout is completed. This variation has been described with reference to FIGS. 41-44.

Then, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls to update the total number of prize balls (step S814). It should be noted that it may be determined whether or not there is a prize ball, and if there is no prize ball, the process of updating the total number of prize balls may be skipped. Further, although the game balls have won the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the holding is the upper limit value, and even if the winning to the starting opening is not held, the prize balls are paid out, so that the total number of prize balls is updated. In addition, in a game state in which a prize ball is not generated even if a game ball is won in the winning opening (for example, when a specific error occurs), the prize ball due to the winning is not generated and the number of prize balls to be acquired is large. Since it is 0, the total number of prize balls is not updated. The total number of prize balls is recorded in the total number of prize balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826). Then, the number of game balls corresponding to the winning prize determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827). Specifically, as described above, when a prize is detected in the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 other than during the special prize (when the condition device is operating) that occurs due to the derivation of the big hit in the special symbol variation display game. , If a prize is detected in the starting port 2004 even though the game is not open due to the fact that the hit is derived in the normal symbol variation display game, it is determined that the prize is abnormal.

If one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected, it may be determined to be a winning abnormality. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, it may be determined as a winning abnormality, and if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, it is determined as a winning abnormality. You may.

Then, the total number of out balls is updated so as to add the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls (step S822). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and the detection signals of these sensors are read and acquired by the switch input process in step S74. At this time, a value obtained by subtracting the number of winning balls due to abnormal winning from the acquired number of out balls may be added to the total number of out balls, or after adding the acquired number of out balls to the total number of out balls, the player wins a prize. The number of winning balls that are abnormally applied may be subtracted from the total number of out balls. The total number of out balls is recorded in the total number of out balls storage area (see FIG. 52) provided in the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 73, the total number of out spheres used for calculating the base value is updated each time an out sphere is detected. In this way, the base calculation process is executed for each timer interrupt process, the total number of out balls is updated, and the base value is calculated and displayed by the base calculation display process (FIG. 40), so that the base value is displayed without delay. It is possible to judge whether the base value is normal or abnormal without delay.

In addition, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 74) described later, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 executes the calculation process of the base value in the timer interrupt process, but the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 952 may execute the calculation process of the base value. In this case, the main control board 1310 may transmit a command for notifying the base to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510, or the payout control unit 952 may send a command for notifying the peripheral control unit 1511 of the base. May be sent.

Further, even if information on both the winning and the out balls to the winning opening is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the number of prize balls is changed to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). Add and add the number of out balls to the total number of out balls (or the out ball number buffer in the examples described later). Further, even if information on winning a prize in a plurality of winning openings is acquired in one timer interrupt process, the total number of prize balls due to the plurality of winnings is the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer in the embodiment described later). ). Therefore, the base value can be calculated and displayed accurately. For example, if a prize is detected in the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 5 prize balls and the winning opening sensor of the winning opening with 3 winning balls, a total of 8 prize balls are used as the total number of winning balls. (Or, add to the prize ball count buffer).

Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the launch of the game balls is detected. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time from the detection of the launch ball sensor 1020 may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer). Further, the operation of the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is detected, and while the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 is operating (furthermore, the launch control unit 953 or the ball launcher 680 stops operating). Only the number of prize balls related to the winning detected within a predetermined time (for example, after 5 seconds) may be added to the total number of prize balls or the number of prize balls buffer. Further, the number of prize balls may be added to the total number of prize balls (or the number of prize balls buffer) only when the player is operating the firing handle. That is, only the number of prize balls related to the prize detected within a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) from the time when it is detected that the hand or finger is touching the contact detection sensor 509 of the handle unit 500 is the total number of prize balls ( Alternatively, it may be added to the prize ball number buffer). In this way, it is possible to prevent the prize ball from being reflected in the base value due to an abnormality or cheating that detects the prize ball when the game ball is not fired, and it is possible to prevent an inaccurate display of the base value. In this case, if the contact detection sensor 509 is used, it is not necessary to newly provide a sensor for detecting the launch of the game ball, so that an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1 can be suppressed.

FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation area update process (step S81). In the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the number of out balls is recorded in the out ball number buffer in order to calculate the base value at the timing when the number of out balls satisfies a predetermined condition (step S819). In FIG. 74, the same step numbers are assigned to the same parts as the above-described base calculation area update process, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, it is determined whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S810). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, the number of prize balls other than during the special prize is acquired (step S811), and it is determined whether or not there is a prize ball (step S812). Then, if there is no prize ball as a result of the determination in step S812, the process proceeds to step S818 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S815), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls (step S814). .. That is, in the base calculation area update process shown in FIG. 74, the total number of prize balls used for calculating the base value is updated each time the number of prize balls is calculated.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S816), and the prize ball abnormality notification timer is reset (step S817).

After that, the number of out balls is acquired (step S818). The acquired number of out balls is added to the number of out balls buffer (step S819). Then, it is determined whether or not the winning abnormality is detected (step S826), and the number of game balls corresponding to the winning winning determined to be abnormal is acquired (step S827).

After that, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up (step S824), and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S824). Step S825).

In the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, the out-balls are corrected by the number of all winning balls related to the winning abnormality, but the out-balls are corrected for the winning balls related to a specific type of winning abnormality, and the like. It is not necessary to correct the out ball for the winning ball that is affected by the specific type of winning abnormality. For example, depending on the type of winning ball related to the winning abnormality, the winning ball for the winning ball may or may not be paid out. Whether or not to pay out the prize ball for this winning abnormality should be determined for each winning opening. In this case, for a winning abnormality in which the winning ball is not paid out, the winning ball should not be counted as the total out ball and should not be used in the calculation of the base value. On the other hand, for prize-winning abnormalities in which prize balls are paid out, the prize-winning balls may be counted as total out-balls, and the prize-balls to be paid out may also be counted as the total number of prize-balls and used in the calculation of the base value. Even if the prize balls are paid out abnormally, the prize balls are not counted as the total out balls, and the prize balls to be paid out are not counted as the total number of prize balls, and may not be used in the calculation of the base value.

For example, as a result of maintenance of a game machine failure (clearing a ball jam, etc.), a hall employee may manually insert a game ball into the starting port to compensate for the player to leave the ball so as not to damage it. In that case, a prize ball will be paid out for winning a prize at the starting port. The winning of this starting port is detected as a winning abnormality, but the winning ball is paid out. When the prize ball is paid out in this way, it should be reflected in the base value, so it is better not to judge that the prize is abnormal. In this case, the prize balls are paid out at the winning openings (starting openings 2002 and 2004) that are reflected in the calculation of the base value, the winning abnormality is not determined, and the winning balls are used at the other winning openings (large winning openings 2005 and 2006). It is advisable to judge the winning abnormality without paying out. The number of prize balls paid out by winning is smaller in the winning openings for determining the winning abnormality than in the winning openings for which the winning abnormality is not determined (the starting opening is 3 prize balls, and the large winning opening is 15 prize balls). Therefore, although the winning abnormality is determined at the large winning opening, even if the abnormal winning is not determined at the starting opening, it does not become a big security hole from the viewpoint of protection against fraudulent acts. In this way, by determining the winning abnormality, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the out balls and the number of winning balls. In particular, by correcting the number of out balls by using the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality that does not generate a winning ball, the number of winning balls and the out ball that causes the winning ball can be matched.

As described above, the winning abnormality can be determined by various winning openings, but a specific implementation example on the pachinko machine will be described.

First, the general winning opening 2001 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the general winning opening 2001 (large winning openings 2005, 2006, starting openings 2002, 2004) may determine the winning abnormality. Since it is difficult to win multiple gaming balls at the same time, the general winning openings are the large winning openings 2005, 2006 and the starting openings 2002, which are electric accessories that open and close while improving the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent activities. The player can be compensated for the ball by entering the general winning openings 2001 (4 in total), which are provided more than 3 in total. Further, since the general winning opening 2001 can be easily identified by the employees of the hall, it is easy to operate the pachinko machine 1 for maintenance and ball ejection compensation. The reason why hall employees can easily identify the general winning opening 2001 is that the general winning opening 2001 is often arranged together (in separate areas) in the game area, and the electric accessory (large winning opening). This is because the decorative member (appearance) is different from that of 2005, 2006, starting ports 2002, 2004). Further, when the number of prize balls for one ball of the general prize opening is small, the security resistance of the gaming machine against fraudulent acts is improved. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific general winning opening (for example, the left end), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another general winning opening.

In addition, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006, which have a large number of winning balls, do not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 (general winning openings 2001, starting openings 2002, 2004, which have a small number of winning balls) are used to win a prize. An abnormality may be determined. Since the number of prize balls for one prize is large in the large prize opening, the base value changes greatly even with a small number of prize balls. Therefore, it is convenient to easily inspect the change in the base value when inspecting the pachinko machine. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific large winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 where the game ball can be easily obtained by hand), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another large winning opening (for example, 2006). ..

Further, the starting ports 2002 and 2004 may not determine the winning abnormality, and the winning openings other than the starting ports 2002 and 2004 (general winning openings 2001, large winning openings 2005 and 2006) may determine the winning abnormality. Since the number of prize balls for winning one ball is smaller than that of the large winning opening, the player can be compensated for the ball output while improving the security resistance of the game machine to Goto. It should be noted that the winning abnormality may not be determined only by a specific starting opening (for example, the starting opening 2002 provided in the center of the game board is easy to understand the position), and the winning abnormality may be determined by another starting opening 2004.

Further, at the large winning opening and the starting opening, the opening / closing member of the winning opening is in a position where it can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine. Instead, the opening / closing member of the winning opening may be determined so that the opening / closing member cannot be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine, that is, the winning opening is difficult for the employee of the hall to operate the opening / closing member. For example, a winning opening (so-called electric tulip) having a structure in which the opening / closing member is inclined to an oblique position in a closed state and the opening / closing member picks up a game ball is easy for hall employees to operate. On the other hand, in the closed state, the winning opening is blocked by a flat plate-shaped member, and when the flat plate-shaped member retracts to the back, the entrance to the winning opening is opened. Is difficult to operate. In this way, the security level is relaxed only for the winning openings used to compensate the player for the ball, so that it is easy for the employees of the hall to understand and the security resistance of the gaming machine can be improved.

In addition, the detected winning abnormality may be notified. The method of notifying the winning abnormality may be the same as the method of notifying the winning ball number abnormality (for example, outputting a security signal to an external terminal board, displaying a warning on a display device such as a liquid crystal display, a game board or a frame). The decoration lamp is lit or blinking, sound or sound effect, warning sound is output, etc.), but the notification of winning abnormality should be slower than the notification of other abnormalities. Specifically, the abnormal notification time is short, the characters that notify the abnormality are small, the lamp does not light during the abnormality notification, and the abnormality notification sound is made lower (suppressed) than the volume of the notification sound at the time of other abnormalities. ).

Further, in the notification of the winning abnormality, the abnormality is notified for a predetermined time after the winning abnormality is detected, and even if the winning abnormality is further detected during the predetermined time, the setting is first set without extending the predetermined time. It is advisable to end the notification or change the mode of notification at a predetermined time. In this way, when the winning abnormality occurs continuously for a predetermined time (for example, several minutes), it can be determined that the hall is maintaining the gaming machine, not the cheating by the player. Therefore, if the winning abnormality is notified only for a predetermined time and the notification is not continued after that, the work efficiency can be improved without interfering with the maintenance work of the gaming machine by the hall. Further, by changing the mode of notification after a predetermined time, it can be seen that the work is correctly continued without interfering with the maintenance work of the gaming machine. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the notification by sound (or reduce the volume) while the notification by the display device or the lamp is continued.

In summary, the gaming machine of the present embodiment has a correction means for correcting the number of out balls according to the number of winning balls, and the correction means classifies a plurality of winning openings into a plurality of types (starting opening, large winning opening). However, for the first type of winning openings, the number of out-balls is corrected based on the winning balls detected other than when the predetermined conditions are met (during special prize), and for the second type of winning openings, the predetermined number is determined. The number of out balls is not corrected based on the winning balls detected except when the condition is satisfied (during the special prize). As a result, as described above, it is possible to prevent a deviation in the number of out balls when compensating the player due to maintenance of the gaming machine, and it is possible to accurately calculate the number of out balls. In addition, an abnormal base value may be calculated due to a malfunction of the gaming machine, and the base value can be adjusted as the adjustment (maintenance). This makes it possible to calculate and display an accurate base value.

Up to this point, the detection of winning abnormalities and the exceptional handling of detection of winning abnormalities (when not detected) have been described, but the game balls judged to be winning abnormalities are not the prize balls acquired in the game, but the pachinko machines. Since there is a high possibility that it will be used for maintenance (adjustment of the base value), it is desirable that the winning balls for which the winning abnormality is determined are not reflected in the number of out balls and should not be used for the calculation of the base value.

Further, the winning abnormality detected in the base calculation area update process shown in FIGS. 73 and 74 may be notified. For example, in the fraud detection process (step S84) of the timer interrupt process, the winning abnormality display command is created with the winning abnormality as an abnormal state, and is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). The notification of the winning abnormality may be performed when one winning ball related to the winning abnormality is detected, or may be performed when a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected. Further, if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are continuously detected, the winning abnormality may be notified, or if a predetermined number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality are detected within a predetermined time, the winning abnormality may be notified. Notification may be performed.

Further, the notification of the winning abnormality may be terminated after a lapse of a predetermined time, or may be terminated when the winning opening is opened (the condition device is activated).

It is not necessary to notify the winning abnormality.

[9-11. Base value calculation processing that takes advantage of the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the arithmetic circuit 13121 performs the division process for calculating the base value, the base value can be calculated without interfering with other processes than the CPU 13111 executing the division programmatically. The base calculation process described so far has not taken advantage of this characteristic.

That is, in relation to the calculation of the base value, in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above, in the switch input process (step S74), the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to obtain the number of out balls. Is counted, and the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out is calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80). After that, in the base calculation area update process (step S98), the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the base calculation area 13128 are updated.

After that, in the base calculation / display process (step S89), the base value is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls and the number of out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and the calculated base value is displayed on the base display 1317. indicate.

Since the timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined time intervals, the predetermined processing must be completed for each timer interrupt. Therefore, in the slow division processing by the program, the time-consuming processing is included in the timer interrupt processing. That is, it was difficult to include multiple base calculation processes in the timer interrupt process. On the other hand, by performing the division process using the arithmetic circuit 13121, the time required for calculating the base value can be shortened, the base value can be calculated a plurality of times in one timer interrupt process, and the base value can be displayed without delay.

Further, the CPU 13111 is not occupied for the division process from the writing of the value to the division input registers 131216 and 131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 to the reading of the arithmetic result from the division result register A131218. That is, the wait time of 32 clocks from the input timing of the divisor and the divisor to the output timing of the quotient can be effectively utilized, and other processing can be performed during this time. In other words, since the input timing of the divisor and the divisor and the output timing of the quotient are different, the degree of freedom of the base value calculation processing in the timer interrupt processing is improved.

FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing utilizing the characteristics of the arithmetic circuit. Since the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S97 and S98), the description of the same process will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Specifically, the number of out balls is read by reading the detection signal from the sensor that detects the winning ball, the detection signal from the switch that detects fraudulent activity, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the detection signal from the launch ball sensor 1020. To count.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 1 (step S97). In the base calculation process 1, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 1 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 78.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 2 (step S98). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls calculated in step S80, and the base value is calculated. Details of the base calculation process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 77 and 79.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the total number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after the elapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

After that, in the same manner as in step S908 described above, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base (base value or abnormality of the base value) is notified to the player or the hall employee. The base notification command is a display command for the peripheral control unit 1511 when the base value is notified by the display device (liquid crystal display device 1600, 3114, 244) or the speaker 921 controlled by the peripheral control unit 1511 or the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. And sound output commands. Further, when the base display 1317 or the function display unit 1400 controlled by the main control board 1310 is used for notification, since these display devices are composed of 7-segment LEDs and LED lamps, the base notification command is sent to the LED element. It is a drive signal. Specifically, when the 7-segment LED is driven by the driver, the drive signal including the character code set in the driver (character generator in the driver) is the base notification command. When the 7-segment LED is directly driven, the drive signal for lighting each LED element is the base notification command.

FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded.

As a result, if the gaming state is in the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 2 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). When the total number of prize balls is 0, 0 is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Further, when the total number of prize balls is larger than the total number of outs, a value of 1 (100%) or more is calculated as the base value, but the base value does not have to be calculated. Then, after the elapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 76 and 77 is executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each timer interrupt process for a predetermined time (for example, one minute having a cycle longer than the timer interrupt process). By not executing the base calculation display process for each timer interrupt process, the amount of calculation required for calculating the base value (for example, the load of the main control MPU 1311) can be reduced as compared with the case where the base value is calculated for each timer interrupt process.

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97, S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 78 to 79. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 78 and 79, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 1 (step S97).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th2 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the total out-ball number buffer value is updated so as to add the out-ball number buffer value to the total out-ball number (step S9705), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9708). Then, after the elapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9709).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9710), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 2 (step S98).

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there are prize balls, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be adopted.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls is, for example, a prize equivalent to 10 or more prizes per minute in consideration of the number of prize balls at a predetermined time other than during a special prize (for example, the number of prize balls at a general prize opening or a starting opening). For example, when a ball) is obtained. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of out balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121, and the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217. Store (step S9812). Then, after the elapse of a predetermined time (32 clocks), the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) is read from the division result register A131218 and used as the base value (step S9813).

After that, a base notification command is generated (step S9814), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 has timed up (step S9815). Then, when the time is up for the prize ball abnormality notification timer, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S9816). In step S9815, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of launched balls. You may. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing another example of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80 is the same as the timer interrupt process (FIGS. 23 and 75) described above except for the base calculation process (steps S93 and S94) and the base display process (step S95). Is omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first switches the register by executing the main control program (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, the detection signals from the discharge ball sensor 3060 and the launch ball sensor 1020 are read to count the number of out balls.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 3 (step S93). In the base calculation process 3, the total number of out balls is updated using the number of out balls counted in step S74, and a parameter for calculating the base value is written in the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 3 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 81 and 84.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the timer update process (step S76) and the random number update process 1 (step S78).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control built-in RAM 1312. Also, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls is created.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In the base calculation process 2, the total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls counted in step S80, and the parameters for calculating the base value are written in the calculation circuit 13121. Details of the base calculation process 4 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 82 and 85.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and an ordinary electric accessory. The control process (step S88) is executed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a base display process that reads from the arithmetic circuit 13121 and generates a command for notifying the base (step S95).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). By setting a predetermined value in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, the watchdog timer clear register WCL is set to clear. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 81 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 76.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the total number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the total number of out balls. The number of out balls is updated (step S9705). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 3 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing an example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 82 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 77.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and the acquired number of prize balls is added to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls is updated (step S9809). If the number of prize balls cannot be obtained or the number of prize balls obtained is 0, the base calculation process 1 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9810). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 81, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. 82, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is the division input register A131216. The total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

Since the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 and the base display process shown in FIG. 83 are executed for each timer interrupt process, the base value can be calculated and displayed without delay. Note that the base calculation process 1 and the base calculation process 2 may not be executed for each timer interrupt process, but may be executed for each timer interrupt process for a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute).

Next, another example of the base calculation process (steps S97, S98) will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 85. In the base calculation process shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, the base value is calculated for each predetermined number of out balls and for each predetermined number of prize balls.

FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 3 (step S93). The base calculation process 3 shown in FIG. 84 is obtained by removing steps S9709 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 1 shown in FIG. 78.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9701). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 1 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in the switch input process (step S74) is acquired (step S9702), and the acquired number of out balls is added to the out ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9703). If the number of out balls cannot be acquired or the number of out balls acquired is 0, the base calculation process 3 may be terminated immediately. By doing so, the load of the main control MPU 1311 can be reduced without unnecessarily calculating the base value.

After that, it is determined whether the number of out balls stored in the out ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2 (step S9704). Various methods can be used to determine whether the number of out balls is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th2. For example, the out-ball number buffer value and the threshold value Th2 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the out-ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the out-ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the out-ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th2, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated.

On the other hand, if the out-ball number buffer value is the threshold Th2 or more, the total out-ball number buffer value is updated so as to add the out-ball number buffer value to the total out-ball number (step S9705), and the out-ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9706).

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9707). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base calculation process 1 is terminated without calculating the base value. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the total number of out balls is stored in the division input register B131217 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9708).

FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing another example of the base calculation process 4 (step S94). The base calculation process 4 shown in FIG. 85 is obtained by removing steps S9813 and subsequent steps from the base calculation process 2 shown in FIG. 79.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the gaming state is in the special prize (step S9801). The same criteria as those described with reference to FIG. 39 can be used as the criteria for determining whether or not the prize is being awarded. Then, if the game state is during the special prize, since the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, the base is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls calculated in the prize ball control process (step S80) is acquired (step S9802), and there are prize balls, that is, the acquired number of prize balls is 1 or more. (Step S9803). As a result, if there are no prize balls, the process proceeds to step S9808 without updating the number of prize balls. On the other hand, if there are prize balls, it is determined whether the number of prize balls is abnormal (step S9805), and if there is no abnormality in the number of prize balls, the acquired number of prize balls is added to the prize ball number buffer. The number of balls buffer is updated (step S9804).

On the other hand, if the number of prize balls is abnormal, an abnormality notification command is generated (step S9806) to notify the player and the hall employee that the prize balls are abnormal. There are various methods for notifying the abnormality, and one of the methods described below or a combination of two or more may be used. Specifically, various methods described in step S816 of FIG. 46 can be adopted.

An abnormality in the number of prize balls means that, for example, a large number of prize balls (for example, 10 or more prizes per minute considering the number of prize balls at the general prize opening and the starting opening) can be obtained at a predetermined time other than during the special prize. For example. It should be noted that the degree of abnormality may be determined in a plurality of stages according to the degree of deviation from the reference value of the number of prize balls by providing a permissible range in a plurality of stages.

Then, the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality is reset (step S9807), and the counting of the prize ball abnormality notification time is started.

Then, it is determined whether the number of prize balls stored in the prize ball number buffer is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1 (step S9808). Various methods can be used to determine whether the prize ball number buffer value is equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value Th1. For example, the prize ball number buffer value and the threshold Th1 may be compared, or the value of a predetermined bit in the prize ball number storage area may be used for determination (specifically, the prize ball number storage area is 8 bits. If it is configured and the most significant bit is 1, it can be determined that the number of out balls is 128 or more).

Then, if the prize ball number buffer value is smaller than the threshold value Th1, it is not the timing to calculate the base value, so the base calculation process 2 is terminated without calculating the base.

On the other hand, if the prize ball number buffer value is the threshold Th1 or more, the total prize ball number is updated so as to add the prize ball number buffer value to the total prize ball number (step S9809), and the prize ball number buffer is set to 0. Set (step S9810).

Each time the prize ball number is added to the prize ball number buffer, the prize ball number may be output from the external terminal plate 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, and the prize ball number described later becomes a predetermined threshold Th1 or more. In some cases, the threshold Th1 may be output from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer. Here, the prize ball number buffer is an area provided in the main control built-in RAM 1312 for calculating the base value, and the number of prize balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1 is temporarily stored.

After that, it is determined whether the total number of out balls is 0 (step S9811). If the total number of out balls is 0, the base value cannot be calculated, so the base value is not calculated and the base calculation process 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is not 0, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is stored in the division input register A131216 of the arithmetic circuit 13121 (step S9812).

In step S9708 of FIG. 84, the total number of out balls is not stored in the division input register B131217, and in step S9812 of FIG. 85, the value obtained by multiplying the total number of prize balls by a predetermined number (for example, 100) is the division input register A131216. The total number of out balls may be stored in the division input register B131217.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing another example of the base display process (step S95).

The main control MPU 1311 reads the calculation result (total number of prize balls ÷ total number of out balls) from the division result register A131218 and uses it as the base value (step S8901). After that, a base notification command is generated (step S8902), and the base is notified to the player and the hall employee.

After that, it is determined whether or not the prize ball abnormality notification timer activated in step S9807 of the base calculation process 4 has timed up (step S8903). Then, when the time is up for the prize ball abnormality notification timer, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to stop the prize ball abnormality notification (step S8904). In step S8903, the end of the notification is determined by the time of the timer for notifying the prize ball abnormality for a predetermined time, but the end of the notification is determined so as to notify the prize ball abnormality by a predetermined number of shot balls. May be good. In addition, the abnormality may be continuously notified until the hall employee confirms it.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 80, in the timer interrupt processing of this embodiment, the arithmetic circuit is used before the timer interrupt processing ends (before the timer interrupt cycle elapses and the next timer interrupt processing starts). The input values (divisors and divisors) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 are written at the timing when the division result can be read from the 13121. Specifically, the write timing of the input value (divisor, divisor) to the arithmetic circuit 13121 is the first half of the timer interrupt process, before the random number update process (step S78), or a special symbol or a normal symbol. It is better before the control process (steps S86, S88).

Further, it may be determined whether or not the process of calculating the base value is executed based on the number of game media (prize balls) given to the player. That is, from the viewpoint of the number of prize balls determined for each winning opening, it may be switched whether to use the number of prize balls or the number of out balls in the calculation of the base value. For example, the prize ball of the winning opening that gives the maximum prize ball to one winning ball does not have to be used in the calculation of the base value.

Specifically, the number of prize game media (prize balls paid out for one prize ball) to be given when the game medium defined for each prize opening provided in the game area wins is one, three. In the case of 3 types of 5 pieces, the maximum number of 5 prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls need not be used in the calculation of the base value. This is because when a prize with a large number of prize balls is used to calculate the base value, the change in the calculated base value becomes large, and the lower digits of the calculated base value are rounded by the processing means (rounding, rounding up, rounding down, etc.). Even if it is displayed, the displayed value may change frequently. In such a case, it becomes difficult to judge by the hole whether the pachinko machine is exhibiting a predetermined performance (for example, whether the set ball ejection rate is met).

Further, it is not necessary to use the minimum number of prize balls and the corresponding number of out balls in the calculation of the base value. This is because the change in the base value due to a prize with a small number of prize balls is small, so even if the one prize ball is not used in the calculation of the base value, the lower digit of the base value calculated by the processing means is rounded. When displayed (rounded, rounded up, rounded down, etc.), the displayed base value may not change, so processing that does not contribute to the change in display may be omitted.

Further, although the case where the number of prize balls is the maximum and the case where the number of prize balls is the minimum is described, it is not necessary to use the number of prize balls of the intermediate value between the maximum and the minimum in the calculation of the base value. In this case, since the maximum and minimum number of prize balls are used in the calculation of the base value, the number of prize balls and the number of out balls that represent the operation of the entire pachinko machine are shown by averaging the maximum and minimum, which is appropriate. The base value can be shown.

Although the pattern of the number of prize balls of three types has been described, the pattern of the number of prize balls of other types such as five types and seven types is not limited to the three types.

Furthermore, if the winning number of prize balls of a specific type (1 of the minimum value mentioned above, 3 of the intermediate value, 5 of the maximum value, etc.) is not used in the calculation of the base value, the winning will be awarded. All winnings in the gaming state when detected need not be used to calculate the base value. For example, when the winning of the winning opening that grants 5 prize balls is not used in the calculation of the base value, in the gaming state in which the winning of the winning opening is detected, the winning is achieved until the end of the gaming state. Do not use mouth or other prizes to calculate the base value. In addition, even after the start of the game state, the winning openings and other winning openings are not retroactively used in the calculation of the base value.

In addition, the winning when the gaming state when the winning is detected does not have to be used for the calculation of the base value, and the gaming state when the winning is detected transitions to another gaming state. It is not necessary to use the winning prizes up to to calculate the base value. This is because the pachinko machine is normal (for example, is it according to the set ball output rate) by not using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls in the game state in which the calculated base value changes greatly in the calculation of the base value? This is to eliminate the possibility of delaying the judgment of.

It should be noted that the prize balls that are the maximum (or the minimum or the middle) for one winning ball when the number of prize balls changes depending on the game state need not be used in the calculation of the base value.

Next, a specific process will be described in which the number of prize balls and the number of out balls are not used in the calculation of the base value depending on the number of game media (prize balls) described above.

In the switch input process (step S74), when the detection signal from each winning port sensor is input to the main control board 1310, it may be determined whether the main control MPU 1311 uses the winning in the calculation of the base value. .. Then, for prizes that are determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value, the total number of prize balls and the total number of out balls for calculating the base value may not be updated, or the calculation process of the base value may not be executed. do. More specifically, for example, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 75, in the base calculation process 1 (step S97), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base is calculated. In process 2 (step S98), the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value may be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected prizes are not used for the calculation of the base value, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process 1 (step S97) and the base calculation process 2 (step S98) of FIG. 75.

Further, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 80, in the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the number of winning balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value is set to 0 and excluded from the number of out balls, and the base calculation process 4 (step S94). In, the number of prize balls to be excluded from the calculation of the base value should be set to 0 and not added to the total number of prize balls. Further, when all the detected prizes are not used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation process 3 (step S93), the base calculation process 4 (step S94), and the base display process (step S95) of FIG. 80 are not executed. You may.

As a method of excluding the number of winning balls determined not to be used in the calculation of the base value from the number of out balls, the same method as the correction of out balls due to abnormal winning described with reference to FIGS. 73 and 74 may be adopted.

In this case, since it is determined from the number of winning balls whether the detected winning prize is used for the calculation of the base value, the base calculation processing 1 (step S97), the base calculation processing 2 (step S98), and the base calculation processing 3 ( In step S93) and base calculation process 4 (step S94), it is not necessary to determine whether or not the prize is being awarded.

In this way, by excluding the number of out balls and the number of winning balls required for a predetermined winning from the calculation of the base value, the processing is executed without skipping, so that it is easy to check whether the processing is correctly executed especially in the development stage. Can be confirmed. Further, by not updating the base value without executing the process of calculating the base value, the process of the main control MPU 1311 is reduced, and other processes (lottery process, process of determining the fluctuation pattern, etc.) are accurately executed. can.

That is, among a plurality of prizes having different degrees of advantage, even if the maximum prize is given to the player, it is not used in the calculation of the base value, and the base value is displayed unchanged by the grant of the prize. NS. Further, the calculated base value is displayed unchanged at least until the game state in which the maximum prize is given is completed.

[9-12. Another configuration of a gaming machine that displays the base]
FIG. 87 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, unlike the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 17, a board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is provided on the game board 5 as a discharge ball sensor 3060, and a frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is a main body frame. It is provided in 4. Either one of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be provided, or both may be provided.

As described above, the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is an out-port passing ball sensor 1021 that detects a game ball passing through the out-port 1111 provided in the lower part of the game area 5a (see FIG. 53). The output signal of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control board 1310 and input to the main control MPU 1311 as will be described later with reference to FIG. 92. In this case, the number of game balls detected by the out-port passing ball sensor 1021 and the number of game balls detected by the start port sensors 2104 and 2551, and the number of game balls detected by various winning port sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, and 2557. The total with the number is taken as the number of out balls.

As described above, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the discharge port for discharging the game ball discharged from the game area 5a to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 4). The output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and the connector connecting the main body frame 4 and the game board 5.

When both the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are provided, the count result of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A and the count result of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are compared, and two count results are obtained. An error may be notified when a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs. Further, when a difference of more than a predetermined value occurs between the two counting results within a predetermined time, an error may be notified.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the display switch 1318 is not an indispensable configuration, and the display contents (provisional section display and fixed section display) of the base display 1317 can be switched at predetermined time intervals as described later. (See FIG. 99), the base value may be displayed or the display content may be switched by operating the display switch 1318.

The configuration other than the above is the same as the control configuration of the pachinko machine shown in FIG.

88 and 89 are views showing the arrangement of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B.

FIG. 88 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls are aligned in one row in a ball flow path 960 provided in the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board, and the out balls are counted by one frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B. .. The game ball that rolls in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the large winning opening 2005, and 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 that allows the discharged game balls to flow down to the right side of the front view and align them in a single row. The frame-side ejection ball sensor 3060B counts the game balls arranged in one row.

FIG. 89 shows an example of a mechanism in which out balls arranged in a ball flow path 960 provided on the back surface of the game board are allowed to flow down by two rows and counted by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. The game ball that rolls in the game area 5a flows into the main body frame 4 on the back surface side of the game board 5 via the out opening 1111, the general winning opening 2001, the starting ports 2002, 2004, and the large winning opening 2005, 2006. The main body frame 4 is provided with a ball flow path 960 in which the discharged game balls flow down from the left and right to the vicinity of the center and are aligned in two rows. Each of the two frame-side ejection ball sensors 3060B counts the game balls arranged in each row.

Although the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is provided at the position shown in FIGS. 53, 88, and 89, it may be unitized together with the ball flow path 960 and detachably configured from the main body frame 4. Further, the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be configured to be detachable from the main body frame 4.

FIG. 90 is a diagram showing an example of connection between the discharge ball sensor and the main control board.

The output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected to the connector 13101 provided on the main control board 1310 via the relay board, and the output signal of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is input to the main control MPU 1311. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected to the connector 13102 provided on the main control board 1310, and the output signal of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is input to the main control MPU 1311.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the panel side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected is preferably provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected is the main control board 1310. It should be provided on the lower side.

The connector 13101 to which the output line of the board-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected and the connector 13102 to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B are connected are provided separately. The output line of the 3060A and the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to one connector (for example, 13102).

The output line of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A may be connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the relay board. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be directly connected to the main control board 1310. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B may be connected to the main control board 1310 via a relay board (not shown). After connecting the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B to the payout control board 951 or the relay board, it is connected to the main control board 1310 via a connector (for example, a floating connector) that connects the game board 5 and the main body frame 4. You may.

Further, the pachinko machine of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of magnetic detection sensors 1030. The output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is input to the main control MPU 1311 as described later with reference to FIG. 92.

FIG. 91 is a front view showing an example of the game board 5, and in particular, shows the arrangement of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided on the game board 5.

The magnetic detection sensor 1030 is a sensor that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, and is in the vicinity of a sensor that detects winning in various winning openings 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, and 2006 (positions of stars in the figure). It is provided in. The detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is indicated by a broken line on the game board 5, and partially overlaps.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 is also provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111. This is to prevent incorrect base value calculation. That is, when the player operates the discharge ball sensor 3060 by bringing the magnet close to the out port 1111, the number of out balls is counted more than the actual number and the base value is lowered. For this reason, the game store may perform maintenance work on the pachinko machine 1 so as to return the base value to a predetermined standard value. In a pachinko machine whose maintenance work is performed based on a base value different from the actual one, the number of balls released in the normal state increases, the player can play in a more advantageous state than usual, and a large number of balls can be obtained. A magnetic detection sensor 1030 is provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 in order to calculate an accurate base value and prevent such illegal payout of the ball. It is preferable to provide the magnetic detection sensor 1030 in a place other than the vicinity of the out port 1111 where the discharge ball sensor 3060 may malfunction due to magnetism.

As shown in the figure, the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided near the out port 1111 should have a wider detection range than the other magnetic detection sensors 1030. This is because, as shown in FIG. 89, when the out-balls are detected by the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the magnetism is detected within a sufficient range that can cover the plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060. Further, the magnetic detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 1030 provided in the vicinity of the out port 1111 may include another winning opening (for example, the large winning opening 2005 provided in the upper part of the out opening 1111).

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control input circuit 1315. The main control input circuit 1315 includes a discharge ball sensor 3060 and a winning port sensor (general winning port sensor 3015, first starting port sensor 2104, second starting port sensor 2551, first large winning port sensor 2114, second upper large winning port sensor). Sensor 2554, second lower prize opening sensor 2557, etc.), receives the output signal of the magnetic detection sensor 1030, and inputs it to the main control MPU 1311.

The main control input circuit 1315 includes an interface circuit 1331 and a buffer circuit 1332. The interface circuit 1331 outputs signals input from various sensors after level conversion and shaping (for example, chattering removal). The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the input signal to the data bus at the timing instructed by the main control MPU 1311.

Specifically, the output signal from each sensor is input to any of the terminals A1 to A8 of the interface circuit 1331, and the signal level-converted or shaped by the interface circuit 1331 is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals and buffered. It is input to any of the terminals A1 to A8 of the circuit 1332. The buffer circuit 1332 outputs the signals input to the Y1 to Y8 terminals to the data bus at the timing when the chip select signals CS4 and CS5 of the main control MPU 1311 are input. As a result, the detection result by each sensor is taken into the main control MPU 1311.

The interface circuit 1331 includes an abnormality detection circuit and a power supply monitoring circuit. The abnormality detection circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the input of the A1 to A8 terminals, and the input signal to each terminal is at a level lower than a predetermined threshold (for example, 4V) or a predetermined threshold (for example, power supply voltage-). When the level becomes higher than 0.1V), a disconnection of the connection wire to the switch or a short circuit of the switch is detected, and when the input of any terminal exceeds the normal range defined by the predetermined threshold value, the abnormal signal E Is output, and a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals regardless of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. The power supply monitoring circuit of the interface circuit 1331 monitors the power supply voltage VS, and when the power supply voltage becomes a level lower than a predetermined threshold value (for example, 12V-20%) and detects an abnormality in the power supply, an abnormality signal E is output. At the same time, a signal at a level at which each sensor is OFF is output from the Y1 to Y8 terminals regardless of the input signals of the A1 to A8 terminals. That is, even if an ON level signal is input from the sensor, the output of the interface circuit with respect to the input becomes the OFF level. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 does not determine that the signal output from the sensor is valid (the output of the sensor is invalid). As a result, the main control MPU 1311 does not need to determine whether or not to execute the processing of the input signal depending on whether or not the power supply of the switch is reduced, the processing load can be reduced, and the output signals of Y1 to Y8 can be output. Regardless of the state of the input signals A1 to 8, each sensor can output a signal at a level of OFF.

As will be described later, when the main control MPU 1311 detects an abnormal signal, it does not calculate the base value (see FIG. 105). Signals from sensors used to calculate the base value (number of ejected balls, number of prize balls) and signals from sensors not used to calculate the base value (gate sensor 2547, etc.) are input to the interface circuit 1331. .. The interface circuit 1331 outputs an abnormal signal when any of the input signals becomes abnormal. Therefore, even if an abnormality is detected in the sensor that is not related to the calculation of the base, the calculation of the base is not executed, and the display content of the base display 1317 is maintained and does not change.

That is, the main control input circuit 1315 monitors the signal from the sensor used for calculating the base value and the signal from the sensor not used for calculating the base value, and when any of the signals becomes abnormal, Output an abnormal signal to stop the base calculation.

93, 94, and 95 are diagrams showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. FIG. 93 (A) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, and FIG. 93 (B) shows an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are one. An example of being connected to the driver circuit 1334 is shown. FIG. 94 shows the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317, and the main control board 1310. 95 (A) is a front view of the main control board 1310 housed in the main control board box 1320, FIG. 95 (B) is a bottom view, and FIG. 95 (C) is a right side view.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 93 (B), the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

In the example shown in FIG. 93A, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and taken into different latch circuits 1333. Then, the display data is output from the different driver circuits 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the example shown in FIG. 93B, the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the display data of the base display 1317 are output from the main control MPU 1311 and incorporated into one latch circuit 1333. Then, the display data is output from one driver circuit 1334 to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 93A and 93B, a reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. It is preferable that the signal line from which the display data of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is output from the main control MPU 1311 does not intersect with the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal.

The connector 13101 is a connector to which the output line of the panel-side discharge ball sensor 3060A is connected, and may be provided on the upper side of the main control board 1310. Not only the output line from the panel side discharge ball sensor 3060A but also the output lines from other winning opening sensors 3015, 2104 and the like and the magnetic detection sensor 1030 are connected to the connector 13101. The connector 13102 is a connector to which the output line of the frame-side discharge ball sensor 3060B is connected, and may be provided under the main control board 1310. The signal from the discharge ball sensor 3060 input to the connectors 13101 and 13102 is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the interface circuit 1331 and the buffer circuit 1332.

FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the arrangement of parts arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 on the main control board 1310. FIG. 94 is a view showing the printed circuit board constituting the main control board 1310 from the back surface side. The solid line is the pattern on the back surface side, the broken line is the pattern on the component side, and the dotted line is the component mounted on the component surface of the printed circuit board. Is shown. The illustration of the ground pattern and the power supply pattern is omitted.

The data lines (D1 to D8) output from the main control MPU 1311 are input to the latch 2 (1333), and the segment on the cathode side of each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 2 (1334). Connected to the terminal.

Further, a part of the data lines (D1 to D4) output from the main control MPU 1311 is input to the latch 1 (1333), and each digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 via the driver 1 (1334). It is connected to the common terminal on the anode side of.

A chip select signal for controlling the operation timing of the latch circuit 1333 is output from the main control MPU 1311. Specifically, the latch circuit 2 (1333) is the timing at which the chip select signal CS2 of the main control MPU 1311 is input. Then, the data for controlling the blinking of each segment is taken in from the data lines (D1 to D8). Further, the latch circuit 1 (1333) takes in data for controlling the blinking of each digit from the data lines (D1 to D4) at the timing when the chip select signal CS3 of the main control MPU 1311 is input.

A reset signal from the reset circuit 1335 and a clock signal from the clock oscillator 1336 are input to the main control MPU 1311. The reset signal is also input from the reset circuit 1335 to each latch circuit 1333, and the latch circuit 1333 clears the latched data by the reset signal.

The data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal. Similarly, although not shown, the data lines (D1 to D8) between the main control MPU 1311 and the function display unit 1400 are arranged so as not to intersect with the signal lines of the reset signal and the clock signal.

This is because in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the base display 1317 is controlled by dynamic lighting, so that a pulse signal is transmitted in the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317, and the main control MPU 1311 and the main control MPU 1311 The level changes frequently on the data line to and from the base indicator 1317. In particular, a large current required to drive the LED element flows between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317. Therefore, the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 (particularly between the driver circuit 1334 and the base display 1317) causes noise. Then, when the data line between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 intersects with the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, noise is placed on the signal line of the reset signal or the clock signal, causing the pachinko machine 1 to malfunction. there's a possibility that. The intersection of the signal lines can also occur at the intersection of the wiring patterns on the front surface and the back surface of the printed circuit board, or the intersection of the wiring patterns of the inner layer and the front surface layer (front surface, back surface).

Specifically, by inputting a reset signal to the main control MPU 1311 at a timing that cannot occur originally, the main control MPU 1311 may be reset during the game, and the game may be stopped or the game state may be erased. .. If the game state is erased at a timing that cannot occur originally, the normal power off processing is not executed and the game is reset, so that the data stored in the RAM 1312 is cleared, the jackpot ends, or the variable display is displayed. The game ends in the middle, or the hold of the special symbol variation display game or the normal symbol variation display game is deleted.

The main control board box 1320 is partially low in height and high in other parts depending on the height of the parts attached to the main control board 1310 and the interference with other members when assembled. It has become. For example, as shown in FIG. 95, since the main control MPU 1311 has a high height, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high at the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted. In the area on the left side of the main control board box 1320, the height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and components such as a relatively tall electrolytic capacitor are mounted. On the other hand, the height of the main control board box 1320 is low in the area on the right side of the place where the main control MPU 1311 is mounted, and parts such as a short IC are mounted (tall parts cannot be arranged). The height of the main control board box 1320 is high, and the area where a high-height component can be mounted is indicated by hatching. Further, in the area where the connectors 13101 and 13102 are attached, the main control board box 1320 is formed at a height equal to or less than the surface on which the mating connector is inserted / removed (preferably the same height as the board surface). It is advisable not to hinder the insertion and removal of the cable (connector) connected to the board of.

In this way, by partially changing the height of the main control board box 1320 according to the height of the parts mounted on the board, it is possible to suppress the goto action of attaching an illegal part (circuit) on the main control board. can.

In FIG. 95, the base display 1317 is arranged in the upper right part of the main control board 1310, but even if the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for the convenience of maintenance, the display content is based at a position where it is difficult for the player to see. The display 1317 may be arranged. For example, if the player can visually recognize the display content of the base display 1317 when the main body frame 4 is opened by a predetermined angle for maintenance during business (checking for the presence or absence of a game ball in the replenishment tank), the player In many cases, the player does not correctly understand how to read the display of the base display 1317. Therefore, the player may be asked to explain the display contents of the base display 1317 in order to prevent such complexity. In addition, it is preferable to arrange the base display 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents. Further, by arranging the base display 1317 in this way, it is possible to suppress inquiries from the player. That is, the base display 1317 displays the base value for the operation of 52,000 out balls at the maximum, but since it is different from the base value in the short-time game by the player, a complaint about the ball output rate may occur. There is. By arranging the base display 1317 in this way, complaints from the player can be suppressed. The above is the same for the above-mentioned accessory ratio indicator 1317, and it is preferable to arrange the accessory ratio indicator 1317 at a position where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the displayed contents.

As shown in the figure, since the base display (7-segment LED) 1317 has a low height, it is mounted in a region where the height of the main control board box 1320 is low.

FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93 (A), an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334. It is a circuit diagram. In this embodiment, an example in which the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are composed of a light emitting diode (LED) will be described, but the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 may be composed of a lamp (bulb) or another light emitting element. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334.

The latch circuit 1333 captures the input data at the timing of the clock signal, holds it until the next clock signal or clear signal is input, and outputs the data. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the input signal, and outputs the power supply voltage (+ 12V) input to the VCS terminal of the driver circuit 1334, respectively.

Specifically, the latch circuit 1333 takes in the bus data input to the D1 to D8 terminals at the rising timing of the clock signal CK, and outputs the bus data from the Q1 to Q8 terminals to the driver circuit 1334, respectively. The driver circuit 1334 operates the switching transistor according to the signal input to the I1 to I8 terminals, and changes the voltage of the O1 to O8 terminals, respectively. The outputs O1 to O8 of the driver circuit 1334 are connected to the segment terminals of the 7-segment LEDs constituting the base display 1317 and the 7-segment LEDs of the function display unit 1400.

For example, in order to light the 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the first digit of the base display 1317, the driver 2 (1334) sends the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 2 (1333) at the rising timing of the CS1. Output as segment data (LOW when lit). Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal. That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS0, COM1 output from the driver 1 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the first-digit 7-segment LED (7seg1) of the base display 1317 is set. Driven.

Further, in order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 taken into the latch 3 (1333) is transferred by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of the CS2, and the segment data (when lit is LOW). ) Is output. Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS3, the driver 4 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 taken into the latch 4 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven). Specifically, if the bus data D1 is HIGH at the rising timing of CS3, the O1 terminal of the driver 4 (1334) becomes HIGH, and the 7-segment LED (LED-C1) of the function display unit 1400 is driven.

In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED of both the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 is an anode common type, a current flows from the driver 1 to the driver 2 in the 7-segment LED. Therefore, the outputs of the drivers 1 and 4 when the segment is lit are VCS (+ 12V), and the outputs of the drivers 2 and 3 are GND (0V).

The latches 1 and 4 (1333) on the common side output the data input from the data bus to the Q1 to Q8 terminals as they are, but the latches 1 and 4 (1333) have a decoder function and the data bus. A signal may be output from any of the terminals Q1 to Q8 according to the binary data obtained from.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 93A and 96, the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Further, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are also output in the same timer interrupt processing. That is, since both the common data and the segment data are sent to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400 by different signal lines, both the display data to the base display 1317 and the display data to the function display unit 1400 can be displayed. Output in one timer interrupt process.

Then, in the next timer interrupt process, the common data for selecting the next digit (LED group) is output, and the segment data for controlling the lighting of each LED is output at the same timing as the output of the common data.

The display data on the base display 1317 and the display data on the function display unit 1400 are generated by another process in the timer interrupt process, and are output at different timings in the timer interrupt process. That is, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the base display 1317 by executing the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 generates and outputs display data to the function display unit 1400 by executing the game control code 13131 in the game control area. These data will be generated by another program (code) and output at different timings.

Next, a modified example of the signal output timing when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334 will be described.

The segment data sent from the driver 2 (1334) to the base display 1317 and the common data sent from the driver 1 (1334) to the base display 1317 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. Similarly, the segment data sent from the driver 3 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 and the common data sent from the driver 4 (1334) to the function display unit 1400 are output in the same timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 may be executed at a timing different from the timer interrupt process for outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400, and may be subsequently executed.

The process of outputting signals to the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 is executed according to the programs (game control code 13131, base calculation / display code 13135) stored in different areas of the RAM 1312, but they are the same. In order to prevent the common signal from being transmitted at the timing, it is preferable to use the control data common to the two codes and control so that the transmission timing of the common signal does not overlap. For example, a common counter that is commonly used by the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 is provided. For example, when the common counter is 0 to 3, a common signal is output to the function display unit 1400, and the common counter is used. Is controlled to output a common signal to the base display 1317 when is 4 to 7.

The process of outputting the common signal and the process of outputting the segment signal may be separated or configured by one subroutine. The game control code 13131 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the function display unit 1400 and the base calculation / display code 13135 for executing the process of outputting the data to be sent to the base display 1317 are each. It is preferable to call the subroutine at the timing specified by the program and output a signal to the function display unit 1400 or the base display 1317. In this case, the output of the data sent to the function display unit 1400 and the output of the data sent to the base display 1317 are not performed in the same timer interrupt process. Although the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135 are executed within one timer interrupt process, the subroutine is called by different timer interrupt processes.

As shown in FIGS. 93 (A) and 96, when the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to different driver circuits 1334, a display (function display unit 1400) provided outside the main control board 1310 is provided. Even if noise is mixed in, the influence on the circuit of the display (base display 1317) inside the main control board 1310 and the circuit of the main control board 1310 can be suppressed.

FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the configuration of the main control I / O port 1314, and as shown in FIG. 93 (B), the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to a common driver circuit 1334 on the common side. It is a circuit diagram of an example. The main control I / O port 1314 is arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, and outputs the display data output from the main control MPU 1311 to the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. do.

As mentioned above, the main control I / O port 1314 includes a latch circuit 1333 and a driver circuit 1334. Since the configuration of the circuit included in the main control I / O port 1314 is the same as the circuit configuration described above, the difference from the configuration example shown in FIG. 96 will be described below.

In the example shown in FIG. 97, the operation for lighting the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317 is the same as the example shown in FIG. 96, but the common signal of the function display unit 1400 is the same as that of the base display 1317. It is common.

In order to light the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400, the bus data D1 to D8 captured in the latch 3 (1333) is used as segment data (LOW when lit) by the driver 3 (1334) at the rising timing of CS2. Output. Further, the drive timing of the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400 is determined by the timing of the voltage applied to the common terminal (LED-C1). That is, at the rising timing of CS0, the driver 1 (1334) outputs the bus data D1 to D4 captured in the latch 1 (1333) as common data (HIGH when driven).

In this way, the circuit scale can be reduced by sharing the driver circuit between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400. By reducing the number of parts, the failure rate can be reduced, the size of the board can be reduced, and the board unit (including the main control board 1310 and the main control board box 1320) can be easily miniaturized. In the pachinko machine, the main control board 1310 does not use an inner layer pattern (printed circuit board having three or more layers), but uses a two-layer board having a pattern only on the front surface and the back surface. Therefore, even if the components can be physically arranged on the main control board 1310 composed of the two-layer board, the area around which the wiring pattern is routed cannot be secured, and the board must be larger than the multi-layer board having three or more layers. Therefore, it is important to reduce the number of parts to reduce the size.

FIG. 98 is a timing diagram of the configuration example of the main control I / O port 1314 shown in FIG. 97. In FIG. 98, the dotted line perpendicular to the time axis indicates the timer interrupt processing delimiter (timer interrupt processing start timing).

In the timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0. Latch 1 (1333) selected by CS0 takes in D1 to D4 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS0, and driver 1 (1334) receives common data (during drive) corresponding to the digits specified by D1 to D4. Outputs HIGH).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit by the function display unit 1400 to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS2. The latch 3 (1333) selected by CS2 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS2, and the driver 3 (1334) fetches the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Output and turn on the 7-segment LED of the function display unit 1400.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the data of the segment lit by the base display 1317 to the data bus at the timing of outputting the CS1. The latch 2 (1333) selected by CS1 takes in D1 to D8 from the data bus at the rising timing of CS1, and the driver 2 (1334) fetches the segment data (LOW when lit) specified by D1 to D8. Output and turn on the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets all the data on the data bus to 0 at the timing of outputting CS0, CS1 and CS2. As a result, the digit selection data set in the latch 1 (1333) and the display data set in the latches 2, 3 (1333) are erased, and the 7-segment LED is turned off.

In the next timer interrupt process, the main control MPU 1311 outputs the next digit selection data to the data bus at the timing of outputting CS0, repeats the above-described processing, and outputs the digit selection data and the display data. In this way, the common driver circuit is shared between the base display 1317 and the function display unit 1400, the segment data is time-divided and output, and the common common data is used to function with the base display 1317. The LED element with the display unit 1400 can be turned on.

As shown in FIGS. 93B and 97, since the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 are connected to the common driver circuit 1334, the circuit scale of the main control board 1310 can be reduced, and high-density mounting (for example, high-density mounting) can be performed. , It is possible to easily mount the components on the main control board 1310, which cannot be used for the adoption of the multilayer board or the close arrangement of the components.

Further, in order to control both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by common common data in one timer interrupt process, the function display unit 1400 and the base display are output during the period when the common data is output. The segment data is output at a timing different from that of 1317. Therefore, while controlling both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 by a common common data line, both the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 can be displayed and controlled within one timer interrupt process. ..

In the case shown in FIG. 98, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first, and the display data of the base display 1317 is output later. Each display data is latched at the rising timing of the chip select (CS2, CS1) and erased at the rising timing of the chip select (CS0) corresponding to the erased data. Therefore, as shown in the figure, if the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output first and the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output later, the display time of the function display unit 1400 is the display time of the base display unit 1317. Become longer. This prolongs the lighting time of the LED of the function display unit 1400 arranged on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 in one cycle and raises the brightness, thereby reducing the visibility due to being directly illuminated by the lighting of the hall. This is to prevent it. Further, since the base display 1317 is arranged on the back side which is darker than the front side of the pachinko machine 1, even if the LED is made to emit light with low brightness, the influence on the visibility of the base display 1317 is small. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first LED and the second LED controlled by the main control MPU 1311 are provided, and the emission brightness of the first LED is higher than the emission brightness of the second LED.

Contrary to the above, the display data of the base display unit 1317 is output first, the display data of the function display unit 1400 is output later, and the display time of the base display unit 1317 is displayed by the function display unit 1400. It may be longer than the time.

FIG. 99 is a diagram showing changes in the state (interval) involved in the calculation of the base value.

On the base display 1317 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the provisional section display and the fixed section display are switched and displayed at predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) intervals. In the provisional section display, the base value of the section being measured is displayed. Specifically, "bA." Is displayed in the first two digits to indicate that the base value A is displayed, and the base value A being measured is displayed in the last two digits as a two-digit percentage. If the integer portion of the percentage of the base value A is 99, "99" is displayed, if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that the base value A can be seen as 0% or 100%.

In the provisional section display, if the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000), the first two digits (or all four digits) are blinked and displayed (for example, the cycle is 0.6 seconds). (Repeat turning on for 0.3 seconds and turning off for 0.3 seconds), indicating that the accurate base value cannot be measured. On the other hand, when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is a predetermined number (for example, 6000) or more, the first two digits are lit and displayed to indicate that an accurate base value can be measured.

In the fixed section display, the base value of the previous section is displayed. Specifically, "bb." Is lit in the first two digits to indicate that the base value B is displayed, and the last two digits indicate the base value of the previous section (below the previous period). The base value B), which is the final value of two digits, is lit and displayed at a percentage of two digits. If the integer portion of the percentage of the base value B is 99, "99" is displayed, if it is 100 or more, "99." is displayed, and if it is 0, "00" is displayed. Therefore, even if the number of display digits of the base display 1317 is two, it can be displayed so that the base value B can be seen as 0% or 100%.

In the first section, since the previous section is a test section, the base value has not been measured. Therefore, in the fixed section display, "bb." Is blinked in the first two digits and "---" is blinked in the last two digits.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a predetermined number (for example, 256) in which the number of out balls is less than 500 from the first power-on is set as a test section, and the base value is not calculated. This is because, in a predetermined number of launches from the first power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the number of balls to be ejected may vary within the range of the probability distribution, the base value is not stable, and a meaningful base value cannot be measured. .. Therefore, in the test section, the base value is not displayed on the base display 1317, and the base value is indefinite. Specifically, in the provisional section display, "bA." Is displayed in the first two digits, "---" is displayed in the last one digit, and "bb." Is displayed in the first two digits in the fixed section display. , "---" is displayed in the last digit. In the test section, the entire number of digits of the base display 1317 is blinked to indicate that the accurate base value cannot be measured. In the test section as well, the base value may be calculated and the base value may be indefinite without displaying the calculated base value on the base display 1317.

Here, the first power-on means the first power-on after the completion of 1 of the pachinko machine, or immediately after the initialization of the work area for base calculation (S26 in FIG. 101, S8013 in FIG. 108) is executed. It is in a state. Further, the power-on time generally used in the present specification is a power-on time other than the first power-on time.

Further, all LEDs of all digits of the base display 1317 may be blinked at a predetermined time after the power is turned on or after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (from the OFF operation of the setting key 971). ..

If an abnormality is detected in the data and the data is deleted in the inspection of the data in the base calculation area 13128, which will be described later, the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section.

In each section other than the test section, when the total number of out balls in all game states (big hit, normal game, time saving, non-time saving, high probability, low probability, etc.) reaches 52000, the next section Switch to and measure the base value anew. The number of out balls in one section is not 52,000, and any other number may be used as long as it is a predetermined value. For example, assuming that the daily operating time of the pachinko machine 1 is 10 hours, 60,000 pachinko machines, which are the daily operating hours (number of out balls), may be adopted as the number of out balls in one section. A well-cut number of 50,000 or 100,000 may be adopted.

The number of out balls in one section may be changed as appropriate. For example, it is preferable that a setting switch (DIP switch, rotary switch, etc.) is provided on the main control board 1310, and the number of out balls in one section is set according to the setting of the switch. The switch is provided on the main control board 1310 provided on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1 or another board connected to the main control board 1310. Further, if the setting of the switch is changed, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) of the RAM 1312 is initialized and the calculation of the base value is restarted from the test section, or the calculation of the base value is restarted from the beginning of the current section. good. Since many pachinko machines are in operation immediately after being introduced as a new machine, the number of out balls in one section is set to a large number, and after the business period has passed, the number of out balls in one section is set to a small number. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a setting means capable of setting an operation for determining the length of a section which is a unit for calculating the base value, and when the power is turned on for the first time, it is based on the operation set by the setting means. The length of one section is set.

As an example of displaying the section immediately before the provisional section currently being measured as the fixed section display, the base value of a plurality of fixed sections (for example, the section before 1 to 3 sections) is switched and displayed. You may. At this time, even if the display is switched from the provisional section → the fixed section 1 → the fixed section 2 → the fixed section 3 at predetermined time intervals, the provisional section → the fixed section 1 → the fixed section 2 → is operated by the operation of the display changeover switch provided separately. The fixed section 3 may be switched and displayed.

In this case, the first two digits of the base display 1317 in the fixed section display are not "bb.", But "b1", "b2", "b3", etc. It is better to display differently.

In this way, the base value of the section currently being measured and the base value of the immediately preceding one or a plurality of sections are switched and displayed on the base display 1317 at predetermined time intervals. In addition, a part of the base display 1317 is displayed so that the displayed contents can be distinguished, and the measured base value is displayed on the other part.

FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of characters displayed on the base display 1317.

As described above, the base display 1317 is composed of a plurality of digits (for example, 4 digits) of 7-segment LEDs, and displays numbers and characters by lighting or blinking the segments of each digit. The numbers 0 to 9 can be displayed, and the letters A, b, c, d, E, F, L and-signs can also be displayed. In addition, the decimal point can be displayed at the same time as numbers and letters. The case where the number 6 is displayed at the same time as the decimal point and the case where the number 9 is displayed are shown.

101 and 102 are flowcharts showing an example of the initialization process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

In the initialization process shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, the check code calculation process (step S50) and the check code storage process (step S52) are deleted as compared with the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22. Therefore, the calculation of the check code in the base calculation area is executed in the base calculation process (step S8038) of the timer interrupt process. The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 22 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission so that the RAM 1312 can be written (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is being operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( The area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, an operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18) and a power failure flag abnormality in which the power failure flag is not set (step S20) , There are a RAM abnormality in which the checksums of the RAMs do not match (step S22) and an abnormality in the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (the game work area and the game stack area) is used. Included) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the ones shown in the figure, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 The entire RAM area including the above may be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N is determined in this order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is deleted under different conditions (the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128) for each data type. do. That is, the backed up game control area 13126 is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, but the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased. When the base calculation area 13128 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the base value calculated by the pachinko machine 1 can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up base calculation area 13128 is not erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, the base calculation area 13128 is prevented from being erased by the operation of the staff of the game hall, and the abnormal base value is concealed. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to reliably detect a gaming machine modified to a state in which the base value is high or low.

The main control MPU 1311 has an initial setting process (step S28) for setting in various setting registers of the main control MPU 1311 (CPU 13111) when a power recovery setting or a RAM initialization process of the RAM work area is executed, and a peripheral control board. The power-on command setting process (step S32) for transmitting to 1510 is executed, and execution of interrupt processing including timer interrupt processing is permitted (step S34). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the power failure warning signal (step S36) and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is ON (step S38). When the power failure warning signal is not ON (the result of step S38 is "No"), the random number update process is executed (step S40).

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected (the result of step S38 is "Yes"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the power cutoff process (power cutoff setting means). In the power-off processing, first, the execution of interrupt processing is prohibited (step S42), the output ports are cleared, and the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port is stopped (step S44). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held (step S46), and checks the checksum calculation result in the RAM 1312. Store in the thumb area (step S48).

Subsequently, the data in the main area of the base calculation work (base calculation area 13128) is duplicated in each backup area (step S54). At this time, the calculated check code is also duplicated. The backup may be executed as appropriate (for example, each time the data is updated) in the base calculation process instead of the process when the power supply is cut off on the main board side. In this way, by storing the data used for calculating the base value together with the calculated (or predetermined value) check code in the backup area, the data for calculating the base and the calculated base value even when the power is turned off Can be retained and the base value for long-term operation can be calculated.

The check code checked in step S24 is calculated in step S8038 (FIG. 106) of the base calculation process. Further, in the modification described later, the calculation is performed in step S50 (FIG. 22) of the initialization process.

Further, a value indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area as a power failure flag (step S56), and "01H" indicating write prohibition is output to the RAM protect register to prohibit writing of the RAM 1312 (step). S58), wait until recovery from a power failure (infinite loop).

FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a configuration of a base calculation area 13128 in which the accessory ratio calculation area shown in FIG. 26A is replaced in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment.

The base calculation area 13128 is composed of a part of the RAM 1312, and is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area) as described above.

The base calculation area 13128 includes a storage area for a base value A, a base value B, a section counter, a total number of out balls, a low probability / non-time saving out ball number, and a low probability / non-time saving prize ball number.

The storage area of the base value A is composed of 1 byte and stores the base value of the provisional section currently being measured. The storage area of the base value B is composed of 1 byte, and stores the base value measured in the section immediately before the provisional section. The storage area of the section counter is composed of 1 byte, and stores a value indicating the section for which the base value is currently being measured. The section counter is updated every time the section is switched, and is used to control the display contents that differ depending on the section. The interval counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Specifically, the section counter = 0 in the test section, the section counter = 1 in the first section, and the section counter = 2 in the second and subsequent sections. Further, the section counter may be controlled so as not to be larger than 255 as a value from 0 to 255, and the section counter = 2 or more after the second section.

The storage area for the total number of out balls is composed of 2 bytes, and stores all the number of out balls regardless of the gaming state (that is, a value indicating the operation of the gaming machine). The total number of out balls is used to determine the switching of the interval, which is the measurement unit of the base. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the base value in each section is measured with the operation of one day as one section. Therefore, 2 bytes (65536) are allocated to the storage area of the total number of out balls. As described above, the total number of out balls is a storage area for counting all the number of out balls regardless of the gaming state for each section, and the total number of out balls in the above-described embodiment (the number of out balls in the special prize). It is different from the total value from the start of operation of the pachinko machine 1).

The storage area for the low-probability, non-time-saving out-balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of out-balls for calculating the base value (the number of out-balls in the game state other than during the special prize) is calculated. Store. The storage area for the low-probability, non-time-saving prize balls is composed of 2 bytes or more (preferably 4 bytes), and the number of prize balls for calculating the base value (the number of prize balls in the gaming state other than during the special prize) is calculated. Store. The storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving out-balls and the storage area for the low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls may be an area of 2 bytes or more, but considering the calculation process of the base value, the number of bytes is the same. It is better to do it.

The storage capacity (number of bytes) of each storage area described above is only an example as described above, and may be determined according to the number of out balls in one section.

Further, when the main area and the backup area of the base calculation area 13128 are provided, a storage area having the same configuration is provided in the RAM 1312.

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. 23, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 104 is provided with a base calculation process (step S801) instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and the combination of step S89. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. Note that the same steps as the timer interrupt processing described above in FIG. 23 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74), the timer update process (step S76), the random number update process 1 (step S78), and the prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) is updated to calculate the base value (step S801). Details of the base calculation process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 105 and 106. The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is preferable to execute the base calculation process (step S801) in an early order in order to reliably execute each timer interrupt. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88), output data setting process (step S90), and peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, since the base value is measured by the timer interrupt processing, the base value during the game can be measured in real time.

105 and 106 are flowcharts showing an example of the base calculation process.

The base calculation process (step S801) is called from the timer interrupt process and executed by the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011). For example, as described above, the winning opening sensor (general winning opening sensor 3015, first starting opening sensor 2104, second starting opening sensor 2551, first large winning opening sensor 2114, second upper winning opening sensor 2554, second If there is an abnormality in the lower prize opening sensor 2557, etc.) or the discharge ball sensor (board side discharge ball sensor 3060A, frame side discharge ball sensor 3060B), the base value is accurately calculated by the abnormality signal output from the interface circuit 1331. Judge that there is an error that cannot be done. Also, if it is determined that fraudulent activity has been performed (for example, the magnetic detection sensor has detected magnetism, the vibration detection sensor has detected vibration, or the radio wave detection sensor has detected radio waves), the base value is accurate. Judges that there is an error that cannot be calculated. If it is determined that there is this error, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off. In step S8011, an error that accompanies the game stop (for example, magnetic, vibration, radio wave error, etc.) is determined to be an error (YES), and an error that does not accompany the game stop (for example, prize ball abnormality, door opening, etc.) is determined. For failures that are not directly related to the calculation or the base (out of supply, full tank error, etc.), it may be determined that there is no error (NO). That is, it is not necessary to execute the base calculation process even if there is some abnormality among the plurality of types of abnormal states, and not to execute the base calculation process if there is another abnormality.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of out balls (step S8014). As described above, the number of out balls is detected by the launch ball sensor 1020, the discharge ball sensor 3060, and the like, and in the switch input process of step S74, the detection signals of these sensors are read, and if there is a sensor detection signal, the out balls are out. Acquire the number of balls = 1. When an out ball is detected by a plurality of discharge ball sensors 3060, the total value of the numbers detected by each sensor is acquired as the number of out balls. That is, a plurality of out balls may be detected in one timer interrupt process.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the number of prize balls (step S8015). As for the number of prize balls, as described above, the number of prize balls calculated based on the input information in the prize ball control process in step S80 is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the base calculation process may be the number of prize balls determined to be paid out. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the created payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the sent payout command may be used. Further, the number of prize balls corresponding to the payout command in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the receipt confirmation (ACK) is received from the payout control board 951 may be used. Further, the number of prize balls (number of paid prize balls) may be used, in which the main control board 1310 transmits a payout command to the payout control board 951 and the payout control board 951 reports that the payout is completed. This variation is as described with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether an out ball is detected in step S8014 (step S8016). If the out sphere is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8022 without executing the process related to the out sphere. On the other hand, if the out spheres are detected, the detected out spheres are added to the total number of out spheres stored in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8017).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8018). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is less than 500 from the initial power-on of the pachinko machine (or initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and the value of the section counter is 0, which is the initial value. It has become. Therefore, if the interval counter value is 0, it can be determined that the interval is a test interval. If it is a test interval, it is not necessary to calculate the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8028. On the other hand, if it is not a test section, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8019). The determination of whether or not the prize is being awarded can be determined in the same manner as in step S810 of FIG. 39 described above. The fact that the game state is in the special prize means that the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are open due to the big hit, and it is during the time when the player can win many prize balls, but including the opening and ending time of the big hit game. You may. When the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 repeat opening and closing in one big hit, the time between the closing of the big winning opening and the next opening (closing interval) may be included. That is, during the special prize in step S810, it means that the condition device is operating, for example, from the determination of the jackpot symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending. In addition, it may include all the time during the right-handed instruction.

Further, at the starting ports 2002 and 2004, the time saving, the probability change (ST), and the electric power support may be included in the special prize. Further, in a gaming state other than during time reduction, probabilistic change (ST), and electric power support, from the opening of the starting port 2004 to the predetermined time after closing (for example, the ball winning the starting port is detected as an out ball). The required number of seconds) may be included in the special prize. The so-called "hidden game state", which is a high-probability game state but does not become during the time saving (during electric power support), is not included in the special prize, and is in the game state as in the normal state (low probability / non-time saving state). The base value may be calculated using the number of prize balls and the number of out balls. In this case, the base value may be calculated separately in each of the normal gaming state and the latent gaming state, and the base value may be displayed so that it can be identified which base display is used.

The latent game state is a game state in which the player does not recognize that it is a high probability state even if the probability is high, but if the latent game state is excluded from the calculation of the base value, the frame is opened during business. In addition, the player may look at the base display 1317 and recognize that it is in a latent game state (that is, a high probability). That is, when the employee of the hall cares for the ball in the winning opening or throws the ball in the out opening in the open frame state, the player can know the playing state depending on whether the base display changes. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value without distinguishing between the normal game state and the latent game state.

On the other hand, in the business of the hall, it may be necessary to manage the base value in a low probability / non-time saving state, and if the base value is calculated including the latent game state, it may not be possible to manage according to the business form of the hall. .. Such a problem can be avoided by calculating the base value excluding the latent game state. The same problem can be avoided by calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state. That is, since the normal game state and the latent game state are different game states in the first place, depending on the business form of the hall, it may be desired to manage (inspect) the base value separately for each game state. ..

When calculating the base value separately for the normal game state and the latent game state, even if the base value is calculated using the dedicated calculation process for each game state, the base value is calculated using the common calculation process. You may. By calculating the base value using a common calculation process, the processing load on the CPU can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

The electrically operated accessory provided in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment can be divided into two types from the viewpoint of calculating the base value. As described above, the special prizes related to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 in the gaming machine of this embodiment are during the operation of the condition device (for example, from the determination of the big hit symbol of the special symbol variation display game to the end of the ending). Since the base value is calculated by the number of prize balls and out balls other than during the special prize, the normal (so-called big hit) prizes to the big prize openings 2005 and 2006 are not used to calculate the base value. On the other hand, in the starting port 2004 (so-called electric tulip) having an opening / closing member, winning balls and prize balls other than during the special prize (low probability time or non-time saving time) are used for calculating the base value. In other words, some of the electrically operated accessories (large winning openings 2005, 2006) use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls as the base value regardless of the playing state (whether or not they are in the special prize). Not used, other accessories (starting port 2004) can switch whether to use the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls in the calculation of the base value or not, depending on the game state (whether or not the special prize is in progress). It will be.

Further, the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 may be opened (as a so-called small hit) even when the condition device does not operate. Generally, small hits occur during a short time, and since it is open for a short time, it is unlikely that a game ball will win a prize, so it does not affect the calculation of the base value. However, a small hit may be generated except during the special prize (normal time), and the game ball may be opened only during the time when the possibility of winning the prize is high. In this case, the winning balls and the winning balls to the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 in the small hits generated other than during the special prize may be used in the calculation of the base value. In this way, the expected value (design value) of the base value can be changed by controlling the probability of occurrence of a small hit other than during the special prize. That is, it is possible to provide a pachinko machine that can flexibly respond to the standard of the base value, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in design.

If the game state is in the special prize, since it is an out ball that is not related to the calculation of the base value, the process proceeds to step S8022 without updating the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not in the special prize, the number of out balls detected in step S8014 should be used for the calculation of the base. The number of out balls is added (step S8020). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8021). The update flag is set to 1 when an out ball or prize ball other than during the special prize is detected for each execution of the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), and indicates the timing for calculating the base value (steps S8026 to S8027). reference).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the prize ball is detected in step S8015 (step S8022). If the prize ball is not detected, the process proceeds to step S8026 without executing the process related to the prize ball. On the other hand, if the prize ball is detected, it is determined whether the current gaming state is in the special prize (step S8023). The determination as to whether or not the prize is being awarded may be the same as in step S8019.

If the game state is during the special prize, the prize ball is not related to the calculation of the base value, so the process proceeds to step S8026 without updating the low probability / non-time saving prize ball number. On the other hand, if the gaming state is not during the special prize, the number of prize balls detected in step S8015 should be used for the calculation of the base. The number of prize balls is added (step S8024). Then, the update flag is set to 1 (step S8025).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8026). When the update flag is 1, since an out ball or a prize ball other than the special prize is detected in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process), the low probability / non-time saving prize ball number is set to the low probability / non-time saving out ball. The base value is calculated by dividing by a number and stored in the storage area of the base value A of the base calculation area 13128 (step S8027).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter and determines whether or not the test section is in progress (step S8028). Then, when the section counter value is 0, indicating that it is a test section, it is determined whether it is the timing to end the test section (step S8029). The test section is a section in which the number of out balls is a predetermined value of less than 500 from the first power-on of the pachinko machine (including the initialization of the base calculation area 13128), and indicates that the section counter is the test section. If the total number of out balls is equal to or greater than the predetermined value, it can be determined that it is the timing to end the test section.

As a result, if it is not the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8034 without updating the base calculation area 13128 in order to continue the test section. On the other hand, if it is in the test section and it is the timing to end the test section, the process proceeds to step S8032 in order to shift from the test section to the first section. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the section counter (step S8032). The interval counter changes from 0, which represents the test interval, to 1, which represents the first interval. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033). By this process, the test section is ended and the process shifts to the first section.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8028 that the section counter value is not 0 and the test section is not in progress, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the total number of out balls is 52000 or more (step S8030). If the total number of out balls is less than 52000, the process proceeds to step S8034 in order to continue the current section.

On the other hand, if the total number of out balls is 52000 or more, the process for ending the section and starting a new section (steps S8031 to S8033) is executed. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the base value A from the base value A storage area and writes it in the base value B storage area in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8031). After that, 1 is added to the section counter (step S8032). As described above, the interval counter is controlled so as not to be larger than any value of 0, 1, or 2, that is, 2. Therefore, even if 1 is added to the interval counter when the interval counter value is 2. The interval counter value does not increase and remains at 2. Then, the total number of out balls, the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls, and the number of low-probability / non-time-saving prize balls are initialized to 0 (step S8033), and the process proceeds to the next section.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the update flag is 1 (step S8034). When the update flag is 1, data for displaying the newly calculated base value is generated (step S8035). Details of the base display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 107. After that, the main control MPU 1311 sets the update flag to 0 (step S8036).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 adds 1 to the display switching counter (step S8037). The display switching counter is used to switch between the provisional section display and the fixed section display described with reference to FIG. 99 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 5 seconds). The predetermined time for switching between the provisional section display and the fixed section display is the cycle of the blinking display (blinking display controlled in step S8051 of FIG. 107) when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls in each section is less than 6000. It is better to have a sufficiently long time. This is because if the blinking and display switching have the same cycle, it becomes difficult to understand the blinking display (that is, whether the number of low-probability / non-time saving out balls is less than 6000). This is to make it easier to understand whether it is a switch.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a check code (for example, a checksum) from the data in the base calculation area 13128 (step S8038). As the check code calculation method, the same calculation method as the process of calculating the check code in step S50 of the initialization process (FIG. 22) is used. If the check code is set to a fixed value without being calculated, it is preferable to set the value to a plurality of bytes in which adjacent bits of the check code do not have the same value (for example, if it is 2 bytes, it is A55AH (1010010101011010B). To). Further, instead of setting fixed values in continuous areas, they may be arranged separately. For example, the first fixed value is stored at the beginning of the base calculation area 13128, the second fixed value is stored in the middle, and the third fixed value is stored at the end. When the check code is a fixed value, it is preferable to improve the possibility of determining the RAM abnormality by configuring the check code with a larger number of bytes than the check data calculated by the checksum.

In this way, according to the base calculation process of this embodiment, the base value is calculated and displayed for each timer interrupt process, so that the base value can be set without delay at the timing of each occurrence of a prize ball or each occurrence of an out ball ( It can be displayed (in real time), and it can be judged without delay whether the base value is normal or abnormal. Since the capacity of the base calculation area 13128, which is a storage area used for the base calculation, is extremely small as compared with the capacity of the game control area 13126, a check code is displayed at the end of each execution of the base calculation process. Even if it is calculated, the influence on the processing load of the main control MPU 1311 is small.

In addition, when the base value of the prize balls is calculated and displayed using the planned number of prize balls to be paid out based on the generated winning signal, the timing of calculation and display as the base value and the timing of the prize balls being paid out Is different. That is, a state in which the prize ball is not paid out due to an abnormality in the payout device (out of supply, the upper plate is full, a failure of the payout count sensor provided in the prize ball passage, a failure of the payout motor, etc.) Even if it becomes (stop, etc.), the base value is calculated and displayed.

In the above-mentioned base calculation process, the base value is calculated using the number of out balls detected by the timer interrupt process and the calculated number of prize balls each time the base calculation process is called from the timer interrupt process. The base value may be calculated each time the ball sensor 3060 detects an out ball and each time the various winning opening sensors detect a winning ball. That is, in one timer interrupt process, the base value calculation process is called a plurality of times, and the base value is calculated a plurality of times. In this way, even if the timing of switching the above-mentioned section (the number of out balls is 52,000) arrives in one base calculation process, it is possible to distinguish which section before and after the calculation is performed as the base value. , Can display accurate base values in real time.

Further, as in steps S815 to S817 of the base calculation area update process (FIG. 46) described above, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, and if there is an abnormality in the number of prize balls, an abnormality notification command is generated. , The prize ball abnormality notification timer may be reset. Further, as in steps S824 to S825, it is determined whether the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, and when the prize ball abnormality notification timer has timed up, a prize ball abnormality notification stop command is generated to notify the prize ball abnormality. May be stopped.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing an example of the base display data generation process.

The base display data generation process is called and executed from step S8035 of the base calculation process.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether the display switching counter is smaller than 1250 by executing the base display data generation program (step S8041). Since the timer interrupt process described above is executed every 4 milliseconds, when the display switching counter reaches 1250, 5 seconds have elapsed since the display switching counter was initialized to 0. In step S8053, the display switching counter is initialized to 0 when it reaches 2499. Therefore, the processes of steps S8042 to S8045 are executed while the display switching counter is between 0 and 1249, and the display switching counter is between 1250 and 2499. Executes the processes of steps S8046 to S8049. Therefore, in the base display data generation process of this embodiment, the display data of the base display 1317 is switched every 5 seconds.

If the display switching counter is smaller than 1250, data for displaying "bA." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8042). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128 and determines whether or not it is currently a test section (step S8043). Since the base value has not been calculated in the test section, data for displaying "---" in the last two digits is generated (step S8044). On the other hand, if it is not a test section, data for displaying the base value A currently being measured in the provisional section is generated (step S8045).

When it is determined in step S8041 that the display switching counter is 1250 or more, data for displaying "bb." In the first two digits of the base display 1317 is generated (step S8046). After that, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the section counter stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether it is currently the test section or the first section (step S8047). In the test section or the first section, since the base value has not been measured in the past fixed section, data for displaying “−−” in the last two digits is generated (step S8048). On the other hand, if it is neither the test section nor the first section, data for displaying the base value B measured in the latest confirmed section is generated (step S8049).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls stored in the base calculation area 13128, and determines whether the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000 (step S8050). ). If the number of low-probability, non-time-saving out balls is smaller than 6000, the number of operations (number of out balls) after starting the measurement of the base value in the relevant section is small, so the base value may not be stable. The display of the base display 1317 is controlled to blink (step S8051). On the other hand, if the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is 6000 or more, the display of the base display 1317 is controlled to light without blinking (step S8052).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the display switching counter is 2499 or more (step S8053). If the display switching counter is smaller than 2499, the process proceeds to step S8055 without initializing the display switching counter. On the other hand, if the display switching counter is 2499 or more, one repetition is completed, so the display switching counter is initialized to 0 (step S8054).

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 generates a display pattern in which the generated display data and the lighting mode (lighting or blinking) are specified (step S8055).

In this way, in the timer interrupt processing (base calculation processing) executed at predetermined time intervals, the display contents on the base display 1317 are switched by using the display switching counter that is periodically updated, so that the present in the provisional section is present. The base value A being measured and the base value B measured in the past in the fixed section can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner.

Further, since the blinking display is performed in the range where the base value is not stable in each section, it can be easily confirmed by the display of the base display 1317 whether the base value is in the stable range or the unstable range.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a modified example of the base calculation process. In the modified example shown in FIG. 108, it is the same as the base calculation process shown in FIG. 105 except that the check process (steps S8012 and S8013) of the base calculation work is added. Note that FIG. 108 describes up to the calculation of the base value A (step S8027) in the base calculation process, but the processes from steps S8028 to S8038 are the same as those in FIG. 106 described above.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not there is an error in the calculation of the base value by executing the base calculation program (step S8011).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code (step S8012). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N is determined in this order, and the data in the backup area first determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

In the illustrated example, after determining whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011), it is determined whether the base calculation area 13128 is normal (step S8012). After determining whether 13128 is normal (step S8012) and executing necessary processing based on the determination result, it may be determined whether there is an error in the calculation of the base value (step S8011).

Since the subsequent processing (steps S8014 to) is the same as those in FIGS. 105 and 106 described above, their description will be omitted.

In the base calculation process shown in FIG. 108, since it is determined whether the data in the base calculation area 13128 is normal for each timer interrupt (that is, every 4 milliseconds), an abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected quickly, and an abnormality can be detected. It is possible to suppress the display of various base values.

Next, the abnormality determination method of the base calculation area 13128 in the pachinko machine of this embodiment will be described. The value used for calculating the base value and the calculated base value are the base calculation area 13128 of the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 (the "accessory ratio calculation area 13128" shown in FIG. 26 is the "base calculation area 13128". It is stored in (replaced) and determines whether the data is normal at a predetermined timing. There are the following variations in which process (timing) the normal / abnormal determination step and the check code calculation step are performed.
101 and 106: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined when the power is turned on.
21 and 22: The check code calculated when the power is turned off is determined when the power is turned on (initialization process).
FIG. 106 and FIG. 108: The check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) is determined by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process).

(A case where the check code is calculated for each timer interrupt and judged when the power is turned on)
First, the process of determining the check code calculated in the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) at the time of turning on the power will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 and 106.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102 and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, the base calculation area 13128 is set in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 105 and 106). The check code (for example, checksum) is calculated from the data of.

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 101 and 102), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

When the data in the base calculation area 13128 is deleted, the state related to the calculation of the base value is initialized, so that the calculated base value is cleared and the calculation of the base value is started from the test period.

When one or more backup areas are provided in the base calculation area 13128, the main area is first determined by using the check code, and when the main area is determined to be abnormal, the backup areas 1 and 2 are provided. , N, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal first may be duplicated in the main area to recover the data in the base calculation area 13128. After that, the data in the backup area may be erased or left as it is. If it is determined that the main area is normal, the data in the backup area may be deleted or left as it is.

In this case, the frequency of the check code determination is low, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where the check code is calculated when the power is turned off and judged when the power is turned on)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process of determining the check code calculated when the power is turned off at the time of turning on the power (initialization process) will be described.

When the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 21 and 22, and the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 105 and 106, in step S50 of the power cutoff process of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), A check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data of the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128).

Further, in step S24 of the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In this case, the calculation of the check code in step S8038 of the base calculation process may be omitted.

In this case, the frequency of calculation and determination of the check code is low, and the consumption of the calculation resource (main control MPU 1311) required for the abnormality determination can be reduced.

(Case where check code is calculated by timer interrupt processing and judged)
Next, a process of determining the check code calculated by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) by the base calculation process (timer interrupt process) will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 108.

Assuming that the base calculation process is shown in FIGS. 108 and 106, a check code (for example, a checksum) is calculated from the data in the base calculation area 13128 in step S8038 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106).

Further, in step S8012 of the base calculation process (FIGS. 108 and 106), it is determined whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. As a result, if it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S8013).

In this case, the initialization process is shown in FIGS. 101 and 102, and the step of determining whether the base calculation work area in steps S24 and S26 is normal may be omitted.

In this case, the abnormality in the base calculation area 13128 can be detected more quickly than in the case described above.

When a fixed value is used for the checksum instead of the checksum, the timing of setting and determining the checksum may be the same as the timing of calculating and determining the checksum. Further, both the checksum and the fixed value may be used together as the check code for the determination.

FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the calculation of the base value when the gaming state is switched.

One game ball won a prize while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) was opened, and then the predetermined number of variable display games ended, the time saving state ended, and the normal state returned. After that, in the normal state, it is assumed that the game ball wins a prize in the opening opening 2004 that is being opened.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second special symbol is variably displayed on the second special symbol display according to the winning of the starting port 2004. That is, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in relation to any of the winning prizes in the starting port 2004 shown in the figure.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number. The second winning ball is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number.

In the above, the time when the time saving state ends has been described, but the same applies to the time when the probability change by ST ends.

In addition to the above-mentioned time saving state ending, the same phenomenon occurs when a big hit of the special symbol fluctuation display game occurs. In the normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins a prize while the starting port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, then the big hit state starts, and further, the game ball wins the opening opening 2004.

In this case as well, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in connection with winning a prize in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball in the special prize is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball has a low probability.・ It is not added to the number of non-time saving out balls.

Furthermore, the same phenomenon occurs when a specific error occurs. In the normal state, it is assumed that one game ball wins while the start port 2004 (electric tulip) is open, a specific error occurs after that, and the game ball wins the start port 2004 that is open. .. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific error occurs (when it is determined that there is an error in which the base value cannot be calculated accurately due to the abnormal signal output from the interface circuit 1331), it is out. Do not use spheres for base calculations.

In this case as well, a variable display game is played in which the second special symbol is variablely displayed in connection with winning a prize in any of the starting ports 2004. On the other hand, since the out ball during a specific error is not used in the base calculation, the first winning ball to the starting port 2004 is added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number, but the second winning ball. Is not added to the low probability / non-time saving out ball number.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of game balls that have won prizes during the operation of the electric accessory under specific conditions (at the end of the time reduction, at the time of a big hit of the special symbol fluctuation display game, at the time of a specific error, etc.). There are cases where it is used for calculating the base value and cases where it is not used for calculating the base value, and it is possible to start the fluctuation of the special figure in any winning.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the look-ahead effect of the special symbol variation display game on hold, the first prize that is won in the start port 2004 in a short time state is not subject to the look-ahead effect, and is in the normal state. The second prize won may be the target of the look-ahead effect. On the contrary, the first prize that is won in the start port 2004 in a short time state does not have to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the second prize that is won in the normal state does not have to be the target of the look-ahead effect.

Although the timing of changing from the time saving state to the normal state has been described, the same applies to the timing of changing from the probability change state (ST) or the electric support state to the normal state.

[10. Memory switching in processing outside the game control area]
Next, switching of the memory used by the CPU in the processing outside the game control area (for example, the base calculation processing) will be described.

FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a configuration related to a storage area among the internal configurations of the main control MPU 1311.

The main control MPU 1311 is configured as shown in FIG. 18 as a whole, but FIG. 110 shows in detail the configuration relating to the storage area.

The main control MPU 1311 is provided with a RAM 1312, a ROM 1313, and an in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 as storage areas for storing data. The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 exclusively temporarily stores data at the time of program execution by the CPU 13111 (for example, a flag indicating the state of the calculation result, the program execution state, data input / output to / from the CPU 13111, etc.). The auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU temporarily stores, for example, a random number value updated in the random number update process (step S40 in FIG. 22) and an intermediate value in the random number value update operation. Further, the address of the subroutine to be executed and the address of the jump destination are temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the processor core 13141 executes the process corresponding to the stored address. Furthermore, the values input to the port from various switches connected to the main control board 1310 (for example, the value in the process of creating the edge information of the signal input from the switch and the detection result of the edge information) are temporarily used. Store in.

Further, when a random number is acquired and stored in the hold storage area at the time of winning the start opening, the random number value is temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU, and the temporarily stored random number value is stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 1312. Remember in. Further, when a random number at the time of winning the start opening is acquired and a look-ahead determination (judgment of winning at the time of winning the starting opening) is performed based on the value of the random number, the disturbance temporarily stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU is performed. The look-ahead determination may be performed based on the numerical value, or the random number value stored in the hold storage area may be read (again) into any storage area of the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU to perform the look-ahead determination.

The in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142 is provided separately from the memory space composed of the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313 and specified by an address, and is specified by the name of each storage area (for example, Area0) included in the in-CPU auxiliary storage unit 13142. .. The auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU includes a switching unit 13143, a switching register 13144, and a plurality of auxiliary storage areas 13145A to C.

Auxiliary storage areas 13145A to 13C are composed of a plurality of storage areas (Area 0 to 6) having a predetermined number of bits (for example, 1 byte or 2 bytes), and groups are formed for each storage area of a predetermined number (7 in the figure). It is configured and can be accessed from the processor core 13141 for each group. That is, when the auxiliary storage area 13145A is selected, the processor core 13141 can access only the auxiliary storage area 13145A and cannot access the other auxiliary storage areas 13145B and C.

As will be described later, the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145 can collectively switch a plurality of storage areas for each group with one CHANGE command. For example, the instruction CHANGE 0 selects the auxiliary storage area 13145A of group 0 and switches the auxiliary storage area accessible to the processor core 13141 to group 0.

The auxiliary storage area 13145 is composed of three groups in the illustrated example, but may be any number as long as it is two or more. That is, at least two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided with the same configuration.

The storage area (Area 0 to 5) of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is a storage area provided separately from the RAM 1312 for temporarily storing data at the time of program execution, and even one (1 byte = 8 bits) can be used. Therefore, even if a plurality of sets are set (for example, 2 bytes = 16 bits as a set of Area0 and Area1) can be used. Therefore, 8-bit data and 16-bit data can be stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145 without creating an extra capacity in the storage area. Further, the storage area (Area6) is set as a storage area used with a capacity that is an integral multiple (for example, 2 bytes) of another storage area, and cannot be divided into a storage area of 1 byte and used. In this way, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 is configured by the storage areas having a plurality of capacities and the storage area that can be used in any combination is provided, the storage area is used properly according to the application (for example, data length) in the arithmetic processing. be able to. For example, if the address space is represented by 16 bits, addresses can be specified in one (or combination) storage area. Therefore, the number of instruction arguments can be reduced, and the instruction can be executed with a small number of clocks.

The switching unit 13143 switches a group of storage areas accessible to the processor core 13141 according to the value stored in the switching register 13144.

The switching register 13144 is a storage area for storing data for determining the accessible auxiliary storage area 13145, and is an area accessible to the processor core 13141 regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. In the switching register 13144, for example, data for identifying the selected auxiliary storage area 13145 (for example, 2-bit data for switching the four areas), and an abnormality flag indicating that the switching was not performed normally. (If the error flag is set, the switching command will be executed again), and the unauthorized access flag that is set when an error occurs in which the value of the unselected auxiliary storage area 13145 changes is stored. It is good.

Further, the switching register 13144 may store a flag (for example, a carry flag, a parity / overflow flag, a zero flag, a sine flag, etc.) indicating the state of the operation result.

In addition to the switching register 13144, a storage area accessible to the processor core 13141 may be provided regardless of the selection of the auxiliary storage area 13145. For example, a program counter indicating the address at which the program is being executed and a stack pointer indicating the start address of the stack area provided in the RAM 1312 may be provided.

FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a portion that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is disabled by the DI instruction before shifting to the base calculation process. The base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the process from the DI instruction to the EI instruction due to an interrupt.

After that, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved in the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is used in the base calculation process of the callee from group 0 used in the timer interrupt process of the caller by the CHANGE instruction before starting the process shown in FIGS. 105 to 108. Switch to group 1. In this way, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be collectively switched by one instruction (that is, a small number of steps).

Further, by the LD instruction, the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312, and the stack pointer value is saved. After that, the LD instruction is used to write the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 to the stack pointer to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. Then, after the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction. After that, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the callee's base calculation process to the group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt process by the CHANGE instruction, and then the caller's timer interrupt process is performed by the RET instruction. return. In general, the instruction for switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the instruction for returning the data saved in the stack have different roles, but in this embodiment, after returning from the base calculation process to the timer interrupt process, the instruction has a different role. By returning the data saved in the stack to the switching register 13144, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched. Therefore, in this embodiment, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 to group 0 by the CHANGE instruction after the base calculation process is completed, but the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

As described above, the CHANGE instruction switches the auxiliary storage area 13145 by changing the argument (operand), but a different instruction may be provided for each auxiliary storage area 13145.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the data of the switching register 13144 saved in the game control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144 by the POP instruction. Note that the data of the switching register 13144 may be saved and restored by using other instructions (for example, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) without using the stack operation instructions PUSH and POP.

After that, after enabling the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing is continued, the timer interrupt processing is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

The interrupt may be disabled by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and the interrupt may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, the interrupt may be disabled when the timer interrupt processing starts by directly operating the interrupt enable flag, and the interrupt may be enabled at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state in which interrupts are disabled, it is not necessary to further disable interrupts or allow interrupts in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is for setting the interrupt permitted state to the interrupt prohibition for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt prohibition state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In the above-mentioned example, the switching register 13144 is saved by the timer interrupt process of the caller, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 and the stack area are switched by the base calculation process of the callee. One process may be executed by either the caller or the callee when the process moves out of the game control area and when the process returns to the game control area. An example of switching the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the timer interrupt processing of the caller will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing another example of a program for timer interrupt processing and base calculation processing, and shows a specific example of a portion that calls base calculation processing from timer interrupt processing and returns from base calculation processing.

In the timer interrupt process (FIG. 104), the base calculation process is called in step S801, but the interrupt is disabled by the DI instruction before shifting to the base calculation process. An interrupt occurs between the DI instruction and the EI instruction, and the base calculation process can be performed without interrupting the processing during that period due to the interrupt.

After that, the data in the switching register 13144 is saved in the game control stack area 13137 (see FIG. 113) by the PUSH instruction. After that, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 0 used in the timer interrupt processing of the caller to the group 1 used in the base calculation processing of the callee by the CHANGE instruction. In this way, a plurality of storage areas can be switched for each group by one CHANGE instruction, and a plurality of storage areas can be collectively switched by one instruction (that is, a small number of steps).

After that, the program is executed from the start address xxxxx of the base calculation process by the CALL instruction.

In the base calculation process, before starting the process shown in FIGS. 105 to 108, the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is written to an arbitrary address (for example, zzzzz) of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction, and the stack pointer value is written. To save. After that, the LD instruction is used to write the address yyyy of the base calculation stack area 13138 to the stack pointer to change the stack area.

After the preparation for executing the base calculation process is completed, the process is executed from step S8011 of FIG. 105 or FIG. Then, after the base calculation process is completed (after step S8038 in FIG. 106), the stack pointer value used in the timer interrupt process is restored from the address zzzz of the RAM 1312 by the LD instruction.

After that, when returning from the base calculation process, the auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched from the group 1 used in the callee's base calculation process to the group 0 used in the caller's timer interrupt process by the CHANGE instruction, and the game is played by the POP instruction. The data of the switching register 13144 saved in the control stack area 13137 is restored to the switching register 13144. Note that the data of the switching register 13144 may be saved and restored by using other instructions (for example, data transfer instruction LD, exchange instruction EX) without using the stack operation instructions PUSH and POP.

As described above, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 returns to the state before calling the base calculation process by returning the switching register 13144, it is not necessary to switch the auxiliary storage area 13145 by the CHANGE instruction. However, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be reliably switched by the CHANGE instruction.

After that, after enabling the interrupt by the EI instruction, the timer interrupt processing is continued, the timer interrupt processing is terminated by RETI, and the process returns to the main control side main processing (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21).

As described above, the interrupt may be disabled by the DI instruction at the beginning of the timer interrupt processing, and the interrupt may be enabled by the EI instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing. Further, regardless of the DI instruction or the EI instruction, the interrupt may be disabled when the timer interrupt processing starts by directly operating the interrupt enable flag, and the interrupt may be enabled at the execution timing of the RETI instruction.

Further, since the timer interrupt processing is originally executed in a state in which interrupts are disabled, it is not necessary to further disable interrupts or allow interrupts in the timer interrupt processing. In the illustrated program example, the interrupt prohibition by the DI instruction is for setting the interrupt permitted state to the interrupt prohibition for some reason. In this case, since the interrupt prohibition state should be continued until the end of the timer interrupt processing, the EI instruction should be executed at the end of the timer interrupt processing, not immediately after the POP instruction.

In FIG. 111, an example of switching between the timer interrupt process, the base calculation process, and the auxiliary storage area 13145 has been described. Further, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched in the check process executed by the debug (inspection function) code 13133. In this case, at the beginning of the debug (inspection function) code 13133, the auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched to the auxiliary storage area 13145 for inspection processing by the CHANGE instruction. Further, the initialization process (steps S10 to 22 in FIG. 21), the main control side main process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 21), and the power cutoff process (steps S42 to S58 in FIG. 21). , The auxiliary storage area 13145 may be switched between the timer interrupt processing (FIGS. 23, 75, 80, etc.) and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 may be used properly in each processing.

Further, when only two auxiliary storage areas 13145 are provided, processing executed in the game control area (for example, main control side main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc.) and outside the game control area (for example, debugging (for example, debugging) The auxiliary storage area 13145 is switched between the processing (for example, debug processing, base calculation processing, etc.) executed in the (inspection function) area, base calculation area, etc., and different auxiliary storage areas 13145 are used properly inside and outside the game control area. May be good.

In this case, the same auxiliary storage area 13145 is used for the main control side main processing and the timer interrupt processing, but the timer interrupt processing is started because the main control side main processing being executed is interrupted and the timer interrupt processing is started. At the start of processing (for example, at the beginning of timer interrupt processing), the value of the auxiliary storage area 13145 is temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137, and at the end of timer interrupt processing (for example, at the end of timer interrupt processing). It is preferable to return the value temporarily stored in the game control stack area 13137 to the auxiliary storage area 13145.

For example, since the auxiliary storage area 13145 has a plurality of (bytes) storage areas, if one unit (bytes or words) is saved in the stack area, the number of instructions for saving increases. Similarly, the number of instructions for recovering data from the stack area increases. Also, in this case, if the order of processing is incorrect between saving data to the stack area and recovering data from the stack area, different data will be read from the stack area, so subsequent processing may not be performed accurately. .. Therefore, by providing an instruction to collectively save all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area and collectively restore all of the plurality of storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 from the stack area. The above problem can be solved.

Furthermore, if all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 are saved in the stack area, the stack area may overflow and rewrite data outside the area planned as the stack area (such as a stack area for other purposes). be. Therefore, in addition to the instruction to collectively store all the storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 in the stack area, an instruction to collectively save a plurality of arbitrarily specified storage areas of the auxiliary storage area 13145 to the stack area is provided. , An instruction to collectively restore a plurality of arbitrarily designated storage areas among the auxiliary storage areas 13145 saved in the stack area may be provided and executed.

In this way, when moving to the processing outside the game control area, it is switched to another auxiliary storage area 13145, and when moving to the processing inside the game control area, it is switched to the original auxiliary storage area 13145, so that it is stored in the auxiliary storage area 13145. The processing can proceed without saving the generated data in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area).

Further, the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area) when moving to the processing outside the game control area, and the switching register 13144 is recovered from the RAM 1312 when moving to the processing inside the game control area. The auxiliary storage area 13145 can be switched when moving to the processing in the game control area, and the data in the auxiliary storage area 13145 can be recovered without recovering from the RAM 1312.

In addition, when moving to processing outside the game control area, the stack area is switched to another stack area, and when moving to processing inside the game control area, the original stack area is switched to, so that the stack area used for processing inside the game control area is , The processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated without being updated in the processing outside the game control area.

Further, the value stored in the switching register 13144 is saved in the RAM 1312 (for example, the stack area) when shifting to the processing outside the game control area, and the saved value is saved when moving to the processing in the game control area for switching. Since the register 13144 is restored, the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated without updating the value related to the execution result of the program in the game control area in the processing outside the game control area.

FIG. 113 (A) is a diagram showing an example of arrangement of programs (codes) and data stored in ROM 1313 and RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. As for the arrangement on the memory shown in FIG. 113, the stack area omitted in the above-mentioned arrangement on the memory in FIG. 26 is shown in the RAM 1312, but the RAM 1312 also shown in FIG. 26 is also provided with the stack area.

The ROM 1313 contains a game control code 13131, a game control data 13132, a debug (inspection function) code 13133, a debug (inspection function) data 13134, a base calculation / display code 13135, and a base calculation / display data 13136. Contains the area to store. The ROM 1313 of the present embodiment includes a game control area (first storage area) for storing programs and data related to the pachinko machine 1 such as the game control code 13131 and the game control data 13132, and a debug (inspection function) code 13133. And debug (inspection function) area (second storage area) for storing programs and data used for the purpose of outputting signals necessary for debugging (inspection function) of pachinko machine 1 such as debug (inspection function) data 13134. A base calculation area (third storage area) for storing programs used for the purpose of calculating the base value, such as the base calculation / display code 13135 and the base calculation / display data 13136, is allocated.

When a free area (unused space) of 16 bytes or more is provided between the final address of the game control data 13132 and the start address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and displayed in the dump list format. The game control area and the debug (inspection function) area can be easily distinguished. Similarly, a free area (unused space) having a predetermined length is provided between the final address of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the start address of the base calculation / display code 13135. It is desirable that the predetermined length is 16 bytes or more because the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished when displayed in the dump list format, but the predetermined length may be shorter than 16 bytes. The value stored in the free area may be a fixed value which is the same value, and may be set to a value different from the value set in the game control area and the debug area or a value having a low frequency. Further, the value stored in the free area may be an instruction such as a No Operation code in which the CPU does nothing. In this way, when displayed in the dump list format, the game control area, the debug (inspection function) area, and the base calculation area can be easily distinguished.

Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 and the base calculation / display data 13136 may be stored in a part of the debug area without separating the debug (inspection function) area and the base calculation area. That is, the game control area and other areas need only be clearly distinguished. By clearly distinguishing the game control area from other areas in this way, the debug area (debug (inspection function) code, debug (inspection function) data), which is a process that is not directly related to the control of the progress of the game. ) And the base calculation area (base calculation / display code 13135 and base calculation / display data 13136) are arranged separately from the game control area, and defects (bugs, etc.) in the base calculation / display code 13135 become game control. Avoid the risk of impact.

The debug (inspection function) area stores target programs and data that are not directly related to the game. For example, in addition to the game control of the pachinko machine 1, various functions used only when debugging the pachinko machine 1. The code 13133 for outputting the inspection signal is stored. These debug (inspection function) code 13133 are programs for outputting debug (inspection function) signals. Further, in the base calculation area, a program for calculating the base value, which is not directly related to the progress of the game, is stored.

Further, the game control code 13131 is executed by the main control MPU 1311. Further, the game control code 13131 can be appropriately read and written to the RAM 1312, but the game control area 13126 used in the game control code 13131 can only be read from the debug (inspection function) code 13133. Is configured to be executable, and is configured so that writing to the area cannot be executed. As described above, the game control area 13126 constitutes a game control area that can be accessed only from the game control code 13131. Processing based on the debug (inspection function) code can be unilaterally called and executed while the game control code 13131 is being executed, but the game control code 13131 can be called from the debug (inspection function) code. It is configured so that it cannot be called and executed. As a result, the independence of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be enhanced, so that even if the game control code 13131 is changed, the change of the debug (inspection function) code 13133 can be minimized. ..

Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 is called from the game control code 13131 (for example, step S89 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23), and is executed by the main control MPU 1311. The base value calculated by the base calculation / display code 13135 is stored in the base calculation area 13128 of the RAM 1312. As shown in the figure, the base calculation area 13128 is provided separately from the game control area 13126 (outside the game control area). In this way, by designing the base calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection of the base calculation / display code 13135 and the inspection of the game control code 13131 can be performed. It can be performed separately, and the labor of inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced. Further, the base calculation / display code 13135 can be used in common by a plurality of models without depending on the model.

The RAM 1312 is provided with a game control area 13126, a debug area, a base calculation area 13128, a game control stack area 13137, a debug stack area, and a base calculation stack area 13138.

The game control area 13126 is an area in which data used by the game control code 13131 is stored, and can be read and written from the game control area 13126. Further, in the game control area 13126, data cannot be written from the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but read access is possible, and the debug (inspection function) code 13133 and the base calculation. -The display code 13135 can refer to the data stored in the game control area 13126.

The debug area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is stored. The debug area can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the base calculation / display code 13135, but only reading of data is permitted and writing of data is prohibited. The base calculation area 13128 is an area for storing data used by the base calculation / display code 13135. The base calculation area 13128 can be accessed from the game control code 13131 and the debug (inspection function) code 13133, but only reading of data is permitted and writing of data is prohibited.

The game control stack area 13137 is an area in which the data used by the game control code 13131 is saved. The debug stack area is an area in which data used by the debug (inspection function) code 13133 is saved. The base calculation stack area 13138 is an area in which the data used by the base calculation / display code 13135 is saved. Each stack area is exclusively used to temporarily save the data stored in the auxiliary storage unit 13142 in the CPU. Each stack area can be switched by changing the value of the stack pointer managed by the CPU 13111. The stack pointer is a storage area that specifies the start address of the stack area.

FIG. 113 (B) is a diagram showing details of the base calculation area 13128. The base calculation area 13128 may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 in which a copy of the data stored in the main area is stored, in addition to the main area in which the calculation result of the base is stored. The backup area may be one or more. A check code is added to each area to detect data errors. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the base calculation / display process, or is the process when the power is turned off on the main control side (FIG. 22). It may be set in steps S50 to S54). In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or when the data is erased, and the fixed value is set in the main control side power cutoff process (step S50 in FIG. 20). You may set it. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

When it is determined that the main area is abnormal, it may be determined whether the backup area is normal, and the data of the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area (step of FIG. 21). S24). Further, in the process of power off on the main control side, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area (step S54 in FIG. 22). Further, in the base calculation / display processing, the value of the main area may be duplicated in the backup area at the end of the base calculation / display processing. When at least a part of the main area is updated, only the entire main area or the area of the updated value may be duplicated in the backup area (steps S168 and S170 in FIG. 25).

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

[11. Record of game history]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine that records and outputs a game history will be described.

[11-1. Basic configuration of a gaming machine that records game history]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 determines from among a plurality of effects that match the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and displays the determined effects on the main liquid crystal display. Displayed on device 1600. At that time, when the peripheral control unit 1511 decides to display a specific effect (for example, two specific effects out of three types of super reach) among a plurality of prepared effects, the switching of the game state is the starting point. As a result, how many times the special symbol variation display game was played and the specific effect appeared (in other words, at what rotation the effect appeared), along with the progress of the game, the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Display on.

Specifically, according to the game history shown in FIG. 114, Super Reach 1 appears at the 34th rotation at 10:25, and the result of the special symbol variation display game is lost, and at the 127th rotation at 10:54. Super Reach 2 appeared, the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was lost, Super Reach 2 appeared at 428 rotations at 11:30, and the result of the special symbol fluctuation display game was a probable change jackpot. Is displayed.

The display of the jackpot history (for example, the history of the jackpot at the 15th rotation and the jackpot at the 50th rotation) can be confirmed on the data display provided in the hall, but the specific effect that has appeared by the jackpot cannot be confirmed. Some players determine whether the pachinko machine 1 is performing well or not based on the appearance of a specific effect (for example, if Super Reach 2 appears within 50 rotations after the end of the jackpot, it is considered that the jackpot will be won in a short time). In order to meet the expectations of such players, the degree of appearance of the production is visually displayed. In addition, since the game ball is not fired when the player confirms the degree of appearance of the effect, if a display showing the degree of appearance of all of the multiple effects prepared is displayed, the player will perform each effect. It takes time to confirm the degree of appearance of the game table, and the operation of the game console may decrease. Therefore, it is preferable to display only a specific reach effect (reach effect with high expectation for a big hit) among the reach effects. Further, the appearance history for each effect may be confirmed by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C or the like).

As a specific process, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the fluctuation pattern command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 stores the number of fluctuations and the information of the appearance of the effect. Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the number of fluctuations and the information of the displayed effect based on the received fluctuation pattern command. Then, when a predetermined operation means (operation button 220C, etc.) is operated, the number of fluctuations required until a limited specific effect appears is added and displayed instead of all the effects that have appeared. You just have to do the processing.

Further, when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1 during business, the error information is output from the pachinko machine 1 and notified to the employees in the hall. In this form of notification, the error screen shown in FIG. 115 (A) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the detailed error screen shown in FIG. 115 (B) is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 to cause an error. Is notified, an alarm sound is output, and the error signal shown in FIG. 116 is output from the external terminal plate 784. Typical errors in the pachinko machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 117, 118, and 119. The error that occurs in the pachinko machine 1 is notified to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 so that the employees in the hall can know the cause. For example, the code defined for each type of error may be displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400. Specifically, when the cable connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is defective, "0" is displayed on the status display LED included in the function display unit 1400, and the LED on the right side of the door is displayed. Lights blue.

However, the error occurs due to various causes such as a minor failure of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, a connector disconnection), a serious failure requiring parts replacement, or a fraudulent act.

The pachinko machine 1 in which the error has occurred must search for the cause of the error, recover from the error, and operate the pachinko machine 1. It takes time and cost to search for the cause of the error, and the suspension of operation of the pachinko machine 1 due to the error causes a decrease in sales. Therefore, if the hall can know the detailed information of the error that has occurred, the error can be resolved at an early stage, and the operation stop time of the pachinko machine 1 can be shortened.

More specifically, the hall uses a hall computer to determine the state of the pachinko machine 1 based on the signal output from the external terminal plate 784. However, in order to search for the cause of the error, in addition to the signal output from the external terminal board 784, it is desirable that "the number of winnings of the general winning opening", "the number of winnings of the large winning opening", "the number of passing through the gate", and "normal symbol fluctuation". Game history information such as "number" is required. If the pachinko machine 1 is out of order, it will be solved by repair or parts replacement, so there is no big problem. It may interfere with the business of the pachinko machine and eventually make the hall difficult to manage.

When such game history information is output from the external terminal board 784, the number of terminals of the connector used for the external terminal board 784 increases, and the cost of the pachinko machine 1 increases. Furthermore, since events such as "winning to the general winning opening", "winning to the big winning opening", "passing through the gate", and "normal symbol fluctuates" occur frequently, if all the data is output from the pachinko machine 1, the data will be displayed. A high-performance hall computer is required to analyze the data, which increases the burden on the hall.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, data that is not output as a real-time signal from the external terminal plate 748 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1, and the stored data can be referred to later. By doing so, it became possible to confirm the details of the process leading up to the occurrence of the error.

In addition, the time of occurrence of events (number of general winning openings, number of large winning openings, number of gate passages, number of normal symbol fluctuations, etc.) that occurred in the process up to the occurrence of these errors is recorded, so how long is it? You can see how many events have occurred in. For example, it can be seen that the number of winnings in the general winning opening was 50 per minute.

If the date and time of occurrence is recorded for each event, the amount of data used for searching for the cause of the error increases, and it takes time to search for the cause of the error. Therefore, when a predetermined number or more of events occur in a predetermined time (for example, 1 minute), it may be output as error information and notified.

For example, since it is possible to win a prize in the general winning opening in any game state, it is advisable to output error information and notify when there are more than a predetermined number of winnings in a predetermined time. Therefore, it is advisable to set a predetermined time from the start to the end of the jackpot game, and output error information to notify when a predetermined number or more of the prizes are won in the jackpots in the predetermined time.

In the pachinko machine described below, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history and outputs the data in a predetermined format.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of this embodiment. In the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 120, a game history recording process (step S1023) is added to the peripheral control unit power-on processing described above with reference to FIG. 60.

In the game history recording process, the peripheral control unit 1511 records the game history in the memory when the received command is a predetermined command based on the analysis result of the command received from the main control board 1310. The game history is recorded as the event occurrence date and time in the format shown in FIG. 122, for example. The memory in which the game history is recorded may be DRAM, but it is preferable to record in SRAM, which does not require a refresh operation and consumes low power, in consideration of retaining the stored contents even when the power is cut off.

The game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed before the process related to game control (steps S1024 to S1032). By executing the game history recording process at an early stage of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing, the game history can be accurately recorded even if the process related to the game control is stopped in the middle and some effects are not executed. That is, even if some of the effects are not executed (even if all the effects are not executed), the result of the lottery already performed on the main control board 1310 does not change, and the privilege given to the player also changes. Since there is no such thing, the game history is recorded with priority over the production. Further, since the game history recording process is not affected by the process related to the game control, the game history recording process can be shared among a plurality of models of pachinko machines.

Next, the process when the memory capacity of the recorded game history reaches the upper limit will be described. When the amount of game history data to be recorded has reached the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process is executed, but the game history recorded in the memory does not have to be updated. That is, the information recorded in the memory does not change. In this way, by executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the peripheral control unit 1511 is required to check the free status each time. Processing can be reduced.

Further, when the capacity of the recorded game history memory has reached the upper limit, the game history recording process may be executed to update the game history recorded in the memory. In this case, a ring buffer having a plurality of (for example, 10) storage areas may be provided in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the oldest game history may be deleted, and the latest game history may be recorded. Even in this case, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be reduced each time.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed. Therefore, other processes (effect control, lamp) performed by the peripheral control unit 1511. Control and sound control can be executed reliably, and new processing (for example, processing that is executed over multiple peripheral control unit steady processing because there is not enough processing time) can be executed by utilizing the free processing time. Alternatively, since it is not necessary to execute each time, a process (for example, a process of switching the selection table) that is executed once in several peripheral control unit steady processes may be executed.

Immediately after the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010), the received command may be analyzed (step S1022) and the game history recording process (step S1023) may be executed.

FIG. 121 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recording condition setting table.

In the game history recording condition setting table, among the commands received from the main control board 1310 by the peripheral control unit 1511, the type of the command recorded as the game history, that is, the event recorded as the game history is registered.

For example, the following command types are registered in the game history recording condition setting table, and the conditions for generating the command and the purpose of recording as the game history are as follows.

For example, when the start port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command detect the winning of the game ball to the starting port 2002 and the starting port 2004, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, respectively. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each starting port. Further, the special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, respectively, and the peripheral control units 1511 of the special symbols 1 and 2 The number of fluctuations can be counted.

Further, the power-on command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the time of power-on, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire a ram clear operation or the like. The change start state command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the start of the change of the special symbol, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the state at the start of the change of the special symbol. There are four states that can be distinguished by the change start state command: low probability / time saving, low probability / non-time saving, high probability / time saving, and high probability / non-time saving. You can count the number of fluctuations that have occurred. Here, the low probability is a state in which the probability that a jackpot is derived in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game is a normal probability, and the high probability is a jackpot in the jackpot lottery associated with the special symbol variation display game. Is higher than usual. The time reduction is the time from when the above-mentioned second start door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) to a higher probability than when it is not, or when the normal symbol starts to fluctuate and is fixed. The frequency with which the second start opening door member 2549 is opened (or expanded) is higher than that in the non-time saving state, such as being shortened. Along with this, there is a high probability that an effect having a short time in one special symbol variation display game will be selected.

The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the game ball wins the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. A command is transmitted, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening.

The large prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified winning amount) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified winning amount) will win only the specified number of game balls or less by the end of the round at the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. If not, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses from the closing of each large winning opening (for example, from 1 second later to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 sends a command. You can get the winning status in one round for each big winning opening. The large winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the specified winning) are rounded by winning more game balls than the specified number in the large winning opening 2005 and the large winning opening 2006, respectively. When is completed, a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a predetermined time elapses from the closing of each large winning opening (for example, from 1 second later to before the next opening), and the peripheral control unit 1511 sends a command. You can get the status of winning in one round for each big winning opening. It should be noted that this command is transmitted when a predetermined time has elapsed from the closing of each of the major winning openings 2005 and 2006 by detecting the specified number of winning balls (for example, 10) specified in one round and detecting the large winning openings. There is a possibility that an undetected game ball may exist in the large winning opening when the game is closed, and this is to accurately grasp the winning situation even at the time of such an over winning.

The jackpot OP command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when a jackpot occurs (that is, when the condition device is activated or the accessory continuous operating device is activated), and the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires the change to the jackpot state. You can count the number of big hits. The transition destination command at the end of the jackpot operation is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 at the end of the jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot state and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the status after the jackpot.

The small hit OP command is for opening the big winning opening in a relatively short time (for example, one opening time is 1.8 seconds, or the total of multiple opening times is less than 1.8 seconds). Therefore, when the accessory continuous operation device does not operate (so-called small hit), a command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of small hits.

The normal symbol stop command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when the normal symbol is stopped, the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the stop symbol of the normal symbol, and the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol can be counted. When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate unit 2003.

Even if the special symbol or normal symbol is not drawn even if the start port is won or the gate is passed (when there is no overflow or memory, etc.), the main control board 1310 wins the start port 1 in the peripheral control unit 1511. The time command, the start port 2 winning command, and the general gate passage command are transmitted. Therefore, the peripheral control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to the starting port and the number of balls passing through the gate unit.

The error display command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511 when an error occurs, and the peripheral control unit 1511 can acquire the error occurrence timing and count the number of error occurrences.

When the game ball wins a prize in each general winning opening 2001, the general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command are sent from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control unit 1511, respectively, and are transmitted to the surroundings. The control unit 1511 can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening 2001. The general winning opening winning command may be determined by the number of general winning openings 2001 provided in the game area 5a, and the above-mentioned example illustrates the case where three general winning openings 2001 are provided. As shown in FIGS. 10 and 16, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with four general winning openings 2001, and therefore, four types of general winning opening winning commands, from the general winning opening 1 winning command to the general winning opening 4 winning command, are provided. The command is defined.

FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game history recorded in the memory.

The game history includes a history number, an event, and an event occurrence date and time, and is preferably recorded in the memory in the order of the event occurrence time. As the event occurrence date and time, the time when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command from the main control board 1310 may be recorded as the event occurrence date and time, and the time when the main control board 1310 detects the event occurrence is notified to the peripheral control unit 1511. The peripheral control unit 1511 may record the event occurrence time notified from the main control board 1310. In the illustrated game history, the date and time when the event occurred is recorded in the particle size up to minutes, but it may be recorded up to seconds.

By analyzing the game history in the form shown in FIG. 122, it is possible to know the details of the event generated in connection with the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 (for example, the change in the game state, the result of the variable display game, etc.). .. For example, the power-on command of history number 1 occurred at 15:30 on March 15, 2016, the RAM was cleared from the contents of the command, and the game started in a low probability and non-time saving state. I understand. That is, the hall started operations at 15:30, the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, and the player started hitting after a while (for example, after igniting a cigarette) and won the general prize opening 2001. I understand. In addition, the special symbol 1 fluctuation start event of history number 4 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation is performed from the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result of the display game. The special symbol 1 fluctuation start event of history number 6 occurs at 15:34 on March 15, 2016, and the special symbol fluctuation display game is based on the content of the received special symbol 1 symbol type command (type of stop symbol). You can see the result of. Although the result of the special symbol variation display game is not shown in FIG. 122, each special symbol variation display game is based on a numerical value indicating the result of the variation display game included in the symbol type command received at the start of the variation of the special symbol. The result of the variable display game (loss, usually per 4 rounds, high probability per 4 rounds, high probability per 16 rounds, etc.) may be recorded as a game history.

Next, a method in which the hall refers to the information (game history) recorded in the memory will be described.

First, a history output interface 1590 that outputs information recorded in a memory from the peripheral control unit 1511 is provided. Then, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590.

Further, when the data collection terminal is connected to the pachinko machine 1 and the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the history reference command from the data collection terminal, the peripheral control unit 1511 outputs the game history recorded in the memory from the history output interface 1590. The history output interface 1590 may be configured by the history output terminal provided in the peripheral control unit 1511, or may be provided separately from the peripheral control unit 1511. The data collection terminal may be owned by the hall for data management of the pachinko machine 1.

The connection between the data collection terminal and the pachinko machine 1 may be a cable connection via the history output interface 1590 or a wireless connection via short-range wireless (for example, Bluetooth®).

The command that triggers the peripheral control unit 1511 to output the game history is a command that is not transmitted when the pachinko machine 1 is performing a normal game even if it is a history reference command dedicated to the game history output (FIG. 121). A command when a special condition (operation) is performed under a command (command not defined in) may be used as a history reference command. The special condition (operation) is, for example, operating the RAM clear button while the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. Further, a history reference command may be transmitted even if the command is transmitted during a normal game, on condition that an event that cannot (or is unlikely to occur) occurs. For example, when 50 pieces are won in the start opening or the general winning opening in one minute. Further, the game history may be output when the commands used for the game control are received in a special order that is not normally possible.

An operation panel (keyboard) and a display (liquid crystal display device) may be provided on the back side (a place invisible to the player) of the pachinko machine 1 to display the game history.

FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a peripheral control board and its surroundings.

The peripheral control board 1510 performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and also transmits control commands and various information (various data) to the effect display drive board 4450 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. A liquid crystal display that controls the drawing of the peripheral control unit 1511 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and also controls the sounds such as music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has a control unit 1512 and a real-time clock (hereinafter, referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second.

As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on processing executed at the time of power-on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time of power-on. Peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that control the effected operation to be executed, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a V blank from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Peripheral control unit that is executed each time a signal is input Various information that is continued across the steady processing (for example, schedule data that defines the screen to be drawn on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and the light emission mode of various LEDs, etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c that stores information for managing schedule data, etc., and various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of jackpot game states and special production flags) Described as a peripheral control SRAM 1511d that stores information for management, etc., and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter, "peripheral control external WDT1511e") for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. ) And.

The peripheral control RAM 1511c loses its contents when the power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs), whereas the peripheral control SRAM 1511d has a large capacity (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931. By supplying backup power from the electrolytic capacitor (hereinafter referred to as "electrolytic capacitor for SRAM"), the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. Since the power supply board 931 is provided with an electrolytic capacitor for SRAM, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so that the peripheral control SRAM 1511d retains the stored contents. You can't do it and lose its contents.

Further, a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with power by a backup power source 1513 different from the backup power source supplied from the power supply board 931. The game history is recorded in the area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d to which the power is supplied by the backup power supply 1513, and the stored contents can be retained even if the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. The backup power supply 1513 is composed of a secondary battery such as a lithium ion battery, and is preferably capable of holding data in at least a part of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d for several weeks to one month.

FIG. 124 is a block diagram showing a peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU including the peripheral control MPU, or may be configured in the peripheral control CPU package together with the peripheral control MPU.

FIG. 124 (A) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d in which an area for storing the game history is configured in a package different from the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, the effect control area where power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package, and the game history storage area where power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 is provided outside the peripheral control CPU package. Be done.

When the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage) outside the peripheral control CPU is cleared. Area) The data of 1511d is not cleared.

FIG. 124 (B) shows the peripheral configuration of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d that constitutes an area for storing the game history in the package of the peripheral control CPU. As shown in the figure, both an effect control area in which power is not supplied from the backup power supply 1513 and a game history storage area in which power is supplied from the backup power supply 1513 are provided in the peripheral control CPU package.

Even in the configuration shown in FIG. 124 (B), when the pachinko machine 1 is reset by operating the RAM clear switch, the data of the peripheral control SRAM (effect control area) 1511d in the peripheral control CPU is cleared, but the peripheral control is performed. The data of the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d outside the CPU is not cleared. Therefore, it is preferable that the effect control area and the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are physically separated from each other.

In the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the area for storing the game history may be configured by a flash memory instead of the SRAM. By storing the game history in the flash memory, the game history can be held even in the pachinko machine 1 to which the power is not supplied without providing the backup power supply 1513.

In both modes of FIGS. 124 (A) and 124 (B), the pachinko machine 1 has means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The means for initializing the data in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be any method different from the normal data initialization method of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while operating the RAM clear switch. good. For example, if a history clear switch is provided in addition to the RAM clear switch and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the history clear switch, the stored game history is initialized. In this case, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating both the RAM clear switch and the history clear switch, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. The history clear switch may be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch and the RAM clear switch is continuously operated for a predetermined time even after the power is turned on, both the stored game state information and the game history are initialized. It may be changed.

When initializing the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the main control board 1310 transmits a command different from the normal power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the main control board 1310 continues to transmit the power-on command to the peripheral control board 1510 while the RAM clear switch is being operated, and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command a predetermined number of times within a predetermined time. When the power-on command is continuously received, the game history stored in the peripheral control SRAM (game history storage area) 1511d may be initialized. By providing the means for initializing the data in the game history storage area in this way, for example, even if the game machine continues to operate in the hall for one year, the latest information can be accurately recorded and analyzed.

The peripheral control external WDT1511e is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control, and when the timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, if the peripheral control MPU1511a does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT1511e to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time (until the timer starts up), the peripheral control MPU1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT1511e within a certain period of time, the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT1511e is restarted, so that the reset is not applied.

The peripheral control MPU1511a has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands from the main control board 1310 are received, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp is transmitted from a serial I / O port for a lamp drive board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). Serial for motor drive board to transmit to drive board 4170 and output drive signals to electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids that operate various movable bodies provided on game board 5. The door side motor drive data for transmitting from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit and outputting the drive signal to the electric drive source provided in the door frame 3 is frame-decorated drive. Transmission from the serial I / O port for the amplifier board motor to the frame decoration drive amplifier board via the peripheral control output circuit and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, or to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal is driven by frame decoration from a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port via a peripheral control output circuit and a frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. Send to the amplifier board.

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided on the effect operation unit 220. The detection signal is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized effect operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a are input to the serial I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit via the peripheral control input circuit.

Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, a photo sensor) for detecting the original position, movable position, etc. of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the event that occurred during the game is recorded as the game history according to the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the event occurred during the game. The event can be analyzed later (for example, after the hall is closed) to understand the performance and failure of the gaming machine. Further, since the game history is stored in the non-volatile memory (SRAM to which the backup power supply is input), the game history can be confirmed even after the game machine is restarted.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 121, 122, etc., various information is recorded together with the time of occurrence. Further, for example, when the starting port 1 is won, (1) the fact that the starting port 1 is won, (2) the time when the starting port 1 is won, and (3) the event that occurred before the starting port 1 is won. As described above, more information than the information output from the external terminal plate 748 shown in FIG. 116 is stored inside the pachinko machine 1. This means that the minimum necessary information (information indicating the fact that the starting port has been won) is output from the external terminal board 784, such as when the starting port is won, and in a special case (for example, the cause of the error). This is because the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed at the time of investigating). This is because if all the information stored inside when winning a prize at the starting port is output from the external terminal board 784, the amount of output of information related to the operation of the pachinko machine 1 increases, which may be a burden on the hall. Is. That is, when an event occurs, more information than the information output from the external terminal board 784 is recorded inside the pachinko machine 1, and a part of the information recorded inside is recorded in the pachinko machine via the external terminal board 784. It is output to the outside of 1 so that the information stored inside the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed in special cases.

[11-2. Compact plan 1]
Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine that records and outputs the game history will be described. It should be noted that some of the modifications described below modify a part of the above-described embodiment and form a part of the embodiment.

In the above-described embodiment, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the event (command type) that occurred and the event occurrence date and time were recorded for a predetermined command. However, the capacity of the SRAM 1511d for recording the game history is finite, and it is difficult to record all of the enormous amount of events that occur during the game over a long period of time. Therefore, in the modified example 1 (compact plan 1), the change in the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of counting events generated in the state are recorded.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification.

In the game history recording condition setting table of the first modification, the commands recorded as the game history are defined separately as a command to be counted and a command to trigger a state change, and a command in which both attributes are set. There is also. Note that the countable information column and the acquireable state change column are provided for convenience of explanation, and when the game history recording condition setting table is implemented in the pachinko machine 1, only the command type column is sufficient. ..

When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command for which the attribute to be counted is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 counts the number of events that triggered the issuance of the command as a result of the command analysis. Further, when the peripheral control unit 1511 receives a command in which an attribute that triggers a state change is set, the peripheral control unit 1511 updates the state of the game history recorded in the memory as a result of command analysis, and counts the number of events. To add.

For example, the power-on command, the change start state command, the jackpot OP command, the jackpot operation end transition destination command, and the error display command are commands issued by the state change, and are the power-on command, the special symbol change display start, respectively. It can be grasped as the start of the jackpot state, the end of the jackpot state, and the switching of the states in which the error state occurs.

In addition, the counting command is used to count the number of events that triggered the issuance of the counting command. Specifically, the starting port 1 winning command and the starting port 2 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each starting port. The special symbol 1 symbol type command and the special symbol 2 symbol type command can count the number of fluctuations of each special symbol. The large winning opening 1 winning command (for each winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (for each winning) can count the number of winning balls to each large winning opening. The large prize opening 1 winning command (less than the specified winning prize) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (less than the specified winning prize) can count the number of rounds completed with the specified number of winning or less. The large winning opening 1 winning command (larger than the specified winning) and the large winning opening 2 winning command (larger than the specified winning) can count the number of rounds completed in excess of the specified number of winnings (that is, by over winning).

The small hit OP command can count the number of small hits. The normal symbol stop command can count the number of fluctuations in the normal symbol. The command to pass through the gate can acquire the number of game balls that have passed through the gate. The error display command can count the number of error occurrences. The general winning opening 1 winning command, the general winning opening 2 winning command, and the general winning opening 3 winning command can count the number of winning balls to each general winning opening.

FIG. 126 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the first modification.

The game history of the modification 1 is the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, the time when the state change event occurred, and the state from a predetermined starting point. Includes the cumulative number of counting events detected until the end of (until the next state change event). The number of counting events recorded as the game history may be the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event). The predetermined starting point is the time when the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is initialized. The states in which the counting events are recorded separately are assumed to be five states: low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state. The state may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the first modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 126, as counting events, the starting port 1 winning number, the starting opening 2 winning number, the special symbol 1 variation number, the special symbol 2 variation number, the general winning opening 1 winning number, the general winning opening 2 winning number, The number of general winning openings 3 winnings, the number of large winning openings 1 winning, the number of large winning openings 2 winnings, the number of passing gates, and the number of changes in normal symbols are recorded. The number of events other than those shown may be counted.

Two bytes is sufficient for the storage area of the cumulative number of each counting event. In particular, the data that is not derived so frequently and the cumulative number does not increase (for example, the number of general winning openings) may be 1 byte, and the other data may be 2 bytes. In this case, it is preferable to arrange the 1-byte data and the 2-byte data in the order of 2 bytes and 1 byte (or the order of 1 byte and 2 bytes) without mixing them.

When a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time when the event occurs are recorded, and a new record is created in the game history. Then, the counting event after the state change is recorded in a new record.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state may be recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stored in a new record created in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d after the state change. A new record in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is created when the state changes, but a new record may be created at the start of the period in which the counting event is counted. In this case, while the counting event is counted, the data may not be stored in the new record created, or 0 may be stored as the initial value. Also, a new record may be created at the end of the period during which the counting event is counted. In this case, immediately after creating a new record, the counting result of the counting event in the period is stored in the new record.

When the game state changes and the data recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is stored in the game history storage area (peripheral control SRAM 1511d), the data is read from the game history storage area and recorded in the work area. Numerical values are added and stored in the game history storage area. On the other hand, when the number of counting events detected during the state (between the previous state change event and the state change event) is recorded as the game history, the count value of the counting event is recorded as the game of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Store in the history storage area.

That is, every time a state change event occurs, the count value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c until the next state change event occurs, and the stored contents are backed up when a power failure occurs. , Will be initialized by normal ram clear operation. Specifically, for example, in a low-probability, non-time-saving state, the game history information in which 50 winning numbers in the starting port 1 are recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is the pachinko machine of the modified example 1. In 1, the game history is recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d after the game state changes. In other words, if the game state does not change, the game history is not recorded in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, if the power is cut off and the ram clear operation is performed in the low probability / non-time saving state, the number of winnings of 50 is initialized to 0.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the counting value in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

Further, even when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, the game history recording process may be executed. In this case, it is not necessary to continuously record the game history in the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current state and store the cumulative number of counting events from the peripheral control RAM 1511c to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d when the state changes. Further, the game history (cumulative number of counting events) in the oldest state may be deleted and the cumulative number of counting events in the immediately preceding state may be recorded. In this case, it is preferable to configure a ring buffer in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

By executing the game history recording process even if there is no free space in the memory for recording the game history, it is not necessary to check the free state of the memory for recording the game history, and the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511 is reduced every time. can. Further, since the cumulative number of counting events in the current state is recorded in the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the latest game history can be confirmed.

Further, when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is not necessary to skip step S1023 and execute the game history recording process. By not executing the game history recording process when the recorded game history reaches the upper limit of the memory capacity, it is possible to prevent the execution of unnecessary processing and reduce the processing of the peripheral control unit 1511.

As described above, in the modification 1, the switching of the states of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events (number of winnings, number of fluctuations, etc.) in each state during the switching is recorded. A long game history can be recorded without increasing the capacity of the history storage area.

Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1 is characterized in that it internally records more information than the information output from the external terminal plate 784.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the modification 1, the condition for creating a new record in the game history is a change in the game state, and if the game state does not change, the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d Information (game history) is not written. That is, if fraud is performed in a state where a new record is not created in the game history storage area (the same game state is continuing), it may be difficult to detect the fraud. As described above, in the hall, in order to analyze the information (game history) written in the memory, the information written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d can be confirmed, but in the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 1, the hall can confirm the information written in the game history storage area. As long as the game state does not change, the information is not written in the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, even if the information is read from the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, the information of the current state (game history) cannot be confirmed. Even in such a case, a check function that can detect fraud at an early stage may be provided.

Specifically, the first record (the latest record of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d) in which the game history of the latest state is recorded and the second record (the record of the peripheral control RAM 1511c) in which the game history of the current state is recorded). If the result of comparison with is satisfied with a predetermined condition, an error may be notified.

For example, in the so-called right-handed pachinko machine 1, which launches a game ball so as to roll on the right side of the game area 5a in a high-probability / short-time state or a big-hit game state, the transition from the high-probability / short-time state to the big-hit game state. However, if the game transitions to a high-probability / short-time state after the jackpot game state ends, even if the state is switched, the player is usually hitting right, so there is a possibility that the general winning opening on the left side of the game area 5a will be won. Extremely low. In this case, the number of winnings in the general winning opening may be compared between the jackpot game state and the subsequent high probability / time saving state, and if a difference is detected, an error may be notified. The permissible value of the difference in the number of winning balls to the general winning opening between the states is set to 1, and if a difference of 2 or more occurs, an error may be notified. This is because when the hand is released from the launch handle, the launch force becomes uneven and the game ball may roll on the left side of the game area 5a.

Instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal plate 784 shown in FIG. 116. The above-mentioned early fraud detection check function predicts the game from the game state of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, it will hit right because it is in a high probability and time saving state), so an unfamiliar player can use it. There is a possibility of detecting an error when hitting unexpectedly. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, only output the security signal from the external terminal plate 784, and may not notify the player. In this way, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and trouble with the player can be prevented.

As described above, since the error detection function of the pachinko machine 1 is not perfect, the cause of the error can be checked by analyzing the game history outside the pachinko machine 1.

[11-3. Compact plan 2]
In the above-described modification 1, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change event of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the number of counting events in each state during the change is recorded. Was recorded. However, the number of events in each changing state may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each type of recurring state. Therefore, in the modified example 2 (compact plan 2), the state of the pachinko machine 1 and the cumulative number of counting events for each state are recorded.

In the second modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

FIG. 127 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the second modification.

As shown in FIG. 127, the game history of the second modification is composed of a history of state events and a cumulative number of each counting event for each state. The history of the state event includes the state change event that triggered the state change of the pachinko machine 1, the state after the state change event, and the time when the state change event occurs. In the pachinko machine 1 of the modified example 2, the cumulative number of counting events is recorded in five states of low probability / non-time saving state, low probability / time saving state, high probability / non-time saving state, high probability / time saving state, and jackpot state. NS. The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in the second modification are the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), and special. Symbol 1 variation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 variation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning opening 1 winning number (general winning opening 1 winning command), general winning opening 2 winning number (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), general winning opening 3 winning number (general winning opening 3 winning command), large winning opening 1 winning number (large winning opening 1 winning command), large winning opening 2 winning number (large winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (normal symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command).

The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted, and the state in which the counting events are recorded separately may be further subdivided.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 127, when a state change event occurs, the type of the state change event, the state after the event occurs, and the date and time when the event occurs are recorded in the state event history. When a change in the state of the gaming machine is detected by the state change event, the cumulative number of counting events counted in the state before the change is recorded in the non-volatile memory, and the above-mentioned counting event corresponds to the state after the change. Start recording the cumulative number of.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d. That is, each time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated using the value before the state change recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up in the event of a power failure, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the modification 2, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each state type is recorded. Therefore, the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d You can record a long game history without increasing the capacity of the game.

[11-4. Compact plan 3]
In the above-described modification 2, among the commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the state change of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded by the state change event, and the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded. However, the timing of state switching may not be important, and it may be sufficient to know the number of events for each state type. Therefore, in the modified example 3 (compact plan 3), the change of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is not recorded, but the cumulative number of counting events for each state is recorded.

In the third modification, the game history is recorded using the same game history recording condition setting table (FIG. 125) as in the first modification.

In the third modification, the same event as the event recorded in the first modification is recorded by using the game history recording condition setting table shown in FIG. 125.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing a game history recorded in the memory of the modification example 3.

As shown in FIG. 128, the game history of the modified example 3 is composed of the cumulative number of counting events in each state. Further, the game history of the modified example 3 includes the cumulative time of each state. The cumulative time is included so that the hall can estimate the number of event occurrences (for example, the number of jackpot occurrences) from the cumulative time. There are five states in which counting events are recorded separately: low-probability / non-time-saving state, low-probability / time-saving state, high-probability / non-time-saving state, high-probability / time-saving state, and jackpot state. Counting events may be recorded.

The counting events (and commands related to the event) recorded in the third modification are the starting port 1 winning number (starting port 1 winning command), the starting port 2 winning number (starting port 2 winning command), and special. Symbol 1 variation number (special symbol 1 symbol type command), special symbol 2 variation number (special symbol 2 symbol type command), general winning opening 1 winning number (general winning opening 1 winning command), general winning opening 2 winning number (general) Winning opening 2 winning command), general winning opening 3 winning number (general winning opening 3 winning command), large winning opening 1 winning number (large winning opening 1 winning command), large winning opening 2 winning number (large winning opening 2 winning command) ), The number of gate passages (normal symbol gate passage command), and the number of normal symbol fluctuations (ordinary symbol stop command). The number of counting events other than those described above may be counted.

Next, the details of the game history recording process in the second modification will be described. In the game history shown in FIG. 128, when a state change event occurs, the cumulative number of the above-mentioned counting events is recorded corresponding to the state of the gaming machine changed by the state change event.

The counting result of the counting event in the current state is recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and after the state change, the game history storage area (cumulative value of the state) of the SRAM 1511d is read out and stored in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is preferable to add the recorded values and store them in the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a state change event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is updated. Therefore, the counting result in the current state recorded in the work area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up in the event of a power failure, but is initialized by a normal ram clear operation.

Further, the counting result of the counting event in the current state may be written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. That is, every time a counting event occurs, the cumulative value of the game history storage area of SRAM 1511d is updated. In this case, the counting result in the current state recorded in the SRAM 1511d is not initialized by the normal ram clear operation, but is initialized by the game history initialization operation described above.

As described above, in the modification 2, the switching of the state of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded, and the counting event (the number of winnings, the number of fluctuations, etc.) for each state type is recorded. Therefore, the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d You can record a long game history without increasing the capacity of the game.

As described above, with respect to the modified examples 1 to 3, when the condition of temporarily recording in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) when an event occurs by the game history recording process and writing to the game history storage area of the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is satisfied. The data of the work area is written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d. Further, in the normal ram clear operation, the information written in the game history storage area of the SRAM 1511d is not erased (initialized), but the information recorded in the work area (peripheral control RAM 1511c) is erased (initialized).

Here, I would like to briefly touch on the sales of the hall. In many cases, the hall has fixed business hours, for example, the opening time is 10:00 and the closing time is 23:00. For this reason, it may be difficult for a clerk to monitor whether or not a player is playing an illegal game during a time when many players are present, such as a time zone shortly after the store opens or a time zone in the evening. However, as the closing time approaches, the number of players will decrease, and if there is a pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time just before the store closes, the pachinko machine with a high probability and a short time will be initialized for the next day's business, and the probability will be low. It may be in a non-time saving state. In this case, since the number of pachinko players is small, it is possible to monitor pachinko machines with a high probability and a short time, so it is possible to know whether the latest game has been fraudulent. That is, considering the situation that some pachinko machines do not require the latest game history, it is possible to provide an efficient game machine by allowing the clerk to select whether to keep the latest information.

Specifically, by initializing the pachinko machine 1 by the ram clear operation, the game history stored in the work area for the event that occurred after the latest event is deleted, and the game history is stored for the event that occurred before the latest event. The game history stored in the area is left. That is, although the pachinko machine records information that is not output from the external terminal board 784, the information recorded in the work area that is erased by the RAM clear operation and the information recorded in the game history storage area that is not erased by the RAM clear operation. The game history is recorded separately for. By doing this, if you want to keep a record of all the events recorded in the work area, if the clerk wants to cause a change of state of the pachinko machine, and if you want to delete the record of the event recorded in the work area, The clerk may perform the ram clear operation. As mentioned above, it was decided to delete only the game history stored in the work area related to the event that occurred after the latest event without deleting all the game history by the ram clear operation, before the latest event. This is because the clerk has not seen the events that have occurred so far (because there are many players, they cannot see them).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, not only the recording of the information that the starting opening is won, but also the winning of the general winning opening that is not related to the lottery is once recorded in the work area. Even if the symbol that starts to fluctuate by winning a prize in the start opening and the lottery result of winning is shown by the stop mode of this symbol), the game is played while the game ball is launched in the game area 5a. It is characterized by collecting history. That is, it can be said that the game history recording process is not a process that is executed when the winning lottery is triggered, but a process that may be executed at any time while the power is being supplied to the pachinko machine.

In addition, in the low probability and non-time saving state, the game ball is fired to the starting port 2002 so that the game ball wins, like a so-called left-handed hit or a choro-hit. In such a case, the starting port 2002 and the general winning port 2001 should be appropriately won. However, there is no (or very few) prizes in the general winning opening 2001, but there are many game balls in the starting port 2002, or conversely, there is no winning in the starting port 2002 (or very few). ) However, if a large number of game balls have won in the general winning opening 2001, there is a possibility that fraud has been committed. Therefore, the first winning opening and the second winning opening in which the game ball wins at the same time are set as monitoring targets, and the number of winnings in the first winning opening is a predetermined multiplication factor of the number of winnings in the second winning opening. When the number exceeds, an error may be notified.

Further, instead of the error notification, a security signal may be transmitted from the external terminal board 784. With the above-mentioned detection method, there is a possibility that an error may be detected when an unfamiliar player makes an unexpected hit. Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 may not notify the error, only output the security signal from the external terminal plate 784, and may not notify the player. In this way, the clerk in the hall can confirm the possibility of an error from a place away from the pachinko machine 1 without being noticed by the player, and trouble with the player can be prevented.

Further, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is also characterized in that information accumulated in a plurality of games is collected as a game history. Since there is an upper limit to the amount of game history data that can be recorded, if you record for each game (1 variation), you cannot record many games (long time), so you can keep more game records. There is.

[12. Game performance setting function]
Next, an example of a pachinko machine having a setting function will be described. The pachinko machine of this embodiment has, for example, a setting function for changing the operating ratio of a condition device as a game performance.

[12-1. Basic configuration of pachinko machines with setting function]
FIG. 129 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine having a setting unit, and FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine having a setting unit as viewed from the back side with the door open. Is a perspective view of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130 as viewed from the back surface side in a closed state, and FIG. 132 is a view showing a setting portion of the pachinko machine shown in FIG. 130.

The pachinko machine shown in FIG. 129 has a setting board 970 for setting the gaming performance of the pachinko machine. The setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

As shown in the front view of FIG. 132 (A), the setting board 970 has a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode, and a setting for changing the setting value. A change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected setting value are provided. The setting board 970 functions as a setting change operation unit that accepts a setting change operation.

In this embodiment, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the payout control unit 952. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the payout control unit 952. The finalized setting is transmitted from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310. As will be described later, the main control board 1310 may control the components on the setting board 970.

The setting key 971 is for changing to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode by inserting a predetermined key into a keyhole (key insertion part) and maintaining a short-circuited or open state of contacts by turning the key to a set position. It is a switch that outputs a signal that triggers. It should be noted that other switches may be used in combination without providing the setting key 971. In this case, by operating (holding down) the setting change switch 972 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is started, and the setting change switch 972 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode You may end the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode by pressing and holding.

Further, the setting change mode may be started / ended by operating the RAM clear switch 954. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting change mode.

In this way, even an employee who does not have the key for the setting key 971 can change the setting, so that the pachinko machine 1 can be easily handled in the hall. Further, since the operation time of the setting change switch 972 is detected, it is preferable to detect the operation when the setting change switch 972 falls.

The setting change switch 972 is composed of, for example, a push button switch, and is operated to switch and select a set value (1 to 6) in order. That is, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is incremented by 1, and when the setting value = 6 is operated and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the set value = 1. The set value may be selectable by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. The set value may be not 6 steps, but may be less steps (for example, 2 steps) or more steps (for example, 8 steps).

Further, the setting change switch 972 may not be provided, and the setting key 971 may also serve as the setting change switch 972. In this case, the setting key 971 can be operated in 3 steps, the key can be inserted and removed in the neutral position (normal position), turning it to the left is an operation to start the setting change mode, and turning it to the right is the setting to be set. This is an operation for selecting a value (turning it to the right functions as a setting change switch 972). The setting key 971 performs an alternative operation capable of holding the left position and the neutral position, and performs a momentary operation in which the right position is not held (returns to the neutral position when the hand is released from the key).

The set value changes the operation ratio of the condition device (that is, the hit probability of the special symbol). The set value = 1 has a low hit probability, and the set value = 6 has a high hit probability. In addition, depending on the set value, the probability variation jackpot ratio, the time reduction (ST) ratio after the jackpot, the number of time reductions, the number of rounds and counts of the jackpot, the probability of hitting a regular figure, the general winning opening, the starting opening, and the big winning opening Various parameters related to the game, such as the number of prize balls, may be changed to change the number of prize balls that the player can obtain.

The setting confirmation switch 973 is composed of, for example, a momentary type switch, and is a switch for confirming the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972 and inputting it to the pachinko machine 1. The setting confirmation switch 973 may be a push button switch or a momentary toggle switch as long as it is a momentary type switch. The setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be configured by switches having different operation methods (operation directions) and shapes so that both switches are not operated by mistake. For example, the setting change switch 972 may be composed of a push button switch, and the setting confirmation switch 973 may be composed of a momentary toggle switch.

The setting selected by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position may be confirmed without providing the setting confirmation switch 973. Further, the selected set value may be determined by the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1. For example, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the contact detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, the operation of the stop button of the handle unit 500, the operation of the operation button 220C, and the ball lending button. The selected setting may be confirmed by the operation of, the operation of the return button, the detection of winning of the game ball to the starting ports 2002 and 2004, and the like. The operation unit that substitutes for the setting confirmation switch 973 may be a switch that can be operated by the player (used for the game) or a switch that cannot be operated by the player (provided on the back side of the pachinko machine).

That is, in the illustrated example, three switches (including setting keys) are provided on the setting board 970 in order to set the game performance on the pachinko machine 1, but one or two switches are provided on the setting board 970. It is enough to provide it.

Further, the setting change operation may be performed only by the RAM clear switch 954 without providing any of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973. For example, the setting change mode is started by turning on the power while operating the RAM clear switch 954 and continuing the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer (holding down). Further, the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954, and if the continuous operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is less than a predetermined time, the RAM clear process is executed. Further, instead of the setting change switch 972, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 in the setting change mode for less than a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and instead of the setting confirmation switch 973, the RAM clear switch The set value can be confirmed by the operation (long press) of 954 for a predetermined time or longer. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by pressing and holding the RAM clear switch 954 after the setting is confirmed.

The setting display 974 is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED, displays the setting value selected by the operation of the setting change switch 972, and displays the current setting value by a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the setting key 971). .. The setting display 974 may be configured by a number of LEDs having a settable value instead of the 7-segment LED. In this case, the LED corresponding to the set value lights up to display the set value.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 is provided with an error type indicator using a 7-segment LED that displays the type of the payout error. However, this error type indicator and the setting indicator 974 are also used. The selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the error type display. In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the error type and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, the dot may be turned off when displaying the error type, and the dot may be turned on when displaying the set value. Further, the error type display may be a lighting display (not blinking), and the set value display may be a blinking display.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, but it may be connected to the power supply board (not shown) in the power supply board box 930. By providing the setting board 970 side by side with the power supply board (or inside the power supply board box 930), the setting key 971 and the power supply switch 932 operated at the time of setting change are arranged in the vicinity, and the operability of setting change is performed. Can be improved.

Further, as will be described later, the setting board 970 may be connected to the main control board 1310.

As yet another form, the setting board 970 may be formed not as an independent board but also as a part of a payout control board 951, a power supply board, or a main control board 1310. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on any of the payout control board 951, the power supply board, or the main control board 1310.

As shown in FIG. 130, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface of the lower part of the main body frame 4 (that is, the frame side instead of the game board 5) constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 131, When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. In the state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow, so that it is difficult to operate the keys and switches on the setting board 970 in this state. In this way, the right frame member 40 hides the setting key 971 and hinders the insertion of the key into the keyhole of the setting key 971, making it difficult to operate the setting board 970 (setting change operation unit). Functions as a means. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when all of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the pachinko machine 1 is set during operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). It is possible to make the operation of the board 970 difficult and suppress fraudulent acts in which the player changes the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (means for making setting change difficult) facing the setting board 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but other members may be used. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The setting change difficulty means composed of the members provided so as to face the setting board 970 may be a cover covering the setting board 970. In this case, the setting key 971 that triggers the start of the setting change mode may be covered with a double cover. For example, an inner cover that covers the setting board 970 and an outer cover that covers various control boards including the setting board 970 are provided. Further, an inner cover that covers the keyhole of the setting key 971 and an outer cover that covers the setting board 970 may be provided. More specifically, the setting board 970 is housed in the setting board case, and the setting board case has a first cover that prevents inadvertent operation of the setting key 971 and the switches 972 and 973 (at least the setting key 971). Provide a body (for example, a door-shaped lid that can be opened during operation). Further, a second cover body covering various control boards including the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 is provided on the outer frame 2. The second cover body may be provided on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 to cover various control boards. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the start of the setting change mode due to an inadvertent operation, and it is possible to suppress an illegal act of an unauthorized player changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1.

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

The setting board 970 may be arranged in the vicinity of the power switch 932 so that the setting key 971 and the power switch 932 operated when the setting is changed are arranged in the vicinity. In this way, the operability when activating the setting change mode can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is initially equipped with the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. However, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, they are provided at positions that can be operated from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, so that the setting board 970 is operated during the game to suppress fraudulent acts of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for selecting the player's platform, it is desirable that the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 131, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player does not know the set value. Is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility difficulty means for hiding the display content of the setting display 974 and making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

FIG. 132 (B) is a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2. In this state, since the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 and the right frame member 40 interfere with each other, and the setting key 971 The key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole.

On the other hand, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the right frame member 40 is not located in front of the keyhole of the setting key 971, and the key 975 can be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40. It is difficult to check the current settings of pachinko machines.

FIG. 133 is a diagram showing a modified example of the setting board 970.

In this modified example as well, the setting board 970 is provided with the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974, as in the above-described example. However, in this modification, the setting key 971 is arranged sideways on the setting board 970, and the key 975 is inserted from the side of the setting board.

Therefore, the setting board 970 of this modification is installed not on the side surface side of the main body frame 4 but on the back surface side so that the keyhole faces the side surface. Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (B), when the setting board 970 is viewed from above, the side surface (that is, the keyhole) of the setting board 970 is the right frame member 40 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. The head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40, and the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 133, the board of the pachinko machine 1 can be arranged in the same direction as the other boards, and even if the difficulty of board placement is reduced, the setting board 970 is operated while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation. It is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

Next, a modified example of the pachinko machine having the setting unit will be described. In this modification, the setting board 970 is provided not on the main body frame 4 but on the game board 5, and is connected to the main control board 1310.

FIG. 134 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of the pachinko machine of this modified example, FIG. 135 is a perspective view of a game board having a setting unit from behind, and FIG. 136 is a perspective view of FIG. 135. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine which mounted the game board shown from the back.

The setting board 970 is provided with a setting key 971, a setting change switch 972, a setting confirmation switch 973, and a setting display 974. The setting board 970 may be the one shown in FIG. 132 (A) or the one shown in FIG. 133 (A).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, the setting board 970 for setting the game performance of the pachinko machine is connected to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch, and the main control MPU 1311 Controls the display of the setting display 974.

The functions and configurations of the setting board 970 and each component on the setting board are the same as those in the above-described embodiment, and common description will be omitted.

The main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317 composed of 7-segment LEDs. Therefore, the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be used in combination, and the selected setting value or the current setting value may be displayed on the base display 1317. On the base display 1317, normally, the base value of the provisional section (the section currently being measured) and the base value of the fixed section (straight line section) are switched and displayed at predetermined time intervals. On the other hand, in the setting change mode, the selected (next set) setting value is displayed, and while the setting is being confirmed (see FIG. 152), the current setting value is displayed.

In this case, it is advisable to change the display mode so that the display of the base value and the display of the set value can be distinguished. For example, although four digits are used for displaying the base value, only a predetermined one digit (for example, the rightmost digit) may be used for displaying the set value, and "-" may be displayed. For digits that are not used in the display of the set value, other numbers, characters, and symbols may be displayed instead of "-" as long as they are not used in the display of the base value. Further, when displaying the set value, characters that are not used in displaying the base value may be displayed. For example, the set value is displayed in six stages of alphabets A, b, C, d, E, and F.

Further, in the setting change mode, it is preferable that the set value is blinked while being selected and the confirmed set value is lit. In addition, the current set value should be lit and displayed. Further, in the base display, the first two digits indicate the type of display data, and the numbers are not displayed. Therefore, the setting value may be displayed using the most significant digit. When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used together, the set value is displayed with priority during the setting change mode and the setting confirmation, so that the base value is displayed although the base value is calculated. Not done. After that, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed, the base display 1317 resumes the display of the base value.

When the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are also used, the process of outputting the display contents to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the display contents are displayed on the base display 1317. The output process is executed by the base calculation / display code 13135 outside the game control area. However, a part of the base calculation / display code 13135 (for example, a process of outputting display data to the driver circuit) may be provided in the game control area. By standardizing the processing, the capacity of the program can be reduced and the memory can be saved.

On the other hand, the process of outputting the display content to the setting display 974 is executed by the game control code 13131 in the game control area, and the process of outputting the display content to the base display 1317 is for base calculation / display outside the game control area. When executed by the code 13135, the processing inside and outside the game control area can be completely separated, and the security can be improved.

Further, the processing of setting change and setting confirmation may be executed outside the game control area.

That is, whether the setting display 974 is provided separately from the base display 1317 or is also used as the base display 1317, it is included in the category of the invention described in the present specification. In this way, by displaying the plurality of displays provided on the main control board box 1320 so as not to be confused during the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of setting change and a misidentification of the set value.

Further, even when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are not shared, the display of the base display 1317 may be turned off or all may be turned on while the setting display 974 is displaying the set value. Even in this case, when the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value are completed, the base display 1317 resumes the display of the base value. By not displaying a plurality of displays on the main control board box 1320 during the setting change mode and the confirmation of the set value, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation at the time of setting change and a misidentification of the set value.

In the illustrated example, the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, but the setting board 970 may be formed on a part of the main control board 1310 instead of an independent board. That is, the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, the setting confirmation switch 973, and the setting display 974 may be mounted on the main control board 1310.

The setting board 970 may be enclosed in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310. When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 has holes or notches for operating the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970. Is provided.

When the setting board 970 is enclosed in the main control board box 1320, the structure of the main control board box 1320, that is, the opening / closing direction differs depending on the direction of the keyhole of the setting key 971 on the setting board 970. Specifically, when the key 975 is inserted vertically into the board from the front of the board, the main control board box 1320 is vertically separated from the setting board 970 by the front surface and the back surface of the setting board 970, or the front side box body (the front side box body ( Alternatively, it is preferable that the cover) and the back side box have a structure that can be opened and closed with one side as a hinge. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted in the direction in which the substrate is stretched from the side, the main control board box 1320 is formed by the front side box (or cover) of the setting board 970 and the back side box in the stretching direction of the setting board 970. It is preferable to have a structure that slides in (the insertion direction of the key 975) to separate the keys.

In this modification, the operation signals of the setting key 971, the setting change switch 972, and the setting confirmation switch 973 on the setting board 970 are taken into the main control MPU 1311. Further, the setting display 974 is controlled by the main control MPU 1311.

As shown in FIG. 135, the setting board 970 is attached to the right side surface (left side in FIG. 135) of the game board 5 constituting the pachinko machine 1, and as shown in FIG. 136, the game board 5 is attached. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, at least a part of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2. When the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the distance between the setting board 970 and the right frame member 40 is narrow. Therefore, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the keys on the setting board 970 The operation of the switch is difficult. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2, the setting key 971 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval as at least a part of the setting board 970. However, the entire setting board 970 may face the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval. In this case, the keys and switches may be arranged vertically so that the width of the setting board 970 does not exceed the width of the right frame member 40. In this way, when all of the setting board 970 faces the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 at a narrow interval, the pachinko machine 1 is set during operation (that is, the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2). By operating the board 970, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts that change the settings of the pachinko machine 1.

The member (means for making setting change difficult) facing the setting board 970 in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the right frame member 40 in the illustrated example, but other members may be used. For example, the cover provided on the outer frame 2 may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2. Further, a cover that moves in conjunction with the opening and closing of the main body frame 4 may be provided, and in a state where the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, the cover may be arranged at a position facing the setting board 970 at a narrow interval. ..

The distance at which the setting board 970 faces a member such as the right frame member 40 while the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 is the head of the key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 (the key head to be gripped during operation). ) Should be shorter than the length.

Further, as shown in FIG. 136, the power supply board box 930 is provided with a power switch 932 for energizing the pachinko machine 1, and the payout control board unit 950 is initially equipped with the main control RAM 1312 of the pachinko machine 1. A RAM clear switch 954 is provided. As described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of switches that are not operated during the game and can be operated from the back side. However, the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 described above are from the back side. It is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized and operated. On the other hand, the setting key 971 (preferably also the setting change switch 972 and the setting confirmation switch 973) is provided at a position where it is difficult to see and operate from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. Since the power switch 932 and the RAM clear switch 954 are frequently operated in the manufacturing process, they are provided at positions that can be operated from the back surface side during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the setting key 971 is hidden so that it is difficult to operate while the pachinko machine 1 is in operation, so that the setting board 970 is operated during the game to suppress fraudulent acts of changing the setting of the pachinko machine 1. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the switches on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are arranged so as to achieve both convenience and suppression of fraudulent activities.

Similarly, since the current set value of the pachinko machine 1 is important information for selecting the player's platform, it is desirable that the pachinko machine 1 is not known to the player. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 136, similarly to the setting key 971, the setting display 974 may be opposed to the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval so that the display cannot be seen. Normally, when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2 or the setting key 971 is not operated, the setting display 974 is turned off so that the player does not know the set value. Is desirable. In this way, the right frame member 40 functions as a visibility difficulty means for hiding the display content of the setting display 974 and making it difficult to visually recognize the display content of the setting display 974 (setting state display unit).

In the pachinko machine 1 shown in FIG. 134, a view of the setting board 970 viewed from above with the main body frame 4 housed in the outer frame 2 is as shown in FIGS. 132 (B) and 133 (B). .. In this state, the keyholes of the setting board 970 and the setting key 971 face the right frame member 40 at a narrow interval, so that the head of the key 975 inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971 interferes with the right frame member 40. However, the key 975 cannot be inserted into the keyhole of the setting key 971.

Further, the display surface of the setting display 974 faces the side surface of the pachinko machine 1, and when the main body frame 4 is housed in the outer frame 2, it faces the right frame member 40. It is no longer possible to check the current settings of the pachinko machine.

Next, the process related to the setting change will be described.

FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 137 is compared with the initialization process described above in FIG. 21, and the point where the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key is operated (step S17, step S30) and the CPU initialization process (step). The difference is that the setting change process is performed in S28). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIG. 21 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission so that the RAM 1312 can be written (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is on (step S17). When the setting key 971 is operated, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data and the game state (for example, probabilistic state, time saving state, hold storage of special symbol or normal symbol, prize ball) Information about) is left, the other data is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24.

On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is not operated, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch is operated (step S18). When the RAM clear switch is operated, the data in the area other than the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is erased (step S30), and step S24. Proceed to. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not operated, the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 is not erased, and it is determined whether or not the power failure flag is set (step S20).

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30). , Step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the power failure flag is cleared, and the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power failure and the checksum in step S48. The stored checksum is compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct, so the data backed up in the work area ( The area (other than the base calculation area 13128) is erased (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

Subsequently, the check code is used to determine whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal (step S24). If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct, so the data stored in the base calculation work area is deleted (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set as the case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized. There are a power failure flag error (step S20) that has not been set, a RAM error (step S22) in which the checksums of the RAMs do not match, and an error (step S24) of the base calculation work. Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). (For example, probability change state, time saving state, hold memory of special symbol or normal symbol, information about prize ball) is left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, or when the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared and the base is calculated. Area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the ones shown in the figure, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 The entire RAM area including the above may be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear switch is operated, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIGS. 22 and 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) in which a check code is calculated and stored from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

138 and 139 are flowcharts showing an example of setting change processing and setting display processing, and FIG. 138 shows a setting board 970 connected to a payout control board 951 (or integrally configured with a payout control board 951). 139 shows the processing when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 (or is integrally configured with the main control board 1310).

First, the setting change process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138 (A) are linked will be described.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. Whether or not the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 starts the setting change mode. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means. As the start conditions of the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and the prepaid card being inserted in the CR unit (prepaid). It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) and there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. The determination of these conditions may be performed after the main control MPU 1311, not the payout control unit 952, receives the setting change start command. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is trying to change the setting. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(2) When the setting change mode is started, the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change start command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process before the setting change. The RAM clear processing before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the hold storage of the normal symbol). , Information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in step (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification in the setting change mode performs the initial operation of the accessory or makes a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or status of setting change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting This is because it interferes with the change work.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during the normal game (for example, all the LEDs for displaying the special symbol are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of the winning ball and the out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the launch permission signal, stops the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functions as a launch-disabled means to notify the setting change mode. May be good. When the launch of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period may be regarded as an error, and an error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, the set value = 0 is the state in which the setting is not set, and the setting change mode cannot be ended when the set value = 0, and the game (game ball). Launch, variable display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the payout control unit 952 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is also determined in the above-mentioned procedure (1), it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 functions as a setting change permissible state generating means for determining whether or not the setting change condition is satisfied before the setting change is confirmed.

(9) Further, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the payout control unit 952 confirms the selected set value, and the set value is confirmed. Is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the setting value (for example, 8), or the confirmed setting value may be displayed blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the payout control unit 952 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(12) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated, so that the payout control unit 952 transmits a setting change end command to the main control board 1310. By this setting change end command, the confirmed setting value is notified to the main control MPU 1311.

(13) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the setting change end command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 transmits the setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

The notification (including the game stop and the launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode is completed, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in the procedure (5) is considered to be a mere notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is caught from the viewpoint of finding fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when the setting is changed, the predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it becomes easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the launch of the game ball is stopped in a predetermined period after the setting change mode ends, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is regarded as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear processing after this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) with the set value and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). The data of the hold memory and the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, the set value is not initialized unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change.

Then, the setting change mode is terminated.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951 and functions as a child board of the payout control board 951 (or the setting board 970 is integrally configured with the payout control board 951). , The main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate to execute the setting change process.

In the above-described processing, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated, but the main control MPU 1311 may determine. In this case, the signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 from the payout control unit 952 to the main control board 1310 is transmitted by serial communication, a predetermined pulse signal (a predetermined number of pulses of a predetermined frequency is transmitted), or a power supply voltage. However, a signal having an intermediate potential that is neither the ground voltage nor the ground voltage may be output. In order to prevent fraudulent activity in which the terminal of the setting key 971 is short-circuited and the setting change mode is activated, a signal related to the operation of the setting key 971 is mainly controlled from the payout control unit 952 by a signal that cannot occur due to the short-circuiting of the terminal. This is because it is preferable to transmit to the substrate 1310.

Next, the setting display process in which the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 138 (B) are linked will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

(1) In the setting display mode, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

(2) When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the payout control unit 952 transmits a set value request command to the main control board 1310.

(3) When the main control MPU 1311 receives the set value request command from the payout control unit 952, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and transmits the set value notification command to the payout control unit 952.

(4) The payout control unit 952 displays the set value notified by the set value notification command from the main control MPU 1311 on the setting display 974.

In the above, the set value stored in the main control board 1310 (main control RAM 1312) is displayed on the setting display 974, but the payout control unit 952 stores the set value and stores it in the payout control unit 952. The set value may be displayed on the setting display 974.

Next, the setting change process by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 139 (A) will be described.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, (1) the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is turned on and whether the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main control MPU 1311 functions as a setting change allowable state generating means. Whether or not the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 can be determined by the detection signal from the main body frame open switch. The detection signal of the main body frame release switch is transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The payout control board 951 may transmit a main body frame opening detection command to the main control board 1310 based on the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch. Further, the payout control board 951 may output the received detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch to the main control board 1310 as it is. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

If the setting key 971 is turned on and the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 starts the setting change mode. As the start conditions of the setting change mode other than the above, the operation of the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500, the detection by the contact detection sensor 509 by touching the handle lever 504, and the prepaid card being inserted in the CR unit (prepaid). It is not necessary to start the setting change mode when there is a balance on the card) and there is a balance put into the cash sand. Further, even when the pachinko machine 1 detects the possibility of some kind of fraudulent activity (for example, a magnetic error), it is better not to start the setting change mode. In such a case, it is presumed that the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 is not performed by the hall, and there is a possibility that an unauthorized player is trying to change the setting. Therefore, it is better not to shift to the setting change mode. ..

(3) When the setting change mode starts, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process before the setting change when it receives the setting change start command from the payout control unit 952. The RAM clear processing before this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) in the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the hold storage of the normal symbol). , Information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. Since the set value is set to the initial value later in step (6), it does not have to be cleared in this step.

(4) After that, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change start command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(5) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change start command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 notifies that the setting change mode is in progress. The notification in the setting change mode performs the initial operation of the accessory or makes a predetermined display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control unit 1511 does not have to perform the initial operation of the accessory. For example, when displaying the procedure or status of setting change on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, if the initial operation of the accessory is performed during the setting change, the display of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 is partially hidden, and the setting This is because it interferes with the change work.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 may also notify the setting change mode in accordance with the notification of the setting change mode by the peripheral control unit 1511. For example, the display of the function display unit 1400 may be displayed in a special mode that does not appear during the normal game (for example, all the LEDs for displaying the special symbol are turned off or on) to stop the progress of the game. .. Further, the main control MPU 1311 may notify the setting change mode by stopping the detection of the winning ball and the out ball and stopping the progress of the game. As a result, the base value is not calculated in the setting change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the launch permission signal, stops the launch of the game ball controlled by the launch control device, and functions as a launch-disabled means to notify the setting change mode. May be good. When the launch of the game ball is stopped during the setting change mode, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period may be regarded as an error, and an error may be detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. ..

(6) Next, the main control MPU 1311 resets the set value to 0. As described above, the set value can be selected from 1 to 6, the set value = 0 is the state in which the setting is not set, and the setting change mode cannot be ended when the set value = 0, and the game (game ball). Launch, variable display game, etc.) does not start.

(7) After that, each time the player operates the setting change switch 972, the main control MPU 1311 displays the selected set value on the setting display 974.

(8) The main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Although the opening of the main body frame 4 is also determined in the above-mentioned procedure (1), it may be determined at least once before determining the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973. In this way, the payout control unit 952 determines whether the conditions for the setting change are satisfied (in particular, whether the detection signal of the main body frame release switch is input from the payout control board 951) before the setting change is confirmed. It functions as a means for generating an allowable state.

(9) Further, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(10) If the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2 and the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated, the main control MPU 1311 confirms the selected set value and confirms that the set value is confirmed. It is displayed on the setting display 974. The set value confirmation display may display a value that cannot be selected as the setting value (for example, 8), or the confirmed setting value may be displayed blinking for a predetermined time.

(11) After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting key 971 is turned off.

(13) If the setting key 971 is turned off, the setting change mode is terminated, so that the main control MPU 1311 transmits a setting change end command to the peripheral control unit 1511.

(14) When the peripheral control unit 1511 receives the setting change end command from the main control MPU 1311, the peripheral control unit 1511 ends the notification during the setting change. At the same time, if the main control MPU 1311 notifies that the setting is being changed, this also ends.

The notification (including the game stop and the launch stop) may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode is completed, or may be canceled after a predetermined time has elapsed. If the notification performed in the procedure (5) is considered to be a mere notification to the outside (player, hall employee), the notification may be canceled immediately after the setting change mode ends. However, if the notification performed in the procedure (5) is caught from the viewpoint of finding fraudulent activity, it is preferable to cancel the notification after the setting change mode ends and a predetermined time elapses. This is because when the setting is changed, the predetermined display is displayed for a predetermined time or the game is stopped, so that it becomes easy to detect that an unauthorized player has changed the setting during business hours. be.

When the launch of the game ball is stopped in a predetermined period after the setting change mode ends, the launch of the game ball during the launch stop period is regarded as an error, and an error is detected when the handle lever 504 of the handle unit 500 is operated during the period. You may.

(15) After that, the main control MPU 1311 executes the RAM clear process after the setting change. The RAM clear processing after this setting change is performed in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) with the set value and the game state (for example, the probability change state, the time saving state, the special symbol, and the normal symbol). The data of the hold memory and the prize ball) is left, the other data is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. That is, in the RAM clear process after the setting change, the set value is not initialized unlike the RAM clear process before the setting change.

Then, the setting change mode is terminated.

In this way, when the setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310 and functions as a child board of the main control board 1310 (or the setting board 970 is integrally configured with the main control board 1310). Since the main control board 1310 acquires the detection signal of the main body frame release switch from the payout control board 951, the setting change process cannot be executed only by the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 cooperate with each other. Is executing the setting change process.

Next, a setting display process in which the setting board 970 and the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 139 (B) are linked will be described.

When the setting key 971 is turned on while the pachinko machine 1 is operating (energized), the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting key 971 and starts the setting display mode.

In the setting display mode, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2. Considering from the arrangement position of the setting key 971, in order to operate the setting key 971, the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, so the determination of opening the main body frame 4 may be omitted. ..

When it is determined that the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, the main control MPU 1311 reads the set value stored in the main control RAM 1312 and displays it on the setting display 974.

In the setting change processing described with reference to FIGS. 138 (A) and 139 (A), if the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting change mode, the setting change mode may be invalidated and the setting change mode may be temporarily stopped. Then, by shutting off the power of the pachinko machine 1 and turning it on again, the stopped setting change mode is restarted. The setting change mode may be restarted from the stage where the setting change mode is stopped due to error detection, or may be performed from the beginning of the setting change mode (setting value = 0 when the setting value is not selected).

To change the set value, it is advisable to record the history a predetermined number of times. Specifically, the date and time when the setting is confirmed and the confirmed setting value are stored in the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 or the peripheral control unit 1511. When the history of set values is stored in the peripheral control unit 1511, it is preferable to store it in the RAM in the RTC provided in the peripheral control unit 1511 because the stored contents are backed up even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off. Furthermore, the history of changes in the recorded setting values can be output. For example, it is preferable to display the history of changes in the recorded set values on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by a predetermined operation.

When the set value is changed, the measurement interval of the base value may be changed. That is, when the set value is changed, even if the total number of out balls in the section currently measuring the base value is less than 52000, the section is ended and the next section is started. Since the gaming performance of the gaming machine is changed by the set value, by changing the section by changing the set value, it is possible to calculate the base value in which different gaming performances are not mixed, and it is possible to grasp the transition of the base value by changing the set value. ..

Further, when the set value is changed, the section in which the base value is currently being measured may be continued without changing the interval in which the base value is measured. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, it is possible to design the base value so that the base value does not change significantly by changing the set value. In such a case, it is not necessary to change the calculation interval of the base value by changing the set value.

Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode may be activated. In the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, considering the operation method and the arrangement of the operation means, the operation of the setting key 971 is less likely to be operated by mistake, so the setting change mode is activated. Is considered to be the intention of the operator. Further, in the setting change mode, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 other than the game state and the base value are cleared. Therefore, even if the RAM is desired to be cleared, it is considered sufficient to activate the setting change mode. ..

On the other hand, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected when the power is turned on, the RAM may be cleared without activating the setting change mode. This is because it is considered that the operator wants at least the RAM clear when both are operated. Further, when both the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the on operation of the setting key 971 are detected at the time of turning on the power, it is not necessary to activate the setting change mode or clear the RAM. This is because, from the viewpoint of file safety against erroneous operations, it is preferable not to accept operations for which the intention of the operator is not clear.

In the RAM clearing in steps (3) and (15) described above, the game state data is maintained, but the reserved memory of the special symbol may be erased. Since the set value changes the operating ratio of the condition device, the judgment result of the random number of the special symbol lottery may change. For this reason, it is preferable to erase the reserved memory of the special symbol and have a new lottery performed.

On the other hand, the lottery of special symbols (extraction of winning random numbers) is performed when the game ball wins the starting port, but the lottery result is judged at the start of the variable display game. The random number value stored on hold may be determined. Therefore, the reserved memory of the special symbol may be maintained.

Further, in the RAM clearing in the steps (3) and (15) described above, the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized in the same area as the area erased due to the operation of the RAM clear switch 954. That is, in the RAM clear processing in the setting change mode, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased (the game state data is also erased), and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. Normally, setting changes are made between the closing of the hall and the opening of the next day, so the game status data (probability change status, time saving status, reserved memory of special symbols and ordinary symbols, information about prize balls, etc.) is deleted. There is no need to maintain it without it.

[12-2. Production on pachinko machines with setting functions]
[12-2-1. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Hereinafter, the details of the processing by the main control MPU 1311 will be described. First, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process. The special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are also collectively referred to as a starting port. In addition, the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 are collectively referred to as the grand prize opening. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively called a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, when the game ball is accepted into the starting port, that is, when the starting prize is won (the starting condition is satisfied), a big hit is made for each starting memory information (starting information) for which this starting condition is satisfied. A random number for determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate the jackpot game state based on the lottery result, and when the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied), it is usually Shift from the game state to the jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG.

When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won a prize in the large winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B wins the big prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), the big winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize at the starting port (step S112). Then, whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the start port is determined by the presence or absence of a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 or the second start port sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process. It is read and performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

When the game ball wins a prize in the start opening (the result of step S114 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 executes the start opening winning process (step S116). In the start-up opening winning process, a start-up opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot judgment is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special symbol is used. It executes processing for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the corresponding process based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number which is the game progress state variable in which the type of the branch process executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process shifts to the branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control End the process. Since the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, it is backed up in the main control side power off processing.

In the process of step S130, special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol change process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), as branching process, based on the value of the game progress state variable. Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), big winning opening pre-opening interval processing (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step) S144) or the large winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a process of starting the change display of the special symbol on the special symbol display is performed based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the starting port.

In the special symbol changing process (step S132), a process of controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been confirmed and stopped causes the jackpot game state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the start port.

In the special symbol loss stop process (step S136), when the big hit game state is not generated, the variation display of the special symbol is stopped and a process for notifying the fact is performed. In the special symbol jackpot stop process (step S138), when a jackpot game state is generated, a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it easy for the game ball to enter each big winning opening by opening the big winning opening is performed.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening (step S144), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter each large winning opening is performed by changing the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state. In the winning opening opening end interval processing (step S146), when the jackpot operation is completed, a process for notifying that fact is performed.

[12-2-2. Special symbol change waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state in which the change display of the special symbol is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, preparations are made to start the change display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first determines whether or not the change of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of balls held for special symbol operation is not 0. In addition, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the number of special symbol operation hold balls is stored for each start port. If the change of the special symbol is not reserved (the result of step S420 is "no"), the change display of the special symbol is not started, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU 1311 sets the reserved ball number designation command as command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for determining a jackpot acquired at the time of winning the starting opening.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 126.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as a command value, the upper byte of the special figure variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as the lower command data (step S458). Further, by acquiring the variation type type value from the variation type type area (step S460) and adding the variation type type value to the command value set in the process of step S452, the upper byte of the variation pattern command according to the variation type. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets a symbol type command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, the variable state specification command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above process is set in the command buffer. The hold ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[12-2-3. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation (step S530). The number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is stored in the buffer for the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation. Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets the jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation and the jackpot flag (step S542). Details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 143.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 acquires the fluctuation pattern value extracted by the fluctuation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, the data (variation time value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern value is searched from the special symbol fluctuation time data (step S546).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 executes a variation type determination process for selecting the variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type type value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 searches the fluctuation time addition value data for the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value (step S552). The fluctuation time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the fluctuation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of pseudo-reams. Then, the main control MPU 1311 adds the fluctuation time addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference fluctuation time value searched in the process of step S546 to acquire the final fluctuation time (step S554). .. Finally, the final fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process is completed.

[12-2-4. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

The main control MPU 1311 first acquires the fluctuation information source table based on the fluctuation table number (step S340). The variable table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variable information source table from the variable information source address table. The fluctuation information source table is a hit (hit fluctuation selection information status table), a miss (missing fluctuation selection information status table), a reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), and a reach probability (special symbol reach probability) according to the game state. A data table in which table information for referring to a table) and a variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). By determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the fluctuation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit-time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number 1 for a variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU 1311 has not won a big hit or a small hit (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step). S372).

When the main control MPU 1311 does not generate reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the out-of-bounds fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved balls (step). S376).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 generates a reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information status table based on the status flag. (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes the variation information number search process based on the random number 1 for the variation pattern acquired in the processes of step S360, step S378 or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the random number 2 for the variation pattern is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, the variation pattern random number 1 (steps S360, S372, S378) and the variation pattern random number 2 (step S392). First, the type of fluctuation pattern (variation pattern group such as XX reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern. Further, from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2, the variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied and displayed is selected. The lottery method is not limited to two stages, and a lottery method may be used in three or more stages, or a random number for one fluctuation pattern may be used to directly select a fluctuation pattern.

[12-3. Explanation of production on pachinko machines with setting functions]
Hereinafter, the effect of the pachinko machine 1 having the setting function will be described. Specifically, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the current setting will be described. In the pachinko machine 1 having a setting function, for example, the higher the setting, the larger the number of game balls paid out with respect to the number of special lottery. Specifically, for example, the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability in the non-probability state (for example, setting 1: 1/300, setting 2: 1/290, setting 3: 1/280, setting 4: 1/270). , Setting 5: 1/250, Setting 6: 1/230, etc.). Therefore, since the player wants to play the game with the pachinko machine 1 having a setting as high as possible, the motivation for playing is increased by installing the setting suggestion effect.

Hereinafter, in this chapter, for convenience of explanation, the main control MPU 1311 directly selects a fluctuation pattern with a random number for one fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern selection determination process in step S542. Specifically, in this chapter, the main control MPU 1311 shall execute the following processing in step S542.

In step S542, the main control MPU 1311 is the current gaming state (whether it is a time saving state (a state in which the time saving control is executed) or a normal state other than the time saving state) and the result of the special lottery (winning a big hit). Select the variation pattern table according to (whether it is done or not). When the result of the special lottery is a big hit, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for the fluctuation pattern, and based on the acquired random number for the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table. A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table. In addition, if the result of the special lottery is out of order, it is further determined whether or not reach has occurred, a random number for the fluctuation pattern is acquired, and the acquired random number for the fluctuation pattern and the distribution of each fluctuation pattern in the selected fluctuation pattern table are sorted. A variation pattern shall be selected from the selected variation pattern table based on.

FIG. 144 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the gaming state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 144 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is the normal state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

The variation pattern table is stored in, for example, the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. The variation pattern table includes, for example, a variation pattern type column, a variation time column, a corresponding effect content column, and a random number distribution column for determining a variation pattern. The variation pattern type column stores information for specifying the type for identifying the variation pattern in the table. The fluctuation time column stores information that identifies the fluctuation time in the corresponding fluctuation pattern type. The corresponding effect content column stores information that identifies the effect content to be executed in the corresponding variation pattern.

The distribution random number column for determining the fluctuation pattern stores the distribution in which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected for each setting. In addition, the random number column for determining the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation pattern table (that is, the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) and FIG. 149 (A) described later) selected when the special lottery result is out of order is displayed when reach occurs. And for each of the times when reach does not occur, the distribution in which the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected is stored for each setting.

[12-4. Setting suggestion effect that is executed after the temporary display of the special lottery result]
First, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern stored in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A) will be described. First, the effect executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29 will be described with reference to FIG. 144.

FIG. 144 is a schematic view showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In the fluctuation of the deviation variation pattern 20, after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the special lottery result is out of order. A definite display indicating that the above is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the fluctuations of the deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the result is displayed. The setting suggestion effect is executed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In this way, in the fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, even if the temporary display is executed by executing the setting suggestion effect after performing the temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out of order. The player can expect the subsequent setting suggestion effect to occur and maintain a sense of expectation. Further, when the setting suggestion effect occurs due to the deviation fluctuation, even if the special lottery result is out of order, the player's disappointment due to the result of the special lottery can be suppressed, and eventually the feeling of exhilaration can be enhanced.

In addition, in the fluctuation of the deviation fluctuation pattern 24, after the SP reach 1 is executed, a temporary display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be deviation is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and then the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Although the Gase effect suggesting the execution is executed, the confirmation display indicating that the special lottery result is out of order is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing the setting suggestion effect itself.

The SP reach is a reach effect in which a high percentage is selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and a low percentage is selected when the result of the special lottery is out of order. In other words, the jackpot expectation of fluctuations in which SP reach is executed is high.

Hereinafter, the effects executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29 will be specifically described. In addition to the contents described below, in each production, sound output from various speakers, light emission from various lamps, operation of various movable bodies, and / or display on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc. are executed at the same time. You may.

In the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24-29, first, the pre-reach effect is executed. In the pre-reach effect, all the decorative symbols are changed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the normal reach effect is developed. In the normal reach effect, the decorative symbol is in the reach state on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, of the three decorative symbols (for example, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol), the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same symbol, and the middle symbol is in a fluctuating state.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the SP reach 1 is developed, and the first half effect of the SP reach 1 is executed. In SP reach 1, for example, one main character and one enemy character are displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a rock-paper-scissors game is played. In the first half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation variation patterns 20 and 24 to 29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character in a rock-paper-scissors game. In the SP reach, the decorative symbol may be displayed at a position closer to the periphery of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, as compared with the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 20 and 24-29, the latter half of SP reach 1 is produced. In the second half production of SP reach 1 in the deviation variation pattern 20 and 24-29, for example, a so-called revival production is executed, and for example, at the start of the second half production, the voice of the main character such as "Still more!" Is output from various speakers, and the main On the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect is executed in which a rock-paper-scissors game between the main character and the enemy character is performed again. In the latter half of the SP reach 1 in the deviation fluctuation patterns 24 to 29, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 executes an effect in which the main character loses to the enemy character again in a rock-paper-scissors game.

Subsequently, a temporary display in which the special lottery result is out of order is executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one combination of decorative symbols in the detached state (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol are the same symbols as the symbols stopped in the reach state, and the middle symbol is A symbol different from the same symbol) is displayed in a manner as if it were swaying with a small width.

Subsequently, in the deviation variation pattern 20, after the provisional display, a definite display indicating that the special lottery result was deviation is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 without performing any other effect. In the deviation variation pattern 24, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is deviation is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. On the other hand, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the provisional display, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is deviation is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In the final display, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the same combination as the combination of the decorative symbols displayed in the temporary display is displayed in a completely stopped manner. In the temporary display and the final display, the decorative symbol is displayed, for example, in the central portion of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the same size as in the pre-reach effect and the normal reach effect.

In the setting suggestion gaze effect in the deviation variation pattern 24, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, and an effect that chases the enemy character but cannot catch it is executed. As in the distribution of the deviation pattern 24 in FIG. 144 (A), it is desirable that the distribution of the variation pattern in which the setting suggestion gassing effect is executed is equal or approximately equal in all the settings. This is because if the distribution is not even, the setting suggestion effect suggests the setting.

Further, it is desirable that the ratio of the deviation pattern 24 distribution to the total distribution of the fluctuations in which the SP reach 1 is executed is low (for example, 20% or less). This is because if the distribution is high, the setting suggestion effect will be generated frequently when the SP reach 1 is developed, and the player's expectation for the occurrence of the setting suggestion effect may be reduced.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, for example, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, one main character discovers two enemy characters, chases and catches the enemy character, and then three people play a rock-paper-scissors game. The production to be performed is executed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25, in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people, all three people play a goo and become a friend. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 25 is defined so as to be distributed only at low settings (settings 1, 2, and 3). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 25 is an effect in which the low setting is fixed.

In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 is the same value as the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 26 and the like in the high setting (settings 4, 5, and 6), but the low setting confirmation effect is achieved. If it occurs, the player may stop the game early. Therefore, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 25 may be set lower than the distribution of the other setting confirmation effect in other settings, or the deviation variation pattern may be set lower. 25 itself does not have to exist.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26, in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people, all three people play a choki and become a friend. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 26 is defined so as to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 26 is an effect in which the high setting is fixed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27, in a rock-paper-scissors game with three people, all three people give a par and become a friend. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 27 is defined so as to be distributed only in even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 27 is an effect in which the even number setting is fixed.

In the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28, in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people, the effect that all three people put out different hands and become enthusiastic is executed. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 28 is defined so as to be distributed only in odd-numbered settings (settings 1, 3, and 5). That is, the setting suggestion effect in the deviation variation pattern 28 is an effect in which the odd number setting is fixed.

For example, when the odd number setting and the even number setting have different characteristics, the player can be interested in the effect by installing the odd number setting confirmation effect or the even number setting confirmation effect as described above. ..

Specifically, for example, the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is high in the order of settings 6, 4, 2, 5, 3, 1 (6 is the highest, 1 is the lowest), and settings 5, 3, 1, 6, 4, Probability change jackpot ratio is higher in the order of 2 jackpots (5 is the highest, 2 is the lowest), and the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are in the order of settings 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. It is assumed that the jackpot winning probability and the probability variation ratio in each setting are set so that the ratio of the total number of game balls paid out to the number of prizes won in the game balls is high (6 is the highest and 1 is the lowest).

In this case, the even number setting has a higher probability of winning a big hit in the normal state than the odd number setting, but the probability variation rate is low, that is, the number of game balls required to win the so-called first hit tends to be smaller. The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from a single consecutive villa from the first hit tends to be small. On the other hand, the odd-numbered setting has a lower probability of winning a big hit in the normal state than the even-numbered setting, but has a high probability variation rate, that is, the number of game balls required to win the first hit tends to be larger, but the first hit The total amount of game balls that can be obtained from one consecutive villa is likely to increase. In such a case, there is a possibility that one player prefers an even-numbered ball ejection tendency and another player prefers an odd-numbered ball ejection tendency. Therefore, an odd-numbered setting confirmation effect or an even-numbered setting confirmation effect may occur. The player's interest in the production will increase. Further, the even-numbered setting may have a feature that the jackpot winning probability in the normal state is higher than that of the odd-numbered setting, but a jackpot with a small number of rounds is easily selected.

In the above-mentioned deviation fluctuation patterns 25 to 29, the effects until the setting suggestion effect starts are the same, but the contents of the setting suggestion effect are different (the results in the rock-paper-scissors game with three people are different). In addition, it is desirable that the rock-paper-scissors game production by three people is used only in the out-of-range fluctuation patterns 25 to 29. As a result, when the rock-paper-scissors game production by three people starts, the player can recognize that the setting suggestion production has started, and the feeling of exhilaration is further enhanced.

Note that, for example, the deviation variation pattern 25 is a variation pattern in which the effect of determining the high setting is executed, but may be a variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the high setting is likely to be executed is executed. Specifically, for example, if the variation pattern 25 is distributed even at the low setting and the distribution is lower than the distribution of the variation pattern 25 at the high setting (for example, 50% or less), the effect of the deviation variation pattern 25 is achieved. Is not an effect in which the high setting is fixed, but an effect that suggests that there is a high possibility of a high setting.

In addition to the variation pattern in which the effect of determining the high setting is executed, the variation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the high setting is likely to be set is executed may be defined. The same applies to the low setting confirmation effect, the odd number setting confirmation effect, the even number setting confirmation effect, the maximum setting confirmation effect, and the like.

According to the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (B) (the fluctuation pattern table at the time of normal and big hit winning), when the special lottery result is a big hit in the normal state, other than the hit fluctuation pattern 34 in which the maximum setting is determined. The setting suggestion effect of is not executed. In addition, the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed is higher than that in the case where the special lottery result is out of order. As a result, the setting suggestion effect is mainly executed when the special lottery result is out of order, and the player can obtain a sense of expectation even when the special lottery result is out of order.

[12-5. Setting suggestion effect using shortening fluctuation]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 30 will be described with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effects executed in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30 in the fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A).

Shortening variation is performed in the deviation variation patterns 1, 2, and 30. The shortened fluctuation is, for example, a fluctuation in which the fluctuation time is shorter than that of other fluctuation patterns, and after the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is started on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, all decorations without developing into a reach state. It is a fluctuation that the symbol stops. In the normal variation, in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the decorative symbols are stopped in the order of, for example, the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but in the shortened variation, all the decorative symbols may be stopped all at once.

Subsequently, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display is performed to indicate that the special lottery result is out of order. The description of the provisional display and the final display is the same as the above description, and is therefore omitted.

The deviation variation pattern 30 has a variation time different from the variation time of all other variation patterns in which the shortened variation such as the deviation variation patterns 1 and 2 is executed. In the example of FIG. 144 (A), the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 1 is 2 seconds, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is 5 seconds, and the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is 3.5 seconds. .. Further, in FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 30 is defined so as to be distributed only at the maximum setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 30 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

Further, the distribution of the deviation variation pattern 30 which is the variation pattern in which the shortening variation is executed and suggests the setting is extremely low as compared with the distribution of the other variation patterns in which the shortening variation is executed (for example, the other variation pattern). It is desirable that it is 10% or less of the minimum distribution of. Further, in each fluctuation pattern in which the shortened fluctuation is executed, it is desirable that the execution time of the provisional display and the confirmed display is the same, and only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. Further, it is desirable that the difference between the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 and the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern in which other shortened fluctuations are executed is such that the player can recognize it (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). ..

As a result, when the shortened fluctuation is executed, the player assumes a fluctuation time such as the deviation fluctuation patterns 1 and 2 with many distributions, but when the deviation fluctuation pattern 30 is executed, the fluctuation time is assumed to be the same. You can recognize that they are different, and you can enjoy the production where the highest setting is fixed. In particular, in the example of FIG. 144 (A), since the fluctuation pattern including the shortening fluctuation is selected only when the shortening fluctuation is out of reach, the player loses the expectation that the shortening fluctuation is executed and is interested in the shortening fluctuation. I can't have it. However, by executing the setting suggestion effect using the shortening fluctuation in this way, the player can have a sense of expectation for the shortening fluctuation that is selected only when the player is out of reach, and suppresses the decline in interest. can do.

Further, in the deviation fluctuation patterns 1, 2, and 30, although the contents displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 are the same, only the time of the shortened fluctuation is different. As a result, the player can concentrate on the production so as not to overlook the highest setting final production.

The deviation variation pattern 30 is a variation pattern in which the maximum setting is fixed and the shortening variation is executed. However, for each setting other than the maximum setting, the setting is fixed and the shortening variation is executed. A pattern may exist. In this case, for example, it is desirable that the fluctuation time of each of the fluctuation patterns is different from the fluctuation time of other deviation fluctuation patterns in which the shortened fluctuation is executed.

[12-6. Setting suggestion effect executed before the temporary display of the special lottery result]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 will be described with reference to FIG. 147. FIG. 147 is a schematic view showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144, the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are defined so as to be distributed only at the highest setting (setting 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34 are executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, for example, the special movie 1 is played on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 1 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, that is, the effect in which the maximum setting is fixed.

In the deviation variation pattern 31, after the end of the special movie 1, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. In the hit variation pattern 34, after the end of the special movie 1, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

In the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34, unlike the deviation variation patterns 25 to 30, etc., the setting suggestion effect is started before the provisional display (specifically, at the same time as the start of the variation). As a result, the player can obtain an uplifting feeling of waiting for the notification of the jackpot lottery result in the state where the maximum setting is confirmed. Further, especially when the display time of the special movie 1 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), it is possible to appeal to other players that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is the highest setting, and by extension, the player. Can feel superiority to the other player, and it becomes easier for the hall to appeal to the other player that the highest setting is used.

[12-7. Setting suggestion production where big hit winning or high setting is confirmed]
Hereinafter, the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 will be described with reference to FIG. 148. FIG. 148 is a schematic view showing an example of the effect executed in the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35 in the variation pattern table of FIG. 144 (A). In FIG. 144 (A), the deviation variation pattern 32 is defined so as to be distributed only at high settings (settings 4, 5, and 6). That is, when the deviation variation pattern 32 is executed, the maximum setting is determined.

In the deviation variation pattern 32 and the hit variation pattern 35, for example, the special movie 2 is played on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 at the same time as the variation starts. The special movie 2 is an effect that occurs only in the deviation variation pattern 31 and the hit variation pattern 34.

In the deviation variation pattern 32, after the end of the special movie 2, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is likely to be out is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is out is performed. In the hit variation pattern 35, after the end of the special movie 2, a provisional display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed, and then a definite display indicating that the special lottery result is a hit is performed.

Therefore, when the special movie 2 occurs, one of the high setting and the big hit in the fluctuation is determined. That is, if the special lottery result is out of order after the special movie 2 is generated, the high setting is confirmed, so that the player can suppress the disappointment that the special lottery result is out of order, and by extension, the high setting. A feeling of exhilaration can be obtained by confirming.

Further, especially when the display time of the special movie 2 is long (for example, 30 seconds or more), the player can feel superiority to other players, and after the special movie 2 is generated. If the special lottery result is out of order, it will be easier for the hall to appeal to other players that the high setting is being used.

[12-8. Setting suggestion effect in a time saving state]
Hereinafter, the fluctuation pattern selected in the game state and the time saving state will be described. FIG. 149 (A) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is out of order. FIG. 149 (B) is an example of a variation pattern table selected when the game state is a time saving state and the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

In the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3 and the smaller the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 at the time of non-reach deviation. Further, the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 2 is shorter than the fluctuation time of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3. For example, if the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time, and per unit time. The number of game balls to be paid out will increase, which may lead to a burden on the hall.

However, as in the example of FIG. 149 (A), the higher the setting, the more the fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time is distributed, so that the number of game balls paid out by the jackpot per unit time in each setting can be made equal. can. Further, the higher the setting, the higher the selection rate of the deviation fluctuation pattern 3 having a long fluctuation time among the fluctuation patterns including the shortened fluctuation. Therefore, the deviation fluctuation pattern 3 also functions as a fluctuation pattern suggesting a high setting. Can be done.

Similarly, even when there is reach and the deviation is high, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 11 having a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the deviation fluctuation pattern 12 having a short fluctuation time. Similarly, at the time of winning a big hit, the higher the setting, the larger the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 2 having a long fluctuation time, and the smaller the distribution of the hit fluctuation pattern 3 having a short fluctuation time.

As described above, for example, when the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot winning probability, and if the distribution of each fluctuation pattern is the same in all the settings, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the jackpot in a short time. In other words, the lower the setting, the longer it takes to win the jackpot, and the number of game balls fired before winning the jackpot increases. For example, if the lower the setting, the larger the distribution of fluctuation patterns with long fluctuation times, and the smaller the selection rate of fluctuation patterns with short fluctuation times, the player who stops firing the game ball during fluctuations, respectively. The number of game balls fired per unit time in the setting can be made equal.

It should be noted that a predetermined sound effect may be output or a predetermined light emission effect may be executed at the timing when the setting is suggested in the various setting suggestion effects described in this chapter. The predetermined sound effect and the predetermined light emission effect may be dedicated to be executed only at the time of setting suggestion effect. Further, particularly in the setting suggestion effect in which the high setting or the maximum setting is determined, it is preferable that a predetermined sound effect output or a predetermined light emission effect, which is executed only by the setting suggestion effect, is executed.

It is desirable that the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the high setting or the maximum setting is fixed or the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. If the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the player loses the sense of expectation if the high setting suggestion effect or the highest setting suggestion effect is not executed even though the player plays only a short game time, and eventually the game is played early. This is because there is a risk of canceling.

Further, it is desirable that the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in which the effect suggesting that the low setting or the minimum setting is fixed or the possibility is high is executed is extremely low as compared with the distribution of other fluctuation patterns. This is because if the distribution of the fluctuation pattern is high, the low setting suggestion effect and the minimum setting suggestion effect are frequently executed, which may cause the player to lose the sense of expectation and eventually stop the game at an early stage.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect suggesting a group of settings such as high setting, low setting, maximum setting, odd number setting, and even number setting has been described, the setting group in the setting suggestion effect is not limited to these. A setting suggestion effect for any group consisting of one or more settings may be executed. For example, settings 1 and 2 may be set as low settings, settings 3 and 4 may be set as intermediate settings, and settings 5 and 6 may be set as high settings, or there may be a group consisting of only setting 5.

[12-9. Other forms of pachinko machines with setting functions]
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing a mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the above description, the setting board 970 is connected to the payout control board 951, and the payout control unit 952 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974. , The setting board 970 is connected to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1311 acquires the operation state of each switch and controls the display of the setting display 974.

FIG. 150 (A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 is provided with a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a hole 971A for operating the setting key 971.

FIG. 150 (B) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A). In the example shown in FIG. 150 (B), in addition to the main control MPU 1311 and the driver circuit (not shown), the base display 1317, the display switch 1318, and the RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two operation units (RAM clear switch 954, setting key 971) that trigger RAM clear are provided in the main control board box 1320. As will be described later, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 from which data is erased is different between when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated and when the setting key 971 is operated.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be directly connected between the boards by a connector or may be connected by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting key 971 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying a set or selected set value are mounted. The setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and the setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

The outputs of the various switches 971, 972, and 973 provided on the setting board 970 are sent to the main control board 1310 and input to the ports of the main control MPU 1311.

Further, the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 may perform serial communication, and the driver circuit of the setting display 974 may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Since the main control board box 1320 is arranged on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 on the setting board 970 is mounted at a position that can be seen from the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

The main control board 1310 may authenticate the setting board 970 in the initialization process (FIGS. 21 and 22). For example, an authentication code for each manufacturer of the pachinko machine is set on the setting board 970, and the main control board 1310 reads out and collates the authentication code set on the setting board 970. Then, if the setting board 970 cannot be authenticated, the pachinko machine 1 cannot start the game. That is, although the game ball can be launched toward the game area 5a, the prize ball is not paid out even if the winning opening is won, and the variable display game is not executed. The authentication code may be set for each pachinko machine model, or the serial number for each pachinko machine may be set. As a method of setting the authentication code, for example, the authentication code is set by a DIP switch, a jumper wire, a jumper pin, a short circuit of a pattern, etc. provided on the setting board 970, or a logic circuit in which the authentication code is set (for example, A small-capacity FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) may be mounted on the setting board 970.

Further, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311) may be able to identify whether the board mounted in the main control board box 1320 is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. For example, by outputting a signal different from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1311 recognizes whether the connected board is the setting board 970 or the dummy board 979. do. Specifically, the setting board 970 outputs + 5V, and the dummy board 979 outputs 0V (ground level). The signals from the setting board 970 and the dummy board 979 are input to a specific port of the interface circuit 1331 circuit of the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1311 determines the connected board by the input signal to the port.

By changing the code of the setting board 970 for each manufacturer (for each model) in this way, it is possible to prevent the wrong setting board 970 from being mounted on the main control board box 1320. Further, by setting the authentication code in the logic circuit on the setting board 970, it is possible to prevent the setting board 970 from being illegally replaced.

FIG. 150 (C) shows a state in which the main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 are housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in (A).

As described above, in recent years, some pachinko machines 1 have a game performance setting function. This setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine regarding the prize ball acquired by the player, such as the jackpot probability in the special symbol variation display game, and the setting function can change the performance of the pachinko machine 1 according to the business policy of the hall. On the other hand, conventional pachinko machines that do not have a setting function are sufficient, and there are some halls where the setting function is unnecessary. For this reason, manufacturers of pachinko machines need to design and produce both pachinko machines that do not have a setting function and pachinko machines that have a setting function. Efficient design and production of pachinko machines are required.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 that does not have the setting function, the dummy board 979 is mounted in the mounting space of the setting board 970 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be produced in the same manner as when the setting board 970 is mounted. To. Further, the main control board 1310 can be shared between the pachinko machine having no setting function and the pachinko machine having the setting function.

The dummy board 979 does not have devices such as the setting key 971 and the setting display 974 mounted on the setting board 970, but may have a pattern for mounting these devices. That is, although a pattern for mounting the device is provided on the dummy substrate 979, the device is not mounted on the pattern.

The dummy board 979 may be a member (for example, a unit made of a resin case) that can be attached to the main control board box 1320 at the same position as the setting board 970, even if it is not composed of the printed circuit board.

Further, since the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is mounted on the main control board 1310, the output of the driver circuit of the setting display 974 is neither open nor ground on the dummy board 979, but is terminated by a dummy resistor. It is good. This can prevent damage to the driver circuit due to overcurrent. Further, when the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970 perform serial communication, the dummy board 979 may terminate the serial communication with the main control board 1310.

When the dummy board 979 is mounted, the hole 971A is not provided in the main control board box 1320. A small door that can be moved so as to close the hole 971A can be operated from the inside of the main control board box 1320 and cannot be operated from the outside. By providing the main control board box 1320 with a setting function. The main control board box 1320 may be shared with a pachinko machine that does not have a pachinko machine and a pachinko machine that has a setting function.

The dummy board 979, which will be described later, may also be set with an authentication code for the main control board 1310 to authenticate. Further, the dummy board 979 does not require authentication by the main control board 1310, and it is not necessary to set an authentication code. The main control board 1310 and the dummy board 979 may perform serial communication, and the main control board 1310 may authenticate the dummy board.

The variations of the operating means mounted on the setting board 970 described above can be summarized as follows.

(1) With setting change switch 972, with setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted in the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select a setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated.

(2) With setting change switch 972, without setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted in the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the setting change switch 972 to select the setting value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position.

(3) Without the setting change switch 972, with the setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, with the key 975 inserted in the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and with the RAM clear switch 954 pressed), the pachinko machine Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the setting value to be set, the setting confirmation switch 973 is operated. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

(4) No setting change switch 972, no setting confirmation switch 973 In this case, the pachinko machine is inserted with the key 975 inserted into the setting key 971 and turned to the set position (and the RAM clear switch 954 is pressed). Operate the power switch of 1 to turn on the power. Then, after operating the RAM clear switch 954 to select the set value to be set, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position. Instead of operating the RAM clear switch 954, the setting key 971 may be turned to the right to select a setting value to be set.

151 and 152 are diagrams showing another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In this figure, the configuration of the main control board box 1320 is shown by a solid line, and the configuration inside the main control board box 1320 is shown by a dotted line.

In the mounting example shown in FIGS. 151 and 152, the small door 1321 is provided in the main control board box 1320, which is different from the mounting example shown in FIG. 150.

FIG. 151 (A) shows the main control board box 1320 of this mounting example. Similar to the above, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A for operating the 976 is provided.

The hole 976A is normally covered by a small door 1321. The small door 1321 is provided with a key unit 1321. By inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating the small door 1321, the small door 1321 is opened from the main control board box 1320, and the hole 976A is exposed and set. The mode switch 976 can be operated.

As shown in FIG. 152 (A), in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the door 1323 is in the maximum protruding position from the key unit 1322, the door 1323 is inserted into the seat 1324, and the door 1323 and the seat 1324 are inserted. Engage with and the small door 1321 is fixed in the closed position. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 152 (B), when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and the rotation operation is performed, the hinge 1323 retracts from the maximum protruding position, and the engagement between the latch 1323 and the seat 1324 is released. The small door 1321 can be opened around the hinge 1325. When the small door 1321 is open (FIG. 152 (B)), the hole 976A is exposed and the setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

FIG. 153 is a diagram showing still another mounting example of the main control board 1310. In the mounting example shown in FIG. 153, the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980 that covers the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1. That is, by inserting the key 975 into the keyhole of the key unit 1322 and operating it, the back cover 980 is opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 (setting mode switch 976 provided on the setting board 970) is operated. It will be possible.

That is, in the normal state in which the key 975 can be inserted and removed, the back cover 980 is fixed by closing the back side of the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 is housed in the back cover 980. On the other hand, when the key 975 is inserted into the keyhole and the rotation operation is performed, the back cover 980 can be opened from the main body frame base 600, and the main control board box 1320 housed inside the back cover 980 is exposed on the back side. The setting mode switch 976 can be operated.

When the key unit 1322 is provided on the back cover 980, the main control board box 1320 (main control board 1310) may have the configuration shown in FIG. 151 (C). Specifically, the main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once it is closed. The main control board box 1320 has a hole 1318A for operating the display switch 1318, a hole 954A for operating the RAM clear switch 954, and a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode. A hole 976A is provided for operating the. The main control board box 1320 houses the main control board 1310 and the setting board 970. In addition to the main control MPU and driver circuit (not shown), the base display 1317, the display switch 1318, and the RAM clear switch 954 are mounted on the main control board 1310. The RAM clear switch 954 may not be mounted on the main control board 1310, but may be mounted on another control board (for example, a payout control board 951 or a power supply board). In this case, the main control board box 1320 is not provided with the hole 954A.

The setting board 970 is provided close to the main control board 1310, and the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected so that signals can be transmitted. The connection between the setting board 970 and the main control board 1310 may be directly connected between the boards by a connector or may be connected by an electric wire. On the setting board 970, a setting mode switch 976 for changing the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 to the setting change mode, and a setting display 974 for displaying the set or selected set value are mounted. The setting change switch 972 for changing the set value and the setting confirmation switch 973 for confirming and inputting the changed setting value may be mounted on the setting board 970.

[12-10. Details of setting change processing]
FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the initialization process. The initialization process shown in FIG. 154 is different from the initialization process described above in FIG. 101 in that the RAM clear process is performed when the setting key 971 is operated (steps S17 and S30). The same steps as those in the initialization process described above in FIGS. 21 and 101 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to perform the initialization process. First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the protection of the RAM 1312 built in the main control MPU 1311 to write permission so that the RAM 1312 can be written (step S10). Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 activates the built-in watchdog timer (step S12), and determines whether a predetermined wait time (time required for the sub-board (peripheral control board 1510, etc.) to start) has elapsed. Determine (step S16). If the predetermined wait time has elapsed, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated (step S18).

The RAM clear switch 954 may be detected immediately after the power is turned on (for example, before step S12), the detection result may be stored in a predetermined register, and the stored value may be determined in step S18. By detecting the RAM clear switch 954 immediately after the power is turned on, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 can be reliably detected even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated only for a short time after the power is turned on.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, it is determined whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step S17). If the setting key 971 is not operated, it is a normal RAM clear operation, so the process proceeds to step S30 to initialize a predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312. On the other hand, when the setting key 971 is operated, that is, when the power is turned on while both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the mode shifts to the setting change mode. That is, since it is necessary to operate the two switches and the power switch to start the setting change mode, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of starting the setting change mode by mistake.

In the setting change mode, first, the setting value is displayed (step S60). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current set value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974. Then, a security signal is output (step S61). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is extremely rare to put the pachinko machine 1 in the setting change mode during the game, and cheating is possible. This is because the hall computer should be notified when the mode is changed to the setting change mode during business hours.

Whether the security signal is output for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode or between the start and end of the setting change mode, the security signal is output from the start of the setting change mode to the predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode. It may be output. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the end of the setting change mode, the period during which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting change operation has been performed depending on whether or not the setting change switch 972 is operated (step S62), changes the set value according to the operation of the setting change switch 972, and writes the setting value to the main control RAM 1312. (Step S63). For example, when the setting change switch 972 is composed of a push button switch, when the setting change switch 972 is pressed once, the set value is changed by one step. Further, when the setting key 971 also serves as the setting change switch 972, when the setting key 971 is turned to the right once, the setting value is changed by one step. Then, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for displaying the changed set value on the setting display 974 (step S64).

After that, it is determined whether to end the setting change mode and confirm the set value (step S65). Specifically, when the main control MPU 1311 detects the operation of the setting confirmation switch 973, the setting change mode is terminated and the process proceeds to step S30. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position. Further, the setting change mode may be terminated with the operation of another switch or sensor provided in the pachinko machine 1.

In the above-described process, after the setting change mode is completed, or when it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30, but the process may proceed to step S20. In this case, after the setting change mode ends, it is determined whether the power failure flag is set (step S20), it is determined whether the checksums match (step S22), and the power failure flag is not set and the check is performed. If the sums do not match, the predetermined area of the built-in RAM 1312 is initialized. If it is determined in step S17 that the setting key is not on, the process proceeds to step S30.

After the setting change mode ends, in step S30, among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312, the set value data, the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128), and the gaming state (for example, the probability change state, The data of the time saving state, the reserved memory of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, the information about the prize ball) is left, the other data is deleted, and the process proceeds to step S24. The game state data may be deleted without leaving it. In this case, the storage area erased by the RAM area erased after the setting change operation and the storage area erased by the RAM clear operation are the same.

On the other hand, if the operation for ending the setting change mode is not detected, the process returns to step S62, and further, the setting change operation is detected.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected in step S17, the set value data and the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) among the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 are found in step S30. ) Is left, the other data is erased, and the process proceeds to step S24.

If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not detected in step S18, the main control MPU 1311 does not erase the data backed up in the built-in RAM 1312, and determines whether the power failure flag is set (step S20). ..

As a result, if the power failure flag is not set, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 erases the data backed up in the work area (other than the base calculation area 13128). (Step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is set, the main control MPU 1311 clears the power failure flag and checks calculated from the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 using the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff. The thumb and the checksum stored in step S48 are compared (verified) (step S22).

As a result, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 do not match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 may not be correct. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 backs up to the work area. The data (other than the base calculation area 13128) is deleted (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S24. On the other hand, if the checksum calculated from the backup data and the checksum stored in step S48 match, the data in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is correct, so the data backed up in the work area is not erased, and step S24 Proceed to.

In step S24, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) is normal by using the check code. If it is determined to be abnormal, the data in the base calculation work area may not be correct. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 deletes the data stored in the base calculation work area (step S26).

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, as a case where at least a part of the area of the RAM 1312 is initialized, the operation of the setting key 971 (step S17), the operation of only the RAM clear switch (step S18), and the power failure flag are set. There are a power failure flag error that is not set (step S20), a RAM error that the RAM checksums do not match (step S22), and an error of the base calculation work (step S24). Of these, as shown in the figure, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is turned on, the set value and the game state in the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area). (For example, probability change state, time saving state, hold memory of special symbol or normal symbol, information about prize ball) is left, other data is cleared, and base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is not cleared. .. If the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is detected when the power is turned on, but the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, or if the power failure flag is abnormal or the RAM is abnormal, the game control area 13126 (game work area and game stack). (Including the area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 (including the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area) is not cleared. Further, in the case of a base calculation work abnormality, the base calculation area 13128 (outside the game control area) is cleared, and the game control area 13126 is not cleared.

Note that, unlike the ones shown in the figure, in the case of a power failure flag abnormality, a RAM abnormality, or a base calculation work abnormality, the validity of the data stored in the RAM 1312 is not guaranteed, so that the game control area 13126 and the base calculation area 13128 The entire RAM area including the above may be cleared. If the entire RAM area is cleared in the case of a base calculation work error, the data indicating the game state is lost and normal processing cannot be executed. If the memory configuration is such that the base calculation work area and the base calculation stack area cannot be executed. Only should be initialized. When the operation of the RAM clear switch is detected when the power is turned on, the game control area 13126 (including the game work area and the game stack area) is cleared, and the base calculation area 13128 is set as described above. You don't have to clear it.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the data backed up in the work area of the built-in RAM 1312 is used for base calculation for each data type (game control area 13126 (set value, game state data)). Area 13128) Erase under different conditions. That is, by operating the RAM clear switch, the backed up game control area 13126 other than the set value is erased, and the set value and the base calculation area 13128 are not erased. This is because if the set value is erased by the operation of the RAM clear switch, it is necessary to reset the set value every time the RAM clear switch is operated, which complicates the maintenance of the pachinko machine 1 in the hall. Therefore, the set value is not erased by operating the RAM clear switch.

For the processing after step S28, either FIG. 22 or FIG. 102 may be adopted as necessary. The difference between FIGS. 22 and 102 is the presence or absence of processing (steps S50 and S52) in which a check code is calculated and stored from the data in the base calculation work area (base calculation area 13128) when the power is turned off.

In the initialization process described above, the setting confirmation process is not executed, but is executed by the setting confirmation process called from the timer interrupt process described later (FIGS. 155 and 156), but the setting confirmation process is performed in the initialization process. You may do it. By executing the setting confirmation process in the initialization process, the setting confirmation can be permitted only when the power is turned on, and the confirmation of the set value due to careless operation during the operation of the pachinko machine 1 can be prevented.

In this case, a setting confirmation operation unit (for example, a push button switch) is provided separately from the setting key 971 (the setting change switch 972 may have the function of the setting confirmation operation unit), and when the power is turned on. When the setting confirmation operation unit is operated, the current set value is read from the main control RAM 1312, data for displaying on the setting display 974 is generated, and the set value is displayed on the setting display 974. It is good to do it. In this case as well, it is advisable to output a security signal along with the display of the set value.

The main control board 1310 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment may not immediately execute the RAM clear process even if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. Specifically, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). That is, the main control MPU 1311 suspends the RAM clear process, and executes the RAM clear process after the predetermined condition is satisfied (the end of the setting change mode). It can be said that during the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 is controlled to memorize the execution of the RAM clear process. On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power without operating the setting key 971, the main control RAM is cleared without starting the setting change mode (step S30).

The clearing (initialization) of the main control RAM 1312 has been described in detail above. Next, the clearing of the RAM of the payout control unit 952 mounted on the payout control board 951 will be described.

After the setting change mode, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared in step S30, but the RAM of the payout control unit may be cleared at the same time. Further, it is not necessary to clear the RAM of the payout control unit 952. Further, it may be switched whether to clear the RAM of the payout control unit by the operation. For example, when the power is turned on while operating the RAM clear switch 954 while the setting key 971 is turned on, the RAMs of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952 are cleared, and the setting key 971 is turned on. If the power is turned on without operating the RAM clear switch 954, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared. By changing the operation method in this way, it is possible to perform a process in which a part of the main control RAM 1312 is cleared and the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is not cleared.

Further, when clearing the RAM of the main control RAM 1312 and the payout control unit 952, there is a difference between the timing of clearing the main control RAM 1312 and the timing of clearing the RAM of the payout control unit 952 depending on whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. May occur. That is, when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to turn on the power while the setting key 971 is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is cleared after the setting change mode ends (step S30). On the other hand, when the payout control unit 952 detects the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the payout control unit 952 immediately clears the RAM. Therefore, depending on the condition (operation), the RAM of the payout control unit 952 may be cleared, but the main control RAM 1312 may not be cleared.

Further, not only when the RAM clear switch 954 is provided on the main control board 1310, but also on the pachinko machine 1 provided on the payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 while operating the RAM clear switch 954 when changing the set value. When the power is turned on, the RAM of the payout control unit 952 should be cleared. That is, the payout control unit 952 does not clear the RAM by the RAM clear command from the main control board 1310, but the payout control unit 952 detects the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on, and the RAM clear switch 954 performs the RAM clear switch 954. It is determined whether or not the operation is being performed, and whether or not the RAM of the payout control unit 952 is cleared is determined. If the RAM clear switch is provided on the payout control board 951, there is an effect that various models can be supported without changing the control program on the frame side.

[12-11. Details of setting confirmation process]
FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing of the pachinko machine of this embodiment.

Compared with the timer interrupt process described above in FIG. 23, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 155 is provided with a base calculation process (step S801) instead of the accessory ratio calculation area update process in step S81, and the combination of step S89. The object ratio calculation / display process is deleted. In addition, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the operating ratio of the condition device) is added. The same steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 23 and 104 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets 1 in the RBS (register bank selection flag) of the program status word by executing the main control program, and switches the register (step S70).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step S74), the timer update process (step S76), the random number update process 1 (step S78), and the prize ball control process (step S80).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the current game state, adds the number of prize balls paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the base calculation area 13128 of the main control built-in RAM 1312 ( (See FIG. 103) is updated to calculate the base value (see step S801, FIG. 105 and FIG. 106 for details of the base calculation process). The base calculation process (step S801) may be executed in any order after the prize ball control process (step S80), but it is preferable to execute the base calculation process (step S801) in an early order in order to reliably execute each timer interrupt. ..

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 has a frame command reception process (step S82), a fraud detection process (step S84), a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86), and a normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process (step S86). Step S88) is executed.

After that, a setting confirmation process (step S802) for displaying a set value indicating the gaming performance of the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the setting confirmation process, the employee of the hall performs a predetermined operation to display the current setting value on the setting display 974. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 156.

Subsequently, the output data setting process (step S90) and the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) are executed.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 sets a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S96). Finally, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) the register bank. When the above processing is completed, the timer interrupt processing is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing an example of the setting confirmation process of the pachinko machine of this embodiment. The setting confirmation process is called and executed from step S802 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 155).

In the setting confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting confirmation operation is in progress (step S8061). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 is operated. If the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on, it triggers a transition to the setting change mode (step S17 in FIG. 154), and if it is operated during operation, it becomes a setting confirmation operation and can display the current setting.

If the operation of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, so data for not displaying the setting value is generated and the setting value is hidden (step S8065).

On the other hand, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected, it is determined whether the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062).

As a setting display condition, it is determined whether or not the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 by the output of the frame release switch. Since the setting key 971 is installed on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting key 971 cannot be operated unless the outer frame 2 is open. However, if the operation of the setting key 971 is detected even though the outer frame 2 is closed, it is presumed that some abnormality (malfunction or cheating) has occurred in the pachinko machine 1, and in this case, the setting is made. It is better not to display. Further, since the setting display 974 is installed on the back surface side of the pachinko machine 1, the setting display 974 cannot be seen unless the outer frame 2 is open, and there is no need to display the setting.

The set value may be displayed at any time during the operation of the pachinko machine 1. In addition, a setting display condition that enables display at a specific time may be provided. For example, the set position may be displayed for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) from the time when the power is turned on. In this case, it is preferable to operate a timer that measures the elapsed time from turning on the power (or the initial setting of the CPU in step S28) so that the set value can be displayed until the timer is timed up.

Further, a setting display condition may be provided so that the set value can be displayed in a specific gaming state. For example, the setting display condition cannot be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol or during the jackpot game. That is, a setting display condition is provided so that the set value can be displayed during a period other than during the special symbol change and the jackpot. In addition, the set value may not be displayed in a game state other than the above. In this case, when the setting key is operated during the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game, the set value may be displayed at the timing when the special symbol variation game or the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the setting display condition is satisfied, a security signal is output (step S8063). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 generates data for outputting a security signal. The security signal is a signal output from the external terminal board 784 when the pachinko machine 1 detects an abnormality, but it is rare for the pachinko machine 1 to confirm the setting during the game, which is a precursor to fraudulent activity. This is because the hall computer should be notified when a setting confirmation operation is performed during business hours.

The security signal may be output for a predetermined time from the start of the set value display, output between the start and end of the set value display, or output from the start of the set value display to the predetermined period after the end of the set value display. good. By outputting the security signal until a predetermined period after the setting value display is completed, the period during which the abnormality can be detected becomes longer, and the security can be further improved.

In the illustrated setting confirmation process, a security signal is transmitted when the setting display condition is satisfied, but even if the setting display condition is not satisfied, even if the setting confirmation operation (operation of the setting key 971) is detected, the security signal is transmitted. good.

After that, the set value is displayed (step S8064). Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 reads the current set value from the main control RAM 1312 and generates data for displaying on the setting display 974.

If the setting display condition is not satisfied, the condition is checked until the setting display condition is satisfied, but it may not be possible to get out of the loop for a long time. The confirmation process may be completed. For example, if it is determined that the set value is not displayed because the special symbol variation display is in progress, and then the special symbol variation display ends within a predetermined time, the setting display condition is satisfied when the special symbol variation display ends. Then, the set value is displayed. If the setting conditions are not satisfied, the setting confirmation process may be terminated immediately without repeating the confirmation of the setting conditions.

At this time, the fact that the set value is not being displayed may be included in the special symbol variation display start condition. In this way, the new special symbol variation display is not started while the set value is being displayed, and the new special symbol variation display is started after the set value is hidden.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the set value can be confirmed at a predetermined timing, so that the set value can be confirmed without interfering with other displays. In particular, when the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in combination, the set value is displayed with priority during the setting confirmation, so that the base value is calculated but the base value is not displayed. In a gaming state where many prize balls are paid out in a short period of time, it may be desired to check the change in the base value. Therefore, the set value can be displayed without interfering with the real-time display of the base value.

[12-12. Output of security signal associated with setting change and setting confirmation]
FIG. 157 is a timing diagram of a security signal output when the setting is changed and the setting is confirmed.

As described above, a security signal is output at the time of setting change mode and setting confirmation (S61 in FIG. 154 and S8063 in FIG. 156).

In the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (A), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode. The predetermined time (T seconds) at which the security signal is output may be longer than or equal to the time during which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of the setting change mode but for a period from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

Further, in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 157 (B), a security signal may be output for a predetermined time (T seconds) at the timing of the RAM clear processing executed in association with the setting change mode.

At the time of setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157 (C), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation. The predetermined time (T seconds) at which the security signal is output may be longer than or equal to the time during which the hall computer can recognize the security signal, and may be 1 second or less or several tens of seconds.

Further, the security signal may be output not for a predetermined time from the start of the setting confirmation but for a period from the start to the end of the setting confirmation (the period during which the setting value is displayed).

When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error, as shown in FIG. 157 (D), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 for a predetermined time (T seconds) from the detection of the error. When the pachinko machine 1 detects an error during the setting confirmation, as shown in FIG. 157 (E), a security signal is output for a predetermined time from the detection of the error. That is, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection are continuously output over a predetermined time (T seconds) (a predetermined time from the error detection). Even if an error is detected during the setting confirmation, it is not necessary to extend the output time of the security signal. That is, even if an error is detected during the output of the security signal, the security signal due to the error detection is not output and is absorbed by the security signal being output.

Since the pachinko machine 1 does not detect an error during the setting change mode, the security signal caused by the setting confirmation and the security signal caused by the error detection do not overlap. That is, in the setting change mode, the output time of the security signal is not extended even if an error occurs, but the output time of the security signal is extended if an error occurs during the setting confirmation.

[12-13. Another example of setting confirmation processing]
Hereinafter, another example of the setting confirmation process will be described. In the above description, an example in which the setting confirmation processing is performed in the timer interrupt processing in the peripheral control unit steady processing has been mainly described, but in the following, the setting confirmation processing is performed in the initialization processing when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. An example will be described.

Specifically, for example, when the setting key is turned on when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the process proceeds to the setting confirmation process. The details of the process will be described below. The timer interrupt process executed by the peripheral control MPU in this chapter is assumed to be the timer interrupt process in FIG. 23 (that is, the timer interrupt process that does not include the setting confirmation process in step S802).

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing another example of the initialization process. Differences from FIG. 154 will be described. When the main control MPU 1311 determines in step S18 that the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (step S18: No), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is operated and its output is on (step). S29).

When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is on (step S29: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to the setting confirmation process in step S807, and then proceeds to step S20. The setting confirmation process in step S807 will be described later. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S29: No), the main control MPU 1311 proceeds to step S20.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing another example of the setting confirmation process (setting confirmation process in step S807). Differences from FIG. 156 will be described. The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting display condition is satisfied without performing the process of step S8061 (step S8062). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the set display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 outputs a security signal (step S8063) and displays the set value (step S8064). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the setting display condition is not satisfied (step S8062: No), the process of step S8062 is executed again.

Following the process of step S8064, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether the setting key 971 is being operated and its output is off (step S8071). When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is ON (step S8071: No), for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed, the determination of step S8071 is executed again. When the main control MPU 1311 determines that the output of the setting key 971 is off (step S8071: Yes), the main control MPU 1311 hides the set value (step S8075) and ends the setting confirmation process. That is, when the setting key 971 is turned on and the power is turned on without pressing the RAM clear button, the setting confirmation state is entered.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the change of the special symbol, the number of reserved storages managed by the main control board 1310, the remaining fluctuation time of the special symbol, and the like are stored as they are. After that, if the setting confirmation process is performed the next time the power is turned on (when the power is turned on with the setting key 971 turned on), after the setting confirmation process is completed (setting without turning off the power). After returning the key 971 to the initial position), the special symbol change resumes. At this time, for example, the effect (effect using a display device, effect using a lamp, sound effect using a speaker, effect using a movable body, etc.) executed together with the special symbol change is the special symbol. Nothing will happen after the fluctuation resumes.

Further, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, the special symbol change is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed. You may resume the production that was being performed with. For example, the interrupted production using the display device, the lamp, and the speaker is resumed. Further, regarding the effect using the movable body, for example, it is stipulated that the movable body is operated in the effect pattern of the effect after the movable body is returned to the initial position after restarting the special symbol variation or when the power is turned on. If so, the movable body is operated according to the effect pattern.

In other words, if the movable body shifts to the setting confirmation state when it is not in the initial position, it returns to the initial position once when the power is turned on or when the setting confirmation process is completed, and then based on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol fluctuation. If the determined effect includes an effect of moving (moving) the movable body, the movable body may be moved (moved). If the setting confirmation state is entered while the movable body is operating (moving), the operation pattern of the operation (moving) may not be executed, or the movable body is once returned to the initial position. The movable body may be operated as long as it is a pattern that can be operated even from the body.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, the special symbol change is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed. Of the effects that were performed together with, the effect using the display device, the effect using the lamp, and the sound effect using the speaker were restarted, and the movable body was moved to the initial position after the resumption of the special symbol variation or when the power was turned on. It is not necessary to return and produce using a movable body.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, the main liquid crystal display device is used when the special symbol change is resumed after the setting confirmation process is completed. The variation of the decorative symbol displayed on the 1600 may be resumed (the production originally planned to be performed is resumed), or the variation of the decorative symbol is until the symbol is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the symbol is confirmed). ) The decorative symbol may be made transparent to perform high-speed fluctuation, or the decorative symbol may be hidden until the symbol is confirmed (or until the shaking fluctuation immediately before the symbol is confirmed). Further, at the time of determining the symbol, for example, a combination of decorative symbols scheduled before the power is turned off is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, in this case, at the end of the special symbol change after resumption, a combination of predetermined decorative symbols, a combination of decorative symbols displayed at the time of initial power-on, or a special decorative symbol that is not displayed at the time of normal special symbol change. The combination (eg, "XXX", etc.) may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off during the special symbol change, the setting confirmation process is performed when the power is turned on next time, and the setting confirmation process is completed and the normal state is restored, the setting key 971 is in the off state. The same initial operation as when the power is turned on (that is, when the power is normally turned on) (for example, an operation such as confirming a predetermined operation of the movable body or a predetermined light emission of the LED) may be performed. (The above-mentioned effect or the like may be restarted after performing this initial operation).

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the look-ahead effect is being performed during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is completed. When the symbol change is restarted, the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect for the special symbol change held immediately before the power is turned off are not executed (specifically, for example, it is performed before the power is turned off. A special zone that was displayed during the fluctuation of the special symbol that was being displayed (for example, a special stage that shows the player that the expectation of a big hit is high across multiple fluctuations, from rival horse production to horse racing production, which will be described later. A developing zone (a special zone in which the horse racing production has a higher expectation (for example, a special zone in which the expectation is relatively higher than the dialogue production described later)). The display effect in the zone is erased, or if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, the display effect is returned to normal white). However, the look-ahead effect may be executed for the special symbol change corresponding to the winning after the setting confirmation process is completed.

In addition, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off while the look-ahead effect is being performed during the special symbol change and the setting confirmation process is performed at the next power-on, for example, the special after the setting confirmation process is completed. When the symbol change resumes, the look-ahead effect during the special symbol change is canceled (specifically, for example, the special zone displayed during the special symbol change that was performed before the power was turned off. The standby display and the display effect in the special zone are erased, and if the mode of the hold display is blue instead of normal white, for example, it is returned to normal white), but the following The look-ahead effect may be restarted from the special symbol change (the erased display may be restored, or if the effect pattern is to promote the look-ahead effect at the start of the change, it may be restored in the display mode after the promotion. May be good). In this case, the look-ahead effect executed from the next special symbol change is restarted, for example, assuming that the look-ahead effect during the special symbol change is not stopped. That is, before turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the look-ahead effect that was scheduled to be executed after the next special symbol change is executed. Further, a new look-ahead effect pattern may be set, and the effect of the new look-ahead pattern may be executed from the next special symbol variation.

[12-14. Another example of setting suggestion effect]
Hereinafter, an example of processing in which the execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted will be described. In the following description, it is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of settings 1 to 6 in the normal state are 1/240, 1/230, 1/220, 1/210, 1/200, and 1/190, respectively. It is assumed that the jackpot probabilities of settings 1 to 6 at the time are 1/48, 1/46, 1/44, 1/42, 1/40, and 1/38, respectively. In addition, it is assumed that the probability variation rate at the time of winning a big hit is 50%.

[12-14-1. Fluctuation pattern table]
FIG. 160 is another example of the variation pattern table. The variation pattern table is stored in, for example, the ROM 1313 of the main control board 1310. In the explanation of FIG. 142 and the like, an example in which a variation pattern table exists for each winning type of the special lottery result has been described, but in the example of FIG. 160, the variation pattern for each winning type of the special lottery result is described in one variation pattern table. Is defined. Further, in the example of FIG. 160, it is assumed that a common fluctuation pattern table is used in all the settings.

The fluctuation pattern table of FIG. 160 shows the correspondence between the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the fluctuation pattern, the outline of the production of the fluctuation pattern, and the selection rate. As described above, in the example of FIG. 160, information on the fluctuation pattern of each special lottery result is stored in one fluctuation pattern table. Therefore, the main control MPU 1311 selects the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the winning type corresponding to the winning according to the selection rate indicated by the fluctuation pattern table. As in the example of FIG. 144, the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern may be defined in the fluctuation pattern table.

In addition, the movie reach described in the summary column has a high rate of being selected when the result of the special lottery is a big hit, and a very low rate of being selected when the result of the special lottery is out of order. Is. In other words, the expectation of a big hit of fluctuations in which movie reach is executed is high. Further, when a movie reach occurs, a predetermined movie is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

In addition, the "+1 symbol" when the winning type is "missing" described in the summary column means that the decorative symbol that has changed to the end after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state is in the reach state. Indicates that the vehicle will stop after passing one decorative pattern. Specifically, for example, after the decorative symbol "7" reaches the reach state, the decorative symbol that has been fluctuating until the end stops at "8". When the winning type is "big hit", "+1 symbol" means that after the decorative symbol has stopped in the reach state, the decorative symbol that has fluctuated to the end has passed one decorative symbol in the reach state and temporarily stopped. After pretending to be like this, the decorative symbol stops as the same symbol as the decorative symbol in the reach state. Specifically, for example, after reaching the reach state with the decorative symbol "7", the decorative symbol that has fluctuated until the end appears to have stopped temporarily at "8", and then the decorative symbol stops at "7". And notify the big hit.

In the summary column in the example of FIG. 161, "+1 symbol" is selected only when the winning type is "big hit (non-probable change)", but in the case of "big hit (probable change)". Only may be selected, or may be selected in the case of "big hit (non-probable change)" and "big hit (probable change)". Further, "+1 symbol" may be selected only when the winning type is "missing".

Further, "+ pseudo 1" and "+ pseudo 2" described in the summary column indicate that two pseudo continuous effects and three pseudo continuous effects are executed, respectively. The pseudo continuous effect is an effect in which the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the change of the decorative symbol is executed a plurality of times during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. .. "Ending the variation of the decorative symbol" means, for example, a mode in which a part or all of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a mode in which the player is made to recognize that the variation of the decorative symbol is once completed, and a mode of the decorative symbol. A mode in which a pseudo-ream symbol (a symbol in which a pseudo-ream is confirmed if this symbol is stopped) is partially stopped. A pseudo-continuous effect in which the operation is performed N times (N is a natural number of 1 or more) is called an N-series pseudo-continuous effect, and the M-th variation of the decorative symbol (M is 1 or more N) in the N-series pseudo-continuous effect. The following natural numbers) are called the M-th pseudo continuous production. In addition, while suggesting to the player that the operation may be executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display, the operation is actually executed again. A production that does not occur is called a "pseudo-gase production". Further, hereinafter, the pseudo continuous production is also simply referred to as a "pseudo continuous production".

Pseudo-continuous production occurs or continues, that is, the operation of changing the decorative symbol and ending the fluctuation of the decorative symbol is executed again during one change of the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display. Peripheral control MPU may stop the pseudo-continuous symbol at at least one of the left decorative symbol, the intermediate decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol when it is confirmed that the pattern is to be performed. In the following example, the peripheral control MPU stops a character such as "continue!" As a pseudo-continuous symbol on the intermediate decorative symbol. In addition, for example, a combination of specific decorative symbols (for example, the left decorative symbol, the middle decorative symbol, and the right decorative symbol are all odd or even numbers and reach does not occur) may be used as a pseudo-continuous symbol. It should be noted that the pseudo-gase effect can be executed, for example, when the outline of the effect is "normal variation" or the like. Further, for example, even in the fluctuation pattern in which "+ pseudo 1" is executed, a pseudo-gase effect suggesting the occurrence of the third pseudo-ream in "+ pseudo 2" may be executed.

[12-14-2. Last reserved color table]
FIG. 161 is an example of the final reserved color table. The final reserved color table is stored in, for example, the peripheral main control ROM. The final hold color table is, for example, the display color of the hold display at the end of the change for each change pattern (winning type of special lottery result, identifier of change pattern, and outline of production of the change pattern) (hereinafter, final hold color). (Also called) selectivity and keeps.

The main liquid crystal display device 1600 includes a hold display area indicating the number of pending first special random numbers and second special random numbers. In the start opening winning process in step S116 of FIG. 142, a hold number designation command for designating the hold numbers of the first special random number and the second special random number is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU displays the hold number indicated by the hold number designation command in the hold display area.

Specifically, when a game ball wins a prize (starting condition is satisfied) in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the number of holds (number of hold memories) specified by the hold number designation command increases. , Adds one hold display to the hold display area and displays it. On the other hand, when the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol) based on the hold display is started (the start condition is satisfied), the number of holds (the number of hold memories) specified by the hold number specification command is reduced. , Delete the hold display in the hold display area.

In addition, there may be a plurality of display modes in the hold display. For example, as the plurality of display modes, there are display modes of hold display in a plurality of colors (white, blue, green, red, rainbow). Hereinafter, the color of the hold display is white, blue, green, red, and rainbow in that order, and the jackpot expectation of the special lottery result corresponding to the hold display is high. In particular, in the example of FIG. 161 the rainbow-colored hold display is selected only when the result of the special lottery is a big hit.

That is, the peripheral control MPU selects the final reserved color corresponding to the selected variation pattern according to the selectivity indicated by the final reserved color table. Further, the peripheral control MPU corresponds to the hold display by changing the display mode of the hold display during the display period from displaying the hold display in the hold display area until the hold display is deleted. It is possible to execute a hold notice effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display of the special symbol).

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the hold change effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display may change during the display period of the hold display. It should be noted that the hold change effect and the hold notice effect during the display period of the hold display and before the start of the change corresponding to the hold are also referred to as a hold look-ahead effect.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a hold notice table (not shown) that defines a change timing of the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, for example, in the hold notice table, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display and the display mode (display color) of the hold display at the time of winning and at each change timing are defined for each final hold color. The start, during, and end of the special symbol change after the prize and before the special symbol change corresponding to the prize are examples of the change timing.

It is desirable that the display mode of the hold display at each change timing is a hold color having a jackpot expectation degree equal to or lower than the jackpot expectation degree of the final hold color. In addition, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation indicated by the hold display does not demote at each change timing (for example, it is desirable that the blue hold display does not change to the white hold display). It should be noted that there may be a different hold notice table for each number of hold memories at the time of winning.

It should be noted that, for example, the start of the special symbol change held before the hold display is an example of the change timing of the display mode of the hold display described above, and for example, during the special symbol change corresponding to the hold display. , The change timing of the display mode of the hold display may be provided.

The look-ahead effect including the hold look-ahead effect is executed based on the pre-determination command transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the pre-determination process performed in the start opening winning process in step S116 of FIG. 142. NS.

Hereinafter, the pre-judgment process in the start opening winning process for the first special symbol will be described. Since the same applies to the pre-judgment process in the start opening winning process for the second special symbol, only the first special symbol will be described here. In the pre-judgment process, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not it will be a big hit by comparing the pre-judgment table (not shown) with a special random number, a symbol random number, a reach random number, and a variable random number. The type of the big hit, and if the big hit is not obtained, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed is specified.

Then, the specified pre-judgment information (whether or not it is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Depending on the mode type of the game effect to be executed, the type of the acquired special random number (first special random number), and the number of reserved storages (value of the pending number counter) stored corresponding to the acquired special random number. Set the pre-judgment command. For example, in the effect pre-judgment process related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol pre-judgment command is set according to the specified pre-judgment information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first reserved memory number. ..

Then, by transmitting a pre-judgment command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the number of reserved storages stored corresponding to the starting port where the starting winning is generated, a special symbol based on the generated starting winning is obtained. Whether or not the display result of the variable display of is a big hit, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit, and if it is not a big hit, the reach effect is executed or executed as the game effect executed by the main liquid crystal display device 1600. The peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the preliminary determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be performed before starting the variable display according to the start winning prize.

FIG. 162 shows the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variable pattern of setting 1 when the variable pattern is determined by the variable pattern table of FIG. 160 and the final reserved color is determined by the final reserved color table of FIG. 161. This is an example of a table showing. FIG. 163 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each variation pattern of setting 3 in the same case. FIG. 164 is an example of a table showing the appearance rate of each final reserved color for each fluctuation pattern of setting 5 in the same case. According to FIGS. 162 to 164, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance rate of the display mode of the hold display of the higher jackpot expectation degree. In addition, the higher the jackpot expectation of each color, the higher the expectation. The appearance rate and the degree of expectation are calculated based on the jackpot probability of each setting described above, and for the final reserved color table, the final reserved color table of FIG. 161 is used in all the settings. It is supposed to be.

The peripheral control ROM may hold a final reserved color table that is different for each setting. In this case, for example, in the same display mode of the hold display, the selection rate of the final hold color table of the last hold color is set so that the higher the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. As a result, for example, when a big hit is won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red hold display, the degree of expectation for a higher setting is further increased, so that the player can obtain an uplifting feeling.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white that is most often selected, for the same hold display display mode, the final hold color of the final hold color table is set so that the lower the setting, the higher the jackpot expectation. The selectivity may be set (specifically, for example, the jackpot expectation when the mode of the hold display is red is 50% in the setting 1 which is the low setting and 30 in the setting 6 which is the high setting. Set to%). As a result, for example, even if the jackpot is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red hold display, the expectation for the high setting is high, so that the player's disappointment is suppressed and the game is continued. Can be promoted.

Further, for example, in the display mode of the hold display other than white that is most often selected, for the same hold display display mode, the final hold color of the final hold color table so that the jackpot expectation is substantially the same in all settings. The selection rate of may be set. As a result, for example, it becomes difficult to estimate the setting from the combination of the final hold color and the special lottery result, and the player can concentrate only on the expectation for the special lottery result from the display mode of the hold display. Further, for example, when the big hit is not won in the special symbol variation corresponding to the red display mode, it is possible to prevent the situation that the possibility of the low setting becomes high.

[12-14-3. Notice production table]
FIG. 165 is an example of a notice effect table. The notice effect table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The advance notice effect table holds, for example, the selection rate of the advance notice effect for each change pattern (specified by the winning type of the special lottery result, the identifier of the change pattern, and the outline of the effect of the change pattern).

In the example of FIG. 165, the advance notice production includes a dialogue production, a weather change production, and a rival horse production. The dialogue effect is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined character is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the fluctuation and the dialogue is spoken. The weather change effect is, for example, an effect in which the weather in the background of the decorative pattern displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes in the fluctuation. The rival horse production is a production in which a rival horse of a horse raised by the main character appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 in the fluctuation.

It is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect using the advance notice effect, and the advance notice effect table stores the selection rate of each advance notice effect according to whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. In the example of FIG. 165, “without set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is not executed, and “with set” indicates that the setting suggestion effect is executed. The peripheral control MPU determines the advance notice effect to be executed based on the fluctuation pattern and the selection rate of the advance notice effect table.

It is desirable that the selection rate without the setting suggestion effect is sufficiently higher than the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect in each advance notice effect in each variation pattern of the notice effect table. If the selection rate with the setting suggestion effect is high, the setting suggestion effect frequently occurs. This is because if the frequency of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting is low in this state, the player is likely to stop the game in a short time. That is, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 which is set to a low setting is remarkably lowered, which may impose an excessive burden on the hall. On the contrary, for example, when the frequency of setting suggestion effects suggesting a high setting is high, the number of players who presume that the setting of the other pachinko machine 1 in the hall is low increases, and the other pachinko machine 1 operates. There is a risk that the rate will drop and the hall will be overloaded.

The selection rate of the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern table is determined so that the jackpot expectation increases as the number of pseudo-reams increases. For example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect does not change substantially depending on the number of pseudo-reams. , The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table is determined. That is, for example, for fluctuation patterns whose outlines are "SP reach", "SP reach + pseudo 1", and "SP reach + pseudo 2", the pseudo setting suggestion effect is such that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is substantially the same. The selection rate of whether or not to execute is determined. As a result, although the jackpot expectation is low for the fluctuation pattern with a small number of pseudo-reams, the occurrence rate of the setting suggestion effect is not low even when compared with the fluctuation pattern with a large number of pseudo-reams. You can also be interested in fluctuations in small fluctuation patterns.

Further, the selection rate of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases as the number of pseudo-reams increases. The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is high. It should be noted that if the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-reams decreases, the above-mentioned problems may occur. Therefore, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is increased as the number of pseudo-reams decreases. However, it is desirable to set the values to be almost the same (specifically, for example, 15/256 when the variation pattern 5 is selected at the time of deviation, and 15/256 when the variation pattern 6 is selected, and the dialogue effect set when the variation pattern 6 is selected. Set as 16/256).

In addition, a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a big hit (or a production in which the expectation of a big hit is not a fluctuation pattern with a high expectation of a big hit, but the expectation of the appearance is relatively high (for example, a production in which the expectation of a big hit is equal to or higher than a predetermined value). ), The selection rate of whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect in the advance notice effect table may be determined so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes higher. Specifically, for example, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect increases in the order of "normal fluctuation", fluctuation including "normal reach", fluctuation including "SP reach", and fluctuation including "movie reach". The selection rate of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the advance notice effect table may be determined.

Further, in the example of FIG. 165, there is a possibility that a setting suggestion effect may occur in all the advance notice effects (line effect, weather change effect, and rival horse effect). May exist.

In addition, if the outline of the fluctuation pattern is the same, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect is higher when the special lottery result is a big hit without a probability change than when the special lottery result is a big hit with a probability change. The selection rate of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed in the advance notice effect table may be determined. As a result, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect becomes high when the jackpot without probability change is won, and the player's disappointment for not being given the probability change can be reduced. In the above example, the three types of advance notice productions of dialogue production, weather change production, and rival horse production have been described, but it goes without saying that they are not limited to the three types.

[12-14-4. Dialogue production]
The details of the dialogue production among the preliminary productions will be described below. When the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue effect without the setting suggestion effect as the advance notice effect, for example, after a predetermined time elapses (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of the fluctuation, the character A appears on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. , "What day is it today?" Is displayed as the line of character A. Then, for example, the peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the dialogue display of the character A, and "Come on ..." as the dialogue of the character B. Is displayed. In addition, for example, the dialogues of the characters A and B may indicate the degree of expectation of a big hit of the fluctuation.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU selects a dialogue effect with a setting suggestion effect as the advance notice effect, the peripheral control MPU selects the dialogue of the character B (the dialogue suggesting the setting) from the dialogue effect table described later. The peripheral control MPU is attached to the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation (for example, 2 seconds later, that is, the same timing as the timing at which the character A appears in the case where the above-mentioned setting suggestion effect is not provided). Character A is made to appear, and "How many days is it today?" Is displayed as the line of character A. For example, the peripheral control MPU causes the character B to appear on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) from the dialogue display of the character A, and displays the dialogue of the selected character B. The dialogue of the character A may be a dialogue that directly expresses a setting value such as "Do you know the setting of this platform today?".

FIG. 166 is an example of a dialogue production table. The dialogue effect table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM. The dialogue production table holds the production type of the dialogue production and the selection rate of the dialogue content of the character B for each setting. The production type includes "a pattern that is halfway together" and "a pattern that suddenly branches", and there are "Kamone-type" and "determined-type" lines for each of the two patterns. ..

Each line belonging to the "halfway together pattern" contains the same line halfway, and then branches into different lines. In the example of FIG. 166, all the lines belonging to the "halfway together pattern" start with "Come on ..." and then branch to different lines. On the other hand, the lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern" branch to different lines from the beginning. It is desirable that the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "halfway together pattern" is higher than the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "suddenly branching pattern". This is to raise expectations.

The lines that belong to "Kamone-kei" are lines that suggest the current setting but do not definitively announce the setting. For example, "But I feel like it was an even-numbered day ..." is a line of "Kamone-kei" that suggests an even-numbered setting. "But I feel like it was an even day ..." is a "maybe" type of dialogue, so the selection rate is determined so that it may appear even with an odd number setting. However, the selection rate of the line in the odd number setting shall be sufficiently lower than the selection rate of the line in the even number setting. Similarly, for other "Kamone-kei" lines, the selection rate of the line in the setting suggested by the line shall be sufficiently higher than the selection rate of the line in the other settings.

On the other hand, the dialogue belonging to the "deterministic system" is a dialogue that deterministically announces the setting. For example, "Oh! I remembered! It's an even day!" Is a "confirmed" line that definitively announces the even setting. Therefore, the selection rate of the dialogue in the odd number setting is 0, and the selection rate exceeds 0 only in the even number setting.

It is desirable that the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "Kamone system" is higher than the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "determined system". If the selection rate of the lines belonging to the "determined system" is high, there is a good possibility that the player will be definitively notified of the high setting in a short time after the start of the game. This is because there is a certain number of players who presume that the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is not good, which may reduce the operation of other game machines.

In addition, in the dialogue production when executing a specific reach production such as SP reach or movie reach, or in the dialogue production when performing a pseudo-ream, the dialogue that suggests the setting of character B is written in red characters (in the jackpot expectation suggestion production, etc.). The dialogue of the normal production may be displayed in white characters). This makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the dialogue of the expectation suggestion effect and the dialogue of the setting suggestion effect, so that the two types of effects (setting suggestion effect and expectation suggestion effect) coexist without making the player feel unnatural. Can be made to. The expectation suggestion effect is an effect indicating that the jackpot expectation degree in the special symbol fluctuation is a predetermined value. Includes a look-ahead effect that suggests expectations for a big hit across fluctuations in.

The peripheral control MPU may determine the setting suggestion effect by a lottery table similar to the dialogue effect table, although the weather change effect and the rival horse effect are not shown. For example, in the setting suggestion effect in the weather change effect, a thundercloud is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and a number such as "246?" In the setting suggestion production in the rival horse production, the combined horse production by the horse raised by the main character and the rival horse is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, for example, a number such as "135?" Is displayed on the number of the rival horse. (Producing a "Kamone system" that suggests an even number setting).

In the above example, "How many days is it today?" Is displayed as the line of character A in the dialogue production, but in addition to this line, character A is "How many points did you test last week?" Character B is one, such as "66 points! (" Definite system "where setting 6 is confirmed)" and "I feel like it was 55 points ... (" Maybe system "which suggests setting 5)". A plurality of variations may be provided for the production (for example, dialogue production). In that case, it is preferable that the B effect (for example, the effect of listening to the test score) is more credible to the setting suggestion than the A effect (for example, the effect of listening to the date). Specifically, for example, when the A production says "I feel like it was a day with a 6 ... (Maybe system)", the expectation level of setting 6 is only 30%, but in the B production, " The expectation level, which is the setting 6 when it is said that "I feel like I got 66 points ... (Maybe system)", should be set to 50%.

[12-14-5. Another example of the notice production table]
FIG. 167 is another example of the notice effect table. In the example of FIG. 167, the advance notice effect table 173 holds the selection rate of the advance notice effect for each variation pattern. Unlike the example of FIG. 165, the notice effect table of FIG. 167 does not hold information about whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed. That is, the peripheral control MPU selects only the type of the advance notice effect according to the selection rate corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the advance notice effect table of FIG. 167.

Then, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on the fluctuation pattern and the type of the selected advance notice effect. FIG. 168 (A) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outline of the variation pattern is “normal variation” and “line effect” is selected as the notice effect. be. FIG. 168 (B) is an example of a setting suggestion effect table showing the distribution of whether or not the setting suggestion effect is executed when the outline of the fluctuation pattern is “normal reach + 1 symbol” and “line effect” is selected as the advance notice effect. Is. A setting suggestion effect table for all combinations of the variation pattern and the advance notice effect as shown in FIG. 168 is stored in the peripheral control ROM in advance.

In the above example, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect after determining the content of the advance notice effect, but determines the content of the advance notice effect after determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect. You may. By using such a method, although the amount of data is larger than that of the table as shown in FIG. 165, the appearance rate and reliability of the effect can be set in detail. Further, the table shown in FIG. 165 and the processing shown in this alternative example may be combined.

[12-14-6. Specific example of setting suggestion effect]
FIG. 169 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of the setting suggestion effect. The effect that progresses in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (B), and (C) is a setting suggestion when "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is selected as the line of character B in the line effect. It is an outline of the production.

In FIG. 169 (A), the special symbol variation starts. In FIG. 169 (B), after the start of the special symbol change, the character B's line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In FIG. 169 (C), the dialogue is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 until the end of the special symbol variation.

The production that progresses in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (D), and (E) is an outline of the setting suggestion production when "It's a day with 6!" Is selected as the dialogue of character B in the dialogue production. be. In the effect of proceeding in the order of FIGS. 169 (A), (D), and (E), the setting suggestion effect starts from the start of the special symbol change, and the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect is during the end of the special symbol change. has been changed. Specifically, in FIG. 169 (D), after the start of the special symbol change, the character B's line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In FIG. 169 (E), at the end of the special symbol change, the character B's line "It's a day with a 6!" Is displayed. That is, the setting suggested by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Specifically, for example, for each line (finally displayed line) in the line production table, one or more scenarios indicating the timing of line change and the line at each timing, and the selection rate of each scenario are set. It may be defined for each. The peripheral control MPU displays the dialogue at the timing of the dialogue change according to the selected scenario.

In this case, it is desirable that the dialogue production table does not hold a scenario in which the suggested setting may be demoted. Specifically, for example, the dialogue production table may not hold a scenario in which the dialogue "It's an even day!" Is displayed after the dialogue "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!". desirable.

Further, in the example of FIG. 169, only the setting suggestion effect is performed in the special symbol variation, but other effects (for example, the effect suggesting the jackpot expectation degree) may be executed in parallel. Although the example in which the dialogue of the character B is promoted at the end of the special symbol change is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the character B may be promoted before the end of the special symbol change. In addition, character A appears before the dialogue of character B, and character A talks to character B, but it is omitted in the drawing.

FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an outline of a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect. In FIG. 170 (A), the game ball B has won a prize at the first starting port 2002 during the special symbol change without holding the special symbol change. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (B), immediately after the game ball B wins the first starting port 2002, the character B's line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Will be done. In this case, since the remaining time of the special symbol that has already changed is indefinite, the character B may be displayed immediately without displaying the character A, or the character B may be displayed after a predetermined time has passed from the winning. Alternatively, the character A may be displayed and then the character B may be displayed. Further, in FIG. 170 (B), the number of holds indicated by the display in the hold display area is increased by one.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (C), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation ends. In addition, the character B's line "It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!" Is still displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (D), the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is started. At the same time as the start of the special symbol change, the dialogue of character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to "It's a day with 5 or 6!". That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

Subsequently, in FIG. 170 (E), all the decorative symbols are stopped, and the special symbol variation corresponding to the winning is completed. At the end of the special symbol change corresponding to the prize, the line of character B displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 changes to "It's a day with 6!". That is, the setting indicated by the dialogue of character B has been promoted.

For example, the peripheral control ROM holds a dialogue look-ahead effect table (not shown) that defines the dialogue of the character B and the change timing of the dialogue. Specifically, for example, the dialogue look-ahead effect table defines the change timing of the dialogue of the character B and the dialogue of the character B at the time of winning and at each change timing. The start, during, and end of the special symbol change after the prize and before the special symbol change corresponding to the prize are examples of the change timing. It is desirable that the settings suggested by the dialogue are not demoted at each change timing. In addition, there may be a different dialogue look-ahead effect table for each number of reserved memories at the time of winning. When the peripheral control MPU determines to execute the look-ahead effect based on the pre-determination command, the peripheral control MPU executes the line-ahead effect by referring to the line-ahead effect table at a predetermined ratio, for example. Also, in the case of promotion, in Fig. 170, it is promoted step by step ("It's a day with 4 or 5 or 6!", "It's a day with 5 or 6!", "It's a day with 6". (Promotion in the order of! ”) May be promoted in multiple stages at once. Specifically, for example, in FIG. 170, the dialogue of (E) may be displayed without displaying the dialogue of (D).

The setting suggestion effect may be executed under a specific situation other than the above. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the condition of the hold sequence is satisfied. The hold ream means that the next big hit is realized by a special random number held by the end of the big hit game. In this case, for example, the setting suggestion effect is executed after the hold is performed and before the end of the jackpot game. Further, for example, when a specific variation pattern is continuous a predetermined number of times, a setting suggestion effect may be executed in the special symbol variation at the predetermined number of times.

[12-15. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects]
Hereinafter, restrictions on the setting suggestion effect under specific conditions will be described.

[12-15-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after a special state]
First, the limitation of the setting suggestion effect after the special state will be described. Below, both the setting confirmation mode and the error occurrence are examples of special states. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for displaying the set value, which starts when it is determined in the setting confirmation process that the setting display condition is satisfied (step S8062: Yes).

FIG. 171 (A) is an example of the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode. FIG. 171 (B) is an example of an error-occurring effect restriction table. The effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode and the effect restriction table when an error occurs are stored in, for example, the peripheral control ROM.

[12-15-1-1. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects after setting confirmation mode]
First, the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode shows the variation when the setting confirmation mode is started while the variation determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as the setting suggestion variation in this chapter) is being executed or held. A restriction flag indicating whether or not to restrict the setting suggestion effect is stored.

In the setting confirmation mode, the effect restriction table is set in the setting confirmation mode before the start of the setting suggestion effect (that is, when the effect related to the setting suggestion is not executed (displayed) even though it is determined to perform the setting suggestion effect). Record 1701 that stores the restriction flag when is started, and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion variation (that is, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed and the effect related to the setting suggestion is executed (displayed)). Includes record 1702, which stores the limit flag when the setting confirmation mode is started.

When the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 159 is performed, the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and when the setting confirmation process shown in FIG. 156 is performed, the game proceeds even during the setting confirmation mode. .. Therefore, the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode stores the column 1703 for storing the restriction flag when the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, and the restriction flag when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode. Includes column 1704 and.

Further, if the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, there is a possibility that a new setting suggestion change is suspended by winning a prize in the starting port during the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the column 1704 includes a column 1705 that stores a restriction flag in a new setting suggestion variation corresponding to a winning of a starting port in the setting confirmation mode. It should be noted that each restriction flag in the effect restriction table in the setting confirmation mode is set by the operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 (even if the operation medium cannot be operated by the player, the player can operate the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing or in a hall or the like. It can be set by an operation medium that can be operated). When a game ball enters the starting port during the setting confirmation mode, the lottery information may not be acquired and the prize ball may not be acquired for the entry. However, even in such a case, the special symbol change that has already been held is executed during the setting confirmation mode or after the setting change mode ends.

When the game is stopped at the start of the setting confirmation mode, one value of the fields 1706 and 1707 is 1 and the other value is 0, the values of the fields 1708 to 1711 are 0, and the values of the fields 1712 and 1713 are set. One value is 1 and the other value is 0, and the values of fields 1714 to 1717 are 0.

Further, when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the values of the fields 1706 and 1707 are 0, one of the fields 1708 and 1709 is 1 and the other value is 0, and the field 1710. And one of the fields 1711 is 1 and the other is 0, the values of fields 1712 and 1713 are 0, one of the fields 1714 and 1715 is 1 and the other is 0. One value of field 1716 or field 1717 is 1 and the other value is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect restriction pattern according to the restriction flags in each state defined in the setting confirmation mode start effect restriction table and the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) When the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(1-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1706 is 1 and the value of the field 1707 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and there is a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. Can be given.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of field 1706 is 0 and the value of field 1707 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a voice or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way, and the setting confirmation mode is in progress. However, it is possible to provide the player with the expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode.

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1708 is 1 and the value of the field 1709 is 0). Since the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not slowed down. When voices and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these voices and images are given priority over the voices and images in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. .. In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects are provided. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode may be in progress may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by hiding it.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1708 is 0 and the value of field 1709 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the set value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the set value is 1, a high setting such as "maybe a high setting?" Is set. (When a suggestion effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(2') When the setting confirmation mode starts before the start of the setting confirmation effect and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, a new setting suggestion variation corresponding to the winning of the starting port in the setting confirmation mode About the setting suggestion production of.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1710 is 1 and the value of the field 1711 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1710 is 0 and the value of field 1711 is 1). For example, if Hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because he is skeptical about the set value, the set value may be changed after that. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, the setting suggestion effect is changed to a different setting while the even number setting is confirmed. Since there is a possibility that the odd number setting will be confirmed later in the setting suggestion effect), a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a situation.

It is desirable that the image, sound, light, and the like indicating that the setting is confirmed as described above appear regardless of the value of the field described above. In addition, since it is assumed that a new prize will be valid even when the game is stopped after the transition to the setting confirmation state, in that case, the same process as the process for advancing the game may be performed.

(3) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect is finished). And when the game stops when the setting confirmation mode starts.

(3-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 1 and the value of the field 1713 is 0). If the set suggestion effect that has already been started is canceled, the player may feel distrust that the setting may have been changed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1712 is 0 and the value of the field 1713 is 1). For example, in the setting confirmation mode, when a voice or an image indicating that the setting is being confirmed is output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, the setting suggestion effect is not executed in this way, and the setting confirmation mode is in progress. However, it is possible to provide the player with the expectation that the setting may have been changed to a high setting.

(4) The setting confirmation mode starts during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the setting suggestion effect is started (when the setting suggestion effect is displayed and after the setting suggestion effect is displayed and the display of the setting suggestion effect is finished). And, about the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode.

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1714 is 1 and the value of the field 1715 is 0). Since the game progresses even in the setting confirmation mode, the operation is not slowed down. When voices and images indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress are output to the various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these voices and images are given priority over the voices and images in the setting suggestion effect. Output. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that the setting confirmation mode is in progress is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. (Display so that the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the image indicating the setting confirmation mode do not overlap, or the image related to the setting suggestion effect and the character indicating the setting confirmation mode such as "in the setting confirmation mode" do not overlap. ). It should be noted that this display and the like can be processed in the same manner even when an error occurs, which will be described later. The term "non-overlapping" as used herein means that the appearance from the player does not overlap, not the image data actually set in the RAM.

In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects are provided. An image indicating that the setting confirmation mode may be in progress may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 by hiding it.

(4-2) The setting suggestion effect is canceled (the value of the field 1714 is 0 and the value of the field 1715 is 1). For example, when the player confirms the set value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the set value is 1, a high setting such as "maybe a high setting?" Is set. (When a suggestion effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

(4') When the setting confirmation mode starts while the setting suggestion is fluctuating and the setting suggestion effect is started, and the game progresses even during the setting confirmation mode, a new game corresponding to the winning of the starting port in the setting confirmation mode is supported. About the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion fluctuation.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1716 is 1 and the value of the field 1717 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1716 is 0 and the value of field 1717 is 1). For example, if Hall shifts to the setting confirmation mode because he is skeptical about the set value, the set value may be changed after that. When the setting suggestion effect is executed in such a case, the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, the setting suggestion effect is changed to a different setting while the even number setting is confirmed. Since the odd-numbered setting is displayed in the later setting suggestion effect), a trouble may occur between the hall and the player. By not executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of such a situation.

In addition, when the game progresses also in the setting confirmation mode, when the setting confirmation mode straddles a plurality of fluctuations, for example, the peripheral control MPU is set after the setting confirmation mode is started, for example, based on the notification from the main control MPU 1311. At the time of the first symbol confirmation or the start of the next fluctuation, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation mode is used. When it is determined that the peripheral control MPU is in the setting confirmation mode, if the newly won hold is a setting suggestion change, the peripheral control MPU performs the setting suggestion effect together with the change corresponding to the hold. By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting confirmation mode has been executed instead of the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed, and there is a sense of security that the result of the game will not be affected. Can be given.

Further, the peripheral control MPU may not execute the setting suggestion effect in this case. When the player confirms the set value, if the setting suggestion by the setting suggestion effect and the actual setting are different (for example, when the set value is 1, a high setting such as "maybe a high setting?" Is suggested. (When the effect occurs), the player may feel distrust of the gaming machine, and such a situation can be avoided by not executing the setting suggestion effect.

In this way, the effect is exhibited in both cases when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. Therefore, by allowing the hall or the like to set the effect restriction for the setting suggestion effect, the hall or the like We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of our business style.

[12-15-1-2. Restrictions on setting suggestion effects when an error occurs]
Subsequently, the effect restriction table at the time of error occurrence will be described with reference to FIG. 171 (B). When an error occurs, the effect restriction table at the time of error is the setting suggestion effect of the change when an error occurs during the execution or pending of the variation determined to execute the setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as the setting suggestion variation in this chapter). Stores a restriction flag that indicates whether or not to restrict.

In the effect limit table when an error occurs, the record 1801 that stores the limit flag when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the error occurs during the change of the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the start of the setting suggestion effect in the setting suggestion fluctuation. Includes record 1802, which stores the restriction flag in the case of.

The errors include a strong error that is notified by stopping the game and a weak error that is notified while the game is in progress. The error of detecting an illegal magnetism in the launch ball sensor 1020 and the game area 5a is an example of a strong error. The full tank error (an error indicating that the game ball stored in the foul cover unit 520 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 535) is an example of a weak error.

Therefore, the effect restriction table when an error occurs, the column 1803 that stores the restriction flag corresponding to the error notified when the game is stopped, and the column 1804 that stores the restriction flag corresponding to the error notified while the game is in progress. ,including.

Further, if the game progresses even during the error occurrence, the game ball may win a prize at the starting port during the error occurrence, so that a new setting suggestion change may be suspended. Therefore, column 1804 includes column 1805 that stores the limit flag in the new setting suggestion variation corresponding to the winning of the starting port during the error.

The restriction flag in the error-occurring effect restriction table can be operated by the player even if the operation medium is provided in the pachinko machine 1 (the operation medium that the player cannot operate), for example, at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like. It can be set depending on the operation medium).

In the error-occurring effect restriction table, one value of field 1806 and field 1807 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1808 and field 1809 is 1 and the other value is 0. One value of field 1810 and field 1811 is 1 and the other value is 0, one value of field 1812 and field 1813 is 1 and the other value is 0, and one value of field 1814 and field 1815 is 0. The value of 1 and the other is 0, and the value of one of fields 1816 and 1817 is 1 and the value of the other is 0.

The peripheral control MPU executes the restriction pattern of the setting suggestion effect according to the restriction flag of each case defined in the error occurrence effect restriction table. Hereinafter, these restriction patterns will be described.

(1) When an error starts before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(1-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1806 is 1 and the value of the field 1807 is 0). By executing the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to notify the player that the setting has not been changed when the error is cleared by the hall clerk, and it is possible to give a sense of security that the result of the game is not affected. can.

(1-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1806 is 0 and the value of the field 1807 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is not executed may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs before the start of the setting suggestion effect and the game progresses even after the error occurs (weak error).

(2-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1808 is 1 and the value of the field 1809 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even when an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. When audio and images indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these audio and images are output in preference to the audio and image in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. In addition, in order to provide the player with the expectation that "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "the setting suggestion effect suggesting a high setting may have been displayed", all of the setting suggestion effects are provided. An image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so as to be hidden.

(2-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of field 1808 is 0 and the value of field 1809 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is not executed may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(2') Setting suggestion When an error occurs before the start of the effect and the game progresses even during the error (weak error), a new setting suggestion corresponding to the winning of the starting port during the error is occurring. About setting suggestion production of fluctuation.

(2'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1810 is 1 and the value of the field 1811 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even when an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(2'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1810 is 0 and the value of the field 1811 is 1). As a result, since the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning prize during the error occurrence, the player stops launching the game ball and releases the error at an early stage.

(3) When an error occurs during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the setting suggestion effect starts, and the game stops when the error occurs (strong error).

(3-1) After resuming the game, the setting suggestion effect is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 1 and the value of the field 1813 is 0). If the set suggestion effect that has already been started is canceled, the player may feel distrust that the setting may have been changed. It is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation.

(3-2) The setting suggestion effect is not restarted after the game is restarted (the value of the field 1812 is 0 and the value of the field 1813 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is canceled may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game Can proceed smoothly and the burden on the hall can be reduced.

(4) Regarding the setting suggestion effect of the setting suggestion variation when an error occurs during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses even during the error occurrence (weak error).

(4-1) The setting suggestion effect is continued (the value of the field 1814 is 1 and the value of the field 1815 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even when an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player. When audio and images indicating that an error is occurring are output to various speakers and the main liquid crystal display device 1600, these audio and images are output in preference to the audio and image in the setting suggestion effect. do. At this time, in order not to cause discomfort to the player, an image indicating that an error is occurring is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 so that a part or all of the setting suggestion effect is displayed. Also, in order to provide the player with the expectation of "when the setting suggestion effect was displayed" and "when the setting suggestion effect suggesting the high setting was displayed", hide all the setting suggestion effects. Then, an image indicating that an error is occurring may be displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600.

(4-2) The setting suggestion effect is canceled (the value of the field 1814 is 0 and the value of the field 1815 is 1). As a result, when an error occurs, a situation that is disadvantageous to the player that the setting suggestion effect is stopped may occur, so that the player proceeds with the game so as not to generate an error, and the game is played. It can proceed smoothly and reduce the burden on the hall.

(4') When an error occurs during the setting suggestion fluctuation and after the start of the setting suggestion effect, and the game progresses even during the error (weak error), a new prize corresponding to the winning of the starting port during the error is occurring. About setting suggestion production of setting suggestion fluctuation.

(4'-1) The setting suggestion effect is executed (the value of the field 1816 is 1 and the value of the field 1817 is 0). As a result, the game proceeds even when an error occurs, so that the operation of the game machine is not slowed down. In addition, since the setting suggestion effect is generated even when an error occurs, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

(4'-2) The setting suggestion effect is not executed (the value of the field 1816 is 0 and the value of the field 1817 is 1). As a result, since the setting suggestion effect is not executed for the winning prize during the error occurrence, the player stops launching the game ball and releases the error at an early stage.

In this way, the effect is exhibited in both cases when the setting suggestion effect is performed and when the setting suggestion effect is not performed. Therefore, by allowing the hall or the like to set the effect restriction for the setting suggestion effect, the hall or the like We can provide gaming machines that meet the needs of our business style.

[12-15-2. Restrictions on production in new start prizes]
Hereinafter, the restrictions on the production in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize during the special symbol fluctuation and in the state where the new fluctuation can be reserved will be described. FIG. 172 is an example of a new start prize production restriction table. The new start winning effect restriction table is stored in, for example, the peripheral control ROM.

The new start winning effect restriction table includes, for example, a condition column, a reference processing table column, and a flag column. The conditions in the condition column are defined by the assumption about the pre-variation effect and the effect limit in the effect in the new start winning in the assumption. The previous change in this chapter is the change immediately before the change corresponding to the new starting prize. As a condition of the effect of the pre-variation, there are a case where only the expectation suggestion effect is performed as to whether the special lottery result corresponding to the change is a big hit, and a case where the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed.

In addition, as the effect limitation of the look-ahead effect in the new start prize, only the setting suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect is not executed), and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect are restricted (that is, the setting). There are two cases: the suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are not executed), and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect in the look-ahead effect is restricted (that is, the setting suggestion effect and the look-ahead effect are executed).

The reference processing table column stores the identifier of the processing table to be referred to when executing the look-ahead effect restriction in the new start winning, which is included in the corresponding condition. The flag column stores a flag indicating which condition is executed and which processing table is used to determine the processing for the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize.

1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 1 to 3, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 1 to 3. Further, 1 is stored in the flag column corresponding to any one of the processing tables 4 to 6, and 0 is stored in the flag column corresponding to the other two of the processing tables 4 to 6. The flag in the new start winning effect restriction table is, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall, etc. It doesn't matter), and it can be set.

If the peripheral control MPU determines that there is a new start prize while the special symbol is changing and the new change can be reserved, and only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the previous change, the new start prize effect restriction table The condition indicated by the condition column is executed, in which the value in the "pre-variation effect" column corresponds to the flag column corresponding to "expectation suggestion only" and 1 is stored as the value. Further, the peripheral control MPU refers to the processing table corresponding to the flag column, and determines the content of the look-ahead effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize.

Similarly, the peripheral control MPU has a new start prize while the special symbol is changing and a new change can be reserved, and when the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the previous change, the new start prize is given. The value in the "pre-variation effect" column of the effect restriction table is the flag column corresponding to "expectation suggestion + setting suggestion", and the processing table corresponding to the flag column storing 1 as a value is newly referred to. Determine the content of the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the starting prize.

Hereinafter, each condition indicated by the condition column will be described. The first condition (condition in which the processing table 1 is selected) is that when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation, only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the pre-reading effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. To be done. In the first condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, the player feels more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is executed as the look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning prize, the player's consciousness is also directed to the setting suggestion effect, so that the effect of the pre-variation The feeling of exhilaration may decrease. In addition, the player may confuse the setting suggestion effect with the expectation suggestion effect, which may make the player happy. Therefore, by executing the first condition, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed.

Further, under the first condition, the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, but in this state, if the setting suggestion effect is further executed as the look-ahead effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize, the player Even if it is assumed that the previous fluctuation will deviate, the fluctuation corresponding to the new starting prize can still be expected, so that the player can be provided with a sense of security.

For example, when selecting an effect by the advance notice effect table of FIG. 165, whether or not the flag in the condition column indicating that the peripheral control MPU determines the effect by the table and then limits the setting suggestion effect is 1. (Whether or not to limit) is determined, and if it is 1 (restrict), even if set is selected, it is rewritten and displayed without set to limit the setting suggestion effect. do. That is, the peripheral control MPU can limit the setting suggestion effect by using the advance notice effect table shown in FIG. 165 by performing the determination process after determining the effect. That is, since the pachinko machine 1 does not need to hold the effect table for each effect restriction type, the amount of data can be reduced. Similarly, in the expectation suggestion effect described later, when the peripheral control MPU limits the expectation suggestion effect even when the look-ahead hold display is selected other than white using the final hold color table of FIG. 161. Rewrites the selected hold display to white and displays it.

The second condition (condition in which the processing table 2 is selected) is the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion as the pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning when only the expectation suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation. It is to limit both productions. In the second condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, the player is more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect and the period attitude suggestion effect are executed as the look-ahead effect of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, the player's consciousness is directed to these effects as well. There is a risk that the feeling of exhilaration in the production of pre-variation will decrease. Therefore, by executing the second condition, the occurrence of these situations can be suppressed.

The third condition (condition in which the processing table 3 is selected) is the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion as the pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning when only the expectation suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation. Do not limit any of the productions. In the third condition, since the expectation suggestion effect is performed in the pre-variation, the player feels more uplifted by the expectation for the big hit. In such a state, by executing the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, in addition to the uplifting feeling for the big hit, the uplifting feeling for the setting suggestion effect (particularly, the high setting confirmation suggestion effect). Alternatively, when a high setting confirmation effect or the like is executed), the player can be given.

The fourth condition (condition in which the processing table 4 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation. Only is limited. In the fourth condition, since the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, the player may win a big hit in the pre-variation, and (especially the high setting suggestion effect or the high setting confirmation effect). (When is executed) I feel an uplifting feeling due to the setting suggestion. In such a state, if the setting suggestion effect is executed as a look-ahead effect of the change corresponding to the new start winning, there is a possibility that the feeling of excitement for the big hit in the hold of the previous change may decrease. ..

Specifically, for example, when the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, and the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as the pre-reading effect of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the pre-variation The setting suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (although it is originally set to 5 or more, it also suggests the possibility of setting 4). In such a case, the player presumes that not only the setting suggestion effect in the pre-variation but also the expectation suggestion effect contains a lot of inaccurate information (specifically, for example, the display mode is red). It is presumed that the expectation for big hits is not high even for the hold, which is the case. By executing the fourth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The fifth condition (condition in which the processing table 5 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation. And to limit both the expected suggestion effect. In the fifth condition, since the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, if the setting suggestion effect is performed in the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning prize, the setting suggestion effect is performed multiple times in a short period of time. This will be performed, and the player may guess the set value with high accuracy (for example, when the odd number setting suggestion effect and the high setting suggestion effect are performed, there is a high possibility that the setting value is 5). If the player determines that the setting is low in such a state, the game on the pachinko machine 1 may be stopped, and if it is determined that the setting is high, other pachinko machines in the hall may be stopped. There is a risk that the operation of the machine 1 will decrease. By executing the fifth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In particular, if the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, and the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed as the look-ahead effect even in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, many effects occur in a short period of time. However, the player may be confused. By executing the fifth condition, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

The sixth condition (condition in which the processing table 6 is selected) is a setting suggestion effect as a pre-reading effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation. And neither of the expected suggestion effects should be restricted. In the sixth condition, since the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are performed in the pre-variation, the player assumes the expectation degree of the expectation suggestion effect in the setting suggested by the setting suggestion effect. In this state, in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize, the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are performed, so that the expectation level due to these two expectation suggestion effects may be raised.

Specifically, for example, when a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting of 4 or more is executed in the pre-variation, and a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting of 5 or more is executed as a look-ahead effect in a new start winning prize, the player Regarding the expectation suggestion effect in the previous fluctuation, the degree of expectation at setting 4 or higher is assumed. However, after that, since the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize suggests the setting 5 or more, the expectation degree for the expectation suggestion effect comes to assume the expectation degree of the setting 5 or more, and the player The feeling of exhilaration increases.

In this way, the effect is exhibited for each of the pre-reading effect restriction contents corresponding to the new start prize. Therefore, by making it possible for the hall etc. to set such pre-reading effect restriction contents, the needs of the sales style of the hall etc. It is possible to provide a gaming machine tailored to the above.

Hereinafter, each processing table and the look-ahead effect executed with reference to each processing table will be described. Each processing table is stored in, for example, a peripheral control ROM.

FIG. 173 is an example of the processing table 1. First, the contents common to each processing table will be described. Each processing table stores the winning type in the special lottery result of the previous variation, the processing content related to the new start winning corresponding to the winning type, and the processing number which is an identifier of the processing content.

The processing content held by each processing table defines the processing content for the look-ahead effect that is not subject to restriction. Specifically, for example, as the pre-reading effect restriction of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, the processing content of the processing table 1 which is a table referred to when only the setting suggestion effect is restricted includes the expected suggestion effect. The processing content is defined. Similarly, as the pre-reading effect limitation of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, the processing contents of the processing table 3 which is a table referred to when both the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are restricted include the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect. The processing content for the setting suggestion effect is defined.

Therefore, the peripheral control MPU determines the look-ahead effect of the restriction target in the new start prize and the processing table to be referred to based on the flag of the new start prize effect restriction table, and is not the restriction target based on the processing table. Determine the processing for the look-ahead effect.

The processing table 3 and the processing table 6, which will be described later, store a flag for selecting the processing content related to the new start winning from a plurality of processing contents. The flag in the processing table may be, for example, an operation medium provided in the pachinko machine 1 at the time of manufacturing the pachinko machine 1 or in a hall or the like (an operation medium that the player cannot operate or an operation medium that the player can operate). ) Can be set.

Hereinafter, the processing contents related to the new start winning prize defined in the processing table 1 will be described. The processing table 1 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation and only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Hereinafter, an example in which hold look-ahead is performed as a look-ahead effect for suggesting expectations will be described.

The process of process number 1 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a short time. In the process of process number 1, the peripheral control MPU is, for example, when the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is a specific mode (for example, a hold display mode such as blue, green, red, etc.) with a high expectation of big hit. At the start of the opening screen of the jackpot won by the previous variation, the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is returned to the default (the white display mode in the final hold color table of FIG. 161). However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display of the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as the other hold display. In addition, the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the specific display mode (that is, leave the default display) at the time of the time saving transition after the end of the jackpot. It should be noted that the peripheral control MPU does not return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the specific display mode even if the hold of the new prize has not been exhausted at the end of the time reduction (that is,). Leave the default display).

The process of the process number 2 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with no time reduction. In the process of process number 2, the peripheral control MPU determines that the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is a specific mode in which the jackpot expectation is high, for example, at the start of the jackpot opening screen won by the pre-variation. Return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the default. However, if the hold is no longer displayed in the hold display area at the start of the jackpot opening screen, the hold display of the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as the other hold display. Further, even at the time of transition to the normal state controlled after the jackpot game is completed, the mode of the hold display of the new start prize is not returned to the specific display mode (that is, the default display is left).

The process of process number 3 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. In the process of process number 3, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the hold display of the new start prize (that is, the hold display is continued, specifically, for example, if the hold display mode is blue, it is blue. The hold display mode of is continuously displayed). Further, the peripheral control MPU may return the mode of the hold display of the new start prize to the default at the start of the opening screen of the small hit won by the previous variation. However, if the hold is not displayed in the hold display area at the start of the small hit opening screen, the hold display of the specific mode is deleted in the same manner as the other hold display.

The process of the process number 4 is a process related to a new start winning prize when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. In the process of process number 4, the peripheral control MPU does not change the mode of the hold display of the new start prize (that is, the hold display is continued, specifically, for example, if the hold display mode is blue, it is blue. The hold display mode of is continuously displayed).

FIG. 174 is an example of the processing table 2. The processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. be. Since the processing table 2 is a table that is referred to when both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the change corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the jackpot type of the pre-variation. It is defined that no special processing is performed on the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize.

FIG. 175 is an example of the processing table 3. The processing table 3 is a table that is referred to when only the expected suggestion effect is executed in the pre-variation and neither the set suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. be.

The processing of the processing numbers 5 to 6 is a processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a short time. One of the processes of process numbers 5 to 6 can be selected by a flag. In the processes of process numbers 5 to 6, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

In the process of process number 5, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is on hold and is being digested. When the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation by the process of the process number 5, the player can remember that the setting suggestion effect is performed. can.

In the process of process number 6, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. In addition, since the jackpot with a time reduction is won in the previous fluctuation, the fluctuation corresponding to the new prize is likely to start after the end of the time reduction (during the time reduction, the game ball is placed at the second starting port 2004. If a prize is won frequently and the first special symbol change and the second special symbol change are suspended, the second special symbol change is executed in preference to the first special symbol change). Therefore, since the setting suggestion effect is executed after the time reduction ends by the processing of the processing number 6, the player's disappointment due to the time reduction ending can be reduced.

The processes of process numbers 7 to 8 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with no time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 7 to 8 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processing of the processing numbers 7 to 8 is the same as the processing of the processing number 2.

In the process of process number 7, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the big hit game won by the previous fluctuation, or the like. The player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, but if the processing of process number 7 starts the setting suggestion effect during the jackpot game at the latest, he will be disappointed. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 8, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the setting suggestion effect is started immediately after the jackpot is completed by the process of the process number 8, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the fact that the time reduction is not given.

The processing of the processing numbers 9 to 10 is a processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 9 to 10 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the process of the process numbers 9 to 10 is the same as the process of the process number 3.

In the process of process number 9, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hit. In the small hit, the player may be disappointed because only a small privilege is given to the player, but the processing of the processing number 9 starts the setting suggestion effect at an early timing, which is disappointing. Can be reduced.

In the process of process number 10, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the series of digestion times related to the small hit is shorter than the series of digestion times related to the big hit, the setting suggestion effect is when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation. If you do not do this, the player may feel distrustful. By the process of the process number 10, it is possible to prevent the player from giving such a feeling of distrust.

The processes of process numbers 11 to 13 are processes related to a new start winning prize when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. One of the processes of process numbers 11 to 13 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processes of the process numbers 11 to 13 is the same as the process of the process number 4.

In the process of process number 11, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize.

In the process of process number 12, the peripheral control MPU starts the new start only when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning is executed. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a line suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). By the processing of the processing number 12, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for the player who feels disappointed at the fact that the mode of the hold display having a high expectation of big hit appears in the pre-variation. can. In addition, in FIG. 175 and FIG. 178 described later, the old hold is a hold corresponding to the previous fluctuation, and the new hold is a hold corresponding to the new start winning prize.

In the process of process number 13, when the mode of the hold display is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of big hit, the setting suggestion as a look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize. Do not perform the production. Due to the processing of process number 13, the mode of the hold display with a high expectation of big hit appears in the pre-variation, but it is out of order, and even in the variation corresponding to the new start winning, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect does not appear. , It is possible to prevent the player from being absorbed in the game.

FIG. 176 is an example of the processing table 4. The processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation, and only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. ..

The process of the process number 14 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a time saving. In the process of process number 14, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 1.

The process of the process number 15 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with no time reduction. In the process of process number 15, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 2.

The process of the process number 16 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 3.

The process of the process number 17 is a process related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. In the process of process number 16, the process of the expected suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning is the same as the process of process number 4.

Since the processing table 4 is a table that is referred to when only the setting suggestion effect is restricted as the pre-reading effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, the new start is performed regardless of the jackpot type of the previous variation. It is defined that no special processing is executed for the setting suggestion effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the winning.

FIG. 177 is an example of the processing table 5. Refer to the processing table 5 when both the setting suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation and both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limitation of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. It is a table to be done. Since the processing table 5 is a table that is referred to when both the setting suggestion effect and the expectation suggestion effect are restricted as the look-ahead effect limit of the variation corresponding to the new start winning, regardless of the jackpot type of the pre-variation. It is defined that no special processing is performed on the look-ahead effect in the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize.

FIG. 178 is an example of the processing table 6. The processing table 6 is referred to when the expectation suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are executed in the pre-variation, and neither the setting suggestion effect nor the expectation suggestion effect is restricted as the look-ahead effect restriction of the variation corresponding to the new start winning. Table.

The processing of the processing numbers 18 to 21 is a processing related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with a short time. One of the processes of process numbers 18 to 21 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processes of the process numbers 18 to 21 is the same as the process of the process number 1.

In the process of process number 18, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is on hold and is being digested. When the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation by the process of the process number 18, the player can remember that the setting suggestion effect is performed. can.

In the process of process number 19, the peripheral control MPU has a setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Is better (specifically, for example, it is notified that setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and the setting as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Only when it is notified that the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. Before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, specifically, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the jackpot game won by the previous fluctuation, or during the time saving associated with the jackpot won by the previous fluctuation. The second special symbol is on hold and is being digested.

By the processing of the process number 19, the player can see the high setting suggestion effect during the time reduction jackpot at the latest, so that a double uplifting feeling due to the time reduction jackpot and the high setting suggestion can be obtained. Further, for example, it is notified that the setting 5 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the previous variation, and the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Is notified, the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize is a useless effect that does not provide new information to the player, and is processed. By processing the number 19, such a useless effect can be omitted. On the contrary, for example, when it is notified that the setting 4 or more is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, the setting 5 is set in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the player is likely to continue the game even if it is not notified that the above is confirmed, the setting suggestion effect is likely to be a useless effect, and the process of the process number 19 is such a useless effect. The production can be omitted.

In the process of process number 20, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the setting suggestion effect is often started immediately after the end of the time reduction by the processing of the process number 20, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the end of the time reduction state.

In the process of process number 21, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player for the end of the time saving state.

The processes of process numbers 22 to 25 are processes related to a new start winning when the winning type of the previous variation is a big hit with no time reduction. One of the processes of process numbers 22 to 25 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processes of the process numbers 22 to 25 is the same as the process of the process number 2.

In the process of process number 22, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the big hit game won by the previous fluctuation, or the like. The player feels disappointed that he won the jackpot but did not win in a short time, but if the processing of process number 22 starts the setting suggestion effect during the jackpot game at the latest, he will be disappointed. You can enjoy the jackpot game in a reduced state.

In the process of process number 23, the peripheral control MPU has a setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the big hit game won by the previous fluctuation, or the like. When the setting suggestion effect is started during the big hit game at the latest by the process of the process number 23, the big hit game can be enjoyed in a state where the disappointment is reduced.

In the process of process number 24, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. By the processing of the processing number 24, the setting suggestion effect is started immediately after the end of the big hit, so that it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player for not entering in a short time.

In the process of process number 25, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. By the processing of the processing number 21, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player for not entering in a short time. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, the player who is disappointed not to rush into the short time will be shown a more useless setting suggestion effect. There is a risk of stroking the person in reverse.

The processes of process numbers 26 to 29 are processes related to a new start winning prize when the winning type of the previous variation is a small hit. One of the processes of process numbers 26 to 29 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processes of the process numbers 26 to 29 is the same as the process of the process number 3.

In the process of process number 26, the peripheral control MPU executes a setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hit. In the small hit, the player may be disappointed because only a small privilege is given to the player, but the processing of the processing number 26 disappoints the setting suggestion effect to start at an early timing. Can be reduced.

In the process of process number 27, the peripheral control MPU is set to be suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize. The term "before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize" is, for example, during the fluctuation of the previous fluctuation, during the opening of the small hit won by the previous fluctuation, or during the small hit. By the processing of the processing number 27, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the small merit being given in the small hit.

In the process of process number 28, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. Since the series of digestion times related to the small hit is shorter than the series of digestion times related to the big hit, the setting suggestion effect is when the player recognizes that the setting suggestion effect has started before the start of the pre-variation. If you do not do this, the player may feel distrustful. By the processing of the processing number 28, it is possible to prevent the player from giving such a feeling of distrust.

In the process of process number 29, the peripheral control MPU has a setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect before the start of the variation corresponding to the new start prize, rather than the setting suggested in the pre-variation setting suggestion effect. Only when is better, the setting suggestion effect is executed during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. By the processing of the processing number 29, it is possible to omit the useless setting suggestion effect as described in the processing of the processing number 19, and to reduce the disappointment of the player for giving only a small merit in the small hit. Further, if the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is not better than the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation, If the setting suggestion effect as a look-ahead effect is executed before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize, the player who is disappointed that only a small merit is given in the small hit will be given a more useless setting suggestion effect. It will be shown and there is a risk of stroking the player in reverse.

The processes of process numbers 30 to 34 are processes related to a new start winning prize when the winning type of the previous variation is out of order. One of the processes of process numbers 30 to 34 can be selected by a flag. The processing for the expectation suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect corresponding to the new start winning in the processes of the process numbers 30 to 34 is the same as the process of the process number 4.

In the process of process number 30, the peripheral control MPU executes the setting suggestion effect during the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning prize. By the processing of the processing number 30, it is possible to reduce the disappointment of the player due to the deviation of the pre-variation.

In the process of process number 31, the peripheral control MPU starts the new start only when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit. During the fluctuation corresponding to the winning, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning is executed. The execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is not changed, that is, no special processing is performed, but the execution timing of the setting suggestion effect is controlled to be different (for example, a line suggesting the setting by the character B appears. The timing may be delayed by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds) or earlier than usual by a predetermined number of seconds (for example, 2 seconds). By the processing of the processing number 31, it is possible to alleviate such disappointment for the player who feels disappointed at the fact that the mode of the hold display having a high expectation of big hit appears in the pre-variation. can.

In the process of process number 32, the peripheral control MPU sets the pre-variation when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of a big hit. Setting as a look-ahead effect before the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start prize The new start prize is only when the setting suggested in the suggestion effect is better than the setting suggested in the suggestion effect. During the fluctuation corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize is executed. By the process of the process number 32, the player's disappointment that the pre-variation, which was the mode of the hold display with a high expectation of a big hit, was out of order can be alleviated by the setting suggestion effect.

In the process of process number 33, the peripheral control MPU performs the new start prize only when the mode of the hold display in the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) with a high expectation of big hit. During the fluctuation corresponding to, the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start winning prize is executed. By the processing of the process number 33, such a disappointment can be alleviated by the setting suggestion effect for the player who has been disappointed because the expectation for the big hit cannot be obtained by the hold look-ahead effect of the pre-variation.

In the process of process number 34, the peripheral control MPU is a setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect of the pre-variation when the mode of the hold display is not a specific mode (for example, green or red) having a high expectation of big hit. Therefore, only when the setting suggested in the setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect before the start of the change corresponding to the new start prize is better, during the change corresponding to the new start prize, The setting suggestion effect as the look-ahead effect in the new start prize is executed. A situation in which the processing of the process number 34 amplifies the annoyance of the player that the mode of the pending display of the previous variation suggests a low setting in the setting suggestion effect in the variation corresponding to the new start winning prize with a low expectation. Can be suppressed.

In the above-mentioned processing, as a pre-reading effect limitation of the fluctuation corresponding to the new start winning, even in a situation where the setting suggestion effect is not restricted, in the following cases, the peripheral control MPU suggests the setting. You don't have to perform the production. For example, when the new start winning prize is made during the big hit, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. This is because immediately after the big hit game, the player is likely to continue the game without giving an incentive by the setting suggestion effect.

As in the example of the processing table 3 and the processing table 6, since the effect is exhibited in each of the processes related to the new start prize defined by each process number, the hall or the like can set the process related to the new start prize. Therefore, it is possible to provide a game machine that meets the needs of a business style such as a hall.

Further, for example, the new start winning prize is just before the end of the ST state (probability change state that continues until a big hit is won or a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations are executed) (specifically, for example, a special until the end of the ST state). Go to the state where the remaining number of fluctuations of the symbol is 4 or less, which is the maximum number of reserved special symbols, or the number of remaining fluctuations of the special symbol until the end of the ST state is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600, etc.) If so, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately before the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not to win the jackpot in the ST. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to a new start prize, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as a production with a high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs that makes the player happy. There is a risk of doing so. By the above-mentioned processing, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

Further, for example, after the ST state ends and the normal state is entered, a predetermined number of special symbol fluctuations (specifically, for example, four special symbol fluctuations, which is the maximum number of reserved special symbols, or the ST state) Immediately after the transition to the normal state, the second starting port 2004 may be open, and in consideration of this, the new design may be changed until a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) of special symbol fluctuations are performed. When the start winning is won, the peripheral control MPU does not have to execute the setting suggestion effect. Immediately after the end of the ST state, the player's greatest concern is whether or not he will win the jackpot immediately. In particular, immediately after the end of the ST state, there is a high possibility that a change corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol, which is easy to win a big hit of a type having a great merit for the player, is executed. In such a state, when the setting suggestion effect is started as a look-ahead effect related to a new start prize, the player misunderstands the setting suggestion effect as a production with a high expectation of a big hit, and a situation occurs that makes the player happy. There is a risk of doing so. By the above-mentioned processing, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

In addition, when it is determined that the setting suggestion effect that is completed independently is executed in each of the plurality of holds, the pre-variation is such that one setting suggestion effect that spans the changes corresponding to the plurality of holds is executed. The setting suggestion effect may be changed.

[12-16. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 1]
Hereinafter, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the initialization function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 and the initialization function of the RAM 1312 are used. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation related to the change of the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

179 and 180 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on. The power-on processing shown in FIGS. 179 and 180 is another example of step S10 in FIG. 21 to step S34 in FIG. 22.

First, the main control MPU 1311 captures the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the signal level of the setting key 971 from the input port, and stores the captured level data in the register (step S201). The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are being operated in steps S212 and S214 after the peripheral control board 1510 is reliably activated. Therefore, if the hall employee mistakenly interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start, the hall employee unintentionally clears the RAM. The switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a temporary storage means such as a register at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and after the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a temporary storage means such as a register, even if an employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on, the power supply is supplied. The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of the closing operation is reliably detected.

The ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 and the ON level of the setting key 971 may be different. For example, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 may be used to change the logic between the positive and negative, and the RAM clear switch 954 may be turned ON at the High level and the setting key 971 may be turned ON at the Low level. Further, the voltage determined to be ON may be changed by the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971. By doing so, it is possible to change the signal level by irradiating the pachinko machine 1 with radio waves and make it difficult to perform fraudulent acts to activate the setting change mode. Further, as will be described later, it is not necessary to monitor the signal level of the sensor for fraud detection in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

Then, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S202). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = 5) In the case, if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the set state management area, and initialization by the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is awaited (step S203). Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, the abnormal set value is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, processing related to a normal game such as a special figure or a normal figure is not executed.

The set value is not only determined when the power is turned on, but also when a prize is entered at the start port, when a variable display game is started, or when the game state is switched (from the normal state to the big hit state, from the low probability state to the high probability state). , Non-time saving state to time saving state, etc.), etc.) is also determined. As a result, even if the set value is erroneously set to an abnormal value, the lottery is prevented from being performed based on the erroneous set value.

If it is determined that the set value is abnormal, the state of the set value abnormality (RAM abnormality) is maintained until the game is stopped and the power is turned on again or the setting value is changed. .. When it is determined that the set value is abnormal, it is advisable to set a predetermined value. As the predetermined value, it is preferable to update the storage area of the set value by using the value corresponding to the setting 6 indicating the highest setting and the value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the lowest setting.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only via the setting change mode, and the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved only by turning on the power again. This is because the RAM abnormality may be caused by fraud in addition to the defect, and if the RAM abnormality caused by the fraud can be resolved by the power cycle operation, the RAM abnormality can be easily resolved. On the other hand, if the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved without going through the setting change mode, the RAM abnormality cannot be resolved without operating the power switch 932, the setting key 971, and the RAM clear switch 954. Since the operation of the setting key 971 that can be operated only by the employee of the hall having the key is included, the security performance against fraudulent activity can be improved.

In addition, in order to deal with the illegal act of changing the set value to an indefinite value, if the set value is determined to be abnormal, updating it to the value corresponding to the setting 1 indicating the minimum setting will be used for the security of the gaming machine. It is effective because it can improve the sex.

As shown in FIG. 201 (B), the setting state management area is a storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, a normal game state (game startable state), a setting confirmation mode, and a setting change mode. , The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded.

On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for activation (step S204).

Then, the checksum calculated from the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the previous power cutoff is compared (verified) with the checksum calculated at the time of the previous power cutoff and stored in step S48. A fixed value check code may be used instead of the checksum. Further, it is determined whether the value of the backup flag area is normal. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed is stored in the backup flag area, the RAM data is normally backed up when a power failure occurs (step S205).

If either the checksum or the backup flag area value is abnormal as a result of the determination, a value (08H) indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area (step S206), and the entire area (setting) of the main control RAM 1312 is recorded. Initialize (including the area where the value is stored) (step S207), and proceed to step S216. The erasure of data stored in the entire area or a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is referred to as "initialization", but "RAM clear" is also used in the same meaning.

On the other hand, if the values of the checksum and the backup flag area are normal, the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 is ON, setting key 971 is ON) is performed based on the value (contents) of the setting key stored in the register. Determine if it is. If it is not a setting change operation (either the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are OFF), it is set in the setting status management area in order to determine whether the status is being changed before the power is turned on. It is determined whether or not the value (02H) indicating that the change is being made is recorded (step S208).

As a result, if it is stored in the register that the setting change operation has been performed, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are used to switch to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and the setting change operation should be started. It can be determined that it is in a state. Further, if a value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is recorded in the setting state management area, it can be determined that the power is turned on after a power failure during the setting change operation. When it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the register or the value stored in the setting state management area, a value (02H) indicating the setting change state is recorded in the setting state management area (step). S209), the clear area of the main control RAM 1312 to be initialized when the RAM is normal is initialized (step S210), and the process proceeds to step S216.

In step S208, when the mode shifts to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the value indicating the setting change state (02H) is recorded in the setting state management area in step S209. At this time, since it is not necessary to set the same value (setting change state (02H)) again, when it is determined to shift to the setting change mode based on the value stored in the setting state management area, the setting is changed to the setting state management area. It is not necessary to record the value (02H) indicating the state.

On the other hand, if the setting change operation is not set in the register and the value (02H) indicating that the setting is being changed is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation should not be started. In order to determine whether or not the state of is in the RAM abnormality, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S211).

As a result, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined that the state before the power is turned on is in the RAM abnormality (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the process proceeds to step S216. On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM error is not recorded in the setting state management area, the state before the power is turned on is not during a RAM error (main control RAM 1312 is abnormal), and the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register. It is determined whether or not it has been performed (step S212).

As a result, if the ON level of the RAM clear switch 954 is stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON when the power is turned on, so that the RAM in the game control area excluding the set value and the setting state management area In order to initialize the area (clear area when RAM is normal), the process proceeds to step S210.

On the other hand, if the level of the ON operation of the RAM clear switch 954 is not stored in the register, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated at the time of power-on, so the power-on state buffer is set (step S213). The contents set in the power-on state buffer are transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 as a power-on state command for notifying the gaming state managed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is restored.

After that, it is determined whether the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register (step S214). As a result, if the ON level of the setting key 971 is stored in the register, the setting key 971 is operated when the power is turned on and the setting confirmation operation should be started. Therefore, the setting confirmation mode is shown in the setting status management area. Record the value (01H) (step S215).

After that, the device built in the main control MPU 1311 is initially set (step S216), and a power-on operation command for notifying the operation of each part at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S217). The power-on operation command is one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. Then, the main control RAM 1312 is initially set to the state when the power is turned on (step S218).

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the game startable state is recorded in the set state management area (step S219). If a value indicating a game startable state is recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game can be started, so the process proceeds to step S220 and the initial setting is continued. On the other hand, if the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting state management area, the normal game cannot be started, so the initial setting is finished and the process proceeds to step S224.

In step S220, the initial setting at the start of the game or the initial setting at the time of recovery from the power failure is performed. After that, a power-on state command for notifying the state of each part at power-on is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S221). Then, the power-on recovery destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol when the power is restored is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S222). The power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are one of the power-on commands described in step S32 of FIG. 22. The various commands stored in the buffer are transmitted in the timer interrupt process.

Further, a set value command for notifying the set value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S223), interrupts are permitted (step S224), and the process proceeds to a normal main loop (for example, step S36 in FIG. 22).

18 and 182 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 181 and 182 is different from the timer interrupt processing shown in FIGS. 24, 75, 80, 104, and 155, and the setting change process is executed in the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 updates the LED common counter (LED_CT) (step S230). The LED common counter is a counter that determines which common terminal of the base display 1317 is turned on, that is, the digit to be displayed. In this embodiment, an example in which the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 are used in combination will be described, but the base display 1317 and the setting display 974 may be provided separately. In this case, it is preferable that LED common counters are provided as many as the number of indicators.

After that, the switch input process is executed (step S231). The switch input process is the same as in step S74 of FIG.

Next, it is determined whether an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the set state management area (step S232). If the initial value (value indicating the game startable state) is recorded in the setting status management area, it is not necessary to execute the setting change / confirmation process (step S234 or later) in the timer interrupt process, so that the normal timer interrupt process is performed. (For example, after step S76 in FIG. 23) is executed (step S233). In the normal timer interrupt processing in step S233, the performance display processing (FIG. 183) described later is executed. On the other hand, if the initial value (value indicating the game startable state) is not recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change / confirmation process is executed without executing the normal game process in the timer interrupt process.

In the setting change / confirmation process, first, OFF is output from the LED common port, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784, and the game interruption signal is set to ON (step S234). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. And prevent the LED from flickering.

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S235). If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S245 without executing the process of changing / confirming the set value. On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether or not an operation of changing / confirming the set value has been performed (steps S236 and S237). Specifically, it is determined whether or not a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S236).

Then, if the setting change switch 972 is operated, the set value is added by 1 (step S238), and the process proceeds to step S245. If the upper limit is exceeded as a result of adding the set value, the initial value is returned. On the other hand, if the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (the value indicating the setting confirmation is recorded in the setting status management area) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting key It is determined whether the OFF edge of the output level of 971 is detected (step S239). When the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is detected, the setting key 971 is operated to the normal position, so that the setting change / confirmation mode end processing is executed (steps S240 to S244). On the other hand, if the OFF edge of the output level of the setting key 971 is not detected, the setting change / confirmation mode is not terminated and the process proceeds to step S245.

In the setting change / confirmation mode end process, as shown in FIG. 182, an initial value (a value indicating a game startable state) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S240), and the initial setting at the start of the game or the recovery from a power failure occurs. To perform the initial setting of (step S241) and send a power-on state command to the peripheral control board 1510 to notify the state of each part (game state such as low probability / high probability, time saving / non-time saving) at the time of power-on. Is stored in the buffer (step S242). Then, a power-on recovery destination command for notifying the state of the special symbol when recovering after a power failure is stored in a buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S243). Specifically, a counter value indicating the processing status of the special symbol / special electric accessory (state of each process (standby, fluctuating, judgment, jackpot, etc.) related to the special symbol / special electric accessory) is transmitted as a command. .. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 can determine the gaming state and the operating state of the special electric accessory related to the special symbol when the power is restored. Then, the set value command for notifying the set value is stored in the buffer for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S244), and the process proceeds to step S245.

The command for notifying the set value may be transmitted not only at the setting change / confirmation mode end process when the power is turned on, but also at the start of fluctuation or when the game state is switched. At that time, the command of the set value to be transmitted when the power is turned on and the command to be transmitted during a normal game such as when the fluctuation starts may be the same command or a different command (for example, the value of the upper byte is different).

When the set value command is different between when the power is turned on and during normal game, the peripheral control board 1510 issues a series of commands (variation pattern command, symbol command, etc.) including the set value at the start of the special symbol variation display game. Upon receipt, it determines if the command is missing. By changing the content of the command at the timing when the command is transmitted (at the time of power-on, during normal game, etc.), the peripheral control board 1510 may be the set value correctly received at the time of power-on, or other than the set value at the start of fluctuation. It is possible to determine whether the fluctuation pattern command or the symbol command is missing.

In step S245, it is determined whether or not a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area. If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, an error display is made on the base display 1317 (setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) (step S246). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM error is not recorded in the setting status management area, a setting is made to display the current setting value on the base display 1317 (setting display 974 in the case of a separate body) (step). S247).

After that, ON is output to the common terminal of the LED of the base display 1317, and the base display 1317 is turned on by the segment signal output according to the setting in step S246 or S247 (step S248). In this way, after the timer interrupt processing is started, the set value change operation is determined (step S237), and then ON is output to the common terminal of the LED for each timer interrupt to display the set value (display of the set value). Toggle). The set value will be displayed without using the setting operation as a trigger. Specifically, the setting change / confirmation process is being executed by performing the process related to the setting change / confirmation within the same timer interrupt process as when the normal game is started, instead of performing the process when the power is turned on. Even if the power is restored after the setting key 971 is returned to the original state due to a power failure, the setting at the time of the power failure occurs without operating the setting key 971 or the setting change switch 972 at the same position as when the power failure occurred. It is possible to return to the state of change / confirmation processing. Further, in the setting change / confirmation process, it is possible to standardize the processes that are also executed in the normal game process, such as the command transmission process and the control of the dynamic lighting of the LED.

Then, a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S249), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. That is, in step S249, the commands stored in the buffer in steps S242, S243, S244 and the like are actually output as serial data from the main control board 1310.

In the timer interrupt processing described above, the processing is branched depending on whether the normal game is executed or the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) is executed (step S232 in FIG. 181), but a plurality of timer interrupt processing May be provided to activate different timer interrupt processing in the normal game state and the setting change mode and / setting change mode. The plurality of timer interrupt processes may include some common processes (for example, even if a common subroutine is called in each timer interrupt process), or all of them may be composed of different routines. That is, the timer interrupt process 1 (for setting change / confirmation) is called in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and the timer interrupt 2 (for normal game) is called in the normal game state, which is common to these two timer interrupt processes. It has a process (module) to be executed and a dedicated process (module) to be executed only by one timer interrupt process. Commonly executed processes include, for example, a switch input process for capturing the output of various detection switches such as a winning opening sensor, and a peripheral board command process for transmitting a command to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the register bank may be shared between the process executed in the normal game and the process executed in the setting change mode. When bank 0 is used in the main processing on the main control side, bank 1 is used in both timer interrupt processing. Since two timer interrupt processes are not started at the same time, one register bank can be shared. That is, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 has two or more registers that can be switched by the bank, and the main control side main process that is repeatedly executed and the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed. It has 1 (during a normal game) and timer interrupt process 2 (setting change mode) that is executed periodically, and is common to at least two processes of the main control side main process, timer interrupt process 1, and timer interrupt process 2. Use the registers of the bank of.

The timer interrupt process executed in the normal game and the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode may have the same execution cycle, but may be executed in different cycles. Since the switching sampling in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode is only the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the timer interrupt processing in the normal game state is executed in the setting change mode where the execution cycle is 4 ms. The execution cycle of the timer interrupt process may be early (for example, 2 ms) or late (for example, 8 ms). If the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode is delayed, the cycle of the dynamic lighting control of the LED displaying the set value is delayed, and the display mode of the set value is different from the base display during the normal game. become. When there are eight LED commons, if the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process is 8 ms, the display cycle is 64 ms (display ON is 8 ms, OFF is 56 ms), and the timer interrupt process execution cycle is 4 ms. The cycle is 32 ms (display ON is 4 ms, OFF is 20 ms), the OFF time becomes longer in proportion to the execution cycle of the timer interrupt process, and the lighting flicker of the LED becomes larger, so that the display mode is different from the base display during the normal game. Can be recognized differently.

Further, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is activated when the power is started, the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change / confirmation is permitted, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal games is prohibited. On the other hand, when the power is started in the normal game state (does not shift to the setting change / confirmation mode), the timer interrupt process 1 for setting change / confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interrupt process 2 for normal game is permitted. Then, at the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the timer interrupt processing 1 for setting change / confirmation is prohibited, and the timer interrupt processing 2 for normal games is permitted.

FIG. 183 is a flowchart of the performance display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. In the performance display process, the performance (for example, the base value) of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the base display 1317.

The performance display process is executed in the timer interrupt in the normal gaming state described above. Specifically, it is executed in the normal interrupt processing in step S233 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 181 and the base display output processing in step S2087 of the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 191.

First, the main control MPU 1311 saves the stack address in the game control area, sets the stack address outside the game control area (step S260), and saves the register used in the game control area in the register save buffer (step). S261). In step S261, the save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. The save destination of the register used in the game control area may be a stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

After that, it is determined whether the first power-on flag is normal (step S262). The initial power-on flag is a flag indicating whether the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (that is, whether it is the first power-on), and 5AH is set when the area outside the game control area is initialized. Will be done. That is, if the value of the first power-on flag is 5 AH, it can be determined that the main control RAM 1312 at the time of the first power-on is initialized (that is, the area outside the game control area is also initialized).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the parameter used for displaying the base value is within a predetermined range (step S263). For example, if the value of the LED common counter for switching the display digit of the base display 1317 is other than 0 to 3, it is determined that the parameter value is abnormal, and the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is set in step S264. initialize.

If the power failure flag is not normal or the value of each parameter is not within the predetermined range, the main control RAM 1312 outside the game control area is initialized, the power failure flag is set to 5AH (step S264), and the process proceeds to step S265. On the other hand, if the power failure flag is normal and the value of each parameter is within a predetermined range, various winning opening sensors 3015, 2114, 2554, 2557 and the discharge ball sensor 3060 are detected, and the base value is calculated ( Step S265).

Then, it is determined whether it is the switching time of the section of the base value calculation (step S266), and if the switching time has arrived, the display mode is switched (step S267). Then, display data is created according to the display mode and stored in the buffer (step S268). Then, the display is controlled for each section. For example, the display control for each section includes a display of a test section with less than 500 out balls and a blinking display when the number of low-probability / non-time-saving out balls is less than a predetermined number (for example, 6000) (for example). Step S269).

After that, the register value is returned from the register save buffer (step S270), the stack address in the game control area is returned to the original value (step S271), and the performance display process is terminated.

Next, the notification mode of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 184. As described above, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is notified when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, in the setting change mode, or in the setting confirmation mode, and the pachinko machine is notified to the employees in the hall. Inform the state in an easy-to-understand manner.

The notification mode described below (for example, the display mode of the function display unit 1400) is output in the mode selected in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. These notifications are controlled by selecting a notification pattern in combination with the display setting on the base display 1317 in steps S246 and S247 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). Specifically, it is executed in the setting display process of step S2069 of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 190. A dedicated module for displaying the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 may be provided to execute the process.

First, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181). The abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with priority over the notification of other abnormalities and states.
Function display unit 1400 All lights off or all LEDs blink at high speed in the same cycle Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Displaying the characters "RAM error" Sound (sound effect) Output RAM error notification sound (RAM error notification sound setting change It may be the same as the notification sound other than the mode and setting confirmation mode)
Sound (voice) Outputs the voice of "RAM error" Volume Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED A predetermined frame lamp (top lamp) provided on the door frame 3 Including, excluding out-of-ball and stock notification LED) blinks in red Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Release condition to re-notify output By changing the setting on the main control board 1310 The RAM was cleared, or the power was turned on again to the peripheral control board 1510.

Next, the setting change notification when the main control RAM 1312 is started in the setting change mode will be described. The setting change notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights or all LEDs blink at medium speed in the same cycle Main liquid crystal display 1600 Display the characters "Settings are being changed" Sound (effect sound) Output the notification sound of the setting change mode (voice) " Output volume of "Settings are being changed" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player Frame decoration LED A predetermined frame lamp provided on the door frame 3 ( Flashes white (excluding top lamp, bulb burnout and stock notification LED) Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Release condition for re-notifying the output Peripheral control board 1510 Received "A001H" as an operation command when the power is turned on

Next, the setting confirmation notification when the main control RAM 1312 is started in the setting confirmation mode will be described. The setting confirmation notification is controlled by a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in step S249 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 181).
Function display unit 1400 All lights or all LEDs blink at low speed in the same cycle Main liquid crystal display device 1600 Display the characters "Setting confirmation in progress" Sound (sound effect) Output setting confirmation mode notification sound (setting confirmation mode notification) The sound may be the same as the notification sound in the setting change mode)
Sound (voice) Output the sound of "setting is being confirmed" a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) Volume Maximum volume that does not depend on the volume of the peripheral control board box 1520 or the volume setting by the player. Predetermined frame lamp (including top lamp, excluding ball burnout and stock notification LED) blinks in white Display panel decoration LED all off External output (security signal) Output test signal (game machine error signal) Output re-notification release condition A predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed after the peripheral control board 1510 receives "A001H" as an operation command when the power is turned on.

As for the notification of the above-mentioned three states, it is preferable that the abnormality of the main control RAM 1312 is notified with the highest priority, and the notification is given with priority in the order of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. More specifically, the priorities may be set in the order shown in FIG. 185. Note that priority 1 has a high priority for notification, and priority 9 has a low priority for notification. That is, when a plurality of notifications should be performed, the notifications having a high priority (small numbers) are performed. In addition, when a plurality of notification conditions having the same priority are satisfied and the notifications conflict, even if the plurality of competing notifications are switched and notified, the previously established notification is performed and the notification is canceled. If the competing notifications satisfy the conditions, the competing notifications may be performed. Specifically, at priority 3, the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation notification do not occur at the same time, so that the notifications do not conflict with each other. At priority 4, the prize ball excess abnormality notification and the ordinary electric accessory winning abnormality notification may occur at the same time, and the two notifications may compete with each other.
Priority 1: RAM error notification when a RAM error is detected Priority 2: Setting change notification priority in the setting change mode 3: RAM clear RAM clear when the main control RAM is initialized by operating the switch 954 Notification (excluding RAM clear by changing settings)
Priority 3: Setting confirmation notification priority in the setting confirmation mode 4: Excessive prize balls when more than a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out Abnormal notification priority 4: Ordinary electric accessory A predetermined number or more continuously when the electric accessory is not operating When a prize is detected, or when a prize equal to or higher than a predetermined value is detected during the operation of one ordinary electric burner, the normal electric accessory prize abnormality notification priority 5: Difference between the number of prizes and the number of discharges of the large prize opening Discharge abnormality notification priority when the number exceeds a predetermined number 6: Vibration sensor abnormality notification priority when vibration is detected 7: Door opening abnormality notification priority when opening of the door frame 3 or main body frame 4 is detected 8: Magnetic sensor abnormality notification priority when the magnetic sensor detects magnetism 9: When a predetermined number or more of consecutive prizes are detected when the big prize opening is not operating, or when a single big hit is made, a predetermined or higher prize is awarded. Large prize opening prize abnormality notification when detected

Next, the details of the power-on processing (FIGS. 179 and 180) described above will be described. 186 and 187 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the process of address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2000). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2001), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2002). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2003), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2004). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2005). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are being operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely started, a hole is created while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if an employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2006). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the machine waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2006.

After that, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2007). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = 5) In the case, if a value of 5 or less is stored, it is determined that the value is within the predetermined range.

If the set value is not within the predetermined range, the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2023), a value indicating a RAM error (08H) is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2024), and the reset signal of the pachinko machine 1 is set. Wait for initialization by. Since the set value is not in the range where the checksum is calculated and is not erased by the RAM clear operation, even if the set value is an abnormal value, it is not corrected. Therefore, when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the set value, and if there is an abnormality, the normal game is not started. In the hall where the pachinko machine is installed, you want to initialize the game state while maintaining the set value (for example, you want to clear the latent probability change (high probability non-time reduction) and return to the normal state with low probability time reduction). In some cases, a RAM clear operation may be performed. When the set value is initialized by the RAM clear operation during business, the power is cut off and the setting change mode is started to reset the set value and continue business, and the original set value is set again. There is a need. In order not to generate such trouble, the set value is maintained without being cleared by the RAM clear operation.

On the other hand, if the set value is within a predetermined range, the sub-start waiting timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer is timed up, and the peripheral control board 1510 is used. (Step S2008). The start-up wait of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from when the power is turned on to when the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, even if the set value is not determined.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2009). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 stands by in step S2009.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, and the determination result is stored in the register (step S2010). Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) out of the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power was cut off last time, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed (the power off processing was executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 because it is not (the power off processing is not executed normally).

Then, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the information in the setting state management area is saved (step S2011), and a value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality is tentatively recorded in the setting state management area (step S2012). ..

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2013). After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2014). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2030 of FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when a power failure occurred (step S2015). For example, when the value of the setting state management area saved in S2011 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2030 of FIG. 187.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2016). Specifically, the determination can be made using the determination result stored in the register in step S2010 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2031 of FIG. 187.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2017). For example, when the value of the saved setting state management area is a value indicating a RAM abnormality (08H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2036 of FIG. 187. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2018). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality tentatively recorded in the setting state management area in step S2012 is returned to the normal state. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2018, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2016 and S2019 to step S2031 is different, so that the program can be shared by both. You can reduce the size.

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2019). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON, it is determined that the RAM clear switch has been operated, and the process proceeds to step S2031 of FIG. 187.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 08H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 08H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be cleared by turning off the power once and then turning on the power by performing the setting change operation. That is, when it is determined in step S2014 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are being operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM error (08H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2030), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM error always goes through a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of power failure is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the set value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure occurs (step S2020).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2021). Then, if the setting key 971 is operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, and a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2022), and FIG. The process proceeds to step S2036. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is confirming the setting, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Since steps S2018 to S2022 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2019) and the setting key 971 Either of the determination of the operation of (step S2021) and the determination of the operation of (step S2021) may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2021). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2019).

Next, FIG. 187, which is a continuation of the power-on processing (FIG. 186), will be described.

If YES is determined in step S2014 or step S2015, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2030). Then, the area other than the set value and the set state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2031). After that, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2032). Specifically, since the determination result in step S2010 described above is stored in the register, in step S2032, the determination result can be determined based on the determination result stored in the register.

When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2033), and the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by the RAM abnormality initialization process. Initialize the RAM (work area and stack area) used outside (step S2034). The details of the RAM abnormality initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 189. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2035).

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initially set (step S2036), and the hardware random numbers (for example, winning random numbers) built in the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2037). Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2038). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later in FIG. 194.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2039), and the process proceeds to the main control side main process (FIG. 188).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2039 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2040). If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update process 2 is executed (step 2041). The details of the random number update process 2 will be described later in FIG. 195. In the random number update process 2, random numbers other than the random numbers for determining the winning are mainly updated in the special lottery or the ordinary lottery.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff process (steps S2042 to S2046) is executed. In the power outage process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2042). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing of data to the main control built-in RAM 1312 is prohibited, and rewriting of game information is protected. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2043). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum for determining whether or not the data stored in the work area to be backed up is normally held, and stores it in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312. (Step S2044). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting status management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area between the time the power is turned on and the time the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2045). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, RAM protect is enabled (write prohibited), the prohibited area is written to the RAM protect register, writing to the predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2046), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 189 is a flowchart of the RAM abnormality initialization process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The RAM error initialization process is executed in step S2034 of the power-on process (FIG. 187).

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area (step S2050), sets the stack pointer value outside the game control area to the stack pointer (step S2051), and sets all the registers. The value is stored in the register save buffer outside the game control area (step S2052).

After that, it is determined whether the initialization at the time of the first power-on is based on the value of the first power-on flag at the time of the power-on (step S2053). The first power-on means when the pachinko machine is first turned on, and when the backup power is interrupted and the data backed up in the main control RAM 1312 is erased. For example, if the connection line between the main control board 1310 and the backup power supply (for example, installed in the main body frame 4) is disconnected, the supply of the backup power supply to the main control RAM 1312 is cut off, and the data of the main control RAM 1312 cannot be retained.

If the initialization is performed at the time of the first power-on, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if it is not the initialization at the time of the first power-on, it is determined whether the discharge ball to be calculated as the base is out of the predetermined range (step S2054). If the discharge ball to be calculated based is out of the predetermined range, the process proceeds to step S2056. On the other hand, if the discharge ball to be calculated based is within a predetermined range, it is determined whether the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range (step S2055). Then, if the display parameter of the performance display monitor is within the normal range, the initialization process at the time of RAM abnormality is terminated and the process returns to the caller's process.

On the other hand, if the display mode of the performance display monitor is out of the normal range, 00H is written to and initialized in all work areas outside the used area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2056), and 00H is written in all stack areas outside the used area. Is written and initialized (step S2057), a predetermined value (for example, 5AH) is set in the initialization flag when the power is turned on (step S2058), and the process returns to the caller's process.

190 and 191 are flowcharts of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2060). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other can be used as a register group of bank 1, and bank switching is performed. It is configured so that the registers of both banks cannot be used without. Register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, although the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupt and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2061).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2062). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2062 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080, which will be described later, is a process related to the input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since it is determined as NO in step S2604, winning detection is performed, but fraud is not detected. Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball is not paid out or the fluctuation display is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered desirable that the fraud is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person who intends to commit fraud (Mr. Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the initial values of the large hit symbol determination random number and the small hit symbol determination random number updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 188 are changed. Update the random number for determining the initial value.

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. And prevent the LED from flickering.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output (step S2067). In step S2067, only the game state error signal may be turned ON, and the others may be turned OFF.

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2068). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2069). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 193.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2070). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and sequentially transmits the values stored in the transmission information storage area to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2071). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched by a return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

Subsequently, FIG. 191 will be described. When it is determined in step S2064 of FIG. 190 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area, the main control MPU 1311 detects the state of the sensor (switch) for fraud detection. Is executed (step S2080). Specifically, when a detection signal or the like from a magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is read and a predetermined level (ON level or OFF level) continues for a predetermined time, the input information storage area is stored. Remember. Based on the detection state of each fraud detection sensor generated in the switch input process 2, it is determined whether or not fraud is detected in the fraud detection process in step S2084. In the fraud detection process (step S2084), in addition to fraud detection by the fraud detection sensor, winning abnormalities such as a large winning opening and excessive winning of ordinary electric accessories are also determined.

After that, the timer update process is executed (step S2081). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, and the normal symbol variation determined by the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is input to inform that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the signal is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data.

Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and the transmission information storage area described above. Remember in. Specifically, the frame command reception process conforms to the command system for transmitting the command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to perform the notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951. It is modified so as to be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, the fraud detection process is executed (step S2084). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, a command output process at the time of passing the switch, which creates a command corresponding to the passing detection of various switches related to the winning switch and the start port switch and sets the command in the transmission information storage area, is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), and the base display output process is executed (step S2087). Unlike other processes, the base display output process is a process executed using a second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area before and after the execution of the base display output processing, and the base display is stored. It is prevented from being updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2088).

Subsequently, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed (step S2089). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuates based on the jackpot symbol random value. Determine whether to migrate. Then, when the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open / close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006. When the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this decision, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) so that the game balls can be accepted by the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. It shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Further, when the probabilistic transition condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation state, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process are executed (step S2090). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" "Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start opening door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted by the start port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the state.

Subsequently, the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, an information output signal during probability fluctuation and special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the external terminal board 784.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input process 2 (step S2080) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

After that, the process proceeds to step S2070 of FIG. 190.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2068 of the timer interrupt process when the set state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating a normal game state, and mainly executes a process of changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2100). If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting status management area, the process returns to the caller's process without executing the setting process.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM abnormality is caused by the setting change state by operating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off and the power failure process is executed. Then the RAM error is resolved. Then, the setting change mode is terminated by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the original state, and the normal game can be started.

Further, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value (08H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The RAM abnormal state continues, and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and bring it into the normal game state, it is necessary to always go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2101). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting key changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position, the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2102), the setting status management area is initialized (step S2103), and the power-on setting process is executed. (Step S2104), the process returns to the caller's process.

When the operation to end the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is finished is set by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. prepare. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt processing), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

If a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, if the hot start is performed in the normal gaming state when the power is restored, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when the RAM is cleared due to a RAM error, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value and stops the output of the security signal.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation is performed.

When the mode shifts to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM error condition continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even when the power is restored, so a security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. In the case of hot start, the security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510) has elapsed. After the transition, the output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after the power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during the output of a security signal due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during the output of a security signal due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues.・ When the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting change mode and the setting change mode continues ・ The power is restored after the power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting confirmation mode. When the setting confirmation mode continues In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal should be stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the security signal is abnormal on the hall computer side or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal is released.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output. After that, the output of the security signal is stopped. Further, even in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2105), and the setting change switch 972 is operated. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step S2106). The setting change switch 972 may also be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1. If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 1 (step S2107). After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Instead, return to the caller's processing.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is operated to ON. In this way, if the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON when the power failure is restored, the setting change switch 972 It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart of the setting display process. The setting display process is executed in step S2069 of the timer interrupt process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2110). If no value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2113), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2114). , Return to caller processing.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is made into a subroutine, and is called and executed in step S2038 of the power-on process (FIG. 187) and S2104 of the setting process.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2120). As shown in FIG. 202A, the power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 in the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 which is an initial value. The other bits may be set to 0 (step S2121). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the set state management area (step S2122). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting status management area, it means that it is in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM error, so the setting process at power-on is terminated and the caller's caller Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the set state management area, the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area depends on whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. Initialize the area (step S2123).

After that, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2124). As shown in FIG. 202B, the power-on state command is a command for notifying whether or not a normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area.

Then, a return destination command at power-on is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2125). As shown in FIG. 202 (C), the power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the game state related to the special symbol.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2126). As shown in FIG. 202 (D), the setting value command is a command for notifying the setting value.

In addition to the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, a special symbol hold number command indicating the number of hold of the special symbol variation display game is transmitted to display the function display unit 1400 and the main liquid crystal display device 1600. In, the hold number display may be restored to the state before the power failure occurred. The special symbol hold count command is sent in the order of sending the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, before sending these commands, or during the transmission of these commands. You may.

After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

The power-on setting process is executed when neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is restored, or when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. , Power-on status command, power-on return destination command, setting value command) are sent when the power is restored from a power failure, which is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, when the setting change mode ends, or when the setting confirmation mode ends.

FIG. 195 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step S2041 of the main process (FIG. 188), and updates random numbers other than random numbers mainly for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt prohibition (step S2131), updates the initial value random number (step S2132), and sets interrupt enable (step S2133). Since the initial value random number is also updated in the random number update process 1 of step S2063 of the timer interrupt process, the interrupt is prohibited before the initial value random number update process so that the initial value random number update process is not interrupted by the timer interrupt process. Initial value Interruption is permitted after random number update processing. The initial value random numbers are a random number for determining a big hit for drawing a big hit of a special symbol, a random number for drawing a hit of a normal symbol, and a symbol type (low probability / high probability / time saving / non-time saving, etc.) at the time of a big hit of a special symbol. ) Is a random number for changing the initial value for each cycle, such as a random number.

After that, a random number other than the winning random number (excluding the initial value random number) is updated (step S2134), and the process returns to the caller's process.

FIG. 196 is a flowchart of another example of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. The same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In another example 1 described below, it is preferable that the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting confirmation mode as well as in the setting change mode. In this alternative example 1, when the operation of the setting key 971 is detected when the power is restored, the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, the RAM clear switch 954 is set to the setting change mode or the setting. It does not switch between confirmation modes, but only has a function as an operation to change the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1, switches the register bank (step S2060), executes the switch input process 3 (step S2141), and details of the switch input process 3 will be described later in FIG. 197. do. In step S2141, the switch input process 1 of S2062 may be applied instead of the switch input process 3 described with reference to FIG. 197.

Then, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2063), and the setting change / confirmation process is executed (step S2142). Details of the setting change / confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 200.

Subsequently, the switch input process 2 is executed (step S2080), the timer update process is executed (step S2081), and the prize ball control process is executed (step S2082). Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2083), the fraud detection process is executed (step S2084), and the command output process when the switch is passed is executed (step S2085).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2086), the base display output process is executed (step S2087), and the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step). S2088). Subsequently, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed (step S2089), the normal symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process is executed (step S2090), and the output data setting process is executed (step S2091). Further, the peripheral board command transmission process is executed (step S2070), the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2071), the register bank is switched by the return instruction (for example, RETI) (step S2072), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process. do.

FIG. 197 is a flowchart of the switch input process 3. The switch input process 3 is executed in step S2141 of the timer interrupt process, reads various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311, creates an ON edge, and inputs the main control RAM 1312 as input information. Store in the information storage area.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the start address of the switch winning information data (step S2160), and acquires the number of times the process is repeated from the switch winning information data (step S2161). The number of times the process is repeated is the number n of blocks in the switch winning information data table. Then, the input port address designated by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2162), and the input level data area address designated by the switch winning information data is acquired (step S2163). Further, the input information is read from the acquired input port address (step S2164), and the read input information is corrected by using the logical correction value specified in the switch winning information data (step S2165).

After that, the value recorded in the setting state management area is referred to, and it is determined whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set (step S2166). Then, if it is not the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked with the mask value during the normal game specified in the switch winning information data (step S2167). With this mask, it is possible to acquire a bit of the input port used during a normal game.

On the other hand, in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the correction value is masked by the mask value during setting change / confirmation specified in the switch winning information data (step S2168). With this mask, only the bits used in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode among the input ports can be acquired.

After that, the input level data is generated from the bits acquired by the mask processing, and the input level data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2169).

Then, the edge data of the change from OFF to ON is generated from the input level data, and the input edge data area designated by the switch winning information data is updated (step S2170).

After that, it is set in the next block as switch winning information data (step S2171), and it is determined whether or not the processing of all switch input ports is completed (step S2172). When it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports has not been completed, the process returns to step S2162, and the next input port is processed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the processing of all switch input ports is completed, the switch input processing 3 is terminated and the process returns to the processing before the interrupt.

FIG. 198 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch winning information data table.

The switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A) is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times the process is repeated), and each block has an input port address, a logical correction value, and a mask during normal game. Includes values, changing / checking mask values, and the address of the input level data area.

FIG. 198 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a switch input level / edge data area.

The switch input level / edge data area includes n pairs of the address of the input level data area and the address of the input edge data area.

Since the address of the input edge data area is set to the address next to the input level data area as shown in the figure, it is not specified in the switch winning information data. If the input level data area and the input edge data area are not arranged consecutively, the address of the input edge data area is set together with the input level data area in the same table. The addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area are 16-bit (2 bytes) values, but are set as the addresses of the input level data area and the input edge data area set in the switch winning information data table. The value may be a lower 8-bit (1 byte) value. That is, since the upper byte of the address is a fixed value that does not change depending on the value of the input level data area or the input edge data area, the upper byte is the upper byte of the address in the RAM area, and only the lower byte needs to be set. Can be reduced.

FIG. 199 is a diagram showing another configuration example of the switch winning information data table, and FIG. 199 (A) shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 199 (B). Shows a configuration example of the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

Each of the switch winning information data tables shown in FIG. 199 is divided into n blocks (n is the number of times processing is repeated), and each block contains an input port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, and the like. And the address of the input level data area. The switch winning information data table used in the normal gaming state and the switch winning information data table used in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode include ports in which the logical correction value and the mask value are different. That is, in the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 198 (A), the mask value is set to a different value between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal gaming state, but the switch winning information data table shown in FIG. 199. In, different switch winning information data tables are used between the setting change mode (and the setting confirmation mode) and the normal game state, and different switch winning information data can be acquired.

In order to correspond to such a configuration, the switch input process 3 (FIG. 197) is changed as follows. For example, in step S2160, it is determined whether the setting change mode (or setting confirmation mode) or the normal gaming state is set, and the start address of the switch winning information data according to the determination result is set. Then, in step S2166, the correction value is masked with the mask value specified in the switch winning information data in step S2167 without determining whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

FIG. 200 is a flowchart of the setting change / confirmation process. The setting change / confirmation process is executed in step S2142 of the timer interrupt process. In the setting change / confirmation process shown in FIG. 200, the same processing steps as those of the timer interrupt processing described above in FIGS. 181 and 182 are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area (step S2064). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting status management area, the setting change / confirmation process is terminated and the process returns to the process before the interrupt. On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2065), a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2066), and a test signal is output. (Step S2067). Then, the setting process (FIG. 192) is executed (step S2068), and the setting display process (FIG. 193) is executed (step S2069).

FIG. 201 (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the switch input port 2.

The switch input port 2 is one of a group of ports to which the outputs of various switches and sensors are input, and is composed of 8 bits. In the illustrated example, the bit 7 detects a reception confirmation signal (ACK) from the payout control board 951 at level 1. At bit 6, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is detected at level 0. At bit 5, the signal level becomes 1 when the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. In bit 4, when the setting key 971 is turned ON, the signal level becomes 0. In bit 3, when the door opening sensor detects the opening of the door frame 3, the signal level becomes 1. In bit 2, when the magnetic detection switch (magnetic detection sensor) detects magnetism, the level becomes 0. Bits 1 and 0 are not used.

FIG. 201 (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting state management area.

As shown in FIG. 201 (B), the setting state management area is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are defined. Not. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 08H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is updated from 08H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

FIG. 202A is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command that notifies the recorded contents of the setting status management area. For example, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error where the output is 0, so either bit. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is created at least once in the power-on process. Specifically, it is created once in the case of hot start, RAM clear, and RAM abnormality, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, it is created twice, that is, when the power is turned on and when the setting is changed / confirmed.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, it notifies the setting confirmation mode, the setting change mode, and the state of the RAM abnormality in the above-described manner (see FIG. 184).

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is used. It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game command during the normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is advisable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc., the effect corresponding to the received command is performed. ), And the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. In addition, a small volume may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. This is because the player who cannot understand that the inconsistency of the game state has occurred unless any effect is performed until the predetermined condition is met, the special symbol variation display game does not start even if the starting port is won. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, thinking that the pachinko machine 1 is out of order. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, since the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, the function display such as the special symbol or the normal symbol in the function display unit 1400 is normally displayed. Will be done.

FIG. 202B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command. The power-on state command is a command that notifies whether or not a normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the setting state management area. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the normal game can be started. The series code for each pachinko machine model may be notified by using the lower byte of the power-on state command. For example, bits 6-4 can be used to identify eight series. The power-on state command may be another example shown in FIG. 220 (C). By using the power-on state command shown in FIG. 220 (C), the information recorded in the power-on buffer (game state before a power failure) can be notified to the peripheral control board 1510.

FIG. 202C is a diagram showing a configuration example of a return destination command when the power is turned on. The power-on return destination command is a command for notifying the game state related to the special symbol. For example, the power-on return destination command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is 31H, and the lower byte indicates the game state related to the special symbol. show. The return destination command when the power is turned on notifies the state of the special symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory when a power failure occurs. The return destination command when the power is turned on is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

FIG. 202 (D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a setting value command. The setting value command is a command for notifying the setting value. For example, the setting value command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte indicates A1H, and the lower byte indicates the setting value. The setting value command is sent at the time of recovery from a power failure that is neither the setting change mode nor the setting confirmation mode, at the end of the setting change mode, or at the end of the setting confirmation mode. In addition, it is transmitted at the start of a special symbol change or at the time of a change in the game state (at the start and end of a big hit, a probability change, a time reduction, etc.). As a result, even if the peripheral control board 1510 misses the set value command transmitted when the power is turned on, it is changed to the correct set value in the subsequent game (for example, the start of fluctuation of the special symbol), so that the setting is incorrect. The production is not performed based on the value. The effect based on the set value is an effect that suggests the set value by using an effect device such as a display, a lamp, a sound, or a movable body. The set value is suggested by generating it. This set value suggestion effect may include an effect of another aspect of the effect illustrated below, and may include a ghost. As a set value suggestion effect, the main liquid crystal display device 1600, which is an example of a display, displays an effect such as a notice corresponding to the set value, and changes the variation mode of the symbol from the normal time (for example, the variation of the left and right middle symbols). The start and confirmation timings are different from the normal timing (normally, each symbol starts to fluctuate at the same time, and in the case of high setting, the fluctuation starts in the order of left, middle, right, etc.), voice When is used, a notification sound corresponding to the set value is generated with a predetermined probability when the start opening is won, or a voice different from the normal time is generated during the production (male voice in normal time, female voice in high setting). Voice, etc.), etc.

FIG. 203 is a diagram showing commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in various states. In the following description, n is a counter value indicating a processing state related to the special symbol / special electric accessory, and m is a value corresponding to the set value.

As shown in the figure, in the hot start in which the normal game state is activated, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (310 nH) → the set value command (A10 mH). It is sent in order.

Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command ( It is transmitted in the order of A10mH).

Further, in the setting change mode, first, the power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted, then the setting value is changed in the setting change mode, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation is performed. The command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the set value command (A10mH) are transmitted in this order.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode, first, the power-on operation command (A002H) is transmitted, then the set value is confirmed, the setting key 971 is returned to the normal position, and then the power-on operation command (A001H) is performed. → Power-on status command (3001H) → Power-on return destination command (310nH) → Set value command (A10mH).

When the RAM is abnormal, the power-on operation command (A009H) is first transmitted, and the setting change mode is activated by the setting change operation (setting key 971 and RAM clear switch 954 are turned on) when the power is restored after the power is cut off. The power-on operation command (A003H) is transmitted. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the setting value command (A10mH). Will be sent.

When the RAM is abnormal, the power-on operation command (A009H) is first transmitted, and if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored after the power is turned off, the RAM abnormal state continues and the power-on operation command (A009H) is performed. ) Is sent. After that, after the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the normal position, the power-on operation command (A001H) → the power-on state command (3001H) → the power-on return destination command (3101H) → the setting value command (A10mH). Will be sent.

As described above, when the main control board 1310 is started in a normal gaming state, a command group (combination of a plurality of commands in a predetermined order) indicating that a plurality of commands return the power is peripheral at a predetermined timing. It is transmitted to the control board 1510. Therefore, when it is determined that the normal game state can be started after all the reception of a series of commands from A001H to A10mH is completed, and some commands of the series of commands cannot be received (missed), It is determined that the normal game state cannot be started, and the inability to start the normal game state is notified.

That is, in the same manner as the effect in which the game command is disabled described above, among the received game commands, an effect that satisfies a predetermined condition is performed (for example, the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc. are received. The effect corresponding to the command is performed), and the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred.

If the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, the peripheral control board 1510 supplements the set value command missed when the power is turned on by the set value command transmitted at the start of the special symbol variation display game, and starts the normal game. You may.

Further, when the peripheral control board 1510 does not receive the set value command, it receives the set value command when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the set value command with a predetermined initial value (for example, setting 1) as the set value when the power is turned on. It may be updated to the setting value corresponding to the command.

The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are usually transmitted continuously, so one of them is mainly controlled. All you have to do is send it to the board.

FIG. 204 is a diagram showing a state transition of a value set after the power is restored from the state before the power is cut off in the setting state management area.

The operation when the power of a pachinko machine having a setting function is turned on differs depending on whether the RAM clear switch 954 is operated or the setting key 971 is operated. There are multiple patterns for convenience.

<Pattern 1>
An operation example will be described in the case where the normal gaming state (VALUE_PLAY = 00H) is set when the power is cut off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, as shown in FIG. 204 (A). First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are not initialized. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 01H. Further, the base display 1317 displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control area including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is activated in the normal game state, and the value of the set state management area is maintained at 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds).

When the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 are maintained in the state before the power failure. Even if all the stored contents in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 are not maintained, at least an area in which information for returning to the game state before the power failure is stored (memory in which information about the game is stored). Areas (special symbols, areas related to ordinary symbols, areas related to prize balls, random numbers generated by the program (variable pattern random numbers, initial value random numbers, etc.)) need only be maintained, and are necessary to return to the gaming state before the power failure. The area in which the non-information is stored may be in a different state after the power is restored than before the power failure. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 00H. The same value (00H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds).

<Pattern 2-1>
As shown in FIG. 204 (B), in the operation example 1 in which the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the RAM clear switch 954 is operated when the power is turned on. Regardless of the presence / absence and the presence / absence of the operation of the setting key 971, the main control RAM 1312 initializes an area used as a game control area including a stack area other than the setting value and the base value. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

The initialization of the main control RAM 1312 in the pattern 2-1 can be performed by initializing the area used as the game control area including the stack area together with the storage area initialized by the initialization process already executed when a power failure occurs. good. For example, when the power supply is cut off during the initialization process of the main control RAM 1312, the remaining storage area for which the initialization process has not been completed may be initialized. On the other hand, regardless of the progress of the initialization process at the time of power failure, the area used as the game control area including the stack area of the main control RAM 1312 may be initialized after the power is restored.

If a power failure occurs during the initialization process, an area (for example, the RAM clear process in progress flag) for storing whether the main control RAM 1312 is in the initialization process is provided, and while the RAM clear process in progress flag is set, It is advisable to prohibit writing of data to the storage area to be initialized.

Further, the process of monitoring the power failure may be repeatedly executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in addition to the main loop (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22), for example, the power failure warning signal may be monitored by a timer interrupt.

The power failure monitoring process and the power outage process can be executed in the same process in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, and the normal game state, or in separate processes, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation. In the mode, it may be executed by a common process, and in the normal game state, it may be executed by another process. That is, the power failure monitoring process and the power cutoff process may be shared in at least two of the three or more states (operation modes) in the operation of the pachinko machine.

As described above, in the pattern 2-1 when the power is cut off in the setting change mode and the main control RAM 1312 is normal at the time of recovery from the power failure, the setting is always set regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Start in change mode. For example, if a power failure occurs during the setting change work in the hall, the setting change mode may be activated even when the power is restored. However, the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954 for activating the setting change mode when the power is restored may not be operated. Therefore, by controlling as in pattern 2-1 it is possible to prevent an unintended state (different from the setting change mode) when the power is restored.

For example, if only the setting key 971 is operated (the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated) when the power is restored, the device is started in the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode, or only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated. If (the setting key 971 is not operated), the main control RAM 1312 is initialized and the normal gaming state is activated, or if none of the switches is operated, the normal gaming state is activated. However, when controlled as in pattern 2-1 it always starts in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954.

<Pattern 2-2>
If the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored, the operation may be performed in another pattern shown in FIG. 204 (C), unlike the pattern 2-1. good. When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main control RAM 1312 The memory content of is not changed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 08H indicating an abnormality of the main control RAM 1312. Further, the base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code). The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing the normal game process.

That is, in pattern 2-1 the setting key and the RAM clear switch are unconditionally shifted to the setting change mode regardless of the state after the power is restored, but in pattern 2-2, the setting is made when the power is restored. When the operation to activate the setting change mode is performed by the key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954, the setting change mode is activated, and when the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are in other states, the game cannot be executed (RAM error). And. That is, in pattern 2-2, even if at least one of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 at the time of power recovery is operated, the normal game is not started as a RAM abnormal state, and the normal game is normally performed after passing through the setting change mode. Start the game. For this reason, when the operation to activate the setting change mode is not performed, the normal game is not executed in a state different from the setting change mode such as RAM error or the setting confirmation mode, and the game is canceled by notifying the hall. Employees may be prompted to activate the configuration change mode.

When a value (08H) indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change operation is performed without initializing the game control area and the stack area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. Stand by with the game stopped. The game stop state may be a game stop by executing an infinite loop on the main control MPU 1311 or a game stop by not executing the normal game process. After that, once the power is cut off, the setting key and the RAM clear switch are operated to the setting change mode, and the power is turned on, the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H, and it becomes the game control area of the main control RAM 1312. Clear the stack area in the game control area and start the setting change mode.

<Pattern 3-1, 3-2>
An operation example will be described when the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before and the main control RAM 1312 is normal when the power is restored as shown in FIG. 204 (D). First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 serves as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays the set value accompanying the setting change.

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays the current set value for confirming the setting.

When the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is used as a game control area including a stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area to be created. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds).

If the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated (OFF) and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) when the power is turned on, the stored contents of the main control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the normal game state, and the value of the setting state management area is updated to 00H. Further, the base display 1317 displays a base value indicating the performance of the pachinko machine after displaying a display indicating that the performance display has been switched to as an initial display when the power is turned on (for example, full blinking for 5 seconds). In this case, as shown in pattern 3-2 shown in FIG. 204 (E), the main control MPU 1311 may be started in the setting confirmation mode, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H (original value). The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the setting), and the base display 1317 may display the current set value for confirming the setting.

<Pattern 4>
As shown in FIG. 204 (F), an operation example when there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 at the time of recovery from a power failure will be described. First, when the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control RAM 1312 is a game control including the entire area stack area other than the set value and the base value. Initialize the area used as the area. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode, and the value of the setting state management area is 02H. Further, the base display 1317 displays for changing the setting.

When the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of turning on the power is other than the above, that is, when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated (OFF) at the time of turning on the power, the main operation is performed. The stored contents of the control RAM 1312 do not change. Further, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the game stopped state, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 08H. The same value (08H) may be set regardless of the original value. Further, the base display 1317 displays an error (for example, an error code).

If there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is cut off immediately before, if the main control RAM 1312 is initialized before the power is cut off, the main control RAM 1312 will not be initialized again when the power is restored (1). Initialize the device built into the main control MPU 1311. (2) Restart the hardware random number. (3) It is advisable to execute the main loop after executing at least one of setting interrupt enable.

Further, even if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 when the power is cut off immediately before, when the power is turned on, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are set before the determination of whether the state before the power failure is the RAM abnormality (step S211 in FIG. 179). Judge whether or not there is an operation of. Then, when the setting change operation (RAM clear switch 954 and setting key 971 is turned on) is detected when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is activated, but even if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is turned on (setting confirmation mode is set). The state of the RAM abnormality is maintained when the operation to start is performed, only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, or none of them is operated). That is, normally, when the setting change mode is started and the setting confirmation mode is started, the setting change mode processing and the setting confirmation mode processing are executed in the timer interrupt processing, but the power is turned on again from the RAM abnormal state. If so, different processes are executed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In other words, when the power is turned on again and recovered from the RAM abnormal state, when starting in the setting change mode, the setting change mode processing is executed in the timer interrupt processing as usual, but the setting confirmation mode is started. When doing so, a process different from the normal process is executed in the timer interrupt process.

In this way, when a value (08H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the game cannot be started even if the power is turned on again. However, since the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, it is not necessary to initialize the main control RAM 1312 again.

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 1 and its variations will be described using a time chart. The outline of the time chart described below is as follows.
-Time chart for normal setting changes (Fig. 205)
-Time chart for normal setting confirmation (Fig. 206)
-Time chart when the setting change mode is entered in the setting change mode at the time of a power failure, and the setting key 971 is OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 207).
-Time chart when shifting to the setting change mode in the setting change mode at the time of a power failure with the setting key 971 ON and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (FIG. 208).
-Time chart when shifting to the setting confirmation mode in the setting confirmation mode at the time of power failure with the setting key 971 OFF and the RAM clear switch 954 OFF after the power is restored (Fig. 209).

FIG. 205 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 205, since the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal. The display mode of the function display unit is as described in FIG. 184.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect (notification) in the setting change mode shown in FIG. 184 according to the received power-on command.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and is a base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6). Furthermore, by the second operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972), the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N + 1 to N + 2, and updates the base display 1317. The later set value N + 2 is displayed (T7). That is, in the setting change mode, the set value is changed in the range of 1 to 6 each time the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated, and is updated to 1 when the set value exceeds 6. NS.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the change of the set value is completed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, creates a power-on operation command (A0001H), and shifts to the normal gaming state. (T8). The created power-on operation command (A0001H) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing. By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the main control MPU 1311 finishes all lighting of the function display unit 1400 and starts displaying in the normal game state. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. In this way, by displaying the base display 1317 in a predetermined mode at the start of the normal game state, the end of the setting change mode can be clearly understood, and an operation error at the end of the setting change mode can be reduced. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on is 01H. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value. Both the power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) notify the normal game startable state, and are usually transmitted continuously. Therefore, one of them is the main control board. All you have to do is send it to.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification production of. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T9). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so the minimum output time of the security signal is set. This is to secure it.

FIG. 206 is a time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 206, the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated and the setting key 971 is turned ON when the power is turned on because the normal game state or the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned off immediately before. , The main control MPU 1311 is activated in the setting confirmation mode.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 01H in the setting state management area to set. Move to confirmation mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

After confirming the set value, the employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T6). When the value of the setting state management area becomes 00H, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310 nH), and a set value command (A10 mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value. In the setting confirmation mode, as a general rule, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized, so that the state before the power failure is transmitted as the lower byte of the return destination command when the power is turned on.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification production of. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T7).

FIG. 207 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 207, since the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting change mode. As shown in FIG. 204 (B), if the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is set in the setting change mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on. Indicates the case of starting.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 lights all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and is a base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power cutoff process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal is stopped from the reset circuit 1335, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power off processing, the power consumption during the power off processing can be reduced, and the reset due to the power supply (5V) being lowered before the power off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power off processing. It is preferable that the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening and closing of the large winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting port 2004, and the like is also turned off to stop the solenoid drive signal.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is started (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at the timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at the timing T12. Wait until the timing T13 to start the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 207, since 02H is recorded in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is set at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed regardless of the operation of the setting key 971 or the RAM clear switch 954. Move to. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are reinitialized in the same manner as in the shift to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and then the power failure process is executed, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power cutoff process. Therefore, the setting change mode is used during a power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM clear process may be executed when the power is restored so that the game control area is not initialized. After being initialized again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and bases the updated setting value. It is displayed on the display 1317.

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the change of the set value is completed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T14). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification production of. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T15). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so that the minimum security signal is used. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 208 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting change mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the main control MPU 1311 is started in a different operation mode by operating the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 when the power is turned on, even if the setting change mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the set value from N to N + 1, and is a base display. 1317 displays the updated set value N + 1 (T6).

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power cutoff process (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal is stopped from the reset circuit 1335, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power off processing, the power consumption during the power off processing can be reduced, and the reset due to the power supply (5V) being lowered before the power off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power off processing. It is preferable that the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening and closing of the large winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting port 2004, and the like is also turned off to stop the solenoid drive signal.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is started (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at the timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at the timing T12. Wait until the timing T13 to start the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch. The operation mode is changed depending on the signal level of 954. In the example shown in FIG. 208, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on again. Since the value (02H) indicates the setting change, the main control MPU 1311 is restarted in the setting change mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board start waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 02H. Will be done. The same value (02H) may be set regardless of the original value. When shifting to the setting change mode, the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are reinitialized in the same manner as in the shift to the normal setting change mode. Since the power failure is monitored after the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 is completed and then the power failure process is executed, the RAM clear process is not interrupted by the power cutoff process. Therefore, the setting change mode is used during a power failure. In this case, since the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized, the RAM clear process may be executed when the power is restored so that the game control area is not initialized. For example, in FIG. 186 described above, if the state before the power failure is changing the setting, YES in step S2015, branching to RESET_P_5A (step S2030 in FIG. 187), and executing the RAM abnormality initialization process (step S2034). However, if it branches to RESET_P_7 (S2036 in FIG. 187), the state before the power is cut off will be continued without executing the RAM error initialization processing step S2034. After being initialized again, the main control MPU 1311 turns on all the LEDs of the function display unit 1400 and starts outputting the security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 208, the setting change mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON. In other words, regarding the setting change mode, the setting change mode is activated by operating the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 to be ON when the power is turned on, and further, the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are set when the power is turned on. It is possible to start the setting change mode even if it is not ON.

Although it is indicated by a broken line at the timing T12, when the RAM clear switch 954 is OFF and the setting key 971 is operated OFF when the power is turned on again, unlike the time chart shown in FIG. 207, the setting state management area is displayed. You may record 00H and restart in a state where normal games cannot be executed (for example, RAM abnormality) without returning to the setting change mode. That is, in the operation pattern shown in FIG. 208, even in the setting change mode during a power failure, if the setting change operation is not performed when the power is restored, the system restarts in a RAM abnormal state. That is, if the power is cut off during the setting change mode, the normal game cannot be started unless the setting change mode is normally ended at some point.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A003H) indicating the transition to the setting change mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting change mode according to the received power-on command. Since the peripheral control board 1510 is reset to the initial state by shutting off the power supply, it receives the power-on operation command transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, and continues the setting change state.

When the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting change mode, the main control MPU 1311 detects the ON of the RAM clear switch 954, updates the setting value, and bases the updated setting value. It is displayed on the display 1317 (T14).

The employee of the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position when the change of the set value is completed. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting change mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (3101H), and a set value command (A10mH) to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the main control RAM 1312 is initialized in the setting change mode, the lower byte of the return destination command at power-on is 01H. As shown in FIG. 202 (D), m of the set value command (A10 mH) is a numerical value from 1 to 6 according to the set value. The power-on operation command (A0001H) and the power-on state command (3001H) both notify the normal game startable state, and are usually transmitted continuously, so one of them is mainly controlled. All you have to do is send it to the board.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification production of. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting change mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so that the minimum security signal is used. This is to secure the output time.

FIG. 209 is another time chart from the start to the end of the setting confirmation mode.

In the time chart shown in FIG. 209, if the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is cut off immediately before, the main control MPU 1311 is started in the setting confirmation mode regardless of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 when the power is turned on.

First, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T1), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is activated (T2).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check and starts the main control program at timing T3. After that, the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 are stored in the register at the timing T4, and the activation of the peripheral control board 1510 is waited until the timing T5.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is activated by the start of energization, the customer waiting effect is started. The peripheral control board 1510 may start the customer waiting effect after receiving the command from the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 reads the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 from the register at the timing T5 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and records 02H in the setting state management area to set. Move to change mode. Further, the main control MPU 1311 starts to output a security signal.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on operation command.

After that, when the power supply to the main control board is stopped, the main control MPU 1311 detects a power failure and executes a power cutoff process, and the main control MPU 1311 stops the operation (T7). Then, the output of the reset signal is stopped from the reset circuit 1335, the display of the set value by the base display 1317 disappears, and the output of the security signal is stopped (T8). In the power off processing, the output of the security signal may be stopped and the base display 1317 may be turned off. For example, by turning off the output port of the security signal and the output port to the base display 1317 by the power off processing program, the output of the security signal can be stopped and the base display 1317 can be turned off.

By turning off the output port in the power off processing, the power consumption during the power off processing can be reduced, and the reset due to the power supply (5V) being lowered before the power off processing is completed can be prevented. For example, it is effective to turn off the output port before calculating the checksum in the power off processing. It is preferable that the signal output port to the solenoid that controls the opening and closing of the large winning openings 2005, 2006, the second starting port 2004, and the like is also turned off to stop the solenoid drive signal.

After that, when power is supplied to the main control board 1310 and the 5V power supply is turned on (T9), a reset signal is output from the reset circuit 1335 and the main control MPU 1311 is started (T10).

The main control MPU 1311 executes the program from the start address of the program code by the reset signal. Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 executes a security check, starts the main control program at the timing T11, and then stores the signal level of the setting key 971 and the signal level of the RAM clear switch 954 in the register at the timing T12. Wait until the timing T13 to start the peripheral control board 1510.

The main control MPU 1311 refers to the value in the setting state management area. In the example shown in FIG. 209, the RAM clear switch 954 is turned off and the setting key 971 is turned on so that the setting confirmation mode is set when the power is turned on again. Since the value (01H) indicates the setting confirmation, the system is restarted in the setting confirmation mode at the timing T13 when the peripheral control board startup waiting time has elapsed, and the value of the setting state management area is maintained at 01H. The same value (01H) may be set regardless of the original value. After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts outputting a security signal. That is, in the time chart shown in FIG. 209, the setting confirmation mode can be activated even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON. In other words, the setting confirmation mode is activated by operating the setting key 971 to be ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is being operated to OFF when the power is turned on, and further, the setting key 971 is not ON when the power is turned on. It is also possible to start the setting confirmation mode.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command (A002H) indicating the transition to the setting confirmation mode, and transmits it to the peripheral control board 1510 at a predetermined timing.

The peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect in the setting confirmation mode according to the received power-on command.

Even if the RAM clear switch 954 (also used as the setting change switch 972) is operated in the setting confirmation mode and the main control MPU 1311 detects that the RAM clear switch 954 is ON, the set value is used as the base indicator without updating the set value. It is continuously displayed in 1317.

After confirming the set value, the employee in the hall operates the setting key 971 to the OFF position. When the main control MPU 1311 detects the OFF edge of the setting key 971, it exits the setting confirmation mode, records 00H in the setting state management area, and shifts to the normal gaming state (T15). By recording 00H in the setting state management area, it becomes possible to execute the processing during the normal game in the timer interrupt processing. Further, the base display 1317 blinks and displays all the LEDs for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), and then displays the base value in the normal gaming state. Further, the main control MPU 1311 transmits a power-on state command (3001H), a power-on return destination command (310 nH), and a set value command (A10 mH) to the peripheral control board 1510.

The peripheral control board 1510 knows that the normal game can be started by the received power-on state command, and executes the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect). The peripheral control board 1510 starts the effect in the normal game state (for example, the customer waiting effect) after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command. You may. Further, the peripheral control board 1510 stops the notification effect during the setting change after a predetermined delay time elapses after knowing that the normal game can be started by the power-on state command (the effect in the normal game state ( For example, the effect may be switched so as to start the customer waiting effect). During the predetermined delay time, it is advisable to perform a notification effect during the setting change by some effect devices. For example, the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the sound return to the effect in the normal gaming state, and the decorative lamp is changing the setting. Continue the notification production of. Further, as for the continuation of the notification effect by the decorative lamp, even if some decorative lamps (for example, the frame side) continue the notification effect and the other decorative lamps (for example, the panel side) return to the normal gaming state effect. good.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 stops the output of the security signal after a predetermined time (for example, 50 milliseconds) is delayed from the end of the setting confirmation mode (T16). This is because if the setting change mode ends in an extremely short time and the security signal is output at all or only for a short time, the hall computer cannot grasp the transition to the setting change mode, so that the minimum security signal is used. This is to secure the output time.

210 to 212 are diagrams showing a configuration example of a jackpot determination threshold table. The jackpot determination threshold table stores the hit determination threshold value of the jackpot determination random value for drawing a jackpot of a special symbol.

The jackpot threshold value determination table shown in FIG. 210 is composed of an address table for selecting a set value table and a determination threshold value table for each set value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 210 is an example of determining a jackpot when the random value for jackpot determination is larger than the threshold value defined in the table.

In the setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each setting value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the high-order byte is a fixed value, only the low-order byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each set value stores the threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state) and the threshold value at the time of high probability (probability change state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for selecting the set value table is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current set value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, the threshold value for jackpot determination is acquired from the selected threshold value determination table with the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset. Then, when the big hit determination random value acquired at the time of winning the starting port is equal to or more than the acquired threshold value, it is determined to be a big hit, and when it is less than the threshold value, it is determined to be a deviation.

The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is composed of an address table for selecting a set value table and a determination threshold table for each set value. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 is an example of determining a jackpot when the random value for jackpot determination is in the range from the lower limit to the upper limit defined in the table.

In the setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each setting value is defined, and each data may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the high-order byte is a fixed value, only the low-order byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each set value has a lower threshold at low probability (normal state), an upper threshold at low probability (normal state), a lower threshold at high probability (probability change state), and a lower threshold at high probability (probability change state). Store the upper threshold.

At the time of jackpot determination, the pointer address defined in the address table for selecting the set value table is acquired, and the threshold value determination table of the current set value is selected using this value as an offset. Then, with the probability change state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) as an offset, it is determined whether the block is a low probability block or a high probability block of the selected threshold value judgment table, and the lower limit threshold value and the upper limit for the jackpot judgment are determined. Get the threshold. Then, when the jackpot determination random value acquired at the time of winning the starting port is equal to or greater than the acquired lower limit threshold value and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is out of the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be out of alignment.

The jackpot judgment threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes an address table for selecting a low-probability setting value table, a judgment threshold table for each setting value for low probability, an address table for selecting a high-probability setting value table, and each setting for high probability. It consists of a judgment threshold table for values. The jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 211 includes a low-probability table and a high-probability table integrally, whereas the jackpot determination threshold table shown in FIG. 212 includes a low-probability table and a high-probability table. It is configured separately.

In the low probability setting value table selection address table, the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each low probability (normal state) setting value is defined, and in the high probability setting value table selection address table. Defines the pointer address of the judgment threshold table selected in each set value of high probability (probability change state). The data defined in each setting value table selection address table may be configured as a 2-byte value. If the high-order byte is a fixed value, only the low-order byte may be defined. The judgment threshold table for each set value for low probability stores the lower limit threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state) and the upper limit threshold value at the time of low probability (normal state). The judgment threshold table for each set value for high probability stores the lower limit threshold value at the time of high probability (normal state) and the upper limit threshold value at the time of high probability (normal state).

At the time of jackpot determination, the probability variation state flag (0: low probability, 1: high probability) determines whether the address table is for selecting the low probability setting value table or the high probability setting value table, and is determined. The set value is acquired as an offset from the address table for selecting the set value table, and the judgment threshold table corresponding to the current set value is selected according to the acquired offset. Then, when the jackpot determination random value acquired at the time of winning the starting port is equal to or greater than the acquired lower limit threshold value and equal to or less than the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be a jackpot, and when it is out of the range from the lower limit threshold value to the upper limit threshold value, it is determined to be out of alignment.

[12-17. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 2]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting changing function will be described. In the embodiment described below, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972. However, the initialization function of the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 and the initialization function of the RAM 1312 are used. In order to distinguish it from the setting change function, the operation related to the change of the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

213 and 214 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts from the process of address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2200). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2201), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2202). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2203), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2204). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then to OFF, the power failure signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal value.

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2205). As the register, any one of a plurality of general-purpose registers (storage means for temporarily storing information related to the operation in the operation of the process) provided in advance in the main control MPU 1311 may be used. The general-purpose register is divided into bank 0 and bank 1, and the register of bank 0 is used in step S2205. The register is provided in the main control RAM 1312 and is erased without holding the information in the event of a power failure, which is different from the area of the RAM in which the information is backed up in the event of a power failure. Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are being operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely started, a hole is created while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if an employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2206). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the machine waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2206.

After that, the sub-start wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for start (step S2207). The start-up wait of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from the power-on until the first command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2208). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 stands by in step S2208.

After that, the set value confirmation process is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range, and it is determined whether the value in the setting state management area is within the normal range (step S2209). Details of the set value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 215.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2210). This is because the information used in one process does not affect the other process in order to ensure the independence between the process outside the game control area and the process inside the game control area. After that, a RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on is executed to determine an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2211). Details of the RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on will be described later with reference to FIG. 216. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2212).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2213), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2214). The B register and C register used in steps S2213 and S2214 are general-purpose registers. The general-purpose register of bank 0 is used in the process when the power is turned on.

The value set in the setting state management area in the second embodiment is different from that shown in FIG. 201 (B) in the above-described embodiment, and if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 as shown in FIG. 220 (A). 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the second example 2 is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is updated from 03H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the determination result is stored in the C register (steps S2215 and S2216), and the process proceeds to step 2219. Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) out of the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power was cut off last time, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed (the power off processing was executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 because it is not (the power off processing is not executed normally).

Then, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2217), and the information in the setting state management area is set in the B register. (Step S2218), and the process proceeds to step 2219.

After that, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is tentatively recorded in the setting state management area (step S2219).

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2220). As the register in which the value of the PF port is stored, a general-purpose register different from the register temporarily set in S2213 and S2214 is used. After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2221). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when a power failure occurred (step S2222). For example, when the value of the setting state management area is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2230.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2223). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined by using the determination result stored in the C register in steps S2213 and S2217 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2236.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2224). For example, if the value of the saved setting state management area is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2236. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2225). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality tentatively recorded in the setting state management area in step S2214 is returned to the normal state. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2225, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2226 and S2231 to step S2235 is different. In this way, since the value of the setting state management area differs between the normal RAM clear processing and the RAM clear processing associated with the setting change processing, the caller can be distinguished even if the programs for both RAM clear processes are shared. , It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the size of the program size can be reduced.

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2226). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON, the process proceeds to step S2235.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be cleared by turning off the power once and then turning on the power by performing the setting change operation. That is, when it is determined in step S2221 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are being operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM error (03H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2230), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM error always goes through a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of power failure is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the set value is changed.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the game state information at the time of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the state before the power failure occurs (step S2227).

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2228). Then, if the setting key 971 is operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2229), and the process proceeds to S2236. .. That is, even if the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the normal gaming state is set. If the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode and the setting key 971 is not operated when the power is turned on, the mode may shift to the same power failure confirmation mode as before the power failure, instead of the normal gaming state.

Since steps S2225 to S2229 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2226) and the setting key 971 Any of the determination of the operation (step S2228) of the above may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2228). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2226).

If YES is determined in step S2221 or step S2222, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2230). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2231). For example, an abnormality outside the game control area can be determined based on the RAM abnormality determination result set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in step S2266 described above. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2235.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM clear process outside the game control area is executed. That is, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2322), and the out-of-game area RAM error processing is executed (step S2233). The details of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area in step S2232 is restored (step S2234).

Then, the set value in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the area other than the set state management area, and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2235). That is, the RAM clearing process outside the game control area is not executed unless the setting is changed. When a RAM is abnormal outside the game control area, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area and the game is stopped, as in the case of a RAM error in the game control area. It is not possible. However, while the condition for clearing the RAM outside the game control area is only the setting change, the condition for clearing the RAM inside the game control area is the setting change and the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (even if no RAM error has occurred). When the RAM is forcibly cleared by the operation of the employee).

In the RAM clearing process in the game area in step S2235, excluding the set value and the set state management area causes damage to the hall side when the set value is set high due to an illegal RAM clear operation by the player. This is because if a problem (RAM abnormality) occurs during the game at the high setting and the game is stopped, the RAM clear operation changes the setting from the high setting to the low setting, causing damage to the player.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2236). This is because when the power is turned off without clearing the RAM while the command is stored in the command buffer and the power is restored without clearing the RAM, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, when the power is cut off during the transmission of the variation command, the symbol command may be transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. Then, if only the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that it is abnormal. Further, when an untransmitted command in the processing related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command by transmitting the untransmitted command during the setting processing after the power is restored. There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2236.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2236, the command buffer may be cleared only when the setting change process is started and the setting confirmation process is started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation mode, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is advisable to clear the command buffer when shifting to the setting confirmation mode.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initially set (step S2237), and the hardware random numbers (for example, winning random numbers) built in the main control MPU 1311 are activated (step S2238). By activating the hardware random number in step S2238, the hardware random number is updated even in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, but the hardware random number is activated at the end of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. You may. Then, the power-on setting process is executed (step S2239). Details of the power-on setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 219.

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2240), and the process proceeds to the main control side main process (FIG. 221).

FIG. 215 is a flowchart of the set value confirmation process. The set value confirmation process is executed in step S2209 of the power-on process (FIG. 213), determines whether the set value in the set state management area is within the normal range, and determines whether the value in the set state management area is within the normal range. do. The setting value confirmation process may be executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when the setting change mode ends or the setting confirmation mode ends. Further, it may be executed at the start of a special symbol change or at the time of a change in the gaming state (at the start and end of a big hit, a probability change, a time reduction, etc.).

In the set value confirmation process, first, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a value other than the value originally recorded in the setting state management area is set (step S2250). As shown in FIG. 220 (A), 00H to 03H are recorded in the setting state management area. Therefore, if a value of 04H or more is set, it is abnormal, and the process proceeds to step S2252.

On the other hand, if a normal value (03H or less) is set in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the set value is within a predetermined range (step S2251). For example, in the pachinko machine 1 in which the setting can be selected in stages from 1 to 6, the value of the work in which the setting value is stored corresponds to 0 to 5 (when setting 1 = 0, when setting 6 = In the case of 5), if a value of 6 or more is stored, it is determined that the value is out of the predetermined range.

If the set value is out of the predetermined range, a value (03H) indicating a RAM error is recorded in the set state management area (step S2252), the set value is initialized to 0 (step S2253), and the process returns to the power-on processing. .. On the other hand, if the set value is within the predetermined range, the process returns to the power-on processing.

Regarding the values and the set values recorded in the set state management area, it is determined whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal even during the progress of the game (every start of fluctuation, when the game state is switched, etc.). Therefore, the condition for determining the RAM abnormality regarding the set state management area and the set value during the game, and the RAM abnormality when the power is turned on (the work area in the game area excluding the set state management area and the set value, and the work area outside the game area). The two conditions for determining (work RAM abnormality) are different. Some of these two RAM abnormality determination conditions may be the same. For example, if it is determined whether the setting state management area and the set value are abnormal even when the power is turned on, it can be said that the two determination conditions are partially the same.

In this way, the RAM abnormality judgment conditions are different if the RAM abnormality judgment regarding the set value is performed only when the power is turned on. This is because it is desirable to detect an abnormality at an early stage and shorten the period in which the disadvantage occurs because the person is disadvantaged.

In addition, by making the RAM abnormality determination process related to the set state management area and the set value into a subroutine during the game, the same program can be used multiple times by calling the subroutine as needed while the game is in progress to determine the RAM abnormality. The size of the program can be reduced without providing it in place.

Further, although the setting state management area is excluded from the RAM abnormality determination target when the power is turned on, it may be handled as the RAM abnormality determination target in the same manner as other areas of the main control RAM 1312. By setting the setting state management area as the target for determining the RAM abnormality when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is set before the power failure, and when the RAM abnormality is determined when the power is restored, the RAM abnormality is prioritized. Therefore, if an abnormality occurs in the value of the setting state management area (that is, a RAM abnormality), it is desirable to initialize the value recorded in the setting state management area. In this case, the storage area of the main control RAM 1312 in which the set value is stored may be the target of the RAM abnormality determination at the time of turning on the power or may be excluded from the target of the RAM abnormality determination.

As for the priority order in the determination at the time of power-on, the RAM abnormality has the highest priority, and the normal gaming state has the lowest priority. Further, entering the setting change mode has a higher priority than entering the setting confirmation mode or executing the RAM clear process by the RAM clear operation. In this way, by executing the determination process in the order of the priority of the derived states, it is possible to accurately derive the high priority state even when a plurality of conditions are satisfied after the power is restored.

FIG. 216 is a flowchart of the RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on. The power-on out-of-game area RAM confirmation process is executed in step S2211 of the power-on time process (FIG. 213), and determines an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2260), and sets the stack pointer value outside the game area value in the stack pointer (step S2661). , All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the caller are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2262). A stack area outside the game control area may be used as a backup buffer for storing all registers in a process executed outside the game control area.

Then, it is determined whether or not the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has already been initialized by the first power-on or the like (step S2663). Specifically, if the value of the power-down check area (EX_PDIND) is 5 AH, it can be determined that the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized by the first power-on or the like.

If the main control RAM 1312 has not been initialized by the first power-on or the like, the process proceeds to step S2266 without executing steps S2264 to S2265. On the other hand, if the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized by the first power-on or the like, a checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated (step S2264), and is the calculated checksum normal? Is determined (step S2265).

If the calculated checksum is normal, the process proceeds to step S2267. On the other hand, if the calculated checksum is abnormal, the RAM abnormality determination result value (01H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area (step S2266), and the process proceeds to step S2271. In addition, based on the value set in the RAM abnormality determination area outside the game area in S2266, the RAM abnormality outside the game control area is determined in S2231.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the check sum calculated in step S2265 is normal, the LED check timer is set to 5 seconds, the LED check timer is activated (step S2267), and the LED blinking cycle timer is set to the blinking cycle value (600). (Milliseconds) is set (step S2268), and the mode switching time (5 seconds) is set in the mode switching time timer (step S2269). The LED blinking cycle timer is a timer for blinking and displaying the first two digits (or all four digits) of the base display 1317, and becomes one blinking cycle when the time of the LED blinking cycle timer is up. The mode switching time timer is a timer for controlling mode switching in the base display 1317, and switches to the base display mode when the mode switching time timer times up.

After that, 0 is set in the performance display monitor display management area to initialize (step S2270), and the process proceeds to step S2271.

After that, the power-down check area is initialized to 00H (step S2271).

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the caller's processing, which was saved in the register save buffer outside the game area, are restored (step S2272), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is used. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2273), and the process returns to the power-on processing.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing. The out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing is executed in step S2233 of the power-on processing (FIG. 214), and the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is initialized.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2280), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2281), and sets the stack pointer value. All the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the caller are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2282). A stack area outside the game control area may be used as a backup buffer for storing all registers in a process executed outside the game control area.

Then, the RWM initialization process outside the used area is executed to initialize the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2283). Details of the RWM initialization process outside the used area will be described later with reference to FIG. 218.

After that, the RAM normal determination value (00H) is set in the RAM abnormality determination area (EX_RWMEROR) outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2284). Based on the value set in the non-game area RAM abnormality determination area in step S2284, it is determined in step S2231 whether or not the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal at the next power-on.

Then, 5 seconds is set in the LED check timer, the LED check timer is started (step S2285), the blinking cycle value (600 milliseconds) is set in the LED blinking cycle timer (step S2286), and the mode switching time timer is set to the mode. The switching time (5 seconds) is set (step S2287). These timer values are initial settings for displaying the base value on the base display 1317.

Then, all the register values saved in the register save buffer outside the game area (register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the processing of the caller saved in step S2262) are restored (step S2288). , The stack pointer value saved in the SP save buffer outside the game area is restored (step S2289), and the process returns to the power-on processing of the caller.

FIG. 218 is a flowchart of the RWM initialization process outside the used area. The out-of-use RWM initialization process is executed in step S2283 of the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing, and initializes the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312.

First, the main control MPU 1311 writes 00H to a work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and initializes it (step S2290). Then, 00H is written to the stack area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 to initialize it (step S2291). After that, the process returns to the out-of-game area RAM error processing.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart of the power-on setting process. The power-on setting process is a subroutine, and is executed in step S2239 of the power-on process (FIG. 214) to execute the initial setting at power-on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates a power-on operation command, and sets the created command in the transmission information storage area (step S2300). As will be described later in FIG. 220B, the power-on operation command is a command consisting of 2 bytes for notifying the recorded contents of the setting state management area, and the upper byte is A0H and the lower byte is the setting status management. It is the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the area.

Next, the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 in the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 are set to 1 which is an initial value. The other bits may be set to 0 (step S2301). Setting the bit corresponding to the setting key 971 of the input level data 2 area and the bit corresponding to the setting change switch 972 to 1 is because the bit of the switch is detected by 1 at the next timer interrupt and the ON edge is incorrect. This is to prevent it from being made.

Next, the backup flag is cleared (step S2302).

After that, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the set state management area (step S2303). If the value indicating the game startable state is not recorded in the setting status management area, it means that it is in the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM error, so the setting process at power-on is terminated and the caller's caller Return to processing.

On the other hand, if a value (00H) indicating a game startable state is recorded in the set state management area, the normal game can be started, so the work in the game control area depends on whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is initialized. Initialize the area (step S2304).

After that, a power-on state command is created, and the created command is stored in the transmission information storage area (step S2305). As shown in FIG. 220C, the power-on state command is a command composed of 2 bytes, in which the upper byte indicates the state before a power failure and the upper byte indicates a state before a power failure.

Then, a return destination command at power-on is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2306). As shown in FIG. 202 (C), the power-on return destination command is a command composed of 2 bytes for notifying the game state related to the special symbol, and the upper byte is 31H and the lower byte is special when a power failure occurs. The state of the symbol and the operating state of the special electric accessory are shown. The return destination command when the power is turned on is transmitted once when the power is turned on.

Further, a set value command is created, and the created command is set in the transmission information storage area (step S2307). As shown in FIG. 202 (D), the set value command is a command composed of two bytes for notifying the set value, the upper byte indicates A1H, and the lower byte indicates the set value.

In addition to the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command, a special symbol hold number command indicating the number of hold of the special symbol variation display game is transmitted to display the hold number on the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It may be restored to the state before the power failure occurred. The order in which the special symbol hold count command is sent is transmitted after the power-on state command, power-on return destination command, and set value command are transmitted, before these commands are transmitted, or during the transmission of these commands. You may.

After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

The power-on setting process is always executed regardless of the setting change mode. Further, the power-on setting process is called from the setting process (FIG. 224) when the OFF setting key 971 is detected and the setting change / confirmation process is completed. At this time, since 00H is recorded in the setting state management area, all the processes from S2300 to S2307 are executed.

When the setting change / confirmation process is executed, the power-on setting process is called from step S2239 of the power-on process and step S2355 of the setting process, so that the power-on operation command is transmitted twice. On the other hand, when the setting change / confirmation process is not executed, the power-on operation command is transmitted once only by the power-on setting process called from step S2239 of the power-on process. The power-on operation command is transmitted to identify the state of the main control board 1310 (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, RAM abnormality, etc.) on the peripheral control board 1510. By receiving the command, the peripheral control board 1510 performs notification corresponding to a state such as a setting change mode, a setting confirmation mode, and a RAM abnormality.

In the setting / confirmation change mode, the setting adjustment function by the player (for example, the adjustment of the volume and brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3) is stopped, and the adjustment by the employees of the hall (peripheral board box 1520). (Adjustment of volume and brightness by the volume provided in) may be effective. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the setting adjustment function by the player until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

Further, in both the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the full screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 may be used to display whether the setting change mode, the setting confirmation mode, or the RAM is in an abnormal state. .. In this case, a voice message indicating whether the mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be output. Further, the notification may be performed by using a part of the lamps or all the lamps (the lamps provided in the door frame 3 may be included).

FIG. 220B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on operation command. The power-on operation command is a command for notifying the recorded contents of the setting status management area, and the value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting status management area. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202 (A), in another example 2, when a RAM abnormality occurs, the lower byte becomes 04H.

Specifically, the power-on operation command is composed of 2 bytes, the upper byte is A0H, and the lower byte indicates the recorded content of the setting state management area. The value of the lower byte stores the value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the setting state management area. This is because the value of the setting state management area is 00H during a normal game, so if the value sent as a command is 00H, it cannot be distinguished from a hardware error where the output is 0, so either bit. Is set to 1.

The power-on operation command is created at least once in the power-on process. Specifically, the A001H or A004H command is created once in response to hot start, RAM clear, and RAM error, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the A002H or A003H command is created in the power-on processing. After that, it is created twice as an A001H command at the end of setting change / confirmation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on operation command, the peripheral control board 1510 is described above according to the normal game start ready state (A001H), the setting confirmation mode (A002H), the setting change mode (A003H), and the RAM abnormality state (A004H). (See FIG. 184). Although the notification of the normal game startable state is not shown in FIG. 184, a demo screen is displayed and a standby state for explaining the game content is produced.

If the peripheral control board 1510 receives a game command during a normal game without receiving A001H in the power-on operation command, the game state may be inconsistent, so the received game command is used. It is determined to be invalid, and the game operation (effect, etc.) for the game command is not started. However, if the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game command during the normal game is continuously transmitted a predetermined number of times), the peripheral control board 1510 may have missed the power-on operation command (A001H). It is advisable to cancel the invalidation of the received game command and perform the effect corresponding to the game command.

In addition, in the state where the game command is invalidated, among the received game commands, an effect satisfying a predetermined condition is performed (for example, for the operation of the symbol, the lamp, the movable body, the voice, etc., the effect corresponding to the received command is performed. ), And the background of the display device or a predetermined lamp may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. In addition, a small volume may be used to notify that an inconsistency in the gaming state has occurred. This is because the player who cannot understand that the inconsistency of the game state has occurred unless any effect is performed until the predetermined condition is met, the special symbol variation display game does not start even if the starting port is won. This is to prevent troubles that may occur in the hall, thinking that the pachinko machine 1 is out of order. Even if the peripheral control board 1510 invalidates the game command, since the main control board 1310 is executing the normal game processing, the function display such as the special symbol or the normal symbol in the function display unit 1400 is normally displayed. Will be done.

FIG. 220 (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a power-on state command. Unlike the one shown in FIG. 202 (B) in the above-described embodiment, the power-on state command of the second embodiment defines four states of 01H, 02H, 03H, and 04H. That is, the power-on state command is a command that notifies whether the normal game can be started based on the recorded contents of the power-on state buffer, and further notifies the state before the power failure. For example, the power-on state command is composed of 2 bytes, and if the upper byte is 30H and the lower byte is 01H, it indicates that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized to notify the RAM clear. Further, when the lower byte is 02H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is a low probability / non-time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, when the lower byte is 03H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is a high probability / time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and the normal game can be started. Further, when the lower byte is 04H, it indicates that the state before the power failure is the low probability / time saving state, the main control RAM 1312 returns without being initialized, and the normal game can be started.

Further, as described above, the power-on state buffer is a storage area for storing information on the gaming state at the time of the power-out in order to restore the state before the power-out occurs. , The value obtained by adding 1 to the value of the power-on state buffer is stored. For example, in the low probability non-time saving, 1 is stored in the power-on state buffer, and 2 obtained by adding 1 to this value is stored in the power-on state command. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, since the power-on state buffer is 0, 1 is stored in the power-on state command, and it is possible to notify that the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized.

FIG. 221 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2240 of the power-on process (FIG. 214).

First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2310). In another example 2, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, when it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power failure has occurred.

If the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, and the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2311). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2312 to S2319) is executed. In the power outage process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2312). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2313). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2314), the power-off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off (step S2315). Details of the process when the power is turned off will be described later with reference to FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2316).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the backed up work area is normally held. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2317). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting status management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area between the time the power is turned on and the time the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2318). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, RAM protect is enabled (write prohibited), the prohibited area is written to the RAM protect register, writing to the predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2319), and the process waits until the power is restored from the power failure. (infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. Therefore, by invalidating the prohibited area of the RAM protect register, the reset function by accessing the main control RAM 1312 is canceled (not reset), and the entire area can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

FIG. 222 is a flowchart of processing when the power is turned off. The power-off processing is executed in step S2315 of the main control side main processing (FIG. 221), and necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the value of the stack pointer in the SP save buffer outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2320), sets the stack pointer value outside the game area to the stack pointer (step S2321), and sets the stack pointer value. All register values are stored in the register save buffer outside the game area (step S2322).

Subsequently, the checksum outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is calculated and stored in the checksum storage area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2323). After that, 5AH is set in the power-down check area (EX_PDIND), and it is recorded that the RAM area outside the game area of the main control RAM 1312 has been initialized (step S2324). If 5 AH is recorded in the power-down check area, the power failure process is being executed normally. In this sense, the power-down check area and the backup flag of the RAM in the game control area are substantially the same. Since the power failure process is executed normally, it is already determined that the area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is normal, and as a result, if 5AH is set in the power down check area, the main control The initialization of the area outside the game control area of the RAM 1312 has been completed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, two types of flags indicating that the power failure processing has been normally executed are provided in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, respectively. .. This is because the determination is made twice between the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area, and since one storage area is not shared between the inside of the game control area and the outside of the game control area, it is independent. This is because it is desirable to process it. For example, if there is only one flag indicating that the power failure processing has been executed normally, 5AH is mistakenly set in the flag, and if the flag is restored without performing the power failure processing, it is erroneously determined that the power failure processing has been executed normally. Is judged. By making a double judgment in this way, the possibility of erroneous judgment is reduced.

Further, the two flags are provided in separate regions as regions (for example, regions in which the lower bytes (** 00H to ** FFH) or upper bytes (00 ** H or 01 ** H) of the address do not overlap). Therefore, even if the data is rewritten due to a defect such as noise, it can be restored correctly.

Then, all the register values of the bank (bank 0 or bank 1) used in the caller's processing, which was saved in the register save buffer outside the game area, are restored (step S2325), and the SP save buffer outside the game area is used. The saved stack pointer value is restored (step S2326), and the caller is returned.

FIG. 223 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2330). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other can be used as a register group of bank 1, and bank switching is performed. It is configured so that the registers of both banks cannot be used without. Register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, although the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupting and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2331).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2332). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

The switch input process 1 in step S2332 is a process related to a winning signal, and the switch input process 2 in step S2080 in FIG. 191 is a process related to the input of a fraud detection sensor (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor, vibration sensor, etc.). Therefore, in the timer interrupt process executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, since it is determined as NO in step S2335, winning detection is performed, but fraud is not detected by the fraud detection sensor. Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball is not paid out or the fluctuation display is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered desirable that the fraud is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. For example, since the operation of changing the setting and confirming the setting is performed with the door open, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 connected to the outer frame 2 by the hinge member are in a state of being easily shaken, so that the vibration sensor can be used. There is a possibility of false detection of vibration. Therefore, such false alarms can be prevented by stopping the detection of fraud by the fraud detection sensor in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In addition, the employees in the hall have magnets for collecting the balls that have fallen on the floor, and it is possible to prevent false alarms of the magnets held by the employees when changing settings or confirming settings. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has means for invalidating (or limiting, regulating, suppressing, etc.) fraud detection, and after shifting to normal game processing (for example, initial setting processing at the time of power-on). After the end of), the fraud detection is enabled, and in a specific gaming state (for example, during the setting process), the fraud detection is invalidated (or restricted, regulated, suppressed, etc.) by the above means.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person who intends to commit fraud (Mr. Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2333). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the initial values of the large hit symbol determination random number and the small hit symbol determination random number updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 221 are changed. Update the random number for determining the initial value. In the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 223, the random number is updated even when the setting process for changing the set value is executed. This is because the hardware random number that determines the win is updated regardless of whether the setting is being changed or the setting is confirmed, so the random number generated by the software is also updated at the same timing as the hardware random number is started, that is, By updating during the process of setting change and setting confirmation, inconsistency between hardware random numbers and software random numbers is unlikely to occur, and the design value of the expected value of the production in the game and the expected value from which the jackpot is derived at the time of a specific production It is possible to suppress the deviation from.

After that, the set value confirmation process (FIG. 215) is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2334). The set value confirmation process is periodically executed in the timer interrupt process, but even if the set value confirmation process is not executed in the timer interrupt process, it is at the start of fluctuation and at the time of switching the game state (for example, the jackpot probability). It is advisable to perform it when a specific condition is satisfied, such as at the time of switching, at the start or end of a jackpot game, at the start or end of a time-saving state, or at the time of fraud detection (for example, at the time of opening a door or at the time of magnetic detection). Even if the determination is not made periodically in a short cycle as in the execution of timer interrupt processing, the consumption of resources of the main control MPU 1311 can be suppressed if the determination is made when a specific condition is satisfied.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2335). By confirming the value of the setting state management area after the setting value confirmation process (step S2334, FIG. 215), when the setting value is determined to be abnormal, the value of the setting state management area immediately after is confirmed (S2335). It is controlled so that the normal game processing is not executed. If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2080 in FIG. On the other hand, if the value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the LED common port is turned off (step S2336). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. And prevent the LED from flickering.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2337), and the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2338). Then, the test signal output process is executed, and the test signal is output (step S2339). Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2340). Before and after the start of execution of the process for outputting the test signal, the stack pointer and the register are saved and restored after the process is completed, as in the case of other out-of-game area processing. Since the test signal processing does not control the progress of the game, it is executed as a processing outside the game control area. If the test signal processing is executed as a process in the game control area but does not affect the game, it may be executed as a process in the game control area. When the test signal processing is executed as the processing in the game control area, it is not necessary to save and restore the flag registers (steps S2337 and S2340) executed before and after the test signal output processing (step S2339).

Then, the setting process is executed (step S2341). Details of the setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 224.

After that, the setting display process is executed (step S2342). Details of the setting display process will be described later with reference to FIG. 225.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2343). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a multi-byte FIFO format transmission information storage area. Commands generated for each command generation are stored in this transmission information storage area, and the values (commands) stored in the transmission information storage area are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Each time a command is generated, the generated command may be directly stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit in the FIFO format.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2344). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched (step S2345) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the process returns to the pre-interrupt process.

The process after it is determined in step S2335 that the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area is the same as the process described above in FIG. 191. After executing the output data setting process in step S2091, the process proceeds to step S2343 of FIG. 223.

FIG. 224 is a flowchart of the setting process. The setting process is executed in step S2341 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the set state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating a normal game state, and mainly executes a process of changing the set value.

First, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2350). If a value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting status management area, a power-on command is created (step S2351), and the process returns to the caller's process.

As a result, in the case of a RAM error, a power-on operation command (A004H) indicating the RAM error is transmitted for each timer interrupt until the RAM error is cleared. This is because if the power-on operation command indicating a RAM error is sent only once, the RAM error is not re-notified when the command is missing, so that the peripheral control board 1510 cannot know the state of the gaming machine. Is. Further, since the function display unit 1400 is completely turned off, if the peripheral control board 1510 does not know the state of the gaming machine, the abnormality notification will not be performed, so that the state of the gaming machine cannot be confirmed from the outside. Further, when the RAM is abnormal, the game is not performed and commands other than the power-on operation command are not transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, as long as the RAM abnormal state continues, the power-on operation command is repeatedly transmitted. doing.

That is, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of times (for example, a timer interrupt process) is executed in a command of the same system (for example, a power-on operation command), which is executed at a predetermined cycle. The first case in which only a small number of times such as once, two, or three times are transmitted) and the second case in which the pachinko machine is repeatedly transmitted at predetermined cycles without limiting the number of times during operation. In the second case, the same command is repeatedly transmitted regardless of whether or not the peripheral control board 1510 is correctly received, and no other game-related command is transmitted when the normal game is stopped. But it is a command to be sent.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the command related to the RAM abnormality, the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the RAM abnormality. Even if the same command is received again during the RAM abnormality notification, the command related to the received RAM abnormality may be invalidated and the current notification may be continued. By invalidating the subsequent command, for example, it is possible to prevent the voice notification from being repeated from the beginning, and the normal notification can be performed.

The command regarding the RAM abnormality may always be the same, but may differ depending on the timing of transmission. The consistency of the command may be determined by changing the command related to the RAM abnormality depending on the transmission timing. For example, by making the power-on operation command (A004H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at the time of power-on and the power-on operation command (A005H) transmitted when the RAM is abnormal at the time of a normal timer interrupt. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command (A005H) after the power-on command (A004H), it can determine that the RAM abnormality at the time of power-on continues. On the other hand, if the power-on command (A005H) is received without receiving the power-on command (A004H), the set value and the setting state management area recorded in the main control RAM 1312 after the power is restored (for example, during a normal game). Can be determined to be abnormal. In this way, the notification mode can be different in each of the two determined states. For example, if the RAM abnormality at the time of turning on the power continues, it is possible to notify that the RAM is abnormal, and if the RAM abnormality occurs after the power is restored, it is possible to notify that the set value is abnormal.

During the RAM abnormality notification, the player may stop the setting adjustment function (for example, the adjustment of the volume and the brightness by operating the button provided on the door frame 3). This is because the setting adjustment operation by the player during the RAM abnormality notification is considered to be an erroneous operation. Specifically, it is preferable to stop the setting adjustment function by the player until the power-on operation command indicating the normal game state is received.

If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the setting process is repeatedly executed, so that the process related to the special symbol or the normal symbol is not executed, and the game cannot be played at all. This RAM abnormality is caused by the setting change state by operating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 when the power is turned on again after the power is cut off and the power failure process is executed. Then the RAM error is resolved. Then, the setting change mode is terminated by the operation of returning the setting key 971 to the original state, and the normal game can be started.

Further, when the power is turned on again, if an operation other than activating the setting change mode with the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 is performed, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality in the setting state management area is maintained. The RAM abnormal state continues, and the normal game cannot be started. That is, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality and bring it into the normal game state, it is necessary to always go through the setting change mode.

On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is not recorded in the setting state management area, it is determined whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2352). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting key changed from ON to OFF.

When it is determined that the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (determined as the end of setting change or setting confirmation), the output time is set in the security signal output timer (step S2353), and the setting status management area is initialized (step). S2354), the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2355), and the process returns to the caller process.

When the operation to end the setting change mode (setting key 971 is turned off) is performed, the delay time until the security signal is turned off after the setting change mode is finished is set by setting the output time value in the security signal output timer. prepare. Therefore, even if the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends in a short time (for example, within one timer interrupt processing), only the shortest output signal of the security signal is set as the output time value in the security signal output timer. It can be secured and the hall computer can reliably detect the security signal.

If a fraud is detected during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, the security signal may be output for a period or time corresponding to the newly detected fraud while maintaining the security signal.

Furthermore, if a power failure occurs during the delay time until the security signal is turned off, if the hot start is performed in the normal gaming state when the power is restored, the security signal for the remaining time is output and the RAM is cleared by operating the RAM clear switch. Or, when the RAM is cleared by changing the setting, the security signal for the remaining time is not output. This is because the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 resets the security signal output timer value, and the output of the security signal accompanying the initialization of the main control RAM 1312 starts.

When the power is turned on after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, one of the five patterns of hot start, RAM clear, setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, and RAM abnormal state continuation is performed.

When the mode shifts to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the activated mode ends and a security signal is output until the delay time elapses. If the RAM error condition continues, the setting change operation has not been performed even when the power is restored, so a security signal due to the continuous RAM abnormality is output. If the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends and a power failure occurs before the delay time elapses, or if a hot start occurs after the power is restored, a security signal is output for the remaining time.

Even when the security signal is continuously output, the output of the security signal is stopped by the power-on reset signal when the power is turned on, and the timer interrupt processing is performed after a predetermined time (for example, during the startup waiting time of the peripheral control board 1510) has elapsed. After the transition, the output of the security signal resumes. That is, in the following cases, even when the security signal is continuously output after the power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal is stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored.
-When the power is restored by hot start after a power failure occurs during the output of a security signal due to fraud detection, etc.-After a power failure occurs during the output of a security signal due to a RAM error, the power is restored and the RAM error continues.・ When the power is restored after a power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting change mode and the setting change mode continues ・ The power is restored after the power failure occurs during the security signal output in the setting confirmation mode. When the setting confirmation mode continues In this way, even when the security signal is continuously output after a power failure occurs during the output of the security signal, the output of the security signal should be stopped for a predetermined period after the power is restored. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the security signal is abnormal on the hall computer side or whether the state associated with the output of the security signal is released.

Further, in the setting confirmation mode in which only the setting key 971 is operated, the security signal is output until the setting confirmation mode ends, and the delay time after the setting confirmation mode ends, regardless of the remaining time during which the security signal is output. After that, the output of the security signal is stopped. Further, even in the setting change mode in which the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are operated, the same processing as in the setting confirmation mode may be performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2352 that the setting key 971 has not returned to the OFF position, it is determined whether a value (02H) indicating a setting change is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2356), and the setting is changed. If it is determined that the mode is set, it is determined whether the setting change switch 972 has been operated (step S2357). The setting change switch 972 may also be used as the RAM clear switch 954. As a result, when it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is recorded in the setting state management area and the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting value is updated by +1 (step S2358). If the set value exceeds the upper limit of 6, it is set to 0 (steps S2359 and S2360). After that, it returns to the processing of the caller.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value indicating the setting change is not recorded in the setting status management area (that is, the setting confirmation mode) or the setting change switch 972 is not operated, the setting value is updated. Instead, return to the caller's processing.

When determining the operation of the setting change switch 972 (immediately before or immediately after), it may be determined whether the setting key 971 is operated to ON. In this way, if the operation of the setting key 971 is determined when the setting change switch 972 is operated, the setting change mode is set when a power failure occurs, and even if the setting key 971 is not operated to ON when the power failure is restored, the setting change switch 972 It is possible to prevent the setting from being changed by the operation.

FIG. 225 is a flowchart of the setting display process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The setting display process is executed in step S2342 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 223) when the setting state management area does not have a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state, and a process of displaying the set value is executed.

First, the main control MPU 1311 clears the LED segment port (step S2370).

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2371). If no value indicating a RAM error is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the current setting value is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2372). On the other hand, if a value indicating a RAM abnormality is recorded in the setting state management area, the output of the LED segment terminal is set so that the error is displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2373).

After that, the LED common signal corresponding to the LED common counter is output (step S2374), and the driver is driven to output the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display to the base display 1317 (step S2375). , Return to caller processing.

[12-18. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 3]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting changing function will be described. In the third example described below, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process is provided separately from the timer interrupt process for the normal game, which is the main difference from the second example described above. The processing other than that described below is the same as that of the second example described above.

In the third example, as in the second example, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954. In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation related to the change of the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

226 and 227 are flowcharts of power-on processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on.

First, the main control MPU 1311 starts processing from address 8000, which is the start address of the program code, when the reset signal is released by turning on the power. The protection invalidity and the prohibited area invalidity of the main control RAM 1312 are set in the RAM protect register (step S2400). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In the third embodiment, in order to cancel the reset function by accessing the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312, the prohibited area is set to invalid so that the entire area of the main control RAM 1312 can be accessed. Even if the unused area of the main control RAM 1312 is designated as a prohibited area, the prohibited area is enabled, and access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 is reset. good.

That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on while the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, a predetermined area of the main control RAM 1312 is immediately initialized. However, if the checksums do not match or the backup flag is not set normally, the setting change operation will not be performed after stopping the function of the gaming machine as a RAM error and making it impossible to play. The main control RAM 1312 is controlled so that the game is not executed without being initialized.

Therefore, when the prohibited area of the RAM protect register is effectively set, a reset occurs due to an erroneous access to the prohibited area of the RAM due to a malfunction or a malfunction, and when the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-on processing, the main control MPU 1311 executes the power-on processing. Since the power failure process is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, not only the game is initialized by the RAM clear process, but also the game cannot be restarted unless the hall employee performs a RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation), so the RAM protect register is prohibited. It is desirable to set the area to "invalid".

The prohibited area may be effectively set. By effectively setting the prohibited area, if the prohibited area of the main control RAM 1312 is accessed due to fraud, etc., the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs a RAM error release operation (setting change operation). Therefore, resistance to fraudulent activity can be improved.

Next, the simple clear mode timer for a predetermined time is set in the watchdog timer (step S2401), and the watchdog timer is cleared (step S2402). After that, the power failure clear signal is set to ON (step S2403), and the power failure clear signal is set to OFF (step S2404). By setting the power failure clear signal to ON and then setting it to OFF, the power failure warning signal stored in the latch can be set to a normal state (a state other than a power failure).

Next, the signal levels of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are read from the PF port and stored in the register (step S2405). Since the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are being operated after the peripheral control board 1510 is surely started, a hole is created while waiting for the peripheral control board 1510 to start. If the employee of the hall erroneously interrupts the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971, the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 are determined in a state not intended by the employee of the hall. Therefore, the input state (level) of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is stored in a register or the like which is a temporary storage means at an early stage after the start of the power-on processing, and the standby state of the peripheral control board 1510 ends. By determining the status of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 stored in a register or the like, which is a temporary storage means, even if an employee in the hall accidentally interrupts the key operation at an early stage after the power is turned on. , The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 at the time of power-on operation is reliably detected.

After that, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2406). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine is not normal, so that the machine waits until the power supply voltage stabilizes in step S2406. In the loop of step S2406, since the watchdog timer is not cleared, the watchdog timer resets unless the power failure is canceled. In this reset by the watchdog timer, the program is immediately started from the start address without executing the security check unlike the system reset, and the power-on processing is executed. Therefore, the loop is not exited unless the power failure warning signal is released in the loop of step S2406.

In this way, the power failure determination process for detecting the power failure warning signal is, first, in steps S2406 and S2408 during power-on processing, and second in step S2450 of the main control side main process during the normal game. Running in place. In the latter (step S2450), the power failure processing after step S2462 is executed by detecting the power failure, but in the former (steps S2406, 2408), the power failure processing is not executed even if the power failure is detected. Since the checksum value and the backup flag value are maintained during the loop period, the state at the time of the power failure can be correctly restored without executing the power failure process.

The reset in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a system reset generated by the reset circuit and a user reset generated by an access outside the designated area of the watchdog timer and the game control RAM 1312. In a system reset, the program starts after a security check of several hundred milliseconds is executed, but in a user reset, the program starts immediately without executing a security check when the reset is released.

Therefore, for example, if a reset occurs by the watchdog timer during normal game processing, the power failure processing is not executed, the checksum is not calculated, and the backup flag is not set, so that it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. NS. If it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game state is initialized by the RAM clear process, and the game cannot be restarted unless the hall clerk performs the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation). On the other hand, in steps S2406 and S2408 during the power-on processing, even if the watchdog timer resets, the hall clerk does not perform the RAM abnormality release operation (setting change operation), and the state at the time of the power failure is correct. You can return.

In this way, regarding the reset generated by the watchdog timer, it is usual to provide a case where a setting change operation for canceling a RAM abnormality is required and a case where it is not necessary to restart the pachinko machine 1. The reset by the watchdog timer occurs during the game, when a software problem occurs, the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is destroyed, and the content different from the game state at the time of the power failure is stored. Therefore, it is desirable to initialize the main control RAM 1312. On the other hand, the reset by the watchdog timer occurs in the power-on processing when a hardware problem occurs, and the data stored in the main control RAM 1312 is unlikely to be destroyed. Therefore, the main control RAM 1312 is initially initialized. This is because there is little need to reset it.

Although the reset generated by the watchdog timer has been described above, the same processing is performed for other types of user resets caused by the watchdog timer. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a plurality of reset factors, and the above-described processing can be executed by a reset generated with one of the reset factors (for example, a user reset by a watchdog timer).

After that, the sub-start wait timer (for example, about 2 seconds) is started, the watchdog timer is continuously cleared until the timer expires, and the peripheral control board 1510 is waited for start (step S2407). The start-up wait of the peripheral control board 1510 may be any time during the period from when the power is turned on to when the command is first transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, even if the set value is not determined.

After that, it is determined again whether the power failure warning signal is in power failure (step S2408). If the power failure warning signal is detected, the power supply voltage of the pachinko machine 1 is abnormal, and the pachinko machine 1 stands by in step S2408. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the power failure warning signal is during a power failure may be determined not only in steps S2406 and S2408, but also in either one.

After that, the set value confirmation process shown in FIG. 215 is executed to determine whether the set value is within the normal range (step S2409).

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2410), the RAM confirmation process outside the game area at power-on shown in FIG. 216 is executed, and an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 is determined. (Step S2411). Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2412).

After that, the RAM abnormality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2413), and the RAM abnormality value (03H) in the setting state management area is temporarily set in the B register (step S2414).

The value set in the setting state management area in the third embodiment is different from that shown in FIG. 201 (B) in the above-described embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 220 (A), if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312. 03H is recorded. That is, the setting state management area of the third example is a 1-byte storage area in which the operation mode of the pachinko machine 1 is recorded. For example, the lower 4 bits are used and the upper 4 bits are not defined. Specifically, 00H is recorded in the normal game state, 01H in the setting confirmation mode, 02H in the setting change mode, and 03H if there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312.

The setting state management area is not updated to 00H in the RAM clear processing by operating only the RAM clear switch 954, and the current value is maintained. Further, it is updated from 01H to 00H at the end of the setting confirmation mode, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode. Further, when the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, it is updated from 03H to 02H when the setting change mode is entered by the setting change operation at the next power-on, and is updated from 02H to 00H at the end of the setting change mode.

Further, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 (steps S2415 and S2416). Specifically, the checksum calculated and stored from the data used as the game control area (excluding the data saved in the stack) out of the areas backed up in the built-in RAM 1312 when the power was cut off last time, The checksum calculated using the same area is compared, and if the two are different, it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 has an abnormality. If the value of the power failure flag indicating that the backup was normally performed (the power off processing was executed normally) is not stored in the backup flag area, the data in the main control RAM 1312 is normally backed up when a power failure occurs. It is determined that there is an abnormality in the main control RAM 1312 because it is not (the power off processing is not executed normally).

Then, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2419. On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the RAM normality determination result value is temporarily set in the C register (step S2417), and the information in the setting state management area is set in the B register. (Step S2418), and the process proceeds to step 2219. As a result, the determination result of whether or not the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal is set in the C register. Therefore, in the subsequent processing, the RAM abnormality is determined as the determination of "RAM abnormality" and "game state before power failure". It is not necessary to re-execute the process (process to judge the match of checksum and backup flag), and the size of the program can be reduced.

Further, the value of the set state management area when a power failure occurs or the determination result (RAM abnormal value) of the main control RAM 1312 when the power is restored is set in the B register, and the RAM abnormal value is temporarily set in the set state management area in step S2419. By setting, unnecessary processing can be deleted and the size of the program can be reduced. For example, if the RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, when YES is determined in each of the determinations in steps S2423 and S2424, the RAM abnormal value is set in the setting state management area and step S2436. It is necessary to execute the JUMP instruction to. However, since the RAM abnormal value is temporarily set in the setting state management area in step S2419, by designating S2436 as the JUMP destination at the time of determination in step S2423, JUMP is shown in the source code example illustrated below. You can reduce the number of orders.

Source code example when the RAM abnormal value is not temporarily set in step S2419
AND A, 30H; S2420
CP A, 30H; S2421 (when bit5: setting key, bit4: RAM clear SW)
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP B, 02H; S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP C, 00H; S2423
JR Z, $ 111;
$ 000:
LD W, 03H; Equivalent to S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436; Jump instruction to S2436
$ 111:
CP B, 03H; S2424
JR Z, $ 000;

XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
Source code example when a RAM error value is temporarily set in step S2419
LD W, 03H; S2419
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
AND A, 30H; S2420
CP A, 30H; S2421
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP B, 02H; S2422
JR Z, RESET_P_6;

CP C, 00H; S2423
JR NZ, S2436;

CP B, 03H; S2424
JR Z, S2436;

XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

After that, in step S2419, a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality is tentatively recorded in the setting state management area (step S2419).

Then, among the register values in which the value of the PF port is recorded, the bits of the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are masked (step S2420). After that, it is determined by using the value stored in the register whether the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON when the power is turned on (step S2421). If the setting key 971 is turned ON and the RAM clear switch 954 is turned ON, it is determined that the setting change operation has been performed, and the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, if the setting key 971 is not operated and the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, it is determined whether the setting change mode was set when a power failure occurred (step S2422). For example, when the value of the B register set in step S2418 is the setting change mode (02H), it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, the process proceeds to step S2430.

On the other hand, when it is determined that no power failure has occurred during the setting change mode, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the game control area and outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2423). For example, the abnormality in the game control area can be determined by using the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above. As a result, if there is an abnormality in either the game control area or the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2436.

On the other hand, if there is no abnormality in either the game control area or the outside of the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing (step S2424). For example, if the value of the setting state management area set in the B register in S2418 is a value (03H) indicating a RAM abnormality, it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing.

Then, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, the process proceeds to step S2436. On the other hand, when it is determined that a power failure has not occurred during the RAM abnormality processing, a value (00H) indicating a normal gaming state is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2425). By recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value (03H) indicating the RAM abnormality temporarily recorded in the setting state management area in step S2419 is reset to 00H as the temporary setting value. Further, by recording 00H in the setting state management area in step S2425, the value of the setting state management area when jumping from step S2426 and S2431 to step S2435 is different. Therefore, since the value of the setting state management area differs between the normal RAM clear processing and the RAM clear processing associated with the setting change processing, the caller can be distinguished even if the programs for both RAM clear processes are shared. , It is not necessary to provide a separate program, and the program size can be reduced.

As shown in the source code example illustrated below, at the timing of step S2425, it is not determined whether 01H or 00H is recorded in the setting state management area. The determined value should be set in the setting status management area at the time of determination, but then 00H is set in the setting status management area after the RAM clear processing when it is determined that the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON. Processing to record is required. Therefore, since the processing contents are different between the power-on processing and the RAM clear processing when the setting is changed, dedicated processing is required for each part other than the processing for initializing the main control RAM 1312. Therefore, in order to standardize the process of initializing the main control RAM 1312 between when the setting is changed and when only the RAM clear switch 954 is operated, 00H is temporarily set in step S2425.

Source code example when 00H is not temporarily set in the setting status management area in step S2425
CP A, 10H; S2426 (PF port information is stored in the A register)
JR NZ, $ 000; (bit5: setting key bit4: RAM clear SW)

LD A, (JOTAI_BF); S2427
LD (POWER_BF), A;

CP A, 20H; S2428
JR NZ, $ 111;

LD W, 01H; S2429
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436;

$ 000:
XOR W, W; equivalent to S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2435; increase

$ 111:
XOR W, W; increase
LD (VALID_PALY), W; increase
JR S2436; Increase

S2430:
LD W, 02H; S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing]; S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers]; S2436
Source code example when 00H is temporarily set in the setting status management area in step S2425
XOR W, W; S2425
LD (VALID_PALY), W;

CP A, 10H; S2426
JR NZ, S2435;

LD A, (JOTAI_BF); S2427
LD (POWER_BF), A;

CP A, 20H; S2428
JR Z, S2436;

LD W, 01H;
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
JR S2436;
S2430:
LD W, 02H; S2430
LD (VALID_PALY), W;
・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・ ・
S2435:
[RAM clear processing]; S2435
S2436:
[Initialize all command buffers]; S2436

After that, it is determined whether the RAM clear switch 954 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2426). Then, if the RAM clear switch 954 is operated to ON, the process proceeds to step S2435.

In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the processing is distributed based on the operation of the RAM clear switch 954, the operation of the setting key 971, and the value recorded in the setting state management area. For example, if it is determined that the main control RAM 1312 is abnormal, 03H is recorded in the setting state management area, and 03H is maintained until the power is cut off, so that normal game processing cannot be executed. At this time, the RAM abnormality can be cleared by turning off the power once and then turning on the power by performing the setting change operation. That is, when it is determined in step S2421 that both the setting key 971 and the RAM clear switch 954 are being operated (setting change operation), the setting state management area changes from the value indicating the RAM error (03H) to the value indicating the setting change. It is updated to (02H) (step S2430), and the RAM abnormal state ends. In this way, recovery from a RAM error always goes through a setting change. In other words, since it is determined whether the setting change operation has been performed before determining whether the state at the time of power failure is a RAM abnormality, the RAM abnormality can be resolved only when the set value is changed.

When it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, even if the main control RAM 1312 is determined to be abnormal, it can automatically return to the normal gaming state.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is cut off, and when the work area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area is determined to be normal when the power is restored, when it is determined that the work area is normal. The game process may be started by initializing the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area. In this way, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state by operating the power switch ON / OFF.

In addition, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, and after the power is turned off, when the power is restored, it is determined that the work areas in the game control area and the area outside the game control area are normal, and the RAM is cleared. When the switch is operated, the work area and the stack area in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, the normal gaming state can be restored by operating the RAM clear switch 954 after the power is cut off.

Further, when it is determined that the RAM is abnormal, the game is stopped, the power is cut off, and when the power is restored, the work areas in the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area are determined to be normal, and are set. When the key 971 is being operated, the work area and the stack area of the area inside the game control area and the area outside the game control area may be initialized and the game process may be started. In this way, it is possible to return to the normal gaming state by operating the setting key 971 after the power is cut off.

On the other hand, if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated, the information on the gaming state at the time of the occurrence of the power failure is stored in the power-on state buffer in order to restore the gaming state before the occurrence of the power failure (step S2427). In this way, the effect (background, decorative pattern mode (low probability time)) corresponding to each game state (for example, low probability state or high probability state, time saving state or non-time saving state) on the peripheral control board 1510 side. Preparations are made to restore (using decorative symbols of different modes depending on the probability). In step S2300 of the power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET) executed in step S2439, the power-on operation command is performed. Used when creating.

After that, it is determined whether or not the setting key 971 has been turned ON when the power is turned on, using the value stored in the register (step S2428). Then, if the setting key 971 is operated to ON, it is determined that the setting confirmation operation has been performed, a value (01H) indicating the setting confirmation mode is recorded in the setting status management area (step S2429), and the process proceeds to S2436. .. That is, regardless of whether the state at the time of power failure is the setting confirmation mode, if only the setting key 971 is operated (if the RAM clear switch 954 is not operated), the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode.

Since steps S2425 to S2429 are processes executed when at least one of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not operated, the determination of the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 (step S2426) and the setting key 971 Any of the determination of the operation (step S2428) of the above may be performed first. That is, as shown in the figure, the operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426) and then the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428), or the operation of the setting key 971 may be determined (step S2428). The operation of the RAM clear switch 954 may be determined (step S2426).

If YES is determined in step S2421 or step S2422, a value (02H) indicating the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2430). Then, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the work area outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2431). For example, the determination result stored in the C register in step S2413 described above can be used to determine an abnormality outside the game control area. As a result, if there is no abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the process proceeds to step S2435.

On the other hand, if there is an abnormality outside the game control area of the main control RAM 1312, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2432), and the out-of-game area RAM abnormality processing shown in FIG. 217 is executed (S2433). After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored in step S2432 (step S2434).

Then, the work area other than the set value and the set state management area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 and the stack area in the game control area are initialized (step S2435). The unused area provided between the work area and the stack area may also be initialized.

After that, all command buffers are initialized (step S2436). This is because when the power is turned off without clearing the RAM while the command is stored in the command buffer, the untransmitted command stored in the command buffer is transmitted. For example, when the power is cut off during the transmission of the variation command, the symbol command may be transmitted, but the subsequent variation pattern command may not be transmitted. Then, if only the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted when the power is turned on, the peripheral control board 1510 may determine that it is abnormal. Further, when an untransmitted command in the processing related to the setting change is stored in the command buffer, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the command by transmitting the untransmitted command during the setting processing after the power is restored. There is a possibility of malfunction by setting the game state. In order to prevent the occurrence of such an abnormality, the command buffer is initialized in step S2436.

Although the command buffer is initialized in step S2436, the command buffer may be cleared when the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is started. In the setting change process, the command buffer is cleared when the main control RAM 1312 is initialized, so it is not necessary to clear the command buffer separately. However, in the setting confirmation process, the main control RAM 1312 is not initialized. Therefore, it is advisable to clear the command buffer when moving to the setting confirmation.

After that, the functions of the devices (CTC, SIO, etc.) built in the main control MPU 1311 are initially set (step S2437). Specifically, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC0 for setting change processing, and CTC0 is set to interrupt enable. The time of the CTC1 that controls the timer interrupt processing in the normal game state is not set, and the interrupt of the CTC1 for the normal game remains set to prohibit.

Then, the hardware random number (for example, the winning random number) built in the main control MPU 1311 is activated (step S2438) to start updating the hardware random number, and the power-on setting process shown in FIG. 219 is executed (step S2439).

Finally, the timer interrupt is set to enable (step S2440), and the process proceeds to the main control side main process (FIG. 228).

FIG. 228 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227).

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting change process. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 3, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process, and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, when it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power failure has occurred. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) of the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process is executed. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, if the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupts are set to disabled (step S2451), and a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area. Determine (step S2452). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2454 to start the normal game. On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, interrupt is set to allow (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. ..

When it is determined in step S2452 that a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, after switching the interrupt timer for the normal game, the second main loop process for the normal game (steps S2457 to S2458). To execute. Before executing the second main loop processing, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC1 for normal games (step S2454), the interrupt of CTC0 (timer interrupt for setting processing) is stopped, and the interrupt of CTC1 (step S2454) is stopped. The timer interrupt for normal game processing) is activated (step S2455), and interrupt enable is set (step S2456).

After that, the power failure warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for normal games is repeatedly executed.

When the power failure warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, the power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. In the power cutoff process in the main control side main process shown in FIG. 228, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area (step S2465). ). The details of the process when the power is turned off are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the backed up work area is normally held. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting status management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area between the time the power is turned on and the time the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2468). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the setting values for enabling RAM protection (write-protected) and invalidating the prohibited area are written to the RAM protect register, writing to the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2469), and the process waits until recovery from a power failure (step S2469). infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In this embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is canceled to enable access to the entire area. By designating an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, when an access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 operates. It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), processing when the power is turned off (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and may be any other order.

In another example 3, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main process on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process, and the power failure process may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, when the power failure signal is confirmed at least at the start and the end, the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output is measured, and the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage.

In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 228, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and the setting change process is always performed once. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Further, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process of calculating the base value in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) is executed, and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. It is possible to switch whether to execute the process of calculating the base value so that the process is not executed. In another example 3, since the timer interrupt processing for setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) of the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process is executed. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting processing executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the banks can be switched. Is configured to allow use of either bank. In this embodiment, the register bank 0 is used in the main control side main process, and the register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt process for the setting process or the normal game. Therefore, the instruction to switch to the bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to the bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupting and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also configured to be restored by executing the RET instruction. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to the winning signal, the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode determines NO in step S2473, so that the winning detection is performed. , No fraud is detected. Even if a prize is detected, the prize ball is not paid out or the fluctuation display is not executed. This is because the setting change operation and the setting confirmation operation are performed by the employees of the hall, and it is considered desirable that the fraud is not detected in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person who intends to commit fraud (Mr. Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like. For example, while a hall employee is changing settings or confirming settings, the door is open and the sensor attached to the door is in a position closer to the next pachinko machine. For this reason, while performing the setting change operation and setting confirmation, it is possible to detect the goto action caused by radio waves or the like in the adjacent pachinko machine.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing, the value of the game state management area is normally other than 00H (01H to 03H), so the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is displayed in the setting state management area. It is not necessary to determine whether or not is recorded, but the determination is intentionally made in order to prevent fraudulent acts such as illegally shifting to the setting change mode during a normal game.

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processing related to the change of the setting value and the setting display (steps S2474 to S2478). On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474), for example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is a power failure clear signal. , There are solenoid signals such as a large winning port / electric chew, and a response signal (ACK) at the time of receiving a command to the payout control board 951. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. And prevent the LED from flickering.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal board 784 (step S2476), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2477). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2478).

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Since the capacity of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is finite, untransmitted commands remain in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is full or full. If it is close to, it is preferable to control whether the command is stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit according to the free state of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. For example, it is determined whether the free space of the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is larger than the size (number of bytes) of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and if the free space is larger, the command is issued. It may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Further, each time the command transmission process to the peripheral control board 1510 is executed, a predetermined upper limit is set for the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit, and the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit is set. If the size of the command stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit exceeds a predetermined upper limit without determining the free space, all commands cannot be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit. Also, in the peripheral board command transmission process executed in the next timer interrupt process, the remaining commands may be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

The upper limit may be set to the same amount or less than the amount of data that can be transmitted by the serial communication circuit (SIO) in one timer interrupt cycle. For example, when the communication speed of the serial communication circuit is 20 kbps and the timer interrupt cycle is 4 ms, serial communication of about 80 bits is possible in one timer interrupt cycle. When one command is composed of 20 bits, 80/20 = 4, so 4 commands should be the upper limit. In practice, the upper limit may be set to 5 commands, which is one more command. This is because the maximum command length is assumed to be 20 bits, but there are many commands shorter than the maximum length.

Regardless of whether a predetermined upper limit is set for the amount of command data stored in the transmission information storage area in one command transmission process, the transmission information storage area is stored in the transmission information storage area so as not to be full. The capacity of the storage area where the previous command is stored should be smaller than or the same as the capacity of the transmission information storage area.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched (step S2481) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 229, unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the random number update process (R_ATTART_K) is not executed, but since the hard random number has already been activated in S2438, it is hard. Similar to the random number, the random number update process may be executed in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process.

In another example 3, even if the test signal output process is executed by the timer interrupt process for normal games (for example, the output data setting process S2505 in FIG. 230), it is called in the timer interrupt process for the setting change process. May be good.

FIG. 230 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for a normal game executed by the main control MPU 1311.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2490). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one of which can be used as a register group of bank 0 and the other of which can be used as a register group of bank 1, and the bank can be switched. Is configured to allow any bank to be used. In this embodiment, register bank 0 is used in the main control side main process, and register bank 1 is used in the setting process or the timer interrupt process for normal games. Therefore, the instruction to switch to the bank 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, but it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch to the bank 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupting and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also configured to be restored by executing the RET instruction. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, it is necessary to execute a bank switching instruction at the end of the timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2491).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2492). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Subsequently, the random number update process 1 is executed (step S2493). In the random number update process 1, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the initial values of the large hit symbol determination random number and the small hit symbol determination random number updated in the random number update process 2 of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 221 are changed. Update the random number for determining the initial value.

After that, the switch input special process is executed (step S2494).

After that, the timer update process is executed (step S2495). In the timer update process, for example, the time during which the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process, and the normal symbol variation determined by the ordinary symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the display pattern, a payer ACK signal is input to inform that the payout control board 951 has normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1311). When determining whether or not the signal is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

Subsequently, the prize ball control process is executed (step S2494). In the prize ball control process, input information is read from the input information storage area, the number of game balls (prize balls) to be paid out based on the read input information is calculated, and the number is written to the main control RAM 1312. In addition, based on the calculation result of the number of prize balls, a prize ball command for paying out the game balls can be created, and a self-check for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 can be performed. Create commands. The main control MPU 1311 transmits the created prize ball command and self-check command to the payout control board 951 as main payment serial data. The main control MPU 1311 has a serial communication circuit for output of two channels, and one channel transmits a command to the peripheral control board 1510, and the other one channel transmits a command to the payout control board 951. The transfer rate (baud rate) of serial communication can be set for each channel. For example, in step S2437, the transfer rate of the serial communication circuit is set. For example, the transfer rate may be set so that the transfer rate on the payout control board 951 side is lower than the transfer data on the peripheral control board 1510 side. This is because the prize ball controlled by the payout control board 951 has a game value, so it is not easily affected by noise, etc., and is transferred at a low speed so as not to become an abnormal prize ball command due to garbled commands or omissions. On the peripheral control board 1510 side, a command for production that does not accompany the game value is transmitted, so that the production may be restored by the next command, and a large number of commands are transmitted to perform the production with good response, and the game is played. It is desirable to send a command to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as possible so as not to give a sense of discomfort to the person. The response of the effect is poor (for example, even if a game ball wins a prize at the start winning opening and the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 starts to fluctuate, the decorative symbol does not start to fluctuate in the main liquid crystal display device 1600). This is because the player feels uneasy that it may be a malfunction.

Subsequently, the frame command reception process is executed (step S2497). The payout control board 951 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) classified into status displays by the payout control program. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release notification command based on the detection signal of the operation switch. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information for transmitting that fact to the payout control board 951 is stored in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Further, the main control MPU 1311 formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (for example, a frame state display command, an error release notification command, etc.), and the transmission information storage area described above. Remember in. Specifically, the frame command reception process conforms to the command system for transmitting the command received from the payout control board 951 to the peripheral control board 1510 in order to perform the notification corresponding to the command received from the payout control board 951. It is modified so as to be stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO) like other generated commands. Further, when the command from the payout control board 951 is normally received, a signal for controlling the output of the main ACK signal is generated. The main ACK signal is output directly from the output port to the payout control board 951 instead of the serial communication circuit. The main ACK signal may be output as a command from the serial communication circuit.

Subsequently, the fraud detection process is executed (step S2498). In the fraud detection process, abnormal conditions related to fraud (magnetism, vibration, winning abnormalities, etc.) are confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and it is detected by the count switch that the game ball has entered the big winning openings 2005 and 2006 when the game is not in the big hit game state, the main control program Creates a winning abnormality display command that is classified as a notification display as an abnormal state, and stores it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Subsequently, a command output process at the time of passing the switch, which creates a command corresponding to the passing detection of various switches related to the winning switch and the start port switch and sets the command in the transmission information storage area, is executed (step S2499).

Then, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area (step S2500), and the base display output process is executed (step S2501). Unlike other processes, the base display output process is a process executed using a second area outside the game control area, and is a common process that is not affected by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in order to ensure the independence of the base display output processing, predetermined data such as the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game control area before and after the execution of the base display output processing, and the base display is stored. It is prevented from being updated in the output process. After that, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game control area is restored (step S2502).

Subsequently, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed (step S2503). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, and the probability fluctuates based on the jackpot symbol random value. Determine whether to migrate. Then, when the big hit random number value matches the hit determination value, it is determined whether or not to open / close the big winning openings 2005 and 2006. When the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened and closed by this decision, the large winning openings 2005 and 2006 are opened (or expanded) so that the game balls can be accepted by the large winning openings 2005 and 2006. It shifts to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. Further, when the probabilistic transition condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the probability fluctuation state, and when the probability variation transition condition is not satisfied, the game state shifts to a game state other than the probability fluctuation state. Here, the "probability fluctuation state" refers to a state in which the winning probability of the special lottery described above is set relatively higher than in the normal gaming state (low probability state) (high probability state).

Subsequently, the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process are executed (step S504). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal, a random number for normal symbol hit determination is extracted, and it is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM ("" "Ordinary lottery"). Then, it is determined whether or not to open / close the second start opening door member 2549 according to the lottery result by the ordinary lottery. When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the second start port door member 2549 is opened (or expanded), so that the game ball can be accepted by the start port 2004, which is advantageous for the player. Move to the state.

Subsequently, the output data setting process is executed (step S2505). In the output data setting process, various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the main control MPU 1311. For example, when various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1311 based on the output information, the main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 951 or a big hit game. When in this state, a drive signal may be output to the attacker solenoids (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556) that open and close the opening / closing member 2107 of the winning openings 2005 and 2006. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the start port (second start port door member 2549), as output information to the hall computer, an information output signal during probability fluctuation and special symbol display information Various information (game information) signals and security signals related to the game, such as output signals, normal symbol display information output signals, time saving and medium information output information, and start opening winning information output signals, are output to the external terminal board 784. Further, in the output data setting process, the test signal output process may be executed to output the test signal.

Further, in the output data setting process, a signal corresponding to the number of out balls counted in the switch input special process (step S2494) is output from the external terminal board 784. For example, a pulse signal having a predetermined length may be output from the external terminal plate 784 for each predetermined number of out balls (10 or the like).

Further, in the output data setting process, a test signal to be output to the inspection device connected to the pachinko machine 1 is set. The test signal includes, for example, a signal indicating a game state, a normal symbol, and a signal indicating a stop symbol of a special symbol.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2506). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2507). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched (step S2508) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

[12-18. Another example of setting change / confirmation processing 4]
Next, another embodiment of the pachinko machine having the setting changing function will be described. In another example 4 described below, the processing related to the setting change is executed not by the timer interrupt processing but by the main processing on the main control side. The processing other than that described below is the same as that of the above-described alternative example 3.

In the fourth example, as in the second example, the set value can be selected by operating the RAM clear switch 954 without providing the setting change switch 972, but the original main control RAM 1312 of the RAM clear switch 954 In order to distinguish between the initialization function and the setting change function, the operation related to the change of the setting value may be described as the setting change switch 972.

FIG. 231 is a flowchart of the main control side main process executed by the main control MPU 1311. The main control side main process is executed after step S2440 of the power-on process (FIG. 227). In the main control side main process of the fourth example, steps S2481 to S2484 are executed instead of step S2452 of the main control side main process (FIG. 228) of the third example. The main control side main processing executes the setting change and setting confirmation processing not only when the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided as in the fourth example. It is also applicable to another example 1 and another example 2. For example, the main control main process shown in FIG. 231 includes the first main loop process (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting process and the second main loop process (steps S2457 to S2458) for the normal game. Even in the main loop processing, one timer interrupt processing (FIG. 196 of another example 1 and FIG. 223 of another example 2) is executed. The setting processing (step 2068 of FIG. 190, step S2341 of FIG. 223) is executed in the timer interrupt processing. ) And the normal game process are executed. In this case, since there is only one timer interrupt process executed in the main loop, it is not necessary to switch the CTCs in steps S2454 and S2455 described later.

In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, the same reference numerals are given to the same processes as the main control side main process (FIG. 228) of the third embodiment.

First, the main control MPU 1311 executes the first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting processing. In the first main loop process, first, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a power failure warning signal, and determines whether a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2450). In another example 4, the power failure is monitored in the main process, but the power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process and the power failure process may be executed when the occurrence of the power failure is detected. For example, when it is determined whether the power failure warning signal is ON at least at the start and end of the timer interrupt, the period during which the power failure warning signal is continuously output is counted, and the count result reaches a predetermined value. It may be determined that a power failure has occurred. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) of the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process is executed. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so interrupts are set to disabled (step S2451), and the setting process shown in FIG. 224 is executed (step S2482). After that, the setting display process shown in FIG. 225 is executed (step S2483).

After that, it is determined whether the setting change / setting confirmation process is completed depending on whether the setting key 971 has returned to the OFF position (step S2484). Specifically, it detects the edge of the setting key 971 from ON to OFF, or whether a predetermined period has elapsed since the setting key changed from ON to OFF. If the operation for ending the setting change / setting confirmation process has been performed, the process proceeds to step S2454 in order to start the normal game. On the other hand, if the setting change / setting confirmation process is not completed, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is cleared (step S2485). By clearing the edge information, it is possible to prevent the set value from being changed multiple times by one operation. This is because the first main loop process may be executed multiple times while the timer interrupt process for detecting the edge of the RAM clear switch 954 or the setting key 971 is executed once, so the setting was changed once. This is to prevent the setting from being changed by using the same edge information as the previous time in the first main loop process executed later. The edge information of the setting key 971 may not be cleared, and only the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 may be cleared. After that, the interrupt is set to allow (step S2453), the process returns to step S2450, and the first main loop process for the setting change process is repeatedly executed. The interrupt disabled setting is set in the processes S2482 to S2485 in order to prevent the setting change process and the setting confirmation process from being interrupted by the timer interrupt.

In the first main loop processing (steps S2450 to S2453) for the setting processing, the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is continuously cleared, and when the normal game is started (execution of the second main loop processing). (Inside), the edge information of the RAM clear switch 954 and the setting key 971 is not referred to.

When it is determined in step S2484 that the process of changing the setting / confirming the setting is completed, the second main loop process for normal games (steps S2457 to S2458) is executed. When executing the second main loop process, first, the timer interrupt cycle time is set in CTC1 for normal games (step S2454), the interrupt of CTC0 is stopped, the interrupt of CTC1 is activated (step S2455), and then Set CTC1 to enable interrupts (step S2456).

After that, the power failure warning signal is acquired, and it is determined whether or not a power failure has occurred depending on whether the power failure warning signal is ON (step S2457). When the power failure warning signal is detected, the power cutoff processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed. On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not ON, the power is normally supplied, so the random number update process 2 is executed (step S2458). The random number update process 2 may be the same as that described with reference to FIG. 195, and mainly updates random numbers other than random numbers for determining winning in a special lottery or a normal lottery. After that, the process returns to step S2457, and the second main loop process for normal games is repeatedly executed. When it is detected that the setting key 971 is operated to ON during the normal game (after entering the second main loop), the main control MPU 1311 generates a command to notify that fact and controls the periphery. The board 1510 may give a notification effect to the display device. Since this notification effect is performed during a normal game, it is desirable that the notification effect does not interfere with the progress of the normal game. For example, only a specific LED may be lit and displayed, or in a narrow area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. Characters, specific symbols, and the like may be displayed, or a specific character indicating that the setting key 971 is operated to be ON may be displayed according to the progress of the game.

When the power failure warning signal is detected in steps S2450 and S2457, the power outage processing (steps S2462 to S2469) is executed.

In the power outage process, a process of backing up data for returning to the state before the occurrence of a power failure is executed. Specifically, first, interrupts are disabled (step S2462). As a result, the timer interrupt processing described later is not performed. Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the output ports and stops the operation of the device controlled by the output from each port (step S2463). Specifically, the power failure clear signal OFF bit data is output to the solenoid, power failure clear, and ACK output port. It is not necessary to clear all the output ports. For example, the output ports for controlling a solenoid or a motor that consumes a large amount of power may be cleared. By clearing these output ports, the power consumption until the main board side power off processing is completed is reduced, and the main board side power off processing can be surely ended.

After that, the flag register is saved in the stack area in the game area (step S2464), the power off processing is executed, and the necessary processing is executed before the power is cut off for the work area outside the game area (step S2465). ). The details of the process when the power is turned off are as shown in FIG. 222. Then, the flag register saved in the stack area in the game area is restored (step S2466).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 calculates a checksum of the work area in the game control area of the main control RAM 1312 for determining whether or not the data stored in the backed up work area is normally held. It is stored in a predetermined checksum storage area of the main control RAM 1312 (step S2467). This checksum is used to determine if the data backed up in the work area is normal. The area for which the checksum is calculated is the setting status management (setting value) that may be changed in the work area in the game control area between the time the power is turned on and the time the main processing on the main control side is executed. And the value of the setting status management area), the backup flag, and the value of the checksum area should be excluded.

Further, as a power failure flag, a value (5AH) indicating that the power cutoff process was normally executed is stored in the backup flag area (step S2468). As a result, the storage of the game backup information is completed. Finally, the setting values for enabling RAM protection (write-protected) and invalidating the prohibited area are written to the RAM protect register, writing to the main control RAM 1312 is prohibited (step S2469), and the process waits until recovery from a power failure (step S2469). infinite loop). The main control MPU 1311 has a function of designating a used area of the main control RAM 1312 so that when an access is made to a prohibited area other than the designated area, it is determined to be abnormal and reset. In this embodiment, the reset function by accessing the prohibited area is canceled to enable access to the entire area. By designating an unused area of the main control RAM 1312 as a prohibited area and setting the prohibited area as valid in the RAM protect register, when an access is detected in the specified prohibited area, the main control MPU 1311 operates. It may be reset.

In the above-described processing, the processing is executed in the order of clearing the output port (step S2463), processing when the power is turned off (step S2465), calculating the checksum (step S2467), and setting the backup flag (step S2468). However, the execution order of these four processes is not limited to the one shown in the figure, and may be any other order.

In another example 4, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the main process on the main control side, but the occurrence of a power failure may be monitored by the timer interrupt process, and the power failure process may be executed based on the monitoring result. For example, in each of the two main loops, when the power failure signal is confirmed at least at the start and the end, the period during which the power failure signal is continuously output is measured, and the measurement result reaches a predetermined value. It is good to detect the occurrence of a power outage. In another example 4, since the timer interrupt processing for the setting processing and the timer interrupt processing for the normal game processing are separately provided, the power failure may be monitored by any timer interrupt processing, and both timer interrupt processing may be used. Power outages may be monitored. Therefore, by making the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process into subroutines and executing these subroutines (power failure monitoring process, power failure process) in each of the two timer interrupt processes, the same program (code) of the power failure monitoring process and the power failure process is executed. ) Does not need to be incorporated into each timer interrupt process, and the size of the program can be reduced.

In the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, two main loops are provided corresponding to each of the timer interrupt process for the setting change process and the timer interrupt for the normal game, and the setting change process is always performed once. There is an opportunity to execute timer interrupt processing. Further, at this execution trigger, the timer interrupt process for the setting change process may not be executed (for example, when branching to YES in step S2454). By providing two main loops in this way, the process of calculating the base value in the main loop for normal games (timer interrupt processing) is executed, and the unnecessary base value is calculated in the timer interrupt processing for setting change processing. It is possible to switch whether to execute the process of calculating the base value so that the process is not executed.

FIG. 232 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing for setting change processing executed by the main control MPU 1311. In another example 4, the setting change / setting confirmation process is repeatedly executed in the main loop for the setting process. Therefore, in the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing in the alternative example 4, the setting change / setting confirmation processing (steps S2477 to S2478) of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 229) for the setting change processing in the alternative example 3 is deleted. It is a timer.

First, the main control MPU 1311 sets the register bank selection flag to 1 and switches the register bank (step S2470). The main control MPU 1311 has two register groups used for calculation, one is used as a register group of bank 0, and the other can be used as a register group of bank 1, and bank switching is performed. It is configured so that the registers of both banks cannot be used without. Register bank 0 is used in the main control side main processing, and register bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing. Therefore, although the instruction to switch the bank to 1 is executed at the start of the timer interrupt processing, it is not necessary to execute the instruction to switch the bank to 0 at the end of the timer interrupt processing. This is because the main control MPU 1311 stores the bank status in a flag register (for example, a register in which the Z flag and the C flag are set), and the flag register is saved in the stack area at the start of interrupting and RET. Return from the stack area by executing the instruction. Therefore, by executing the RET instruction, the bank flag of the register stored in the flag register is also restored. If a configuration in which the bank status is not stored in the flag register is adopted, a bank switching instruction is executed at the end of timer interrupt processing to return to bank 0.

Since the flag register also stores a flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted, it is not necessary to execute the RET instruction after setting interrupt enable. The flag that controls whether or not interrupts can be interrupted is set to the interrupt disabled state after stacking the flag register at the start of timer interrupt processing. Therefore, the interrupt is not enabled unless the interrupt is permitted (EI instruction or the like) or the RETI instruction is executed during the timer interrupt process.

Next, the LED common counter is updated by +1. If the LED common counter value exceeds the upper limit, it is set to 0 (step S2471).

Next, the switch input process 1 is executed (step S2472). In the switch input process 1, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read, an ON edge is created, and the input information is stored in the input information storage area of the main control RAM 1312.

Since the switch input process 1 in step S2472 is a process related to a winning signal, even if a winning is detected in the timer interrupt processing executed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the prize ball is paid out, a special symbol, or the like. The process related to the progress of the game, such as the variable display of the symbol, is not executed. In addition, although winning detection regarding the progress of the game is performed, detection regarding fraud such as magnets and shocks (vibrations) is not executed. This is because the employees in the hall perform the setting change operation and setting confirmation operation, and in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, fraud such as magnets and shocks (vibrations) is not performed, and fraud due to magnetism or vibration is not performed. This is because it is considered desirable not to detect it.

Even in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, some fraud detection sensors (for example, radio wave sensors) may be detected by the switch input process 1 to monitor a specific type of fraud. In this way, it is possible to detect fraud in which a person who intends to commit fraud (Mr. Goto) forcibly activates the setting change mode by irradiating radio waves or the like.

Then, it is determined whether or not a value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area (step S2473). In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process, it is not necessary to determine the value of the game state management area. This is to deal with fraudulent acts that illegally shift to the setting change process. Further, it is determined whether or not the value (00H) indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area before the switch input process 1 (step S2472), and the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area. If so, it may proceed after the peripheral board command transmission process (step S2479).

If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the set state management area, the process proceeds to step S2479 without executing the processes related to the change and display of the set value (steps S2474 to S2476). If a value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, an abnormality notification command for notifying that an abnormal timer interrupt process is being executed may be generated. This is because when the value indicating the start of the game is recorded in the setting state management area, the timer interrupt processing for the setting change processing shown in FIG. 232 is not executed, and some abnormality has occurred. As the mode of this abnormality notification, a notification using a liquid crystal, a lamp, or a sound such as a notification of a magnet, a radio wave, a vibration, or the like, or a security signal may be output from an external terminal plate 784. One or more of these notification modes may be adopted to notify one or a combination.

On the other hand, if a value indicating the start of the game is not recorded in the setting state management area, the specific output port is cleared (step S2474), for example, the signal cleared as the specific output port in step 2474 is a power failure clear signal. , There are solenoid signals such as a large winning port / electric chew, and a response signal (ACK) at the time of receiving a command to the payout control board 951. After that, the LED common port is turned off (step S2475). By turning off the LED common signal at an early stage of the timer interrupt processing, the time until the LED common signal is turned on, that is, the LED extinguishing time is secured, and the display before and after the LED display switching appears to be mixed. And prevent the LED from flickering.

After that, a security signal is output from the external terminal plate 784 (step S2476). The process of outputting the security signal may also be executed in the main loop for the setting change process of the main control side main process shown in FIG. 231, similarly to the process of setting change / setting confirmation.

Further, a peripheral board command transmission process for outputting the value of the transmission information storage area to the serial communication circuit is executed (step S2479). The transmission information storage area is a storage area for temporarily storing the generated transmission command. The value (command) stored in the transmission information storage area is read out in step 2070 and stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit (SIO). The serial communication circuit has a transmission information storage area which is a multi-byte FIFO format transmission buffer, and the values stored in the transmission information storage area of the serial communication circuit are sequentially transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral board command transmission processing may be executed after the processing of S2480 or S2481 of the main processing is completed instead of the timer interrupt processing.

After that, a predetermined value (18H) is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step S2480). Since the watchdog timer uses the simple clear mode, the watchdog timer is cleared by setting one word. After that, the register bank is switched (step S2481) by a return instruction (for example, RETI), and the process returns to the process before the interrupt.

In the timer interrupt process for the setting change process shown in FIG. 232, unlike the other timer interrupt processes, the random number update process (R_ATTART_K) is not executed. This is because it is not necessary to update the random number generated by the software when the RAM is abnormal, but the random number update process may be executed.

[13. Pachinko machine equipped with a light guide plate]
Next, an embodiment of a pachinko machine provided with a light guide plate will be described. In recent years, pachinko machines are provided with a light guide plate that emits light by illumination on the front side of the main liquid crystal display device 1600, and together with the main liquid crystal display device 1600, a special symbol variation display game is produced. In this type of pachinko machine, a complicated effect can be produced by using a liquid crystal display device and a light guide plate, for example, by superimposing images. Further, since the light guide plate is provided on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device, it displays a three-dimensional effect together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device. In addition, there is a light guide plate that enables stereoscopic viewing using the parallax of the left and right eyes, and displays an effect with a larger stereoscopic effect.

However, the production using the light guide plate has become a rut, and it is necessary to improve the interest by a new light emission production. Further, there is a light guide plate capable of displaying a plurality of patterns on one sheet, and there is a demand for a more interesting production by displaying a wider variety of patterns.

[13-1. structure]
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the front unit 2000 of the game board 5 as viewed from the front by disassembling the center accessory 2500 and the front effect unit 2600. FIG. 234 is a front view showing a state in which the first pattern is light-emittingly displayed in the front effect unit. FIG. 235 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern is light-emittingly displayed in the front effect unit.

The front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 includes a transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, and a first pattern substrate 2611 and a second pattern substrate attached to the rear side of the center accessory 2500. It has 2612 and. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2613 capable of irradiating light on the right side surface of the light guide plate 2610 are mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611, and light is applied to the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 on the second design substrate 2612. A plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614 capable of irradiating the light guide plate are mounted.

The first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are arranged perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610 so that the side surface of the light guide plate 2610 can be irradiated with light. Therefore, from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, only the side surfaces of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 can be seen, and the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 can be seen from the player side. It has become spicy and looks good in the game area 5a.

In this embodiment, the light guide plate (front light guide plate) 2610 will be described, but another back light guide plate may be provided between the light guide plate 2610 and the liquid crystal display device 1600.

The light guide plate 2610 has a first pattern 2621 (see FIG. 234) formed by innumerable first reflecting portions having irregularities that reflect light from above to the front side, and light from the lateral direction on the front side. It has a second pattern 2622 (see FIG. 235) formed by innumerable second reflecting portions having an uneven shape to be reflected to. That is, when the front effect unit 2600 emits 2613 the light guide plate LED of the first pattern substrate 2611, the first pattern 2621 can be emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610, and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 is displayed. When the light is emitted, the second pattern 2622 is emitted and displayed on the light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2613 and 2614 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 and the second pattern substrate 2612 are preferably full-color LEDs, and are highly directional light emitting sources (LEDs with lenses) that irradiate light in a narrow range. Is desirable. By using the full-color LED, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 can be transferred to the light guide plate 2610 by any single color or a plurality of colors (for example, seven rainbow colors).

The light guide plate 2610 is finely formed with irregularities forming a plurality of first reflecting portions for copying the first pattern 2621 and unevenness forming a plurality of second reflecting portions for copying the second pattern 2622. In a state where the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 and the light guide plate LED 2614 of the second pattern substrate 2612 do not emit light, the light guide plate 2610 transmits light and is arranged on the back side. Various decorative objects of the unit 3000, an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the like can be satisfactorily visually recognized. The light guide plate 2610 has a transmission region in which the liquid crystal display device 1600 provided on the back surface side can be seen through even when the light guide plate LEDs 2613 and 2614 are in a light emitting state, and the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected and is polished. A matte region processed into a glass shape, a lame region in which a reflection pattern that reflects transmitted light is formed regardless of the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610, and a light emitting portion of the light guide plate LED 2613 ( That is, a moving region in which a reflection pattern is formed so as to change whether light is emitted or not depending on the traveling direction of light in the light guide plate 2610 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 234, the first symbol 2621 becomes a part of the production of the special symbol variation display game together with the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 as described later. The first pattern 2621 is composed of moving regions 2621a and 2621c, lame regions 2621b and 2621d, and a matte region 2621e. The outside of the first pattern 2621 is a transmission region 2621f. In the moving regions 2621a and 2621c, a part of the light guide plate LED 2613 of the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the lighting portion is switched so that the moving region 2621a emits light or the moving region 2621c emits light. Therefore, by blinking the light guide plate LED 2613, it is possible to make the size of the first pattern 2621 appear to change.

In the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving region and the lame region are arranged by being repeated twice, but the repetition may be repeated any number of times. By forming the first pattern 2621 by repeating the moving area and the lame area a plurality of times, the first pattern 2621 can express a complicated movement. Further, in the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234, the moving region and the lame region are alternately repeated, but the characteristic (that is, the moving region emits light) without sandwiching the lame region between the moving regions. Moving regions having different incident positions of light) may be arranged adjacent to each other.

By causing the light guide plate LED 2613 to emit light so that the light emitting color is changed by the light guide plate LED 2613, the color can be changed for each moving region 2621a to illuminate. Then, by sequentially changing the emission color of the light guide plate LED2613 (for example, repeating red → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → purple → red), the pattern appears to move as the color changes. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 235, the second pattern 2622 is a pattern in which a plurality of light streaks extend diagonally downward. The second pattern 2622 is formed so that an obliquely extending light streak corresponds to the position of the light guide plate LED 2614 mounted on the second pattern substrate 2612. That is, when one LED 2614 for a light guide plate is made to emit light, a streak of light extending diagonally downward of the light guide plate 2610 is emitted from a portion of the light emitting LED 2614 for the light guide plate on the upper side of the light guide plate 2610.

Since the second pattern 2622 is farther from the light guide plate LED 2614 as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610, the brightness of the light streaks becomes darker as it goes downward in the light guide plate 2610. As a result, when the second pattern 2622 is viewed from the front (player side), the light streaks appear to extend backward toward the downward direction of the light guide plate 2610, and the light is radiated three-dimensionally. It is possible to make the illusion like this, and to enjoy the light emission effect by the light guide plate 2610.

Further, it is preferable to arrange the reflecting portion so that stereoscopic viewing can be performed by the parallax of the left and right eyes. For example, focusing on one light streak constituting the second pattern 2622, the light guide plate 2610 differs between the left and right eyes in the second reflective portion that emits light that forms the light streak on the player's retina. By arranging it at the position, it is possible to cause parallax between the left and right eyes of the player, and it is possible to show a second pattern with depth.

As shown in FIG. 234, the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment has a first pattern 2621 projected by irradiation of light from one direction, depending on a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light and the traveling direction of the light. Instead, it is composed of lame regions 2621b and 2621d in which reflection patterns that reflect transmitted light are formed, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a in which reflection patterns that reflect light in a specific traveling direction are formed. , The first pattern can be composed of a moving pattern area (dynamic pattern) that appears to move and a still pattern area (static pattern) that appears to be stationary.

Further, one light guide plate 2610 can project the first pattern 2621 shown in FIG. 234 and the second pattern 2622 shown in FIG. 235 depending on the difference in the illumination direction. Therefore, light of a single color (for example, red of a single wavelength or white in which light of a plurality of wavelengths is mixed) is irradiated from the lateral direction, and light of a plurality of colors is irradiated from the upper direction (for example, adjacent LED groups). Since the 2614 emits light at different wavelengths), one light guide plate 2610 can produce a rainbow pattern (rainbow beam) shining in seven colors and a single color pattern.

In the light guide plate 2610 of the present embodiment, by irradiating light from the lateral direction, the matte region 2621e of the first pattern 2621, the still pattern in the lame areas 2621b and 2621d, and the moving pattern appearing to move in the moving areas 2621a, 2621c and 2622a. Is reflected. That is, the light guide plate effect is performed by both the still pattern and the moving pattern by the first pattern 2621 by irradiating the light from the lateral direction. In this case, the still pattern and the moving pattern by the first pattern 2621 are projected at the same time.

Unlike the above, the first pattern 2621 is composed of a matte area and a lame area, and the first pattern 2621 does not have to include the moving pattern. In this case, the light guide plate effect is performed by the still pattern by the first pattern 2621 by irradiating the light from the lateral direction and the second pattern 2622 by irradiating the light from the upper direction. In this case, the still pattern by the first pattern 2621 and the moving pattern by the second pattern 2622 can be projected at different timings. That is, the moving pattern may be projected after the still pattern is projected, or the still pattern may be projected after the moving pattern is projected. In this way, by projecting the still pattern and the moving pattern at different timings, it is possible to perform various effects. In particular, by displaying a rainbow pattern as a moving pattern and then displaying a specific character as a still pattern, it is possible to produce an effect in which the character descends. On the other hand, by displaying the background with the still pattern and then displaying the character with the moving pattern, it is possible to produce an effect in which the character moves at a specific place.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be superposed and arranged. When light is irradiated from the horizontal direction and the upward direction, in the region where the two patterns are overlapped on the light guide plate 2610, the reflection patterns of the two patterns are provided in a mixed manner, so that the two patterns can be recognized together. .. However, when the first pattern 2621 is a picture to be viewed in a plane and the second pattern 2622 is a picture to be viewed stereoscopically, stereoscopic viewing may be difficult in an area where the two patterns are mixed. When the reflection pattern of the first pattern 2621 is not provided and the transmission area 2621f through which the back surface side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen is provided and the pattern by the reflection pattern of the second pattern 2622 is projected, the second pattern 2622 is played. It can be easily stereoscopically viewed by a person.

In the light guide plate 2610 of this embodiment, the first pattern 2621 and the second pattern 2622 may be arranged in different regions without being superimposed. If the first pattern 2621 is a plan view and the second pattern 2622 is a stereoscopic pattern, stereoscopic view may be difficult in an area where the two patterns coexist. Therefore, the first pattern is the first. By separating the area where the reflection pattern of the picture 2621 is provided and the area where the reflection pattern of the second picture 2622 is provided and projecting the picture by the reflection pattern of the second picture 2622, the second picture can be easily stereoscopically displayed to the player. You can see it.

[13-2. Light guide plate configuration]
Next, a specific configuration of the reflecting portion will be described. FIG. 236 is a diagram showing the structure of the light guide plate 2610 (particularly, the arrangement of the reflecting portion).

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 has a transmission region 2621f through which the back surface side (liquid crystal display device 1600) can be seen and a matte region 2621e that does not reflect the irradiated light, regardless of the traveling direction of the light. Lame regions 2621b and 2621d are provided with reflection patterns that reflect transmitted light, and moving regions 2621a, 2621c and 2622a are provided with reflection patterns that reflect light in a specific traveling direction.

FIG. 237 is a diagram showing the structure of the reflecting portion.

The reflecting portion is formed by a recess provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, and the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 by the reflection of light on the boundary surface (reflection surface 2651). Then, the pattern portion of the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light so that the player can visually recognize the pattern. Inside the light guide plate 2610, the light incident from the light guide plate LED 2614 travels inside the light guide plate 2610 with a certain spread (for example, ± 30 degrees). The light streaks constituting the second pattern 2622 can be seen by reflecting the light traveling in the direction of the light streaks by the reflecting portion 2650 described below.

In the reflecting portion of the moving region 2622a shown in FIG. 237 (A), a plurality of reflecting portions 2650 are arranged along the streaks of light. The size of the reflecting portion 2650 is preferably several hundred micrometers to several millimeters, which is extremely smaller than the streaks of light appearing on the light guide plate 2610, but is shown larger in the figure.

The reflecting portion 2650 is composed of a reflecting surface 2651 that reflects light, an inclined surface 2652 on the back side of the reflecting surface 2651, and a side surface 2653 formed by a curved surface. The reflecting surface 2651 is arranged at an angle of about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610, and the perpendicular line of the reflecting surface 2651 and the incident direction of the reflected light are arranged at about 45 degrees. Therefore, the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610 and hitting the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650 is reflected to the front side of the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 237 (B).

Further, the light traveling in the direction perpendicular to the streaks of light appearing in the moving region 2622a, that is, along the reflecting surface 2651 and parallel to the reflecting surface 2651, does not hit the reflecting surface 2651 but is reflected by the reflecting portion 2650 and is reflected by the light guide plate 2610. Does not emit from the surface of. Similarly, the amount of light traveling in a direction having an angle (particularly an acute angle) with the streaks of light appearing in the moving region 2622a hits the reflecting surface 2651 in a small amount, and the reflecting portion 2650 reflects only a small amount of light and guides the light. Only weak light is emitted from the surface of the light plate 2610. Therefore, the light having a wavelength that reaches a large number can be seen by the player, and the pattern can be shown in the color of the light guide plate LED 2614 that emits light at a specific position.

At this time, by slightly tilting the reflecting surface 2651, the emission direction of the reflected light may be slightly shifted to the left or right from the direction perpendicular to the light guide plate 2610. Since the light source that irradiates the light guide plate 2601 of this embodiment irradiates light with strong directivity, the reflected light from the reflecting unit 2650 also reaches the player as a beam of light having directivity. Therefore, the parallax between the left and right eyes of the player can be generated, and the second pattern having a depth can be shown. That is, since the reflecting unit 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the right eye and the reflecting unit 2650 that reflects the light that reaches the left eye are at different positions, the light that reaches the right eye and the light that reaches the left eye The virtual intersection is not on the light guide plate 2610. In other words, if the virtual intersection of the light reaching the right eye and the light reaching the left eye is behind the light guide plate 2610, the pattern appears in a recessed position and reaches the light reaching the right eye and the left eye. If the virtual intersection with the light is in front of the light guide plate 2610, the pattern can be seen in the front position.

The inclined surface 2652 provided on the opposite side of the reflecting surface 2651 may be provided at an angle of approximately 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 2610 like the reflecting surface 2651, or the light traveling inside the light guide plate 2610. May be formed at an angle that does not reflect on the front surface side of the light guide plate 2610 (for example, perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate 2610).

The side surface 2653 is processed into a curved surface. By processing the side surface 2653 into a curved surface instead of a flat surface, it is possible to prevent the pattern from being displayed by light coming from other than a specific direction without strongly reflecting light incident from one direction.

The reflective portions 2660 of the lame regions 2621b and 2621d shown in FIG. 238 are formed by spherical recesses provided on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610, travel in the light guide plate 2610, and travel from a plurality of directions (that is, that is). The light arriving at the reflecting unit 2660 (by a plurality of paths) is reflected and emitted to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Since the reflecting portion 2660 in the lame region reflects the light from the plurality of light guide plate LEDs 2614, if each of the light guide plate LEDs 2614 blinks at different timings, the lame region 2621b will shine. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 emits light in different colors, the lame region 2621b shines with a mixture of a plurality of colors. Further, when the light guide plate LED 2614 blinks in a different color, the lame region 2621b is a mixture of a plurality of colors and glitters.

The matte region 2621e is not provided with a reflecting portion and is processed into irregularly shaped irregularities like frosted glass, so that the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is not reflected to the front side.

Up to this point, the light guide plate 2610 representing the first pattern and the second pattern has been described, but next, examples of the light guide plates representing different patterns will be described. FIG. 239 is a diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED and the reflecting portion in the light guide plate constituting the pattern shown in FIGS. 240 to 242.

The light guide plate 2610 shown in FIG. 239 is formed on the back surface thereof, reflects light incident from any of a plurality of specific light input portions 2630 on the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610, and emits light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. It has a plurality of fine reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of specific light input units 2630 of the light guide plate 2610 introduce light so that the light travels in the light guide plate 2610 from a plurality of positions. The plurality of specific light input units 2630 are illustrated as the first specific light input unit 2630a, the second specific light input unit 2630b, the third specific light input unit 2630c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2630d. A specific light input unit 2630a to a seventh specific light input unit are provided. In this method, seven specific light input units 2630 (LED group 2614) are repeatedly provided for a rainbow effect that causes the light guide plate to emit light in seven colors, and the number of specific light input units may be determined according to the type of light emission color. The first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit (not shown) repeat the upper side surface of the light guide plate 2610 in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) in order from left to right (seventh specific light input unit). After that, it returns to the beginning and is arranged in the order of becoming the first specific light input unit 2630a).

The reflection unit 2670 extends and guides in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input unit 2630 (the direction in which the light incident from the specific light input unit 2630 travels in the light guide plate 2610). It has a boundary surface that is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light plate 2610. The reflecting portion 2670 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflection unit 2670 reflects the light incident from the corresponding specific light input unit 2630 and emits the light in a direction substantially perpendicular to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Further, the reflecting unit 2670 reflects the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light input unit 2630 and emits the light in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2610.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the corresponding specific incoming light unit 2630 is reflected by the reflecting unit 2670 toward the front surface of the light guide plate 2610 (perpendicular to the paper surface). However, the reflecting portion 2670 appears to emit light from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 239, the light incident from the non-corresponding specific incoming light unit 2630 is reflected by the reflecting unit 2670 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate 2610, and the pachinko machine 1 From the player sitting in front of the above, the reflecting portion 2670 does not appear to emit light.

In this embodiment, the reflecting portion 2670 is in a state of being recessed in a triangle and extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light entering portion 2630. It is not limited to the above, and any one extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input unit 2630 may be used.

The plurality of reflection units 2670 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light input units 2630, and the plurality of first reflection units 2670a and the second specific light input unit 2630b corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2630a. 2670b of the second reflection unit corresponding to the above, a plurality of third reflection units 2670c corresponding to the third specific light input unit 2630c, and a plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2630d. Part 2670d and the like are included.

Further, the light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of patterns 2623 capable of displaying light emission in different modes by reflecting light forward by a specific reflecting portion 2670 among the plurality of reflecting portions 2670. The plurality of patterns 2623 include a pattern 2623a composed of a plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a, a pattern 2623b composed of a plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b, a pattern 2623c composed of a plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c, and a plurality of fourth reflections. Includes a pattern 2623d and the like composed of part 2670d.

As shown in FIGS. 240 to 242, the patterns are arranged so as to circulate in order from the center to the outside.

The second pattern substrate 2612 has a strip-like shape extending to the left and right, and the LED 2614 is mounted at a position corresponding to each specific light input unit 2630. The plurality of LEDs 2614 include a first LED group 2614a corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2630a, a second LED group 2614b corresponding to the second specific light input unit 2630b, and a third specific light input unit 2630c. The third LED group 2614c corresponding to the above, the fourth LED group 2614d corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2630d, and the fifth LED group corresponding to the fifth specific light input unit (not shown). (Not shown), the sixth LED group (not shown) corresponding to the sixth specific light input unit (not shown), and the seventh LED group corresponding to the seventh specific light input unit (not shown). (Not shown). Note that FIG. 239 shows the first LED group 2614a to the fourth LED group 2614d, and the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group are not shown. Each LED group divides a plurality of LEDs 2614 arranged in a row in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction in the figure) on the second pattern substrate 2612 in the left-right direction of the second pattern substrate 2612, and in order from left to right. (In the order of returning to the beginning and becoming the first LED group 2614a after the seventh LED group). In this embodiment, each LED group has 6 LEDs 2614 each.

Next, the light emitting effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2614a of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the first specific light input unit 2630a, and is reflected by the first reflection unit 2670a to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the first reflecting portion 2670a appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of first reflecting portions 2670a can be made to emit light.

When the second LED group 2614b of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the second specific light input unit 2630b, and is reflected by the second reflection unit 2670b to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the third reflecting portion 2670c, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the second reflecting portion 2670b appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of second reflecting portions 2670b can be made to emit light.

When the third LED group 2614c of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the third specific light input unit 2630c, and is reflected by the third reflection unit 2670c to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the fourth reflecting portion 2670d, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the third reflecting portion 2670c appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of third reflecting portions 2670c can be made to emit light.

When the fourth LED group 2614d of the second pattern substrate 2612 is made to emit light, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d, and is reflected by the fourth reflection unit 2670d to the front surface of the light guide plate 2610. Since the other first reflecting portion 2670a, the second reflecting portion 2670b, the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the like reflect to other than the front, only the fourth reflecting portion 2670d appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the pattern composed of the plurality of fourth reflecting portions 2670d can be made to emit light.

Similarly, when each LED group is made to emit light from the fifth LED group to the seventh LED group 2614, light is incident on the light guide plate 2610 from the corresponding specific light input unit 2630, and the light guide plate 2610 is incident on the corresponding reflection unit 2670. It reflects to the front, and the other reflecting parts 2670 reflect to other than the front, and only the corresponding reflecting part 2670 appears to shine from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and is composed of the corresponding reflecting parts 2670. It is possible to make the pattern that is being emitted emit light.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a plurality of patterns 2623 can be made to emit light by switching the LED group to emit light, and the plurality of patterns are made to emit light in order to create a moving animation. It is possible to perform such a light emission effect. In particular, as shown in FIG. 240, in the light guide plate 2610 on which similar figures are superimposed, a moving effect that emits light like an animation in which there is a movement that spreads from the center to the outside or shrinks from the outside to the center. Can be done.

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by a moving effect by a light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 240, a moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed by switching the position of the light emitting LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630 g, and corresponds to each specific light input unit 2630a to 2630 g from the first LED group 2614a. The seventh LED group 2614 g is arranged. In FIG. 240, the position corresponding to each specific light input portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 240 (A), when the sixth LED group 2614f and the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on and light is incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f and the seventh specific light input unit 2630g, the light guide plate 2610 is exposed to light. The incident light is reflected by the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g, and the pattern in which the sixth reflecting portion 2670f and the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the fifth LED group 2614e and the sixth LED group 2614f are turned on and light is incident from the fifth specific light input unit 2630e and the sixth specific light input unit 2630f, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the fifth reflection unit. The 2670e and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f are reflected, and the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e and the sixth reflecting portion 2670f are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (B), when the fourth LED group 2614d and the fifth LED group 2614e are turned on and light is incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d and the fifth specific light input unit 2630e, the light guide plate is used. The light incident on the 2610 is reflected by the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e, and the pattern in which the fourth reflecting portion 2670d and the fifth reflecting portion 2670e are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, when the third LED group 2614c and the fourth LED group 2614d are turned on and light is incident from the third specific light input unit 2630c and the fourth specific light input unit 2630d, the light incident on the light guide plate 2610 is reflected by the third reflection unit. The 2670c and the fourth reflecting portion 2670d are reflected, and the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670cd and the fourth reflecting portion 2670d are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 240 (C), when the second LED group 2614b and the third LED group 2614c are turned on and light is incident from the second specific light input unit 2630b and the third specific light input unit 2630c, the light guide plate is used. The light incident on the 2610 is reflected by the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b and the third reflecting portion 2670c are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the position without changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, the size of the pattern can be changed, and a moving effect of emitting light so as to move from the center to the outside can be achieved. At this time, the LED group may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in a different color (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 241 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 241 by changing the number of light emitting LED groups with the passage of time, a moving effect in which the size of the pattern changes is performed.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630 g, and corresponds to each specific light input unit 2630a to 2630 g from the first LED group 2614a. The seventh LED group 2614 g is arranged. In addition, in FIG. 241, the position corresponding to each specific light input part is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 241 (A), the second LED group 2614b to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit, and the light incident from the second specific light input unit 2630b to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is emitted from the second reflection unit 2670b. -The seventh reflecting portion 2670g reflects, and the pattern in which the second reflecting portion 2670b to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, the third LED group 2614c to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the third specific light input unit 2630c to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the third reflection unit 2670c to the seventh reflection unit 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the third reflecting portion 2670c to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (B), the fourth LED group 2614d to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2630d to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the fourth. The 2670d to the 7th reflecting portions 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the 4th reflecting portion 2670d to the 7th reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

After that, the fifth LED group 2614e to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the fifth specific light input unit 2630e to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the fifth reflection unit 2670e to the seventh reflection unit 2670g. Then, the pattern in which the fifth reflecting portion 2670e to the seventh reflecting portion 2670g are arranged emits light and can be recognized by the player.

Further, as shown in FIG. 241 (C), the sixth LED group 2614f to the seventh LED group 2614g are turned on, and the light incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g is reflected by the sixth. The 2670f to the 7th reflecting portions 2670g are reflected, and the pattern in which the 6th reflecting portion 2670f to the 7th reflecting portion 2670g is arranged emits light, which can be recognized by the player.

In this way, by changing the number of LED groups (LED elements) to emit light, the size of the pattern (light emitting range) can be changed, and a moving effect of causing the pattern to emit light so as to shrink can be produced. At this time, the LED group may emit light in a single color, or each group may emit light in a different color (that is, depending on the position).

FIG. 242 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 242, the moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630 g, and corresponds to each specific light input unit 2630a to 2630 g from the first LED group 2614a. The seventh LED group 2614 g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 242, the position corresponding to each specific light input portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in FIG. 242 (A), the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the red light incident from the first specific light input unit 2630a is reflected by the first reflection unit 2670a, and the first reflection unit 2670a is arranged. The printed pattern emits light in red, and the player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the orange light incident from the second specific incoming light unit 2630b is reflected by the second reflecting unit 2670b, and the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the yellow light incident from the third specific light input unit 2630c is reflected by the third reflection unit 2670c, and the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the green light incident from the fourth specific incoming light unit 2630d is reflected by the fourth reflecting unit 2670d, and the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the blue light incident from the fifth specific incoming light unit 2630e is reflected by the fifth reflecting unit 2670e, and the pattern emits blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in indigo color, and the indigo light incident from the sixth specific light input unit 2630f is reflected by the sixth reflection unit 2670f, and the pattern emits indigo color. Further, the 7th LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the 7th reflecting unit 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the 7th specific incoming light unit 2630g, and the pattern emits purple light.

After that, as shown in FIG. 242 (B), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are lit in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, respectively, and the color of the pattern is changed. After a further lapse of time, as shown in FIG. 242 (C), the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g were lit in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, respectively, and the pattern was changed. The color changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is sequentially changed (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye gazes at a pattern that emits light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect that causes the pattern to emit light so that it moves inward.

FIG. 243 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the patterns on the light guide plate 2610 and the arrangement of the LED group 2614.

In this embodiment, the plurality of LED groups 2614 correspond to the reflection unit 2670 forming one pattern, and the plurality of LED groups 2614 emit light in a predetermined pattern to display one pattern. Specifically, the light emission pattern of the LED group 2614 (specific light input unit 2630) is controlled to be repeated with the seven LED groups as the repeating unit. Further, the LED is configured to emit light with directivity and illuminate a predetermined angle range from the front of the LED.

That is, as shown in FIG. 243, the illumination range of the LEDs that emit light in the same pattern (the light emitting source of the light constituting one pattern) is the range shown by the fan shape in the figure, and the second pattern substrate 2612. In the vicinity, there is a range where the light from the LED does not reach.

Therefore, the pattern is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance from the end portion where the light is incident on the light guide plate 2610. For example, when the illumination range of the LED is 60 degrees (half-value full angle θ = ± 30 degrees), the range where the light from the LED does not reach is an equilateral triangle, so the length of the repeating unit of the LED group (with the same pattern). The pattern is separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a length of 0.87 times α (interval between LEDs that emit light).

Generally speaking, if the length α of the repeating unit of the LED group, the illumination angle of the LED is θ, and the distance away from the end of the light guide plate 2610 is L, the following relationship is obtained.
L = tan θ × α / 2

In this way, when the moving pattern that appears to move is composed of light from a plurality of LED groups, the moving pattern must be arranged at a position separated from the end of the light guide plate 2610 by a predetermined distance. That is, the moving pattern area that projects the moving pattern is smaller than the still pattern area that projects the stationary pattern. When the light guide plate 2610 has the same size as the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the light guide plate 2610 can perform a moving effect in a region narrower than the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Therefore, in the production of the variable display game, the player can be made to recognize the progress of the variable display game without hindering the visual recognition of the special symbol normally displayed near the end of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600. .. Further, by performing the moving effect at the central portion of the liquid crystal display device 1600 that the player pays attention to, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest due to the excitement of the player due to the moving effect.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the center accessory 2500 light guide plate 2610 of the front unit 2000 is attached has been described. In this case, the inner frame of the center accessory 2500 (from the player located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1) In the visible opening window portion), a region where the moving effect cannot be produced within a predetermined distance from the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is created, and the region where the moving effect cannot be produced can be visually recognized by the player. In addition, the area where the moving effect can be produced becomes narrower, and the effect of the effect is reduced.

Therefore, unlike the above, the light guide plate 2610 may be attached to the back unit 3000. In this case, since the light guide plate 2610 can be made larger than the inner frame of the center accessory 2500, the area where the moving effect is impossible is hidden by the center accessory 2500, and the area where the moving effect is impossible is the display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600. It is arranged on the outside of the center accessory 2500, and the moving effect can be performed in the entire (or most) area of the inner frame of the center accessory 2500. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located at a position away from the peripheral edge of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 and the outer peripheral edge of the center accessory 2500.

Since the back unit 3000 includes various decorative bodies (decorative unit 3050, movable effect unit 3100, 3200, 3300, 3400, 3500, etc.), the end portion of the light guide plate 2610 is located behind these decorative bodies. The light guide plate 2610 can be arranged, and the light emitting device (first pattern substrate 2611, second pattern substrate 2612) can be positioned behind the decorative body. As a result, the substrate serving as a light source can be arranged at a position where the player cannot see it, and the decorativeness can be ensured.

Further, the LED for the light guide plate 2610 (LEDs 2613, 2614 for the light guide plate) and the LED for emitting light of the decorative body may be mounted on one substrate.

In this way, when the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the back unit 3000, the entire display area of the main liquid crystal display device 1600 can be made into an area where a moving effect can be produced, and the player is made aware of the unnaturalness due to the limitation of the moving effect area. You can avoid it.

FIG. 244 is a diagram showing an example of a pattern displayed by another moving effect by the light guide plate. In the example shown in FIG. 244, the moving effect in which the color of the pattern changes is performed by changing the emission color of the LED group with the passage of time.

As described above, the light guide plate 2610 is provided with the first specific light input unit 2630a to the seventh specific light input unit 2630g, and the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED correspond to each specific light input unit. A group of 2614 g is arranged. The first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g are composed of full-color LEDs and can emit light in multiple colors. In FIG. 244, the position corresponding to each specific light input portion is represented by the alphabet of the last character of the code.

As shown in the figure, the first LED group 2614a lights up in red, the first reflection unit 2670a reflects the red light incident from the first specific light input unit 2630a, and the pattern on which the first reflection unit 2670a is arranged is red. The player recognizes the red pattern. Similarly, the second LED group 2614b lights up in orange, and the second reflecting unit 2670b reflects the orange light incident from the second specific incoming light unit 2630b, and the pattern emits orange light. Further, the third LED group 2614c lights up in yellow, and the third reflecting unit 2670c reflects the yellow light incident from the third specific incoming light unit 2630c, and the pattern emits yellow light. Further, the fourth LED group 2614d lights up in green, and the fourth reflecting unit 2670d reflects the green light incident from the fourth specific incoming light unit 2630d, and the pattern emits green light. Further, the fifth LED group 2614e lights up in blue, and the fifth reflecting unit 2670e reflects the blue light incident from the fifth specific incoming light unit 2630e, and the pattern emits blue light. Further, the sixth LED group 2614f lights up in indigo, and the sixth reflecting unit 2670f reflects the indigo light incident from the sixth specific incoming light unit 2630f, and the pattern emits indigo. Further, the 7th LED group 2614g lights up in purple, and the 7th reflecting unit 2670g reflects the purple light incident from the 7th specific incoming light unit 2630g, and the pattern emits purple light.

After that, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in purple, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, and indigo, and the color of the pattern changes. After a further lapse of time, each of the first LED group 2614a to the seventh LED group 2614g lights up in indigo, purple, red, orange, yellow, green, and blue, and the color of the pattern changes.

In this way, the emission color of the LEDs constituting the LED group is changed, and the color of the pattern is sequentially changed (for example, every 0.5 seconds). Since the human eye gazes at a pattern that emits light in the same color, it is possible to create a moving effect that causes the pattern to emit light so that the lines of light of seven colors flow.

Although detailed description is omitted, even in the light guide plate 2610 having a pattern in which the two lines of light shown in FIG. 235 intersect, the emission color of each LED group 2614 is changed as described in FIG. 244. The color of the pattern (light streaks) changes, and you can create a moving effect that makes the pattern emit light so that the seven colors of light streaks flow. Further, by using the left-right parallax so that the streaks of light can be seen in the depth or the front side as the distance from the light source increases, a three-dimensional pattern can be displayed.

Next, the stereoscopic pattern and the plan view pattern by the light guide plate 2610 will be described.

FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern viewed in a plane is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 245 (B), since the reflecting surface of the reflecting portion 2660 provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is a curved surface, the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in a plurality of directions. , Reach the player's right eye 10R and left eye 10L. Further, the reflection unit 2660 travels in the light guide plate 2610, reflects light arriving at the reflection unit 2660 from a plurality of directions (that is, by a plurality of paths), and emits light to the front side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 245 (A), since the parallax between the left and right eyes does not occur in the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portion 2660, the player can place the pattern 2621 on the flat pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610. Will be seen as.

FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a state in which a pattern viewed in a plane is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 246 (B), the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L, and the reflecting portion 2650R is The light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 is reflected in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. However, since the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged close to each other (for example, 1 mm or less), as shown in FIG. 246 (A), the left and right sides of the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R are arranged. The parallax of the eye is small, and it can be said that the left-eye pattern formed by the reflecting portion 2650L and the right-eye pattern formed by the reflecting portion 2650R are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 as a flat pattern at the position of the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 247 is a diagram showing a state in which a picture that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 247 (B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247 (A), the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R on the light guide plate 2610, and the player can see the left and right eyes. Recognize a right-eye image and a left-eye image with a difference. In the state shown in FIG. 247, the light reaching the left eye 10L of the player and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at the point 2621C on the back surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern located behind the light guide plate 2610.

FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a state in which a picture that can be viewed stereoscopically is displayed by the light guide plate 2610.

As shown in FIG. 248 (B), the reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650L provided on the back surface of the light guide plate 2610 is set to an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's left eye 10L. The reflecting surface 2651 of the reflecting portion 2650R is set at an angle that reflects the light traveling in the light guide plate 2610 in the direction of the player's right eye 10R. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 248 (A), the left eye image 2621L and the right eye image 2621R are displaced by the distance between the reflecting portion 2650L and the reflecting portion 2650R on the light guide plate 2610, and the player can see the left and right eyes. Recognize a right-eye image and a left-eye image with a difference. In the state shown in FIG. 248, the light reaching the left eye 10L of the player and the light reaching the right eye 10R intersect at the point 2621C on the surface side of the light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the player sees the pattern 2621 composed of the reflecting portions 2650L and R as a three-dimensional pattern in front of the light guide plate 2610.

As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, since a plurality of different patterns can be emitted by one light guide plate 2610, it is necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each pattern in order to display an animation or the like. Instead, the thickness of the front effect unit 2600 in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and it is easy to secure a wide space behind the light guide plate 2610. can. Therefore, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like can be arranged on the rear side of the light guide plate 2610. This makes it possible to improve the appearance in the game area 5a and make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and in addition to the effect of the light emitting display of the pattern 2623, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and By performing a movable effect by the upper front movable effect unit 3300 or the like, it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest.

In addition, by arranging the light guide plate 2610 in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600, a plurality of translucent patterns generated by the light emission of the plurality of reflecting units 2670 emerge to show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation. Because of this, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is accustomed to the light emission effect using the conventional light guide plate, and it is possible to surprise and entertain the player, and at the same time, something good for the player. It is possible to make people think that there may be something, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since only the player seated in the front front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emitting display of the pattern by the light guide plate 2610 well, the light emitting display of the pattern 2623 can be seen from other players away from the front. It becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and it is possible to suppress the attention of other players and other players. You can play the game without worrying about the player, and you can entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is mounted in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, the pictures 2621 and 2622 are emitted and displayed by the LEDs 2613 and 2614. However, the light-emitting pattern does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually played can be visually recognized from the player side in good condition, which makes it difficult to see the game. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of distrust and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

Further, since the light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 2610 (first pattern substrate) can be obtained by matching the peripheral edge of the light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. 2611, the second pattern substrate 2612) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it can be difficult for the player to notice the existence of the light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that it was not, and to be surprised, and to entertain the light emitting display of a plurality of patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the light guide plate 2610, the light emitting display of a plurality of different patterns by the light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600 are combined. Since the effect can be shown to the player, various effects can be produced by appropriately combining them, and the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player can be entertained by the effect of the light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the light guide plate 2610 is different from the distance to the effect display device 1600. Therefore, it is possible to display an effect image related to a plurality of patterns 2623 luminescently displayed on the light guide plate 2610 to give the luminescently displayed patterns 2623 a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect. It is possible to show the player a production (display production) that can strongly attract interest, entertain the player, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the LEDs 2613 and 2614 may be single-color LEDs or full-color LEDs. Further, the number of the specific light input unit, the reflection unit, and the LED group can be appropriately selected according to the number, shape, and size of the patterns.

[13-3. Production example]
Next, an example of the effect display using the light guide plate in the special symbol variation display game will be described. 249 to 254 are views showing an example of an effect using a light guide plate.

In the effect display shown in FIG. 249, the light guide plate 2610 is made to emit light so that a predetermined pattern is projected on the light guide plate 2610, and the movement effect of moving the image toward the predetermined image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. This effect display may be executed in a specific special symbol variation display game (for example, as a specific reach effect or a notice effect).

Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 249 (A), nothing is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600, and the entire screen is blacked out (blacked out). This blackout causes the player to gaze at the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (B), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected on the light guide plate 2610. As a result, the player is made to pay attention to the first pattern 2621. Then, as shown in FIG. 249 (C), a movement effect is performed in which an image moving toward the first pattern 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (D), in the movement effect, the image 1611 may be moved from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621. The image 1611 moved to the liquid crystal display device 1600 and displayed may be the same color as or different from the first pattern 2621. Further, the image 1611 moved to the liquid crystal display device 1600 and displayed may have the same shape (similar shape) as the first pattern 2621 as shown in FIG. 249, or may have a different shape as shown in FIG. 250. In addition, the image 1611 and the first pattern 2621 that are moved and displayed have the same character image (the pose and face may be the same or different) and the same character (for example, the title of the character) but have the same font and color. It may be the same or different. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the light guide plate 2610 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, the back of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 as shown in FIG. 249 (D). It is also preferable that the image is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (E), in the movement effect, the number of images 1611 moving toward the first pattern 2621 and the ratio of the moving images 1611 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 1600 are over time. It may be changed according to.

During the movement effect, the mode of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 251, the color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. The color and brightness of the first pattern 2621 may be changed continuously (gradually) or stepwise (stepwise).

Further, as shown in FIG. 252, the size of the first pattern 2621 projected on the light guide plate 2610 may be changed during the movement effect. In this case, it is advisable to provide a plurality of light guide plates and use other light guide plates to project patterns of different sizes. Further, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns in a direction different from the irradiation direction (horizontal direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 of the initial size (for example). The first pattern 2621 of a different size (large or small) may be projected by irradiating light from (diagonal direction).

After performing the movement effect for a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 249 (F), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned off, and the first pattern 2621 is erased from the light guide plate 2610. Further, the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is also erased, and the entire screen is blacked out (blacked out). This blackout allows the player to gaze at the liquid crystal display device 1600 and create a gap to improve the expectation for the next production.

After that, as shown in FIG. 249 (G), an image 1612 (for example, a character having a high hit reliability) different from the first pattern 2621 or the image that is moved and displayed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as shown in FIG. 249 (H), the size of the character image 1612 is changed. For example, if the size of the character image 1612 is increased, the player's expectation for hitting is increased, but if the size of the character image 1612 is decreased, the player's expectation for hitting is lowered. The color and facial expression of the character image 1612 may be changed. Further, the character image 1612 may be displayed in an area overlapping the display area of the first pattern 2621. Further, along with the display of the character image 1612, the light guide plate 2610 may be irradiated from above to project a rainbow pattern (see FIG. 235).

The character image may be projected on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, since the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns by irradiating light from different directions, the light guide plate 2610 can project a plurality of different patterns in a direction different from the irradiation direction (horizontal direction) for projecting the first pattern 2621 (for example, obliquely). A character image may be projected by irradiating light from the direction). Further, a plurality of light guide plates may be provided, and the character image may be projected on the other light guide plates. When character images having different sizes and facial expressions are projected on the light guide plate provided in addition to the light guide plate 2610, unlike the flat liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect display with a sense of depth is possible.

In the movement effect described above in which the image moves toward the first pattern 2621, the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves after the first picture 2621 is projected, but the image on the liquid crystal display device 1600 moves. After starting the above, the first pattern 2621 may be projected. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 253, after the blackout (FIG. 253 (A)), as shown in FIG. 253 (B), before the first pattern 2621 is projected, the first pattern 2621 is displayed. The movement effect of displaying the image moving toward the projected position on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is started. After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (C), the LED 2613 mounted on the first pattern substrate 2611 is turned on, and the first pattern 2621 is projected on the light guide plate 2610. After that, as shown in FIG. 253 (D), the movement effect of moving the image toward the first pattern 2621 is continued.

In this way, the time when the first pattern 2621 is projected (time for the light guide plate effect) and the effect time for the image 1611 to move (time when the moving image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600) are the first pattern 2621. The light guide plate effect on which the image 1611 is projected may be started before or after the effect of moving the image 1611. Further, the light guide plate effect time on which the first pattern 2621 is projected may be longer or shorter than the effect time in which the image 1611 moves.

Further, as shown in FIG. 254, a variable display game may be produced by switching between a moving pattern in which the pattern on which the images are collected appears to move and a still pattern in which the image does not appear to move.

In the light guide plate effect shown in FIG. 254, when a moving pattern appears, the expectation for a big hit is high, and when a still pattern appears, the expectation for a big hit is low. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 254 (A), a still image 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 254 (B), the displayed still image is displayed. A moving effect is performed in which the image 1611 moving toward 2621 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 254 (C), the still pattern 2621 is switched to the moving pattern. Further, as shown in FIG. 254 (D), a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 may be performed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 254 (E), the still pattern 2621 is displayed on the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 254 (F), the still pattern 2621 is displayed. The moving effect of displaying the moving image 1611 on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is performed. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 254 (G), a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 1613 may be performed. good. After that, as shown in FIG. 254 (H), the variable display game ends with a loss without switching the still pattern 2621 to the moving pattern.

In the effect shown in FIG. 254, when a specific display effect (for example, a specific reach effect, a pseudo continuous effect, or a specific look-ahead effect) is selected in the special symbol variation display game, the effect is displayed in the specific display effect. The specific image 1611 is produced integrally with the moving effect of the first pattern 2621, and in other cases, the first pattern does not have to be subjected to the moving effect.

In this way, in the production of the variable display game shown in FIG. 254, the still pattern and the moving pattern are selectively displayed by the light guide plate 2610, so that the player has a sense of expectation for the development of the variable display game. , It is possible to suppress the decline in game entertainment.

Next, an example of an effect in which an effect by a moving body is added to an effect display using a light guide plate in a special symbol variation display game will be described.

FIGS. 255 and 256 are views showing an example of an effect using the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601.

In the effect shown in FIG. 255, one pattern is composed of the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601 appearing on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1600. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 255 (A), a part of the movable body 3601 appears or hides from the upper part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600 in a short cycle according to the progress of the variable display game. Repeatedly raise expectations for big hits for players. Then, as shown in FIG. 255 (B), all of the movable body 3601 appears on the front surface of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600.

After that, as shown in FIG. 255 (C), the pattern 2621 superimposed on the movable body is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610, and the image 1611 moving toward the movable body 3601 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. conduct. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 255 (D), a movement effect of moving an image from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 2621 may be performed. ..

The movable body 3601 may be made to emit light at the timing when the movement effect starts or during the movement effect. The light emitting mode (light emitting color and light emitting timing) of the movable body 3601 may be the same as or different from the light emitting mode of the light guide plate 2610.

By selectively performing either the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 249 does not appear or the effect display in which the movable body 3601 shown in FIG. 255 appears, the player's expectation for the development of the variable display game can be expected. It can be enhanced and can be a pachinko machine with a high degree of interest.

In the above-described example, the movable body 3601 is made to appear instead of the pattern on which the images are collected, but one character may be composed of the light guide plate 2610 and the movable body 3601. For example, if the body is represented by the movable body 3601 and the face is represented by the light guide plate 2610, the facial expression can be changed by switching the pattern displayed on the light guide plate 2610. As described above, in addition to the effect produced by the liquid crystal display device 1600, various effects can be realized by the light guide plate 2610.

In the effect shown in FIG. 256, the light guide plate 2610 is used as an effect suggesting the appearance of the movable body 3601. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 256 (A), the pattern 2621 is displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate 2610 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256 (B), the light guide plate 2610 displays the pattern 2621. A moving effect is performed in which the image 1611 moving toward the displayed pattern is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256C, a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the first pattern 2621 is performed. You may. After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (D), the movable body 3601 appears from the upper part of the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1600, and stops at a position overlapping the pattern 2621 of the light guide plate 2610.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 256 (E), the pattern 1613 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 according to the progress of the variable display game, and as shown in FIG. 256 (F), the pattern 1613 is displayed toward the displayed pattern 1613. A moving effect is performed in which the moving image 1611 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600. Further, as the variable display game progresses, as shown in FIG. 256 (G), a movement effect of moving the image 1611 from a plurality of locations (that is, a plurality of directions) of the liquid crystal display device 1600 toward the pattern 1613 may be performed. good. After that, as shown in FIG. 256 (H), the movable body does not appear and the variable display game ends with a loss.

As described above, in the effect shown in FIG. 256, the effect suggesting that the movable body appears can be performed by using the light guide plate.

[14. Pachinko machine using main control MPU with serial communication function]
The main control MPU 1311 of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a synchronous serial communication function in addition to the conventional 8-bit parallel bus communication function.

In a conventional pachinko machine, the input / output signals of the main control MPU 1311 in the main control board 1310 are transmitted using a parallel port in which one signal is transmitted by one signal line or an 8-bit bus. , The data output from the main control MPU 1311 may be read, or an illegal signal may be input to the main control MPU 1311 to perform an illegal act. Therefore, a configuration in which it is difficult to detect the input / output signal of the main control MPU 1311 from the outside is required, and when a serial communication function for continuously transmitting data at a predetermined timing with one signal line is used, the serial communication is performed. It becomes difficult to read data or input data at the timing of the line.

Further, the main control board 1310 is equipped with a test signal output circuit for the purpose of monitoring a signal when an inspection organization inspects a pachinko machine. For example, when inspecting the operation of a special electric accessory, a signal (for example, 5V on / off) input to a solenoid drive driver (transistor) is used to monitor the output signal of the solenoid that opens and closes the special electric accessory. The signal) was branched and used as a signal for inspection. When the serial signal transmitted in the main control board 1310 described above is output as an inspection signal, it is difficult for the inspection organization to use the serial signal as the inspection signal because a device for analyzing the serial signal is required. Is. Therefore, in a pachinko machine that transmits a signal by serial communication in the main control board 1310, it is necessary to devise an output of an inspection signal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, by inputting one serial signal to two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel, the inspection signal changes the level at the same timing as the solenoid drive signal. Was to be generated. When configured with the output transistor open collector (or open drain) of the serial-parallel conversion circuit, the voltage level differs by changing the voltage (5V and 12V) applied to the two serial-parallel conversion circuits connected in parallel. Two synchronized signals can be generated.

Furthermore, it is necessary to reduce the number of program steps for detecting the input by serial communication and reduce the software load. In the pachinko machine of this embodiment, a part of the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 is input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit, and a part is directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. It is necessary to devise whether to accept the input signal. For example, a signal whose input level needs to be determined immediately after the power is turned on may not be input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit, but may be directly input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. This is because the level of the signal input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311 can be detected even before the interrupt processing is executed, so that the signal level can be detected even before the timer interrupt processing such as immediately after the power is turned on.

In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, depending on the number of signals directly input to the main control MPU 1311, it is not necessary to use the extended I / O using the chip select, and the signals are input to the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311. The signal level can be captured in bit units for each clock, and the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

FIG. 257 is a block diagram of the periphery of the synchronous serial interface of the main control board 1310, FIG. 258 is a circuit diagram showing the connection between the serial-parallel conversion circuit and the LED, and FIG. 259 is the main control MPU 1311 and its periphery. It is a figure which shows the arrangement on the main control board 1310 of a component. In FIGS. 257, 258 and 259, the thick line indicates the parallel signal transmission line, and the thin line indicates the serial signal transmission line.

The main control MPU 1311 of this embodiment has an asynchronous serial communication port (asynchronous serial communication function) for communicating with other boards (peripheral control board 1510, payout control board 951 and the like), and the main control board 1310. Synchronous serial communication port (synchronous serial communication function) for communicating with the interface circuit and control signals of other devices (solar, etc.) are output, and are output from abnormality detection sensors such as vibration detection sensor and magnetic detection sensor. It has a general-purpose port to which signals are input.

The synchronous serial communication function of the main control MPU 1311 has a plurality of transmission / reception ports and a plurality of transmission ports. The communication partner of the transmission / reception port is selected by the chip select signal output from the main control MPU 1311.

The transmission / reception port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX), a reception signal input terminal (SERRX), a chip select output terminal (SERS0 to SERS3), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCK). Further, the transmission port is composed of a serial signal transmission terminal (SERTXT), a chip select output terminal (SERST), and a synchronization signal output terminal (SERCKT).

As shown in FIG. 257, one parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and two serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are connected to the transmission / reception port. The number of parallel-serial conversion circuits connected to the transmission / reception ports is not limited to the one shown in the figure.

In addition, more serial-parallel conversion circuits may be connected by making a connection such as the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 without using the chip select terminal. In this case, the types of signals output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit do not increase.

The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 connected to the transmission / reception port takes in the parallel data input when CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) is at 0 level, and after CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) rises to 1, a predetermined clock. Data is output from the serial port at the timing of. Signals such as a game ball detection switch (starting winning opening, large winning opening count switch, ordinary winning opening, specific area switch, ordinary symbol gate switch, game board discharge switch) and a photo sensor are input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341. The game ball that flows down the game area 5a is mainly detected. The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 has a configuration having a 16-bit input port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit input port may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

Specifically, since the serial signal transmission terminal (SERTX) is connected to the CLEAR / LOAD (negative logic) of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, when the serial transmission signal output by the main control MPU 1311 is at 0 level. The input output signal of the game ball detection switch is taken in, and after the serial transmission signal (SERTX) rises to 1, serial data corresponding to the level of the game ball detection switch is output from the serial port at a predetermined clock timing. In this way, since the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the output signal of the game ball detection switch by using the SERTX signal as a trigger, the data of the ball detection sensor can be taken in at an arbitrary timing.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 connected to the transmission / reception ports both output signals for lighting the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). , The data transmission destination is selected by the chip select signal from the main control MPU 1311. The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 take in the serial data input when the chip select (CS) signal is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and output the signal from the parallel port at the timing when the chip select signal rises to 1. do. The output level from the parallel port is latched in the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 and is maintained until the next time the chip select signal rises to 1.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 258, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 are connected to the segment side of the LED, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is connected to the common side of the LED. The serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 dynamically lights the LED by outputting a signal at a predetermined timing. The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 have a configuration having a 16-bit output port, but an integrated circuit having an 8-bit output port may be connected in parallel to form a 16-bit configuration.

The main control MPU 1311 outputs a common signal at the timing of outputting 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS0), sets the display digit of the 7-segment LED of the base display 1317, and outputs 0 from the chip select terminal (SERS1). A segment signal is output at the timing to turn on the LED.

In this embodiment, a 7-segment LED in which the anode side of the LED is a common terminal is used for the base display 1317, and when the LED is lit, a drive current is applied from the common terminal on the anode side to the segment terminal on the cathode side. It flows. However, since an integrated circuit having the same configuration is used for the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, the direction of the current output by the driver circuit in each of the conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 (of the output transistor of the driver circuit). Polarity) will be the same. Therefore, a driver circuit 1344 is provided after the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 so that a current can be supplied to the common terminal on the anode side. That is, the driver circuit 1344 has a function of outputting a drive current for lighting the LED, and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 has a function of sucking the drive current for lighting the LED.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit and 1341 and the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 may use an integrated circuit having only a parallel-serial conversion function and an integrated circuit having only a serial-parallel conversion function, respectively. Further, the parallel-serial conversion function and the serial-parallel conversion function may be switched and used by an integrated circuit capable of mutually converting a serial signal and a parallel signal.

Further, two serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 are connected to the transmission port of the main control MPU 1311. Similar to the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 described above, the serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 take in the serial data input when the chip select (CS) is at 0 level according to a predetermined clock signal, and the CS is 1. Output from the parallel port at the timing when it starts up. The output of the parallel port is equipped with a transistor for the driver, and the voltage applied to the transistor for the driver is switched to generate an output signal. That is, output signals of various voltages can be generated depending on the voltage applied to the driver transistor.

An external terminal plate 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0 to PA7) of channel A of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, and a signal output from the external terminal plate 784 (for example, a security signal, a ball payout signal, etc.) Is output. Further, various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, and drive signals of the various solenoids are output. Further, an inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory release signal, Ordinary electric accessory release signal, etc.) is output. Further, nothing is connected to the output port of channel A of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346.

The transmission port of the main control MPU 1311 can control only one channel (16 bits), and the same signal branched including the chip select is input to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346. Therefore, the same signal is output to the parallel side. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 generate a set of parallel signals that change at the same timing from one serial signal. That is, for inspection, the solenoid drive signal output from the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the output port (PB0 to PB7) of the channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 are output. The signal changes at the same timing. Therefore, the movement of the solenoid can be accurately output from the inspection terminal 1348. In addition, + 12V is applied to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 to drive the solenoid with 12V, and + 5V is applied to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 to output a 5V inspection signal. In this way, by using two serial-parallel conversion circuits to which different voltages are applied, it is possible to generate synchronized signals having different voltage levels.

Of the outputs from the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, the pattern on the output side of the solenoid drive signal through which a relatively large current flows is thickened, and the pattern on the output side of the inspection signal through which a relatively small current flows is thickened. The pattern may be thin. It should be noted that the resistance of the pattern may be reduced without thickening the pattern, and the pattern may be formed on both the front and back surfaces to increase the substantial cross-sectional area, or the inner layer pattern may be formed to increase the substantial cross-sectional area. May increase.

Further, since the two serial-parallel conversion circuits 1345 and 1346 operate independently, even if the load of one conversion circuit becomes large, the waveform of the output signal of the other conversion circuit is not disturbed and affects the output signal. Does not occur. That is, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 can output an inspection signal having the same waveform as the original waveform of the solenoid drive signal regardless of the operation of the solenoid connected to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, which is useful for accurate inspection. ..

Next, the arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 and peripheral components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 259.

As shown in FIG. 259, the main control MPU 1311 is mounted on the main control board 1310, and various interface circuits are arranged around the main control MPU 1311. Further, an inspection circuit arrangement area is provided on the main control board 1310, and a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347, and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area. The circuit components (serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, interface circuit 1347, inspection terminal 1348, etc.) provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 to be inspected by the inspection institution, and are generally commercially available pachinko machines. It is not mounted on 1 (a pattern for mounting parts is provided). That is, the pachinko machine 1 generally available on the market is equipped with a connector that relays the signal output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 to the solenoid, but the inspection signal output from the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 is used. The relay inspection terminal 1348 is not mounted. Therefore, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 has a configuration in which the inspection signal is not detected by the fraudster and is not used for the fraudulent act.

As described above, in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, no component is mounted in the inspection circuit arrangement area, but a print pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided. For this reason, noise may be induced in the data bus and cause a malfunction. Therefore, the wiring (print pattern) in the inspection circuit arrangement area is pulled up to the power supply (+ 5V) via a resistor (or to GND). (Pull down) to reduce the effect of noise.

Further, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, surface mount parts are not used in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are not mounted in the commercially available pachinko machine 1. Surface mount components can be used. Therefore, the parts of the inspection circuit can be miniaturized, the inspection circuit arrangement area can be miniaturized, and the main control board 1310 can be miniaturized. Similarly, from the viewpoint of preventing unauthorized modification, the commercially available pachinko machine 1 does not have any parts mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, but the circuit parts provided in the inspection circuit arrangement area are commercially available pachinko machines. Since it is not mounted on 1, components can be mounted on the back surface side of the main control board 1310.

Among the components of the inspection circuit, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on another board arranged in the vicinity of the main control board 1310. This separate substrate is mounted only on the pachinko machine 1 that is inspected by an inspection organization, and is not mounted on the pachinko machine 1 that is generally on the market. Also in this case, the inspection signal is not output from the pachinko machine 1 which is generally on the market.

In this way, by arranging the circuit parts used for the inspection of the pachinko machine 1 in the inspection circuit arrangement area, it is easy to find the missing parts in the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and the additional parts for fraud can be easily found. Easy to find installation. Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 and the interface circuit 1347 can be arranged near the inspection terminal 1348, and the main control board 1310 having high noise immunity can be configured.

Further, as shown in FIG. 259, the circuit components arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are oriented differently from the same type of circuit components arranged elsewhere in the main control board 1310 (eg, 180 degrees as shown). It is better to arrange it in the direction of rotation). By arranging the circuit parts in different directions in the inspection circuit arrangement area and the other place of the main control board 1310 in this way, it becomes possible to easily distinguish the parts used for the normal game from the parts for inspection. In the manufacturing process of a commercially available pachinko machine 1, it is possible to prevent erroneous mounting in which parts are erroneously placed in the inspection circuit placement area.

Further, on the main control board 1310, the symbols and numbers (or combinations thereof) of the mounted circuit parts are displayed by, for example, silk printing, but the symbols of the circuit parts arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area and the symbols of the circuit parts are arranged. The numbers may be grouped together with the symbols and numbers following the symbols and numbers of the circuit parts used for game control. For example, the integrated circuits for game control are IC1 to IC11, and the integrated circuits arranged in the inspection circuit arrangement area are designated by the symbols after IC12. By doing so, it is possible to add symbols and numbers that do not jump to the circuit parts for game control mounted on the commercially available pachinko machine 1, and it is easy to check after mounting the circuit parts on the main control board 1310. can.

Furthermore, if the symbols and numbers of the inspection terminals are different from the symbols and numbers of the connectors connected to the game control parts, the connectors connected to the game control parts and the inspection terminals can be easily separated. It can be distinguished and can prevent incorrect wiring when connecting cables incorrectly. In particular, if the symbol or number of the inspection terminal is the same as the symbol or number of the connection destination of the inspection device of the other party, it is convenient to connect the cable at the time of inspection and connection mistakes can be reduced.

Further, some of the general-purpose ports of the main control MPU 1311 are unused empty ports, and it is preferable to arrange the free ports so as to consolidate them at the adjacent terminals of the main control MPU 1311. That is, regardless of whether the port numbers of the unused ports are continuous, it is preferable that the terminals of the empty ports are arranged at the aggregated position. By consolidating and arranging the empty terminals, the area on the main control board 1310 where the print pattern is not provided is aggregated, it is easy to find missing parts, and it is easy to find the installation of additional parts for fraud. It's getting easier.

Further, the terminal of the empty port is arranged at a position close to the connector through which a relatively large current flows (for example, a solenoid is connected) in the positional relationship with the connector. That is, in the longitudinal direction of the main control MPU 1311, connectors for inputting / outputting game control signals are arranged on the left and right (upper and lower in the figure) on the side where the terminal of the empty port is located. Therefore, when adding an additional function to the pachinko machine 1, the design of the main control board 1310 can be easily changed without routing a long pattern.

As described above, by using serial communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310, it is possible to reduce the wiring of the data bus, and it becomes easy to find the attachment of additional parts for fraud. That is, the wiring in which the circuit patterns of a large number of data buses are complicatedly arranged by eliminating the large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits and forming several signal lines including the control line. Therefore, it becomes a neat circuit pattern. Further, by shortening the routing distance of the data line, it is possible to configure the main control board 1310 which is resistant to noise.

Further, since the number of data lines is reduced, the circuits can be arranged without being affected by the routing of the data lines, so that the I / O ICs (parallel interface circuit, serial interface circuit) can be arranged near the main control MPU 1311.

Further, by reducing the circuit pattern, the ground pattern can be increased without changing the area of the main control board 1310, and the main control board 1310 which is more resistant to noise can be configured.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the arrangement of ports in the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel output port of the address D2 (chip select SERS0) is a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA3 of the channel A are the common side of the function display unit 1400 (the anode terminal of the LED). The output ports PA4 to PA7 are connected to the common side (anode terminal of the 7-segment LED) of the base display 1317. The output ports PB0 to PB7 of channel B of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 are not used.

Further, the parallel output port of the address D3 (chip select SERS1) is a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342, and as shown in FIG. 258, the output ports PA0 to PA7 of the channel A are on the segment side of the function display unit 1400 (cathode of the LED). It is connected to the terminal), and the output ports PB0 to PB7 of the channel B are connected to the segment side (cathode terminal of the 7-segment LED) of the base display 1317.

The common side of the LED (the anode terminal of the LED) switches the output port to be turned on at regular intervals (for example, interrupts every 4 ms). When paying attention to the output port of channel A, only PA0 is turned on in the timer interrupt processing, only PA1 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms), ..., Only PA7 is turned on in the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms). Is repeated at a fixed cycle (4 ms x number of ports). That is, when eight ports are repeatedly switched, each port is turned on every 32 ms. Alternatively, when the output ports PA0 to PA3 and PA4 to PA7 of channel A are grouped and the output port of channel A is focused on, only PA0 and PA4 are turned on in the timer interrupt processing, and the next timer interrupt processing (after 4 ms). Only PA1 and PA5 may be turned on, ..., Only PA3 and PA7 may be turned on at a fixed cycle (4 ms × number of ports) in the next timer interrupt process (after 4 ms). By using serial communication for this fixed cycle operation, it is possible to make it difficult to detect the operation timing of the main control MPU 1311.

The parallel input port at address D5 is a parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341, and switches (ball detection sensors) for detecting game balls are connected to inputs PA1 to PA7 and PB0 to PB7. The outputs of these ball detection sensors are input to the main control MPU 1311 as serial signals and read as signals at address D5.

Further, the operation information of the setting key 971, the operation information of the RAM clear switch 954, the power failure warning signal, the main payment ACK signal, and the detection signal of the frame opening detection switch are input to the general-purpose input ports INP0 to INP4 provided in the main control MPU 1311. ing. Since these signals need to be monitored in real time (when requested by the program) or outside the timer interrupt processing (for example, immediately after the power is turned on), the main control is performed without going through the parallel / serial conversion circuit. It is directly input to MPU 1311.

Further, the general-purpose input / output ports (both input / output) IOP0 to IOP3 provided in the main control MPU 1311 have a detection signal of a radio wave detection sensor, a detection signal of a vibration detection sensor, a detection signal of a magnetic detection switch, and a detection signal of a proximity error switch. It has been entered. These signals are signals that are output when an abnormality (such as fraudulent activity or failure) occurs in the pachinko machine 1, and real-time monitoring (when requested by the program) is required. Therefore, a parallel / serial conversion circuit is used. It is directly input to the main control MPU 1311 without intervention. Further, the detection signals of these sensors and switches are used to notify the abnormality by the main liquid crystal display device 1600 or voice. By this abnormality notification, the employees of the hall come to check the status of the pachinko machine, so that the game is substantially stopped. If this abnormality notification is an erroneous notification, it makes the player feel uncomfortable, so it is necessary to suppress the erroneous detection. Therefore, it is preferable to input these signals to the general-purpose input / output port and detect them a plurality of times in a short time (so-called double reading) to suppress erroneous detection due to the influence of noise.

In this double-reading process, in one timer interrupt process, read instructions are continuously executed to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Execute multiple read instructions with several instructions in between to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose I / O port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals, or multiple reads with a wait of several clocks in between. It is performed by executing an instruction to determine the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (or general-purpose input port) at short time intervals. Therefore, when the level of a port is continuously determined via a parallel-serial conversion circuit, the level can be detected only at intervals of several tens of microseconds, whereas when the level of a general-purpose port is continuously determined, it is 1 microsecond. The level can be detected at the following intervals, and the signal level can be detected in a short cycle.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the signals of various switches and sensors that require real-time performance are directly input to the general-purpose input port and the general-purpose output port without using the extended I / O using the chip select. Since the signal level input to the general-purpose input / output port (both input and output) is captured in bit units for each clock, the signal level can be detected in real time without waiting for the reception of the serial signal.

Although the general-purpose input / output ports (for both input and output) IOP4 to IOP7 are not used, some of the signals input via the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 are part of the general-purpose input / output ports (for both input and output) IOP4 to IOP7. You may enter in.

Further, although not shown, the main control MPU 1311 may have a general-purpose output port.

If the general-purpose input port is an empty terminal, pull it up to 5V via a resistor or pull it down to GND to prevent the terminal from reaching an intermediate potential and prevent the influence of noise induced in the power supply line. It should be reduced. When the general-purpose output port is an empty terminal, it may be opened, but it is preferable to pull up to 5V via a dummy resistor or pull down to GND so that the level change of the output port does not become noise.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the inspection signal is output from the general-purpose port of the main control MPU 1311, and the signal used for the game control is output via the serial-parallel conversion circuit. Therefore, the winning ball detection signal is aggregated and input to one port, and is easy to handle in the game control program.

Further, among the signals input to the main control MPU 1311, a signal that needs to be detected multiple times in a short time (so-called double reading) is input to the general-purpose port, and a signal that does not need to be read twice is serialized. Input to the main control MPU 1311 via a parallel conversion circuit. Since the general-purpose port can check the signal level in real time, the signal level can be detected multiple times in a short time to eliminate the influence of noise and make a judgment. If the general-purpose input port is free, the port may be assigned so that a signal that does not need to be read twice is input to the general-purpose port.

A signal input to the main control MPU 1311 can be assigned to the general-purpose input port, but a signal input to the main control MPU 1311 and a signal output from the main control MPU 1311 are assigned to the general-purpose input / output port (for both input and output). Since both can be assigned, the general-purpose I / O port is highly versatile for changes in specifications. For this reason, it is desirable that the port to be left as a spare for adding new functions is a general-purpose input / output port (for both input and output), and it is desirable to give priority to the general-purpose input port.

Next, the timing of data output and capture by the synchronous serial signal will be described with reference to FIG. 261.

When the main control MPU 1311 outputs 0 (LOW) from the chip select terminal SERS0, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is selected, and the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the base display 1317. In the figure, PA7 (COM4) is selected in PA7 to PA4. After that, the main control MPU 1311 outputs a selection signal on the common side of the function display unit 1400 from the serial signal transmission terminal SERTX. In the figure, PA3 (LED-C4) is selected in PA3 to PA0.

Since no output is assigned to the B channel port of the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, nothing is originally output at the data acquisition timings of PB7 to PB0, and 1 (HIGH) is maintained. However, in the pachinko machine of this embodiment, the serial transmission signal SERTX output from the main control MPU 1311 is connected to the CLR / LOAD terminal that determines the data acquisition timing of the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341, and this signal is 0 ( Data is fetched from PA0 to PB7 at the time of LOW). Therefore, the serial transmission signal SERTX is set to 0 (LOW) at any timing of PB7 to PB0, and data is taken from PA0 to PB7 of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341.

The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 takes in the data, and after the serial transmission signal SERTX rises to 1 (HIGH), outputs the serial data from the serial signal output terminal (Q8C) according to the clock signal. During this period, the serial transmission signal SERTX is maintained at 1 (HIGH) and controlled so as not to capture new data.

As described above, in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, since the transmission signal of the vacant output port is used for the trigger for capturing the output of the game ball detection sensor, the data of the ball detection sensor can be captured at an arbitrary timing.

Next, another arrangement of the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263.

It is desirable that the main control board 1310 be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesigning. However, the input / output signals of the main control board 1310 may differ depending on the model and specifications. Therefore, in this embodiment, the input / output interfaces of the main control board 1310, which differ depending on the model, are mounted on another board (input / output board 1351), and the periphery of the main control MPU 1311 common to each model is mounted on the main control board 1310. The configuration is to be used. Performance (for example, noise resistance) is evaluated and designed by making the main control board 1310 common to multiple models, that is, by making the board size, circuit design, printed circuit board artwork, component placement, etc. the same. The main control board 1310, which has stable quality, can be commonly used by a plurality of models without redesigning.

Further, when the input / output interface of the main control board 1310 is mounted on another input / output board 1351, the problem is where to divide the circuit. One is a method of separating by a serial signal line, and the second is a method of separating by a parallel signal obtained by converting a serial signal. In the former case, the number of wirings between the substrates can be reduced as compared with the latter, which is desirable. Further, in the serial signal, even if the signal itself is acquired, it is difficult to know the order in which the data is transmitted, and it is unknown which data is transmitted at which timing. Further, it is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and this synchronized clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data. Therefore, it is preferable to connect the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 with a serial signal line.

As shown in FIG. 262, an input / output board 1351 attached to the main control board 1310 is provided, and the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 are mounted in the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 is made of a transparent resin that houses the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 so that it can be sealed with a structure that cannot be opened without breaking once closed. The input / output board 1351 is provided with a parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 and a serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345. The main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 (main control MPU 1311 and the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345) are connected by a serial communication line, and are connected by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port. The boards can be connected with a smaller number. The serial signal line may be connected by an electric wire or by a board-to-board connector.

Further, if serial communication is performed between the boards, it is difficult to analyze the data even if the signal is acquired, so that the possibility that the content of the transmitted data is known to a fraudster can be reduced. Further, since the input / output board 1351 for inputting / outputting signals for game control is configured separately from the main control board 1310 and the input / output signals changing depending on the model are set in the input / output board 1351, the main control board 1310 is modified. The number of models that can be applied without doing this can be increased, and the versatility of the main control board 1310 can be improved.

Further, by accommodating the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351 in one main control board box 1320, the signal line for serial communication can be shortened.

Further, when the main control board 1310 is used for another model, the design of the input / output board 1351 may be changed, and the relationship between the connector of the main control board 1310 and the main control MPU 1311 does not change depending on the model. The main control board 1310, whose performance (for example, noise resistance performance) has been evaluated and whose design quality is stable, can be used. Further, if the size of the input / output board 1351 and the position of the mounting holes are not changed, the conventional main control board box 1320 can be diverted without redesigning the main control board box 1320. Further, the noise countermeasures that change for each model may be taken not by the main control board 1310 but by the input / output board 1351.

The serial-parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 that output the drive signal of the base display 1317 may be arranged on the main control board 1310. When the base display 1317 is arranged on the input / output board 1351, the serial / parallel conversion circuits 1342 and 1343 are arranged on the input / output board 1351, and the signal for driving the function display unit 1400 is transmitted to the input / output board. It is good to output from 1351.

Further, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 that generates the inspection signal may be arranged on the main control board 1310. That is, the inspection circuit arrangement area and the inspection terminal 1348 may be provided on the main control board 1310. This is because a part of the signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 is output from the main control MPU 1311 by the parallel bus. Therefore, when the inspection terminal 1348 is arranged on the input / output board 1351, the input / output with the main control board 1310 This is because the number of connecting lines to and from the substrate 1351 increases.

Further, as shown in FIG. 263, the main control board 1310 may be housed in the main control board box 1320, and the input / output board 1351 may be mounted outside the main control board box 1320.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 263, since the input / output board 1351 is provided outside the main control board box 1320, the main control board box 1320 can be used in common even if the size of the main control board box 1320 changes. Further, since the input / output board 1351 and the main control board 1310 are housed in separate board boxes, the degree of freedom in arranging the boards is improved. Further, if the main control board box 1320 for accommodating the main control board 1310 and the input / output board box 1350 for accommodating the input / output board 1351 are separately provided, each board box becomes smaller and the board installation position becomes free. .. Further, since the main control board 1310 is provided with a base display 1317, an LED for displaying an error code, and a setting key 971, it needs to appear on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, but the input / output board 1351 is a pachinko machine. Since it is not necessary to be visible from the back surface side of the machine 1, the board installation position is free. As described above, in the form shown in FIG. 263, the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

In the form shown in FIG. 263, the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320. The main control MPU 1311 outputs data from the data bus in addition to the serial signal. In pachinko machines, it is desirable not to output the data bus output from the main control MPU 1311 to the outside of the sealed main control board box 1320 so that the pachinko machine operation is not detected by fraudsters. .. However, even if the serial signal output from the main control MPU 1311 is output to the outside of the main control board box 1320, it is unlikely that a fraudster will detect the operating status of the pachinko machine. This is because the data bus outputs data according to the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and the data rate is constant, so that the data rate can be easily estimated from the outside, and as a result, the signal transmitted by the data bus is acquired. There are times. However, the serial signal is output at a speed synchronized with the clock for the serial signal, and the speed of this synchronized clock may be different from the operating clock of the main control MPU 1311 and can be changed. Therefore, it is difficult to estimate the data rate from the outside, and even if a serial signal is acquired, it is difficult to know the content of the transmitted data.

The example in which the input / output board 1351 is provided separately from the main control board 1310 and the input / output function of the signal depending on the model is mounted on the input / output board 1351 has been described above. If there is a part that does not reduce the resistance to fraud and noise even if it is arranged, it may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. For example, the output of signals that require drive current for solenoids and motors attached to the game board 5, the output of drive signals for the function display unit 1400, and various sensors (winning ball detection, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor, vibration sensor). The signal input of is a function that may be mounted on the input / output board 1351. Further, communication with the payout control board 951, output of a signal output from the external terminal board 784, power failure detection, input of the setting key 971 (the setting key 971 itself may be provided outside the main control board 1310), a base display. The output to the 1317 is a function that should be mounted on the 1310 on the main control board.

Further, when the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit 1345 mounted on the input / output board 1351 input a dummy signal (0V or 5V) to the empty input terminal or connect a dummy resistor to the empty output terminal. good. This is because if nothing is connected to an empty terminal, noise may be taken in and the circuit may malfunction.

In particular, if some of the multiple signals that the fraudster tries to acquire are transmitted by a parallel bus or a general-purpose port and other signals are transmitted by a serial signal, it is difficult to analyze the serial signal. The fraudster needs to acquire signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351, and the deterrence against fraud can be enhanced.

[15. Slot machine]
Up to this point, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the ROM of the pachinko machine has been described. Next, the arrangement of the programs and data stored in the RAM and ROM of the slot machine (rotary type gaming machine) will be described. Although the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 26, the programs and data are arranged in the RAM and ROM as in the case of the slot machine 4000 described below.

[15-1. structure]
First, the structure of the slot machine 4000 in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 264 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000, and FIG. 265 is a perspective view of the slot machine 4000 with the front member 4200 open.

As shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, in the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, various devices are provided inside a box-shaped housing 4100 having an open front surface, and a front member is provided on the front surface of the housing 4100. The 4200 is provided so as to be openable and closable in a single-sided manner. An image display body 4500 for displaying and displaying information according to the progress of the game, a speaker for producing sound, and the like are provided on the upper portion of the front member 4200. The image display body 4500 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display panel, and displays various information in addition to the effect display related to the game. Then, various effect displays and history information displays on the image display body 4500 are controlled by the effect control board 4700. That is, the image display body 4500 serves as an effect display means capable of displaying an effect according to the progress of the game, and the effect control board 4700 provides a display control means capable of performing display control of the effect display means. Eggplant.

At the center of the front member 4200, a front panel is arranged so that the rear cannot be seen and a pattern for decoration is drawn, and the rear can be seen at the center of the front panel (for example, transparent). ) A design display window 4401 is formed. The front panel may be configured by a display device, and the reel 4301 can be visually recognized when the image is not displayed on the symbol display window 4401, and an image for producing a game is mainly displayed around the symbol display window 4401. do. In this case, it is also possible to display an image for producing the game on the portion of the symbol display window 4401.

Through the symbol display window 4401 (window portion), it is possible to visually recognize the symbol that is variablely displayed by the rotation of the reel 4301 arranged in the housing. The reel 4301 includes a cylindrical left reel 4301a, a middle reel 4301b, and a right reel 4301c arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. A strip-shaped sheet on which a plurality of symbols are drawn is wound around the outer peripheral surfaces of these reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, so that the plurality of symbols are arranged according to a predetermined arrangement.

Reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c (see FIG. 266), which are stepping motors, are provided on the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are independently rotated and stopped. It is possible to do. That is, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c form the drive source of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively. Further, the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, and 4341c are controlled by the two-phase excitation method in the same manner as the payout motor 839 of the pachinko machine 1 described above to increase the drive torque and the static torque. As a result, it becomes possible to adopt a small motor as a drive source, and the cost can be reduced.

In the following, the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c will be referred to as the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively, as necessary. The corresponding reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, and 4211c are designated as the left reel stop button 4211a, the middle reel stop button 4211b, and the right reel stop button 4211c. Further, the reel drive motors 4341 corresponding to each reel are the left reel drive motor 4341a, the middle reel drive motor 4341b, and the right reel drive motor 4341c.

Further, by rotating the reel 4301 by the reel drive motor 4341, a plurality of types of symbols visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401 are changed so as to circulate from top to bottom, for example (variation display). On the other hand, when the reels 4301 are stopped, for each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, a predetermined number (for example, three) of consecutive symbols, that is, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3, are transmitted through the symbol display window 4401. It is visible. That is, the effective display units of the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c for deriving and displaying the stop result of the game can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 4401.

A predetermined enableable line is set for the 3 × 3 symbol matrix visually recognized from the symbol display window 4401. In the present embodiment, a line that crosses the middle symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (middle line), a line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c from the left reel 4301a lower stage-middle reel 4301b middle stage-right reel 4301c upper stage ( (Right-up line), left reel 4301a upper-middle reel 4301b middle-right reel 4301c lower line that diagonally crosses each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c (right-down line) is an enableable line. Then, the enableable line is activated by the player inserting a medal or inputting from a credit (hereinafter referred to as "betting operation"), and based on the symbol combination mode (roll) formed on this valid line. It is judged whether or not the prize (role) is established.

When a prize is established, three predetermined symbols may be lined up on the effective line, or three predetermined symbols may be lined up on another line in appearance. As such a line, there is a line (upper line) that crosses the upper symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c. It should be noted that the line (lower line) that crosses the lower symbol of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c and the front portion (visible part) facing the symbol display window 4401 of each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c other than the above are crossed. The symbols may appear to be lined up on the virtual line located. Below, the enableable lines (middle, rising to the right, falling to the right), the lines where the symbols can be visually aligned at the time of winning (upper line), and other lines (lower line, etc.) are grouped together to stop the symbols (design alignment). Line).

The upper, middle, lower, upward-sloping, and downward-sloping lines are set as enableable lines, and a predetermined enableable line is activated according to the number of bets, and a prize is won based on the symbol combination mode formed on this valid line. Judge the establishment / non-establishment of the role). For example, in the number of bets 1, the middle line is the effective line, in the number of bets 2, the middle line is added to the upper and lower lines, and in the number of bets 3, the upper, middle and lower lines are added to the upper, middle and lower lines, and the upward and downward right lines are the effective lines. And. In addition, all lines may be valid regardless of the number of bets (even if the number of bets is 1 or 2), or may be dedicated to 3 cards.

Around (for example, below) the symbol display window 4401, a payout number display LED 4562 that displays the number of medals paid out by the game is provided. A credit display for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 4000 and a count display for displaying the number of remaining games in the special prize may be provided.

A step portion projecting to the front side is formed below the design display window 4401, and the upper surface of this step portion is an operation unit 4202 that inclines downward toward the front side. The operation unit 4202 is provided with a medal insertion slot 4203, a single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206 as a progress operation unit for advancing the game.

The medal insertion slot 4203 is arranged on the right side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The game can be executed when the player inserts a medal into the medal insertion slot 4203 and performs a betting operation. A insertion sensor 4207b for detecting the passage of medals is provided in the path through which the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 pass, and the number of inserted medals is counted based on the detection information by the insertion sensor 4207b.

The single insertion button 4205 and the max bet button 4206 are arranged on the left side of the operation unit 4202 when viewed from the front side of the slot machine 4000. The one-sheet insertion button 4205 can be input one by one from the credit by performing the pressing operation once. The max bet button 4206 can input from credits to the maximum number of bets (for example, 3) by performing a pressing operation once, but if the number of credits is less than the maximum number, the number of credits is input as the number of bets. It has become like.

Below the operation unit 4202, a refund button 4209, a start lever 4210, a return button 4208, a reel stop button 4211, a key device 4215, and the like are provided. The refund button 4209 is paid out as a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, a medal (bet medal) input as a bet number by the single insertion button 4205, and a max bet button 4206, or a prize is established and stored as a credit. It is used when giving a command to return the medal (stored medal) to the medal tray 4201. If medals are inserted from the medal slot 4203 after the automatic betting operation based on the establishment of the replay prize (replay prize), or if the number of medals exceeds a predetermined number that can be stored as credits, the medals are also used for medals via the medal selector 4207. It will be returned to the saucer 4201.

The start lever 4210 is an operation lever for starting a break game. The key device 4215 is for inserting a key when opening the front member 4200 or when resetting the error (for example, hopper error) state of the slot machine 4000. The return button 4208 is used when the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and packed inside the medal selector 4207 is returned to the medal tray 4201.

The reel stop button 4211 is composed of a left reel stop button 4211a, a middle reel stop button 4211b, and a right reel stop button 4211c, which are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the left reel 4301a, the middle reel 4301b, and the right reel 4301c, respectively. The purpose is to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c according to the stop operation, respectively.

Further, below the portion where these operation buttons are provided, a decorative plate (decorative panel) forming a lower region of the front member 4200 is provided. Further, below the decorative plate and at the bottom of the front member 4200, a medal tray 4201 for storing medals, a medal payout outlet, a speaker 4512 for outputting sound, and the like are provided.

A main board (game control device) 4600 (see FIG. 266) that controls the entire slot machine 4000 is arranged in the upper part inside the housing. An accessory ratio indicator 1317 and a display switch 1318 are provided on the main board 4600. The accessory ratio display 1317 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, similar to the pachinko machine described above. The accessory ratio display 1317 may be configured by a liquid crystal display device provided on the main board 4600.

The accessory ratio display 1317 is not provided on the main board 4600, but is also used as another display (for example, payout number display LED4562 or image display 4500) provided in front of the slot machine 4000, and payout number display LED4562. Or the image display body 4500 may display the accessory ratio.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio is displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317. It is preferable to indicate (print, engrav, seal, etc.) that the switch is for operating the display of the accessory ratio on the printed circuit board near the display switch 1318 or on the housing 4100. It is desirable that the display switch 1318 is provided in the vicinity of the accessory ratio display 1317, but even if it is not the main control unit 1300, if it is in a place where it is easy to operate, another board (for example, the effect control board 4700). , Power supply device 4112), housing 4100, or front member 4200. Further, as will be described later, the display switch 1318 may also be used as a RAM clear switch. By providing the display switch 1318 at a position where the player cannot operate it, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously operating it.

Further, a symbol variation display device 4300 is provided substantially in the center of the inside of the housing, and rotatable reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are placed. Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 for outputting a signal from the main board 4600 to an external device is provided inside the housing of the slot machine 4000.

Further, a medal payout device (hopper) 4110 is arranged in the lower part inside the housing. The medal payout device 4110 receives and stores medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203 and guided by the medal selector 4207, and when a predetermined symbol combination mode is formed on the effective line and a prize is established, the prize is won. The number of medals (payout medals) corresponding to the above, or the medals exceeding the upper limit of credits due to the addition accompanying the establishment of the prize are paid out to the medal tray 4201. The medals for the credits are paid out to the medal tray 4201 by the medal payout device 4110 by operating the refund button 4209. Further, on the right side of the medal payout device 4110, medals overflowing from the medal payout device 4110 and flowing in are stored, and the inflowing medals are sent to the medal collection mechanism of the installation island where the slot machine 4000 is installed. An overflow tank is provided for guidance.

[15-2. Internal configuration of slot machine]
FIG. 266 is a block diagram showing the configurations of various mechanical elements, electronic devices, operating members, and the like provided in the slot machine 4000. The slot machine 4000 has a main board 4600 for comprehensively controlling the progress of the game, and the main board 4600 is equipped with a CPU 4601, a ROM 4602, a RAM 4603, an input / output interface 4604, and the like.

Further, as described above, the main board 4600 is provided with a bonus ratio indicator 1317 for displaying the bonus ratio calculated by the CPU 4601 and a display switch 1318 for switching the display of the bonus ratio display 1317. The display switch 1318 may be composed of a push button switch that performs a momentary operation, but may be a switch of another type. When the display switch 1318 is operated, the accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio display 1317.

The above-mentioned single push button 4205, max bet button 4206, start lever 4210, reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c, refund button 4209, etc. are all connected to the main board 4600, and these operation buttons are not shown. Is operated by the player, and the detected operation signal is output to the main board 4600. Specifically, when the start lever 4210 is operated, an operation signal for starting the above-mentioned symbol variation display device 4300 (starting rotation of the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c) is output to the main board 4600, and the reel stop button 4211a When 4211b and 4211c are operated, an operation signal for stopping the reels 4301a, 4301b and 4301c is output to the main board 4600.

Further, the slot machine 4000 accommodates other devices together with the main board 4600, and various signals are input from these devices to the main board 4600. In addition to the symbol variation display device 4300, the devices include a medal payout device 4110 and the like.

As described above, the symbol variation display device 4300 includes reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c for rotating the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c, respectively (left reel drive motor 4341a, middle reel drive motor 4341b, right). Reel drive motor 4341c). The reel drive motor 4341 is composed of a stepping motor, and the reels 4301a, 4301b, and 4301c can be independently rotated and stopped. During the rotation, a plurality of types of symbols are displayed from above on the symbol display window 4401. It is displayed while continuously changing downward.

Further, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c for detecting a reference position regarding rotation, and each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a position sensor 4331a, 4331b, 4331c, respectively. It is provided correspondingly in the reel (left reel position sensor 4331a, middle reel position sensor 4331b, right reel position sensor 4331c). By inputting the detection signals (index signals) from these position sensors to the main board 4600, the main board 4600 can obtain the stop position information of each reel.

The solenoid 4207a and the insertion sensor 4207b described above are installed in the medal selector 4207. The insertion sensor 4207b detects the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 4203, and outputs the medal detection signal to the main board 4600. When the solenoid 4207a is in the OFF state, the inserted medals are detected by the insertion sensor 4207b. On the contrary, when the solenoid 4207a is ON, the passage reaching the insertion sensor 4207b in the medal selector 4207 is locked out and the insertion of medals cannot be accepted. Even if the player inserts a medal, the medal selector 4207 The medals that flowed through the return gutter return to the medal tray 4201. At this time, the function of the insertion sensor 4207b is also invalidated, so that neither betting nor storage of medals is performed by inserting medals.

The medal payout device 4110 has a payout sensor 4110e in the discharge port for detecting the paid out medals one by one, and a payout medal signal for each medal is input to the main board 4600 from the payout sensor 4110e. .. Further, the auxiliary storage box for game medals is provided with a medal full tank sensor 4111a, and when the number of medals stored inside exceeds a predetermined quantity, a detection signal in which the number of medals exceeds a predetermined quantity is transmitted to the main board 4600. Output to. At this time, an error display for notifying the abnormality of the medal storage is performed by the image display body 4500, the error lamp 4554, etc., and the player, the hall employee, or the like is notified that the abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, the main board 4600 outputs a control signal to the symbol variation display device 4300 and the medal payout device 4110. That is, a drive pulse signal for controlling the start and stop of each of the reel drive motors 4341a, 4341b, 4341c described above is output from the main board 4600. Further, a drive signal is input from the main board 4600 to the medal payout device 4110 according to the type of combination of symbols stopped on the effective line, and the medal payout device 4110 performs a medal payout operation in response to the drive signal. At this time, if the number of medals required for payout is insufficient in the medal payout device 4110, or if there are no medals at all, the number detection by the payout sensor 4110e will be delayed. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, an error signal of the payout medal is output from the payout sensor 4110e to the main board 4600, and in response to this, the main board 4600 notifies that an abnormality has occurred in the payout of the medal. Is displayed on the error lamp 4554, the image display body 4500, etc. to notify the player, the hall employee, or the like that an abnormality has occurred.

The slot machine 4000 includes an effect control board 4700 in addition to the main board 4600, and the effect control board 4700 includes a CPU 4701, a ROM 4702, a RAM 4703, an input / output interface 4707, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 4704, and an AMP (audio amplifier). ) 4705, sound source IC4706 and the like are mounted. The effect control board 4700 receives various command signals from the main board 4600 and controls the display of the image display 4500, the light emission (or lighting, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of the lighting device 4502 and the operation of the speaker 4512.

Further, an external relay terminal plate 4131 is provided, and the slot machine 4000 is connected to the hall computer 4800 in the amusement park via the external relay terminal plate 4131. The external relay terminal board 4131 plays a role of relaying various signals (inserted medal signal, payout medal signal, game status, etc.) transmitted from the main board 4600 to the hall computer 4800.

The power supply device 4112 creates a plurality of types of DC power supplies from an AC 24 volt (AC24V) power supply supplied from the island equipment. For example, three types of power supplies are created: DC + 5V (hereinafter, "+ 5V"), DC + 12V (hereinafter, "+ 12V"), and DC + 24V (hereinafter, "+ 24V"). The three types of power supplies of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply device 4112 are supplied to each configuration included in the slot machine 4000. For example, two types of power supplies of + 5V and + 12V are supplied to the reel 4301 and the reel drive motor 4341. It is supplied to the symbol variation display device 4300 provided with the above.

In addition, the power supply device 4112 is provided with a setting change key switch 4112t, a reset switch 4112u, a power supply switch 4112v, and the like. None of these switches are exposed to the outside of the slot machine 4000, and can be operated only by opening the front member 4200. The power switch 4112v is for turning on / off the power supply to the slot machine 4000, and the setting change key switch 4112t is for changing the setting (for example, settings 1 to 6) of the slot machine 4000. Further, the reset switch 4112u is for canceling an error generated in the slot machine 4000, and is further operated when changing the setting together with the setting change key switch 4112t.

Further, the main board 4600 is provided with a reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. When the drive torque for rotating the reel 4301 is obtained by rotationally driving the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, HI) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 12V is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341 as the motor drive voltage. On the other hand, when obtaining a static torque for maintaining the state in which the output shaft of the reel drive motor 4341 is stopped, the CPU 4601 sets the voltage switching signal logic (for example, LOW) to the reel drive motor voltage switching circuit 4605. By outputting to, + 5V as a motor drive voltage is controlled to be supplied to the reel drive motor 4341.

The above is a configuration example of the slot machine 4000. In the game using the slot machine 4000, when the player operates the start lever 4210 while the number of medals to be multiplied is determined, the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c rotate, and then the player presses the reel stop buttons 4211a, 4211b, 4211c. When the corresponding reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped and controlled, and when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the game result is judged from the combination mode of the symbols on the effective line, and it is necessary. A specified number of medals corresponding to the corresponding winning combination will be awarded accordingly.

As described above, each reel 4301a, 4301b, 4301c has a reel band on which a design is drawn. Then, when all the reels 4301a, 4301b, 4301c are stopped, the display content displayed in the symbol display window 4401 (combination mode of the symbols displayed on the effective line) indicates that the symbol corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is used. It is determined whether or not the combination mode (symbol combination) is displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the combination mode of the symbols corresponding to the predetermined winning combination is displayed on the above-mentioned effective line in the symbol display window 4401. In addition, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed in each of the plurality of effective lines. As a result, when it is determined that a combination of symbols of a plurality of winning combinations is displayed, the total number of medals to be paid out corresponding to each of the displayed winning combinations is paid out.

[15-3. Storage area configuration]
Subsequently, the storage area provided by the ROM 4602, the RAM 4603, and the like provided on the main board 4600 will be described. Although the storage area of the pachinko machine has been outlined with reference to FIG. 24, it has the same configuration as that of the slot machine 4000 shown in FIGS. 267 to 270. FIG. 267 is a diagram showing details of an access area in game control of the slot machine 4000 in the present embodiment and a ROM area 4910 which is a storage area corresponding to the ROM 4602.

The storage area in the present embodiment is provided by a medium such as ROM4602 or RAM4603, and is provided as one access area to which addresses from "0000H" to "FFFFH" are assigned. Further, the access area of the present embodiment is divided into a predetermined area corresponding to the medium that provides the access area, and includes a ROM area 4910, a RAM area 4920, an I / O area 4930, and a parameter information setting area 4940. It has been. It should be noted that each area does not necessarily correspond to the medium that provides the access area, and one area may be provided by a plurality of media, or a plurality of areas may be provided by one medium.

When the access area of the present embodiment is configured as described above, the CPU 4601 can access the program or data by designating the address without being aware of the medium that actually provides the access area. The details of the access area will be described below.

[15-3-1. ROM area]
First, the configuration of the ROM area 4910 will be described. The ROM area 4910 corresponds to the storage area provided by the ROM 4602. The ROM 4602 is a non-volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are retained even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read out, but can be updated or deleted. You can't do that. The ROM 4602 may be any non-volatile storage medium, and the data stored in the ROM area 4910 may be updatable.

Addresses from "0000H" to "1FFFH" are assigned to the ROM area 4910. The data stored in the ROM 4602 can be accessed by the CPU 4601 specifying "1FFFH" from the address "0000H".

The ROM area 4910 includes a first control area, a first isolation area, a first data area, a second control area, a second isolation area, a second data area, a third control area, a third isolation area, and a fourth isolation area. included. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The first control area is a game control area, and a program for performing game control and the like are stored. Further, the first data area is a game data area in which data necessary for performing game control is stored. That is, the program stored in the first control area is executed, and the game control is performed while referring to the data stored in the first data area. The area used for game control (first control area, first data area) is defined as a game control area (first storage area).

In the second control area, a program for debugging (functional inspection) the control program and the like are stored. The second data area is an area for storing data for debugging (functional inspection). The second data area is not always necessary, and debugging data may be stored in the second control area. The area (second control area, second data area) in which the program and data for debugging the game control program (functional inspection) that is not used for game control is stored is the debug (inspection function) area (inspection function). Second storage area).

In the third control area, a program for calculating and displaying the accessory ratio is stored. Data for calculating the accessory ratio is also stored in the third control area. A third data area for storing data for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided. An area (third control area) in which a program or data for calculating the accessory ratio is stored without being used for game control is defined as an area for calculating the accessory ratio (third storage area). In this way, by designing the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 separately from the game control code 13131 and storing it in a different area, the inspection and game control code 13131 of the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 is stored. Can be performed separately from the inspection of the slot machine 4000, and the labor of inspection of the slot machine 4000 can be reduced. Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display code 13135 can be commonly used by a plurality of models regardless of the model.

The first quarantine area, the second quarantine area, the third quarantine area, and the fourth quarantine area are areas allocated between the control area and the data area, and are areas for which access is prohibited. In the process by the CPU 4601, when the isolated area is accessed, the reset process is forcibly executed. The first quarantine area, the second quarantine area, and the fourth quarantine area are areas continuous with the previous and next quarantine areas. For example, the start address of the first quarantine area is next to the end address of the first control area. ("0A00H"), and the end address of the first quarantine area is the address immediately before the first data area ("0AFFH"). Further, the third isolation area is arranged between the game control area and the debug (functional inspection) area, and is treated as the game control area in FIG. 30, but the debug (functional inspection) area. It may be treated as. Similarly, the fourth isolation area is arranged between the debug (functional inspection) area and the accessory ratio calculation area, and is treated as the debug (functional inspection) area in FIG. 267. It may be treated as an area for calculating the object ratio.

[15-3-2. RAM area]
Subsequently, the configuration of the RAM area 4920 will be described. FIG. 268 is a diagram showing details of the RAM area 4920 in this embodiment. The RAM area 4920 corresponds to the storage area provided by the RAM 4603. The RAM 4603 is a volatile storage medium in which the stored contents are erased when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, and the stored data can be read and written. The RAM area 4920 temporarily stores the program and data stored in the ROM area 4910, and stores the data derived by executing the program. The RAM 4603 may be a non-volatile storage medium as long as the data can be read and written. Further, when a power failure occurs, the data stored in the RAM 4603 by the backup power supply can be retained for a predetermined period.

Addresses from "3000H" to "31FFH" are assigned to the RAM area 4920. The CPU 4601 can access the data stored in the RAM 4603 by designating the addresses "3000H" to "31FFH".

The RAM area 4920 includes a game control work area, a debug (inspection function) work area, a save area, and an isolated area. A start address and an end address are set in each area.

The game control work area is a work area (temporary area) used when executing the game control (first control). The debug (inspection function) work area is a work area used when executing debug control (second control) of a program. The work area for calculating the bonus ratio is an area for storing data for calculating the bonus ratio and the calculated bonus ratio (feature ratio, continuous bonus ratio, advantageous section bonus ratio, etc.). The work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio do not necessarily have to secure a dedicated work area, and the work area for game control may be used, or the work area for game control may be used. A work area for debugging (inspection function) or a work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be assigned to the work area. In this case, the independence between the game control area, the debug (inspection function) control area, and the accessory ratio calculation work area is reduced. However, if the program configuration is such that the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio are not used, the work area for debugging (inspection function) and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio do not necessarily be used. May be good.

The save area is an area for temporarily storing data used in game control, debug (inspection function) control, or accessory ratio calculation. For example, when an interrupt occurs and a predetermined process is executed, the values of various CPU registers (arithmetic register, flag register, stack pointer, etc.) are copied to the save area before the predetermined process is executed. The value copied after the processing is completed is returned to various registers of the CPU. The evacuation area may be used in common for game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio calculation, but like the work area, game control, debugging (inspection function), and accessory ratio may be used in common. It may be divided individually by calculation. As a result, the game control, the debug (inspection function) control, and the accessory ratio calculation can maintain more independence.

The isolated area is between the work area for game control, the work area for debugging (inspection function), and the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, the work area for debugging (inspection function), the evacuation area, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio. It is assigned between, and is a continuous area with each area (front and back areas). For example, the start address of the isolation area between the game control work area and the debug (inspection function) work area is the address (“3076H”) next to the end address of the game control work area, and the end address is This is the address ("307FH") immediately before the work area for debugging (inspection function). Further, the isolated area is an area where access is prohibited, and is configured to forcibly execute the reset process when accessed in the process by the CPU 4601.

FIG. 268 shows the details of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio on the right side thereof. The work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be provided with a backup area 1 and a backup area 2 for storing a copy of the data stored in the main area, in addition to the main area for storing the calculation result of the accessory ratio. .. The backup area may be one or more. A check code is added to each area to detect data errors. The check code may be a checksum of data in each area or a predetermined value. The check code is set in the initialization process when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, or is set every time the data in the main area is updated in the accessory ratio calculation / display process, or the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). ) May be set. In particular, when the check code is a fixed value, even if the check code is initialized when it is determined to be normal in the initialization process or the data is deleted and the fixed value is set in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). good. The check code may also be used as a power failure flag. That is, if a predetermined value is set in the check code of the main area, it may be determined that the power failure flag is set. Further, if a predetermined value is set in the power failure flag, it may be determined that the check code of each area is a correct value (that is, the data of each area is normal).

In the initialization process (step S1020 of FIG. 271), it is determined whether or not the data in the backup area is normal, and the data in the backup area determined to be normal may be duplicated in the main area. Further, in the power off processing executed when the power is cut off, the value of the main area may be duplicated in each backup area.

An unused space is provided between the main area and the backup area 1 and between the backup area 1 and the backup area 2. By providing an unused space between each area, the address of each area can be separated, and each area can be distinguished by the upper digit of the address.

FIG. 269 is a diagram showing a specific structure of a work area for storing each data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio.

FIG. 269 (A) shows the structure of the work area in the simplest method. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section Store the percentage. The number of bonuses paid out is the number of medals paid out while the bonus is in operation (for example, during a regular bonus). The number of consecutive winning balls is the number of medals paid out while the continuous winning ball is operating (for example, during a big bonus). The total payout is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of bonuses paid out by the total number of payouts. The continuous bonus ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of continuous bonuses paid out by the total number of catches paid out. The number of advantageous section games is the number of games played in a game state that is advantageous to the player (for example, a game state in which the medals on hand such as ART (assist replay time) are difficult to decrease), and the number of non-advantageous section games is , The number of games played in a game state other than the advantageous section. The advantageous section ratio can be calculated by dividing the number of advantageous section games by (the number of advantageous section games + the number of non-advantageous section games).

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 269 (A), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are the total of FIG. 269 (B) described later. It corresponds to the cumulative total and is a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949677295 in decimal. Since these data are not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a large storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. Further, the accessory ratio, the continuous accessory ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are storage areas of 1 byte, and can store numerical values up to 255 in decimal.

The number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are updated by the area update process for calculating the bonus ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 271), and the bonus ratio is updated. , The continuous bonus ratio and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

FIG. 269 (B) shows the structure of a work area using a ring buffer. In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (B), the number of replays, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the number of games, the bonuses ratio, the continuous bonuses ratio, the number of advantageous section games, and non-playing Advantageous section The number of games and the ratio of advantageous sections are stored. Further, the storage area of each data is composed of a ring buffer having n storage areas for every predetermined number of games (for example, 15 storage areas for every 400 games), and the number of executed games is predetermined. When the number (400 times) is reached, the write pointer of all the data moves, and the storage area where the data is updated changes. Then, after the data of the predetermined number of games is stored in the nth storage area, the write pointer moves to the first storage area and stores the data in the first storage area.

The write pointer and read pointer of the ring buffer are common to all data, and the write pointer of all data moves for each predetermined number of prize balls. In addition, as the write pointer moves, the read pointer also moves. The read pointer points to a storage area that is one lag behind the write pointer. This is to calculate the accessory ratio using the data for 400 games.

The cumulative total of each data is the cumulative value of the data stored in the n storage areas of the ring buffer, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data. Yes, when the ring buffer goes around and is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the cumulative value is calculated excluding the data in the cleared area. The total cumulative value of each data is the cumulative value of the data collected in the past, and the cumulative value of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio is the value calculated from the cumulative value of each data, and the ring buffer goes around. Even if the data is cleared in one storage area of the ring buffer to write new data, the total cumulative value including the data in the cleared area is calculated.

In the structure of the work area shown in FIG. 269 (B), the number of replays, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the number of games in the ring buffer are storage areas of 2 bytes each. Numerical values up to 65535 can be stored in decimal. The total number of re-games, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the total number of games are stored in a 3-byte storage area, and numerical values up to 16777215 can be stored in decimal numbers. Since the cumulative total is, for example, the total of data for 400 games × n (6000 games in the case of n = 15), a large storage area is prepared. The total number of re-games, the number of prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, and the total number of games are stored in a storage area of 3 or 4 bytes, respectively, and can store numerical values up to 16777215 or 42949672795 in decimal. Since the total cumulative total is not erased unless an abnormality occurs in the data, a larger storage area is prepared so that the data can be stored for a long period of time. In addition, the cumulative and total cumulative totals of the bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio are 1-byte storage areas, and up to 255 decimal numbers can be stored. The number of advantageous section games and the number of non-advantageous section games are storage areas of 3 bytes each, and numerical values up to 16777215 can be stored in decimal numbers. The advantageous section ratio is a 1-byte storage area, and a numerical value up to 255 can be stored in decimal.

By increasing the number of games corresponding to the data stored in each storage area constituting the ring buffer (for example, 600 games), the number of continuous storage areas for storing time-series data (for example, 600 games) Even if n) is reduced to 10, the same data for 6000 games can be stored in total. Therefore, the size of the storage area used as the ring buffer can be reduced.

Among the structures of the work areas shown in FIG. 269 (B), the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, the number of advantageous section games, the number of non-advantageous section games, and the advantageous section ratio are It is the same as the description in FIG. 269 (A). The number of replays is the number of games that have been replayed. The number of prizes paid out is the number of all medals paid out by the game. The number of games is the number of games executed, and when this value reaches a predetermined number, the write pointer moves.

The number of re-games, the number of winning prizes paid out, the number of bonuses paid out, the number of continuous bonuses paid out, the total number of payouts, the number of advantageous section games, and the number of non-advantageous section games are determined by the area update process for calculating the bonus ratio (step S1038 in FIG. 271). ), The bonus ratio, the continuous bonus ratio, and the advantageous section ratio are calculated and stored in the bonus ratio calculation / display process (step S1119 in FIG. 272).

In the data structure shown in FIG. 269 (A), when it is determined that the stored value is abnormal, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio is deleted in the initialization process (step S1020 in FIG. 271). However, the data is not erased at other times. Therefore, the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted every predetermined period (for example, one day, one week, one month, etc.). Similarly, the total cumulative total of FIG. 269 (B) may be deleted at predetermined intervals.

In addition, the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio and the calculated accessory ratio are abnormal values (for example, the accessory ratio exceeds 100%, and the calculation result of the accessory ratio has changed significantly from the previous calculated value. , Number of bonuses paid out> Total number of payouts, etc.), the abnormal value may be deleted. Not only the abnormal value but also all the data in the work area for calculating the accessory ratio may be deleted. Further, when the data of the work area for calculating the accessory ratio or the calculated accessory ratio is an abnormal value, it may be notified that the value is abnormal. Further, the data in the backup area may be inspected using the check code, the data in the normal backup area may be duplicated in the main area, and then the accessory ratio may be calculated again.

[15-3-3. I / O area configuration]
Subsequently, the I / O region 4930 will be described. Input / output ports correspond to the I / O area 4930, and each input / output port can be accessed by the CPU 4601 accessing the I / O area 4930. The input / output port corresponds to, for example, a port related to input of a switch or the like, a port related to output of a large winning opening solenoid, an LED drive signal, or the like. The input / output port settings (settings related to use / non-use of input settings, output settings, etc.) are set based on the set values of the parameter information setting area 4940.

[15-3-4. Parameter information setting area]
Subsequently, the parameter information setting area 4940 will be described. FIG. 270 is a diagram showing details of the parameter information setting area 4940 of the present embodiment. The parameter information setting area 4940 is an area where various settings can be made. For example, as shown in FIG. 270, various settings include start / end addresses of each control area and data area. In FIG. 270, the definitions of the start address and the end address of each of the third control area, the work area for calculating the accessory ratio, and the evacuation area for calculating the accessory ratio are not shown, but the third control area start setting And the third control area end setting is defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other control areas, and the work area start setting for calculating the accessory ratio and the work area end setting for calculating the accessory ratio are the start and end settings of other work areas. It is defined in the same way as the end setting, and the save area start setting for calculating the accessory ratio and the save area end setting for calculating the accessory ratio are defined in the same way as the start and end settings of other save areas. Areas other than the area set here are regarded as unused (unset) areas. As a result, when the CPU 4601 accesses the unused area, the reset signal is forcibly input to the CPU 4601. Although it is set in a continuous area in FIG. 270, it does not have to be continuous as a setting area. For example, parameters may be grouped and arranged at predetermined intervals.

Further, in the present embodiment, when an area other than the set area (the first to fourth isolated areas of the ROM 4910 and the isolated area of the RAM 4920) is accessed, a reset is forcibly generated. Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial startup of the program by causing a reset by intentionally accessing the isolated area. Since the slot machine executes the processing sequentially, the program can be executed from the startup processing and the initial setting can be executed again by accessing the quarantine area after the final game processing is completed. As a result, even if the initial setting function is set to a value different from the set value due to noise or the like during the game, the normal value can be reset by executing the initial setting again. Furthermore, in the initial setting process, RAM clear is determined by the power failure flag, but it is possible to forcibly generate RAM clear by accessing the isolation area without setting the power failure flag. Become. On the other hand, since the above-mentioned pachinko machine plays games in parallel, if the game itself is initialized, the game cannot be continued, but in the case of a slot machine, it is no longer necessary after the game ends. Since it is necessary to initialize the RAM information, it is possible to eliminate the process for initializing the RAM information by accessing the isolated area.

The value set in the parameter information setting area 4940 is not sequentially set by the user program processing such as the initial setting of the CPU 4601, but by setting the address and the setting value of the parameter area in the ROM 4602 separately from the program. , The parameter information set in the ROM 4602 is sequentially set in each function setting register of the CPU before the CPU 4601 starts the control program at the time of startup. As a result, various parameters can be set when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Since the set values of various parameters are information managed (determined) by the user, they are set in the ROM 4602 in which the game control program is stored.

[15-4. Game control]
[15-4-1. System reset boot process]
Subsequently, the control of the slot machine of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 271 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure of a system reset startup process executed when the slot machine 4000 is reset. The system reset start process is a process executed when the power of the slot machine 4000 is turned on, a power failure occurs, or the like, and is a process of starting when a reset signal is input to the CPU 4601.

When the system reset activation process is started, the CPU 4601 first executes a parameter setting process for setting various parameters necessary for executing the game (step S1010). Specifically, the setting value stored in the parameter information setting area 4940 included in the storage area is set in each function setting register of the CPU 4601, or the address of each area assigned to the access area is set as the setting value. By setting the address of each area as a set value, for example, a work area or a save area is allocated to the RAM area 4920 as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area (isolated area in FIG. 268) is set as an unused area. Assigned. The work area and the evacuation area are divided into a game control area and a debug (inspection function) (or other use) area, respectively. Further, in the ROM area 4910, similarly to the RAM area 4920, an area for storing programs and data is allocated as a used area, and an area not allocated as a used area is allocated as an unused area.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes the security check process (step S1012). The security check process is a process of determining whether or not the data stored in the ROM 4602 is normal data. If the data stored in the ROM 4602 is not normal data, for example, the ROM 4602 may have been replaced with an invalid ROM, so that the startup of the slot machine 4000 is stopped. Further, the CPU 4601 waits until the time required for the security check elapses (step S1014).

The process from turning on the power of the slot machine to the end of the security check (process up to step S1014) is not a process defined by the user program, but a process composed of hardware in the CPU that cannot be changed by the developer. It has become.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a device initialization setting process for initializing (step S1016). In the device initialization setting process, a process such as a start setting of a periodic process (FIG. 272, timer interrupt process) that periodically executes a predetermined process is executed. In the present embodiment, a function such as a random number function setting that prevents the game lottery setting from being rewritten by a user program after a security check is executed by a parameter setting process, and other than these functions, a device initialization setting process is executed. Is running on. By dividing the initialization of the CPU 4601 into a parameter setting process and a device initialization setting process in this way, the degree of freedom in game control is increased and fraud is less likely to occur in the game.

Further, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not to execute the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1018). In the process of step S1018, it is determined whether to perform a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 or a hot start for returning to the game with the contents of the backed up RAM 4603.

When the CPU 4601 performs a cold start for initializing the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "Yes"), the CPU 4601 executes an initialization process for executing the initialization of the RAM 4603 (step S1020). The cold start is performed when the setting of the pachinko machine 1 is changed, when an abnormality occurs in the contents of the RAM 4603, or when the power failure flag is not set.

On the other hand, when the CPU 4601 performs a hot start for returning to the game based on the contents of the RAM 4603 (the result of step S1018 is "No"), the CPU 4601 executes a process of returning the game based on the contents of the backed up RAM 4603. (Step S1022). At this time, the return process returns to the process interrupted at the time of power failure. Specifically, any of the processes from step S1024 to step S1042 of the system reset activation process to be described later or steps S1110 to S1130 of the periodic process (FIG. 272) restores the process to the process interrupted at the time of power failure.

In the slot machine 4000 of the present embodiment, the checksum is calculated based on the information stored in the RAM 4603 when a power failure occurs and when the recovery process is executed. At this time, only the game control work area excluding the debug (inspection function) work area out of all the areas where the checksum calculation target is used as the work (game control work area and debug (inspection function) work area). May be. The checksum is calculated only in the game control work area because the debug (inspection function) process is designed to maintain independence from the game control process and affects the result of the game. Since it is a non-processing, it is possible that some bugs may remain due to insufficient verification. In this case, a work area for debugging (inspection function) that holds the information obtained by executing such processing is provided. Targeting the checksum calculation may impair the reliability of returning to normal from a power failure. On the other hand, since the game control process is directly related to the game, if it is installed in the product with bugs remaining, it will cause a big trouble in the market. In some cases, it is possible that sales will be discontinued and it will be necessary to collect the product. In this case, it is extremely likely that it will cause enormous cost damage to the manufacturer and the hall. This is because the game control work area is more reliable than the debug (inspection function) work area because the verification is performed.

When the initialization process is completed or a series of games is completed, the CPU 4601 executes a game initial setting process in order to start a new game (step S1024). In the game initial setting process, a process of temporarily returning the information of the RAM 4603 that is no longer needed for performing a series of game controls to the initial setting state is executed.

When the game initial setting process is completed, the CPU 4601 executes the information signal 1 output process for outputting the debug (inspection function) signal at the start of the game (step S1026). In the information signal 1 output process, processing such as setting the debug (inspection function) signal to the initial state is performed. Information signal output processing is defined as information signal 1 to N output processing, and a required module is called at the timing of outputting the information signal. For example, when the debug (inspection function) signal (information about reel rotation start, start lever ON, winning combination) is output in the game start process, the debug related to the stop of each reel in the symbol stop process (inspection function). Inspection function) When a signal (stop operation signal, stopped symbol information, etc.) is output, a debug (inspection function) signal related to the fixed combination in the winning judgment process (fixed combination displayed stopped on each reel, payout associated with the fixed combination) At the time of output of the number of sheets information, output signal information (number of payout medals) related to the number of payouts at the time of payout, etc.), the "information signal N output process" module required for the process is appropriately called and executed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a standby process for performing a process before the player operates the start lever 4210 (step S1028). Before operating the start lever 4210, for example, it is determined whether or not an instruction to execute a replay is given, whether or not a medal has been inserted, whether or not a medal has been cleared, and the like. The game settings are checked.

When the start lever 4210 is operated, the CPU 4601 executes a game start process for starting the game (step S1030). In the game start process, a random number value for drawing a game is acquired, a winning combination or the like is determined, and the rotation of the reel 4301 is started. After that, the CPU 4601 executes a Wait process for waiting until the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed (step S1032).

When the reel 4301 reaches a normal rotation speed, the CPU 4601 can accept the input of the reel stop button 4211 and executes a symbol stop process for processing until all the reels 4301 are stopped (step S1034).

Further, when all the reels 4301 are stopped, the CPU 4601 executes a winning determination process for determining a winning combination based on the stopped symbol (step S1036). In the winning combination determination process, the winning combination is determined, and if it is determined that the winning combination is won, the setting corresponding to the winning combination is made, and the setting for executing the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is made.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines the current game state, adds the number of prize medals to be paid out as the game value to the area corresponding to the current game state, and adds the work area for calculating the accessory ratio of the RAM area 4920 (FIG. 268, see FIG. 269) is updated (step S1038). The process of step S1038 can be skipped when there is no prize medal to be paid out in step S1036, and the load on the CPU 4601 can be reduced.

Even if the slot machine 4000 detects fraud and cancels the game, the accessory ratio calculation area update process (step S1038) is executed. By executing these processes regardless of whether or not fraud is detected, it is possible to collect data for calculating the accessory ratio even during fraud notification.

Finally, the CPU 4601 executes a game end process for performing a game end process (step S1042). In the game end process, the payout process corresponding to the winning combination is executed, and if there is no winning or if there is no paying out, the processing is skipped. When the game end process is completed, the game returns to the game initial setting process, and the main loop process from step S1024 to step S1038 is executed.

[15-4-2. Periodic processing]
Next, periodic processing, which is interrupt processing that is activated at a predetermined cycle while the main loop processing of the system reset initial startup processing is being executed, will be described. FIG. 272 is a flowchart showing the procedure of periodic processing.

When the periodic processing is executed, the CPU 4601 first saves the values stored in all the registers (step S1110). At this time, the data to be saved is stored in the game control save area shown in FIG. 268. As described above, since the periodic processing is interrupt processing that is started while the main loop processing is being executed, the processing can be continued after returning by saving the register of the CPU used in the main loop processing. Need to be.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 resets the watchdog timer built in the CPU (step S1112). As a result, the watchdog timer can be cleared periodically.

Next, the CPU 4601 executes a switch input process for sampling input signals from various switches (step S1114). Further, the game state check process is executed (step S1116). In the game state check process, a process related to drive control of a drive body (stepping motor) that rotates the reel 4301 is performed. Specifically, the pulse output of the stepping motor, the detection of the origin position, and the like are performed.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes a timer measurement process for updating various timers used in the game control (step S1118). Since the periodic processing is executed periodically, the set time is the execution interval of the periodic processing x the set number of times.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 determines whether or not the display switch 1318 is operated, and if the display switch 1318 is operated, calls the accessory ratio calculation / display process, and the medal stored in the accessory ratio calculation work area. Calculate the bonus ratio by referring to the number of payouts. Then, the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317 (step S1119). The accessory ratio calculation / display process is the same as the accessory ratio calculation / display process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described in the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the specific calculation method of the accessory ratio and the specific display method of the accessory ratio are the same as the methods described in the examples of the pachinko machine 1. In this way, by calling the accessory ratio calculation / display process in the timer interrupt process and calculating the accessory ratio, the accessory ratio (gambling of the slot machine 4000) based on the latest data can be confirmed.

When the display switch 1318 is operated, all kinds of values (role ratio, continuous accessory ratio, cumulative total, total cumulative total) may be calculated, but the display is displayed for each operation of the display switch 1318. Only the values to be calculated may be calculated. Further, the accessory ratio may be calculated regardless of whether the display switch 1318 is operated, and the calculated accessory ratio may be displayed on the accessory ratio indicator 1317 triggered by the operation of the display switch 1318.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 executes an LED output process for controlling the LED (step S1120). The LED to be controlled is the one controlled by the main board 4600, and is, for example, the payout number display LED 4562. In addition, data for displaying the accessory ratio on the LED is output.

The CPU 4601 executes an information output process for outputting a signal to the external relay terminal plate 4131 (step S1122). The output signal is transmitted to the hall computer 4800 via the external relay terminal plate 4131. Further, the CPU 4601 outputs the command stored in the command buffer to the effect control board 4700 (step S1124).

The CPU 4601 executes a random number update process for updating the random numbers used in the game (step S1126). In the random number update process, the random number is updated to be generated by software processing. Here, in addition to the random numbers generated only by the software, the update processing of the soft random numbers built in the CPU is executed. With the soft random numbers built into the CPU, the count itself is executed by the hardware, but the trigger for updating is determined by this process. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the program processing related to the random number update.

When the random number update process is completed, the CPU 4601 performs a process for returning to the interrupted process (main loop process). Specifically, the value of the register saved in the process of step S1110 is restored (step S1128). Further, the execution of the interrupt is permitted (step S1130). During the execution of periodic processing (timer interrupt processing), even if a new timer interrupt occurs, the new timer interrupt is pending, and after the timer interrupt processing executed immediately before is normally completed and the interrupt is enabled. It is supposed to be executed. Therefore, it is configured so that periodic processing (timer interrupt processing) is not executed multiple times.

[15-4-3. Information signal output processing]
Subsequently, the information signal output process executed in the system reset start process and the like will be described. The information signal output process is provided according to each function (1 to N) of the output signal, and is composed of a plurality of modules. For example, there are "for condition device output signal (signal output related to condition device operation)" and "lottery determination process (signal output related to lottery)". Although the output signals are different, the configuration of each information output process is basically the same, so the explanation of each flow is omitted. FIG. 273 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the information signal output processing of the present embodiment.

When the information signal output process is started, the CPU 4601 first saves the values of all the registers of the CPU (step S1210). This is to prevent the values set in the registers from being destroyed by executing the information signal output processing (to ensure that the values are restored even if they are destroyed), and save the values of all the registers to the stack area. It is designed to let you. Further, the stack area used at this time is allocated to the debug (inspection function) evacuation area, and is allocated to a different area separated from the game control evacuation area.

Subsequently, the CPU 4601 acquires information to be referred from the RAM 4603 for selecting (ON / OFF) the output information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) (step S1212). In each information signal output process, only the information stored in the RAM 4603 is referred to, and no data is written to the RAM 4603 within the process. When writing is required, the information is output to the debug (inspection function) work area. A dedicated work is provided, and the work is configured not to be used (including reference) in processing other than information signal output processing. As a result, even if the program that executes the information signal output processing is arranged in a different place from other game control programs, independence from other game control programs can be ensured without using a common area. ..

Next, the CPU 4601 generates an information signal to be output based on the information acquired in the process of step S1212 (step S1214), and outputs the generated signal to the corresponding port (step S1216). Further, it waits until the information signal output time, which is the time for maintaining the output signal, elapses (step S1218). The information signal output time is predetermined, and by setting a sufficient time, the debug (inspection function) signal can be reliably transmitted to the transmission destination. After that, the values of all the registers saved in the process of step S1210 are restored (step S1220), and this process is terminated.

As described above, the information signal (debugging (inspection function) signal) is generated and output in the processes from step S1210 to step S1220. Then, the processes from step S1210 to step S1220 are executed for the amount of the debug (inspection function) signal to be output. Output different types and numbers of signals for each output signal function (1 to N). In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of information signal output processing are defined for each function, but the table in which the output signals corresponding to the functions are defined is defined in the debug (inspection function) area. (Ii) The information signal output processing may be standardized by preparing a signal in the data area, selecting a signal corresponding to the function specified by the caller, and configuring the signal to be output.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the program (signal output program) for executing the information signal output processing and the like is stored in the area clearly distinguished from the area for storing the game control program (game control area). By providing an area (area for debugging (inspection function)), a program for debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1 can be independently arranged. The signal output program is used for the purpose of debugging (inspection function) of the pachinko machine 1, is a process that does not affect the result of the game, and does not impair the fairness of the game. Also, for other purposes (for example, to place a game control program or a general-purpose program to make up for the lack of capacity in the game control area), the program should not be placed in the debug (inspection function) area. It has become.

The signal output program is executed after being statically called from the game control program, and at this time, the address of the callee is specified. Further, the signal output program is modularized for each function, and when called, protects all the registers used in the game control area. Further, as described above, when the program processing of the game control area is executed, the access to the debug (inspection function) work area is prohibited, and the program processing of the debug (inspection function) area is executed. If so, it is configured to allow only reference to the game control work area and prohibit writing. Furthermore, it is configured to prohibit calling modules (including subroutines) arranged in the game control area from the debug (inspection function) area. The program placed in the debug (inspection function) area including the signal output program is always called in the subroutine format, and after the subroutine ends, it returns immediately after the call by the return instruction. The modules stored in the debug (inspection function) area are configured for each purpose. With this configuration, the execution of the signal output program (the program arranged in the debug (inspection function) area) does not affect the execution of the game control program.

In the embodiment of the slot machine 4000, the erasing timing of the RAM (work area for game control, work area for calculating the accessory ratio) may be the same as in steps S18 to S26 of FIG. 21 of the embodiment of the pachinko machine 1. The slot machine 4000 does not have a RAM clear switch, and when the setting change key switch 4112t is operated, the backup data in the game state is erased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in addition to the effects described in the above-described embodiment of the pachinko machine, the ratio of the accessory of the slot machine in operation can be accurately calculated, and the gambling of the gaming machine in operation can be determined. You can check it.

Although the present invention has been described in detail with reference to the accompanying drawings, the present invention is not limited to such a specific configuration, and various modifications and equivalents within the scope of the attached claims are equivalent. It includes the configuration.

Among the inventions disclosed in the present specification, the following are typical examples of the viewpoints of inventions other than those described in the claims.

(0) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control device that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a character ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio indicator has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The main controller
Data to be displayed on the accessory ratio display is transmitted to the driver circuit by serial communication, and the data is transmitted to the driver circuit.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises setting whether to use a synchronization method, a communication rate, parity, or a stop bit for serial communication with the driver circuit after the power is turned on. Machine.

(1) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the communication between the main control device and the driver circuit is slower than the communication between the main control device and the peripheral control device.

As a result, it is possible to suppress an inaccurate display of the accessory ratio due to garbled data during communication.

(2) The main control device is
It has a work RAM that holds data related to the progress of the game and data for calculating the accessory ratio even when the power is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting for serial communication is executed after the work RAM is cleared.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the display of the wrong accessory ratio by using the data of the RAM having the wrong contents.

(3) The main control device is
It has a function to transmit the data stored in the FIFO buffer by serial communication.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a data storage amount for determining a timing for transmitting data from the FIFO buffer is set after the power is turned on.

As a result, data can be transmitted from the FIFO buffer with an arbitrary number of bits.

(4) A gaming machine that gives a player a gaming value.
A main control device that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with a character ratio display that displays information about the given game value,
The accessory ratio indicator has a display device and a driver circuit for driving the display device.
The length of the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit is longer than the length of the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a circuit is arranged.

By lengthening the signal line that connects the main controller and the driver circuit, it is easy to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging parts around the main controller, and the signal line that connects the driver circuit and the display device. By making the signal line shorter than the signal line connecting the main controller and the driver circuit, the influence of noise can be reduced and the accessory ratio can be displayed more accurately.

(5) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio indicator are housed in one case.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other parts around the main controller, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(6) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device and the accessory ratio display are arranged on one printed circuit board.

This makes it easier to detect unauthorized modifications without arranging other components on the printed circuit board around the main controller, and further reduces the effects of noise.

(7) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio display is configured by accommodating the display device and the driver circuit in one package.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be reduced. Further, the signal line connecting the driver circuit and the display device can be shortened.

(8) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein a guard pattern (ground pattern or power supply pattern) is provided along a signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit.

Thereby, the influence of noise on the signal line connecting the main control device and the driver circuit can be reduced.

(9) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display direction of the accessory ratio display is the same as the display direction of the model number on the surface of the main control device.

As a result, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the main control device has been replaced and the displayed accessory ratio without taking an unreasonable posture.

(10) The driver circuit has a standby mode in which characters and numbers are not displayed on the display device and power consumption is reduced.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device sets the driver circuit to a standby state when the accessory ratio display is in a closed state in which the accessory ratio indicator cannot be visually recognized in the installed state of the gaming machine. Machine.

As a result, it is possible to prevent wasteful power consumption of the gaming machine when it is not necessary to display the accessory ratio.

(11) A gaming machine that grants a prize ball as a game value to a player by winning a prize in a predetermined winning opening of a game ball launched toward a game area.
The main control device that controls the progress of the game,
Equipped with an accessory ratio display that displays information about prize balls,
The winning openings include a general winning opening whose entrance shape does not change depending on the playing state and an electric winning opening whose entrance opens or expands depending on the playing state.
The main control device determines the number of prize balls to be paid out to the player, at least with the number of first prize balls paid out in the wake of winning the general winning opening and the winning of the electric winning opening. Count separately from the number of second prize balls to be paid out,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the accessory ratio indicator displays information regarding a ratio between the number of the first prize balls and the number of the second prize balls.

(12) The main control device stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory, and stores the counted number of prize balls in the memory.
The memory stores a check code for verifying the number of stored prize balls, and stores the check code.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the main control device erases the number of prize balls stored in the memory when the check code is not normal.

As a result, it is possible to detect an abnormality in the number of prize balls stored in the memory, and it is possible to suppress the display of an erroneous accessory ratio (ratio of the number of first prize balls to the number of second prize balls).

(13) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and the data is stored in the second backup area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the data stored in the first backup area and the data stored in the second backup area are erased under different conditions.

As a result, when at least one of the data for game control and the data for the number of prize balls for calculating the bonus ball ratio is normal, only the abnormal data can be deleted and the normal data can be left.

(14) The main control device is
The memory has a first backup area and a second backup area in which the stored contents are retained even when the power is cut off.
Data for game control is stored in the first backup area, and
The data of the number of prize balls for calculating the accessory ratio is stored in the second backup area, and the data is stored in the second backup area.
If the RAM clear switch is operated when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the data stored in the first backup area is erased, but the data stored in the second backup area is not erased. The gaming machine described in the section.

If the bonus ratio calculation / display data 13136 can be erased by operating the RAM clear switch, the bonus ratio calculated by the gaming machine can be erased at an arbitrary timing. Therefore, the backed up accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 is not deleted by the operation of the RAM clear switch, and the deletion of the accessory ratio calculation / display data 13136 by the operation of the staff of the game hall is prevented. , It is possible to prevent concealment in a state where the ratio of accessories is high. Therefore, it is possible to easily detect the gaming machine modified to the state where the accessory ratio is high, and it is possible to prevent the state where the accessory ratio is high from being concealed.

(15A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information on a gaming value to be displayed on the display means, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal.

(15B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state is the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, the game discharged from the gaming machine). The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing by the number of balls, the sum of the number of gaming balls passing through the out opening and the number of winning balls).

(15C) The control means receives, as the predetermined signal, a prize detection signal for detecting a prize in the prize opening, a reception confirmation signal for a prize ball payout command, or a prize ball payout completion signal, or a prize ball. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used for calculating the base for displaying on the display means is updated at the timing when the prize ball payout command instructing the payout is transmitted.

(15D) The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when a signal for detecting the winning of a game ball is received by the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
The total number of prize balls is updated using the calculated number of prize balls, and the total number of prize balls is updated.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15E) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls instructed to the payout control means.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15F) A payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player is provided.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the confirmation of receipt of the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated by using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction for receiving the reception confirmation.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15G) Provided with a payout control means for controlling the payout of prize balls to the player.
The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
In the normal gaming state, when the winning of the game ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated.
Instructing the payout control means to pay out the calculated number of prize balls to the player,
Upon receiving the completion of the payout of the prize ball according to the instruction from the payout control means,
The total number of prize balls is updated using the number of prize balls corresponding to the instruction upon receiving the completion of the payout.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated by dividing the updated total number of prize balls by the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(15H) The control means includes an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by the input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 15A to 15H, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(16A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information regarding a game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to a game situation satisfying a predetermined condition.

(16B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base is calculated at the timing when the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(16C) The control means
It stores the total number of prize balls used to calculate the base,
When a winning ball is detected in the winning opening provided in the game area in the normal gaming state, the number of winning balls determined corresponding to the winning opening is calculated and stored in the buffer.
The predetermined number is moved from the buffer to the total prize balls at a predetermined timing, and the total prize balls are consumed by the player in the normal gaming state (for example, the number of game balls launched into the gaming area). , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the base is calculated by dividing by the number of gaming balls discharged from the gaming machine, the sum of the number of balls passing through the out-port and the number of winning balls).

(16D) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of prize balls in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of prize balls, thereby causing the total prize balls from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises moving the predetermined number to a number.

(16E) The control means has an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 16A to 16E, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property within the restrictions of the main control device according to the rules.

(17A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
Count the number of balls consumed by the player and
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated in relation to the counted number of consumed balls satisfying a predetermined condition.

(17B) The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information on the gaming value is calculated at the timing when the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number.

(17C) The control means is the number of balls consumed by the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, or the sum of the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by counting.

(17D) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
It stores the total number of out balls used to calculate the base,
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is calculated, stored in the buffer, and stored.
The base is calculated by moving a predetermined number from the buffer to the total number of out balls at a predetermined timing and dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal gaming state by the total number of out balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(17E) The predetermined timing is a timing when the number of balls consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number.
When the number of spheres consumed in the buffer exceeds the predetermined number, the control means subtracts the predetermined number from the buffer and adds the predetermined number to the total number of out spheres, thereby causing the total out spheres from the buffer. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that a predetermined number is moved to a number.

(17F) The control means
Taking the opportunity of winning a prize at the start winning opening, the special symbol variation display game for deriving the special game state is executed, and the game is executed.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is the upper limit value, the winning balls to the starting winning opening are not stored and the number of winning balls is counted.

(17G) The control means has an information updating means for updating information on a game value to be displayed on the display means, and the display means for displaying the updated information on the game value, triggered by input / output of a predetermined signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that it has a processing display means capable of processing (statistical processing) and displaying the result of arithmetic processing performed when updating the information.

According to the inventions of 17A to 17G, it is possible to accurately execute a process different from the game property while maintaining the game property.

(18A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information about the given game value,
It is provided with a main body frame to which a game board having a game area in which the game is played can be detachably attached.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means displays information on the gaming value even when the main body frame is closed.

(18B) The main body frame is rotatably attached to an outer frame attached to the island equipment of the amusement park.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming machine, which is visible when the main body frame is opened.

(18C) The control means is attached to the main body frame.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means is visibly provided in the case of the control means from the back surface side of the gaming machine.

According to the inventions of 18A to 18C, the decrease in sales of halls can be suppressed.

(19A)
A gaming machine that gives a player a gaming value
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
Information updating means for updating information on the game value to be displayed on the display means in relation to satisfying a predetermined condition in the game, and
It has a game execution means to play a special symbol variation display game triggered by winning a prize at the start winning opening.
Each of the preceding paragraphs is characterized in that the information regarding the game value is updated even when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special symbol variation display game is being performed by the game execution means. Described game machine.

(19B) The information on the game value is based on
As the predetermined condition, the control means said at any timing of detecting a prize to the winning opening, transmitting a prize ball payout command, receiving confirmation of receipt of the prize ball payout command, and receiving a prize ball payout completion signal. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the number of prize balls used to calculate the base for displaying on the display means is updated.

According to the inventions of 19A to 19B, it is possible to provide a gaming machine in which sufficient countermeasures against fraud are taken even in a variable display game.

(20A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
The main control means that executes the program that controls the progress of the game,
A production control means that controls the production of a special symbol variation display game that is performed when a prize is won at the start port, and
It is equipped with a game value information display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The effect control means
Control the transition to the low power mode, which reduces the power consumption of the gaming machine from the normal mode,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display mode is not changed so as to reduce the power consumption of the gaming value information display means during the low power mode.

(20B) Displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game, the effect display means composed of a liquid crystal display means having a backlight is provided.
The effect display means reduces the brightness of the backlight during the low power mode.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value information display means is composed of a light emitting diode and does not reduce the brightness even during the low power mode.

(20C) Provided with an effect display means for displaying the effect of the special symbol variation display game.
The effect display means controls the display mode to the low power mode when a predetermined time elapses after the hold memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted.
The game value information display means does not change the display mode so as to reduce power consumption even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the reserved memory of the special symbol variation display game is exhausted. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 20A to 20C, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having a full range of energy saving modes.

(21A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and one of a plurality of advantageous game states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.
Described in the preceding paragraphs, wherein the information on the game value is calculated and updated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Gaming machine.

(21B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal gaming state.

(21C) The control means
When the special symbol variation display game becomes a big hit, the advantageous game state is derived, and the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of game value can be acquired.
The period from the determination of the jackpot by the special symbol variation display game to the start of the next special symbol variation display game is regarded as the advantageous gaming state, and the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period are excluded from the calculation of the information regarding the game value. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by.

(21D) The control means
In the advantageous gaming state, the player is controlled to open the winning opening where a large amount of gaming value can be acquired.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the number of gaming balls won in the winning opening is excluded from the number of gaming balls launched into the gaming area, and the number of consumed balls in the normal gaming state is counted.

According to the inventions of 21A to 21D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(22A) A gaming machine that grants a gaming ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information about the given game ball.
In the game area where the launched game ball rolls, an opportunity to derive a special game state that facilitates the acquisition of a large amount of game balls and an opportunity to derive an open state from the closed state of the start port. At least there is a passageway
The control means
It is also possible to control the special gaming state in which the open state of the starting port can be easily derived.
The number of prize balls given to the player is used as the number of prize balls given to the player, excluding the number of prize balls given and the number of balls consumed by the player when controlled by either the special gaming state or the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information about the gaming ball is calculated and updated by dividing by the number of balls consumed by the person.

(22B) The control means depends on any one of the number of game balls launched into the game area, the number of game balls discharged from the game machine, and the number of game balls passing through the out port and the number of winning balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed in the normal state.

(22C) The control means sets the expanded state from the determination of the hit by the normal symbol variation display game to the start of the next normal symbol variation display game, and determines the number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls during this period with respect to the game ball. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by being excluded from the calculation of information.

(22D) The control means is characterized in that the number of game balls launched into the game area is excluded from the number of game balls that have won a prize at the start port, and the number of balls consumed in the normal state is counted. The gaming machine described in each section.

According to the inventions of 22A to 22D, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(23A) A launching device that can be operated by the player and launches a game ball toward the game area,
A prize ball granting means for granting a predetermined number of prize balls when the game ball is detected at the winning opening provided in the game area, and
When the game ball is detected in a predetermined winning opening among the winning openings, a main control means for executing a lottery for whether or not to give an advantageous gaming state to the player, and
A gaming machine including peripheral control means for determining an effect to be displayed based on information transmitted from the main control means.
The main control means has an information updating means capable of updating the information regarding the given game ball in any increase or decrease.
The first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease, and the first state in which the information about the game ball given by the information updating means can be updated to increase or decrease. There is at least a second state in which the rate at which the information about the given game ball is updated to increase is suppressed as compared with the first state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of a special effect indicating that the first state has shifted to the second state.

(23B) The information on the game value is based on
The main control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The base is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed by the player in the normal game state.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect with a timing at which the base is likely to decrease as the second state.

(23C) The main control means
Information about the game ball is written in the storage area at any timing of a predetermined time, a predetermined number of prize balls, or a predetermined number of consumed balls.
The increase / decrease of the information regarding the game ball is determined by comparing the information about the game ball written in the storage area with the information about the game ball stored in the storage area before the writing.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means determines the appearance of the adversity effect according to the determined increase / decrease.

According to the inventions of 23A to 23C, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest even if the variable display game is interrupted for a long time.

(24A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that repeatedly executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information about the given game value,
A means for acquiring the number of prize balls acquired by the player at a predetermined timing, and a means for acquiring the number of prize balls.
It is equipped with a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption balls consumed by the player.
The control means
When the predetermined timing and the detection of the consumed balls by the consumed ball number detecting means occur within the same repetition, the number of prize balls acquired at the predetermined timing and the detected number of consumed balls are within the same repetition. Count with
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein information on the game value is calculated using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(24B) The information on the game value is based on
The control means
The progress of the game is controlled by switching between a special game state in which the player can acquire a large amount of game value and a normal game state other than the special game state.
The total number of prize balls in the normal game state and the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state are counted within the same repetition.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein information on the game value is calculated by dividing the total number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of game balls consumed by the player in the normal game state. Machine.

According to the inventions of 24A to 24B, the information on the number of game media acquired by the player can be quickly displayed.

(25A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information about the given game value,
An out-port detection means for detecting a game ball that has passed through an out-port provided at the bottom of the game area, and an out-port detection means.
It is equipped with a winning ball detecting means for detecting a winning ball to a predetermined winning opening.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls that have passed through the out port is counted from the output of the out port detecting means.
The number of winning balls is counted from the output of the winning ball detecting means, and the number of winning balls is counted.
The number of balls consumed by the player is counted by the sum of the counted number of game balls that have passed through the out port and the number of winning balls.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25B) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information about the given game value,
It is equipped with a detection means for counting the number of game balls launched into the game area.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls launched into the game area is counted from the output of the detection means, and the consumed game balls consumed by the player are counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(25C) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information about the given game value,
It is equipped with a detection means that counts the number of game balls ejected from the game machine.
The control means
It has a game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state.
The number of game balls discharged from the gaming machine is counted from the output of the detection means, and the number of balls consumed by the player is counted.
It is characterized in that information on the game value is calculated by dividing the number of prize balls paid out to the player in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state at a predetermined timing. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

According to the inventions of 25A to 25C, the process relating to the acquisition of the game medium can be accurately executed.

(26A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes a program that controls the progress of the game,
It is equipped with a display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The control means
A game state control means for controlling a normal game state and a special game state in which a player can acquire more game value than the normal game state, and a game state control means for controlling the game state.
A means for counting the number of prize balls, excluding the number of prize balls given when a game ball launched toward the right side of the game area wins a prize opening, and a means for counting the number of prize balls.
It has a consumption ball number counting means for counting the number of consumption balls consumed by the player by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means updates information on the gaming value by using the counted number of prize balls and the number of consumed balls.

(26B) The information on the game value is based on
The number of prize balls in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of prize balls given when the game balls launched toward the right side of the game area win a prize in the winning opening where the prize can be won.
The number of balls consumed in the normal game state is counted by excluding the number of game balls launched toward the right side of the game area.
The control means according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means calculates information on the game value by dividing the counted number of prize balls in the normal game state by the number of balls consumed in the normal game state. Gaming machine.

(26C) For a predetermined period of time after the control means detects the passage of the game ball of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area or the winning of the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is excluded from the counting of the number of prize balls and the number of balls consumed.

(26D) The control means determines the predetermined period according to either the elapse of a predetermined time from the last detection, the time for consuming a predetermined number of game balls, or the time for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized by the above.

(26E) The control means excludes the number of passing balls of the gate portion provided on the right side of the game area and the number of winning balls to the winning opening provided on the right side of the game area, and the number of winning balls and the number of winning balls The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises counting the number of balls consumed.

According to the inventions of 26A to 26E, accurate information can be output to the outside of the gaming machine.

(27A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
The first data setting means for setting the first data according to the result of the game,
A second data setting means for setting the second data that does not depend on the result of the game,
A third data setting means that sets the third data according to the result of the game,
A first conversion means for obtaining the first conversion data from the first data set by the first data setting means and the second data set by the second data setting means, and
A second conversion means for obtaining the second conversion data from the first conversion data obtained by the first conversion means and the third data set by the third data setting means, and
A gaming machine characterized by having a display means for displaying the second conversion data without displaying the first conversion data.

(27B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the display means device does not display the second conversion data when the second conversion data is a numerical value in a predetermined range.

(27C) The first conversion means is a multiplication means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is obtained by multiplying the first data and the second data at a timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(27D) The second conversion means is a division means, and is characterized in that the first conversion data is divided by the third data to obtain the second conversion data at the timing when a predetermined condition is satisfied. , The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(27E) The first data is the game value (for example, the number of prize balls) given to the player.
The third data is the game value consumed by the player (for example, the number of out balls).
The second conversion means divides the first conversion data by the third data to obtain information on the given game value as the second conversion data.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the indicator displays information (for example, a base) regarding the gaming value obtained by the second conversion means.

According to the inventions of 27A to 27E, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the base value required for evaluation of gaming machines can be displayed accurately in real time. Further, by using the second conversion means (division means), information on the game value (for example, a base value) can be accurately displayed in real time while suppressing an increase in the processing load of the control means.

(28A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A control means that executes periodic processing that controls the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information about the given game value,
It has a conversion means for calculating information on the game value, and has
The control means
An argument is passed to the conversion means at a predetermined timing, and the result converted based on the argument by the conversion means is obtained from the conversion means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a process of passing an argument and a process of acquiring the result of the conversion can be executed within one periodic process.

(28B) The conversion means
It is an arithmetic circuit that performs division operations.
It has a divisor register in which a divisor is input, a divisor register in which a divisor is input, and a result register for outputting the quotient of the division operation.
The control means
Write arguments to the divisor register and the divisor register,
After a predetermined time has elapsed from the writing of the argument, the quotient is read from the result register, and the quotient is read.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the process of writing an argument to the divisor register and the divisor register is executed before the predetermined time from the end of the repeatedly executed program.

(28C) A means for counting the number of prize game media, which counts the game media given to the player in a predetermined game state, and
It has a consumption game medium number counting means for counting the game media consumed by the player in the predetermined game state.
The control means
A value obtained by multiplying the number of prize game media counted by the prize game medium number counting means by 100 is written to the divisor register.
The number of consumption game media counted by the consumption game medium number counting means is written in the divisor gista.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the base value is read from the result register.

According to the inventions of 28A to 28C, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, since the process of passing an argument to the conversion circuit and the process of acquiring the conversion result from the conversion circuit are executed within one iterative process (timer interrupt process), the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(29A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A winning opening where a game ball can be won, and
Control means to control the progress of the game,
A display means for displaying information about the given game value,
A consumption ball counting means for counting the consumption balls consumed by the player,
It has a prize ball counting means for counting the prize balls given to the player,
At least one of the winning openings is a specific winning opening that can be switched between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize.
The control means
Based on the counted number of consumed balls and the number of prize balls, the information regarding the game value to be displayed on the display means is updated.
If a prize is detected in the specific winning opening even though the specific winning opening is in the closed state, it is determined that the winning is abnormal, and if the determination is made, the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality is determined. Is excluded from the number of balls consumed, and the information regarding the game value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29B) At least one of the winning openings is a starting winning opening that serves as an opportunity to derive a special gaming state that facilitates the acquisition of a large number of game balls.
When the starting winning opening is closed and a winning is detected in the starting winning opening, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29C) At least one of the winning openings is a large winning opening opened in a special gaming state.
When the winning opening is detected while the winning opening is closed, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning from the number of consumed balls. , The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for displaying on the display means is updated.

(29D) It has a consumption ball detecting means for detecting the consumption ball consumed by the player, and has
Each of the preceding means is characterized in that the consumption ball counting means counts the consumption balls consumed by the player by subtracting the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means. The gaming machine described in the section.

(29E) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed for calculating the information regarding the game value.
The consumption ball counting means adds the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detecting means to the total number of consumption balls, subtracts the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the total number of consumption balls, and obtains the consumption balls. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which is characterized by counting.

(29F) The control means stores the total number of balls consumed for calculating the information regarding the game value.
The consumption ball counting means counts the consumption balls by adding a value obtained by subtracting the number of consumption balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumption balls detected by the consumption ball number detection means to the total number of consumption balls. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding sections, which is a feature.

(29G) The winning opening can be switched between an open state in which it is easy to win a game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize.
When the control means detects the winning of the winning opening in the closed state and does not pay out the winning balls in connection with the winning, the control means determines that the winning is abnormal and determines the number of winning balls for the winning. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises updating information on a gaming value to be displayed on the display means by excluding it from the number of balls consumed.

(29H) When the winning abnormality in the winning opening is detected a plurality of times within a predetermined period, the control means excludes the number of winning balls related to the winning abnormality from the number of consumed balls and displays it on the display means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that information regarding the gaming value for playing is updated.

According to the inventions of 29A to 29H, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, the number of winning balls that are abnormally won can be excluded from the number of out balls, and information on the game value (for example, the base value) can be accurately displayed in real time.

(30) A gaming machine that gives a gaming medium as a prize to a player.
A game area where multiple winning openings are arranged,
When a game medium is detected in each of the winning openings, a prize-giving means for granting a predetermined specific prize among a plurality of prizes, and a prize-giving means.
A calculation processing means that executes a predetermined calculation process using the number of game media flowing into the game area and the number of game media given as prizes given by the prize giving means.
A processing means for processing the result of the arithmetic processing executed by the arithmetic processing means, and
A display means for displaying the result of arithmetic processing processed by the processing means on a predetermined display device is provided.
When a specific prize is generated among the plurality of prizes in the game, the prize-giving means grants the specific prize, and the display means displays the result of the arithmetic processing so as not to change. Amusement machine.

According to the thirty invention, information on the result of the game can be displayed accurately and quickly. In particular, prizes (for example, prize balls that are paid out when a prize is given to a prize opening (for example, a general prize opening or a large prize opening with a large number of prize balls) to which a high-value prize is given) are generated. Even if it is given, the result of the calculation process (calculated base value) can be displayed so that it does not change, and it is easy to determine whether the gaming machine is exhibiting the specified performance (for example, whether it is according to the set payout rate). can.

(31A) A game including a main control means including a lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning when a specific condition is satisfied, and a peripheral control means for controlling a predetermined effect based on a signal from the main control means. It ’s a machine,
The peripheral control means
A temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a temporary storage means.
An information storage means updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means, and
By providing a first information output means for outputting at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
A gaming machine characterized in that the status history of the gaming machine can be grasped.

(31B) A general winning opening is provided so that a game ball launched in the game area can be won even if it is not in a special game state.
The signal transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means includes a signal indicating winning to the general winning opening.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first information output means outputs information regarding winning to the general winning opening to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(31C) When the predetermined condition is satisfied, an external output means for outputting information based on the predetermined condition to the external terminal board and
When the predetermined conditions are satisfied, an information storage means for storing more detailed information than the information output to the external terminal plate, and an information storage means.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, comprising: an information presenting means for presenting information stored by the information storage means.

(31D) A first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine is provided.
The peripheral control means
A storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a storage means.
The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises a limited initialization means that does not initialize a part of the information stored in the storage means even when it is initialized by the first initialization means. Machine.

(31E) The first initialization means for initializing the state of the gaming machine,
A second initialization means for initializing the stored contents of the information storage means is provided.
The information storage means can retain the stored contents even when the power of the gaming machine is cut off.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first initialization means does not initialize the stored contents of the information storage means, but initializes the stored contents of the temporary storage means.

(31F) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means stores the type of a signal received from the main control means and the time when the signal is received in the information storage means.

(31G) The signals transmitted from the main control means to the peripheral control means include a signal related to a counting event counted according to the progress of the game and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine. Including
The peripheral control means
A temporary storage means for storing information based on a signal received from the main control means, and a temporary storage means.
An information storage means updated by the information stored in the temporary storage means, and
It has a first information output means that outputs at least a part of the information stored in the information storage means to the outside when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The peripheral control means
The counting event is counted based on the signal received from the main control means, and the counting result is stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the state change event is stored in the information storage means, and the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

(31H) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine.
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal related to the state change event is received from the main control means, the type of the signal related to the state change event, the time when the signal is received and the information storage means are stored, and the counting event stored in the temporary storage means. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the counting result of the counting event is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means.

(31I) The signal transmitted from the main control means includes a signal related to a counting event counted for management of the gaming machine and a signal related to a state change event that triggers a change in the state of the gaming machine.
The information storage means stores the counting result of the counting event for each state of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
The signal related to the counting event received from the main control means is counted and stored in the temporary storage means.
When a signal relating to the state change event is received from the main control means, the counting result of the counting event stored in the temporary storage means is added to the counting result of the counting event stored in the information storage means. The gaming machine described in each section before.

According to the inventions of 31A to 31I, it is possible to know how the balls have been ejected. In particular, according to the inventions of 31D and 31E, information on the game can be properly stored.

(32) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
A control means that executes periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
Consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting the prize game medium given to the player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a variable display of a symbol, and a first light emitting element group.
It has a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information on the given game value, and has.
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the third terminal of the second light emitting element group are connected to one output driving means.
Although the control means outputs a selection signal at a timing common to the first terminal and the third terminal, at least one of the first light emitting elements group is output during the period during which the selection signal is output. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting one light emitting element and a signal output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group. Is output at different timings to control the display of the first light emitting element group and the second light emitting element group within one periodic process.

According to the invention of 32, the circuit for displaying the information on the game value to be given (for example, the base value and the accessory ratio) can be simply configured, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(33) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
A control means that executes periodic processing related to the progress of the game,
Consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting the prize game medium given to the player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A first light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements for displaying information about a game including a variable display of a symbol, and a first light emitting element group.
It has a second light emitting element group including a plurality of light emitting elements that display information on the given game value, and has.
The first light emitting element group includes a first terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of second terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
The second light emitting element group includes a third terminal to which one terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is commonly connected and a plurality of fourth terminals to which the other terminal of the plurality of light emitting elements is connected. And have
At least one light emitting element of the first light emitting element group corresponds to the selection signal output to the first terminal of the first light emitting element group and the selection signal output to the first terminal. A signal output to the plurality of second terminals for lighting, a selection signal output to the third terminal of the second light emitting element group, and a selection signal output to the third terminal. Although the signals output to the plurality of fourth terminals for lighting at least one light emitting element of the second light emitting element group corresponding to the above are output within the same periodic processing, the first The process of outputting the selection signal output to the terminal 1 and the signal output to the plurality of second terminals corresponding to the selection signal, and the selection signal output to the third terminal and the selection signal. The process of outputting signals to the plurality of corresponding fourth terminals is a gaming machine characterized in that signals are output at different timings in the periodic process by different processes in the same periodic process. ..

According to the invention of 33, a circuit for displaying information regarding the game value to be given can be simply configured. Therefore, information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(34A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
Consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting the prize game medium given to the player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
It has a calculation result display means for displaying information on the game value calculated by the calculation means.
The control means
A control device that executes processing for game control,
A timing means for generating a signal (for example, a clock signal or a reset signal) that determines the operation timing of the control device, and
It has an output driving means controlled by the control device and at least outputting a control signal for displaying by the calculation result display means.
In the substrate on which the control device is mounted, the timing means is arranged in one direction with respect to the control device, and the output driving means and the calculation result display means are arranged in a direction different from the one direction. A gaming machine characterized in that it is placed away from the timing means.

(34B) The connection line between the control device and the timing means and the connection line between the control device and the output drive means are arranged on the substrate so as not to intersect with each other. The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs.

(34C) The timing means includes a reset circuit that generates a reset signal input to the control device and an oscillation circuit that generates a clock signal input to the control device.
On the printed circuit board on which the control means is realized, the reset circuit is arranged from the processor in the same direction as the oscillation circuit, and the driver circuit and the display device are arranged apart from the reset circuit and the oscillation circuit. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that.

According to the inventions of 34A to 34C, it is possible to suppress the interference between the signal related to the game control and the signal for displaying the information related to the game. Therefore, the influence on the game control can be suppressed, and the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(35A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
Consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting the prize game medium given to the player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
It has a display means that is controlled by the control means and displays information about the game value.
The control means
A control device that executes processing for game control,
It has a memory that the control device accesses when the process is executed and stores at least information about the game value.
The gaming machine is provided with an input means for instructing the initialization of the memory.
The control means
At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not the data stored in the memory is normal, and if it is determined to be abnormal, the first initialization means for initializing the predetermined first area of the memory. ,
At the time of turning on the power, it is determined whether or not the input means is operated, and if it is determined that the input means is operated, a second initialization means for initializing a predetermined second area of the memory is provided. Have and
The first region initialized by the first initialization means and the second region initialized by the second initialization means are the second initial region also by the first initialization means. Includes overlapping areas that are commonly initialized by the conversion means
At least the first region includes a region that does not overlap with the second region.
A gaming machine characterized in that information regarding the gaming value is stored in the first region other than the overlapping region.

(35B) In the first area, data used for calculating information regarding the game value is stored.
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
The control means
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area is initialized and the data is initialized.
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the second area is initialized and the data is initialized.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second region is initialized without initializing the first region.

(35C) In the first area, data used for calculating information regarding the game value is stored.
Data used for controlling the progress of the game is stored in the second area.
The control means
When it is determined that the data stored in the first area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized, and the data is initialized.
When it is determined that the data stored in the second area is abnormal, the first area and the second area are initialized.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein when it is determined that the input means is being operated, the second region is initialized without initializing the first region.

(35D) Each of the preceding items, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal for each execution of periodic processing that is repeatedly executed at predetermined time intervals. The gaming machine described in.

(35E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first region is abnormal each time the information on the gaming value is calculated. ..

(35F) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the control means determines whether or not the data stored in the first area is abnormal when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

According to the inventions of 35A to 35F, it is possible to appropriately control the memory for storing the information (base value and accessory ratio) regarding the game value to be given. Therefore, information about the game can be displayed accurately and quickly.

(36A) A gaming machine that gives a player a prize gaming medium as a gaming value.
Control means to control the progress of the game,
Consumed game medium counting means for counting the consumed game medium consumed by the player,
A prize game medium counting means for counting the prize game medium given to the player,
A calculation means for calculating information on the given game value using the counted number of consumption game media and the number of prize game media, and
A display means for displaying information on the game value and
It has an electric accessory that is operated by the control means.
Under specific conditions, when a plurality of game media win a prize during the operation of the electric accessory triggered by one hit, some of the winning game media have information on the game value. A gaming machine characterized in that it is used for calculation and is not used for calculating information on the game value for other gaming media, but any gaming medium can trigger a variable display game.

(36B) The control means
When the predetermined start conditions are met, the variable display game is executed, and
Depending on the result of the variable display game, a first gaming state (time saving, high probability state, big hit, etc.) that is advantageous to the player and a second gaming state (normal state) that is less advantageous than the first gaming state. Control to either
When a plurality of game media win a prize during one operation of the electric accessory, the game medium won in the second game state is used for calculating information on the game value, and the first game The gaming machines described in the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the gaming media won in the state are not used for calculating the information on the gaming value, but any gaming medium can trigger a variable display game.

(36C) The control means
Detects multiple types of errors that occur in gaming machines and
When a plurality of game media are won during one operation of the electric accessory, the winning game medium in a state where the error of a predetermined type is detected is used for calculating the information on the game value. However, although the game medium that won the prize in the state where the error of the predetermined type is not detected is used for calculating the information on the game value, any game medium can be a trigger for the variable display game. The gaming machines described in the previous sections.

According to the inventions of 36A to 36C, since the game medium is switched to be used for calculating the information on the game value according to the state of the game machine, the information on the game value can be displayed quickly and accurately.

(37A) A gaming machine including an outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. hand,
Difficulty in changing settings that makes it difficult to operate the setting change operation unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, as compared with when the main body frame is open with respect to the outer frame. A gaming machine characterized by having a means of conversion.

(37B) When performing a setting change operation for changing the setting state related to the game, the outer frame, the main body frame that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame and the game board is provided, and the changed setting state. It is a gaming machine equipped with a setting status display unit for displaying.
A gaming machine characterized by having a means for making it difficult to see what is displayed by the setting state display unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37C) An outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting determination operation unit for performing a setting determination operation for determining a setting state related to the game are provided. It ’s a pachinko machine
A gaming machine characterized by having a determination difficulty means that makes it difficult to operate the setting determination operation unit when the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame.

(37D) A gaming machine including an outer frame, a main body frame that is openable and closable to the outer frame and is provided with a game board, and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to the game. hand,
The setting change operation unit has a setting key insertion unit into which a setting key is inserted.
When the main body frame is closed with respect to the outer frame, a specific portion of the outer frame is configured to prevent the setting key from being inserted into the setting key insertion portion. A game machine to play.

According to the inventions of 37A to 37D, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudster to change the setting state illegally, and to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37E) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines a predetermined setting information related to a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a specific operation unit.
The gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time determining means can determine a specific fluctuation time when the setting information is determined as the specific information based on an operation on the specific operation unit.

(37F) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
It is provided with a probability determination unit that determines the probability that the hit result is derived to one of a plurality of probabilities based on an operation on a specific operation unit.
The gaming machine characterized in that the fluctuation time determining means can determine a specific fluctuation time when the probability determined based on the operation on the specific operation unit is a specific probability.

(37G) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines a predetermined setting information related to a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a specific operation unit.
The fluctuation time determining means may determine a common fluctuation time regardless of the setting information, or may determine a different fluctuation time according to the setting information.
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that different fluctuation times are determined according to the setting information is set lower than the probability that the common fluctuation time is determined.

(37H) A gaming machine that gives a predetermined game profit when a symbol variation display is performed based on the establishment of a start condition and a hit result is derived as the symbol variation display result.
A fluctuation time determining means for determining the fluctuation time of the symbol, and
A setting information determination unit that determines a predetermined setting information related to a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a specific operation unit.
It is equipped with a production control unit that performs a predetermined production.
The fluctuation time determining means can determine different fluctuation times according to the setting information.
When the specific fluctuation time is determined by the fluctuation time determining means in response to the specific setting information in the setting information, the effect control unit displays the fluctuation of the symbol within the specific fluctuation time. A gaming machine characterized in that a result suggestion effect suggesting a result and a setting suggestion effect suggesting the content of the setting information determined by the setting information determination unit are sequentially performed.

According to the inventions of 37E to 37H, it is possible to make the player detect the set state in a new mode and improve the game entertainment.

(37I) A main control board provided with a game control unit that controls a game, another control board connected to the main control board and provided with a control unit different from the game control unit, and the game control. A gaming machine equipped with a setting-related operation unit for changing a setting state related to a game performed by the department.
The game control unit has a setting change permissible state generating means that allows an operation related to the change of the setting state with respect to the setting-related operation unit.
The setting change permissible state generating means is a gaming machine characterized in that when the information transmitted from the separate control board to the main control board is specific information, the operation related to the change of the setting state is permitted. ..

According to the invention of 37I, it is possible to make it difficult for a fraudster to change the setting state illegally, and to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

(37J) A game control unit that controls a game and a setting change operation unit for changing a setting state related to control performed by the game control unit are provided, and a game area is operated by a player operating a predetermined launch operation unit. It is a gaming machine that gives a gaming profit by winning a prize in a predetermined winning opening with a gaming ball launched toward.
When the setting change operation unit is operated to change the setting state, it is characterized by having a launch disabling means for disabling the launch of the game ball by the operation of the launch operation unit for a predetermined period. Gaming machine.

According to the invention of 37J, the act of illegally changing the setting state can be suppressed.

(38A) A gaming machine including a game control unit that controls a game and a setting operation unit for changing a setting related to control performed by the game control unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that the game control board constituting the game control unit and the setting board constituting the setting operation unit are housed in one case.

(38B) The case described in each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein, in place of the setting operation unit, a dummy unit that cannot perform an operation for changing the setting can be accommodated together with the game control unit. Pachinko machine.

(38C) The setting operation unit is
The first operation unit for starting the setting state in which the setting can be changed, and
A second operation unit for confirming the setting and ending the setting state,
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises a setting display for displaying the contents of the setting.

(38D) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the dummy unit does not have any of the first operation unit, the second operation unit, and the setting display.

According to the inventions of 38A to 38D, the specifications of a gaming machine having a setting function and a gaming machine having no setting function can be standardized, and efficiently designed and produced.

(39A) A game control unit having a processor that executes a program for controlling a game and a memory accessed by the processor.
A clear switch for initializing a predetermined area of the memory, and
A gaming machine including a setting operation unit for changing settings related to control performed by the game control unit.
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed.
The game control unit
When the power of the gaming machine is turned on, the operation of the clear switch and the operation of the setting change operation unit are detected.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is operated, the setting state is started.

(39B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control unit initializes a first area of the memory after the end of the setting state.

(39C) When the clear switch is operated and the setting change operation unit is not operated, the game control unit may perform the game control unit in a second region which is at least partially different from the first region. The gaming machine described in each of the preceding sections, which is characterized by initializing a memory.

According to the inventions of 39A to 39C, it is possible to prevent an erroneous operation of setting change.

(40A) A gaming machine including a game control unit that controls a game and a setting operation unit for changing a setting related to control performed by the game control unit.
The game control unit has a game value display means for displaying information on the given game value.
The setting operation unit has a setting change operation unit for starting a setting state in which the setting can be changed, and a setting display means for displaying the contents of the setting.
The game control unit is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the set state, the game value display means and the setting display means are displayed so as not to be confused.

(40B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control unit and the setting operation unit are housed in one case.

(40C) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are composed of one display.

(40D) The game value display means displays information on the given game value on the display without delay as the game progresses.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information on the setting on the display in place of the information on the given gaming value in the setting state.

(40E) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming value display means and the setting display means are configured by different indicators.

(40F) The game value display means is
In other than the above setting state, the information regarding the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses.
In the setting state, any of the characters, numbers, and figures that are not displayed in the setting state is displayed.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

(40G) The game value display means is
In other than the above setting state, the information regarding the given game value is displayed without delay as the game progresses.
In the above setting state, turn off or turn on all
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the setting display means displays information related to the setting in the setting state.

According to the invention of 40A to 40G, it is possible to prevent confusion of a plurality of displays arranged on the substrate.

(41A) A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding a hit based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start opening, and
A production determining means for determining one of a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery, and
An effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and an effect executing means.
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, a setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to one of a plurality of games, and a setting information determining means.
When an operation different from the predetermined operation is performed, the setting information confirmation means for displaying the setting information determined by the setting information determining means on a predetermined display unit is provided.
The plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect even if the different operation is performed when the effect determination means determines that the setting suggestion effect is to be performed.

(41B) A lottery means for drawing a lottery regarding a hit based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the start opening, and
When a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation unit, a setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to one of a plurality of games, and a setting information determining means.
A production determining means for determining one of a plurality of productions based on the result of the lottery, and
An effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means, and an effect executing means.
Error detection means to detect errors and
An error notification means for notifying an error detected by the error detection means is provided.
The plurality of effects include a setting suggestion effect that can suggest the setting information determined by the setting information determining means.
The effect executing means is a gaming machine capable of executing the setting suggestion effect during a period in which the error notification means notifies an error satisfying a predetermined condition.

(41C) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not it is a win, and
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect is determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new establishment condition is established. A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the setting suggestion effect is restricted in a special symbol variation corresponding to the starting condition.

(41D) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not it is a win, and
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect is determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending, the new establishment condition is established. A gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the start condition.

(41E) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of a start condition, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not it is a win, and
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of the setting suggestion effect in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established starting condition is restricted.

(41F) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not it is a win, and
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that execution of the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect is restricted in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

(41G) A lottery information acquisition means for acquiring lottery information based on the establishment of starting conditions, and
Based on the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, a determination means for determining whether or not it is a win, and
A special symbol variation execution means that executes a special symbol variation based on the establishment of a start condition,
When the establishment of the start condition is satisfied but the establishment of the start condition is not satisfied, a holding means for storing and holding the lottery information up to a predetermined number, and
A setting information determining means for determining a predetermined setting information regarding a game to any one of a plurality of games based on an operation on a predetermined operation unit.
With a display means for displaying a predetermined effect,
The effect includes an expectation suggestion effect for a determination result by the determination means, and a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting the setting information determined by the setting information determination means.
When the start condition is newly satisfied during the fluctuation period of the special symbol variation in which the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect are determined to be executed, or while the lottery information corresponding to the special symbol variation is pending. , A gaming machine characterized in that the expected suggestion effect and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in a special symbol variation corresponding to the newly established start condition.

According to the inventions of 41A to 41G, the game entertainment can be improved.

(42A) A gaming machine provided with a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning lottery in the game.
The main control means
A program storage means for storing the first program and the second program,
An arithmetic means that performs required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program, and
A first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing, and
A second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means, and
The accessability of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either of them can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When the first program is executed, the first storage means is used, and the first storage means is used.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42B) The first storage means and the second storage means are game machines whose accessability can be switched by one command input to the calculation means.

(42C) The instruction for switching the first storage means to be accessible and the instruction for switching the second storage means to be accessible are characterized in that at least one of an instruction (opcode) and an argument (operand) is different. Game machine.

(42D) The first program is a program (in the game control area) for performing a winning lottery in a game.
The second program is a program (outside the game control area) that calculates information regarding the game value given in the game, and is a game machine that is called and executed from the first program.

(42E) A gaming machine provided with a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning lottery in the game.
The main control means
A program storage means for storing the first program and the second program,
An arithmetic means that performs required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program, and
A first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing, and
A second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means, and
The accessability of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either of them can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used, and the first storage means is used.
At the start of the second program, in the second program, the first storage means is inaccessible and the second storage means is accessible.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42F) A gaming machine, characterized in that, at the end of the second program, the calculation means switches to the first storage means inaccessible to the second storage means in the second program.

(42G) A gaming machine provided with a main control means for deriving a gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result of a winning lottery in the game.
The main control means
A program storage means for storing the first program and the second program,
An arithmetic means that performs required arithmetic processing by the first program and the second program, and
A first storage means having a plurality of storage areas for temporarily storing data in the arithmetic processing, and
A second storage means having a storage area having the same configuration as that of the first storage means, and
The accessability of the first storage means and the second storage means can be switched so that either of them can be accessed.
The calculation means is
When executing the first program, the first storage means is used, and the first storage means is used.
When the second program is started, in the first program, the first storage means is inaccessible and the second storage means is accessible.
A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage means is used when the second program is executed.

(42H) After the end of the second program, the calculation means switches the first program that has returned from the second program so that the second storage means is inaccessible and the first storage means is accessible. A game machine featuring.

According to the inventions of 42A to 42H, when the processing is transferred between programs, data can be saved at high speed with a simple instruction, and precautions at the time of program creation can be reduced.

(43A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to display the effect,
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
It is provided with a light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path toward the front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in the display panel in a plurality of paths. It has a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine, and has a plurality of second reflecting portions.
The peripheral control means
A dynamic pattern is displayed on the display panel by causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern and changing the light reflected by the first reflecting unit.
A gaming machine characterized in that a static pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit.

(43B) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means changes the emission colors of the plurality of light emitting elements with the passage of time so that light of different colors travels in different paths in the display panel, and the plurality of first reflections. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time by emitting light of different colors from the portions.

(43C) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means switches the lighting of the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and emits light from at least a part of the plurality of first reflecting portions. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time.

(43D) The light emitting device has a plurality of light emitting elements that irradiate light from a plurality of positions to the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means switches the number of light emitting elements that emit light among the plurality of light emitting elements according to the passage of time, controls the path of light in the display panel, and controls the path of light in the display panel, and the peripheral control means of the plurality of first reflecting units. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the color of the pattern projected by the plurality of first reflecting portions is changed according to the passage of time by emitting light from at least a part thereof.

According to the inventions of 43A to 43D, a pattern that appears to move and a pattern that appears to be stationary can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

(44A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to display the effect,
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The display panel includes a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path toward the front side of the gaming machine, and light traveling in the display panel in a plurality of paths. It has a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect on the front side of the gaming machine, and has a plurality of second reflecting portions.
The first reflecting unit includes a plurality of first right eye reflecting units that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path in a direction reaching the player's right eye, and the player's left eye. Includes a plurality of first left eye reflectors that reflect in the direction of reaching
The plurality of first right eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right eye pattern.
The plurality of first left-eye reflective portions are arranged on the display panel so as to form a left-eye pattern at a position different from that of the right-eye pattern.
The peripheral control means
By causing the light emitting device to emit light so that the light emitted in the same pattern reaches the first right eye reflecting portion and the first left eye reflecting portion, the right eye pattern and the left eye pattern are emitted. Is displayed on the display panel to allow the player to recognize a three-dimensional pattern that causes parallax between the left and right eyes.
A gaming machine characterized in that a flat pattern that does not cause parallax between the left and right eyes is displayed on the display panel by reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit.

(44B) The second reflecting unit is the front side of the gaming machine and the direction in which the light traveling in the display panel in a plurality of paths reaches the right eye and the left eye of the player. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the flat pattern is displayed on the display panel by reflecting on the display panel.

(44C) The second reflection unit includes a plurality of second right eye reflection units that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path in a direction reaching the player's right eye, and the player's second reflection unit. Includes a plurality of second left eye reflectors that reflect in the direction of reaching the left eye.
The plurality of second right eye reflectors are arranged on the display panel so as to form a right eye pattern.
The plurality of second left-eye reflective portions are arranged on the display panel so as to form the left-eye pattern at the same position as the right-eye pattern.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the flat pattern is displayed on the display panel by the light reflected by the second reflecting unit.

According to the inventions of 44A to 44C, a three-dimensional pattern and a two-dimensional pattern can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

(45A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device that is controlled by the peripheral control means to display the effect,
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The peripheral control means
By making the light emitting device emit light, a dynamic pattern and a static pattern can be displayed on the display panel.
A gaming machine characterized in that by combining the display of the dynamic pattern and the display of the static pattern, an effect suggesting the result of the winning lottery is performed.

(45B) The display panel has a plurality of first reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel in a specific path and emit light to the front side of the gaming machine, and a plurality of paths in the display panel. It has a plurality of second reflecting portions that reflect the traveling light and emit it to the front side of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
By causing the light emitting device to emit light in a predetermined pattern, the path of light traveling in the display panel is changed, and the light reflected by the first reflecting portion is changed, so that a pattern that changes is displayed on the display panel. Display on
By reflecting the light from the light emitting device by the second reflecting unit, a stationary pattern is displayed on the display panel.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the display of the changing pattern and the display of the stationary pattern are combined to produce an effect suggesting the result of the winning lottery.

According to the inventions of 45A to 45B, a pattern that appears to move and a pattern that appears to be stationary can be displayed on a single light guide plate, and a decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

(46A) A gaming machine that imparts gaming value to a player.
A main control means for deriving a game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the winning lottery in the game,
Peripheral control means that controls the effect in the game based on the instruction from the main control means,
A display device controlled by the peripheral control means to display an effect image,
A display panel that displays the production pattern and
A light emitting device that is controlled by the peripheral control means and irradiates light so as to travel in the display panel from a plurality of positions on the side of the display panel.
The display panel has a plurality of reflecting portions that reflect light traveling in the display panel toward the front side of the gaming machine.
The peripheral control means
By causing the light emitting device to emit light, the target pattern is displayed on the display panel.
A gaming machine characterized in that an image moving toward the target pattern is displayed on the display device.

(46B) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the pattern displayed on the display panel and the image displayed on the display device represent the same character or character.

(46C) The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device after displaying the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

(46D) The game according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the peripheral control means displays an image moving toward the target pattern on the display device, and then displays the target pattern on the display panel. Machine.

According to the inventions of 46A to 46D, a single light guide plate can display a plurality of patterns or patterns of different modes, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

(47A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
A gaming machine including a setting operating means operated for changing or confirming a set value related to control performed by the gaming control means.
The game control means
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the periodic processing executed at predetermined intervals are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operating means is being operated, the setting value can be changed according to the operating state of the setting operating means in the power-on processing. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the above setting value cannot be changed,
After executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, it is possible to execute the process corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the periodic process. A gaming machine characterized by being.

(47B) The periodic process is common to at least two of the plurality of processes, that is, a process related to the change of the set value, a process related to the confirmation of the set value, and a process related to a normal game. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, which comprises processing to be executed in.

(47C) The periodic process is composed of at least a first iterative process that executes a process related to the normal game and a second iterative process that executes a process related to the change of the setting.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control means selectively executes the first repeating process and the second repeating process depending on the operation mode of the gaming machine.

(47D) The memory includes a setting state management area for recording the operating state of the gaming machine in an area where the stored contents are backed up when the power is cut off.
The game control means
In the setting change mode, as the predetermined condition, the fact that the setting change mode is set is set in the setting state management area.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the setting confirmation mode, as the predetermined condition, the setting confirmation mode is set in the setting state management area.

(48) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
A gaming machine including a setting operating means operated for changing or confirming a set value related to control performed by the gaming control means.
The game control means
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the periodic processing executed at predetermined intervals are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operating means is being operated, the setting value can be changed according to the operating state of the setting operating means in the power-on processing. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the above setting value cannot be changed,
The periodic process makes it possible to execute a normal game process related to a normal game and a setting process related to setting change or setting confirmation.
The game machine is characterized in that the normal game process is composed of a plurality of processes, and a specific process among the plurality of processes is a process that can be executed in common between the normal game and the setting process.

(49A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The setting operation means is composed of at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means.
The game control means
Equipped with a storage means that can store information related to the game
In the power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the output signal of the setting operation means is stored and held in a specific storage means among the storage means.
In the power-on processing, when determining whether or not the setting operation means is being operated, the determination is made based on the information stored in the specific storage means without reading the output signal of the setting operation means. death,
The second setting operation means is the storage means when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on processing. Is a means to initialize
When the storage means is initialized when the first setting operation means is not operated and only the second setting operation means is operated in the power-on processing, the specific setting operation means is used. A gaming machine characterized in that the storage means is not initialized.

(49B) A peripheral control means for controlling the effect on the display device is provided.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the gaming control means determines a mode for activating the gaming machine based on an output signal stored in the memory after the peripheral control means is activated.

(50A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The setting operation means is composed of at least a first setting operation means and a second setting operation means.
The game control means
A storage means having at least a first storage area capable of storing information related to the game and a second storage area different from the first storage area is provided.
The first storage area is an area for storing the set value, and is an area for storing the set value.
The second storage area is an area for storing various parameters used by the game.
The game control means
When it is determined that the set value is not a normal value, the first storage area and the second storage area are initialized.
When it is determined that the first setting operation means of the setting operation means is not operated and the second setting operation means is operated, the first storage area is not initialized. , A gaming machine characterized in that the second storage area is initialized.

(50B) The memory further includes a third storage area.
The game control means initializes the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area when the third condition is satisfied. Described gaming machine.

(50C) The third storage area is a storage area other than the area for storing various parameters used in a normal game.
When the data backed up in the memory is erased when a power failure occurs, the game control means determines that the third condition is satisfied, and determines that the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area are satisfied. The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, characterized in that the storage area of the machine is initialized.

(51A) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game control means
Equipped with a storage means that can retain information related to the game even when the power is cut off
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the periodic processing executed at predetermined intervals are executed.
When the power to the gaming machine is turned on while the setting operating means is being operated, the setting value can be changed according to the operating state of the setting operating means in the power-on processing. Execute the setting corresponding to the state or the setting confirmation state in which the above setting value cannot be changed,
The storage means stores a setting state management area in which a value set corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is stored according to the operation state of the setting operation means at least in the power-on processing. A gaming machine characterized by including.

(51B) A setting operation means operated for starting in a setting change mode for changing a setting value related to control performed by the game control means is provided.
The game control means
When the gaming machine is operated to start in the setting change mode while the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the setting change mode is recorded in the setting state management area and the memory is stored. When the predetermined area is initialized and the setting change mode is terminated by the setting operation means, the normal game state is recorded in the setting state management area, and the game is played in the normal game state in which the game ball can be launched. Start the machine and
When the gaming machine is operated to start in the setting confirmation mode while the RAM abnormality is stored in the setting state management area, the RAM abnormality recorded in the setting state management area is continued, and the above-mentioned The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the normal gaming state is not recorded in the setting state management area even if the setting operation means terminates the setting confirmation mode.

(52) A game control means for drawing a special game that is beneficial to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
The setting operation means operated to change or confirm the setting value related to the control performed by the game control means, and the setting operation means.
It is a gaming machine equipped with
The game control means
The power-on processing executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the first periodic processing executed every predetermined first cycle, and the second periodic processing executed every predetermined second cycle are executed. Enable and
In the power-on processing, it is determined whether or not an operation associated with the setting operation is performed in the setting operation means.
When it is determined that the operation associated with the setting operation is being performed in the setting operation means, the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or the setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed depends on the operation state. Perform the settings corresponding to
When it is determined that the operation associated with the setting operation has not been performed in the setting operation means, the setting corresponding to the setting change state in which the setting value can be changed or the setting confirmation state in which the setting value cannot be changed is performed. It is possible to execute normal game start processing without
The first periodic process is executed after executing the setting corresponding to the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the power-on processing.
The second periodic process is executed after the normal game start process can be executed in the power-on process.

(53A) A game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
An accessory controlled according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory is provided.
A gaming machine that can be equipped with an inspection signal generation circuit for outputting inspection signals used for inspection of gaming machines.
The inspection signal generation circuit is
A second driver circuit in which the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit is input and an inspection signal is generated from the control signal, and a second driver circuit.
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal.
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the accessory.
The second driver circuit is a gaming machine characterized in that a control signal output as a serial signal from the gaming control means is converted into the inspection signal.

(53B) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit independently generate signals of different voltages that are input to different voltages and change at the same timing.

(53C) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein a connector connected to the first driver circuit is mounted, and a connector connected to the second driver circuit is not mounted.

(53D) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the connector connected to the first driver circuit is a discrete component, and the connector connected to the second driver circuit is a surface mount component. ..

(53E) A game control means that executes periodic processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game.
Among the events related to the progress of the game, the first detecting means for detecting the event taken in by the game control means in the periodic processing, and the first detecting means.
A gaming machine including a second detecting means for detecting an event captured by the game control means in a process other than the periodic process among the events related to the progress of the game.
The game control means
A conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means into a serial signal, and
The serial input port where the serial signal is input and
It has a general-purpose input port into which signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input.
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port.

(53F) The first detecting means is a ball detecting means for detecting a gaming ball launched toward a gaming area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detecting means is a setting operating means operated for changing or confirming a set value related to control performed by the gaming control means.

(53G) An accessory driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
It is provided with a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory.
The serial input port is a serial input / output port capable of inputting a serial signal and outputting a serial signal.
The game control means outputs a control signal for driving the accessory from the serial input / output port.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first driver circuit converts the control signal into the drive signal.

(53H) A game control means that executes periodic processing at predetermined intervals in order to control the progress of the game, and
A gaming machine including a first detecting means and a second detecting means for detecting an event related to the progress of the game.
The game control means
A conversion means for converting a signal from the first detection means into a serial signal, and
The serial input port where the serial signal is input and
It has a general-purpose input port into which signals of the first detection means or the second detection means are individually input.
The first detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal once in the periodic processing.
The second detection means determines the signal level based on the result of detecting the signal a plurality of times in the periodic processing.
The signal of the first detection means is input to either the general-purpose input port or the serial input port via the conversion means.
The signal of the second detection means is input to the general-purpose input port and is input to the general-purpose input port.
The gaming control means is a gaming machine characterized in that the signal of the second detecting means is detected a plurality of times within the periodic processing and the signal level is determined.

(53I) The first detecting means is a ball detecting means for detecting a gaming ball launched toward a gaming area.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the second detecting means is a setting operating means operated for changing or confirming a set value related to control performed by the gaming control means.

(53J) A game control means for controlling the progress of the game,
A display device driven according to a control signal output from the game control means,
A gaming machine including a first driver circuit that outputs a drive signal for driving the accessory.
The game control means is mounted on a first printed circuit board, and is mounted on a first printed circuit board.
The first driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into a drive signal for driving the display device, and is mounted on the second printed circuit board. Ori,
The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are connected by a serial communication line that transmits a serial signal obtained by converting a signal that repeats at a predetermined cycle from the first printed circuit board side. Game machine.

(53K) An inspection signal generation circuit for outputting an inspection signal used for inspection of a gaming machine can be mounted.
The inspection signal generation circuit is
A second driver circuit in which the same control signal as that of the first driver circuit is input and an inspection signal is generated from the control signal, and a second driver circuit.
Including an inspection connector for outputting the generated inspection signal.
The second driver circuit converts a control signal output as a serial signal from the game control means into the inspection signal, and is mounted on the first printed circuit board. Game machine.

(53L) The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in one board box.

(53M) The first printed circuit board and the second printed circuit board are housed in different substrate boxes.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first printed circuit board is sealed by a caulking mechanism.

(53N) The first driver circuit and the second driver circuit have an output transistor that switches an input power supply to generate an output signal.
The gaming machine according to each of the preceding paragraphs, wherein the first driver circuit and the second driver circuit independently generate signals of different voltages that are input to different voltages and change at the same timing.

[16. Substrate that is a component of the decorative body]
By the way, in recent game machines, in order to realize a wide variety of effects, the number of accessories (decorative bodies) mounted on the game machines has been increased, and the game has been improved by increasing the size and deformation. However, since the size of the gaming machine is set to a predetermined size, the gaming area is limited, and the size and arrangement of the accessory are limited due to factors such as the increase in size of the liquid crystal display device. Therefore, there is a risk that the production will be monotonous and the interest in the game will be reduced. The embodiments described below have been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a means for increasing the size of the accessory and improving the flexibility of arrangement.

The accessory provided in the game machine is visible from the player or the front side, and a decorative part rich in decoration is arranged to enhance the interest of the game, and a light emitting body such as an LED is provided inside. , It emits light in a mode according to the game state and the expected degree of variation display. If the illuminant is arranged on a substrate like an LED, the decorative portion includes a transmissive portion capable of transmitting the light output from the illuminant. The transmitting portion may be, for example, a transparent member capable of transmitting light, or may have holes formed in a mesh pattern so that light can pass through the holes.

On the other hand, by providing the transmissive portion, the player can visually recognize the substrate on which the electronic component such as the LED or the resistor is mounted through the transmissive portion. Usually, the substrate is equipped with electronic components necessary for exerting the effect of effect, and is not premised on being visually recognized by the player. However, in the decorative portion having a transmissive portion through which light can pass, the substrate arranged inside the decorative portion may be visually recognized by the player, and the decorative effect may be reduced. On the other hand, if the substrate is made invisible by reducing the transmittance of the transmissive portion or by using a material that reflects light from the outside on the surface of the transmissive portion, the expected effect may not be obtained. be. Further, if the LED is arranged at a position where the player cannot see from the outside of the decorative portion or the transparent portion, the size of the decorative portion may be unintentionally increased.

Therefore, an object of the present embodiment is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in the decorative effect even if the substrate is visually recognized from the transparent portion constituting the decorative portion.

[16-1. Game board]
FIG. 274 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the game board 5 of the game machine according to the present embodiment. In the example shown in FIG. 274, the effect display device 1600 (on the game board side) is arranged in the central portion of the game area 5a. Further, although not shown, in the game area 5a, similarly to the game board 5 described above, a plurality of general winning openings and a plurality of general winning openings that are always open so that the hit game ball can be received and a plurality of general winnings. The mouth is a start port that is always open so that the game ball can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, a gate portion that detects the passage of the game ball, and a game ball to the first start port or the second start port. It is equipped with a large winning slot that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the lottery.

Further, in the upper right portion of the game area 5a, a character accessory 9100 having a character shape of "super heat" is arranged. FIG. 275 is a perspective view showing the shape of the character accessory 9100 in the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 275, the character accessory 9100 is a plate-shaped accessory that imitates the character shape of "super heat". The effect of the character accessory 9100 is executed in a manner according to the degree of expectation of the symbol variation. For example, the light emission mode may be changed, such as emitting light in a color according to the degree of expectation, or repeating lighting and extinguishing in a predetermined pattern. In addition, "Geki" and "Heat" are turned on alternately, and when the degree of expectation is high, both letters are turned on to notify the big hit, and finally both letters are turned off, so-called Gase effect is executed. You may do it.

As will be described later, the character accessory 9100 has a cover member (cover body) 9110 that is visible to the player, and is composed of a transparent portion 9111 and a non-transparent portion 9112. It is configured to be capable of emitting light from the transmitting portion 9111 by a light emitting body provided inside. In the present embodiment, the transparent portion (first region) 9111 is a portion corresponding to the character, the non-transparent portion (second region) 9112 is the outer edge portion of the character, and the transparent portion 9111 is substantially colorless and transparent. .. The non-transparent portion 9112 may also have transparency, and may be colored with a transparency different from that of the transmission portion 9111, for example. The details of the character accessory 9100 will be described with reference to the drawings after FIG. 277.

A part of the character accessory 9100 overlaps the upper right portion of the effect display device 1600, and the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 is applied to the back surface side of the character accessory 9100. At this time, by making the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 a reflective member, it is possible to execute an effect combined with the effect executed by the effect display device 1600. Further, a part of the character accessory 9100 may be configured to be able to transmit light, and the effect that the light output from the display area of the effect display device 1600 transmits the character accessory 9100 may be executed.

Further, a space is formed between the game board side effect display device 1600 and the game area 5a on the front side, and a snowman accessory 9200 imitating the shape of a "snowman" on the lower left front side of the effect display device 1600. Is placed. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed in the shape of a three-dimensional doll, and the player can visually recognize a part of the side surface and the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 from the side.

FIG. 276 is a perspective view showing the shape of the snowman accessory 9200 according to the present embodiment, in which (A) is a front view and (B) is a rear view. The snowman accessory 9200 is formed of a member having a transparent appearance, and exerts an effect by transmitting the light of the light emitting body (LED) provided inside to the outside.

The snowman accessory 9200 is apparently composed of a hat portion, a head portion, and a body portion. The head and body are made of transparent members so that the player can see the inside. The hat part is in the shape of a bucket and is provided on the upper side of the head. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in the present embodiment, the light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted. The details of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described with reference to the drawings after FIG. 289.

Similar to the character accessory 9100, the snowman accessory 9200 is executed in a mode according to the degree of expectation of the symbol variation. For example, it may emit light in a color according to the degree of expectation, or may be repeatedly turned on and off. Further, only the head may be lit, or only the body may be lit. Further, at the first stage of the advance notice effect, only the hat portion may be lit to raise the player's expectation, and the head portion may be lit sequentially from the head portion to the body portion.

[16-2. Character character (super heat)]
Subsequently, the detailed configuration of the character accessory 9100 will be described. FIG. 277 is an exploded perspective view of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment. The character accessory 9100 is a cover member (cover body) 9110 arranged on the front side visible to the player, and a character accessory board arranged on the back side of the cover member 9110 and equipped with a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED. It is composed of a 9120, a cover member 9110, and a base member 9130 attached to the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

[16-2-1. Cover member]
The cover member 9110 is formed with a peripheral wall portion 9113 protruding rearward from the outer periphery thereof, and the character accessory substrate 9120 can be accommodated in the space on the back surface side surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113. FIG. 278 is a view of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment as viewed from the back surface side. The state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed will be described later with reference to FIG. 280. As described above, the cover member 9110 is formed by a transmissive portion 9111 capable of transmitting light imitating the characters "extreme heat" and a non-transmissive portion 9112 formed on the periphery of the transmissive portion 9111 and difficult to transmit light. ing.

Further, the peripheral wall portion 9113 forming the outer peripheral portion of the character accessory 9100 is made of a material that does not easily transmit light like the non-transmissive portion 9112, and may be the same member as the non-transmissive portion 9112. When the characters are individually lit, it is necessary to provide a peripheral wall portion 9113 between the characters in order to separate the characters. At this time, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be prepared for each character, or the substrate may be integrated.

The transparent portion 9111 is made of a colorless and transparent material so that the inside of the character accessory 9100 can be visually recognized. At the time of performing the production, the light emitting body 9301 provided inside transmits the light to the transmitting portion 9111 and the non-transmitting portion 9112 blocks the light to emphasize the characters of "super heat" and raise the expectation of the player. be able to. Further, not only the light from the light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the character accessory board 9120 can be transmitted, but also the character accessory board 9120 itself can be visually recognized by the player. ..

In the present embodiment, a light diffusing portion that diffuses light is formed in the non-transmissive portion 9112 on the back surface side of the cover member 9110. Instead of forming the light diffusing portion, a light guide member may be provided between the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120, and the diffusing member is provided by guiding the light from the light emitting body 9301 to the transmitting portion 9111. The same effect as in the case of A modification using the light guide member will be described later.

With the above configuration, the light inside the accessory can be efficiently aggregated with a small number of light emitters, so that the number of light emitters 9301 arranged on the character accessory substrate 9120 can be reduced or light emission can be achieved. The degree of freedom in arranging the body 9301 can be increased.

Further, the non-transmissive portion 9112 may be formed of a transparent material having a lower transmittance than the transmissive portion 9111 without forming the light diffusing portion. For example, by using a colored material having transparency, the character accessory 9100 is made to emit light as a whole, and the effect is different from that when the light diffusing part is used while making the character part stand out due to the difference in transparency. be able to.

[16-2-2. Character accessory board]
FIG. 279 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 280 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 279 and 280, the character accessory substrate 9120 is not in the general rectangular shape, but in the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. It has a similar shape. Further, a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) is applied to the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120. Although various information is displayed on the character accessory substrate 9120, it may be displayed by silk printing or the like, or may be displayed by etching characters.

Further, the back surface side of the character accessory board 9120 is blocked by the base member 9130 when it is attached to the game board 5, so that the player cannot see it. Therefore, it is not necessary to set the color of the substrate as a specific color, but it is necessary to compare the cost of the material with the manufacturing cost for processing the front surface and the back surface separately, and decide whether to apply the resist only on the front surface or on both sides. You just have to decide.

As described above, the character accessory substrate 9120 is visible from the transparent portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. Therefore, if the color of the substrate does not match the decorative mode of the accessory, the decorative effect may be reduced, or the decorative effect may be hindered by the electronic components arranged on the substrate. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the character accessory substrate 9120 itself is used as one of the decorative elements. For example, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be colored (specific color) according to the decoration mode of the accessory instead of the general green color, or the electronic components mounted on the character accessory substrate 9120 may have a pattern of the accessory. Arrange so as to make. The color according to the decoration mode of the accessory is, for example, a color related to a character or a theme appearing in the production of the accessory (game machine). Hereinafter, a specific description will be given with reference to the drawings.

First, a specific mode for using the shape and color of the substrate provided on the decorative body such as an accessory as a decorative element will be described. Since the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment has the transmission portion 9111 as described above, the character accessory substrate 9120 provided inside can be visually recognized. Therefore, by coloring the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 to a specific color that matches the decoration mode of the character accessory 9100, the entire color of the character accessory 9100 is configured. For example, when the surface of the character accessory substrate 9120 is blue, the entire accessory 9301 becomes blue when the light emitting body 9301 does not emit light, and the light emitting color of the light emitting body 9301 when the light emitting body 9301 emits light, so that a completely different impression is played. Can be given to a person. In particular, when the area occupied by the transparent portion 9111 in the entire accessory is large, a larger effect can be obtained.

[16-2-3. Light emitter / electronic component]
A plurality of light emitting bodies (LEDs) 9301 are arranged on the surface (front surface) side of the character accessory substrate 9120. The light emitting bodies 9301 may all have the same light emitting color, or a plurality of different types of light emitting colors may be prepared. The light emitting body 9301 may be turned on according to the progress of the game, and the lighting location may be different depending on the content of the effect. When there are different types of emission colors, the colors may be emitted according to the degree of expectation, or different types of emission colors may be emitted at the same time.

Then, in the present embodiment, as described above, the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored to a specific color. Therefore, since the color changes depending on the combination of the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 and the light emitting color of the light emitting body 9301, it is possible to realize various effects by making the light emitting body 9301 emit light in a plurality of kinds of colors. It will be possible.

Further, when the light emitting body 9301 is turned off, the character character board 9120 is recognized as a colored specific color. Therefore, even if the light emitting body 9301 is blinked, the character character board 9301 can be used as one effect expression. The specific color colored in 9120 and the emission color of the light emitter 9301 can be alternately recognized as different colors. For example, when the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored blue as described above, when the light emitter 9301 is slowly blinked in red, the red character accessory and the blue character accessory are alternately given light and dark. It can be recognized as a character with a completely different color.

Electronic components other than the light emitter 9301 are mounted on the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. Specifically, it is a resistor 9302, an IC 9303, and a connector 9304. In the present embodiment, since these electronic components cannot be visually recognized by the player, the arrangement may be such that there is no technical problem. Further, as shown in FIG. 280, information on the light emitting body 9301 arranged on the front surface side is printed on the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120, and electronic components arranged on the front surface side even from the back surface side. Can recognize information about. The information indicating the position of the light emitter 9301 is indicated by a dotted line to prevent misunderstanding.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 279, only the light emitting body 9301 is arranged on the surface side, and the information on the electronic component is not displayed. This is to prevent the decorative effect from being reduced when the silk-printed characters (for example, the part number of the electronic component (“LED1” in FIG. 280, etc.)) are visually recognized by the player, but the assembly work. If necessary, the information may be displayed in a color that is difficult for the player to see. For example, when the color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is colored blue as described above, a similar color such as light blue with identifiable shade adjustment is adopted as the information display, and silk printing is performed. Just do it. Alternatively, the information may be formed by etching characters.

Further, in the character accessory 9100 in the present embodiment, since the electronic parts other than the light emitting body 9301 are arranged on the back surface side of the substrate which the player cannot see, the electronic parts such as the resistor 9302 and the IC 9303 are black. .. When the electronic components must be arranged on the front side, at least a part of the electronic components such as the back side of the non-transparent portion 9112 may be arranged so as to be difficult for the player to see, or a color or a color that is difficult for the player to see. Electronic components of shape may be adopted. For example, if it is an electronic component having the same color as a specific color, it may be arranged on the front side.

On the other hand, as described above, in the present invention, the player can visually recognize the substrate provided inside the accessory. Therefore, an example of using the electronic component arranged on the substrate as a decorative element of the accessory will be described.

An electronic component is arranged on the surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120 at a position visible to the player from the transmission portion 9111 of the cover member 9110. At this time, the electronic components are arranged so as to form a character pattern displayed by the character accessory 9100. For example, electronic components are placed in regular positions so that they can be used as decorations for letters.

Further, by arranging the light emitting body 9301, the player may not be able to recognize the character pattern at the time of light emission. Further, by selecting and emitting light of the light emitting body 9301 at a position where the electronic component can be recognized even at the time of light emission and the light emitting body 9301 at a position where the electronic component cannot be recognized at the time of light emission, the pattern can be emitted. It may be configured so that the presence or absence can be switched.

Further, an electronic component other than black may be arranged on the surface side to serve as a decorative element. Although the transmitting portion 9111 is colorless and transparent, it may be possible to transmit light as a lens member or a diffusing member, and at the same time, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the electronic component as a pattern by making it impossible to clearly distinguish the electronic component. As for the mode in which the decorative effect is exhibited by arranging the electronic components, another specific example will be described with reference to the snowman accessory 9200, which will be described later.

It is also possible to use the characters printed on the surface side of the substrate as a pattern. Instead of printing characters in colors that are difficult for the player to recognize in order to prevent the decorative effect from being hindered, the characters that indicate information on electronic components and boards can be recognized by the player as decorative elements. It may be printed in an aspect (color, shape). As a result, it is possible to make the pattern of the accessory into a more complicated form, or to change the color by printing in a color different from that of the cover member 9110, and it is possible to enhance the decorative effect. In addition, by aggregating the characters to be printed on the substrate, the player is made to recognize that a region having a color different from that of the cover member 9110 and other parts on the substrate is formed on the substrate, thereby enhancing the decorative effect of the entire accessory. You may try to increase it.

[16-2-4. Arrangement of illuminants]
Subsequently, the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 will be described. FIG. 281 is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting body 9301 is arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 and at a position behind the non-transmissive portion 9112 where it is difficult for the player to see. Here, the light emitting body 9301 arranged at a position visible from the transmissive portion 9111 is referred to as a light emitting body 9301a, and is referred to as a light emitting body 9301b arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112.

For example, when it is desired to emit strong light, the light emitting body 9301a is arranged at a position visible from the transmitting portion 9111 so as to directly irradiate the outside with light. Further, as described with reference to FIG. 278, since the light diffusing portion is provided on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112, the light is diffused and softened by arranging the light emitting body 9301b on the back side of the non-transmitting portion 9112. It is possible to emit light with light.

In this way, the position of the light emitting body 9301a may be determined according to the type of the accessory, and by selecting the light emitting body 9301 to emit light, it is possible to switch the light emitting mode with one accessory. Specifically, when it is desired to make the entire accessory emit light strongly, only the light emitting body 9301a or all the light emitting bodies 9301 may be made to emit light, and when it is desired to make it emit light with soft light, only the light emitting body 9301b is made to emit light to diffuse the light. Just do it.

Further, the transmittance of the transmissive portion 9111 may be adjusted so that the light emitting body 9301a is slightly difficult to see without making it completely colorless and transparent. For example, the transmittance of the transmitting portion 9111 may be slightly lowered (colored transparent, for example, light blue) to make it difficult to see the inside, or the surface of the transmitting portion 9111 may be processed (for example, textured) to diffuse light. In this way, the inside may be made difficult to see. With such a configuration, the light emitting body itself becomes difficult to see, but it is possible to emit light more strongly than when it is arranged on the back side of the non-transmissive portion 9112. Further, since the degree of freedom in the position of the light emitter 9301 is increased, the degree of freedom in design is increased and the development efficiency can be improved.

Further, the character accessory substrate 9120 itself may not be a direct decorative element, but may indirectly enhance the effect. For example, when the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is white, it is possible to increase the reflectance even when the arranged light emitting body 9301 is not lit, and when the light emitting body 9301 is lit, it is possible to increase the reflectance. Of course, by reflecting the light from the outside, it is possible to prevent the inside of the character accessory 9100 from becoming too dark.

Further, since the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120 is white, the character color of the character accessory 9100 can be recognized as white as a feature when the characters are turned off. In this case, if a full-color LED (R, G, B color LED) is used for the light emitting body 9301, the character color can be expressed as various colors, but the light from the light emitting body 9301 and the back side of the non-transmitting portion 9112 side. By overlapping and fusing the light reflected (diffused) from the light diffusing part provided in the above and the light reflected from the surface of the substrate, it is possible to perform a fantastic effect that cannot be expressed by a single type of light emitting body 9301. can. At this time, various effects can be realized without using a plurality of types of light emitters 9301, so that the cost can be reduced.

As described above, in the character accessory of the present embodiment, the color of the substrate and the mounted electronic components are used as decorative elements so that the player can see them, so that the substrate is hidden. Since there is no need to do so, the degree of freedom in design can be improved. Further, the electronic component that does not serve as a decorative element may be arranged on the back surface side of the substrate, and by arranging the electronic component other than the light emitting body such as an LED on the back surface side, only the color of the substrate may be arranged as the decorative element.

[16-2-5. Base member]
The base member 9130 has the same shape as the cover member 9110 when viewed from the front at the time of attachment. The peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are brought into contact with each other and fixed by a mounting member (not shown). At this time, the character accessory substrate 9120 may be fixed to the cover member 9110 or the base member 9130, or the character accessory substrate 9120 may be accommodated in a space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 without being fixed. You may try to do it. The wiring for transmitting a signal or supplying electric power to the character accessory board 9120 is not shown. For example, a hole for wiring is provided in the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the base member 9130 and the cover member 9110. It may be formed.

It should be noted that the cover member 9110 may be provided with a mounting portion so as to be directly mounted on the game board 5 without using the base member 9130. In this case, the character accessory substrate 9120 is attached to the cover member 9110.

[16-3. Modification example of character accessory 1]
Subsequently, the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 does not completely resemble the shape of the character accessory 9100, and the outer edge of the character accessory substrate 9120 matches the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110. The case where it is not performed will be described. In this case, since the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged on the entire character accessory 9100, the light guide member 9140 is arranged between the cover member 9110 and the character accessory substrate 9120, and the light emitting body is diffused by diffusing the light. The shortage of the amount of light in the portion where the 9301 is not arranged is compensated. The cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 are the same as those described above.

FIG. 282 is a diagram showing an example of a light guide member 9140 that diffuses light from a light emitting body 9301 in the character accessory 9100 of the present embodiment. The light guide member 9140 is surrounded by a peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 in the same manner as the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 described above in order to diffuse light over the entire back surface side of the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100. The shape is similar to the shape of the character accessory 9100 according to the outer shape of the space.

FIG. 283 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 1 of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 284 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 1 of the present embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120. The configuration other than the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 is the same as that of the above-described embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 283 and 284, the character accessory substrate 9120 is formed with a cutout portion 9122 in which a part of the outer shape of the space surrounded by the peripheral wall portion 9113 of the cover member 9110 is missing. Further, a mounting hole 9121 for fixing to the base member 9130 is formed in the central portion of the character accessory substrate 9120. As shown in FIG. 284, the attachment portion of the cover member 9110 is attached to the base member 9130 through the attachment hole 9121.

Similarly, the light guide member 9140 is also formed with a mounting hole so that the mounting portion of the base member 9130 can be inserted therethrough. If the proportion of the cutout portion 9122 is small and the position of the substrate does not shift, the cover member 9110 and the base member 9130 may be sandwiched and fixed without providing a mounting configuration.

FIG. 285 is a diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the light emitting body 9301 and the transmissive portion 9111 and the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the cover member 9110 in the character accessory 9100 of the modified example of the present embodiment. In this modification, since the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged in the cutout portion 9122, the entire character accessory 9100 is made to emit light by guiding the light by the light guide member 9140. At this time, a light diffusing portion may be provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 to assist the light guide member 9140.

Therefore, in the character accessory 9100 of this modification, a portion to be decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 and a notch portion 9122 are formed by using the color of the character accessory substrate 9120, electronic parts, and the like as decorative elements. Therefore, there will be a mixture of parts that are not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120. At this time, the decorative effect can be maintained by performing light decoration by the light diffusing portion provided on the back surface side of the non-transmissive portion 9112 of the light guide member 9140 and the cover member 9110.

As described in this modification, the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 does not have to be similar to that of the character accessory 9100, and the portion not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120 includes a light guide member 9140, a light diffusing portion, and the like. The reduction of the decoration effect may be suppressed by providing the light decoration. Further, the reduction of the decorative effect may be suppressed by making the color of the base member 9130 the same as the specific color of the character accessory substrate 9120. This makes it possible to make the shape of the character accessory substrate 9120 a relatively simple shape without making it a complicated shape, and by increasing the degree of freedom in the size of the substrate, the manufacturing cost such as processing of the substrate can be reduced. The increase can be suppressed.

Further, instead of using the base member 9130, the light emitting decorative portion arranged on the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 allows the light from the decorative portion to be transmitted through the notch 9122 to produce the effect. good. For example, when the character accessory 9100 is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 as in the present embodiment, the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 and the character combination are displayed by displaying an image in the upper right part of the screen. An effect that is integrated with the light emission effect by the object 9100 may be executed. Further, the same effect can be performed by using a transparent member for the base member 9130. An example using the display of the liquid crystal display device 1600 will be described in more detail in Modification 2.

[16-4. Modification example of character character 2]
In the first modification, the notch 9122 is formed in a part of the substrate, but in the second modification, an example in which the above-mentioned character accessory substrate 9120 is about half the size of the character accessory 9100 will be described. Further, the cover member 9110 is configured to directly attach the game board 5 without using the base member 9130, and the configuration of the character accessory 9100 in this modification is the cover member 9110, the character accessory substrate 9120, and the light guide. It is composed of members 9140.

In this modified example, as in the modified example 1, the light guide member 9140 guides light to a portion where the light emitting body 9301 cannot be arranged to perform light decoration. Further, in this modification, since the base member 9130 is not provided, if a light emitting body is provided on the back surface side of the character accessory 9100, the light of the light emitting body can be transmitted.

FIG. 286 is a diagram showing the front side of the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 2 of the present embodiment, showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 and the light guide member 9140 are overlapped with each other. There is. Further, FIG. 287 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory substrate 9120 is housed in the cover member 9110 of the character accessory 9100 of the modification 2 of the present embodiment, and shows the back surface side of the character accessory substrate 9120.

As shown in FIGS. 286 and 287, the character accessory substrate 9120 is configured to occupy about the upper half of the character accessory 9100. Therefore, when the character accessory 9100 of this modification is attached to the game board 5, the upper half is decorated with a specific color colored on the character accessory substrate 9120, but the lower half is not decorated by the character accessory substrate 9120. It becomes. On the other hand, since the lower half of the character accessory 9100 is transparent from the transparent portion 9111, the back surface side of the character accessory 9100 may be set to a specific color to suppress a sense of discomfort.

Further, different effects may be executed in the upper and lower regions. For example, in the case of a character accessory in which characters are written in two stages, a character accessory substrate 9120 is arranged on the upper stage side, and a light emitting body is arranged on the back surface side on the lower stage side to perform different effects in the upper stage and the lower stage. Further, if this accessory is movable, it is possible to perform different effects for each stop position by arranging different light emitters for each stop position on the back surface side.

Further, the light emitting body may be not only an LED or a lamp but also a liquid crystal display device 1600 as described above. For example, an LED is arranged as a light emitting body on the upper part of the game board 5 and the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600 is arranged. When the light is moved downward to, the effect can be executed by transmitting light from the lower part of the accessory by the image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600.

As the image to be displayed on the back side of the character accessory 9100, regardless of the transparent portion 9111 and the non-transparent portion 9112, the same color (character combination) imitating the character accessory 9100 including the lower half (notch portion in the modified example 1) is included. It is preferable to display an image having the same shape as the specific color for the portion where the object substrate 9120 is shown). This is because the image is displayed even when the character accessory 9100 has some trouble, so that the game can be advanced without giving the player anxiety due to the trouble.

With the above configuration, it is possible to realize a plurality of types of production with one character, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 288, a part of the liquid crystal display device 1600 can be visually recognized by the player via the character accessory 9100. Therefore, in addition to the light guided by the light guide member 9140, the light from the image (video) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1600 is displayed from the back surface side of the character accessory 9100, and the light emission effect by the character accessory substrate 9120. And, it becomes possible to execute the display effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 in cooperation with each other. With this configuration, the lower side portion of the character accessory substrate 9120 becomes a boundary, and it can be an element constituting the decoration.

FIG. 288 is a diagram showing a state in which the character accessory 9100 of the second modification of the present embodiment is attached to the game board 5. The upper part of the character accessory 9100 diffuses the light from the light emitter 9301 mounted on the character accessory substrate 9120 by the light guide member 9140. On the other hand, the lower part of the character accessory 9100 diffuses the light (displayed image) output by the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the light guide member 9140. At this time, by fusing the light from the light emitting body 9301 and the light from the liquid crystal display device 1600, it is possible to execute an effect in which the effect by the character accessory 9100 and the effect by the liquid crystal display device 1600 are integrated.

It should be noted that an effect other than the character accessory 9100 and the liquid crystal display device 1600 may be fused. For example, when the game board 5 is made of a transparent member and a light emitting body is arranged on the back surface side or a sticker or the like is attached to enhance the decorative effect, the game board 5 is visually recognized and combined through the transparent portion of the accessory. Can further enhance the decorative effect.

[16-5. Snowman character]
Next, the snowman character 9200 will be described. As shown in FIG. 276, the snowman accessory 9200 is an accessory (decorative body) that imitates a snowman, and has a spherical head resting on a spherical body slightly larger than the head. It has become. Furthermore, a bucket-shaped hat is placed on the head in an inclined state. The hat portion is made of a colored member, and in the present embodiment, the light emitted from a light emitting body such as an LED provided inside can be transmitted.

FIG. 289 is a diagram showing a cross-sectional view of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. The snowman accessory 9200 accommodates a substrate (snowman substrate 9220) on which electronic components including a light emitting body 9301 such as an LED are mounted inside a cover member 9210 divided into a front side cover member 9210a and a back surface side cover member 9210b. Will be done.

The snowman accessory 9200 is used in an effect executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and for example, an effect such as causing an internal illuminant to emit light according to the expected degree of symbol variation is executed. Further, since the cover member 9210 is made of a material capable of transmitting light and is arranged on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 1600, an effect of transmitting or reflecting the displayed image is executed. May be good. Hereinafter, each configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be specifically described.

FIG. 290 is a view of the front side cover member 9210a of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment as viewed from the back side. FIG. 291 is a diagram showing a back surface side cover member 9210b of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. FIG. 292 is a diagram showing the front side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 293 is a diagram showing the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, back side cover member 9210b) of the snowman accessory 9200 is substantially colorless and transparent except for a part, and has transparency, and the substrate (snowman substrate 9220) housed inside from the front. ) Can be visually recognized on the surface side.

As shown in FIGS. 292 and 293, the snowman substrate 9220 has the shape of the snowman accessory 9200, and has a very design-rich shape. Further, the snowman substrate 9220 is coated with a resist colored in a predetermined color (specific color) in the same manner as the character accessory substrate 9120. In addition, the configuration of the substrate itself is the same as that of the character accessory substrate 9120, and various electronic components are mounted on the front surface side and the back surface side. As for the code of the electronic component on the substrate, the same code as that of the character accessory 9100 is used.

In the present embodiment, the shape of the snowman substrate 9220 is such that the inside of the snowman accessory 9200 is occupied so that the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 cannot be visually recognized from the front. As a result, the entire snowman accessory 9200 is recognized as a specific color colored on the snowman substrate 9220, and the color of the entire accessory is determined. On the other hand, a notch or a hole may be formed in a part of the snowman substrate 9220 so that the back surface side of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized. At this time, an image may be displayed by the liquid crystal display device 1600 from behind the snowman accessory 9200, or a decorative body such as a light emitting body may be arranged to increase the variety of effects.

Further, the snowman accessory 9200 has a three-dimensional shape, and the player can visually recognize the side surface of the snowman accessory 9200 by slightly tilting the line of sight from the front. Since the cover member 9210 has transparency, the player can visually recognize the snowman substrate 9220 beyond the side surface to the back surface. In the character accessory 9100, which is configured so that the substrate cannot be visually recognized from the back surface side, it is not necessary to set the back side of the substrate to a specific color, but the snowman substrate 9220 is also colored to a specific color on the back surface side. As a result, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the decorative effect even when the player approaches the liquid crystal display device 1600 and visually recognizes the snowman accessory 9200 from the side. As a result, the degree of freedom in the form of the accessory can be improved, the effect of the production can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Since the player can visually recognize the snowman substrate 9220 beyond the side surface to the back surface, the light emitter 9301 may be arranged on the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 to make the entire snowman accessory 9200 emit light from the back surface side. .. Further, by coloring the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 in a color different from that of the front surface side, it is possible to give the player an impression different from that when only the light emitting body 9301 on the front surface side emits light. The same effect can be expected by arranging the illuminants 9301 having a common and different emission color of the snowman substrate 9220. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the light emitting mode of the accessory and enhance the fun of the game.

As shown in FIG. 289, an opening is provided in the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200, and a cord for transmitting electric power or a signal is inserted into the snowman substrate 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200. There is. Various effects are executed by causing the light emitting body (LED) 9301 arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 to emit light by the supplied electric power and the signal from the effect control device.

Further, as described above, the hat portion of the snowman accessory 9200 is colored (for example, red) and has transparency. The transparency of the hat portion is lower than that of other parts of the snowman accessory 9200, making it difficult to see the inside. Therefore, the connector 9304 arranged on the snowman board 9220 and the cord connected to the connector 9304 are arranged on the hat portion to make it difficult for the player to see.

The cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a) is formed with a transparent portion B9211b having different transmittance at a portion corresponding to the eyes of a snowman when viewed from the front by the player. The transmissive portion other than the hat portion is the transmissive portion A9211a. In the present embodiment, the transmission portion B9211b is configured so that the inside of the snowman accessory 9200 can be visually recognized in a blurred state with aberrations remaining like a soft focus lens. Therefore, the outline of the electronic component arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 housed inside the snowman accessory 9200 can be blurred and visually recognized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 292, in the present embodiment, electronic components (resistors 9302) are integrated and arranged on the snowman substrate 9220 corresponding to the portion corresponding to the eyes of the snowman accessory 9200. The resistor 9302 is a black electronic component and is densely arranged in a circular shape. When the player sees the snowman accessory 9200 during the game, the outline of the electronic component appears to be blurred because it is visually recognized through the transparent portion B9211b. As a result, the electronic components (resistors 9302) that are aggregated and arranged on the substrate are recognized as the black eyes of the snowman, and can form a decorative element.

In addition, the part numbers of electronic parts (part numbers silk-printed such as "R1") are silk-printed in the same color as white, which is the same specific color as the resist of the snowball substrate 9220, so that they can be identified. There is. In the present embodiment, since the resistors 9302 are printed densely, they can be identified and function as reflecting light due to the dense printing.

In the present embodiment, the part number of the electronic component (the part number silk-printed such as "R1") may be silk-printed in black in the same manner as the resistor. As described above, due to the effect of the lens, the resistor 9302 can be recognized as a snowman's eye.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 293, an electronic component (IC9303) that does not form a decorative element on the back surface side of the snowman substrate 9220 and on the outer side when the snowman accessory 9200 is installed on the game board 5. Etc.) are arranged. As a result, the electronic component having a low decorative effect or a possibility of reducing the decorative effect is placed at a position where it is difficult for the player to see it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game due to the reduced effect. .. At this time, by directing the snowman substrate 9220 toward the center side of the gaming machine, it is possible to make the electronic components arranged on the back surface side more difficult to see.

Here, the configuration of the snowman accessory 9200 will be described focusing on the cover member 9210 (front side cover member 9210a, rear surface side cover member 9210b). The front side cover member 9210a and the rear side cover member 9210b do not have to be evenly divided in the front-rear direction. good. Hereinafter, an example in which one (inside) of the front side cover member 9210a is formed beyond the snowman substrate 9220 toward the rear will be described with reference to FIG. 294.

FIG. 294 is a view of the horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment as viewed from above. As shown in FIG. 294, when the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a is formed so as to extend rearward beyond the side surface of the snowman substrate 9220, most of the appearance of the snowman accessory 9200 visible to the player. Will be composed of the front surface side cover member 9210a. As a result, the attachment location of the front cover member 9210a to the back cover member 9210b (the joint between the front cover member 9210a and the rear cover member 9210b) is on the back side behind the snowman substrate 9220, which is highly decorative. It is possible to realize a cover.

Further, since the colorless and transparent (or substantially colorless and transparent) front side cover member 9210a extends to the rear of the snowman substrate 9220, the snowman substrate 9220 colored in white (specific color) is a snowman accessory 9200 not only on the front surface but also on the back surface. Is decorated in white. It is desirable that both sides are white as in the present embodiment, but since the player mainly sees from the front side, only the front side may be white.

Further, FIG. 294 shows a mode in which only the inner cover member of the front side cover member 9210a extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220, but depending on the decoration of the accessory to be adopted, only the outer side may extend rearward of the substrate. A mode may be adopted in which both the inside and the outside extend to the rear of the substrate.

Further, a configuration for attaching each configuration of the accessory to each other and attaching the accessory to the game board will be described. In the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 294, the snowman substrate 9220 is attached by the substrate mounting portion 9213 and the mounting member 9214 formed on the back surface side cover member 9210b. At this time, it is preferable that the board mounting portion 9213 is provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200, which is difficult for the player to see. Further, the front surface side cover member 9210a is attached to the back surface side cover member 9210b by a cover attachment portion (not shown), but it is preferable that the cover attachment portion is provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200 as in the substrate attachment portion 9213. Further, it is preferable that the back surface side cover member 9210b is attached to the structure of the game board 5 (not shown), and the attachment portion with the structure is provided on the outside of the snowman accessory 9200, similarly to the board attachment portion 9213. In this way, by arranging the attachment portion of each configuration of the accessory and the attachment portion of the accessory and the game board 5 on the outside which is difficult for the player to see, it is possible to prevent the decorativeness of the accessory from being hindered. Can be done.

It should be noted that not only the outside of the accessory, but also a portion that is difficult for the player to see (for example, a portion made of a colored member (a hat portion in the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment), a lens cut for decoration, etc.) provide visibility. By providing a mounting portion at a place where it is lowered, a portion of the shape of the accessory that bends (the boundary portion between the head and the body portion in the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment), etc. Can be suppressed from being impaired.

In the example shown in FIG. 294, the front side cover member 9210a and the back side cover member 9210b are used to form the snowman accessory 9200. However, as shown in FIG. 295, one cover member 9210 forms the shape of the snowman. You may do so. FIG. 295 is a view of a horizontal cross section of the snowman accessory 9200 in the modified example of the present embodiment as viewed from above.

In the modified example shown in FIG. 295, the cover member 9210 and the snowman substrate 9220 are attached to the game board 5 via the base body 9230. In this modified example as well, as in the example shown in FIG. 294, it is preferable that both sides of the snowman substrate 9220 are white, but only the front surface side may be white.

In this modification, the inner cover member is provided not only extending rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 but also extending rearward beyond the base body 9230, so that not only the snowman substrate 9220 but also the base body 9230 is provided by the player. Will be visible from. Therefore, in this modification, the base body 9230 can also be configured as a decoration by using a specific color (for example, white) similar to that of the snowman substrate 9220. Regarding the attachment of the cover member 9210 and the snowman board 9220 to the base body 9230, as described above, the attachment portion is provided in a place where it is difficult for the player to see, and the attachment portion is attached by the attachment member or the like. It is possible to prevent the decorativeness from being impaired.

In this modification, only the inner side of the cover member 9210 extends rearward beyond the snowman substrate 9220 and the base body 9230, but the outer side of the cover member depends on the decoration of the accessory to be adopted. Only the mode extending to the rear of the substrate or the base body or the mode extending to the rear of the substrate or the base body may be adopted both inside and outside.

[16-6. Effect, etc.]
Generally, an electronic circuit board has a raw board of a basic size, and the cost is greatly affected by how many boards can be taken from one raw board based on this raw board. Although it is designed to have a square shape in a very simple way, the snowman substrate 9220 of the snowman accessory 9200 of the present embodiment has a very well-designed shape. In other words, it can be said that all the elements that make up the substrate, from the resist and the color of the substrate to the electronic components, are used as the decorative performance of the accessory.

It should be noted that the character accessory substrate 9120 of the character accessory described above has a substantially square shape. Compared to the snowman board 9220, it has a shape that fits into a simple design, but it can be said that the cover body that covers the board has more functions to have a design.

As described above, the substrate in which an electronic circuit composed of not only a light emitting body (LED) but also an electronic component for controlling the light emitting body is formed inside the accessory that has been seen in recent years has almost the shape of the accessory. It is also provided. Wiring that electrically connects the electronic components that make up the electronic circuit is drawn on the substrate on which the electronic circuit is formed, and a protective film (protective film) is applied to the surface of the substrate to prevent oxidation of the wiring. It is covered with a resist).

Therefore, we focused on the color of the resist, which is the protective film, that is, the color of the substrate, as a color of the accessory. Even so, when the transmissive portion is provided on the front side, there is a risk that the decorative effect as an accessory may be reduced by visually recognizing the electronic components mounted on the substrate from the transmissive portion. As illustrated in the object 9100 and the snowman accessory 9200, the color of the board, all the elements that make up the board, and the mounted electronic components themselves are also used as decorative elements to prevent the reduction of the decorative effect and play the game. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the.

[17. Production control by scheduler]
In the gaming machine, various effects are performed during the game by sound output, lighting / blinking of lamps, display of images, etc., and various elaborate effects are being attempted in order to enhance the interest of the game. As described above, the gaming machine controls a plurality of types of effect devices by the peripheral control board 1510, which is an effect control device, based on the command output from the main control board 1310, and executes the effect according to the game state of the game. do. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are connected by a unidirectional signal line that transmits signals in one direction.

In order to execute a plurality of types of effects in cooperation with each other, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 7-313649 discloses a control technique for realizing various effects displays by using scenario data. The scenario data is data in which the symbols to be displayed on the screen are sequentially defined in chronological order. By preparing a control process that realizes a general-purpose process for sequentially displaying designated symbols according to this scenario data, there is an advantage that a wide variety of effect displays can be easily realized simply by switching the scenario data. It is also possible to include the BGM designation in the scenario data. In this case, by outputting the designated BGM by the sound source IC, it is possible to output the sound corresponding to the display screen.

However, in gaming machines, more elaborate production is required. With the above-mentioned conventional technique, it has been difficult to perform various effects by interlocking a plurality of effect devices such as audio output, lamp lighting, and image display. For example, it was not possible to change the BGM while executing the image display according to the scenario data. Further, when the sound effect is output in response to the user's operation during the image display, the image display and the BGM output are stopped and the sound effect is output. When the output of the sound effect was completed, the BGM and the image display were restarted from the beginning regardless of how far the BGM was played, which gave a sense of discomfort. The lighting and blinking of the lamps are controlled by individual programs according to the game state, regardless of the content of the image display, and it is difficult to realize a wide variety of lighting and blinking linked to the image display. there were.

Therefore, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-061147 describes production data corresponding to higher-level data for realizing integrated control over different types of production devices, and scheduler data corresponding to lower-level data for controlling each production device. A technique for controlling a plurality of types of effect devices by using different types of data hierarchically is disclosed. This technique has a general-purpose function of analyzing each of the production data and the scheduler data and executing the processing specified by each data, and is configured so as not to depend on the production content. Therefore, it can be shared between different types of gaming machines, and there is an advantage that various effects can be easily realized by changing the effect data and the scheduler data.

The effect data and the scheduler data are composed of functions and parameters. A function is a function to be executed by a module corresponding to each data, and a parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided. The effect data is composed of functions such as executing each scheduler data at a predetermined timing and controlling the overall flow of a series of effects. Further, the scheduler data is composed of a function that issues an execution instruction (liquid crystal command, voice operation number, lamp operation number, etc.) to a module (effect module, sound module, lamp module, etc.) that controls each effect device.

[17-1. Software configuration in the peripheral control unit]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 and executes the production of the game. In the present embodiment, each configuration for executing the effect based on the received main command is configured as software, but it may be configured as hardware. Hereinafter, the configuration and outline of the functions for realizing the effect control in the present embodiment will be described, and then the details of each function will be described.

[17-1-1. Configuration and outline of each function]
FIG. 296 is a functional block diagram illustrating the configuration and outline of the function for executing the effect control in the present embodiment. The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an input command analysis unit 5010, an effect control unit 5020, a layer data storage unit 5030, an effect block control unit 5040, an effect block data storage unit 5050, a scheduler execution unit 5060, a scheduler data storage unit 5070, and an output module unit. It is equipped with 5080.

The input command analysis unit 5010 receives the input of the main command and analyzes the input command. The effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines the block control information (effect block number). Explaining the layers, in the present embodiment, layers are set for each effect category such as a background and characters, each effect element is drawn on each layer, and these layers are superimposed and displayed to display an image on a liquid crystal display device. Is output. As a result, for example, if only the background is different and the display (operation) of the character is the same, it is possible to standardize the layers for displaying the character. Layers are similarly set for other production devices such as lamps and drive devices. Further, as the layer of these effect devices, a corresponding layer is set with reference to the layer of the liquid crystal display device. For example, when a layer (notice layer) for performing a notice effect is set in the liquid crystal display device, the notice layer is also set for the effect devices such as the lamp, the drive device, and the sound, and the notice effect is performed. The production device for this purpose is controlled. As a result, the capacity of the production data (scheduler data) can be reduced and the development efficiency can be improved. The layer data storage unit 5030 stores information for specifying the effect for each layer.

The effect block control unit 5040 receives the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020, and acquires the effect block data corresponding to the effect block number from the effect block data storage unit 5050. The effect block data is information for specifying scheduler data that specifies the control content of each effect device and specifying the timing for executing the scheduler data, and defines the configuration of the entire series of effects. Is. The scheduler data stores a plurality of functions in the order in which they should be executed among a plurality of processes required according to the effect device in order to control the effect in each effect device. It is data. The scheduler data includes drawing scheduler data for displaying a background, a character, an identification symbol, and the like on a liquid crystal display device, and sub-effect scheduler data for operating each effect device of a lamp, a sound, and a motor. The effect block data includes "liquid crystal effect block data" for executing an effect to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device, "liquid crystal symbol block data" for variablely displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device, and sound (sound). There are three types, "sub-effect block data" for controlling lamps, accessories, and the like. The effect block control unit 5040 executes control according to the type of effect block data, and passes the scheduler control information to the scheduler execution unit 5060. At least the scheduler to be started and the scheduler data to be executed by the scheduler are specified in the scheduler control information. For example, a scheduler number for specifying the scheduler to be started (for example, an identifier having a one-to-one correspondence with the scheduler) and The effect number for specifying the scheduler data to be executed by the scheduler (for example, the storage destination address information of the scheduler data to be executed or the information for identifying it) is included. The scheduler control information may include not only the identification information of the scheduler and the scheduler data but also other information as necessary.

In the present embodiment, the effect block control unit 5040 starts the scheduler, but a scheduler start unit different from the effect block control unit 5040 may be provided, and the start management of each scheduler may be performed by this scheduler start unit. ..

The scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the scheduler data specified by the effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070. Then, the scheduler data is executed, the functions are called in the order set in the scheduler data, and the processing corresponding to the functions is executed. When the function relates to the output module unit 5080 (for example, HPLAY or the like), the parameter information set corresponding to the function is passed to the output module unit 5080 corresponding to the function as the effect device control information. Although the details of the scheduler execution unit 5060 will be described later, there are a plurality of dedicated scheduler execution units 5060 depending on the type of effect device to be controlled (effect type, specifically, liquid crystal display, sound, lamp, accessory, etc.). Includes a general-purpose scheduler execution unit 5060 that can be used according to the effect type of.

The output module unit 5080 receives the effect device control information from the scheduler execution unit 5060, and transmits the effect device drive data to each effect device based on the effect device control information. Each effect device executes an operation based on the effect device drive data. In the output module unit 5080, the effect control unit 5020 is configured by software by a CPU (peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided in the effect control device (peripheral control board 1530), and the CPU executes another computer program. It is realized by. It should be noted that it may be configured as hardware by being configured by the effect control unit 5020 and another arithmetic circuit.

Further explaining the output module unit 5080, for example, when the function is HPLAY, the information specified in the parameters of the HPLAY (for example, the effect pattern of the lamp) is provided to the lamp output module (lamp module 5600) as the output module unit 5080. Information (data table) for identification, which corresponds to the effect device control information) is passed. The lamp output module 5600 selects (determines / generates) the effect device drive data for controlling the lighting of the lamp based on the data table in order to specify the effect pattern, and selects it as the lamp output buffer (lamp data output buffer). Stores the (determined / generated) effect device drive data. When the effect device drive data is stored in the lamp output buffer, the transmission unit (serial control IC 5150) outputs a drive signal to the decorative substrate on which the lamp is mounted.

Similarly, in the case of sound output, the parameter (effect device control information) specified by the sound function is passed to the sound output module (sound module 5500). Then, the sound output module selects (determines) sound source drive data (corresponding to effect device drive data such as sound number, volume, CH number, panpot setting, stereo setting information, etc.) for controlling sound output. Then, the selected (determined) sound source drive data is set in the sound output buffer (sound data output buffer 5125). When the sound source drive data is stored in the sound output buffer, the sound source drive data is output to the liquid crystal and the sound control unit (liquid crystal display control unit) 1512 by the sound transmission means. The same applies to the drive device. The motor output module (drive device module 5700) determines the drive data (effect device drive data), and the motor output buffer (motor data output buffer 5140) transmits the transmitter (serial control). The drive signal is output to the motor (drive device) by the IC5150).

Here, with reference to FIG. 296, an outline of the flow from receiving the main command (main board command) from the main control board 1310 to executing the effect will be described. First, the input command analysis unit 5010 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the input command analysis unit 5010 analyzes the main command.

When performing effect control based on the analysis result of the main command, the effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 and determines block control information (effect block number) for each layer. Further, the effect block control unit 5040 specifies the effect block data from the effect block data storage unit 5050 based on the block control information (effect block number) designated by the effect control unit 5020. Subsequently, the scheduler data specified by the specified effect block data is passed to the corresponding scheduler execution unit 5060 with the scheduler control information that can be specified, and the scheduler data is executed by the scheduler execution unit 5060.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the scheduler control information from the effect block control unit 5040, it executes the function included in the designated scheduler data and transmits the effect device control information for controlling the effect device to the output module unit 5080. do. The output module unit 5080 outputs the effect device drive data to the effect device based on the function and the designated parameter, and causes each effect device to execute the designated operation.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the effect block control unit 5040 controls the entire series of effects based on the effect block data, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 is based on the scheduler data specified in the effect block data. Controls the execution of individual effects that make up a series of effects.

Here, the basic configuration of the effect block data, the scheduler data, and the effect device drive data will be described with reference to FIG. 297. FIG. 297 is a schematic diagram for simply showing an example of the effect block data, the scheduler data, and the effect device drive data in the present embodiment, where (A) is the effect block data, (B) is the scheduler data, and (C). ) Indicates the effect device drive data.

As shown in (A), the effect block data specifies the scheduler data that specifies the control content of each effect device and the scheduler for executing the scheduler data. In addition, the execution timing of the scheduler data is specified by using a NOP function (described later) that waits for a specified period.

The first line "LMP_SCH01" is the scheduler data to be started, and "starting 01" is the scheduler data executed by "LMP_SCH01". Similarly, the third line indicates that the scheduler data "initialization 01" is executed by the scheduler "LMP_SCH02", and the fifth line indicates that the scheduler data "demo 01" is executed by the scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

As shown in (B), the scheduler data stores functions (for example, "KPLAY") that instruct a predetermined process to be executed in order to control each effect device, in an order to be executed. Although "KPLAY" will be described later, it is a function for controlling the lamp, and the lamp is turned on according to the designated gradation parameter "PTA_LMP_INI". In the scheduler data, functions other than the functions (KPLAY, COMMAND0, NOP, STOP) described in the schematic diagram of (B) are also defined, and other functions will be described later.

(C) shows the data for operating the effect device, the left column is the timing for outputting the effect device drive data to the effect device (output maintenance time), and the middle column is the effect device for operating the effect device. It is the drive data, and the right column shows the operation contents of the effect device drive data. The right column is a so-called comment line, which is ignored at the time of execution. The values in the left column correspond to the switching timing of the corresponding operation and the output maintenance time of the effect device drive data.

Explaining the above-mentioned "KPLAY" as an example, the lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data (lighting pattern) of an operation mode corresponding to the designated gradation parameter "PTA_LMP_INI", and is designated at a predetermined timing. Output to the lamp. The effect device drive data includes data necessary for other operations such as designation of a duration in addition to the operation mode. As an operation mode, in the case of a lamp, there are data on the light emission pattern of various light emitting means provided on the game board or the game frame, and data on the gradation value. Further, in the case of a drive device, when driving a stepping motor, there is an excitation pattern of the stepping motor and an excitation period for each step. In the case of a solenoid, drive data for turning the solenoid on / off and ON / There is an OFF drive time. Further, in the case of sound, data (sound number, CH number, volume, panpot, stereo / monaural setting) set for the sound source IC corresponding to the output sound source data is applicable.

[17-1-2. Module configuration]
Subsequently, the details of the configuration of the module or the like that realizes each of the above-mentioned functions will be described. FIG. 298 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a module or the like in the peripheral control unit 1511 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each configuration is configured as software by a computer program executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, but a part or all of the configuration may be configured as hardware.

In the present embodiment, the system module 5100 for driving each effect device is processed by the peripheral control unit 1511. The system module 5100 includes a command analysis module 5200, a liquid crystal module 5400, a sound module 5500, a lamp module 5600, a drive device module 5700, and the like as modules related to the effect.

The system module 5100 includes a main command buffer 5110, a liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, a sound data output buffer 5125, a lamp data output buffer 5130, a motor data output buffer 5140, and a serial control IC 5150. The main command buffer 5110 receives the main command transmitted from the main control board 1310 and passes it to the command analysis module 5200. In this embodiment, the main command is 3-byte one-set information, which is a command status value, a command mode value, a command status and a checksum value of a mode value in order from the first byte, and is divided into three times of 8 bits each. The main command buffer 5110 that is output receives this signal, evaluates the checksum value, and if the received command is not determined to be correct, discards the received command and sets it as the correct command. If it is determined, it is handed over to the command analysis module 5200.

The main command includes information indicating the content related to the production among the gaming state and the operating state of the gaming machine. For example, the main command can include whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the starting winning opening, the result of the special figure lottery, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and the like. Further, when the present embodiment is applied to a slot machine, sensor output such as door opening, operation of a start lever and a stop button, rotation and stop of a reel, success / failure of a combination at the time of stop, and the like can be mentioned. The commands listed here are examples, and various commands can be included depending on the model of the gaming machine and the content of the production.

The command analysis module 5200 is included in the input command analysis unit 5010, analyzes the contents of the main command, and determines whether or not the command operates the effect device. If it is determined to be a command to operate the effect device, it is handed over to the effect control unit 5020. The command for operating the effect device includes a command related to the effect of the game itself, as well as a command for outputting an alarm sound or turning on a lamp when an abnormality is detected.

As for the information passed from the command analysis module 5200 to the effect control unit 5020, the command transmitted from the main control board 1310 may be passed as it is (for example, "1001H"), or the effect is supported based on the analysis result. It may be predetermined information (value) such as identification information specified by the above (for example, a number (“10” for fluctuation pattern 1 and “500” for magnetic error).

When the command analysis module 5200 determines the consistency of the received command and determines that it is abnormal (for example, the command is not specified, a lost symbol is specified despite the hit fluctuation pattern, or a big hit. When a command related to the command and a command related to the start of fluctuation are received at the same time), the reception of the command determined to be abnormal is discarded or invalidated to prevent an abnormality from occurring without passing the identification information to the effect control unit 5020. Has a role to play.

The effect control unit 5020 identifies the layer to be controlled by the effect from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command. Then, the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to the specified layer is acquired (determined), and the block data number corresponding to each layer is transmitted to the effect block control unit 5040.

The effect block control unit 5040 includes a liquid crystal effect block control unit (display device control unit) 5310 and a sub effect block control unit (non-display device control unit) 5320. The liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 determines the control information for executing the effect of displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device. The sub-effect block control unit 5320 determines the control information for executing the sound output, the lighting / blinking of the lamp, the operation of the accessory, and the like.

When the liquid crystal display block number is determined, the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 identifies the liquid crystal display block data corresponding to the effect block number and executes processing based on the liquid crystal display block data. The liquid crystal effect block data is effect block data for executing the liquid crystal display effect, and specifies one or more drawing scheduler data. By executing the drawing scheduler data, the background, characters, identification symbols, and the like are displayed on the liquid crystal display device.

The liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the control (display) target, and executes the drawing scheduler data specified in the block data. The liquid crystal display scheduler execution unit 5060 includes a liquid crystal display 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 for displaying effect elements such as a background and characters, and a liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332 for displaying an identification symbol. ..

The liquid crystal display 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332 are executed in a frame cycle (1f = about 33.334 milliseconds), which is a screen update cycle. The liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 and the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332 drive the drawing scheduler data specified by the liquid crystal effect block data by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (scheduler) for liquid crystal display, and the liquid crystal display by the liquid crystal module 5400. Generate a list command. The liquid crystal display list command is delivered to the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source via the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, and the image data generated based on the delivered command (display list) is output from the VDP to display an image. The data is passed to the effect display device (liquid crystal display device 1600 on the game board side). In the present embodiment, the liquid crystal scheduler execution unit is divided into a liquid crystal display 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 and a liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332, but one liquid crystal display that collectively manages the effect and the display of the symbol. It may be configured as a scheduler execution unit.

The sound source built-in VDP1512a generates display data based on the liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120 and outputs the display data to the effect display device (liquid crystal display device 1600 on the game board side). The display data is generated, for example, by expanding the character data specified by the liquid crystal display list command to the specified position on the frame buffer.

When the effect block number is determined, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 specifies the sub-effect block data corresponding to the effect block number. The sub-effect block data is effect block data for executing each effect of the lamp, sound, and motor, and is a scheduler that executes one or more sub-effect scheduler data and sub-effect scheduler data (scheduler execution units 5333, 5334). ) Is specified. By executing the sub-effect scheduler data, each effect device of the lamp, the sound, and the motor performs the operation defined in advance in the sub-effect scheduler data. The motor may be a drive device such as a solenoid as long as it drives a movable body.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 activates the scheduler execution unit 5060 according to the execution cycle of the various effect devices, and executes the sub-effect scheduler data specified by the sub-effect block data. The scheduler execution unit 5060 for controlling various effect devices includes a sub effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 that controls the effect device at 1 frame intervals and a sub effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 that controls the effect devices at 1 millisecond intervals. included. In this way, by providing the scheduler execution unit according to the execution interval, it is possible to execute the effect according to the configuration of the gaming machine and the required specifications of the effect device. For example, since 1f corresponds to the update interval of drawing, it is possible to synchronize the sound output, the operation of the accessory, and the like with the liquid crystal display. Further, if the detection interval of the sensor is in units of 1 ms, it is possible to quickly respond to a problem in the operation of the accessory. The execution cycle of the sub-effect scheduler execution unit may be a single type of cycle (for example, only one frame or only one millisecond), or another cycle different from one frame other than one millisecond. It may be.

The sub-effect block control unit 5320 executes effect control other than the liquid crystal display. In the present embodiment, for example, three types of effect control: sound output, lamp lighting / blinking, and accessory operation. explain. The effect control by the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 and the sub-effect 1 ms scheduler execution unit 5334 will be described as being the same except for the execution cycle without any particular distinction. The outline of the control according to the type of the effect device will be described below.

First, a case of executing an effect by sound output will be described. The scheduler data for sound output is specified in the sub-effect block data, the scheduler execution unit 5060 for sound output is started for the specified scheduler data, and the scheduler data is executed. Then, when a function for sound output (for example, SPLAY) is executed, the sound module 5500 causes the sound module 5500 to perform sound source drive data (sound source command) such as sound number, volume, CH number, panpot setting, and stereo setting information based on the specified parameters. ) Is generated. A plurality of scheduler execution units 5060 can be activated for each layer. For example, by controlling the output of BGM and the effect sound effect with different schedulers, sound source drive data is generated in parallel, and sounds are generated at the same time. Can be output. Therefore, one of a plurality of activated scheduler execution units 5060 may be used as a scheduler, and one scheduler may process scheduler data related to both one BGM and the effect sound effect. Further, the scheduler data for the BGM and the scheduler data for the effect sound effect may be individually processed by the scheduler for the BGM and the scheduler for the effect sound effect. The sound source built-in VDP1512a reads the sound source data specified by the sound source drive data from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM, and outputs the sound source data from the speaker 921 by the audio data transmission IC.

Next, a case of executing the effect by the lamp will be described. The lamp control scheduler data specified in the sub-effect block data is executed by starting the lamp scheduler. Then, when the lamp control function (for example, HPLAY) is executed, the lamp module 5600 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to start a plurality of schedulers, and it is possible to control a plurality of lamps and layers in parallel.

The lamp module 5600 creates lamp drive data every cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) and outputs the lamp data output buffer 5130. The lamp data output buffer 5130 has a double buffer structure, temporarily stores the lamp drive data generated by the lamp module 5600, and outputs the lamp data output buffer 5130 to the serial control IC 5150. By making the lamp data output buffer 5130 a double buffer, it is possible to simultaneously create and output lamp data in a single cycle. With this configuration, the output of the lamp data is output to the next operation of creating the lamp data in response to the increase in the processing time of the lamp control due to the increase in the number of lamp systems and the superposition of the lamp layers. By setting the cycle, it is sufficient that the processing related to the creation of the lamp data is completed within the processing cycle.

Specifically, when the lamp data output buffer 5130 is composed of the buffer A and the buffer B, for example, if the previously created lamp drive data is stored in the buffer A, the data for the next cycle is stored in the buffer B. Is output, the lamp drive data created last time is output from the buffer A to the serial control IC 5150 by DMA, and each lamp is turned on and blinked. In the next cycle, the buffer is switched, the lamp drive data is output from the lamp module 5600 to the buffer A, and the lamp drive data stored in the buffer B is output to the serial control IC 5150. The case of controlling the lighting / blinking of the LED is the same as that of the lamp, and the description of the control of the lamp can be replaced with the LED unless otherwise specified.

Finally, a case of controlling a driving device (for example, a motor, a solenoid) for operating an accessory will be described. The scheduler data for driving device control is specified in the sub-effect block data, the driving device scheduler (motor scheduler) is started for the specified scheduler data, and the scheduler data is executed. Then, when the drive device control function (for example, MPLAY) is executed, the drive device module 5700 generates lamp drive data based on the specified parameters. As in the case of sound output, it is possible to start a plurality of schedulers, and it is possible to control a plurality of drive devices in parallel.

The drive device module 5700 creates motor drive data for each cycle and outputs the motor drive data to the motor data output buffer 5140. In this embodiment, motor drive data is created and output at a cycle of 1 millisecond. The motor data output buffer 5140 temporarily stores the motor drive data generated by the drive device module 5700 and outputs the motor drive data to the serial control IC 5150. The motor drive data is output from the serial port of the peripheral control MPU1511a regardless of DMA. However, the output of the latch signal for reflecting the motor data in each drive device is not the same timing as the output from the motor data output buffer 5140 to the serial control IC 5150, but the latch signal is output in the next cycle of all motor data transmission. It is outputting. This is because the output timing of the latch signal is after the serial transmission of all motor data is completed. Therefore, as the serial transmission time of the motor data becomes longer, the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed becomes an overhead, and the total processing time for each frame cycle becomes longer. This is because there is not enough. In the present embodiment, the waiting time until the completion of serial transmission is set to 0 by shifting the timing of the latch signal output corresponding to the motor data serial transmission, but a plurality of DMAs can be used depending on the CPU to be used. In this case, the motor drive data is serially transmitted using DMA, and the latch signal is output by the DMA completion interrupt, so that the waiting time until the serial transmission is completed can be set to 0 in the same manner. Further, at the same time as the output of the motor drive data, the effect drive photo information is input to the drive device module 5700 (peripheral control MPU1511a). Each effect-driven photo information is received by serial communication via a parallel serial control IC.

[17-2. Data structure]
In the present embodiment, the scheduler data can adopt various structures. For example, a call function for fetching other scheduler data as a part of the scheduler data may be provided. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, and at the time of executing the call function, once executes other scheduler data specified by the call function, and then continues the processing of the original scheduler data. Will be executed. By doing so, it is possible to utilize general-purpose production contents in various situations in the same way as calling a subroutine in a general program.

This function not only can reduce the load of creating scheduler data, but also has an effect peculiar to a gaming machine as shown below. In the gaming machine, various lottery and the like are performed during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find subtle differences in the content of the production during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various situations by the call function, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. It is possible to prevent the game from being spoiled.

As another configuration, the scheduler data may include a conditional branch function that switches the effect content according to the game state. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sequentially executes the processes specified by the scheduler data, determines the game state based on the main command when executing the conditional branch function, and executes the effect content according to the game state. .. By doing so, it becomes possible to deal with a wide variety of branching game states with one scheduler data. Examples of the gaming state used for conditional branching include the result of a lottery performed during the game and the presence or absence of an operation of a button or the like by the player. In the rotating drum type gaming machine, the stopped state of the rotating reel may be used, and in the pachinko machine, the winning state of the starting winning opening may be used. In addition, conditional branching may be made depending on whether or not an error has occurred during the game.

Various configurations are possible for the content of the effect after the conditional branching. For example, after the conditional branching, the configuration may be completely separated into two or more processes. Further, after performing a predetermined process by conditional branching, the process may be configured to return to the process before branching. According to the latter aspect, for example, after executing a process of temporarily outputting a sound effect when a button is pressed during a game, it is possible to return to the previous effect without discomfort.

As described above, the gaming machine can include various effect devices, and as an example, a display device for displaying an image can be included. As the display device, various devices capable of displaying an image such as a liquid crystal panel, a CRT, an organic EL panel, and a plasma display can be used. The display content of the display device is controlled by the image processing device. The image processing device is a device that develops a bitmap of an image according to a predetermined display command and generates display data for displaying the image on the display device. For example, it can be configured by a combination of a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a character ROM or the like in which a character or the like to be displayed on the screen is prepared by a bitmap.

[17-3. Basic concept of production control]
FIG. 299 is an explanatory diagram showing a basic concept of effect control in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Here, the case where the main effect control is executed by executing the scheduler data including the function will be described, and in particular, the sound output will be described as an example.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 is composed of a type and number of schedulers 5502 according to the effect device when the effect is executed. In the scheduler 5502, one scheduler 5502 processes one scheduler data. The scheduler 5502 acquires the scheduler data specified in the sub-effect block data from the scheduler data storage unit 5070, and executes the function included in the scheduler data. The structure of the scheduler data will be described later.

Sound functions executed at the time of sound output include "SPLAY" for playing a phrase, "STOP_PH" for stopping a phrase being played, "VOL_PH" for setting a volume level during phrase playback, and the like. These sound functions are processed by the scheduler 5502, and the control specified by the parameters and the like is executed. When the sound module 5500 receives the execution of the process based on the sound function, the sound module 5500 generates the sound source drive data and outputs the sound source drive data to the sound source built-in VDP1512a.

The sound output corresponding to the specified channel is controlled by the function processed by the scheduler 5502. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, 32 channels are provided, but the number of channels will be described as 4 for easy understanding. Further, the sound output by each channel is output from the speakers [1] to [4] via the volumes 5506v [1] to [4]. The speakers [1] to [4] illustrated here schematically represent the outputs of each channel Ch1 to Ch4, and correspond to any one of the physical speakers provided in the gaming machine. It does not mean that it is.

The correspondence between the scheduler 5502 and the output channel is managed by the channel management works 5507 [1] to 5507 [4] provided in association with the channels Ch1 to Ch4. The data structure of the channel management work 5507 is illustrated in the lower right of the figure. The phrase number, stereo reproduction flag, output volume, and loop attribute are stored in the work 5507. The phrase number is information indicating which phrase is currently being played. The stereo playback flag indicates whether or not to output in stereo. The output volume is the volume for each channel. The loop attribute specifies whether or not to play repeatedly. This information is specified by the sound module 5500 based on the sound function.

As described above, FIG. 299 shows the basic concept of the effect control in the present embodiment by taking the sound output control as an example. When the scheduler specified in the sub-effect block data is started, the scheduler data is executed on the scheduler. When the scheduler data is executed, a function that controls each effect device is called, and the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to each effect device are instructed to perform processing based on the function.

[17-4. Data flow in production control]
The basic concept of the module configuration and control in the production control of the gaming machine has been described above. Next, the flow of effect control from receiving the main command to acquiring the scheduler data will be described in more detail.

[17-4-1. Acquisition of data required for production control]
FIG. 300 is a diagram illustrating a configuration up to acquisition of data necessary for effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. When the effect control unit 5020 receives the main command from the main control board 1310 as described with reference to FIG. 298, the effect control unit 5020 analyzes the command analysis module 5200 and notifies the effect control unit 5020 of the analysis result.

Based on the layer data table, the effect control unit 5020 provides each layer, a variable pattern layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the variable pattern), a hold layer (a layer that performs an effect related to the hold effect), and a game instruction layer (a game instruction layer). Layer to perform), communication error layer (layer to notify communication error), notification layer (layer to notify various notifications), abnormality notification layer (layer to notify abnormality) based on the analysis result by the command analysis module 5200. , Acquires and updates the corresponding effect block data numbers for each layer. Further, the acquired effect block data number is handed over to the effect block control unit 5040. For example, in the case of a variable pattern layer, the effect block number is a liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variable pattern, a liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table for each variable pattern, and sub-effect block data for each variable pattern based on the variable pattern number. Determined from the combination number table. In the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table for each variation pattern, and the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern, the combination of the effect blocks corresponding to the variation pattern is defined. .. Specific examples of the liquid crystal display block data combination number table for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table for each variation pattern, and the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern will be described later in FIGS. 324, 325, and 326, respectively. do.

The unit of dividing the effect block is divided into a predetermined unit (block) that is a common effect in a series of effects (for example, an effect executed from the start to the stop of the change of the special symbol). In addition, block data including control information such as effect content and effect time for each effect device is defined for each block. By controlling the effect in units of the effect block based on the effect block number, the effect by each effect device can be synchronized. Further, the arrangement of layers corresponds to the layers on the liquid crystal display, and in the present embodiment, the variable pattern layer is on the back side and the abnormality notification layer is on the front side. The more important information is displayed on the front side. It is a configuration for.

When the effect block control unit 5040 receives the block data number (effect block number) corresponding to each layer, the effect block control unit 5040 (liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, sub-effect block) corresponding to each layer. The control unit 5320) acquires the corresponding block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053). As described above, scheduler data for executing the effect is specified for each block data.

For example, when the main command is a start winning command, the hold layer is specified, and the liquid crystal effect block data 5051 for performing the hold display on the liquid crystal display screen and the sub effect block data for outputting the sound effect at the time of the start prize are output. 5053 is acquired. Further, at the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, a fluctuation start command or the like is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to specify the fluctuation pattern layer. Further, when notifying the occurrence of an error or a warning, a command related to the error is transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the abnormality detection layer is specified. Further, when notifying an abnormality (an abnormality of an accessory, etc.) detected inside the peripheral control board 1510, the abnormality detection layer is specified in the same manner as when a command related to the error is received from the main control board 1310. Further, by performing the effect for each layer, it is possible to perform a plurality of effects at the same time.

When the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310 acquires the liquid crystal display block data 5051 from the liquid crystal display block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal display block data number, the liquid crystal display effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 has a liquid crystal display effect. Start the 1f scheduler. The liquid crystal display 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 further acquires the liquid crystal display scheduler data 5071. Then, by executing the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data 5071 on the liquid crystal display effect 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal display module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data 5071. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes a function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and outputs the display list command to the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. Then, an image is drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600. The processing in the liquid crystal display 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

Further, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 acquires the liquid crystal symbol block data 5052 from the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table corresponding to each layer based on the liquid crystal symbol block data number, and activates the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler. , The liquid crystal symbol scheduler data 5072 to be executed is specified. Then, by executing the liquid crystal symbol scheduler data 5072 on the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler, the liquid crystal module 5400 is instructed to process the function defined in the liquid crystal symbol scheduler data 5072. The liquid crystal module 5400 processes a function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates a display list command necessary for driving the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, and outputs the display list command to the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. Then, an image is drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600. The processing in the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is executed in synchronization with the screen update interval (1 frame).

When the sub-effect block control unit 5320 acquires the sub-effect block data 5053, the sub-effect block control unit 5320 specifies the execution cycle (1 frame or 1 millisecond) based on the information specified in the sub-effect block data 5053. Then, when the execution cycle is one frame, the sub-effect 1f scheduler of the sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 is activated, or when the execution cycle is 1 millisecond, the sub-effect 1 ms sub-effect 1 ms of the scheduler execution unit 5334 is started. Start the scheduler.

Further, the activated sub-effect 1f scheduler or sub-effect 1ms scheduler acquires and executes the sub-effect scheduler data 5073. The sub-effect scheduler data 5073 does not differ depending on the execution cycle, and all functions can be executed by the scheduler of all execution cycles. This makes it possible to create scheduler data that is commonly used by schedulers with different execution cycles, and reduces the data capacity. In addition, it is possible to quickly respond to changes in the execution cycle of the effect device. In addition, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously by different schedulers, which enables sharing of scheduler data, prevents the same type of problems from occurring in multiple locations, and reduces data capacity. can.

Here, a specific example in which the same scheduler data is executed simultaneously by different schedulers will be described. FIG. 301 is a diagram illustrating a liquid crystal drawing effect of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. Four types of step-up notices 1 to 4 can be executed for the step-up notice, and by executing the effect that gradually develops the effect content, the player is expected to display the variation of the symbol. Suggest degree.

In the step-up notice 1, the notice effect ends when the step-up 1 effect is executed. In the step-up notice 2, the step-up 2 effect occurs just before the end of the step-up 1 effect, and the notice effect ends after the end of the step-up 2 effect. The effects are similarly executed for the step-up notices 3 and 4, and the notice effects are completed after the step-up 3 effects and the step-up 4 effects are completed, respectively.

In the step-up notice, the sound and the lamp also perform the step-up notice in accordance with the liquid crystal display. Since different sounds are output at each stage of the step-up effect in the sound effect, four types of scheduler data from step 1 to step 4 are defined for each stage of the effect. On the other hand, in the lamp effect, since the same lamp pattern is displayed at each stage of the step-up effect, one type of common lamp scheduler data may be defined.

When the liquid crystal display of the step-up notice develops to the next stage, the next step-up notice is started just before the end of the step-up notice at the current stage, so that a plurality of step-up notices are temporarily performed at the same time. There is a period of time. As described above, in the lamp effect, it is necessary to execute the same scheduler data for the subsequent step-up effect, but in the present embodiment, the same scheduler data can be executed simultaneously by a plurality of schedulers. It has become. Therefore, when the same effect is executed at each stage, one type of common scheduler data may be defined even if the execution periods of the effect overlap.

Specifically, when the step-up notice lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by the lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH01) in the step-up 1 effect, the same step-up occurs when the step-up 2 effect that starts just before the end of the step-up 1 effect occurs. The warning lamp scheduler data (SCH_LMP_STEP) is executed by another lamp scheduler (LMP_SCH02). By configuring in this way, the same scheduler data is executed at the same time (duplicate) without defining the same scheduler data in duplicate, so that the same pattern of effects can be produced in parallel in a series of effects. It is realized to execute.

The sub-effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5333 or the sub-effect 1ms scheduler execution unit 5334 calls the modules (sound module 5500, lamp module 5600, drive device module 5700) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and defines them in the sub-effect scheduler data 5073. Instructs the processing of the function. Each module executes the process corresponding to the function instructed to be executed based on the specified scheduler data, creates the data necessary for driving the effect device, and outputs the drive data to the effect device.

[17-4-2. Outline of execution of scheduler data]
FIG. 302 is a diagram illustrating a flow at the time of execution of the scheduler data of the present embodiment. The effect control unit 5020 determines the effect content based on the analysis result of the main (main board) command by the command analysis module 5200, and uses the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600, and the drive device module 5700 to control various effect devices. Generate control data for control. FIG. 302 shows the structure of scheduler data 5401 referenced to set this command.

In the present embodiment, the scheduler data 5401 is prepared for each effect number included in the scheduler control information designated by the effect block control unit 5040, and is stored in the peripheral control ROM. As will be described later, the effect number is information that can identify the scheduler data 5401, and in the present embodiment, it is the address of the effect management pointer that manages the entity of the scheduler data 5401.

The correspondence between the scheduler data 5401 and the effect number is defined in the effect management table. As shown on the left side of the figure, the effect management table includes an effect management pointer indicating the storage address of the scheduler data. Although the number of effect management pointers corresponding to the effect number is prepared, only five are illustrated here. In the example of the figure, for example, the effect management pointer [1] initially stores the start address A1 of the scheduler data 5401. As the processing of the scheduler data is executed, the value of the effect management pointer [1] sequentially shifts to A1 and A2.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the address value of the effect management pointer is used for the effect number. In the example of FIG. 302, the effect numbers 01H, 02H, and the like represent storage addresses of the effect management pointers [1], [2], and the like, respectively. The effect number is not limited to the address value, and any identification information can be used. In this case, the effect management table may be configured so that the effect number and the effect management pointer are associated with each other, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 searches for the effect management pointer using the effect number as a key, and then obtains the scheduler data. The process may be performed. Further, if the address value of the effect management pointer is used as the effect number, the amount of data in the effect management table can be reduced, and the above-mentioned search becomes unnecessary, so that the load required for processing the scheduler data can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 302, each command constituting the scheduler data 5401 is composed of a function and a parameter in principle. As described above, the function is an instruction for controlling the effect device, and includes, for example, an instruction for instructing each module to operate the effect device. The parameter is a variable that specifically indicates the processing content of the function. A function that does not need to specify parameters may be provided.

Functions are grouped into groups such as sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors (driving devices) and users. The sequence control is a basic function for performing the effect control, and the lamp, the sound, and the motor are functions for controlling each effect device. The user is a function that does not belong to these groups. A specific description of the function will be described later with reference to FIGS. 305 to 307.

In the example shown in FIG. 302, a "call" function is specified at address A2. The "call" function belongs to the sequence control group, saves the pointer value of the next function, and then sets the address specified by the parameter to the effect management pointer. The scheduler execution unit 5060 can temporarily move to the address specified by the parameter to process the scheduler data, and then return to the previous processing based on the above-mentioned saved pointer value.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the address A31 specified by the parameter of the "call" function after the address A2. The accessory command is set at the address A31, the voice operation number is set at A32, the lamp operation number is set at A33, and the return is performed at A3n. When the effect command finishes these processes, the "call" returns to the designated address A2 and proceeds to the process of the next address A3.

In this way, by utilizing the "call" function, it is possible to incorporate the contents of the series of blocks BL3 specified by the addresses A31 to A3n into various parts of the scheduler data. By doing so, the capacity of the scheduler data can be reduced and the creation load thereof can be reduced. In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various lottery and the like are held during the game, and the development of the game changes according to the result. Some players can find subtle differences in the content of the production during the lottery and guess the lottery result. On the other hand, in the present invention, since general-purpose production contents can be utilized in various situations by calling, such a subtle difference can be eliminated and it is possible to make it difficult to predict the lottery result or the like. , It is possible to suppress the loss of interest in the game.

Although it is possible to use the "call" function in this way, the scheduler data 5401 of this embodiment is different from the interpreter program. As described above, the main function used in the scheduler data 5401 is to set the instruction contents to other schedulers such as "feature operation number set", "voice operation number set", and "ramp operation number set". This is because it merely specifically indicates a very limited function that can be realized by the scheduler execution unit 5060.

In the example shown in FIG. 302, NOP (wait) is then executed at address A3. In the "NOP" function, the process of the scheduler data is continued after waiting for the specified number of frames. Here, the processing of the scheduler data is waited until the time specified by the parameter Prm [031] elapses. As will be described later, in the present embodiment, the process is repeatedly executed by the timer interrupt. Therefore, if the value of the timer for which the parameter Prm [031] is specified is not 0 in the "NOP" function, the scheduler execution unit 5060 temporarily terminates the processing of the scheduler data without performing the subsequent processing, and this value. If is 0, the process of moving to the function at the next address is performed.

In this embodiment, the work area is used to specify the voice operation number and the like. The work area used by the system event and the work area used by the scheduler execution unit 5060 are prepared separately, and the scheduler execution unit 5060 stores the voice operation number and the like in the work area according to the designation of the scheduler data. Further, the layer designated by the effect control unit 5020 is also provided separately from the layer for the system module (see FIG. 300). Also in the work area for each module, a plurality of voice operation numbers and lamp operation numbers can be specified in parallel from these layers.

Similarly, the scheduler data is defined by the function and the parameter after the conditional branch address A11. In the example shown in FIG. 302, the conditional branch is not provided from the address A11 of the conditional branch to the end of the effect (address An). Since this range is the block BL2 different from the block BL1 described above, the accessory command (address A22), the voice operation number (address A21), and the like can be specified without considering the conflict with the block BL1. .. Instead of these settings, the block BL3 and the like may be captured by the "call" function.

In the scheduler data, conditional branching and a "call" function may be used in combination. For example, a random number for switching the effect content may be generated, and different addresses may be called according to the value of the random number. In the example shown in FIG. 302, if the condition "random value value ≤ Th1?" Is added to the address A2, the effects of the addresses A31 to A3n are executed when this condition is satisfied. Further, if the address A41 (not shown) is called with the condition "Th1 <random number value ≤ Th2?" Next to the address A2 (address A2 + 1), the address A31 or later is assigned according to the random number value. Will perform different effects. In this way, if different addresses are called by conditional branching according to a random number, the production content can be randomly switched by the random number, and it is possible to enhance the fun of the game. Hereinafter, switching the production contents in this way is referred to as a "production lottery" in the present specification.

In the production lottery, the display, sound, lamp, and drive device may all be switched, or only a part of them may be switched. To switch all, specify all the display, sound, and lamp contents in the scheduler data called by the "call" function. When switching only a part, specify only the part to be switched in the scheduler data called by the "call" function, and specify the other parts uniformly after returning from the "call" function. do it.

Further, in the scheduler data, it may be specified that different scheduler data is called according to the random number for the effect lottery by using the conditional branch and the "call" function. In this case, as a result of the display, the sound, the lamp, and the driving device independently performing the effect lottery, the effect mode realized by the combination becomes very diverse, and there is an advantage that the interest can be further enhanced.

However, regardless of the results of the display, sound, lamp, and drive device effect lottery, it is preferable that these effects are completed at the same time in order to realize a natural effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the scheduler data to be selected in the effect lottery has the content that the effect is completed at the same time. It should be noted that it is not an indispensable requirement that the production is completed at the same time, and these production times do not have to be the same.

The effect lottery using the scheduler data has the advantage that the effect content can be varied and the lottery mode can be switched according to the display, sound, lamp, and output status of the drive device. For example, when the drive device is executing the figure-eight distribution operation at the time when the effect lottery is instructed and other operations are restricted, the drive device module 5700 prohibits the effect lottery related to the drive device. You may. Similarly, with respect to the display, sound, and lamp, the production lottery may be prohibited depending on the situation when the production lottery is instructed. Further, in the production lottery prohibition, the production lottery may be partially prohibited by prohibiting the selection of some scheduler data.

As described above, in the effect lottery, the effect content is switched by the control process of the peripheral control board 1510, and does not affect the game itself. However, by enabling the effect lottery in this way, it is possible to realize a variety of effects than the types of commands output from the main control board 1310, and it is possible to further enhance the interest.

[17-4-3. Overview of sound output control]
Next, the function of the sound module that controls the sound output will be described. FIG. 303 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the sound module 5500 of the present embodiment. The sound module 5500 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and outputs a sound. The sound module 5500 can receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5502 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5502 is provided in association with a sound layer for voice. Further, each scheduler 5502 is provided with a work 5507 for operation management. The contents of the work 5507 will be described later.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 specifies the voice operation number based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the voice operation number table and specifies the scheduler data 5505 to be executed. The voice operation number table is a table in which a sound pointer and a sound layer are associated with a voice operation number. In the present embodiment, the voice operation number corresponds to the storage address of the voice operation number table. Arbitrary identification information can be used for the voice operation number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, it is better to correspond to the storage address to reduce the capacity of the voice operation number table and reduce the processing load when referring to the table. Has the advantage of enabling.

The sound pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5505. In the present embodiment, the address SA1 is stored in the sound pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the sound output will be described later with reference to FIGS. 306 and 307.

In the example shown in FIG. 303, a "call" function is defined at address SA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address SA31 (not shown), and then processes the address SA3 next to the address SA2.

At address SA3, phrase reproduction is specified. The scheduler execution unit 5060 reads the phrase data 5508 corresponding to the phrase number 00H specified by the parameter and reproduces the phrase data 5508.

Further, a structural example of the phrase data 5508 is shown on the right side of FIG. 303. The phrase number is identification information attached to each phrase data. In the present embodiment, arbitrary identification information can be used, but the storage address of the phrase data 5508 may be used as the phrase number. In this case, the phrase number can be omitted from the phrase data 5508.

The channel is the output channel specified during phrase playback. The left / right panpot and the top / bottom panpot are the left / right / top / bottom output balance of each speaker provided in the gaming machine. The volume is an output volume. The song number is an identification number of the sound to be played. When the song number is notified to the sound source built-in VDP1512a, the sound source built-in VDP1512a reads the sound source data corresponding to the song number from the liquid crystal and the sound ROM, and reproduces the sound. The loop specifies whether or not to repeatedly play the sound. Stereo is a specification of whether or not to output in stereo.

A work 5507 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5502. Various information shown in the figure is stored in the work 5507. The operating state indicates whether or not each layer is operating. The voice number represents the number of the scheduler data 5505 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5505 is used. The sound pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5505 being executed by the scheduler 5502. In the example shown in FIG. 303, the value of the sound pointer sequentially shifts to SA2 and SA3 as the processing progresses. The timer value represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data 5505, and is sequentially subtracted with the passage of time. The sound module 5500 executes the next function when this value becomes 0.

The number of call nests and the number of loop nests represent the number of nests of calls and loops that are multiplely specified by the scheduler data 5505 and the phrase number. That is, for example, in the processing after the address SA31 called by the "call" function (first call) of the address SA2, when the scheduler data 5505 of another address is further called by the "call" function (second call), the call nesting is performed. The number is 2. After finishing the second call and returning to the first call, the number of call nests is reduced to 1. The same is true for loops. The call return address is a return address from the call destination and is provided according to the number of call nests. The loop start address is the start address of the loop range, and the loop count is the loop repeat count. The loop start address and the like are provided according to the number of loop nests.

[17-4-4. Overview of lamp output control]
Next, the function of the lamp module that controls the output of the lamp will be described. FIG. 304 is an explanatory diagram showing the functions of the lamp module 5600 of the present embodiment. The lamp module 5600 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes processing based on the function included in the scheduler data, and performs lamp output, that is, lamp lighting / blinking control. Like the sound module 5500, the lamp module 5600 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers 5602 and perform processing. Each scheduler 5602 that constitutes the scheduler execution unit 5060 is provided in association with the lamp layer for the lamp. Further, each scheduler 5602 is provided with a work 5603 for operation management. The contents of the work 5603 will be described later.

When the lamp operation number is specified based on the scheduler control information, the scheduler data 5601 to be executed is specified by referring to the lamp operation number table. The lamp operation number table is a table in which a lamp pointer and a lamp layer are associated with a lamp operation number. In the present embodiment, the lamp operation number corresponds to the storage address of the lamp operation number table. Arbitrary identification information can be used for the lamp operation number, but as in the case of the effect number described above, using the storage address reduces the capacity of the lamp operation number table and reduces the processing load when referring to the table. It has the advantage of making it possible.

The lamp pointer specifies the storage address of the scheduler data 5601. In the present embodiment, the address LA1 is stored in the lamp pointer [1].

The scheduler data 5505 is composed of functions and parameters as in the production data (FIG. 302). The function used in the scheduler data 5505 for controlling the lamp will be described later with reference to FIG. 306.

In the example shown in FIG. 304, a "call" function is defined at address LA2. The scheduler execution unit 5060 executes a series of blocks after the address LA31 (not shown), and then processes the address LA3 next to the address LA2.

The address LA3 defines the gradation pattern setting. The scheduler execution unit 5060 sets the gradation pattern data 5606 stored at the address LA11 specified by the parameter. Each of the lamp schedulers 5602 is provided with a gradation scheduler 5604 in association with each other. The lamp is turned on with the specified gradation data 1, and when the time specified by the timer value elapses, the lamp with the gradation data 2 is used. Turn on. Here, an example in which two types of gradation data are specified is shown, but even when three or more are specified, the lamp is turned on while sequentially switching the gradation data at the time interval of the timer value. By preparing a plurality of gradation pattern settings after the address LA12, it is possible to light the lamp with various gradation patterns while changing the switching timer value between the gradation data. It is also possible to provide a loop in the gradation pattern data. When the gradation scheduler 5604 executes a series of processes of addresses LA11 to LA1n, the lighting of the lamp ends. The lamp scheduler 5602 returns to the processing of the address LA3 of the scheduler data 5601, and executes the processing of the next address until it is stopped (address LAN).

A work 5603 for operation management is associated with each scheduler 5602. Various information shown in the figure is stored in the work 5603. The scheduler status indicates whether the scheduler is running or not. The operation pattern number represents the number of the scheduler data 5601 in operation. In this embodiment, the start address of the scheduler data 5601 is used. The scheduler timer represents the waiting time until the next function is executed. It is set when the waiting time is specified in the scheduler data, and is subtracted sequentially with the passage of time. The lamp executes the next function when this value becomes 0. The gradation data timer represents the waiting time until the next gradation data is executed when the gradation pattern data 5606 is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 304, when the gradation data defined in the address LA11 is executed, when the timer value set in the gradation data timer becomes 0, the gradation data 1 shifts to the gradation data 2. Then, when the timer value becomes 0 again, the processing of the address LA11 is terminated and the process proceeds to the processing of the address LA12.

The ramp pointer is the address of the scheduler data 5601 being executed by the scheduler 5602. In the example shown in FIG. 304, the value of the lamp pointer sequentially shifts to LA1, LA2, and LA3 as the processing progresses. The gradation data pointer is the address of the gradation pattern data 5606 executed by the gradation scheduler 5604. In the example in the figure, as the processing progresses, the value of the gradation data pointer sequentially shifts to LA11 and LA12. The number of loops is the number of times the loop is repeated, and the loop start address is the start address of the loop range. As with sounds, loops may be allowed to nest.

[17-4-5. Overview of drive unit control]
Subsequently, the function of the drive device module 5700 that controls the operation of the drive device will be described. The drive device is, for example, a stepping motor. Since the control is the same as that of the lamp module 5600, the illustration is omitted. The drive unit module 5700 receives an instruction from the scheduler execution unit 5060, executes a process specified for a function included in the scheduler data, and controls the operation of the drive unit. The drive unit module 5700 can also receive requests from a plurality of schedulers and perform processing.

The control items of the drive device include, for example, the amount of movement (rotational step angle of the stepping motor), the movement time, the movement speed (rotational speed of the motor), the excitation method, the trapezoidal drive, and the rotation direction. In addition, an instruction to execute a return operation to return to the origin position and an instruction to stop the mechanical end (when the movable range of the drive device is mechanically limited, stop it while being urged to the limit position of the movable range). included. In the trapezoidal drive, the rotation speed is changed by a predetermined angular acceleration instead of changing the speed in a step function at the start and stop of rotation.

Scheduler data is composed of functions and parameters. The functions used in the scheduler data to control the drive device will be described later with reference to FIG. 307.

[17-5. function]
The example of using the function in the module used for the effect control has been described above. Here, other functions will be described. 305 to 307 are diagrams showing an example of a function in the effect control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. As mentioned above, the functions are divided into groups of sequence control, lamps, sounds, motors and users. Hereinafter, the functions belonging to each group will be described.

[17-5-1. Function details (sequence control)]
Functions belonging to the sequence control group are mainly functions for controlling the flow of production. FIG. 305 shows an example of a sequence control function. The outline of each function will be described below.

"STOP" is a function representing the end of scheduler data. "NOP" is a weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions by designating the number of executions as a parameter. The time according to the number of executions differs depending on the processing cycle in which the "NOP" function is executed. If the "NOP" function is executed in a frame cycle, one frame is about 33.334 milliseconds in this embodiment, so that the number of executions is If 30 is specified, it will wait for about 1 second, and if it is executed in a 1 ms cycle, if the number of executions is also specified as 30, it will wait for about 30 ms. "NOP_F_VALUE" has the number of executions (number of frames), scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value as parameters, and when the conditions based on the scheduler memory number, mask value and comparison value are satisfied, the "NOP_F_VALUE" function is terminated and the condition is changed. If it is not satisfied, it is a conditional weight function that waits for a time corresponding to the number of executions.

"MEMW" is a function that writes a specified value in the corresponding scheduler work area with the target scheduler work number and value as parameters. "LOOPST" is a function for performing iterative processing (loop), specifies the beginning of the loop, and sets the number of loops as a parameter. When "0" is set for the number of loops, an infinite loop occurs. "LOOP" is a function for designating the end of iterative processing (loop).

"RET" is a function for returning the processing to the calling block (function data). The pointer value saved by the "call" function is set in the effect management table. "CALL" is the above-mentioned "call" function, which executes processing from a designated address (block), and sets information for specifying a call destination such as an address value or a label as a parameter. In "CALL", the pointer value of the function to be executed next is saved, and the address of the callee is set in the effect management pointer. Then, after executing the process of the callee, the address saved by the above-mentioned "RET" function is set in the effect management pointer, and the process returns to the previous process.

The "SUBC" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and the branch table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, it executes the "call" function based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBC" will be described later with reference to FIG. 311. When the process of the callee is completed by the "SUBC" function, the process returns to the process of the caller (the next process of the "SUBC" function).

The "SUBJ" selects a process to be called (block to be executed) using the scheduler work number value as an index based on the target scheduler work number and the table specified in the parameter, and executes the selected process. That is, the "JUMP" function described later is executed based on the specified conditions. A specific example using "SUBJ" will be described later with reference to FIG. 312. The process of the caller who executed the "SUBJ" function is not returned, and the process of the callee is continued as it is. "JUMP" sets the address specified by the parameter in the effect management pointer, and continues processing from the specified address and label.

"REF" is a function for invoking another scheduler specified by a parameter. A specific example using "REF" will be described later with reference to FIG. 313. Like "REF", "REF" is a function for starting another scheduler specified by the parameter, and other scheduler data is overwritten until the overwrite prohibition time specified by the parameter elapses. It is prohibited to start. In "REF", control by a plurality of scheduler data can be executed in parallel. On the other hand, "REFF" can execute the processing of the scheduler data to be executed independently for a specified period. For example, in the case of initialization of the accessory, other scheduler data for operating the accessory is executed and controlled. It is possible to prevent it from becoming impossible.

[17-5-2. Function details (lamp)]
Functions belonging to the group of lamps are functions for controlling the flow of lamp effects. FIG. 306 gives an example of a function related to lamp control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"HPLAY" is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for lighting a lamp based on the gradation data specified by a parameter. In "HPLAY", even if the lamp is being reproduced with the same gradation data, the lamp is reset and the reproduction of the lamp is started from the beginning when the function is executed. The gradation data is specified by setting the gradation pattern data address, and the execution of the gradation data is instructed by clearing the gradation data timer in the work 5603.

Similar to "HPLAY", "KPLAY" is a function for executing a lamp gradation data reproduction process for lighting a lamp based on gradation data specified by a parameter. In "KPLAY", when the lamp is reproduced with the same gradation data, the reproduction of the running lamp is continued without resetting.

"HPLAY2" is a function that executes lamp gradation data reproduction processing by designating a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter. The processing is the same as that of "HPLAY". Similar to "HPLAY2", "KPLAY2" is a function that specifies a layer in addition to gradation data by a parameter and executes a lamp gradation data reproduction process. The processing is the same as that of "KPLAY".

“HPLAY” and “KPLAY” execute the designated lamp gradation data reproduction process for reproducing the lamp gradation data specified in the parameter. If the lamp gradation data has already been reproduced, the reproduction of the lamp gradation data is interrupted and the same lamp gradation data is reproduced from the beginning at the time of reproduction by "HPLAY", and the lamp gradation data is reproduced at the time of reproduction by "KPLAY". Continue playing without interruption. That is, even if the gradation data of the same lamp is executed by using "KPLAY" while the lamp gradation data is being reproduced, no particular processing is executed.

The processing of "HPLAY2" is the same as that of "HPLAY" except that, in addition to the above-mentioned "HPLAY" function, the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

In addition to the above-mentioned "KPLAY" function, "KPLAY2" is the same as "KPLAY" except that the layer for reproducing the lamp gradation data is specified by the parameter and the layer is specified by the parameter.

When "HPLAY" is used, the player can clearly recognize that the production has started, while when "KPLAY" is used, the player recognizes that the series of productions is continuing. Can be made to. Further, if it is attempted to realize the same control as the other function with only one function, new required processing may increase. For example, if the lamp is being played with the same gradation data like "KPLAY" only with "HPLAY", if you try to continue the playback of the running lamp without resetting, the lamp with the same gradation data A new process is required to determine whether or not is being regenerated. By defining similar functions in this way, it is possible to suppress the complexity of processing and improve the development efficiency. The combination of such similar functions is not limited to "HPLAY" and "KPLAY", for example, "HPLAY2" and "KPLAY2", "SPLAY" and "SXPLAY", "SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY", etc. The same applies to the combination. Similar functions are defined for other production devices such as sound and motor (drive device), and the complexity of processing is similarly suppressed.

[17-5-3. Function details (sound)]
Functions belonging to the group of sounds (sounds) are functions for controlling the sound output. An example of a function related to sound control is given in FIGS. 306 and 307, and an outline of each function will be described.

"SPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SPLAY", even if the sound having the same phrase number is being reproduced, the sound is reset and the sound reproduction is started from the beginning when the function is executed. Like "SPLAY", "SXPLAY" is a function for executing a phrase reproduction process that outputs a sound based on a phrase number specified by a parameter. In "SXPLAY", when the sound of the same phrase number is reproduced, the reproduction of the sound is continued without resetting. "STOP_PH" is a function for executing a phrase stop process for stopping the reproduction of the sound based on the phrase number specified by the parameter.

"PAN_PH" uses the transition time and panpot end coordinate position specified by the parameter from the audio output coordinate position at the start of execution of the "PAN_PH" function for the playing phrase specified by the parameter, and panpot ends. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position to the coordinate position at the specified transition time. In addition to the function of the "PAN_PH" function, "PAN_PH2" can also specify the panpot start coordinate position with a parameter, and like the "PAN_PH" function, the audio output coordinates of the target phrase at the start of function execution. This is a function for moving the audio output coordinate position from the panpot start coordinate position whose position is specified by the parameter to the panpot end coordinate position at the specified transition time.

"VOL_FADE_PH" is specified from the volume value at the start of execution of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function to the fade end volume value using the transition time and fade end volume value also specified by the parameter for the playing phrase specified by the parameter. This is a function for increasing / decreasing the volume value at the transition time. In addition to the function of the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, "VOL_FADE_PH2" can also specify the fade start volume value with a parameter, and like the "VOL_FADE_PH" function, the volume value of the target phrase is a parameter at the start of function execution. This is a function for increasing or decreasing the volume value at the specified transition time from the fade start volume value specified in.

"VOL_PH" is a function that increases or decreases the volume value of the phrase being played, which is specified by the parameter, with the volume value specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" is a function that mutes the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter. "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" is a function for canceling mute of the volume of the phrase specified by the parameter.

"SCPLAY" and "SXCPLAY" execute a designated channel song reproduction process for reproducing the phrase corresponding to the phrase number specified in the parameter on the specified channel. If the same phrase has already been played, the playback of the phrase is interrupted and the same phrase is played from the beginning during playback by "SCPLAY", and the playback of the phrase is continued without interruption during playback by "SXCPLAY". That is, even if the same phrase is executed using "SXCPLAY" while the phrase is being played, no particular process is executed.

In "PAN_CH", the above-mentioned "PAN_PH" performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas a panpot for a ch (channel) is performed. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "PAN_PH". Regarding "PAN_CH2", the above-mentioned "PAN_PH2" performs a panpot for a phrase, whereas a panpot for ch is performed. "PAN_PH2" except that ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change.

"VOL_FADE_CH" is "VOL_FADE_PH" except that the above-mentioned "VOL_FADE_PH" fades for a phrase, whereas ch fades for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. The process does not change. Regarding "VOL_FADE_CH2", while the above-mentioned "VOL_FADE_PH2" fades for a phrase, it fades for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase is changed to ch. The process does not change.

In "VOL_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_PH" increases / decreases the volume value for the phrase, whereas the volume value increases / decreases for ch. Ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_ON_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH" mutes (mute) the phrase, whereas mute the ch, ch is specified by a parameter and the phrase changes to ch. Other than that, the processing is the same as "VOL_MUTE_ON_PH". Regarding "VOL_MUTE_OFF_CH", the above-mentioned "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" cancels the mute (mute) for the phrase, whereas the mute (mute) for the ch is canceled. The process is the same as "VOL_MUTE_OFF_PH" except that is changed to ch.

[17-5-4. Function details (motor)]
Functions belonging to the group of motors are functions for controlling the output of motors and solenoids. FIG. 307 gives an example of a function related to motor control, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor to reproduce an operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. The "MMPLAY" executes a motor regeneration process that causes the motor specified in the parameter to reproduce the operation based on the motor data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_ON” executes a solenoid ON process that causes the solenoid to execute an operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter. “SOL_OFF” executes a solenoid OFF process that causes the solenoid to stop the operation based on the solenoid data number specified in the parameter.

[17-5-5. Function details (user)]
The function belonging to the user's group is a function for executing the control not belonging to the group described above. An example of these functions is given in FIG. 307, and an outline of each function will be described.

"MBUF_SET" executes the motor output buffer scheduler work value setting process that sets the scheduler work value in the motor output buffer. “COMMAND” and “COMMAND0” are processes for issuing a command from within the scheduler. "COMMAND" issues a command to VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. For example, a command for starting drawing is issued to the liquid crystal display device. On the other hand, the command issued by "COMMAND0" is analyzed by the command analysis module 5200 and performs the same operation as the main command. The "MEMC" executes a scheduler memory copy process that copies the contents of the work area of the scheduler being executed to the work area of another scheduler.

[17-6. Scheduler]
Next, the scheduler used to execute the scheduler data, which is a data string in which the functions required to execute a series of processes are defined in the execution order, will be described. One or more schedulers are provided for each administrative purpose, but all functions can be executed by all schedulers, and functions related to lamps can be executed by the sound scheduler, or the scheduler for accessories. You can execute functions for sound with. There is no difference other than the processing cycle (frame or 1 ms) in the schedulers provided for each purpose, and it is possible to execute all the functions in a mixed manner. In addition, there is no limit to the number of schedulers that can be executed, and multiple registered schedulers can be executed at the same time.

FIG. 308 is a diagram showing an example of the scheduler of the present embodiment. The scheduler can be conveniently classified according to the state transition and the device (effect type) to be controlled. The outline of typical types of schedulers will be described below.

First, an example of a scheduler related to state transitions will be described. There are special figure state schedulers (special figure state SCH, TOK_SCH) for executing main state transition scheduler data that controls the transition of the game state of the entire game. In the effect control on the peripheral control board 1510, the transition of the gaming state is controlled based on the command received from the main control board 1310. The processing cycle of the special figure state scheduler is 1f (frame).

Further, there are sub-state schedulers (sub-state SCH, SUB_SCH) for executing sub-state scheduler data that controls the transition of the internal state (sub-internal state) in the peripheral control board 1510. The internal state transitions to another state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, when a player operates an effect button, wins a lottery for executing an effect, or when a predetermined time elapses from the start of fluctuation. do. The processing cycle of the sub-state scheduler is 1f (frame).

The scheduler for sound includes a background that controls the output of the sound that is output along with the background display and the variable display of the symbol, a scheduler (SND_SCH01) for executing the symbol sound scheduler data, and is output when the advance notice effect is executed. There is a scheduler (SND_SCH02, 03) that controls the output of the sound, and a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound when the advance notice is executed by the accessory.

Further, the schedulers (SND_SCH01 to 04) for these sounds were schedulers in which the effect mode was limited for the effect control of the background display and the variable display of the symbol and the effect control at the time of executing the advance notice effect. At this time, if you try to execute another effect in parallel while executing the scheduler data with these schedulers and controlling the effect, there is a possibility that the new effect cannot be executed because the scheduler is being used. There is. Therefore, a common scheduler that enables sound output in common for other notices and uses without limiting the production mode is separately prepared (SND_SCH05). In the example shown in FIG. 308, only SND_SCH05 is a common scheduler, but a plurality of common schedulers may be prepared. By preparing a plurality of common schedulers, it is possible to flexibly respond to a wider variety of production modes. The processing cycle of the scheduler for sound is 1f (frame).

As described above, by providing the scheduler capable of controlling the sound output without limiting the effect mode, for example, the advance notice effect included in the advance notice group 1 and the advance notice effect included in the advance notice group 2 are executed in parallel. It is possible to diversify the variation of the production by using the common scheduler even when another auxiliary production is repeatedly executed while the sound is being performed. The common scheduler may be started when it cannot be executed by a scheduler with a limited effect mode, or may be for executing scheduler data that is not executed by a scheduler with a limited effect mode. In addition, since the scheduler data is executed frequently or continuously in the scheduler with limited production modes, the startup state may be maintained from the time the gaming machine is turned on, and the execution frequency of the scheduler data is different in the common scheduler. If there are few, it may be started when the scheduler data is executed, and the scheduler may be terminated after the processing is completed. As a result, the load at the time of starting the scheduler can be reduced, and the consumption of resources such as the arithmetic unit and the storage device of the effect control device, which is consumed by starting a large number of schedulers, can be suppressed.

Similar to the scheduler that targets the sound, the scheduler that targets the lamp includes the background that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp that accompanies the background display and the variable display of the symbol, and the scheduler (LMP_SCH01) for executing the symbol lamp scheduler data. ), A scheduler (LMP_SCH02, 03) that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp when the notice effect is executed, and a scheduler (LMP_SCH04) that controls the lighting / blinking of the lamp when the advance notice is executed by the accessory. Further, there is a common scheduler (LMP_SCH05) that enables the control of the lamp in common even for other notices and uses without limiting the production mode, as in the scheduler for sound. The processing cycle of the scheduler for the lamp is 1f (frame).

In addition, the scheduler described so far was a scheduler with one type of control target (effect type), but it is possible to control both sound output and lamp lighting / blinking, and it supports multiple production types. There is also a general-purpose sound / lamp scheduler (SNDLMP_SCH01-05) that can be used for general purposes. Sound can be output simultaneously by the number of channels of the sound source (liquid crystal and sound control unit 1512), but in the present embodiment, the number of channels is 32, and there are four types of schedulers (SND_SCH01 to 04) for outputting sound. ), And the number is less than the number of channels even if the scheduler that can output the notification sound is combined. Therefore, even if you try to temporarily output more types of sound than the number of sound output schedulers at the same time, the corresponding scheduler data cannot be executed, and there is a possibility that sound cannot be output even when the channel is open. ..

Therefore, by preparing a general-purpose scheduler that can handle a plurality of production types, it is possible to temporarily increase the number of production devices to be controlled. For example, when two types of advance notice effects of the advance notice group 1 are executed in duplicate, the scheduler data corresponding to the advance notice effects to be executed later may be executed by the general-purpose scheduler. Further, when it is known in advance that the advance notice effect is executed in duplicate, a general-purpose scheduler may be specified as the scheduler that executes the scheduler data in the effect block data.

In a normal game, it is rare to use all channels regardless of the number of schedulers, but even if the number of schedulers for sound output is smaller than the number of sound source channels, it is unexpectedly produced. There is a possibility that the scheduler will be insufficient due to duplication, and even if more schedulers are prepared than the number of channels, the channels may be insufficient and sound may not be output as a result. Therefore, it is desirable that the number of schedulers for sound output is the same as the number of channels at the maximum, and the number is smaller than the number of channels. Even if the effects are excessively duplicated, a general-purpose scheduler may be used. Since two channels are used for stereo output, the number of sound output schedulers may be set according to the number of channels for stereo output.

Prepare a frequently used scheduler as a dedicated scheduler in advance, and start the general-purpose scheduler when it is necessary to temporarily or exceptionally exceed the number of dedicated schedulers prepared in advance to execute scheduler data. This makes it possible to facilitate the management of schedulers without increasing the number of dedicated schedulers more than necessary.

Although the sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler has been illustrated here, a motor (driving device) may also be a target production type. The processing cycle of the sound / lamp general-purpose scheduler is 1f (frame), but when targeting a motor, the processing cycle of the scheduler may be 1 ms, and a scheduler with multiple types of processing cycles may be prepared as the general-purpose scheduler. good. In this embodiment, a general-purpose scheduler (FREE_SCH01 to 03) corresponding to an arbitrary effect type is defined. A scheduler with a processing cycle of 1f (frame) and a scheduler with a processing cycle of 1ms are prepared respectively.

By providing the general-purpose scheduler in this way, it is possible to flexibly respond to changes in the configuration of the effect device provided in the gaming machine without significantly modifying the program or data structure. As a result, the development efficiency of the gaming machine is improved, and it becomes possible to quickly respond to changes in the specifications of the gaming machine.

The scheduler for the motor includes a scheduler (MOTSYS_SCH) for executing motor system scheduler data for executing system operation, and a scheduler for executing motorram clear scheduler data for setting when clearing RAM (MOTSYS_SCH). MOTRAM_SCH), motor accessory initialization scheduler data for initializing the arrangement of accessories, etc. (MOTINI_SCH), motor accessory correction scheduler data for executing the position correction of accessories There is a scheduler (MOTHOS_SCH) of the above, and a scheduler (MOT_SCH) for executing the operation of the accessory by the production and the like.

The scheduler for executing the operation of the accessory by the production or the like is a scheduler (MOT_SCH01-05) for controlling the operation of a specific accessory or a common scheduler (MOT_SCH01-05) used independently of the type of the accessory. There is MOT_SCH06-10).

The processing cycle of the scheduler targeting the motor is 1 ms (millisecond), which is shorter than the processing cycle of the scheduler targeting the management of the gaming state and the sound and lamp (1f of the present embodiment = about 33.334 ms). It has become. Further, even if the scheduler targets a motor, the processing cycle does not have to be limited to 1 ms, and may be a 1 f cycle like a scheduler such as a lamp. Even if the scheduler for the motor operates in 1f, if the motor module side executes the process in 1ms, it is possible to control the stepping motor that controls in a cycle shorter than 1f, and it is better to set all schedulers to 1f cycle. Since it is not necessary to distinguish the time, there is an advantage that the management such as the start of the scheduler becomes easy.

Further, in the accessory composed of a plurality of movable parts, a specific scheduler may be activated for each movable part. For example, there is an accessory that imitates a character in which movable bodies are provided in each part of the head, arms, and legs, and each part can move independently. In the control of such an accessory, by activating a specific scheduler (specific scheduler) corresponding to the movable body provided in each part and executing the scheduler data for controlling the operation of each part in parallel, each of them It is possible to control the movements of the parts independently and in parallel at the same time, and it is possible to realize a complicated and detailed movement mode.

Further, there is an accessory in which not only the effect by the movable body but also the light emission effect by the light emitting body such as the LED provided in each part of the accessory is executed. For example, a light emitting body is arranged in each part of the above-mentioned accessory, and a light emitting effect is performed in conjunction with the operation of each part. At this time, the scheduler corresponding to the light emitting body provided in each part may be started, and the scheduler data for controlling the light emitting mode of the light emitting body of each part may be executed in parallel. As a result, it is possible to control the light emission effect independently and in parallel at each part, and it is possible to realize a complicated and detailed light emission mode. As described above, the light emitting body such as the LED can control the light emission by using the scheduler and the scheduler data in the same manner as the lamp.

In addition, a specific scheduler corresponding to each part may be started. In the specific scheduler corresponding to the part, the scheduler data for controlling the effect device (here, the movable body and the light emitting body) corresponding to the part is executed regardless of the type of the effect device. Specifically, in the above-mentioned example of the accessory, the scheduler data for controlling the movable body that operates the head and the light emitting body provided in the head is executed by the specific scheduler corresponding to the head. This makes it possible to closely link the motion effect and the light emission effect executed in each part. When a specific sound is output along with the operation of the accessory, the scheduler data executed by the specific scheduler corresponding to the part may be configured to include the sound output control, for example, each. If the output of the sound is related to the part, the specific scheduler corresponding to the part is used, and if the output of the sound is common to all the accessories, the scheduler (SND_SCH04) that controls the output of the sound at the time of the advance notice execution by the above-mentioned accessory is used. It may be configured to process.

On the other hand, since sound can be output from multiple channels in parallel at the same time, it is possible to activate a dedicated scheduler and control it so that it is output in the same way as a movable body, but the output sound is Since there are so many types, it is not realistic to start a dedicated scheduler individually. In the present embodiment, as described above, the sound is divided into categories (background display, variable display of symbols, advance notice effect execution, advance notice execution by a character) according to an opportunity to output a sound. If it is a background display, the scheduler (SND_SCH01) that controls the output of BGM is started, and when the advance notice is executed by the accessory, a scheduler (SND_SCH04) that is different from the scheduler that controls the output of BGM is started, and each scheduler runs in parallel. The sound output is controlled. In this embodiment, four types of schedulers (SND_SCH01 to 04) are illustrated, but the categories may be further subdivided so that more schedulers can be started in parallel. Further, the channel and the scheduler may be associated with each other by associating the category with the division (fixed, AUTO group) in the sound control by the automatic channel method described above.

In this way, the scheduler includes a "dedicated scheduler" that is used for a predetermined purpose / purpose for each production device, and a general-purpose scheduler that does not limit the purpose / purpose for each production device (with a single production type). A "common scheduler" used for the purpose and a "general-purpose scheduler" used for controlling a plurality of types (different production types) of production devices are included. The scheduler that controls the production device of a single production type is referred to as a "single scheduler" as opposed to a "general-purpose scheduler".

In addition, in order to notify the outside of notifications such as ball burnout and ball clogging, and alarms due to abnormality detection by magnetic sensors, etc., sound output and lamp lighting / blinking sound / lamp notification layer scheduler data is provided for each layer. There is a notification scheduler (INF_SCH01-03) to execute in. The processing cycle of the notification scheduler is 1f (frame).

Notification targets by the notification scheduler include magnet abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, winning abnormality notification, vibration abnormality notification, accessory (movable body) abnormality notification, RAM clear abnormality notification, setting abnormality notification, RAM value abnormality notification, and CPU built-in random number. Abnormality notification and the like are included, and further, notification other than the occurrence of an abnormality such as when the door is opened or when the setting is changed (setting notification) is also included. The notification by the notification scheduler is in a mode that does not depend on the model of the gaming machine. On the other hand, the advance notice production and the like are different depending on the model of the gaming machine. Therefore, the abnormality notification in the present embodiment can be realized with a common configuration regardless of the model of the gaming machine.

In the notification scheduler, scheduler data for controlling the sound and the lamp in conjunction with each other is executed, and one scheduler corresponds to a plurality of production devices (effect types). In the example shown in FIG. 308, sound and lamp control are targeted, but a driving device such as a motor may be included as a target. For example, when an abnormality notification of a character (movable body) is performed, the notification scheduler executes scheduler data for abnormality notification to notify the abnormality with a sound and a lamp, and controls to initialize the position of the character (movable body). You may. In such a notification, the control content is simple without performing complicated control like the production of a game. Therefore, by defining the scheduler data that collectively controls a plurality of production devices (production types), when an abnormality occurs, It becomes easy to manage, and it becomes easy to configure it so as not to depend on the model of the gaming machine.

The notification mode by the notification scheduler may be performed individually depending on the type of notification, or the mode of some effect devices may be common. For example, as the notification mode of the magnet abnormality notification and the radio wave abnormality notification, the lighting mode of the lamp is the same, and for the sound, the error sound and the respective abnormality contents (“magnet abnormality” and “radio wave abnormality”) are output by voice. At this time, the error sounds may be common or different.

Similarly, in the case of "setting notification" for setting the jackpot probability of the gaming machine, the lamp is turned on in a predetermined mode, and the notification sound is output and the setting is being changed by voice. At this time, since the abnormality does not necessarily occur, the notification sound may be different from that at the time of the abnormality. Further, when the occurrence of an abnormality such as opening of the door is different, a common notification sound may be used. This makes it possible to distinguish it from the occurrence of an abnormality.

Further, in the present embodiment, the setting such as the jackpot probability can be changed only when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, and the RAM is cleared according to the setting change. Therefore, if a setting change is detected during the game, a setting abnormality notification is made. Further, when the set value is set to a value outside the predetermined range, the setting abnormality notification is similarly performed. It should be noted that the setting may be changed other than when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, or may be enabled during the game only when the setting is confirmed.

Further, as in the case of executing the abnormality notification, the abnormality status notification signal indicating that the setting is being changed is output from the gaming machine when the setting notification is executed. At this time, the abnormal state notification signal may be output regardless of the notification by the notification scheduler, or the abnormal state notification signal may be output as a series of processing with the notification by the notification scheduler. The output of the abnormal state notification signal may be continuously output until the setting change is completed, or may be output for a predetermined period at the start of the setting change. In addition, by making the notification of the game machine itself and the signal output to the outside independent, it is possible to confirm that the setting change operation has been performed even if the notification cannot be made to the outside due to a malfunction of the speaker of the game machine. It will be possible. Further, it is possible to output a signal from the gaming machine to notify the outside, or to notify the outside by a test lamp or the like arranged inside the gaming machine so that the player does not recognize it.

Further, as described above, a general-purpose scheduler that can be used for any target such as production and notification is defined regardless of the type of production device (effect type), and the number of schedulers for which notification targets are prepared can be determined. If an abnormality occurs beyond that, it is possible to notify using a general-purpose scheduler. As a result, it is possible to notify the generated abnormality as comprehensively as possible. Further, since the frequency of abnormality notification is not high, the general-purpose scheduler may be used for abnormality notification without providing a notification scheduler in advance. In this case, more general-purpose schedulers may be provided than when the notification scheduler is provided, and the less frequently used general-purpose scheduler may be diverted as the notification scheduler. In addition, an effect type for outputting the abnormal status notification signal is provided so that the scheduler data for outputting the abnormal status notification signal can be executed only by the general-purpose scheduler, and when an abnormality occurs, the general-purpose scheduler is started and the abnormal status notification signal is output. You may do so.

Although the number of schedulers that control each target device is fixed in the present embodiment, the number of schedulers may be controlled to be dynamically increased or decreased according to the gaming state or the advance notice. As a result, it is possible to start each scheduler independently of the number of characters and the like provided in the gaming machine and the number of effects, and it is possible to reduce the restrictions for executing the effects.

[17-7. Application example of scheduler data (Production 1)]
The functions used in the production control and the types and functions of the scheduler that perform a series of control by combining these functions have been described above. However, the scheduler data and specific application examples of the functions will be described below with reference to the drawings. explain.

[17-7-1. Outline of production]
FIG. 309 is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the accessory controlled by using the scheduler data of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 309, the game board 5 of the present embodiment includes a logo accessory 5001, a star accessory 5002 (left star accessory 5002a, a middle star accessory 5002b, a right star accessory 5002c), and a hatchet accessory 5003. Is placed.

The logo accessory 5001 is arranged at the upper left of the game area. When the logo accessory 5001 operates, it falls (moves) from the initial position (upper stage position) to the intermediate position, and returns to the initial position after the production is completed. Further, the logo accessory 5001 can move in the vertical direction as well as vibrate in the vertical and horizontal directions before and after the movement.

The star accessory 5002 is arranged above the game area, the left star accessory 5002a is arranged on the left side, the middle star accessory 5002b is arranged in the center, and the right star accessory 5002c is arranged on the right side. Each star accessory 5002 can operate independently, and one or a plurality of star accessories 5002 operate at predetermined timings depending on the content of the effect.

The left star accessory 5002a moves to the lower left, and can move to a position slightly lower left in the center of the game area. Further, the middle star accessory 5002b moves downward, and can move to a position slightly above the center of the game area. The right star accessory 5002c moves to the lower right and can be moved to a position slightly lower right in the center of the game area. Each star accessory 5002 may be stopped before moving to the final arrival position, or may be returned to an intermediate position and stopped after reaching the final arrival position.

The hatchet 5003 is arranged above the center of the game area. The hatchet 5003 can be dropped (moved) from the initial position (upper stage position) to the intermediate position and the lower stage position. Depending on the operation of the production button by the player and the lottery result of the hatchet notice production, it moves from the initial position to the intermediate position and stops temporarily, then moves to the lower position or moves from the initial position to the lower position at once. The operation mode to do is set. Similar to the logo accessory 5001, the hatchet accessory 5003 can also be produced to vibrate up, down, left and right before and after movement.

Next, the flow of the advance notice effect executed by one symbol change will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 310, a step-up notice, a button (BTN) cut-in notice, a group notice, a star character notice, and a button (BTN) logo character fall notice will be described. The flow of the advance notice effect including the hatchet advance notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. 320.

FIG. 310 shows an example of the execution timing of the advance notice effect executed in the series of fluctuation display from the start to the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating the scheduler and the scheduler data used at this time. be. In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 310, a step-up notice and a button (BTN) cut-in notice are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, and in the latter half of the fluctuation, a group notice, a star character notice, and a button (BTN) logo character fall notice are executed. The effect block data is defined corresponding to each advance notice effect, and the scheduler data for controlling the lighting of the lamp, the sound output, the image output, the operation of the accessory, etc. performed in each advance notice effect is specified as the effect block data. Will be done.

Hereinafter, a part of the scheduler data for executing each notice effect will be extracted, and the functions controlled and configured by the scheduler data will be described. Specifically, the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” (FIG. 311) that controls the lamp in the step-up notice will be described. In addition to the scheduler data for controlling the lamp, the effect block data corresponding to the step-up notice also specifies the scheduler data for controlling other production devices, such as the scheduler data for controlling the sound output. When the production is executed, it is executed in parallel. Similarly, the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” (FIG. 312) that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice, the motor scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” (FIGS. 313 to 315) that controls the operation of the star accessory 5002 in the star accessory advance notice, The motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (FIG. 316) that controls the operation of the logo accessory 5001 in the button logo accessory fall notice will be described.

[17-7-2. Lamp control in step-up notice]
In the step-up notice of the present embodiment, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled to change stepwise according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the step-up notice). The step-up notice lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" belongs to the notice group 01, and is driven by the notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 01) "LMP_SCH02" as shown in FIG. 308.

FIG. 311 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_STP” that controls the lighting and blinking of the lamp in the step-up notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is started, the function "SUBC: YKK_STP: TBL_LMP_STP" is first executed. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_STP" and the step-up advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP". The step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value of the step-up notice, and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP".

The step-up notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_STP" stores the address of the step-up notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. .. SUBC_LMP_STP1, SUBC_LMP_STP2, SUBC_LMP_STP3, and SUBC_LMP_STP4 are the addresses of scheduler data for executing the step-up notice corresponding to the number of step-ups (1 to 4).

In the present embodiment, the step-up notice work area "YKK_STP" stores the lottery result value corresponding to the step-up notice having the number of step-ups of 4, and the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is executed. The scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" specifies the lamp gradation pattern data (PTA_STP_PT1 to 4) corresponding to each step-up and executes the lamp gradation data reproduction process (KPLAY), and 90 frames (about 3 seconds) for each step. Wait processing is executed. As a result, in each step, the lamp is turned on and blinked in the corresponding lamp gradation pattern for 3 seconds. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the advance notice group 01 lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH02".

After that, when the function "RET" is executed in the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4", the process returns to the next processing of the caller (scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_YKK_STP"). Further, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_STP" is terminated.

The step-up notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" will be described. The first is that it is possible to call the scheduler data for a lottery result with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result value in this embodiment). be. Depending on the content of the notice, the range of the lottery result value may be several hundred, and in the case of two branches such as the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment increases and becomes too complicated, making it difficult to manage corrections, etc. Become. On the other hand, in "SUBC", the above problem is easily solved by indexing the contents of the work memory. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of call address tables for branching are one each other, but a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by making both of them a plurality. Second, after executing the scheduler data called by "SUBC", it returns to the processing of the calling scheduler data, so it is possible to execute common scheduler data after executing the "SUBC" function, and after branching. It is not necessary to describe the scheduler data for the number of branches, and by describing only one scheduler data, the same process can be executed after all the branches. Further, in order to deal with a problem in the program, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branching process may not be performed and the "SUBC" function may be terminated.

That is, the function "SUBC" can select the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in the table format in advance, and call the selected scheduler data. In simple conditional branching, it is necessary to define conditions according to the number of branches and set the scheduler data of the branch destination, but in the function "SUBC", it is possible to easily add or delete branch destinations. , It is possible to easily add / change the production contents and improve the development efficiency.

[17-7-3. Lamp control in button cut-in notice]
The button cut-in notice of the present embodiment is started in the first half of the fluctuation, and the notice is executed until the end by accepting the operation input of the effect button by the player within a predetermined period. Further, similarly to the step-up notice, the lighting mode of a predetermined lamp is controlled according to the degree of expectation (lottery result value of the button cut-in notice).

The button cut-in notice belongs to the notice group 02, and the lamp scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is driven by the notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler (lamp SCH notice 02) "LMP_SCH03" as shown in FIG. 310. Since it belongs to a notice group different from the step-up notice and the scheduler data is driven by another scheduler, it is possible to execute the notice in parallel.

FIG. 312 is a diagram illustrating the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT” that controls the lamp in the button cut-in notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is started, first, the function "KPLAY: LMP_SCH03: PTA_CUT_STA" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated lamp lights (blinks) for 1 second based on the gradation pattern data "PTA_CUT_STA". At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. Since one frame corresponds to one loop, 90 loops correspond to 3 seconds. In the loop processing, the functions from "LOOPST" indicating the start of the loop to the function "LOOP" indicating the end of the loop are executed up to a specified number of times. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". Button ON_OFF The operation state of the effect button is stored in the work area "YKK_BTN", "0: button OFF" when the effect button is not operated, and "1: button ON" when the effect button is operated. Is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button cut-in advance notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Further, the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN" are rewritten by a program for button processing outside the scheduler data.

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" when the button cut-in notice button is OFF is selected in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". NS. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_LMP_CUB" of the calling scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processes, the loop process is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the lamp scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" when the button cut-in notice button is ON in the button cut-in notice branch call address table "TBL_LMP_CUB". Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_CUT_BTNON" is the function "SUBJ: YKK_CUT: TBL_LMP_CUT", and the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" has the target scheduler work number "YKK_CUT" and the button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP". Is executed as a parameter.

The button cut-in notice branch jump address table "TBL_LMP_CUT" stores the address of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data. Specifically, SUBJ_NON, SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. Note that SUBJ_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to turn off the lamp when the advance notice is not won. .. SUBJ_LMP_CUT1, SUBJ_LMP_CUT2, SUBJ_LMP_CUT3, and SUBJ_LMP_CUT4 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the lamp lighting pattern (color, lighting time) corresponding to the lottery result value of the button cut-in notice.

In the present embodiment, the button cut-in notice work area "YKK_CUT" stores the lottery result value indicating the button cut-in notice pattern (PTN) 4, and the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed. In the scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4", first, the lamp is turned on in red (gradation data pattern "PTA_CUT_RED") by the lamp gradation data reproduction processing (KPLAY), and then the wait processing of 150 frames is executed to continue for 5 seconds. Let me. At this time, the lamp scheduler "LMP_SCH03" is used to drive the scheduler data. At this time, the scheduler data "SUBC_LMP_STP4" is driven by using the advance notice group 02 lamp scheduler data scheduler "LMP_SCH03".

Since the call of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is not CALL but JUMP, the execution of the button cut-in notice lamp scheduler data ends with the function "STOP" and returns to the calling scheduler "SUBC_LMP_YKK_CUT". do not. Therefore, there are two types of termination of the scheduler "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT": when the "STOP" function included in "SCH_LMP_YKK_CUT" is executed, and when the "STOP" function included in "SUBJ_LMP_CUT4" is executed from the scheduler "SUBJ_LMP_CUT1". There is.

The button cut-in notice has been described above, but here, the functions that can be realized by the scheduler work area index branch jump "SUBJ" will be described. The first is that it is possible to call the scheduler data for a lottery result with one action for a plurality of lottery results based on the dynamically rewritten work memory contents (preliminary lottery result value in this embodiment). Depending on the content of the notice, the range of the lottery result value may be several hundreds, and in the case of two branches such as the IF statement, the number of scheduler data for judgment becomes too complicated and it becomes impossible to manage corrections. .. In "SUBJ", the above problem is easily solved by indexing the contents of the working memory. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of the work memory and the number of call address tables for branching are one each other, but a complicated conditional branch may be processed by one action by making both of them a plurality. Secondly, since it takes the form of "JUMP", it is possible to execute different processes for each branched scheduler data after executing the "SUBJ" function. Further, as in the case of "SUBC", in order to deal with a program defect, if the value of the work memory exceeds the number of elements in the call address table for branching, the branching process is not performed and the "SUBC" function is terminated. You may do so.

That is, the function "SUBJ" selects the scheduler data of the branch destination based on the value stored in the work area from the branch destination held in advance in the table format, like the function "SUBJ", and the selected scheduler data. It is possible to shift the process to, and the same effect as that of the function "SUBC" can be obtained.

Further, unlike the function "SUBJ", the function "SUBJ" continuously executes the processing of the scheduler data of the callee and does not return to the processing of the caller, so it is suitable for selectively executing the processing. ing. For example, when the content of the effect to be executed differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated, it is possible to prevent duplicate effects from being executed by using the function "SUBJ". On the other hand, since the function "SUBC" returns to the processing by the scheduler data of the caller, it is possible to execute the common post-processing after the processing of the callee is executed, and the processing can be simplified.

Therefore, by using the function "SUBC" and the function "SUBJ", it is possible to simplify the structure of the scheduler data and to flexibly support processing branching. Furthermore, since it becomes easy to respond to additions and changes simply by changing the branch destination of the table format, it becomes easy to improve the development efficiency and to respond to the specification change of the gaming machine.

[17-7-4. Motor control in star character notice]
Next, the control of the star character advance notice executed in the latter half of the fluctuation in the present embodiment will be described. When a reach occurs in the variable display of the special symbol and the transition to the latter half of the fluctuation occurs, a group notice is generated, and the star character notice is executed independently of the group notice. As for the star character notice, a plurality of types of star character 5002 (in this embodiment, three types of left star character 5002a, middle star character 5002b, and right star character 5002c) that can be operated by a driving body (motor) are used. By operating, the expected degree of symbol fluctuation is notified. Specifically, the higher the number of star characters 5002 appearing, the higher the degree of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 310, the star character advance notice of the present embodiment is executed by driving the star character advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH02" (scheduler for left star character scheduler data). Will be done. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a dedicated scheduler (MOT_SCH02 to 04) for operating the star accessory 5002 is provided in advance, but a common scheduler (MOT_SCH06 to 10) can also be used.

FIGS. 313 to 315 are diagrams for explaining the contents of the scheduler data for controlling the motor in the star character advance notice of the present embodiment. FIG. 313 is the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1” that controls the overall flow and the left star accessory 5002a, FIG. 314 is the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2” that controls the right star accessory 5002c, and FIG. 315 is the scheduler that controls the middle star accessory 5002b. It is a figure explaining data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is started, the function "SUBC: YKK_HYA: TBL_MOT_HYA" is executed first. This function is a scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC", and is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_HYA" and the star accessory advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" as parameters.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the designated star accessory advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA" and specifies the address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the star accessory advance notice work area "YKK_HYA". .. The lottery result value of the star character notice branch is stored in the star character notice work area "YKK_HYA", and corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the star character notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA".

The address of the star character appearance scheduler data is stored in the star character advance notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_HYA". Specifically, SUBC_NON, SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, and SUBC_MOT_HYA3 indicating the address of the scheduler data are stored. In addition, SUBC_NON is an address for a dummy call indicating that nothing is processed, and by preparing an address for the dummy call, it is possible to make the accessory inoperable when the advance notice is not won. There is. SUBC_MOT_HYA1, SUBC_MOT_HYA2, SUBC_MOT_HYA3 are the addresses of the scheduler data for executing the star character advance notice. Specifically, SUBC_MOT_HYA1 is the left star character 5002a only, and SUBC_MOT_HYA2 is the left star character 5002a SUBC_MOT_HYA3 is scheduler data for operating all three types of star characters 5002.

In the present embodiment, a lottery result value indicating that the star character advance notice that causes the left star character 5002a, the middle star character 5002b, and the right star character 5002c to appear in the star character advance notice work area "YKK_HYA" is executed. "3" is stored, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" is executed. In addition, when only the left star character 5002a is operated, the lottery result value of the star character notice is "1", and when the left star character 5002a and the right star character 5002c are operated, the lottery of the star character notice is drawn. "2" is set in the result value.

The scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_HYA3" first specifies the parameter "PTA_HYA_LEF" indicating the appearance operation pattern of the left star accessory 5002a, and executes the function "MPLAY" corresponding to the motor regeneration process. At this time, the function "MPLAY" is executed by the motor scheduler "MOT_SHC02" in which the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is executed.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" by the function "RQ". The function "REF" is a function for executing the scheduler data specified by the parameter by the scheduler also specified by the parameter. Here, the right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03". Similarly, the function "RQ" executes the middle star accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" using the middle star accessory 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04". In the present embodiment, the motor regeneration process (function "MPLAY") for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the middle star accessory 5002b is executed in the same frame as the motor regeneration process for the left star accessory 5002a. ing. As described above, by executing the scheduler data for operating each star accessory 5002 with different schedulers, each star accessory 5002 can be controlled in parallel.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the weight processing "NOP: 300" for 300 frames (10 seconds). During this weight time, the left star accessory 5002a operates in the specified mode. After the weight processing is completed, the function "RET" is executed, the caller's star character advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is returned, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA1" is completed by the function "Stop".

Next, the control of the right star accessory 5002c will be described with reference to FIG. 314. The right star accessory 5002c appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is executed using the right star accessory 5002c scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC03" specified at the time of execution by the function "RQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA2" is started, as shown in FIG. 314, the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_RGT" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the right star accessory 5002c. .. Subsequently, the weight processing "NOP: 300" of 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This weight time is the operating time of the right star accessory 5002c. After the weight processing is completed, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

Finally, the control of the middle star accessory 5002b will be described with reference to FIG. 315. The middle star accessory 5002b appearance scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is executed using the middle star accessory 5002b scheduler data scheduler "MOT_SHC04" specified at the time of execution by the function "RQ".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_HYA3" is started, as shown in FIG. 315, the motor regeneration process "MPLAY" is executed by designating the parameter "PTA_HYA_MID" indicating the appearance operation mode (pattern) of the middle star accessory 5002b. .. Subsequently, the weight processing "NOP: 300" of 300 frames (10 seconds) is executed. This weight time is the operating time of the middle star accessory 5002b. After the weight processing is completed, the processing is terminated by executing the function "STOP" without returning to the processing of the scheduler data of the caller.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the scheduler data for operating the left star accessory 5002a, the scheduler data for operating the right star accessory 5002c and the scheduler data for operating the middle star accessory 5002b are combined with the function "RQ". By executing using, it is possible to operate each accessory in parallel. That is, the operations of each accessory can be executed in parallel without any special control by executing the scheduler data defined individually as needed. The advantage of executing scheduler data in parallel is that a single accessory operation can be described without being aware of other schedulers. Furthermore, when performing multiple operations corresponding to the notice pattern with one scheduler, the number of combinations becomes enormous, the scheduler data becomes complicated, and the number of data becomes enormous. By calling the scheduler data in parallel, the minimum number of scheduler data can be created and called for easy control. In the present embodiment, an example in which three types of accessories are operated in parallel has been described, but it is possible to execute more accessories in parallel as long as the operation of the accessories is not hindered. From the above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to operate a plurality of accessories in parallel without requiring complicated control, and it is possible to easily realize a variety of effects.

[17-7-5. Motor control for logo accessory fall notice]
Subsequently, the control of the logo accessory fall notice executed in the latter half of the variation in the present embodiment will be described. The logo character fall notice is executed independently of the group notice and the star character notice. The logo accessory fall notice is a notice effect in which the logo accessory 5001 imitating the logo of the gaming machine operates so as to fall vertically in front of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the probability of occurrence of a jackpot is higher than usual. Indicates that is high.

As shown in FIG. 310, the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment is driven by driving the logo accessory fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" with the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" (logo accessory scheduler data scheduler). Will be executed. It is also possible to operate the logo accessory 5001 with the common scheduler (MOT_SCH06-10).

FIG. 316 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO” that controls the motor in the logo accessory fall notice of the present embodiment.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is started, the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_GAT" is first executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_LGO_GAT". Specifically, the logo accessory 5001 rattles. At this time, the motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_LGO" and the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO" as parameters. NS.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", and based on the contents of the button logo accessory notice work area "YKK_LGO", sets the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify. The button logo character fall notice execution lottery result is stored in the button logo character fall notice work area "YKK_LGO", and if the button logo character fall notice execution lottery is missed, "0: not executed", button Execution of logo fall notice If the lottery is won, "1: Logo fall notice execution" is set. The result of the execution lottery of the button logo accessory fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO".

While "0: Not executed" is set in the button logo character notice work area "YKK_LGO", in the button logo character fall notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the logo character fall notice unexecuted motor scheduler The data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_NON" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_LGO: TBL_YKK_LGO" of the calling scheduler "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" (function "LOOP"). Therefore, if the button logo accessory fall notice execution lottery is missed, the loop processing is executed 90 times, the loop processing is exited, the function "STOP" is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends. ..

On the other hand, when "1: Logo fall notice execution" is set in the button logo character notice work area "YKK_LGO", that is, when the button logo character fall notice execution lottery is won, the button logo character falls. In the notice lottery result branch call table "TBL_YKK_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" at the time of executing the logo accessory fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button logo accessory fall notice button branch call address table. It is executed with "TBL_MOT_LGO" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button logo accessory fall warning button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO" and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". As in the case of the button cut-in notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and if the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF" and the effect button are operated. If so, "1: Button ON" is set. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button logo accessory fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO".

While "0: Button OFF" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" when the logo character fall warning button is OFF. Is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" of the calling scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the button logo accessory fall notice is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function "STOP" is released from the loop processing. It is executed and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the motor scheduler when the logo character fall notice button is ON in the button logo character fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_LGO". The data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON" is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_LGO_BTNON", first, the function "COMMAND: COM_LGO_ON" is executed. The function "COMMAND" is a function for issuing a command when executing scheduler data. Here, the command "COM_LGO_ON" is issued. The command "COM_LGO_ON" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_DOWN" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_LGO_ON". The parameter "PTA_LGO_DOWN" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the logo accessory 5001. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds). At this time, the logo accessory 5001 performs a falling operation for 3 seconds, and stops at the falling position for the remaining 1 second.

Further, by executing the function "MPLAY: PTA_LGO_INI", the logo accessory 5001 is moved from the drop position to the initial position. Subsequently, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), during which the logo accessory 5001 is returned to the initial position. After the weight processing is completed, the execution of the logo character drop operation is completed, so the function "MEMW: YKK_LGO: 0" is executed, the button logo character notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", and the caller's scheduler It returns to immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_LGO" of the data "SUBC_YKK_LGO_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO". It returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO", but since the button logo character notice lottery result is rewritten to "0: not executed", the scheduler data "PTA_LGO_DOWN" that drops the button logo character is executed. The remaining number of loops is processed, and the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_LGO" is terminated by the function "STOP".

As described above, by internally issuing a command when dropping the logo accessory 5001, the effect can be displayed on the liquid crystal display only when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped and at the timing when the logo accessory 5001 is dropped. realizable. In the present embodiment, by using the function "COMMAND", it is possible to link a plurality of types of production devices and execute them as needed at an appropriate timing, and it is possible to execute a more interesting production. ..

In this embodiment, the function "COMMAND" is used to display the effect on the liquid crystal on the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. However, by processing the command issued by the function "COMMAND" on the program side, the control can be changed from the scheduler to the program. By returning once, performing complicated processing that cannot be handled by function commands, and writing the processing results to the work area used by the subsequent scheduler, it is possible to perform processing that cannot be controlled by function commands. In addition, the merit of issuing a command in the scheduler data is that the command issuance timing is used as the processing timing as it is, so that time management and execution judgment by a program are not required. In addition, it is possible to interactively process an external input (button, jog dial, touch pad) by a user that is not determined in advance at the start of fluctuation, issue a command using the function "COMMAND", and perform the processing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the function "COMMAND" has a function of transmitting a fixed value command, but a work area is specified instead of a fixed value, and the contents of the work area are transmitted as a command. You may.

[17-8. Scheduler data application example (when the power is turned on)]
Subsequently, the scheduler data executed on the peripheral control board 1510 when the power of the gaming machine is turned on will be described. Here, the control from the power-on of the gaming machine to the start of the game and the start of the first variation display will be described.

[17-8-1. Outline of processing]
FIG. 317 is a drawing for explaining scheduler data executed when the power of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is turned on. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, a power-on command is output from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510.

When the scheduler execution unit 5060 receives the power-on command, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" drives the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON".

When the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" is executed, the sub-internal state transition scheduler is executed in a predetermined order, and the scheduler data corresponding to the sub-game state (sub-internal state) is started. As the scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON" progresses, the liquid crystal display screen displays a screen corresponding to the sub-internal state, for example, a standby screen, a maker demo screen, a model demo title screen, a goto prevention screen, etc., as shown in FIG. 317. Will be done. At this time, the main game state is the standby state. When the waiting state ends, the game is started, and when the game ball wins the starting winning opening, the main game state and the sub internal state transition to the changing state.

[17-8-2. Power-on control]
Next, a configuration for processing various commands and scheduler data will be described. FIG. 318 is a diagram illustrating a configuration for processing commands and scheduler data on the peripheral control board 1510 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and the relationship between these configurations.

As described above, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on or when a predetermined event occurs in the game control on the main control board 1310, the main command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received by the peripheral control board 1510. NS. As described with reference to FIG. 298, the main command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 of the system module 5100, and is analyzed by the main command analysis process in the command analysis module. The command analysis module specifies the type of event generated by the main command analysis process. Then, the effect control unit 5020 acquires layer data from the layer data storage unit 5030 based on the analysis result of the main command, and determines the block control information (effect block number). Further, the effect block control unit 5040 acquires the effect block data corresponding to the block control information (effect block number) determined by the effect control unit 5020 from the effect block data storage unit 5050. Further, the scheduler specified by the acquired effect block data is started, and the scheduler data specified by the acquired effect block data is executed.

Further, when the function "COMMAND0" (FIG. 307) is executed and a command is output from the scheduler, the output command is stored in the main command buffer 5110 and analyzed by the main command analysis process in the same manner as the main command. Will be done.

When the main command or the command output by the function "COMMAND0" is received, the command for executing the control on the peripheral control board 1510 is generated by the main command analysis process. The generated commands include commands for starting the scheduler and commands for controlling various production devices (commands for sub-internal output).

The command to start the scheduler includes, for example, the scheduler data for performing control corresponding to the change in the gaming state on the main control board 1310 and the change in the sub-internal state due to the progress of control on the peripheral control board 1510, and the main control board such as the start winning prize. The scheduler data for executing the effect corresponding to the event notified from 1310, the scheduler data defined so that the various effect devices operate in a series of modes, and the like are executed. In the present embodiment, in addition to starting the scheduler directly from the command, it is possible to start another scheduler by the function "RQ" included in the scheduler data.

On the other hand, the command for controlling the effect device (sub-internal output command) is, for example, a liquid crystal command for displaying a predetermined image on the liquid crystal display device. The command for controlling the effect device is output by the function "COMMAND" included in the scheduler data, in addition to the case where it is output based on the result of analyzing the main command. The commands that control the effect device are temporarily stored in the sub-internal output command buffer, and are processed in the order in which they are stored from the beginning of the buffer.

When the command for controlling the effect device (command for sub-internal output) is taken out from the command buffer for sub-internal output, the module (liquid crystal module 5400, sound module 5500, lamp module 5600) that creates output data to the corresponding effect device. , Drive module 5700). The created output data is stored in the corresponding buffers (liquid crystal display list command buffer 5120, lamp data output buffer 5130, motor data output buffer 5140) as needed, and is stored by being passed to each effect device. Drive data of each effect device is generated (selected) based on the value, and each effect device is driven and controlled.

Further, the command buffer for sub-internal output is provided with an appropriate capacity corresponding to each module. For example, when issuing a command to a sound module, the value of the sound number is set for the sound command designation area in the area assigned to the sound module. Specifically, "COMMAND: SOUND_NO: PAT01" is set, and a sound command (PAT01) is specified as a parameter in the sound number designation area (SOUND_NO) by the function "COMMAND" and set. As a result, the sound module 5500 selects the setting data corresponding to the sound command using the value specified in SOUND_NO as the sound command, and outputs the setting data to the liquid crystal and the sound control unit 1512.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by further invoking another scheduler from the scheduler, it is possible to execute a plurality of schedulers in a hierarchical combination by receiving one main command. This makes it possible to integrate various controls on the peripheral control board 1510 into parts for each scheduler data, and by combining schedulers, it is possible to implement multiple types of effects in parallel while realizing various effect controls. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of gaming machines, such as streamlining debugging work.

Further, in the present embodiment, the command analysis process can be standardized by the command output by the function "COMMAND0". This makes it possible to standardize the scheduler data selection logic and function parameter determination logic by command analysis, which causes problems such as the need to manage a huge number of scheduler data combinations in a table. Can be suppressed.

Subsequently, the activation of the scheduler and the execution of the scheduler data when a command at power-on is received from the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 319 is a diagram illustrating a process of executing scheduler data when the power of the present embodiment is turned on.

As described with reference to FIG. 318, when the power is turned on to the gaming machine and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 1310, the power-on command is analyzed by the main command analysis process and the scheduler. The sub-state scheduler is started by the start process, and the corresponding scheduler data is executed in sequence. In executing each scheduler data, the function "COMMAND0" is executed and a command is issued to create a sub-internal state, and further, a lamp or a sound corresponding to the sub-internal state is output as needed.

To specifically explain the scheduler to be executed, first, the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH" is used to execute the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON". In the state power-on scheduler data "SCH_STS_POWERON", the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_TAIKI" in the standby state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", the standby state is set for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_MDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_MDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO" is executed using the sub state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" is executed. As a result, the lamp lighting is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_MDEMO" in the manufacturer demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 300", the standby state is set for 300 frames (10 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues the command "COM_STS_KDEMO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" is executed. As a result, the lamp lighting is started based on the lamp lighting pattern "PTA_LAMP_KDEMO" in the model demo state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 900", the standby state is set for 900 frames (30 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_GOTO" to transition to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_KDEMO" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed.

Subsequently, when the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" is executed using the sub-state scheduler "SUB_SCH", the function "KPLAY: PTA_LAMP_GOTO" is executed. As a result, the lighting of the lamp is started based on the lighting pattern of the lamp data "PTA_LAMP_GOTO" in the anti-goto state. Further, by executing the function "SPLAY: PTA_SND_GOTO", sound reproduction is started based on the sound data "PTA_SND_GOTO" in the anti-goto state. After that, by executing the function "NOP: 450", the standby state is set for 450 frames (15 seconds). After the standby state ends, the function "COMMANDO" issues a command "COM_STS_TAIKI" that transitions to the next internal state, and stops the scheduler.

The command "COM_STS_TAIKI" is processed by the "main command analysis process", and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI" corresponding to the next sub-internal state is executed. The gaming machine is in a playable state at this stage, and the state standby scheduler data "SCH_STS_TAKI", the state maker demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_MDEMO", the state model demo scheduler data "SCH_STS_KDEMO", and the state goto prevention scheduler data "SCH_STS_GOTO" are sequentially processed. It is executed in a loop, and when the game ball wins a prize and the fluctuation of the symbol is started, the loop is interrupted and the scheduler data for starting the fluctuation is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set the internal state of the peripheral control board 1510 only by receiving the power-on command transmitted from the main control board. Specifically, the function "COMMAND0" can be controlled as if the main control board 1310 issued a command. For example, the initialization command at power-on may have a fixed parameter value, and is transmitted from the main control board 1310 by outputting the command with the function "COMMAND0" instead of the main command from the main control board 1310. It is possible to reduce the number of main commands. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity of the game control program of the main control board 1310, which is particularly effective when the capacity of the game control program is limited.

[17-9. Application example of scheduler data (effect 2)]
Next, an example of executing the hatchet accessory fall notice instead of the button cut-in notice and the button logo accessory fall notice will be described. The hatchet fall notice is divided into the first half and the second half, and the first half notice and the second half notice are executed in cooperation with each other. At this time, control different from the control described so far is performed in that control such as inheriting the parameters used in the first half notice to the second half notice is performed.

[17-9-1. Outline of production]
FIG. 320 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect in a series of variation display from the start to the stop of the variation of the special symbol in the present embodiment, and FIG. 320 (A) shows the effect executed from the start to the end of the variation and the effect. The scheduler data for executing the effect and the scheduler to be executed are shown, and (B) is a diagram for explaining the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory fall notice.

In the series of fluctuation displays shown in FIG. 320 (A), the step-up notice and the button (BTN) hatchet first half fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet fall notice, are executed in the first half of the fluctuation. After that, a reach occurs, a group notice is executed in the latter half of the fluctuation, and a hatchet character second half fall notice is executed following the button hatchet character first half fall notice that has been continued from the first half. In each notice effect, scheduler data for controlling lighting of a lamp, sound output, image output, operation of an accessory, and the like is executed. The content of the step-up notice is as described above.

Next, the contents of the hatchet fall notice will be described with reference to FIG. 320 (B). As described above, the hatchet fall notice is divided into a button (BTN) hatchet first half fall notice and a hatchet second half fall notice.

In the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice, which is the first half, the notice effect proceeds by operating the effect button. Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won, the drop effect of the hatchet accessory 5003 is not executed unless the effect button is operated. On the other hand, in the latter half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, the effect is executed based on the result of the execution lottery of the hatchet accessory second half fall notice, regardless of the operation of the effect button.

When the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won and the effect button is operated at a predetermined timing, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls to the middle position. Further, if the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped to the middle position and the execution lottery for the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is dropped to the lower position. That is, the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the upper part (upper stage position, initial position) to the center (middle stage position) in the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice, and falls to the lower part (lower stage position) in the latter half. In addition, if the execution lottery of the hatchet accessory second half fall notice is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 will fall to the lower part regardless of the position. Further, when the hatchet accessory fall notice is completed, the hatchet accessory 5003 returns to the upper part (initial position).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 320 (B), the hatchet accessory fall notice is produced in six different patterns. Specifically, if the result of the lottery for executing the first half of the button hatchet fall notice is non-winning, it does not depend on the operation of the production button, so that the second half of the hatchet role fall notice is not won (Pattern 1). And there is a case of winning (Pattern 2). In the case of the pattern 1, since the button hatchet accessory first half fall notice and the hatchet accessory second half fall notice are not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 does not fall and is maintained without moving from the upper part. In the case of pattern 2, the hatchet accessory 5003 is located at the upper part without falling in the hatchet accessory fall notice, while the hatchet accessory 5003 is located from the top to the bottom because the execution lottery was won in the hatchet accessory second half fall notice. It falls at a stretch.

Execution of the button hatchet first half fall notice When the lottery is won, the effect mode of the button hatchet first half fall notice differs depending on whether or not the effect button is operated. Therefore, the hatchet accessory fall notice can be executed in four patterns depending on whether or not the effect button is operated and the result of the execution lottery for the hatchet accessory fall notice.

If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet and do not operate the production button, and if the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet is not won, the hatchet 5003 will not fall. It remains located at the top (Pattern 3). If the result of the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice is won and the effect button is operated, and the result of the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet accessory fall notice is not won, the hatchet accessory 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. Drops from the top to the middle and remains in the middle until the hatchet fall notice ends (Pattern 4).

If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet and do not operate the production button, and if you win the lottery for the second half of the hatchet fall notice, you have not operated the production button, so the hatchet role The hatchet accessory 5003 is located at the upper part without falling until the second half fall notice of the object is started, and falls from the upper part to the lower part in the second half fall notice of the hatchet accessory (pattern 5). If you win the execution lottery for the first half of the button hatchet, operate the production button, and then win the execution lottery for the second half of the hatchet, the hatchet 5003 will start from the top when you operate the production button. It falls to the middle, and further falls from the top to the bottom in the notice of the fall of the hatchet in the second half (Pattern 6).

As described above, in the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment, six patterns of effect modes can appear, and the scheduler data for controlling the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the hatchet accessory fall notice will be described below. Specifically, the button hatchet first half fall notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the button hatchet first half fall notice shown in FIG. 320 (A) and the hatchet accessory second half. The latter half of the hatchet accessory fall advance notice motor scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the operation of the hatchet accessory 5003 in the fall notice will be described.

[17-9-2. Various controls for hatchet fall notice]
FIG. 321 is a diagram for explaining the contents of the button hatchet first half fall notice scheduler data “SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1” that controls the motor in the button hatchet first half fall notice, which is the first half of the hatchet accessory fall notice of the present embodiment. .. As described above, when the execution lottery of the first half fall notice of the button hatchet accessory is won, the operation of the effect button is accepted for 3 seconds by the function "LOOP", and the hatchet accessory 5003 is operated when the effect button is operated. Perform the production to make. Execution of the first half of the button hatchet accessory fall notice If the lottery is not won, and the effect button is not operated even if the lottery is won, the hatchet accessory 5003 ends without operating. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" for the first half of the button hatchet.

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA1_STA" is executed, and the drawing of the effect when the hatchet accessory 5003 is rattled on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_GAT" is executed, and then the weight processing "NOP: 30" for 30 frames (about 1 second) is executed. As a result, the designated operation is performed for 1 second based on the operation pattern data "PTA_NTA_GAT". Specifically, the hatchet accessory 5003 rattles.

Subsequently, a loop process for 3 seconds is executed in order to receive the input of the effect button from the player. Specifically, the function "LOOPST" is executed with the number of parameter loops set to 90. As described above, in the loop processing, the function between "LOOPST" and "LOOP" is repeatedly executed. Therefore, the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1" is executed up to 90 times.

Explaining the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA1: TBL_YKK_NTA1", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" uses the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA1" and the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" as parameters. Will be executed.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", and based on the contents of the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address of. Button hatchet first half fall notice The work area "YKK_NTA1" stores the result of the execution lottery for the button hatchet first half fall notice, and if the lottery for the button hatchet first half fall notice is not won, "0:: "Non-winning", "1st half of the hatchet character fall notice execution" is set when the lottery is won. Execution of the button hatchet first half fall notice The result of the lottery corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1".

Button hatchet first half fall notice When "0: Non-winning" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA1", the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA1" The motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is selected when the first half fall notice is not executed. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_NON" is only the function "STOP", and the result of the button hatchet first half fall notice lottery is "non-winning". End the execution of.

On the other hand, when "1: Hatchet first half fall notice execution" is set in the button hatchet first half fall notice work area "YKK_NTA1", that is, when the button hatchet first half fall notice execution lottery is won. , Button hatchet first half fall notice Lottery result In the branch call table "TBL_YKK_NTA1", the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" at the time of executing the hatchet fall notice is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" is the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1", and the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is the target scheduler work number "YKK_BTN" and the button hatchet first half drop notice button branch address. It is executed with the table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" as a parameter.

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1" for the first half of the button hatchet, and specifies the start address of the scheduler data to be the branch destination based on the contents of the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN". .. As in the case of the button cut-in notice and the button logo accessory fall notice, the operation state of the effect button is stored in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", and when the effect button is not operated, "0: button OFF". , "1: Button ON" is set when the effect button is operated. The operation state of the effect button corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the button hatchet first half fall notice branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1".

Button ON_OFF While "0: Button OFF" is set in the work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatchet first half fall notice button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1", the button hatchet first half fall notice Button OFF motor scheduler The data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is selected. The content of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNOFF" is only the function "RET", and returns immediately after the function "SUBC: YKK_BTN: TBL_MOT_NTA1" of the calling scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA1_DOWN" (function "RET"). This further returns to the function "LOOP" of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1". Therefore, even if the execution lottery for the first half fall notice of the button hatchet is won, if the input of the effect button is not detected during the 90 loop processing, the function "STOP" is exited from the loop processing. Is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" ends.

On the other hand, when "1: Button ON" is set in the button ON_OFF work area "YKK_BTN", the button hatchet first half fall notice button is turned ON in the button branch call address table "TBL_MOT_NTA1". The hour motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON" is selected. As for the contents of the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_BTNON", first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-MID" is executed, and the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-MID" is a command for causing the game board side effect display device 1600 to start drawing the effect when the hatchet is dropped, and is issued to the effect control unit 5020.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-MID" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-MID". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to an intermediate position. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 falls to an intermediate position.

Finally, by executing the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 1", "1" is written in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, and it is recorded that the hatchet accessory 5003 has moved to the intermediate position. After that, the execution of the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1" is terminated by the function "STOP".

Button, which is the first half of the hatchet character fall notice When the hatchet character first half fall notice is completed, the hatchet character second half fall notice, which is the second half, is started. FIGS. 322 and 323 are diagrams illustrating the contents of the hatchet second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" that controls the motor in the hatchet second half fall notice, which is the latter half of the hatchet fall notice of the present embodiment. be. The motor scheduler "MOT_SCH01" is used to execute the hatchet character second half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" in the same manner as the button hatchet character first half fall notice scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA1".

When the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is started, first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA2_STA" is executed, and drawing of an effect suggesting whether or not the hatchet 5003 falls on the game board side effect display device 1600 is started. .. After that, the weight processing "NOP: 90" of 90 frames (about 3 seconds) is executed. Since the expectation of a big hit increases when the hatchet 5003 falls, the player's expectation is increased by drawing the effect for 3 seconds.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2". In the function "SUBC: YKK_NTA2: TBL_YKK_NTA2", the scheduler work area index branch call "SUBC" is executed with the target scheduler work number "YKK_NTA2" and the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" as parameters. ..

The scheduler execution unit 5060 refers to the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", and based on the contents of the hatchet second half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the scheduler data to be the branch destination. Identify the start address. The result of the execution lottery for the hatchet second half fall notice is stored in the work area "YKK_NTA2". If the lottery is won, "1: Execution of the hatchet second half fall notice" is set. The result of the execution lottery for the hatchet second half fall notice corresponds to the index (address) of each record of the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2".

Hatchet second half fall notice 2 When "0: Non-winning" is set in the work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall When the notice is not executed, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_NON", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result Branch based on.

When "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice is not announced in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". The run-time motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When "0: initial position" is set, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON" is selected when the hatchet second half fall notice is not executed in the branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON". NS. In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_NON", the function "RET" is executed to return to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2". After that, the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler is overwritten with "0: initial position", and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is terminated.

On the other hand, when "1: Intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2NON" shows the hatchet first half drop. The motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is selected when the advance notice is executed and the second half fall notice is not won.

In the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" when the hatchet first half fall notice is executed and the second half fall notice is not won, the weight process "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is first executed. In the weight processing executed here, as will be described later, when the hatchet accessory 5003 is in the lower position, it becomes a waiting time for returning to the intermediate position. Here, since the hatchet accessory 5003 is originally in the intermediate position, it waits for 4 seconds.

After the weight processing is completed, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_MID-TOP" is executed to return the hatchet 5003 from the intermediate position to the initial position. Further, in order to secure the operation time of the hatchet 5003, the weight processing "NOP: 120" of 120 frames (about 4 seconds) is executed, and the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2" is restored by the function "RET".

In addition, when "1: hatchet second half fall notice" is set in the hatchet second half fall notice 2 work area "YKK_NTA2", the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2" Motor scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN" is selected at the time of winning the second half fall notice of the accessory. In the scheduler data "SUBC_YKK_NTA2_DOWN", the function "SUBC: SCH_MEM_NTA: TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" and the hatchet fall notice 2 branch call address table "TBL_ ..

When "0: Initial position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half fall notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" has not been announced. Execution / Second half drop notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 323), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_STA-END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_STA-END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 240" executes a weight process of 240 frames (about 8 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the initial position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 has reached the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), and continues drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed. The parameter "PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is pattern data for performing an operation of returning the hatchet 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position.

Subsequently, the function "CALLSUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed, and the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" described above is called to return the hatchet 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

On the other hand, when "1: Intermediate position" is set in the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler, the hatchet second half drop notice lottery result branch call address table "TBL_YKK_NTA2DOWN" shows the hatchet first half drop. Notice execution / second half fall notice At the time of winning, the motor scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" is selected.

In the scheduler data "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_DOWN" (FIG. 323), first, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_MID-END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_MID-END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 falls from the intermediate position to the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 executes the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_STA-END" within the same frame as the issuance of the command "COM_NTA_STA-END". The parameter "PTA_NTA_STA-END" is pattern data for performing an operation of dropping the hatchet 5003 to the lower position. Further, the function "NOP: 120" executes weight processing for 120 frames (about 4 seconds), during which the hatchet 5003 is dropped from the intermediate position to the lower position.

Then, at the timing when the hatchet 5003 moves to the lower position, the function "COMMAND: COM_NTA_END" is executed and the command "COM_NTA_END" is issued. The command "COM_NTA_END" is a command for starting the drawing of the effect that the hatchet 5003 has reached the lower position on the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the function "NOP: 90" executes weight processing for 90 frames (about 3 seconds), and continues drawing the effect on the game board side effect display device 1600.

Here, in order to match the timing when the hatchet accessory 5003 falls from the initial position to the lower position and the operation to start the operation of returning the hatchet accessory 5003 to the initial position, 120 frames (about 120 frames) are used by the function "NOP: 120". Weight processing for 4 seconds) is executed. This time is the time until the hatchet accessory 5003 moves from the initial position to the intermediate position.

After that, the function "MPLAY: PTA_NTA_INIT_END-MID" is executed in the same manner as in the case of "SUBC_MOT_NTA1_NON_NTA2_DOWN" to return the hatchet 5003 from the lower position to the intermediate position. Further, the function "CALLSUBC_MOT_NTA1_DOWN_NTA2_NON" is executed to return the hatchet 5003 from the middle position to the initial position. After that, the function "RET" returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

When the hatchet 5003 returns to the initial position and returns to the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2", the function "MEMW: SCH_MEM_NTA: 0" is executed, and the value of the hatchet position information work area "SCH_MEM_NTA" for the scheduler is set to "0: initial position". And terminates the scheduler data "SCH_MOT_YKK_NTA2".

In the hatchet fall notice, the scheduler data is divided into the first half and the second half, and the operation of the hatchet 5003 in the second half differs depending on whether or not the player operates the effect button in the first half. Therefore, it is possible to specify the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 by writing the position of the hatchet accessory 5003 using the function "MEMW" in the first half and acquiring the position information written in the second half. .. As a result, the amount of movement of the motor can be determined for each position of the hatchet accessory 5003, and it is possible to execute the effect according to the operation result of the effect button by calling the corresponding scheduler data.

Further, even in the return operation to the initial position after the operation of the hatchet 5003, the common scheduler data is called by the movement from the intermediate position to the initial position, so that the entire scheduler data can be simplified.

The function "MEMW" can refer to a common value by writing a fixed value in a predetermined area when executing the scheduler data and referencing it when executing other scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to specify a value indicating a state that changes due to the execution of a plurality of scheduler data at the time of executing each scheduler data. The process can be completed only by defining the scheduler data without creating scheduler data in. As a result, even if the scheduler data requires different processing depending on the state, the required number can be suppressed to the minimum, the creation and debugging of the scheduler data can be made more efficient, and the management can be facilitated. Further, in the present embodiment, the function is to write a fixed value, but by specifying the work name as a function parameter instead of the fixed value, data can be passed from the program side and processing based on command information can be performed. Can be performed on the scheduler, and more complicated processing can be performed on the scheduler. A peculiar feature of the function "MEMW" is that even information that has not been determined at the start of execution of scheduler data including the function "MEMW" can be processed if the information is determined by the time the function "MEMW" is executed. This enables control of the effective time and interactive control.

[17-10. Scheduler data configuration example (variation pattern)]
The flow of executing a series of advance notice effects has been described above. The execution content of such a series of advance notice effects is drawn by lottery based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310. Furthermore, specific production contents are drawn for each notice production.

Hereinafter, the procedure for controlling the execution of a series of advance notice effects based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310, and the basic effects related to these series of advance notice effects and variation patterns (regardless of the lottery other than the advance notice effects). The structure of the scheduler data for executing the background effect and the effect related to the pattern effect, which are produced and are one-to-one with the variable pattern, will be described.

In the present embodiment, the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop of the change is managed in block units (effect sections) divided into predetermined constituent units. The block is, for example, from the start of the symbol fluctuation to the occurrence of reach, or until the symbol stops when no reach occurs (first half fluctuation), and from the occurrence of reach to the stop of the symbol (second half fluctuation). ), From the stop of the symbol to the end of the change. In addition, a time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is assigned to each block, and the execution timing and execution time of the advance notice effect within the allotted time are defined. The time corresponding to each block and the data related to the basic effect to be executed are combined to form block data.

In addition, the block division rule divides the same basic effect part as common block data and the part with a difference in the basic effect of the liquid crystal display as block data when comparing the basic effects related to fluctuations in a plurality of fluctuation patterns. do. With reference to FIG. 324, in the LCD effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, which stores the combination of the LCD effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment, the variation pattern “10H01H” is normally varied for 6 seconds. It is a loss, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 6 seconds, and then the design of the loss is produced. Since the 6-second effect of normal fluctuation and the loss stop effect are also used in other fluctuation patterns, they are divided into the 6-second liquid crystal effect block data (LCD01_BLK) of normal fluctuation and the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) of stop loss.

The fluctuation pattern "10H02H" is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, and the normal fluctuation is performed for 12 seconds, and then the design of the loss is produced. Since the 12-second effect of normal fluctuation is also used for other fluctuation patterns, it is divided as the 12-second liquid crystal display block data (LCD03_BLK) of normal fluctuation, and the pattern effect of loss is exactly the same as the variation pattern "10H01H". As the liquid crystal effect block data for stopping loss, the liquid crystal effect block data (LCD02_BLK) for stopping loss, which is divided into liquid crystal display blocks according to the fluctuation pattern "10H01H", is commonly used. Similarly, for other fluctuation patterns, the parts that have already been converted into block data for the basic effect are used in common, and the parts that are different are newly converted into block data.

As described above, by blocking, the common basic effect part becomes a unique number of block data, and for all fluctuation patterns and basic effects such as jackpots other than fluctuations, by combining unique LCD effect block data. , It is possible to realize basic effects such as all fluctuation patterns and jackpots other than fluctuations. It is also important that the total amount of production data to be created is significantly reduced, but the main purpose of blocking is a liquid crystal display that includes a specific basic effect when there is a change in a specific basic effect. The change is reflected in all fluctuation patterns that use block data.

Regarding the liquid crystal display in this embodiment, since the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source is controlled, the format and function are completely different from the scheduler data of sound, lamp, and accessory in this embodiment, but the basics are for each block data. The configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the effect and the drawing scheduler data for the advance notice effect are combined is the same as the sub-effect block data that controls the sound, the lamp, the accessory, and the like. In addition, the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display includes frame information, still image and video material IDs, display position information, enlargement / reduction information, rotation angle information, and colors related to the effects related to pictures and movies displayed in the background and patterns. It is composed of functions that can specify control information for generating a display list command for the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, such as information and alpha information, and also indicates the type and execution timing of the effect related to the advance notice effect that occurs in the block data. Information to be shown is embedded.

Further, in the present embodiment, the block data for variablely displaying the identification symbol on the liquid crystal display device is defined as the liquid crystal symbol block data separately from the block data for performing other liquid crystal effects. This makes it possible to make the control for variable display of the identification symbol independent of the control of other liquid crystal displays. For example, even when the shape of the identification symbol is differently displayed in a variable manner, a common notice effect can be obtained. It can be executed on a liquid crystal display device. The drawing scheduler data for displaying the symbol has the same format and function as the drawing scheduler data for the liquid crystal display. Further, the configuration in which the drawing scheduler data for the basic effect and the drawing scheduler data for the advance notice effect related to the design are combined for each block data has the same configuration as the sub-effect block data and the liquid crystal effect block data described above. The drawing scheduler data for symbol display has the same configuration and function as the drawing scheduler data for liquid crystal display, and in addition, information for specifying the mode of variable display of the identification symbol is embedded.

FIG. 324 is a diagram for explaining a liquid crystal display effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, which stores combinations of liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 325 is a diagram for explaining a liquid crystal symbol block data combination number (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variable pattern that stores a combination of liquid crystal symbol block data corresponding to the variable pattern command in the present embodiment. FIG. 326 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) that stores combinations of sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern command in the present embodiment.

The liquid crystal display block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each fluctuation pattern is a table that holds information indicating the combination of liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. For example, with respect to the variable pattern number, unique numbers that specify the constituent liquid crystal display block data are held in chronological order. For example, when the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H", it is composed of "LCD03_BLK" indicating a normal fluctuation for 12 seconds in the first half fluctuation, "LCD04_BLK" indicating a normal short reach in the second half fluctuation, and "LCD02_BLK" indicating a stoppage. Will be done. At this time, "LCD03_BLK", "LCD04_BLK", and "LCD02_BLK" are stored in this order. In this way, the configurations of the basic effect and the advance notice effect can be defined (realized) by connecting the liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 324, the same liquid crystal display block data is used in the same effect section. For example, when the first half fluctuation is a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds, "LCD03_BLK" is used regardless of the content of the advance notice effect actually executed. As a result, the number of liquid crystal display block data can be realized by a unique number corresponding to the type of fluctuation, and the liquid crystal display block data can be uniquely specified for each fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 325, the fluctuation pattern-specific liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) holds information indicating the combination of block data for each fluctuation pattern, similarly to the fluctuation pattern-specific liquid crystal effect block data combination number table. .. Further, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined with a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal effect block data of the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Further, as shown in FIG. 326, the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern provides information indicating the combination of block data for each variation pattern, similarly to the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. Hold. Further, the sub-effect block data corresponding to the variation pattern number is defined with a configuration (same combination, same effect time) corresponding to the liquid crystal display block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data having the same variation pattern number on a one-to-one basis.

Next, the procedure for executing the advance notice effect based on the scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern will be described. Here, the execution procedure of the basic effect and the advance notice effect based on the effect scheduler data corresponding to the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” will be described. First, the outline of the procedure for executing the effect control based on the liquid crystal effect block data, the effect control based on the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the effect control based on the sub effect block data will be described. FIG. 327 is a diagram illustrating an outline of effect control of the first half variation (normal variation 12 seconds) of the variation pattern “10H03H” in the present embodiment.

When the fluctuation pattern command (main fluctuation-related command) "10H03H" is received from the main control board 1310, the fluctuation pattern number "10H03H" is specified by analyzing the command received by the command analysis module 5200, and the effect control unit 5020 is notified. Notice.

As described with reference to FIG. 300, the effect control unit 5020 determines the layer to be used, determines the block data number corresponding to the layer, and sets each variation pattern number “10H03H” based on the determined block number. The corresponding block data number is acquired from the liquid crystal effect block data combination number table (LCD_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, the liquid crystal symbol block data combination number table (ZUG_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern, and the sub-effect block data combination number table (SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO) for each variation pattern. do. By setting all the block data numbers corresponding to each effect device to the same number, it is possible to execute all the effects of each effect device in synchronization.

Then, the effect control unit 5020 transmits block data numbers for the total number of layers to the liquid crystal display block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub-effect block control unit 5320.

After that, the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310 is the liquid crystal effect 1f scheduler execution unit 5331, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311 is the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332, and the sub effect block control unit 5320 is the sub effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 ( According to 5334), the block data corresponding to the transmitted block data number is executed in chronological order. Specifically, the liquid crystal display 1f scheduler execution unit 5331 has a normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal effect block data "LCD03_BLK" corresponding to the first half fluctuation, and the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler execution unit 5332 has a normal fluctuation 12-second liquid crystal symbol block data "ZUG03_BLK". The sub-effect 1f (1 ms) scheduler execution unit 5333 (5334) executes the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for 12 seconds, which is a normal fluctuation.

When the processing of the liquid crystal display block data is started, one or a plurality of liquid crystal display 1f schedulers corresponding to the liquid crystal display block data are activated, and the drawing scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The drawing scheduler data includes liquid crystal function information for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device, specifies parameters according to the content of the effect, and transmits the liquid crystal function information to the liquid crystal module 5400 in a predetermined order. The liquid crystal module 5400 analyzes and executes the received liquid crystal function information, and transmits a DISPLAY list to the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to draw a drawing on the liquid crystal display device.

Further, when processing the liquid crystal symbol block data, the liquid crystal symbol 1f scheduler is activated, and the drawing scheduler data according to the variation display mode of the identification symbol is executed. The procedure for drawing on the liquid crystal display device is the same as that for processing the liquid crystal effect block data.

On the other hand, when the processing of the sub-effect block data is started, one or a plurality of sub-effect 1f (1 ms) schedulers corresponding to the sub-effect block data are started, and the scheduler data specified according to the effect content is executed. The scheduler may be prepared according to the execution cycle, or may be shared and the execution cycle may be set at startup.

As described above, the scheduler data includes an effect data designation function for controlling an effect device such as a lamp (“KPLAY”), a speaker (“SPLAY”), and an accessory (“MPLAY”). It is configured to execute the specified effect by sequentially executing the effect data specification functions in the defined order. The effect data designation function is transmitted to modules (lamp module 5600, sound module 5500, drive device (motor) module 5700, etc.) corresponding to the effect device to be controlled, and each module executes the effect by various effect devices.

It is also possible to call other scheduler data from the scheduler data by the function "REF, EQUF". It is possible to control various effect devices by executing the effect data designation function in the scheduler data called at this time. Further, by using the command transmission function "COMMAND" or "COMMAND0", it is possible to control by a command instead of a function. For example, by transmitting a liquid crystal command to the liquid crystal module 5400 at the timing of executing the effect data designation function that controls the operation of the accessory, the operation and drawing of the accessory are linked as in the above-mentioned hatchet accessory fall notice effect. It is possible to execute the effect.

Here, a procedure for executing the effect control using the sub-effect block data will be described. FIG. 328 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control start processing for each variation pattern related to the variation pattern layer of the present embodiment.

The effect block control unit 5040 selects a variation pattern layer in the effect control unit 5020 based on the variation pattern number notified from the command analysis module 5200, and changes the control of the block data number for each variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern. Control is started using the pattern-specific sub-effect block data combination number table (FIG. 326). The row position of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (FIG. 326) is set in the row index of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern (step P7001). For example, in the table shown in FIG. 326, if the fluctuation pattern number is "10H01H", "0" is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern number is "10H03H". For example, since it is the third row, "2" (row-1) is set in the sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern.

Next, the effect block control unit 5040 initializes the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each variation pattern with “0” (step P7002). It starts from the sub-effect block data corresponding to the first column of the specified row (sub-effect block data combination number table row index for each variation pattern). Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 executes the sub-effect block data control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern by the scheduler execution unit 5060 (step P7003). As a result, the scheduler for executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is started, and the scheduler data included in the sub-effect block data is executed.

FIG. 329 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control activation process for each variation pattern of the present embodiment.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the variation pattern sub-effect block data combination number table based on the row and column indexes (step P7011). Further, the sub-effect block data number table row index is initialized with "0" (step P7012). As a result, the processing is started from the first record of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern specified from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern.

Subsequently, the scheduler execution unit 5060 activates the scheduler data registered in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern (step P7013). The scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect registered in the sub-effect block data number table (FIG. 331 (B)) for each variation pattern. Specifically, each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice (see FIG. 331)) is supported from the sub-effect block data number table based on the sub-effect block data number table row index. Acquire sub-effect block data. One or more scheduler data is registered in the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice), and the corresponding scheduler is defined for each scheduler data. ing. When a plurality of scheduler data are registered, one or a plurality of scheduler data are associated with each other based on the lottery result of the advance notice.

Further, the scheduler execution unit 5060 updates the sub-effect block data number table row index when all the scheduler data defined in the sub-effect block data has been started, and the sub-effect block data number table row index has a fluctuation pattern. It is determined whether or not the number of elements in the row of the separate sub-effect block data number table has been exceeded (step P7014). When the number of elements in the row of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is exceeded (the result of step P7014 is “YES”), the sub-effect block data control activation process is terminated. On the other hand, if the number of sub-effect block data number table row elements for each variation pattern is not exceeded (the result of step P7014 is "NO"), the next sub-effect block data is processed.

FIG. 330 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern of the present embodiment. In the sub-effect block data control update process for each fluctuation pattern, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each fluctuation pattern is included. This is a process for executing the next sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern when the execution of all the scheduler data of is completed. The sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is executed periodically, and the execution status of the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is monitored.

First, the scheduler execution unit 5060 acquires the number of the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern from the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern by using the row and column indexes of the sub-effect block data combination number table for each variation pattern. (Step P7021). As a result, the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) constituting the sub-effect block data number table for each variation pattern is specified and defined in the sub-effect block data. It is determined whether or not the scheduler being executed is being executed (whether or not the operations of all the schedulers have been completed) (step P7022). If it is being executed (the result of step P7022 is "YES"), the execution of the scheduler is continued as it is, and the sub-effect block data control update process is terminated.

Next, the scheduler execution unit 5060 operates all the schedulers of the sub-effect block data corresponding to each effect (background sub-effect block data, sub-effect block data corresponding to the notice) defined in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern. When is completed (the result of step P7022 is “NO”), the sub-effect block data combination number table column index for each fluctuation pattern is incremented, and whether or not the next column data is the end data (“DATA_END”). Is determined (step P7023). If it is end data (the result of step P7023 is "YES"), since a series of effects have been completed, the sub-effect block data control update process for each variation pattern is terminated.

On the other hand, when the next column data is not the end data (the result of step P7023 is "NO"), the scheduler execution unit 5060 performs sub-effect block data for each variation pattern (next effect block data) corresponding to the next column data. In order to start the execution of the effect based on the above), the sub-effect data block control scheduler activation process for each variation pattern is executed (step P7024).

As described with reference to FIGS. 324, 325 and 326, the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is defined in association with the liquid crystal effect block data and the liquid crystal symbol block data, and the corresponding block data is executed at the same timing. By making the execution time of each block data the same, it is possible to synchronize the effect control by the liquid crystal display scheduler, the effect control by the sub effect scheduler, and the effect control by a plurality of schedulers. In addition, by blocking, if the fluctuation pattern is the same, the number of activations of the effect block and the scheduler defined in the effect block will always be the same regardless of the combination of effects and the appearance of the effect, and the program The complexity of the can be reduced and, as a result, the quality can be improved.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by synchronizing the effect control by one or more liquid crystal display schedulers and sub-effect schedulers, it is possible to link the operations of various effect devices, and there is a wide variety of feelings without discomfort. The production can be executed. In addition, since scheduler data having the same execution time can be executed in parallel, scheduler data that controls various production devices should be independently developed and operation confirmed for each production device and block data. Is possible, and development efficiency can be improved.

FIG. 331 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect of the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern “10H03H” of the present embodiment, and FIG. 331 is a diagram showing the timing of executing the basic effect and the advance notice effect and the said. The execution time of the advance notice effect, (B), shows the structure of the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern. The sub-effect block data for each variation pattern includes background sub-effect block data and notice sub-effect block data for executing the background effect and the notice effect. In FIG. 331 (B), two types of sub-effect block data, background block data and advance notice block data, are combined, but the number of sub-effect block data can be varied.

As shown in FIG. 331, the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern constituting the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern “10H03H” are “SCH03_BLK” (normal fluctuation 12 seconds), “SCH04_BLK” (normal short reach), and “SCH02_BLK” ( Loss stop). The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern corresponds to 12 seconds from the start of fluctuation to the stop of the left symbol and the right symbol. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the period in which the left symbol and the right symbol stop at the same identification symbol and the normal short reach is executed. The sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the period in which the middle symbol is stopped, the result of the variation display is confirmed as a loss, and the confirmed symbol is displayed.

In the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. Block data is defined. Further, in the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK", the sub-effect block data of the cut-in notice and the group notice and the sub-effect block data related to the background are defined. Further, in the sub-effect block "SCH02_BLK", the advance notice effect sub-effect block data is not defined, but the sub-effect block data related to the background is defined. In the figure, the execution of the advance notice effect is not duplicated, but a plurality of advance notice block data may be defined and executed so that a plurality of advance notice effects are duplicated. The contents of each notice effect shown in FIG. 331 are as described above.

Hereinafter, the effect control by each sub-effect block data will be described. As shown in FIG. 331 (B), two types of sub-effect block data in the variation display of the variation pattern “10H03H” are executed in parallel. First, the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each fluctuation pattern will be described.

In the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background, the background sub-effect block data of 12 seconds of normal fluctuation is defined. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal fluctuation 12-second background are defined in the normal fluctuation 12-second background sub-effect block data. Since the background sub-effect block data with a normal fluctuation of 12 seconds is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as that of the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK". Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" is completed.

The sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice defines the function "NOP", the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data, and the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal display scheduler, and is defined to perform a sub-effect according to the liquid crystal display. In the step-up notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the step-up notice are defined. The step-up notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data. The BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data defines the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the BTN logo accessory fall notice. The BTN logo accessory fall notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the BTN logo accessory fall notice LCD effect block data. As the symbol stop notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the symbol stop notice are defined. The symbol stop notice sub-effect block data has the same effect time as the symbol stop notice LCD effect block data. The sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-mentioned sub-effect block data.

By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the effects defined in the sub-effect block data by the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor are executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. Will be done.

At this time, from the start of fluctuation to the start of the first liquid crystal display block data (step-up notice), from the end of the liquid crystal effect block data corresponding to each liquid crystal notice effect to the liquid crystal display block data corresponding to the next liquid crystal display notice effect. Function until the start of, and from the end of the liquid crystal display block data corresponding to the last liquid crystal display notice effect (design stop notice) to the end of the execution of the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern. "NOP" is executed and waits for the specified time. In this way, by controlling the appearance timing of the sub-effect scheduler data corresponding to each liquid crystal effect block data in the scheduler block for each fluctuation pattern by the function "NOP", the scheduler is sequentially executed at the execution timing of each advance notice effect by a program or the like. If the corresponding scheduler data is started without instructing the execution of the data, it is possible to execute the effect of each effect device corresponding to the liquid crystal notice effect at the designated timing. Further, it is assumed that the last function "NOP" of each scheduler data in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern does not have to be.

The execution time of the advance notice effect set by the scheduler data that controls the effect device such as the lamp, the sound, and the accessory is defined as a common time for each advance notice effect. As a result, the time from the start of the control by the sub-effect block data to the execution of each advance notice effect is uniquely determined, so that the control timing of each effect device can be synchronized.

Further, the time information at the time of executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is managed as a relative value from the start of executing the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, not from the start of the fluctuation. As a result, when the same sub-effect block data for each variation pattern is used in a plurality of variation patterns, each effect in the sub-effect block data for each variation pattern has an effect start time from the start of the variation for each variation pattern. Although it will be different, since the time value is relatively managed in the sub-effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, it can be processed without any problem. Similarly, in the case of the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern, the relative value from the start of execution of the liquid crystal effect block data for each fluctuation pattern is managed, and in the case of the liquid crystal symbol block data for each fluctuation pattern, the liquid crystal symbol block for each fluctuation pattern is also similarly managed. It is managed by the relative value from the start of data execution.

Next, the sub-effect block data “SCH04_BLK” for each variation pattern will be described. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern corresponds to the normal short reach, but at this time, two types of sub-effect block data are executed in parallel.

Normal short reach background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. In the normal short reach background sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normal short reach background are defined. Since the normal short reach background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the production time is the same as the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is completed.

The function "NOP", the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, and the group notice sub-effect block data are defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the notice. The function "NOP" serves as a weight for synchronizing with the liquid crystal display effect scheduler, and is defined to execute a sub effect in accordance with the liquid crystal effect. In the cut-in notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the cut-in notice are defined. The cut-in notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the cut-in notice liquid crystal display block data. In the group notice sub-effect block data, the sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the group notice are defined. The group notice sub-effect block data has the same production time as the group notification liquid crystal display block data. The sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern is configured by combining and executing the above-mentioned sub-effect block data.

By executing the above sub-effect block data in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect block data, the scheduler data of each sound, lamp, and motor defined in the sub-effect block data is executed in synchronization with the liquid crystal effect. It will be.

Further, the sub-effect block data "SCH04_BLK" for each variation pattern has the same number of sub-effect block data columns as the sub-effect block data "SCH03_BLK" for each variation pattern, but the number of sub-effect block data columns may increase or decrease. no problem.

Finally, in the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" for each variation pattern, since the effect related to the advance notice is not performed, only the loss stop background sub-effect block data is executed. Loss stop background sub-effect block data is defined in the sub-effect scheduler data related to the background. The sub-effect scheduler number and the sub-effect scheduler data related to the normally fluctuating 12-second background are defined in the loss stop background sub-effect block data. Since the loss stop background sub-effect block data is scheduler data related to the background, the effect time is the same as that of the sub-effect block data “SCH02_BLK”. Therefore, it is continuously executed until the sub-effect block data "SCH02_BLK" is completed.

FIG. 332 is a diagram illustrating the relationship between the liquid crystal display effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern according to the present embodiment. The liquid crystal effect block data for each variation pattern and the liquid crystal symbol block data for each variation pattern differ only in the function executed in the scheduler data in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data from the function executed in the scheduler data in the sub effect block data. Since the data format and the control method are common to each other, the description thereof will be omitted.

Subsequently, the configuration of the sub-effect block data will be described by taking the step-up effect described with reference to FIG. 301 as an example. First, an outline of creating LCD effect scheduler data for step-up notice will be described. FIG. 333 is a diagram showing an image of creating a drawing data file for each step-up effect unit (step-up 1 effect to 4 effect) using the video composition / motion creation graphic tool for the step-up notice for the liquid crystal display of the present embodiment. be.

The drawing data file is created in units of step-up effects, and is composed of a series of effects that combine still images and moving images. Further, as shown in FIG. 333, the drawing data file is converted into the liquid crystal display effect scheduler data in the present embodiment by the tool in the step-up effect unit.

The reason why the drawing data file is not created one-to-one with the liquid crystal notice effect (step-up notices 1 to 4) is that, for example, when only the step-up 1 effect is changed, four types of step-up notices as in the present embodiment are used. If is feasible, it is necessary to change the drawing data files for 4 lines, and considering the work time required for the change and the risk of omission of correction, the drawing data files are created in a unique number for each step. This is because it is more efficient to realize the notice in combination.

FIG. 334 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the effect block data of the step-up notice of the present embodiment. (A) shows the structure of the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data, and (B) shows the structure of the step-up notice sub-effect block data. As described above, four types of step-up notices can be executed in the present embodiment, but step-up notices 1 and 2 are shown in (A) and (B). In the step-up notices 3 and 4, the step-up 3 effect and the step-up 4 effect are executed at predetermined timings.

Explaining the step-up notice LCD effect block data, first, it is decided whether to execute any of the step-up notices 1 to 4 based on the lottery result value of the step-up notice acquired at the start of the fluctuation. NS. If the lottery result value of the step-up notice is not won, the step-up notice LCD effect block data is not executed, so that the step-up notice is not executed and drawing is not performed on the liquid crystal display device.

On the other hand, if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 1, the step-up notice 1 of the step-up notice LCD effect block data is selected, and if the lottery result value of the step-up notice is the step-up notice 2. Step-up notice The step-up notice 2 of the liquid crystal effect block data is selected, and the corresponding effect block data is selected. The effect block data of the step-up notice 2 operates in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 for executing the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 for executing the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data in parallel.

In the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01, when the step-up 1 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed, the operation in the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH01 is terminated because the data to be executed next is "DATA_END".

Further, the function "NOP" is executed by the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02, the weight is performed for the time specified by the parameter, and then the step-up 2 liquid crystal effect scheduler data is executed. Step-up 2 After the liquid crystal display scheduler data execution is completed, the next data to be executed is "DATA_END", so the operation of the liquid crystal scheduler LCD_SCH02 is terminated.

As described above, by combining the effect scheduler data of the advance notice in the minimum configuration unit, it is possible to realize a plurality of variations of a single advance notice.

Subsequently, the step-up notice sub-effect block data will be described with reference to FIG. 334 (B). The step-up notice sub-effect block data is configured such that the step-up notice liquid crystal display block data has a one-to-one correspondence with the block configuration and the execution time. As a result, it is possible to dynamically synchronize all the effect devices with respect to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result of the advance notice, and it is possible to realize the effect with a sense of unity.

The step-up notice sub-effect block data differs from the step-up notice liquid crystal effect block data only in the function executed by the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the function executed by the sub-effect scheduler data. Since the data format and control method are common, the description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control board 1310, the sub-effect block data stored in the data access order is acquired from the sub-effect block data combination table "SCH_CTL_BLOCKDATA_NO" for each fluctuation pattern. Then, by executing the scheduler data included in the acquired sub-effect block data according to the data access order, it is possible to execute the basic effect and the advance notice effect defined in a predetermined order and at a predetermined timing. ..

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler data that controls various effect devices can be executed in parallel, and the scheduler data that is executed at the same timing is defined at the same execution time, so that the various effect devices can be used. The production can be synchronized. Further, when the execution of the scheduler data is started, a predetermined operation is subsequently performed at the timing set in the scheduler data. As a result, only by executing the corresponding block data based on the information that identifies the effect content such as the fluctuation pattern, the scheduler data defined in a layered manner is automatically acquired, and the effect is executed at the defined timing. It is possible to do.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since a plurality of schedulers can be started and the scheduler data can be executed independently by each scheduler, it is possible to develop a plurality of types of scheduler data in parallel, which greatly improves the development efficiency. Can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the scheduler is configured to analyze the scheduler data described in a predetermined format and control the effect device. Therefore, even when the control mechanism of the gaming machine (for example, the peripheral control board 1510 or the arithmetic unit included in the peripheral control board 1510) is updated, the common scheduler can be installed by installing the scheduler corresponding to the new gaming machine. Data can be used. That is, the scheduler has a function as middleware for executing common scheduler data on different platforms, and it is possible to utilize software assets related to production control of gaming machines for a long period of time.

The scheduler in this embodiment may be realized by software or hardware. When the scheduler is realized by software, the scheduler started when the scheduler data is executed may be stopped after use to free up the used area of the memory. Memory usage can be reduced by stopping the scheduler. For example, it may be released when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the scheduler data is completed, or it may be stopped except for the minimum scheduler when the gaming machine is in the customer waiting state.

[17-11. Modification example of production block]
As described above, in the flow of executing the effect in the present embodiment, the main command is received from the main control board 1310, and the main command is analyzed by the input command analysis unit 5010. Then, based on the analysis result, the effect control unit 5020 acquires the block data numbers for all layers from the layer data table and transmits the block data as block control information to the effect block control unit 5040.

As described above, the effect block control unit 5040 is composed of the liquid crystal effect block control unit 5310, the liquid crystal symbol block control unit 5311, and the sub-effect block control unit 5320. The sub-effect is controlled by the sub-effect block control unit 5320. Further, the advance notice effect is executed according to the liquid crystal effect executed on the liquid crystal display device, and is controlled so that the sub effect is executed at a predetermined timing in the liquid crystal display.

The effect block control unit 5040 specifies the effect block data (liquid crystal effect block data 5051, liquid crystal symbol block data 5052, sub effect block data 5053) based on the block control information. In the effect block data described so far, the scheduler data to be executed and the execution start timing of each scheduler data are specified. As shown in FIG. 334, when the effect block data processing is started, the scheduler data Waits by the NOP function until the start of execution of.

On the other hand, a modified example in which the effect control is performed by the scheduler data without including the function in the effect block data will be described. FIG. 335 is a diagram for explaining an example of effect control based on the effect block data of the modified example of the present embodiment, (A) is an example of the effect block data, and (B) describes the execution timing of each scheduler data. It is a figure. The target effect in FIG. 335 is a battle notice effect in which two robots fight, and the robot on the player side executes a development effect and a chance effect according to the progress of the effect, either first or second.

With reference to FIG. 335 (A), the effect block data of the present modification is specified as scheduler data, a scheduler that executes the scheduler data, and an execution start timing of the scheduler data. The data in the dotted line in FIG. 335 (A) corresponds to the content of the effect block data, and the item names in the upper row are described for easy understanding. In addition, "execution" on the left side indicates scheduler data in which "◎" is executed, and scheduler data in which "-" is not executed.

Explaining each item of the effect block data, the "effect mode flag address" is information indicating whether or not the effect can be executed, and specifically, information indicating that the effect (scheduler data) corresponding to each line is executed (effect mode). The address of the area where the flag) is stored. For example, when "00H" is set in the area of BTL_SEN, the scheduler data of the bank is not executed, and when "01H (effect mode flag)" is set, the scheduler data of the bank is executed. .. When "Implementation" in FIG. 335 (A) is "⊚", "01H (effect mode flag)" is set, and when "-", "00H" is set. When it is determined to "execute" after judging the consistency of the command analyzed by the command analysis module 5200, the lottery of the effect corresponding to the received command is performed, and the lottery result is the corresponding value (effect mode flag). ) Is stored in the area specified by the "effect mode flag address" such as BTL_SEN corresponding to the effect.

The "start frame position" is the execution start timing of the scheduler data, and the "end frame position" is the execution start timing of the scheduler data, which are set according to the frame position in the liquid crystal display corresponding to the effect block data. The values of the "start frame position" and the "end frame position" are set to the start time ("0") of the effect corresponding to the effect block data, where the time from the start to the end of the series of fluctuations is the absolute time. It is a relative time with a frame ").

The "scheduler" is the identification information of the scheduler to be executed. The "scheduler data" is identification information of "scheduler data" executed by the "scheduler", and may be an address or the like indicating a storage position instead of a name.

Explaining the effect control of the battle notice effect, first, the effect (scheduler data) to be executed is selected based on the fluctuation pattern and the like, and the effect mode flag is set in a predetermined area. In the effect block data shown in FIG. 335 (A), "battle first effect" or "battle second attack effect" is first selected and either one is executed, and then "battle development effect" is executed. Whether or not the "battle development production" can be executed is judged. Finally, "battle chance production" is executed. There are multiple types of "battle chance production", and it is decided whether one of the productions is executed or not at all.

When the effect to be executed (scheduler data) is selected, the scheduler data is executed by starting the scheduler corresponding to the effect to be executed. In each scheduler data, the effect is started at the timing specified by the "start frame position", and the effect is continued until the timing specified by the "end frame position". In this modification, in FIG. 335 (B), the start timing of the scheduler data is such that the background is shaded during the period when the effect is actually executed, and the background is set to white during the period of waiting until the execution is started. There is. The effect block control unit 5040 manages the frame time from the start of the effect block data in block units, and "◎" is set in "implementation" (the effect mode flag is set) in the line. When the frame corresponding to the "start frame position" is reached, the scheduler to be executed is started and the specified scheduler data is executed.

To explain the flow of the battle notice effect, first, at the same time as the processing of the effect block data of the battle notice effect is started, the scheduler data whose "start frame position" is 0 (0f * "f" indicates a frame) is executed. Whether it is possible or not is judged. In the example of FIG. 335, the "start frame position" is 0 for the "battle first production" (BTL_SEN) and the "battle second attack production" (BTL_KOU), and the "implementation" is "◎" (production). The scheduler corresponding to the "battle preemptive effect" (with the mode flag set) is started, and the scheduler data is executed by the scheduler. At this time, the scheduler data of the “post-battle attack effect” for which the effect mode flag is not set is not executed and is ignored. "Battle preemptive production" includes production by lamps and production by sound output. Although the "battle first-come-first-served effect" includes the liquid crystal display, the explanation is omitted here and only the control of the sub-effect is explained. The same applies thereafter.

In the production by the lamp of the "battle first-come-first-served effect", the scheduler data "battle_first-come-first-served 01" is executed by the scheduler "LMP_SCH01". Similarly, in the production by outputting the sound of the "battle first-come-first-served effect", the scheduler data "battle_first-come-first-served 02" is executed by the scheduler "SND_SCH01". These scheduler data are executed in parallel on each scheduler.

When the time has passed, the effect block control unit 5040 can execute the "battle development effect" (BTL_HTN) on the 5th to 7th lines at the timing when the timer for time measurement managed in frame units becomes "211f". To judge. Since the effect mode flag is set in the area corresponding to BTL_HTN, the designated scheduler is started and the corresponding scheduler data is executed.

The "battle development production" includes a production by a movable body (motor) in addition to a production by a lamp and a sound output. In the production by the lamp of the "battle development production", the scheduler data "battle_development 01" is executed by the scheduler "LMP_SCH02". In the production by sound output, the scheduler data "Battle_Development 02" is executed by the scheduler "SND_SCH02". In the production by the movable body (motor), the scheduler data "Battle_Development 03" is executed by the scheduler "MOT_SCH01". The "battle development production" is executed in parallel with the "battle preemptive production".

Subsequently, the effect block control unit 5040 stops the activated scheduler in order to end the scheduler data executed for performing the "battle development effect" at the timing when the timer for time measurement becomes "251f". Further, when the timer for time measurement reaches "360f", the activated scheduler is stopped in order to end the scheduler data executed for performing the "battle preemptive effect".

It should be noted that the stop of the scheduler being started does not have to be specified by the effect block control unit 5040 as long as it is specified in each scheduler data. If not specified, it is not necessary to set the value of the end frame position in the effect block data, and the data structure can be simplified. However, in order to prevent a problem from occurring due to an error in the scheduler data and the scheduler being executed even if the scheduler, which should have been stopped originally, becomes the start frame of another effect, the effect block control unit 5040 is used. It is desirable to have a configuration in which the data is stopped twice. Further, when the predetermined effect is repeatedly executed for a predetermined period, the effect block control unit 5040 is set in the effect block data because it is not configured to specify the stop of execution inside the scheduler data. It is necessary to forcibly stop at the timing when the end frame position is reached. In this way, by stopping the execution of the scheduler data by the effect block control unit 5040, it is possible to use the same scheduler data even when the effect for different periods is executed according to the fluctuation pattern or the like. Development efficiency can be improved.

Finally, the effect block control unit 5040 determines whether or not the “battle chance effect” (BTL_CUP1, BTL_CUP2) on the 8th to 12th lines can be executed at the timing when the timer for time measurement becomes “361f”. Here, since the effect mode flag is set in the area corresponding to BTL_CUP2, the designated scheduler is started and the corresponding scheduler data is executed.

"Battle chance production 2" includes a production by a lamp, a production by sound output, and a production by a movable body (motor). In the production by the lamp of "Battle Chance Production 2", the scheduler data "Battle_Chance 21" is executed by the scheduler "LMP_SCH03". In the production by sound output, the scheduler data "Battle_Chance 22" is executed by the scheduler "SND_SCH03". In the production by the movable body (motor), the scheduler data "Battle_Chance 23" is executed by the scheduler "MOT_SCH02". After that, it is executed until the end frame and the process defined by the effect block data is terminated.

As described above, as shown in FIG. 335 (B), the effect block control unit 5040 starts the scheduler data by the timer for time measurement to execute the scheduler data at a timing designated with reference to the start of processing of the effect block data. Then execute each scheduler data. As a result, it is possible to omit the NOP function for adjusting the execution start timing of each scheduler data, and it is possible to simplify the structure of the effect block data.

Further, by controlling the liquid crystal display to execute the corresponding scheduler data in a predetermined frame, it is possible to omit the NOP function for adjusting the execution start timing of each scheduler data and the timer for time measurement. As a result, the liquid crystal display and the sub-effects are more closely linked, and the effects by each effect device are integrated, which makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

[18. LCD production scheduler data production control]
Subsequently, the details of the liquid crystal display scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal display effect block data will be described. The liquid crystal display effect scheduler data is composed of a combination of functions that control the effect target, like the sub effect block data. In the sub-effect block data, sound output, lamp lighting, operation of the drive device, etc. were controlled targets, but in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, drawing on the liquid crystal display device is controlled.

[18-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
First, a function (liquid crystal display scheduler function) that constitutes liquid crystal display scheduler data will be described. The liquid crystal display scheduler function is a command (function, command) for effect control described in the liquid crystal display scheduler data constituting the liquid crystal display block data described above, and a command is sent to the sound source built-in VDP1512a by the liquid crystal display scheduler function. Send and perform the production. In addition, when executing the liquid crystal display scheduler function, the attributes of the displayed object (for example, color, shape, operation content, etc.) can be changed by specifying parameters.

[18-1-1. Scheduler function for LCD production]
FIG. 336 is a diagram showing an example of the liquid crystal display scheduler function of the present embodiment. The outline of each liquid crystal display scheduler function will be described below.

Each liquid crystal display scheduler function is managed for each group. In this embodiment, there are groups of coordinate setting, scale setting, rotation angle setting, α setting, frame setting, Z index setting, effect SW setting, and subscheduler setting.

First, the functions belonging to the coordinate setting group will be described. The function belonging to the coordinate setting group is for setting the liquid crystal display object by designating the coordinates of the display area of the liquid crystal display device, for example. This makes it possible to specify and display the position of the liquid crystal display object.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_POSZ" specify the X-axis coordinate position, the Y-axis coordinate position, and the Z-axis coordinate position, respectively, and set the display position of the liquid crystal display object.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORX" specifies the X-axis coordinate position, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORY" specifies the Y-axis coordinate position to set the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANCHORXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions and sets the liquid crystal display target anchor point position. The liquid crystal display target anchor point position is the center position of the liquid crystal display target object.

Next, the group to which the function for scaling (scale setting) the display target (still image, moving image) belongs will be described. Scaling is, for example, setting the center of a designated display area to be enlarged or reduced when displaying on a liquid crystal display device from the size of a still image or moving image stored on the CGROM, or converting the unit of coordinates. It is to do. By setting an appropriate coordinate system in the display area and performing the drawing process, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed at an appropriate position and size.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" belong to the scale setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALE" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEX" specifies the X-axis value and sets the coordinates of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEY" specifies the Y-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEZ" specifies the Z-axis value and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXY" specifies the X-axis and Y-axis values and sets the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SCALEXYZ" specifies the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis values to set the enlargement or reduction ratio of the liquid crystal display object.

Next, the group to which the function for setting the angle when rotating and displaying the liquid crystal display object belongs will be described. By storing only the reference liquid crystal display object in the CGROM and displaying it by specifying the angle, it is not necessary to store a plurality of the rotated liquid crystal display objects, and the increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. can.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" belong to the rotation angle setting group. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEX" specifies the X-axis value, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEY" specifies the Y-axis value, and the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEZ" specifies the Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object. Further, the function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ANGLEXYZ" specifies an X-axis value, a Y-axis value, and a Z-axis value to rotate the liquid crystal display object.

Next, other functions will be described. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ALPHA" is an α setting process, and specifically, the α value is specified to set the transparency of the liquid crystal display object. The α value is a numerical value indicating transparency, and can be set from transparent (colorless) that completely transmits the background color to completely opaque that does not allow the background color to pass through at all.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAME" is a frame setting process, and specifically, a frame value which is a drawing update interval of a liquid crystal display object is set. The frame value is a numerical value indicating an interval for redrawing the liquid crystal display object during animation processing.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_ZINDEX" sets the Z index of the liquid crystal display object. The Z-index is a hierarchy for displaying the liquid crystal display object, and by setting this, the liquid crystal display object can be displayed on the front side or moved to the back side on the screen. For example, when the liquid crystal display object is the background, the Z index is set so that it is drawn on the backmost surface.

The functions "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW", "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW", and "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" belong to the effect SW setting group for setting information about the effect SW. Although the details will be described later, the effect SW is information incorporated in the control information for drawing (image, moving image), and by detecting this information, a predetermined process is called back and the effect content is switched. , Perform another production. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_LCDSW" sets the effect SW information in the still image index number on the CGROM and the moving image index number on the CGROM in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_FRAMELCDSW" sets the frame effect SW information for the entire LCD effect scheduler data. The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_KICKLCDSW" sets the SW information that defines the special control information described later in the liquid crystal display scheduler data.

The function "LCD_FUNC_TYPE_SUBSCH" is a function for calling the subscheduler. By defining highly versatile processing as a subscheduler and calling back at a predetermined timing, it is possible to simplify the processing and improve the development efficiency.

[18-1-2. Scheduler function parameters for LCD production]
The example of the liquid crystal display scheduler function used in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above. Next, the parameters specified when the scheduler function for liquid crystal display is executed will be described with an example. 337 and 338 are diagrams showing an example of parameters for the liquid crystal display scheduler function in the present embodiment.

The parameters of the liquid crystal display scheduler function are managed for each group in the same manner as the liquid crystal display scheduler function. The liquid crystal display scheduler function group and the parameter group are divided into different groups. The parameter group includes sequence control, effect SW, footage setting, symbol replacement related, sub-effect scheduler function, and the like.

The sequence control parameter groups include "AAD_FRAME", "AAD_POS", "AAD_POS2", "AAD_POS3", "AAD_ALPHA", "AAD_ANGLE", "AAD_ENTRY", "AAD_ENTRY_B", "AAD_SKIP", "AAD_SKIP_B", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_SCALE", "AAD_SCALE", and "AAD_SCALE". ] Etc. are included. Hereinafter, each parameter will be described.

"AAD_FRAME" is a parameter for specifying a frame value and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS" is a parameter for specifying the X-axis coordinate position and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS2" is a parameter for setting the X-axis and Y-axis coordinate positions, each having a length of 16 bits. "AAD_POS3" is a parameter for setting the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis coordinate positions, each having a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_ALPHA" is a parameter for designating the α value which is the transparency of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 8 bits. "AAD_ANGLE" is a parameter for designating the rotation angle of the liquid crystal display object, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_ENTRY_B" is a parameter that specifies the total number of data of the parameter to be set, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SKIP" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SKIP_B" is a parameter that specifies the number of frames to be skipped during the liquid crystal display, and is two parameters divided into 8-bit lengths.

"AAD_SCALE" is a parameter that specifies a scale value when the coordinate system of the display area is one axis, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE2" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has two axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SCALE3" is a parameter that specifies the enlargement or reduction ratio when the coordinate system of the display area has three axes, and each has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SIZE" is a parameter that specifies the size of the liquid crystal display object on the XY2 axes, and each has a length of 16 bits.

The parameter group of the effect SW includes "AAD_LCDSWENTRY", "AAD_LCDSW", "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM", "AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY", "AAD_KICKLCDSW", "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY", "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" and the like.

"AAD_LCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered production SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_LCDSW" is a parameter for designating the number of the effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length numerical values. "AAD_LCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

"AAD_KICKLCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered kick effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_KICKLCDSW" is a parameter that specifies the number of the kick effect SW, and specifies two 16-bit length numerical values. "AAD_FRAMELCDSWENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the total number of registered frame effect SWs, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_FRAMELCDSW_PARAM" is a parameter for passing the frame effect SW number, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of footage setting parameters includes "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY", "AAD_SEQFOOT" and the like. "AAD_SEQFOOTENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of still images to be registered in a predetermined area, and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SEQFOOT" is a parameter that specifies the index number of the still image stored in the CGROM, and has a length of 16 bits.

The group of parameters related to symbol replacement includes "AAD_ZUGARA" and the like. "AAD_ZUGARA" is a parameter for designating the symbol index number and has a length of 16 bits.

The parameter group of the sub-effect scheduler function includes "AAD_SUBENTRY", "AAD_SUB", and the like. "AAD_SUBENTRY" is a parameter that specifies the number of subscheduler function parameters and has a length of 16 bits. "AAD_SUB" is a parameter that specifies the subscheduler function number and has a length of 16 bits.

[19. Communication with various boards when executing the setting function]
As described above, in a gaming machine having a setting function, the setting function (confirmation of setting information (“setting confirmation”) and change (“setting change”)) can be executed when a specific operation unit is operated. The method of activating the setting function and the like are as described above, but the processing on the main control board side and the timer interrupt processing when the power is turned on will be described with another example.

In this embodiment, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on and when the setting information is changed, the main control recognition information, which is the information for recognizing the main control board 1310, is transmitted to the ball information control board (payout control board 951). .. The main control recognition information includes, for example, the chip ID number of the main control MPU 1311. As a result, the ball information control board determines whether the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310) installed in the gaming machine is legitimate, and if it is not determined to be legitimate, ball information control is performed. The board can stop the operation related to the prize ball, making it possible to prevent fraud such as falsification of the main control MPU 1311 (main control board 1310), and change the setting information on the main control board 1310 to change the ball information control board. Can be reflected at an appropriate timing.

[19-1. Initialization process]
First, the initialization process (Another Example 5) in the present embodiment will be described. 339 and 340 are flowcharts showing the initialization process of the fifth embodiment. In the initialization process of the fifth embodiment, in addition to the initialization process described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22, a process related to the setting function is added, and a process related to the calculation of the accessory ratio is omitted. It is not necessary to omit the processing related to the calculation of the accessory ratio, and it is excluded for the sake of simplification.

When the power is turned on to the gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 performs the power-on processing. Specifically, first, the stack pointer is set (step P10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address loaded on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the storage element (register) in use, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and returned to this routine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step P10, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are pushed onto the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by reading in order from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack. The power-on processing corresponds to the processing of steps P10 to P52.

Following step P10, the main control MPU 1311 performs wait timer processing 1 (step P12) and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step P14). It should be noted that the voltage does not rise immediately between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the predetermined voltage is reached. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is suddenly stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is sent from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board as a power failure warning. It is output and input to the main control MPU. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage between the time when the power is turned on and the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board.

Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step P12 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (waiting timer). ms) is set. The determination in step P14 is performed based on the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board. After the power is turned on, when the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes, the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit becomes no output, and the process proceeds to step P16.

Proceeding to step P16, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear switch (FIG. 76) is operated (step P16). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated and the operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is operated, while when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch is not operated.

When it is determined in step P16 that the RAM clear switch is being operated, the main control MPU 1311 sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value 1 (step P18) and proceeds to step P30, while in step P16 the RAM When it is determined that the clear switch is not operated, the value 0 is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step P19), and the process proceeds to step P20.

This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU 1311 (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in RAM"), and is a game related to a game such as a probability fluctuation or an unpaid prize ball. It is a flag indicating whether or not to delete the information, and is set to a value of 1 when the game information is deleted and a value of 0 when the game information is not deleted. The values of the RAM clear notification flags RCL-FLG set in steps P18 and P19 are stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Proceeding to step P20, the main control MPU 1311 executes a combination authentication process for determining whether or not the combination of the main control MPU 1311 and the MPU of the ball information control board is appropriate. The frame maker identification information output from the ball information control board is stored in the frame maker identification information storage unit of the main control MPU 1311, and it is authenticated whether or not the appropriate frame maker identification information is output. If the authentication is properly performed, the process proceeds to step P30, while if it is determined that the authentication is not proper, an abnormality notification is performed using a speaker, a liquid crystal display device, or the like.

When the main control MPU shifts to step P30, the wait timer process 2 is performed (step P30). In this wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1600 by the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted). In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as the time until booting (boot timer).

When the wait timer process 2 (step P30) is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is an operation for changing the setting information in the present embodiment (step P3031). The operation of changing the setting information is not an operation for confirming the setting information, but an operation for changing the setting information.

When there is an operation to change the setting information (the result of step P3031 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 advances the game after the power is turned on based on the new setting information, so that the main control MPU 1311 is stored in the storage area. In order to clear the game information, the processes after step P44 are executed.

On the other hand, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 when there is no operation for changing the setting information (the result of step P3031 is "NO"), and clears the RAM. The process is branched based on the value of the notification flag RCL_FLG (step P32). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the game information is not erased, the checksum is calculated (step P34). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total.

Following step P34, in the main control MPU 1311, the calculated checksum value (sum value) coincides with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the power-off processing (power-off) described later. Whether or not it is determined (step P36). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step P38). Whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG stores the backup information such as the game information, the checksum value (sum value), and the backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing described later. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the power-off processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the power-off processing is not normally completed.

When the backup flag determination process (step P38) is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is an operation for confirming the setting information (step P3038). If there is an operation for confirming the setting information (the result of step P3038 is "YES"), the setting confirming information indicating that the setting information is being confirmed is set (step P3039). In order to prevent the game from being continued when the setting information is being confirmed, it is possible to control not to execute the process related to the game or the prize ball by setting the setting confirmation information. If there is no operation to confirm the setting information (the result of step P3039 is "NO"), or after setting the setting confirmation information (step P3039), the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as the time of power recovery. (Step P40). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (hereinafter, referred to as "main control built-in ROM"), and this power recovery is performed. The time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" means that the power is turned on from the state where the power is cut off, the state where the power is restored after the power failure or momentary power failure, and the state where high frequency is irradiated is detected and reset. The state of returning after that is also included.

Following step P40, the main control MPU 1311 performs a command creation process at power-on (step P42). In this power-on command creation process, game information is read from backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step P32 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not a value 0 (value 1), that is, when the game information is deleted, or in step P36, the checksum values (sum values) match. When the backup flag BK-FLG is determined not to have a value of 1 (value is 0) in step P38, that is, when the power off processing has not been completed normally, the main control MPU 1311 has a built-in main control. The entire area of the RAM is cleared (step P44). Specifically, the value "00h" is written to the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). In addition, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the jackpot to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining the jackpot is used when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase the game information, when the sum values do not match, or when the power supply is used. When the disconnection process is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and the random number for jackpot judgment is updated based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the numerical range is executed, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated (RAM clear operation, the result of step P32 is "NO"), when the information is not normally stored in the RAM (RAM error, the result of step P36 is "NO", step. When the result of P38 is "NO") and the setting is changed (the result of step P3031 is "YES"), the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step P44). Specifically, the value "00h" is written to the main control built-in RAM (note that a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). In addition, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the jackpot to be used for determining the initial value of the random number for determining the jackpot is used when the RAM clear switch is operated to erase the game information, when the sum values do not match, or when the power supply is used. When the disconnection process is not completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM of the main control MPU is taken out, and the random number for jackpot judgment is updated based on the taken out ID code. The initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the numerical range is executed, and this fixed value is set as the initial value.

The area for clearing the main control built-in RAM is not the entire area, but the area for clearing may be different depending on each situation. For example, when clearing the RAM, the area other than the set value and the work area related to the setting (including a part of the RAM area related to the game processing) is cleared, when the RAM is abnormal, all the areas in the RAM are cleared, and when the setting is changed, the area is cleared. Only a part of the RAM area related to the game processing may be cleared. That is, when a RAM error occurs, all areas are cleared, but in other cases, the corresponding area is cleared according to the operation content. For example, the set value and the work area related to the setting process are cleared unless it is determined that the RAM is abnormal. Try not to.

In addition to setting "00h" for each area, the area may be cleared by setting an initial value that does not cause a disadvantage to the player or the game hall. For example, when the set value is "00h", if the setting is most advantageous to the player (high setting), 00h is set when the RAM is cleared and the game starts from the high setting, which is advantageous to the player. However, since it is disadvantageous for the hole, the minimum setting (for example, "05h") is set when clearing the work area of the set value.

When the process of step P42 or step P48 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is a setting process, that is, whether or not there is a setting confirmation or a setting change (step P3048). If there is no setting process (the result of step P3048 is "NO"), a setting is made to notify the sphere information control board of the main control recognition information (step P3049). If there is a setting process (the result of step P3048 is "YES"), the processes after step P50 are executed without setting to notify the sphere information control board of the main control recognition information. In this case, in the timer interrupt process, after the setting confirmation or setting change is completed, the setting is made to notify the main control recognition information to the sphere information control board.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears a storage area for storing information to be transmitted to the sphere information control board when the notification of the main control recognition information is set. For example, if the area for storing untransmitted information is in the ring buffer format, the read counter and write counter indicating the read position and write position in the buffer are initialized (both are set to 0), and further, for SIO communication. Clear the buffer as well. If information remains in these buffers, the first remaining information will be transmitted when the power is restored. Therefore, in order to ensure that the main control recognition information is transmitted to the sphere information control board first after the power is turned on. It is configured like this. When the sphere information control board receives the main control recognition information from the main control board 1310, it executes the corresponding process and transmits a response signal to the main control board 1310. The main control board 1310 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state from the time when the notification of the main control recognition information is set until the response signal is received. When the response signal of the main control recognition information is received, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is released.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 permits the execution of the timer interrupt processing by executing the interrupt-related processing (steps P50 and P52). In this embodiment, when the main control recognition information is set to be notified to the ball information control board, the process for performing the normal game is not executed until the response signal is received from the ball information control board. NS. For example, it is determined whether or not a response signal is received by the timer interrupt process described later, and if it is not received, the process is skipped. With this configuration, it is possible to start the game after ensuring that the ball information control board is activated.

When the execution of the timer interrupt processing is permitted, the main control MPU 1311 executes the main loop processing. Specifically, first, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P54). The watchdog timer is set to clear by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step P56). As described above, when the power supply of the game machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the ball information control board as a power failure warning. Will be done. The determination in step P56 is performed based on this power failure warning signal.

When there is no input of the power failure warning signal in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 performs the non-winning random number update process (step P58). In this non-winning random number update process, for example, a reach determination random number, a variable display pattern random number, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number, a small hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the like are updated. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. The random number for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol hit, the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by this non-winning random number update process.

Following step P58, the process returns to step P54 again, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, it is determined in step P56 whether or not there is a power failure warning signal input, and this power failure warning signal must be input. For example, the non-winning random number update process is performed in step P58, and steps P54 to P58 are repeated. The processing of steps P54 to P58 corresponds to the "main loop processing".

On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is input in step P56, the main control MPU 1311 sets the interrupt prohibition setting (step P60). With this setting, timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

Following step P60, the main control MPU 1311 includes a starting port solenoid 2550, a large winning opening solenoid (attacker solenoid (first attacker solenoid 2113, second upper attacker solenoid 2553, second lower attacker solenoid 2556), special symbol display (2156). 1185 (1st special symbol display, 2nd special symbol display) 1185, special symbol storage display, normal symbol display 1189, normal symbol storage display, game status display, round display, etc. Is stopped (step P62).

Following step P62, the main control MPU 1311 calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step P64). This checksum calculates the total of the game information of the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG described above, as numerical values.

Following step P64, the main control MPU 1311 sets the backup flag BK-FLG to a value of 1 (step P66). This completes the storage of backup information.

Following step P66, the main control MPU 1311 sets the watchdog timer to clear (step P68). As described above, this clear setting is performed by setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

Following step P68, the main control MPU 1311 enters a loop process of repeating a state in which nothing is executed. The processing and loop processing of steps P60 to P68 are referred to as "power cutoff processing". In this loop processing, the watchdog timer is not set to clear because the value A, the value B, and the value C are not set in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. Therefore, the watchdog timer times out and outputs a timeout signal, the main control MPU is reset by the timeout signal, and then the main control MPU performs this power-on processing from the beginning again.

The gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 1311) is reset when there is a power failure or when there is a momentary power failure, and the power is turned on by the subsequent restoration of electric power.

In step P36, it is inspected whether or not the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and then in step P38, it is inspected whether or not the power off processing is normally completed. There is. In this way, by double-checking the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the backup information is stored by fraudulent activity.

[19-2. Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing (another example 5) on the main control board 1310 will be described. FIG. 341 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the fifth embodiment. The timer interrupt process of the fifth embodiment is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the power-on process shown in FIG. 339. In the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment, a process for confirming and changing the setting information is added.

When the timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not it is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (step P3070). As described above, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is a state of waiting until the response signal output from the ball information control board is received after the notification setting of the main control recognition information is set. When the main control MPU 1311 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (the result of step P3070 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 skips the subsequent processing and ends the timer interrupt processing. In the process of step P3070, not only the determination of whether or not the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is performed, but also the process of communicating with the sphere information control board may be executed. For example, in the process of step P3070, various signals transmitted from the sphere information control board are received, and when the response signal of the main control recognition information is included, the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is released, and the like. In the case of the signal of, the process corresponding to the received signal may be executed. When the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state is released, the launch permission signal is input to the ball information control board, the ball launching device can launch the game ball, and the game can be started.

When the main control MPU 1311 is not in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state (the result of step P3070 is “NO”), the main control MPU 1311 sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step P54 of the main loop processing.

Following step P70, the main control MPU 1311 clears the interrupt flag (step P72). When this interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from the initial value.

Following step P72, the main control MPU 1311 performs a switch input process (step P74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 1314 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step P74, the main control MPU 1311 performs a timer subtraction process (step P76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the special symbol indicators (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) 1185 are lit according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the time, the time when the normal symbol display 1189 lights up according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process described later, and various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). When determining whether or not the sphere information main ACK signal for transmitting that the sphere information control board has normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so that the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms each time the timer subtraction process is performed. Then, when the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes a value of 0, so that the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

Following step P76, the main control MPU 1311 performs a winning random number update process (step P78). In this winning random number update process, the above-mentioned big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, and small hit symbol random number are updated. Further, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the initial for the small hit symbol, which are updated by the non-winning random number update process in step P58 in the initialization process (main loop process) shown in FIG. 339. The random number for value determination is also updated. These random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main loop processing and the timer interrupt processing, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. On the other hand, the big hit judgment random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning judgment (big hit judgment). Counts up. For example, the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination is an initial value update type counter as described above, and is a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value (in the present embodiment, the value is set as the minimum value). It is updated within the value 32767) as 0 to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by adding a value of 1 each time this timer interrupt process is performed. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up toward the maximum value (value 32767), and then the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is counted up from the minimum value (value 0). When the counter that updates the big hit judgment random number finishes counting up in the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the big hit judgment random number, the big hit judgment initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. At this time, the updated value is always the same from the fixed numerical range of the counter in which the main control MPU extracts the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM and updates the jackpot determination random number based on the extracted ID code. The initial value derivation process for deriving the fixed value of is executed, and the derived fixed value is set as the initial value. That is, the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination is constantly overwritten and updated with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code as the initial value by executing the initial value derivation process. The above-mentioned random number for determining the hit of the normal symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for determining the hit of the normal symbol are also updated by this winning random number update process. The normal symbol hit determination random number and the like are the same as the above-mentioned method for updating the big hit determination random number, and the description thereof will be omitted.

When the winning random number update process in step P78 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the process related to the setting information (setting process) is being executed (step P3080). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the setting information is being changed or confirmed. For example, it may be determined whether or not the setting confirmation information is set.

The main control MPU 1311 performs the prize ball control process (step P80) when the process related to the setting information is not being executed (the result of step P3080 is “NO”). In this prize ball control process, a prize ball command for reading input information from the above-mentioned input information storage area and transmitting it to the ball information control board based on this input information can be created, or a prize ball command can be created with the main control board 1310 and ball information control. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between the board and the board. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the ball information control board as main ball information serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the large winning opening, a prize ball command representing 15 balls as the number of prize balls is created and transmitted to the ball information control board, or the ball information control board sends this prize ball command. Sphere information to inform that reception is completed normally When the main ACK signal is not input within the specified time, create a self-check command to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the sphere information control board to control the sphere information. Send to the board.

Following step P80, the main control MPU 1311 performs a frame command reception process (step P82). The sphere information control board transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into status displays. In the frame command reception process of step P82, when these various commands are normally received as the sphere information main serial data, the information to convey the fact to the sphere information control board is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. do. Further, the command normally received as the sphere information main serial data is formatted into a 2-byte (16-bit) command, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step P82, the main control MPU 1311 performs fraud detection processing (step P84). In this fraud detection process, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the count switch is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when the game ball enters the big winning opening), an abnormality occurs. A winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display is created as a state, and is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

Following step P84, the main control MPU 1311 performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step P86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned random number for jackpot determination is taken out, and it is determined whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (big hit). It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter that updates the random number for the jackpot symbol is taken out and used as the probability variation hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not they match (determination of whether or not a probability fluctuation is generated). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 are set as the above-mentioned jackpot determination value range (big hit determination range) with a low probability, and are read from the normal judgment table, whereas the value 32438 is set with a high probability. ~ Value 32767 is set and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process in step P86, whether or not the value of the counter that updates the random number for jackpot determination and the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM match. When determining whether or not, the value of the counter that updates the jackpot determination random number is included in the jackpot determination range.

When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 2104, various commands related to the special drawing 1 synchronization effect are created, while when the lottery result is based on the second start port sensor 2511, special features are created. FIG. 2 Various commands related to the synchronization effect are created, stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the special symbol display 1185 is lit according to the determined variation display pattern of the special symbol. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is reached, various commands classified in relation to the big hit are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member is opened / closed. The round indicator is used when the output of the drive signal to the winning opening solenoid is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the number of times (round) that the large winning opening is opened from the closed state is two. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 2-round indicator lamp so that the 2-round indicator lamp is lit, and store it in the output information storage area as output information. Set the output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so that the lamp is lit, store it in the output information storage area as output information, or send it to the game status indicator so that the presence or absence of probability fluctuation is lit in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal of is set and stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step P86, the main control MPU 1311 performs a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step P88). In this ordinary symbol and ordinary electric accessory control process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and gate winning processing is performed based on this input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate switch 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter that updates the above-mentioned normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted and used as the gate information in the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Remember in.

On the other hand, when the process related to the setting information is being executed (the result of step P3080 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 skips the process such as the prize ball control process (step P80) to advance the game. Stop it. Then, the setting change / confirmation process for changing or confirming the setting information is executed (step P3082). In the setting change / confirmation process, the setting information is displayed on the touch panel or the liquid crystal display device 1600, or the change of the setting information is accepted from the input device such as the touch panel.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the setting process (setting change / confirmation process) is completed (step P3083). If the setting process is not completed (the result of step P3083 is "NO"), the subsequent processes are executed. On the other hand, when the setting change / confirmation process is completed (the result of step P3083 is "YES"), the main control recognition information is transmitted to the sphere information control board (step P3084), and the processes after step P92 are executed. At this time, the storage area (work area) temporarily used to execute the setting process is initialized, and then the setting process is set so that the setting process is not executed, such as canceling the setting confirmation information. After that, the main control board 1310 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state until the response signal of the main control recognition information is received from the sphere information control board.

As described above, when the setting information is changed or confirmed, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the sphere information control board after the setting process is completed, while when the setting information is not changed or confirmed, the power-on processing is performed. The main control recognition information is transmitted to the sphere information control board (step P3039). As described above, in the present embodiment, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the sphere information control board only once when the power is turned on. Further, when the setting process is executed, the main control recognition information is transmitted to the sphere information control board only once after the completion. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball information control board from unnecessarily executing the processing related to the setting information a plurality of times, and to reduce the load at the time of starting the gaming machine, so that the starting can be completed quickly. Further, since the main control board 1310 is in the main control recognition information response signal reception standby state until the response signal of the main control recognition information is received from the sphere information control board (step P3070), the setting change is surely notified. After that, it becomes possible to execute the processing on the main control board side.

Here, in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 341, the processes from step P80 to step P90 were skipped during the setting process, but the switch input process (step P74), the timer subtraction process (step P76), and the winning random number update. The process (step P78) may be skipped. Further, the port output process (step P90) may be skipped. Since the processes for performing the normal game are not executed during the execution of the setting process, there is no problem in the subsequent game even if these processes are not executed. Therefore, the load on the gaming machine during the setting process may be reduced by skipping the random number-related processing, or the random number-related processing may be performed even while the setting process is being executed by an employee of the game hall or the like. By executing the above, the random number may be updated so that the random number becomes more random. Also, regarding switch input processing and port output processing, the load on the gaming machine may be reduced by skipping the processing during the setting change, or from the setting processing by continuing the processing even during the setting change. The result of the switch input received during the setting change may be reflected immediately after the return, or the processing at the output destination may not be delayed by continuously performing the port output.

When the process of step P88 or step P3084 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 performs the port output process (step P90). In this port output process, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 1314, and various signals are output based on the output information. For example, when various commands from the ball information control board are normally received from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 1314 based on the output information, the main ball information ACK signal is output to the ball information control board, or a big hit. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the large winning opening solenoid that opens and closes the opening and closing member of the large winning opening when in the game state, and outputting a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2550 that opens and closes the movable piece. 15-round jackpot information output signal, 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output information, start opening winning information output signal, etc. Various information (game information) signals related to are output to the ball information control board.

Following step P90, the main control MPU 1311 performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step P92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuning effect-related, various commands classified in the special figure 2 tuning effect-related, and various types classified in the jackpot-related, which are created by the timer interrupt processing of this routine. It is divided into commands, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to normal electric power production, various commands classified as ordinary electric service production, various commands classified as notification display, and status display. Various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified as others are stored. One packet of the main peripheral serial data is composed of 3 bytes.

Specifically, the main peripheral serial data has a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. It is composed of a sum value obtained by regarding the mode as a numerical value and the sum of the sum values, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission. The processing of steps P74 to P92 is referred to as "game control processing".

Following step P92, the main control MPU 1311 sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step P94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step P94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step P70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are set in order in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is set to clear.

Following step P94, the main control MPU 1311 switches (returns) registers (step P96) and ends this routine. Here, when the timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 1311 stacks the contents of the general-purpose register on the stack and saves it. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the initialization process from being destroyed. In step P96, the contents loaded on the stack and saved are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU 1311 sets interrupt enable after returning by step P96.

[19-3. Data transmission to the sphere information control board]
In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the transmission of data (main ball information serial data) from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board is executed by the port output process of the timer interrupt process. As described above, the main ball information serial data includes information about the prize ball (prize ball command) and information for confirming the connection status (self-check command), and also includes the main control recognition information in the present embodiment. Is done.

Since the timer interrupt process is executed every 4 ms, the main ball information serial data is frequently transmitted to the ball information control board, but the total number of prize balls is correct and the player does not feel uncomfortable. It is not always necessary to pay out the prize balls in the order in which the prizes are generated at the prize openings. When a prize is generated in a plurality of types of winning openings in a short period of time, for example, after a winning opening is generated in the winning opening set to the number of winning balls "4", the winning opening set to the number of winning balls "15" is set. Even if a prize is generated in (large prize opening), there is no problem even if the number of prize balls is "15" and the number of prize balls is "4" in that order. Therefore, if a situation such as a big hit game state in which a prize ball command is frequently created occurs, the load may temporarily increase.

Here, in the present embodiment, the interval for transmitting data from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board is set to be longer than the execution interval (4 ms) of the timer interrupt process (for example, 100 ms), and the number of communications is set. By reducing the amount, the load of transmitting data from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board is reduced. In addition, instead of generating a prize ball command for each prize, the load is further reduced by reducing the amount of data to be communicated by aggregating the prize ball information for each communication cycle to the ball information control board. Try. Hereinafter, a configuration example of prize ball data to be transmitted to the ball information control board will be described.

FIG. 342 is a diagram illustrating an example of winning information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 342, the number of winnings for each winning opening including the gate is counted and stored as winning information. Then, each time the communication cycle arrives, the stored winning information is transmitted to the ball information control board. At this time, if the number of winnings is 0, the transmission may not be performed.

When the ball information control board receives the winning information from the main control board 1310, the ball information control board calculates the number of prize balls by collating with the prize ball number table shown in FIG. 343. In the examples shown in FIGS. 342 and 343, the number of prizes at the gate is 1, the number of prizes at the upper starting port is 2, the number of prizes at the general prize opening 1 is 1, and the number of prizes at the general prize opening 2 is 1. The prize ball at the gate is 1x0 = 1, the prize ball at the upper start opening is 2x3 = 6, the prize ball at the general winning opening 1 is 1x1 = 1, and the prize ball at the general winning opening 2 is 1x1 = It becomes 1, and the total number of prize balls is 0 + 6 + 1 + 1 = 8.

Further, the ball information control board may transmit the prize ball number including the prize ball number in the prize information without holding the prize ball number table. Further, as long as the number of prize balls is the same even if they are arranged in a plurality of game areas as in the general winning opening, they may be aggregated. FIG. 344 is a diagram showing an example in the case where the number of prize balls is included in the prize information. In (A), when the number of prizes is totaled for each general prize opening, (B) is a total of the general prize openings. This is the case when counting numbers. As a result, it is not necessary to hold the prize ball number table on the ball information control board, and the main control board 1310 can centrally manage the table.

In the example described with reference to FIGS. 342 to 344, the winning order is created by ignoring the winning order in the communication cycle, but conventionally, the winning order can be grasped by sequentially generating commands at the time of winning. rice field. Here, FIG. 345 shows an example in which information on the winning order is added while the winning information is collectively transmitted for each communication cycle. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing an example in which the winning information is stored in the winning order.

In the example shown in FIG. 345, each time a game ball wins a prize in the winning opening, 1 is added to the order counter, and a record composed of the order, the winning type (winning opening), the number of winning balls, and the number of winnings is generated. The number of prize balls may be omitted as long as it is held by the ball information control board. Further, since the number of winnings is usually one, it may be omitted, but when winnings occur consecutively in the same winning opening, the number of winnings may be added by the number of consecutive winnings.

In the example shown in FIGS. 342 to 344, 1 is added to the number of winnings for each winning, and the winning information for transmission is created at the timing of transmitting the winning information to the ball information control board. However, the example shown in FIG. 345. Then, each record of the winning information is generated for each winning, and the winning information generated for each communication cycle is transmitted. In either case, the transmitted winning information is discarded, and the number of winnings is cleared to 0 in the examples shown in FIGS. 342 to 344. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 345, the transmitted record may be deleted.

As in the example shown in FIGS. 342 to 344, by ignoring the winning order and counting only the number of winnings, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the time of winning. On the other hand, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 345, it is possible to maintain the winning order by creating the winning information at the time of winning, and it is generated without the need to create the winning information again when the winning information is transmitted. Since the winning information may be transmitted as it is, the load at the time of transmitting the winning information can be reduced. In addition, the number of records of winning information can be reduced by adding the number of winnings when winning consecutively in the same winning opening. Normally, in the big hit game state, the game ball is fired aiming at the big prize opening, and when the winning opening that can win only in a specific game state (for example, the probability change state) is arranged, the specific game state. In this case, since the game ball is launched aiming at this winning opening, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of winning information, especially when the number of winnings is large.

The configuration for transmitting the winning information from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board has been described above. The information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board includes not only the winning information (prize ball information, prize ball command) but also the game status signal and the connection between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board. A self-check command for confirming the status is transmitted, and in the present embodiment, the main control recognition information is transmitted when the power is turned on or when the setting process (setting change / confirmation) is performed.

Here, it is necessary to transmit the game state signal to the ball information control board at least every time the game state changes. Therefore, the winning information is transmitted in the same manner in the communication cycle in which the winning information is transmitted, and the winning information, the game status signal, and other information to be transmitted to the ball information control board are aggregated as game information in a common format to standardize the transmission process. Control can be simplified.

FIG. 346 is a diagram showing an example of game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board, (A) is an example of winning information, and (B) is an example of main control recognition information. In the example shown in FIG. 346, in order to distinguish the types of data to be transmitted, "data type" as a major classification and "type 1" and "type 2" as minor classifications are defined. Items for distinguishing data types may be changed as necessary. For example, other types may be excluded by defining the data type in detail, and more detailed classification can be set. You may increase the number of items. In FIG. 346, the names of the items for distinguishing the types of data are described as they are for easy understanding, but in reality, pre-coded information is set. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 346, two types of data can be stored, and the size of each data is 1 byte.

FIG. 346 (A) is data corresponding to the winning information, and “winning” (may be “prize ball”) indicating that the data type is the winning information (prize ball data) is set. Further, the type 1 is set with the type of the winning opening, and the type 2 is set with the information for specifying the winning opening. At this time, if only the information for specifying the winning opening needs to be set, one of the items may be left blank. In the example shown in FIG. 346, two types of data can be set, and in the example shown in (A), the number of winning balls and the number of winnings can be set. Since the number of prize balls and the number of prizes do not actually exceed 100, the number of prize balls is set in the upper 4 bits and the number of prizes is set in the lower 4 bits, and the number of prize balls and the number of prizes are set in one item. May be set. Further, if there is no prize, data indicating that there is no prize and the number of prize balls is 0 may be transmitted.

FIG. 346 (A) shows a case where five types of prize ball information (prize ball command) are transmitted in one data (command) transmission cycle, but more (for example, more in one cycle). 10 types of prize ball information may be transmitted together. On the other hand, if the number of data (commands) to be transmitted becomes too large, such as when a large number of prize balls are generated, the unit time for the data (command) transmitting side (main control board 1310) and receiving side (ball information control board 110). Since the load of hitting becomes high, an upper limit of transmission may be set in one cycle. In this case, the data (command) for the amount that could not be transmitted in one cycle (the amount that exceeds the upper limit) is transmitted in the next cycle. In addition, when a large number of prize balls are generated, such as during a big hit, a time lag may occur between the actual winning and the addition of the prize balls, which may give the player a sense of discomfort. However, since the data (command) transmission cycle is about 100 ms, even if the upper limit is temporarily exceeded, it immediately falls below the upper limit, so the possibility that the player feels uncomfortable is reduced. ing. Also, although the firing cycle (600ms) is fixed, the command transmission cycle can be set arbitrarily, so the more the data (command) transmission cycle is set shorter than the firing cycle, the more data (command) to be transmitted. It is possible to prevent a time lag from occurring when the number exceeds the upper limit.

FIG. 346 (B) is an example of transmitting a chip ID that identifies the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 included in the main control recognition information. Here, the data length of the chip ID is 4 bytes, and the data for 2 records is stored. The chip ID is recorded in the main control MPU 1311, for example, is defined in a specific register and can be read from the program. In the present embodiment, it is possible to transmit data (commands) of a plurality of types of data types in one cycle, but when the maximum number of data (commands) that can be transmitted in one cycle is exceeded, , The priority may be set for each data type, and the data (command) having a high priority may be sent with priority. For example, as described above, the prize ball information is likely to generate a larger amount of data to be transmitted than other data, but it is unlikely that the player feels uncomfortable even if a slight time lag occurs as described above. Therefore, data (commands) of other data types may be preferentially transmitted. In addition, regardless of the data type, the maximum number of data (commands) may be transmitted in the order of generation.

In the example shown in FIG. 346, since the size of the data is fixed, there is a problem that the number of records becomes large when a large amount of data is transmitted. For example, if the chip ID included in the main control recognition information shown in FIG. 346 (B) is 9 bytes, it is necessary to transmit data for 5 records, and all the information such as the data type is set for each record. There is a need. Therefore, by setting the data length for each record and making the data a variable length, it is configured so that it can correspond to data of many kinds of modes. FIG. 347 is a diagram showing another example of game information transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board.

In the example shown in FIG. 347, an item indicating the data length is added, and data of an arbitrary size can be stored in the item indicating the data within an allowable range. In the example shown in FIG. 347, since it is not necessary to divide the data, the number of items showing detailed classification is reduced from 2 to 1. Since the transmitted data has a variable length and may have a large capacity, a check item such as a checksum may be added.

Subsequently, the communication between the main control board 1310 and the sphere information control board will be described. FIG. 348 is a diagram illustrating communication between the main control board 1310 and the ball information control board when the gaming machine is started. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the power is turned on and the main control board 1310 is started, the main control recognition information is notified to the sphere information control board by the initialization process or the timer interrupt process (main control recognition information notification). ). As described above, the main control recognition information is information for identifying the main control board 1310, and the sphere information control board determines whether or not the received main control recognition information is normal. If the main control recognition information notification is not normal, for example, if the main control board 1310 is not a regular one and an invalid MPU is mounted, the main control board 1310 is notified that the main control board 1310 is abnormal.

Further, even when the time from turning on the power to transmitting the main control recognition information notification exceeds a predetermined time (for example, 200 seconds), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, and the occurrence of the abnormality is notified. At this time, the activation of the main control board 1310 may be continued as it is, or if the activation process is completed during the abnormality occurrence notification, the alarm output may be stopped at that point, or the notification may be continued as it is. good. If the notification is to be continued as it is, the employees of the pachinko / pachislot machine may check the situation and decide whether or not to use the pachinko / pachislot machine as it is.

When the sphere information control board receives the main control recognition information notification from the main control board 1310, the sphere information control board transmits a response signal (main control recognition information response notification) to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 receives the main control recognition information response notification from the ball information control board, the main control board 1310 is in a state where the normal game can be started.

After that, the main control board 1310 periodically transmits game information to the ball information control board (game information notification). The transmission interval of the game information is 100 milliseconds as described above. Specific examples of the game information include prize ball information (prize ball command). When the ball information control board receives the game information from the main control board 1310, the ball information control board transmits a response signal (game information response notification) to the main control board 1310. In this way, it is possible to ensure that communication is normally performed by transmitting a response signal from the ball information control board in response to the game information notification from the main control board 1310. When notifying the main control board 1310 from the sphere information control board, a response signal is similarly transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the sphere information control board.

Subsequently, a case where an abnormality occurs in the communication between the main control board 1310 and the sphere information control board will be described. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing a case where there is no response from the ball information control board to the notification from the main control board 1310 in the communication between the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine and the ball information control board.

In the example shown in FIG. 349, the game information is notified from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board at a predetermined communication cycle, and an abnormality occurs when the response from the ball information control board is not continuously performed a predetermined number of times. Communication is cut off as if it had been done, and the occurrence of an abnormality is notified. Here, the predetermined number of times is set to eight times, and the game information having the same content is notified up to eight times. Even after the communication from the main control board 1310 is cut off, when the response signal is received from the ball information control board, the communication cutoff is canceled and the processing is restarted as if the normal state was restored. do. In the example shown in the figure, if the response signal cannot be received within one communication cycle, the notification is sent again. However, the notification of the next cycle is stopped, the response is waited for, and the next cycle ends. If the response signal cannot be received later, it may be determined that one communication has failed. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid missing the response signal.

Further, when there is no response from the ball information control board, the game information is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the ball information control board, in addition to the case where the game information has not reached the ball information control board from the main control board 1310. The response signal may not reach the main control board 1310 from the sphere information control board even though it has arrived. Here, when the game information is prize ball information (prize ball command), in the latter case, there is a possibility that prize balls will be continuously paid out based on the same prize ball information, and the lottery result and payment of the game There is a risk that the number of prize balls issued will be inconsistent. Therefore, in order to avoid such a problem, an example in which the next game information is transmitted without retransmitting the game information even when the response signal cannot be normally received will be described.

FIG. 350 is a diagram showing another example in the case where there is no response from the ball information control board to the notification from the main control board 1310 in the communication between the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine and the ball information control board. Here, as in the example shown in FIG. 349, the game information is transmitted for each communication cycle, and the next game information is transmitted even when the response signal cannot be received. Then, when the response signals for the maximum number of transmissions (for example, 8 times) cannot be continuously received, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred, the communication is cut off, and the occurrence of the abnormality is notified. With this configuration, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the number of prize balls will be inconsistent when the game information is the prize ball information.

Further, by retransmitting the same game information, the game information newly generated in the process of progress of the game may be retained in the buffer and cannot be retained, but this can be prevented. Note that the following information is transmitted without resending only in the case of prize ball information in which a large amount of data may be created, while other information in which a relatively small amount of data is created is shown in FIG. 349. The processing may be different depending on the data type, such as by resending as shown. In this case, the number of times that the response signal cannot be continuously received (the number of times of transmission failure) is counted, and when the predetermined number of times is reached, the communication is cut off and the occurrence of an abnormality is notified.

[20. Edge buffer for fraud judgment]
The gaming machine according to the present embodiment is configured so that a predetermined gaming value (prize ball) can be obtained by winning a prize in the winning device. The winning of the game medium is detected by a sensor or a switch provided in the winning device, and the detection result is input at a predetermined interval and stored in a predetermined storage area.

In addition, the winning of the game medium is provided with a valid period such as a period during which the winning device is acceptable. On the other hand, in order to detect failures and fraudulent activities, prizes outside the valid period are also counted, and if the number of prizes outside the valid period reaches a predetermined value or more, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred and a security signal is output to the outside. Or, it was informing about an abnormality.

In this way, it is necessary to detect only the winnings within the valid period, such as when paying out the prize balls, while when detecting the abnormality, it is necessary to detect the winnings of the game medium regardless of the valid period. Therefore, there is a risk that the input determination process for various signals input by the sensor, the switch, or the like will be complicated.

In the present embodiment, the buffer 1 (first storage area) that constantly counts and stores various signals input by a sensor, a switch, or the like, and whether or not the signal is within the valid period (or outside the valid period) depends on the state. It is provided with a buffer 2 (second storage area, edge buffer for fraud determination) for counting and storing various input signals. As a result, most of the processing associated with the input judgment can be shared by simply switching the part that specifies the area to be referenced according to the state when the input judgment processing is executed, and the entire processing associated with the winning judgment can be simplified. Is possible.

[20-1. Buffer structure]
First, the structure of a buffer that temporarily stores information for executing various processes will be described. This buffer is allocated to the RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a as an input information storage area. The input information storage area may be allocated to a RAM provided outside the main control MPU 1310a. The input information storage area stores various signals and the like input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition to the input information storage area, the main control built-in RAM includes backup flags and checksum information for determining whether the RAM contents are normal when the power is turned on, random values for various lottery, and peripheral control boards. An area for storing commands and the like for transmission to the 1510, the payout control board 951, and the like is allocated.

FIG. 351 is a diagram showing an example of a storage area allocated to the main control built-in RAM in game control by the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Each storage area includes a backup flag area, a checksum area, an input level data area, an input edge data area, a prize ball judgment area, etc. In addition to these, various random value values used for lottery can be stored. Contains an area for storing commands to be sent. Further, each area is divided in units of 1 byte, and is an area of 1 byte or a plurality of bytes.

Subsequently, the configuration of the input information storage area will be described. Here, the configuration of the input information storage area for storing the input information indicating the detection of the winning of the game ball to the winning opening, specifically, the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) will be described. do. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing an example of a data area included in the input information storage area of the present embodiment, in which (A) is an input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and (B) is a prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR). show.

As shown in (A), the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) is composed of 1 byte (8 bits), and the input information of the switch (sensor) corresponding to each Bit is stored. Specifically, Bit0 is the first start port sensor 2104 that detects the entry of the first start port 2002, Bit1 is the second start port sensor 2511 that detects the entry of the second start port 2004, and Bit2 and Bit3 are general. General winning opening sensor 3015 for detecting the entry of the winning openings 2001 and 2,201, Bit4 is a count switch (large winning opening sensor) for detecting the entry of the large winning opening 2005, Bit5 is unused, and Bit6 is the entry to the discharge port. It is the input information by the sensor that detects the sphere. The gaming machine according to the present embodiment has a probability variation region (V region of V-AT) in addition to the starting winning opening and the large winning opening, and Bit7 is a sensor that detects the passage of the probability variation region of the game ball. It is the input information by. The probabilistic region sensor is a sensor that detects only the passage to the V region, and unlike other sensors, it is not a sensor with a prize ball. Further, the arrangement of the bits may be any arrangement. For example, the second starting port 2004 is associated with the bit 0 and the large winning opening 2005 is associated with the bit 1, and the sensors to be determined whether or not the validity period is within the valid period are continuously connected. It may be arranged as follows.

Further, as shown in (B), the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) is composed of 1 byte (8 bits) like the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1), and the switch corresponding to each byte ( The input information of the sensor) is stored. Each bit in the prize ball judgment area corresponds to each bit in the input edge data 1 area, but the second starting port (Bit1), the large winning opening (Bit4), and the probability variation area (Bit7) are valid during the valid period. It is set to "1" (ON) only when the sensor detects it. That is, the input information by each sensor is set as it is in each bit of the input edge data 1 area, but among the bits of the prize ball determination area, the winning device (winning) in which the valid period is set for accepting the game ball. The bit corresponding to the area) is set to "1" only when it is detected by the sensor within the valid period.

The validity period of the second starting port 2004 is such that when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the normal electric accessory is opened and the second starting port 2004 is in a state where the game ball can be accepted. In addition to the period until the accessory is closed (normal electric accessory opening time), the validity judgment period considering the time for the game ball to stay inside the second starting port 2004 after the ordinary electric accessory is closed. (OFF delay, for example 1000 msec) is set. In addition, the validity period of the large winning opening 2005 is the same as the second starting opening 2004, in addition to the time for opening the large winning opening 2005 (opening time for the large winning opening), it stays inside the large winning opening 2005 and is a count sensor. The validity determination period (OFF delay, for example, 1994 msec) is set in consideration of the time lag until the detection. On the other hand, in the probability variation region (V region of V-AT), the probability variation region validity period is set at the timing when the V attacker (large winning opening) is opened, and the validity judgment period after the probability variation region validity period ends is not set. ing.

[20-2. Switch input processing]
Subsequently, the procedure for setting data in the buffer described above will be described. FIG. 353 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a switch input process for acquiring information detected by a sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The switch input process is executed in the process of step S74 in the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23.

The procedure shown in FIG. 353 is an excerpt of the procedure for storing the winning information for the starting winning opening and the large winning opening in the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1, buffer 1) and the winning ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR, buffer 2). Therefore, it is possible to similarly process the case where information such as the detection signal of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 951 is stored. Further, in the switch processing shown in FIG. 353, an example of processing data for one port (1 byte) of the input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1) and the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) is described, but the present invention is limited thereto. If the input port of the switch is 2 bytes or more, the processing for the corresponding number of bytes is executed.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first determines the change from OFF to ON corresponding to each switch from the switch input port and generates switch edge information (step P6001). Further, the generated switch edge information is stored in the input edge data 1 area (step P6002), and the number of winning validity determinations is set (step P6003). The switch edge information is data in which individual input information (switch input information) corresponding to each switch is summarized in byte units. Further, the number of winning validity determinations may correspond to the number of switch input information included in the switch edge information, or may be the number of bits of the switch edge information.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the switch corresponding to the winning determination is within the valid period (step P6004), and clears the update of the switch input information outside the valid period. Specifically, if it is not within the valid period of the switch corresponding to the winning determination (the result of step P6004 is "no"), the switch edge information corresponding to the winning determination in the input edge data 1 area is cleared (step P6005). ).

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a changes the switch input information to be determined after clearing the update of the switch input information outside the valid period or when it is within the valid period (the result of step P6004 is "yes"). In order to do so, the number of winning validity determinations is updated by -1 (step P6006). Further, the validity period of the switch corresponding to the winning determination is updated by -1 (step P6007). For a switch for which a valid period has not been set, the processes after step P6006 are executed without clearing the switch input information. In this case, the determination of the validity period may unconditionally skip the processing if the switch input information has no validity period set. For example, it is always valid by setting a large value as the validity period. It may be within the period.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the number of winning validity determinations has become 0, that is, whether or not the winning validity determination of all the switch input information included in the switch edge information has been completed (step P6008). .. If the winning validity determination of all the switch input information is not completed (the result of step P6008 is "no"), the process is executed again from step P6004. In this process, the timer for determining the validity period is updated after determining whether or not it is within the validity period, but it is updated together with other timers in various timer update processes executed for each timer interrupt. You may do so.

The main control MPU 1310a completes the winning validity determination of the switch input information whose validity period is set among the switch input information included in the switch edge information, and when the winning validity determination number becomes 0 (step P6008). The result is “yes”), and the switch edge information reflecting whether or not the valid period is within the valid period is stored in the prize ball determination area with respect to the switch input information for which the valid period is set (step P6009).

As described above, by storing the switch input information as it is in the input edge data 1 area and storing the switch input information in the prize ball judgment area in consideration of the validity period, the area corresponding to the processing can be referred to. The process can be simplified. For example, in the prize ball control process (step S80 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23)) executed when the prize ball is paid out, the sensor that prizes the prize ball only within the valid period when determining the presence or absence of the prize ball is used. It does not require processing such as determining whether or not the prize ball is a prize ball or whether or not to execute the prize ball depending on whether or not it is valid, and when paying out the prize ball, the information in the prize ball judgment area is referred to. The prize ball can be paid out only by this, and the prize ball payout process can be simplified. Further, when counting the number of game balls that have entered outside the valid period for a sensor that does not win a prize outside the valid period by the fraud detection process (step S84 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23)), the input edge By referring to the information in the data 1 area, it is possible to detect fraudulent prizes by counting the number of prizes won outside the valid period (the number that seems to be fraudulent prizes). Further, it is possible to count the illegal winnings by the difference between the number of winnings detected by the input edge data 1 area and the number of winnings detected by the winning ball determination area.

[20-3. Large prize opening processing]
Next, a large winning opening opening process for controlling the large winning opening 2005 that is opened by winning the lottery will be described. In the large winning opening opening process, when a game ball wins in the large winning opening 2005, it is detected by a count switch (large winning opening sensor), and the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening 2005 is counted by the switch input process described above. NS. FIG. 354 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the large winning opening opening process of the present embodiment. The large winning opening opening process is called from the special symbol / special electric accessory control process (step S86) in the timer interrupt process. As for the special symbol / electric accessory control process, after each start port passing process is executed, the process corresponding to the special symbol / electric accessory operation number including the large winning opening opening process is called. In the large winning opening opening process, the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening is counted based on the information of the large winning opening (count) switch generated in the above-mentioned switch input process.

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the number of large prize openings from the prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR) (step P6011). Specifically, the number of large winning opening count switches is set as the number of loops, and 1 bit of the large winning opening count switch is set as the determination bit value. The presence or absence of a prize is determined from the value of the large prize opening count switch in the prize ball determination area and the judgment bit value for the number of loops, and the number of large prize openings is counted. Further, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of prizes in the large prize opening is less than the maximum number of prizes in the large prize opening (step P6012). The maximum number of winnings in the large winning opening is the specified number of winnings for closing the large winning opening 2005 after opening in one round. Even if the maximum number of winning balls is not won, the large winning opening 2005 will be closed after a predetermined period of time.

In the process of step P6011, the number of prizes in the prize opening is counted by looping by the number of count switches of the prize opening 2005. At this time, when the count switch is single, 1 is set as the number of loops, and the number of large winning openings in the prize ball determination area is counted only once. Further, in the configuration including a plurality of large winning openings, the number of loops is set for the number of count switches, and the number of large winning openings in the prize ball determination area is counted for the number of loops. When the count switch is single, the number of prizes in the big prize opening may be counted only once without being set as the number of loops, but the number of count switches in the large prize opening 2005 differs depending on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is necessary to provide two types of large winning opening opening processing, one for one count switch and the other for multiple counting switches, so that the large winning opening opening process can be executed in common without affecting the number of large winning opening switches. In order to achieve this, the number of loops is set to 1 even in the case of a single unit.

In addition, for over-winning during big hits (the game ball wins in the big winning opening 2005 beyond the maximum number of winnings in the big winning opening), the value in the prize ball judgment area because the big winning opening 2005 is within the valid period. (It should be noted that the determination can be made in the same manner even if the determination is based on the value of the input edge data 1 area). On the other hand, for illegal winnings other than big hits (illegal winnings in the big winning opening 2005), since it is not possible to count by the value of the prize ball determination area, the illegal winning is determined by the value of the input edge data 1 area.

In the main control MPU1310a, when the number of winnings in the large winning opening is equal to or greater than the maximum number of winnings in the large winning opening (the result of step P6012 is "no"), the large winning opening is over-winning, so that the large winning opening is over-winning. A flag with a large winning opening over winning is set in the flag (step P6013). In addition, although the number of large prize openings is obtained from buffer 2 (prize ball judgment area) and the over prize is determined, the number of large prize openings is counted in buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) to obtain over prizes. May be determined. In addition, the number of large prizes will continue to be counted even while the large prizes 2005 are closed, and if the number of large prizes exceeds the maximum number of large prizes, the large prize over prize flag will be displayed. Winning opening over Winning flag is set. After that, the main control MPU 1310a sets the large winning opening open state number to “00H”, and then closes the large winning opening 2005 (step P6015).

On the other hand, when the number of winnings of the large winning opening is less than the maximum number of winnings of the large winning opening (the result of step P6012 is "yes"), the main control MPU1310a refers to the value of the timer for measuring the opening time of the large winning opening. , It is determined whether or not the opening time of the large winning opening has expired (step P6014). If the opening time of the big winning opening is not completed (the result of step P6014 is "no"), this process is terminated and the acceptance of the game ball into the large winning opening 2005 is continued.

When the opening time of the large winning opening 2005 is completed (the result of step P6014 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1310a is set to close the open large winning opening 2005 (step P6015). In the process of step P6015, the data necessary for closing the grand prize opening 2005 is set.

When the process of step P6015 is completed, the main control MPU 1310a sets the operation of the grand prize opening 2005 (step 6016). Specifically, the large winning opening opening / closing time data is acquired from the selected large winning opening opening pattern, and is set in the signal output timer during the special electric operation. The time (valid period) for determining whether or not the large winning opening switch is valid is set in the signal output timer during the special electric operation. The validity period is the interval time between the opening of the big winning opening (the closing time of the big winning opening) -α. If the valid period is longer than the closing time of the large winning opening, a longer time than the closing period will be set. Therefore, a new value will be obtained by opening the large winning opening 2005 before the timer reaches 0. Is set. At the start of opening the large winning opening 2005, the opening time corresponding to the large winning opening opening pattern is set in the signal output timer during the special electric operation. For example, when the opening pattern of the grand prize opening 2005 is 1 to 7 rounds, 9 to 16 rounds is 29 seconds, and 8 rounds is 5 seconds, the signal output timer during special electric operation is 1 to 7 and 9 to 16 rounds. 29 seconds will be set before the start of the 8th round, and 5 seconds will be set before the start of the 8th round.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not to continue opening the large winning opening 2005, that is, whether or not it is the final round (step P6017). If the opening of the large winning opening 2005 is continued (not the final round) (the result of step P6017 is “yes”), this process ends. If the opening of the big prize opening 2005 is not continued (the final round) (the result of step P6017 is "no"), the processing after the big hit is executed, such as setting the ending command for setting the ending. (Step P6018). In the process after the end of the big hit, the valid determination period (OFF delay period) corresponding to the ending time in which the detection of the game ball by the count switch is valid after the big winning opening 2005 is closed is set. The validity judgment period corresponding to the ending period may be the same as the time for each opening opening interval of the big winning opening, but may be a different time (for example, the time corresponding to the ending period).

[20-4. Timing chart (large prize opening)]
Subsequently, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball of the large winning opening 2005 will be described in chronological order. FIG. 355 is a timing chart illustrating processing of each configuration when a game ball wins a prize in the large winning opening 2005 in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. The numerical information, time value, etc. described on the timing chart are examples, and are not limited to these values.

In the example shown in FIG. 355, as described above, the effective time is set at the start of the big hit. The effective time is, for example, the opening time of the large winning opening at the time of opening, and the closing interval period of -4 msec at the time of closing. The illegal count value sets the initial value to the value (L) corresponding to the type of jackpot, and when it detects the entry of a game ball into the jackpot 2005 regardless of the validity period, it is sequentially subtracted and reaches 0. If so, it is assumed that fraud has occurred. The initial value of the illegal count value is, for example, 16 × (10 + 3) = 208 in the case of a jackpot 1 of 16 rounds and 10 counts, and 4 × (9 + 3) = 48 in the case of a jackpot 2 of 9 counts in 4 rounds. do. Further, in the case of a jackpot of 3 in 12 rounds (substantially 2 rounds and 5 counts), it is determined as 2 × (5 + 3), and in 10 rounds, a maximum of 1 prize is awarded (10 × 1), and a total of 26 is determined. The timing chart will be described below.

First, at time t1, there is a prize in the large winning opening 2005 during the valid period (winning sensor (count switch) OFF → ON), and the corresponding bit (large winning opening) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1)). The count switch) is set to "1", and similarly, the corresponding bit (large winning opening count switch) of the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR)) is also set to 1. At this time, "1" is added to the number of winnings N of the large winning openings based on the value of the buffer 2. Further, the invalid count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of buffer 1 (M-1). Further, a production command related to the big prize opening prize such as a large winning opening winning command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and a prize ball number command for winning the large winning opening is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

At the time t2, as in the time t1, a prize is generated in the large winning opening during the valid period, and "1" is set in the corresponding bits (large winning opening count switch) of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2. Further, "1" is added to the number of winnings in the large winning opening based on the value of buffer 2 (N + 2), and the illegal count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of buffer 1 (M-2). Further, a command corresponding to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951 is transmitted.

At time t3, the jackpot game ends, and the initial value (15) of the illegal count value is set. As described above, the valid time of the large winning opening 2005 is a time that allows the winning detection in addition to the opening time of the large winning opening. The initial value of the illegal count may be set at the end timing of the jackpot ending, for example, in the special symbol change waiting process (not shown) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process.

After that, at times t4 to t6, an illegal winning is generated in which the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 in a state other than the big hit (the big winning opening is not activated), and the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area corresponds. While the bit (large winning opening count switch) is set to "1" (valid, ON), the corresponding bit (large winning opening count switch) of the buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball judgment area is set to "0" (invalid, ON). OFF) is set. Then, the invalid count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of the buffer 1. The production command and the prize ball command are transmitted based on the value of the buffer 2, but at this time, the value of the buffer 2 is "0" (invalid, OFF), so that the prize is not appropriate in this way. Is prevented from sending these commands.

At time t8, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count reaches "0" by subtracting 1 from the illegal count. As a result, the output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (30-second output). Further, in order to start the fraudulent notification, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case as well, the prize ball command is not sent. It should be noted that the unauthorized notification and the output of the security signal may be either one.

Further, the illegal count number is set to 1 at time t9. As a result, even if the fraudulent winning is continuously generated, the security signal (external output signal) can be continuously output and the fraudulent notification can be continuously performed. Note that time t8 and time t9 are executed within the same timer interrupt.

At time t10, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count is subtracted by "1". Since the illegal count is set to "1" at time t9, the illegal count becomes "0" again, and the re-output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (30-second output). Further, in order to start the fraudulent notification again, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. If an illegal prize is detected again during the output of the security signal, the output time is reset (extended) while the output of the security signal is continued. Subsequently, at time t11, the illegal count number is set to "1" again. The processing at time t10 and time t11 is executed in the same timer interrupt.

After that, the result of the lottery becomes a big hit at time t12, and the effective time and the number of illegal counts during the big hit are set to the initial value (L). At time t13, as in time t2, a prize is generated in the large winning opening during the valid period, and "1" is set in the corresponding bits (large winning opening count switch) of buffer 1 and buffer 2. Then, "1" is added to the number of winnings in the large winning opening based on the value of the buffer 2 (1), and the illegal count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of the buffer 1 (L-1). Further, a prize ball command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and an effect command is transmitted to the payout control board 951.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, the prize ball is paid out based on the result of the change display of the symbol by lottery based on the fact that the game ball (game medium) is accepted (passed) in the starting port (starting area). 2005 (game medium receiving means) can accept game balls (game value-adding means). The game ball accepted by the count switch (large prize opening sensor, game medium detecting means) provided in the large winning opening 2005 is detected and stored in the input information storage area (game medium detection information storage means). In the input information storage area, a buffer 1 (first storage means) that constantly stores input information (game medium detection information) when a game ball is received in the grand prize opening 2005, and a result of variable display of symbols (lottery result). ) Is assigned to the buffer 2 (second storage means) for storing the input information (game medium detection information) when the game ball is received during the valid period (predetermined period). With this configuration, it is possible to refer to buffer 2 when paying out prize balls, detect illegal winning (abnormal occurrence) by referring to buffer 1 (and buffer 2), and count the number of illegal winnings. It becomes.

[20-5. Timing chart (second starting port)]
The case where the game ball wins the prize opening 2005 has been described above. Subsequently, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball of the second starting port 2004 provided with the ordinary electric accessory will be described in chronological order. FIG. 356 is a timing chart illustrating processing of each configuration when a game ball wins a prize in the second starting port 2004 provided with a normal electric accessory in the game machine according to the present embodiment. The numerical information, time value, etc. described on the timing chart are examples, and are not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, the effective time is set with the start of opening of the ordinary electric accessory. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (= opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory. In addition, the initial value of the illegal count (for example, "15") is set. The initial value of the illegal count is, for example, the maximum number of winnings + α when the normal electric accessory is operated.

At time t2, a prize is generated in the second start port 2004 during the valid period, and the corresponding bits (second start port switch) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) are displayed. Set "1". Further, "1" is added to the reserved storage number N based on the value of the buffer 2, and the invalid count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of the buffer 1. Then, a lottery based on the occurrence of winning is executed, and various effect commands (for example, a look-ahead command and a hold number increase command) are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the lottery result and the hold number increase. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Since a prize is generated in the second starting port 2004 at time t3 during the valid period, the prize is processed as a normal prize in the same manner as in the case of time t2.

At time t4, the valid time for accepting the game ball at the second starting port 2004 elapses (ends), and the initial value of the fraudulent count value (number of fraudulent determinations: “10”) is set. As described above, the effective time for accepting the game ball at the second starting port 2004 is, as described above, the time for allowing the winning detection after the normal electric accessory is closed, in addition to the operating time of the ordinary electric accessory. There is. The number of fraudulent judgments is set to a different value when the ordinary electric accessory is opened and after it is closed, but it may be the same, or when the ordinary electric accessory is opened, a larger value than after closing is set. It may be set. Further, when there are a plurality of types of opening times of the ordinary electric accessory, the number of illegal winnings may be switched according to the opening time. For example, the number of illegal prizes is set to 3 for short opening and 15 for long opening (or multiple opening).

After that, at times t5 to t8, the corresponding bit (second start port switch) of the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area is caused by the illegal winning that the game ball wins the second start port 2004 when the normal electric accessory is not operating. ) Is set to "1" (valid, ON), and "0" (disabled, OFF) is set to the corresponding bit (second start port switch) of the buffer 2 corresponding to the prize ball determination area. Then, the invalid count is subtracted by "1" based on the buffer 1. At this time, since the fraud is determined based on the value of the buffer 1, if the prize is not appropriate as described above, the production command and the prize ball command are not transmitted. That is, the winning of the second starting port 2004 executes the process based on the value of the buffer 2 when determining the validity, and the value of the buffer 1 when determining the fraud (counting the fraud count). Performs processing based on.

As described above, when a prize (normal prize) is generated in the second start port 2004 within the valid period, "1" is set in the value of the corresponding bit (second start port switch) of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2. It is set and various commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and the payout control board 951. In addition, when a prize is won in the second starting port 2004 outside the valid period, "1" is set only in the value of the corresponding bit of the buffer 1, and various commands to be transmitted in the normal case are transmitted. Update the fraudulent count without. Instead of updating the illegal count when setting the value of each buffer, the illegal count may be updated based on the value of each buffer after updating the value of each buffer. As a result, the module that updates the value of each buffer and the module that updates the invalid count can be made independent, and the processing from the switch input to the setting of the corresponding buffer value can be standardized. The update of the invalid count based on the value of each buffer may be performed, for example, except when the value of the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 is "1", or the value of the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 is set. This may be performed when "1" and the value of the corresponding bit of the buffer 2 are "0".

At time t9, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count reaches "0" by subtracting "1" from the illegal count. As a result, the output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (30-second output). Further, in order to start the fraudulent notification, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. In this case as well, the prize ball command is not sent. It should be noted that the unauthorized notification and the output of the security signal may be either one.

Further, the illegal count number is set to "1" at time t10. As a result, even if the illegal winning is continuously generated, the output of the security signal (external output signal) and the notification can be immediately notified when the illegal winning occurs. It is not always necessary to set the illegal count number to "1", but it is desirable to set a value smaller than the initial value ("15") so that it can be recognized that the illegal winning is continuing. Further, a value larger than "1" may be set in order to prevent fraudulent notification from being frequently performed even though it is not fraudulent due to false detection of noise or the like. Time t9 and time t10 are executed in the same timer interrupt.

At time t11, an illegal prize is further generated, and the illegal count is subtracted by "1". Since the illegal count is set to "1" at time t10, the illegal count becomes "0" again, and the re-output of the security signal (external output signal) is started (30-second output). Further, in order to start the fraudulent notification again, a notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. If an illegal prize is detected again during the output of the security signal, the output time is reset while the output of the security signal is continued. Subsequently, at time t12, the illegal count number is set to "1" again. The processing at time t11 and time t12 is executed in the same timer interrupt.

After that, at time t13, as with time t1, the effective time is set with the opening of the ordinary electric accessory. The effective time is, for example, the operating time (= opening time) of the ordinary electric accessory. In addition, the initial value of the illegal count (for example, "15") is set.

At time t14, as in time t2, a prize is generated in the second start port 2004 during the valid period, and "1" is set in the corresponding bits (second start port switch) of buffer 1 and buffer 2. "1" is added to the reserved storage number N based on the value of the buffer 2, and the invalid count is subtracted by "1" based on the value of the buffer 1. Then, as the number of reservations increases, various effect commands are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 2004 is transmitted to the payout control board 951. At the time t15, as in the time t4, the acceptable valid time of the game ball at the second starting port 2004 has elapsed, and the initial value (“10”) of the illegal count value is set.

Since the first starting port 2003 can always accept the game ball, "1" is directly set to bit0 of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area) when the game ball is won. It can be set, and there is no need to count fraudulent counts. That is, the winning openings having a valid period that can be won, such as the starting opening and the large winning opening, are set in the buffer 2 on condition of whether or not the winning is illegal, and the winning openings that can always be accepted are set in the buffer 1. The contents may be set in the buffer 2 as it is, or the buffer 1 may be referred to as a reference destination.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a gaming ball (game medium) enters the starting port, a lottery based on the occurrence of a prize is executed. The lottery may be executed only when a prize is generated within the valid period (in the case of a normal prize), but regardless of whether the prize is within the valid period or outside the valid period, the buffer 1 and the buffer It may be determined whether or not to execute the lottery based on the value of the corresponding bit of 2. That is, after setting the corresponding bit value of each buffer, the lottery is executed with reference to the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 without determining whether or not the winning is within the valid period. .. Hereinafter, a modified example of executing the lottery based on the value set in each buffer will be described.

First, if the corresponding bit values of buffer 1 and buffer 2 are different, the surrounding area is not executed as an invalid prize due to the occurrence of some abnormality (there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred). A dedicated command may be sent to the control board 1510. Upon receiving this dedicated command, the peripheral control board 1510 can notify that there is a possibility that an abnormality has occurred in the winning. In the present embodiment, as described above, in order to notify the occurrence of fraud when a plurality of winnings occur outside the valid period, a command different from this dedicated command when the fraud count reaches "0". May be transmitted to clearly notify the occurrence of an abnormality. Further, the value of the illegal count may be included in the dedicated command. In this case, the peripheral control board 1510 determines whether or not the illegal count is "0", and if the illegal count is "0", it is determined. The occurrence of an abnormality may be clearly notified.

Further, one of the buffers may be prioritized, and the lottery may be executed when the value of the corresponding bit of the prioritized buffer is set to "1". For example, the lottery is executed based on the value of the buffer 2 (priority is given to the value of the buffer 2) with an emphasis on the effectiveness of the winning. On the other hand, the fact that the game ball has won the winning opening may be emphasized, and the lottery may be executed based on the value of the buffer 1 (priority is given to the value of the buffer 1). At this time, a dedicated command indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When this dedicated command is continuously received a predetermined number of times or more, or when the dedicated command is received a predetermined number of times or more within a predetermined period, the abnormality notification may be performed assuming that an abnormality has occurred.

Further, the priority buffer may be determined at the time of executing the lottery process by parameters or the like. For example, a table containing information for specifying a priority buffer is held in advance, and the table is referred to when the lottery process is executed to specify the priority buffer. As a result, the priority buffer can be switched by changing the data value of the table without modifying the program code. By configuring in this way, for example, even if the priority buffer is different for each model, it is possible to use a common program code, and it is possible to improve the versatility of the program and improve the development efficiency. ..

Further, a procedure for designating the priority buffer will be described. Further, the start address of the table for storing the data value indicating the priority buffer at the start of execution of the lottery process is stored in a predetermined register. The table is specified from the address stored in this predetermined register, necessary information is fetched, and the priority buffer is specified. The information stored in the table stores the address of the buffer 1 when the lottery is executed based on the value of the buffer 1, and the address of the buffer 2 when the lottery is executed based on the value of the buffer 2. When executing the lottery process, the address of the buffer specified in the table is referred to, so it is possible to switch the reference destination simply by changing the data value stored in the table, and it should be configured as a common process. Can be done. In addition, it is possible to switch the reference destination depending on the game state, etc. For example, in the game state where the game ball can be accepted to the second starting port 2004, there is a high possibility that the winning is effective, so the game ball becomes the winning opening. The buffer 1 may be prioritized with an emphasis on the fact that the prize has been won, and the buffer 2 may be prioritized with an emphasis on the effectiveness of the prize in the gaming state in which the game ball cannot be accepted to the second starting port 2004.

Further, when the lottery is executed in a state where the corresponding bit values of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different, commands based on the lottery result (variation pattern command, symbol type command, etc., are transmitted at the start of normal fluctuation. (Same as the command) is transmitted, and a dedicated command indicating that the peripheral control board 1510 is different is transmitted. As for the transmission order of the command based on the lottery result and the dedicated command, the command based on the lottery result may be transmitted first, or the dedicated command may be transmitted first. Further, instead of transmitting the dedicated command, information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different may be added to the command based on the lottery result. At this time, information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different may be added to all the commands of the command based on the lottery result, or any one (partial) of the commands may be added. It may be added only to the command (for example, the command to be sent first). The addition of information indicating that the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are different is abnormal (difference) when, for example, the fluctuation pattern command at the time of normal (match) is set to "3001h" to "30FFh". The time fluctuation pattern commands are set to "B001h" to "B0FFh". Specifically, by changing the head bit of the variation pattern command, the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern command is changed from "30h" ("00110,000b") to "B0h" ("10110000b").

Further, when "1" (valid) is set for both the values of the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2, the information stored in the buffer 1 (corresponding) is not used and the valid period is reached. The lottery is executed based on the (corresponding) information stored in the buffer 2 set when a prize is won. As a result, the lottery can be executed based on the information whose validity is guaranteed. On the other hand, the lottery may be executed based on the (corresponding) information stored in the buffer 1 instead of the (corresponding) information stored in the buffer 2. In this case, since it is sufficient to hold only the minimum information related to the switch input in the buffer 2, the required storage capacity can be reduced.

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, a lottery is executed based on the fact that the game ball (game medium) is accepted (passed) in the starting port (starting area), and the variable display of the symbol is started (lottery executing means). , The game shifts to a state (special game state) in which the player can be given a game value, such as paying out a prize ball according to the result of the lottery. The game ball accepted by the start port switch (game medium detection means) provided in the start port is detected and stored in the input information storage area (game medium detection information storage means). The input information storage area includes a buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area, first storage means) that constantly stores input information (game medium detection information) when a game ball is received at the start port, and a second start port 2004. Buffer 2 (prize ball) that stores input information (game medium detection information) within the period (valid period) during which the game ball can be accepted only when the normal electric accessory is opened (when the conditions for accepting the game ball are satisfied). A determination area (second storage means) is assigned. With this configuration, the lottery is executed based on the input information stored in the buffer 2, the illegal winning (abnormal occurrence) is detected by referring to the buffer 1 (and the buffer 2), and the number of illegal winnings and the like are determined. It becomes possible to count.

[20-6. Timing chart (probability change area switch)]
The case where the game ball wins the second starting port 2004 has been described above. Subsequently, the process of detecting the winning of the game ball for the probabilistic region that shifts to the probabilistic state after the end of the jackpot when a prize is won at a specific timing (specific round) during the jackpot game will be described in chronological order. FIG. 357 is a timing chart illustrating the processing of each configuration when the gaming ball wins a prize in the probability variation region (V-AT region) in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. The numerical information, time value, etc. described on the timing chart are examples, and are not limited to these values.

First, at time t1, the passage of the probability variation region switch of the game ball is detected. As a result, the probability change area switch changes from OFF to ON. At this time, since it is a specific round (V passable round) (valid period), "1" is set in the corresponding bit (probability change area switch) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area (INPUT_EDG1)). , The corresponding bit (probability change area switch) of the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area (PAY_JDG_AR)) is also set to "1", and if 1 is set to the corresponding bit based on the value of the buffer 2, the probability change Set the judgment flag. After the big hit ends, if the probability change judgment flag is set, the state shifts to the probability change state. Further, when the same value is set for the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of the buffer 2, the probability variation determination flag may be set. At this time, the AND value (logical product) may be calculated from the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of the buffer 2, and the probability variation determination flag may be set when the value is 1. At time t1, since it is determined to be normal, an effect command related to the V passage effect is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The specific round (V-passable round) ends at time t2, but a plurality of specific rounds may be generated in one big hit game.

Subsequently, at time t3, the passage of the probability variation region switch of the game ball is detected as in time t1. At this time, since it is not within the specific round (within the valid period), "1" is set for the corresponding bit (probability variation area switch) of the buffer 1 corresponding to the input edge data 1 area, and corresponds to the prize ball determination area. “0” (invalid, OFF) is set for the corresponding bit (probability change area switch) of the buffer 2. Since the corresponding bit of the buffer 1 and the corresponding bit of the buffer 2 have different values, it is determined that there is an abnormality, that is, V passage other than a specific round, and the high probability (advantageous state) does not occur after the big hit. A security signal is output until time t4 as a V-passing abnormality notification, and a V-passing abnormality notification command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The security signal may be the same as the signal at the time of abnormality at the grand prize opening 2005 or the second starting port 2004, or may be a different external output. Further, the output time may be a predetermined time, and does not have to be the same time as the big winning opening winning abnormality or the like. Further, the V-passing abnormality notification and the output of the security signal may be either one.

If the passage of the probability variation region switch is detected in a specific round and then the passage of the probability variation region switch is detected in a round other than the specific round, only the abnormality notification is executed (the abnormality notification command is transmitted) when the probability variation region switch is passed. However, it may shift to a high probability (advantageous state) after a big hit (the value of the probability variation judgment flag is maintained), and it does not shift to a high probability (advantageous state) after a big hit (the value of the probability variation judgment flag is cleared). You may do so. In addition, when the passage of the probability change area switch is detected even in a round other than the specific round, the abnormality notification command is transmitted, but the security signal is not output, and the abnormality notification on the peripheral control board 1510 side such as lamps and voices is performed. Although only the notification command may be transmitted, the peripheral control board 1510 may not perform abnormality notification for the command.

In the timing chart shown in FIG. 357, the abnormality is determined by determining whether or not the corresponding bits of the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 match, but the abnormality is determined in the same manner as in the case of determining the winning abnormality of the large winning opening. It may be a method of setting the count number in advance. For example, the fraud determination counter is set to "2" at the start of a specific round, and the fraud determination counter is subtracted based on the information in the buffer 1. Further, it may be set to "1" at the end of a specific round, and when the result of subtracting the fraudulent count is 0, it may be determined to be fraudulent. The initial value of the illegal count set at the start of a specific round can be set to a value that cannot occur in normal times, so it is not necessary to limit it to "2", and there are two or more passages of the game ball. If it is not obtained, 2 may be set. In addition, since it is necessary to determine that it is illegal when even one game ball passes other than the specific round, "1" is set at the end of the specific round, and the result of subtraction is "0". Set to.

The gaming machine described here shifts to the probabilistic state under the condition that the game ball wins the probabilistic change region at a predetermined timing (during a specific round) during the big hit game. If the probability change area is not in a state where the game ball can be accepted, the game ball is in a state where it is difficult (or impossible) to win a prize, and if the game ball is accepted in the probability change area in such a state, it is illegal. It is judged as a prize. Therefore, as described above, the bits corresponding to the probabilistic region switch are provided with the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area), and the buffer 1 is set regardless of whether it is valid or invalid. Set in buffer 2 only when it is valid. As a result, the buffer 2 may be referred to without determining the illegal winning in the process of shifting to the probabilistic state, so that the process can be simplified. On the other hand, by referring to the buffer 1 and the buffer 2, it is possible to determine the illegal winning and count the number of illegal winnings.

[20-7. Summary / transformation example]
From the above, the game machine of the present embodiment detects the acceptance of the game ball (game medium) at the grand prize opening, the start opening, etc. by the detection sensor (switch) (detects that the game medium has passed through a predetermined area). ) Game medium detection information storage means including a game medium detection means and a game medium detection information storage means (input information storage area) capable of storing detection information (game medium detection information) of these game balls (game media). The means are a buffer 1 (first storage means, an edge buffer for fraud determination, an input edge data 1 area) that can always store the game medium detection information, and the game medium detection information within the valid period (when a predetermined condition is satisfied). It has a buffer 2 (second storage means, prize ball determination area) to store, for example, when a game ball wins a prize within a valid period and pays out the prize ball (executes processing based on the establishment of predetermined conditions). In the case of), the process is executed with reference to the game medium detection information stored in the prize ball determination area (second storage means).

In addition, when a valid period is set for accepting the game ball in the winning opening or the probability variation area, the number of times the switch input information (game medium detection information) is stored only in the buffer 1 (number of illegal winnings) is counted. By doing so, the abnormality can be determined. The number of illegal winnings may be counted by subtracting 1 each time an illegal winning occurs with the threshold value for determining an abnormality as the initial value, and when it reaches 0, it may be determined as abnormal, or the initial value may be 0 and 1 each. It may be added, and when the threshold value for abnormality determination is reached, it may be determined as an abnormality.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, by switching the area to be referred to when the input determination process is executed, the process associated with the input determination can be standardized and the entire process can be simplified. As described above, it is possible to pay out prize balls based on the information detected within the valid period, or to make an abnormality judgment by counting the number of game balls won outside the valid period. Development efficiency can be improved. For example, when determining the winning of the big winning opening 2005, in the above-described embodiment, the judgment is made based on the value of the prize ball determination area, but the counting of the winnings to the big winning opening 2005 in the big hit state is determined. The value of the input edge data area 1 may be used for determination, and the value of the prize ball determination area may be referred to only for the winning determination associated with the prize ball.

In the present embodiment, a configuration having two types of buffers, a buffer 1 that constantly stores an input and a buffer 2 that stores an input within a valid period, has been described. It may be configured to have a buffer of.

Further, in the embodiments described so far, the winning opening whose validity period is set at the time of winning has been described, but the first starting port 2002, which can always accept the game ball, determines the validity period when the game ball wins. Without doing so, "1" (valid) is set in the corresponding bit (first start port switch) of the buffer 1 (input edge data 1 area) and the buffer 2 (prize ball determination area). Therefore, for the first start port 2002, the prize ball may be given based on the value of the buffer 1, or the prize ball may be given based on the value of the buffer 2 as in the case of the second start port 2004. Further, since the value of the buffer 1 and the value of the buffer 2 match and the result of the determination processing of the valid period at the second starting port 2004 is always normal, for example, a prize ball when the first starting port 2002 is won. The processing of the above may be the same as the processing of the prize ball of the second starting port 2004.

The buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are included in the input information storage area allocated to the RAM (main control built-in RAM), but these buffers may be arranged in a continuous area or in a distant area. You may. When allocating buffer 1 and buffer 2 to continuous areas, when storing values in each buffer, it is possible to set to each buffer simply by executing the INC instruction / DEC instruction, which simplifies processing. can. On the other hand, when the buffer 1 and the buffer 2 are assigned to distant areas, each buffer can be freely arranged, so that the degree of freedom in designing the storage area is increased and the development efficiency can be improved.

[21. Bit transfer instruction]
In recent game machines, complicated game control is required in order to further enhance the interest of the game. On the other hand, the game control device that actually controls the game is subject to certain restrictions in order to ensure the fairness of the game and prevent excessive gambling, and the game is played within a predetermined framework. ing.

Therefore, there is a possibility that a problem may occur such that a problem may occur due to the complicated structure of the program in order to realize complicated game control. Therefore, the program was simplified by converting the game control into data. For example, the structure of the program is simplified by the program sequentially processing the data in which the control contents are defined, and it becomes easier to respond to the specification change by changing the data.

On the other hand, the digitization of game control has increased the dependence on data, and the complexity of the specifications of gaming machines has led to an increase in data capacity. Further, since the capacity for storing data for controlling the gaming machine is limited, it is necessary to suppress the increase in the data capacity.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment is made in view of the above circumstances, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity by compressing and storing the data in order to suppress the increase in the data capacity used in the gaming machine. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, by compressing the data, it is possible to hold more data, it is possible to provide a game incorporating complicated specifications, and the interest of the game is enhanced. Is possible. Further, by further advancing the data conversion of the game control, the program can be further simplified, the complexity of the game control can be suppressed, and the probability of occurrence of a defect can be reduced. Further, it becomes easier to respond to changes in the specifications of the gaming machine, and it becomes possible to easily provide various variations of the gaming machine by replacing some data.

Specifically, in the game machine according to the present embodiment, by improving the instruction for reading the game data, the degree of freedom in the structure of the table for holding the game data can be improved, and the process for reading the game data can be simplified. This makes it possible to compress the capacity of game data and simplify game control that involves reading data. Hereinafter, the configuration and procedure for reading the data in the present embodiment will be described.

[21-1. Bit transfer procedure overview]
First, the outline of the configuration and the procedure for reading the data in the present embodiment will be described. In the data transfer procedure in the present embodiment, it is possible to read the data in bit units from the specified bit position of the table, instead of reading the data in byte units from the specified address.

FIG. 358 is a diagram illustrating an outline of the bit transfer procedure of the present embodiment. The bit transfer procedure in the present embodiment is configured to specify a position (address) for reading data based on an index (index information) that specifies a data reading source, and read data for a specified number of bits. There is. When executing this procedure, the index, the extraction specification information corresponding to the number of bits of the read data, and the storage destination of the read data are specified as parameters. For the index, a register in which index information is stored may be specified, or a value may be directly specified.

The index in this embodiment is composed of 2 bytes (16 bits). The upper 13 bits store information indicating the start address of the data table (table position information), and the lower 3 bits indicate information indicating the position to read data from the specified data table (data relative position information). ing. In the present embodiment, the address of the designated data table is specified by correcting the designated index, and the data read position of the data table is acquired. Specifically, the upper 13 bits of the index before correction are set as the lower 13 bits, and "000" is added to the upper 13 bits to make 2 bytes (16 bits), thereby creating the index after correction.

Next, the reference address (N) of the data acquired by adding the value set in the "TP (register)" indicating the reference address of the data storage position (table arrangement) and the corrected index. Is calculated, and the storage position (address) of the table is specified. Further, the read position (read start bit position) of the data at the reference address (N) is specified from the value of the lower 3 bits of the index before correction. In the example shown in FIG. 358, the value of the lower 3 bits of the index before correction (the hatched portion falling to the left) is the read start bit position of the reference address (N). When "100" is set, the read start bit position of the reference address (N) is the 4th bit ("100").

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the address of the area where the data is stored can be specified by adding the value set in the TP register to the index value, it is sufficient to specify the lower address of the data storage position. , The area for storing the upper address can be used for other purposes. Specifically, it is used as an area (lower 3 bits of the corrected index) for designating the data read start bit position. With the above configuration, in the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the address of the data storage area and the data read start bit position with a 2-byte index. That is, it is possible to specify the data storage position in bit units and read the data without causing an increase in capacity compared to the case where the data is read by specifying the address as in the conventional load instruction. It has become.

Further, in the bit transfer procedure in the present embodiment, extraction designation information corresponding to the number of bits of data to be read as a parameter at the time of execution is specified. A value of bit number -1 of the data to be acquired is set in the extraction designation information. In the example shown in FIG. 358, the data for the 5th to 6th bits (when the extraction designation information = 5) of the table indicated by the reference destination address (address N) is read and stored in the designated storage destination.

In the present embodiment, the value obtained by adding the corrected index to the value of the start address (reference address) of the data area set in the TP register in advance is the address where the data is actually stored. Further, when the CPU is reset at the time of turning on the power or the like, the start address of the data area is set as the default value (initial value) as the value set in the TP register. Further, the TP register can be rewritten to an arbitrary value by a program. With this configuration, by appropriately rewriting the value of the TP register according to the game state, etc., it is possible to change the data reference destination without changing the program code, simplifying the program code, and playing the game. The development efficiency of the machine can be improved. The details of the bit transfer procedure will be described later with reference to FIGS. 364 and later.

The TP register is a dedicated register for designating an index that serves as a reference address among the registers held by the CPU. A general-purpose register used in an operation or the like is composed of two or more banks, but a TP register is not a bank configuration like a flag register but is configured as one register. It should be noted that a TP register may be provided for each bank like a general-purpose register, and the TP register of one bank may be used in the same manner as the general-purpose register each time the bank is switched. For example, when bank 0 is used in the initialization processing and the general-purpose register of bank 1 is used in the timer interrupt processing, the TP register used in the initialization processing is the one set as bank 0, and the timer interrupt processing is performed. As the TP register used in, the one set as bank 1 will be used. This makes it possible to switch the value of the TP register according to the processing, and for example, the data reference destination can be switched for each processing. Even if the TP register is provided for each bank, it can be rewritten by the program as in the case where it is not provided for each bank, and the default value is set at the time of reset. Further, the default value may be a common value regardless of the bank, or a different value may be set for each bank.

[21-2. Type of bit transfer instruction]
Subsequently, an instruction code (command) for executing the above procedure (bit transfer instruction) will be described. In this embodiment, the case where the bit transfer instruction is executed by the assembler (mnemonic) will be described, but the same applies to other development languages. FIG. 359 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an instruction code for executing the bit transfer instruction in the present embodiment.

The bit transfer instruction is composed of an instruction code "RBT" and parameters. The parameters are the storage destination of the data to be referenced, the index indicating the reference destination address, and the extraction specification information corresponding to the number of bits of the data to be extracted. In the present embodiment, the storage destination of the data to be referred to is a register, but it may be written directly to the storage area on the RAM. The index value specifies the address of the table in which the data to be read is stored and the position of the data to be read, as in the example shown in FIG. 358.

Next, an example of actually using the instruction code will be described. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing an example of the types of bit transfer instructions of the present embodiment. As described above, the instruction code is "RBT", and the acquired data is stored in the register r. As the register r, for example, W register, A register, B register, C register, D register, H register, and L register, which are general-purpose registers, are specified. When the data to be read is 2 bytes, a pair register such as a WA register, a BC register, or a DE register may be specified.

In addition, the parameters (storage destination of reference data, reference destination address, and extraction specification information) may be specified either by directly specifying the index (address) value mm or by specifying the register rr for address specification. .. When the register rr is specified, the value stored in the register is read and processed. Since a 2-byte value is stored in the address designation register rr, a DE register, an HL register, an index register (IX register, IY register), and the like correspond to each other. Hereinafter, an example of the bit transfer instruction code shown in FIG. 360 will be described.

“RBT r, (mm) .n” directly specifies the address mm of the table for storing the data, reads out the data for the number of bits based on the extraction designation information n, and stores the data in the register r. The extraction designation information n directly specifies a number in the range of 0 to 7 or 0 to 15, or specifies a register A. When the register A is specified, the data corresponding to the number of minutes stored in the register A is read out.

Further, when the specific operation (procedure) of "RBT r, (mm) .n" is explained, as described in FIG. 358, the address of the table specified by the upper 13 bits of the 16-bit index mm is used. Therefore, mm / 8 corresponds to the corrected index. The value set in the TP register described above is added to the corrected index to calculate the actual address of the table to be referenced. Further, the lower 3 bits of the index mm are extracted (mm∧07H), and the bit position of the start of reading data from the referenced table is specified. Then, the data for the extraction designation information n + 1 bit is extracted from the specified position and stored in the register r. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 11, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 5 bytes. Further, even after the instruction is executed, the J flag and the Z flag in the flag register become zero, and the values before the instruction is executed are retained for the others. The change in the flag register is the same even with the instruction code described below.

“RBT r, (rr) .n” specifies the register rr that stores the address of the table, reads the data for the number of bits based on the extraction specification information n from the table, and stores it in the register r. Other parameters are the same as those of "RBT r, (mm) .n". Specifically, the address of the table to be referred to is stored in the HL register, and when the read data is stored in the A register, it becomes "RBT A, (HL) .n". The specific operation of "RBT r, (rr) .n" is the same as when the address mm of "RBT r, (mm) .n" is replaced with the value stored in the register rr. Although omitted, a detailed procedure will be described later with reference to FIG. 365. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 9, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 3 bytes. When the object to be read is larger than 8 bits (1 byte), the capacity is 1 byte in order to specify a register such as a DE register, an HL register, or an index register (IX register, IY register) as a storage destination. It increases by the amount to 4 bytes. The detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction in this case will be described later with reference to FIG. 367.

“RBT r, (rr +) .n” is executed by the same operation as “RBT r, (rr) .n”, and then the value of the address stored in the register rr is added by n + 1. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 10, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 3 bytes. This makes it possible to continuously read the specified area. For example, by executing "RBT A, (HL +) .n" and then "RBT W, (HL) .m", from the specified position in the table of addresses first stored in the HL register. After reading the n-bit data and storing it in the A register, the m-bit data can be read from the next area and stored in the W register. In this way, by continuously executing "RBT r, (rr +) .n", a plurality of data can be read from the continuous area, and when the data having the same number of bits is read as much as necessary, or when there are a plurality of types. It is possible to simplify the process of reading a record (data group) composed of data having the number of bits of. A detailed procedure for reading a plurality of data from a continuous area will be described later with reference to FIG. 366.

“RBT r, (rr + d) .n” reads data from the position where the value d is added to the address of the table stored in the register rr. This makes it possible to specify arbitrary data in the specified table and read the data. At this time, the cycle for processing the instruction is 10, and the capacity for storing the instruction is 4 bytes.

“RBT r, (rr + W) .n” reads data from the position where the value stored in the register W is added to the address of the table stored in the register rr. This makes it possible to specify arbitrary data in the specified table and read the data. Further, by updating the value of the register W, data can be continuously read from the positions specified by the common code. “RBT r, (rr + A) .n” can be processed in the same manner only by changing from register W to register A. The cycle for processing these instructions is 10, and the capacity for storing the instructions is 3 bytes.

[21-3. Program example]
Subsequently, an application example of the bit transfer instruction "RBT" described above will be described. FIG. 361 is a diagram showing an example of a flowchart of a process using the bit transfer instruction “RBT” in the present embodiment. Further, FIG. 362 is a diagram showing an example of a program corresponding to the flowchart (FIG. 361) of the process using the bit transfer instruction “RBT” in the present embodiment. The corresponding flowchart steps are described as program comments. The process shown in FIGS. 361 and 362 is a process of reading data from the table in units of 6 bits. This process is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first sets a value obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the reference table as the initial value of the reference destination address as an index value (step P8001). Specifically, as shown in the program of FIG. 362, the address of the table to be referred to is stored in the HL register (“LD HL, table_Top”). The address of the referenced table is specified by the label "table_Top", and the contents of the table are defined at the end of the program. In this table, the number of bits allocated to one data (total number of bits of the basic constituent block) is 6, and four data (“25, 48, 32, 63”) are stored. Regarding the start address of the data area, the "start address of the data area" is set in the TP register as a default value every time a reset signal is input such as when the power is restored. Therefore, when the TP register is not rewritten, that is, When the start address of the data area is still stored, the value of the TP register may be subtracted instead of the value of the start address of the data area.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 extracts pointer information (pointa_a) of the data to be referenced from the reference table (step P8002). As shown in the program, the address of the pointer information is stored in the A register (“LDA, (pointa_a)”).

The main control MPU 1311 multiplies the extracted pointer information by the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the reference table (step P8003). The basic configuration block indicates an area for storing one unit of data (record) stored in the reference table. The total number of basic constituent blocks is the number of bits in the area for storing data, and corresponds to the data capacity of each record. For example, in a table that stores integer values in the range of 0 to 30, the total number of basic constituent blocks is 5 because an area for 5 bits is required to store each data. In the present embodiment, the total number of bits of the basic constituent block is 6. The result of the multiplication is stored in the A register (“MUL A, 6”) as shown in the program.

The main control MPU 1311 divides the multiplied value by the number of basic units (step P8004). The number of basic units of data handled by the arithmetic unit of the gaming machine of the present embodiment (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310) is 8 (the number of bits of 1 byte). The calculation result is stored in the WA register as shown in the program (“LD C, 8 → DIV WA, C”). When the "DIV" instruction is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register and the remainder is stored in the W register.

The main control MPU 1311 adds the quotient of the division result calculated in the process of step P8004 to the index value (step P8005). As shown in the program, the index value is stored in the HL register, and the value stored in the WA register is added (“ADD HL, WA”). When referring to the program, the WA register is saved in the stack area by executing "PUSH WA" before adding the value stored in the WA register to the value stored in the HL register. This is because the value of the W register in which the remainder is stored is cleared (“XOR W”), and then the value of the remainder is used as the calculated value (“POP WA → LDA, W → ...”).

Further, the main control MPU 1311 multiplies the calculation result of the process of step P8005 by N (8 in this embodiment) (step P8006). In the program, the value of the HL register is multiplied by 8 by performing the left shift (SLA HL) three times (shifting by 3 bits).

The main control MPU 1311 adds the remainder value of the division of step P8005 to the calculation result of the process of step P8006 and sets it as the reference destination address information (step P8006). The remainder value stored in the W register is the start bit position for reading the reference data from the start address of the reference table. On the program, the remainder value is calculated (“POP WA” → “LDA, W” → “XOR W”), and the remainder value (value stored in the WA register) is stored in the HL register where the index value is stored. It is adding (“ADD HL, WA”). By these processes, the index (pre-correction index) shown in FIG. 358 can be created.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 specifies the extraction designation information based on the number of information to be acquired (the number of bits of the data to be referred to, 6 in this embodiment), and stores the reference data from the reference destination address information by a bit transfer instruction. Set first (step P8009). In the program, the value stored in the HL register is used as the index before correction, and the data for the number of bits (6 bits) corresponding to the extraction specification information n is stored in the A register (“RBT A, (HL) .n”. ).

[21-4. Modification example]
As described above, the procedure for issuing the bit transfer instruction in the present embodiment is (1) designation of data to be referred to, (2) creation of an index (pre-correction index), and (3) reading / storing of data. ing. Here, a modified example will be described in which a process that can be executed without depending on the process of executing the bit transfer instruction is made independent as a subroutine to simplify the structure of the program.

(1) The designation of the data to be referred to is to set the information for specifying the data (reference data) required for the processing during execution, and in the flowchart of FIG. 361, it corresponds to the table referred to in step P8001. The process of designating the information and designating the information corresponding to the data read position in step P8002 corresponds to the process. These processes are specialized for the content being executed (caller) and are individually specified when various functions are executed. (3) The same applies to the process of reading / storing data, which is executed in the subsequent process based on the acquired data.

On the other hand, in (2) creating an index (index before correction), in addition to the pointer information of the reference table address and data reference position specified in (1), the total number of bits of the basic configuration block is specified. Therefore, the index before correction can be created independently of the processing being executed. Therefore, (2) the index creation process can be made into a subroutine.

FIG. 363 is an example of a flowchart in which the index creation process in the present embodiment is made into a subroutine, (A) is a process of a caller of the index creation process, and (B) is a subroutine-like index creation process. The flowchart shown in FIG. 363 (A) executes the same process as in FIG. 361. The flowchart of the index creation process of FIG. 363 (B) is a subroutine of the processes from step P8003 to step P8008 of FIG. 361. By making the index creation process into a subroutine in this way, it is possible to simplify the process of the caller and improve the development efficiency.

The input parameters of the index creation process are the "index value" which is the start address of the reference table, the "pointer information" of the data to be referenced, and the "total number of bits of the basic configuration block" of the stored data. In the present embodiment, the result of subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the reference table is set as the "index value" in the HL register (step P8001), and the "pointer information" is set in the A register (step P8002). ). Further, "total number of bits of the basic constituent block" is set as a parameter (step P8013). Therefore, when setting the "index value" and "pointer information" as the input parameters of the index creation process, they are set (specified) in the registers handled as the "index value" and "pointer value" in the index creation process. .. Further, regarding the "total number of bits of the basic constituent block", the numerical value itself may be specified, or the register treated as the "total number of bits of the basic constituent block" may be set (specified).

[21-5. Compressed data]
In the conventional data read instruction, since the storage of data is managed in a predetermined basic unit (byte unit), it is necessary to read the data from the table in this unit. In the conventional table structure that is managed in 1-byte (8-bit) units like the game machine of the present embodiment, even if the data does not require the capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), the data is stored in byte units. Needed to be stored. For example, if the numerical value is in the range of 0 to 63, it is sufficient to secure a capacity of 6 bits for each data, but it is necessary to allocate and hold a capacity of 1 byte for each data.

On the other hand, in the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, data for a specified number of bits can be read from a specified position in the referenced table. Therefore, it is sufficient to allocate the data area as much as necessary, and the data can be compressed and held. The structure for compressing and holding the data will be described below with reference to FIG. 364.

FIG. 364 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table structure according to the present embodiment. In the table shown in FIG. 364, four records (data) "25, 48, 32, 63" are held. When these data are converted into hexadecimal numbers, they become "19h, 30h, 20h, 3Fh", and when converted into binary numbers (bit conversion), they become "00011001b, 00110000b, 0010000b, 00111111b". Since the number of basic units of data handled by the arithmetic unit of the game machine is 8, conventionally, it has a table structure that holds data in 8-bit units such as the area of 4771 shown by the dotted line, and the top 2 of each record. The bit was "0".

In the bit transfer instruction described above, data can be read from any bit of the specified address. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the data for 6 bits of each record, that is, the data included in the area 4772 is continuously stored. By doing so, it becomes possible to arrange the data as shown in the area 4773. As a result, "19h, 0Ch, FEh" is stored.

As described above, the conventional table structure requires a capacity of 4 bytes (32 bits), but by reading the data by the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, unnecessary bits are deleted and 3 bytes (24 bits) are deleted. It can be a table structure compressed into bits). As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to minimize the area for holding data, and it is possible to save the storage capacity. This makes it possible to manage more data and perform more detailed game control.

[21-6. Detailed procedure of bit transfer instruction]
Subsequently, a typical pattern will be described for the detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment. Here, when reading the specified single data (RBT A, (HL) .5), when reading the data continuously from the table ([1] RBT A, (HL +) .5 → [2] RBT B, (HL) .5), a case where data having a capacity larger than 1 byte is read (RBT DE, (HL) .9) will be described. In the examples described below, the value of the TP register is set to "8000h", which is the start address of the data area.

[21-6-1. Reading single data]
FIG. 365 is a diagram illustrating a detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where a single data is read from a referenced table. The table to be referred to is the same as the table shown in FIG. 364. The bit transfer instruction to be executed is "RBT A, (HL) .5".

As shown in FIG. 365, the pre-correction index “4C6E” is stored in the HL register. The address of the referenced table is "898Dh", and the example described here shows a case where the second stored data (30h) of the referenced table is transferred. As described above, the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the referenced table is 6, and the basic unit is 8 bits (1 byte). The pre-correction index "4C6E" can be calculated by executing the index creation process (FIG. 363 (B)) based on this information.

When the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL) .5" is executed, first, the reference destination address for reading the data is specified. Specifically, the reference address ("898Dh") can be calculated by dividing the pre-correction index "4C6E" by the number of basic units (8) ("098Dh") and adding the TP "8000h". ..

Further, by calculating the logical product of the pre-correction index “4C6E” and “07h”, the lower 3 bits (“110b”) are acquired, and the read start position (bit) of the reference destination address is specified. In the example shown in FIG. 365, it is the 6th (= “110b”) bit of the reference destination address. Then, “110,000b” (= 48 (“30h”)) can be acquired by extracting data for 6 (n + 1) bits from the 6th bit of the reference address “898Dh”. The acquired value is complemented with "00" in the upper 2 bits according to the number of basic units (8) and stored in the A register.

[21-6-2. Continuous reading of data]
FIG. 366 is a diagram illustrating a detailed procedure of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, and is a diagram illustrating a case where data is continuously read from a referenced table. The table to be referred to is the table shown in FIG. 364, as in the case of FIG. 365. Further, a case where the bit transfer instruction [1] "RBT A, (HL +) .5" is executed and then [2] "RBT B, (HL) .5" is executed will be described. Note that [1] and [2] correspond to the execution order of each bit transfer instruction, and correspond to the arrows of the reference address in FIG. 366.

The execution process of the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL +) .5" is the same as "RBT A, (HL) .5" (FIG. 365) until the data to be transferred is stored in the A register. In the bit transfer instruction "RBT A, (HL +) .5", after storing the acquired data in the A register, the value of the extraction designation information n + 1 (5 + 1) is added to the index value "4C6Eh" stored in the HL register. do. The value stored in the HL register (index before correction) is not changed from the value set before the bit transfer instruction is executed even after the bit transfer instruction is executed (after the data is read). It has become. By executing the index update process for updating the index value to the storage position of the next data in this way, the storage position of the next data of the read data can be specified. In the example shown in FIG. 366, it is "4C74h".

After that, the reference destination address and the read start position (bit) are specified in the same manner as in the case of reading the single data described with reference to FIG. 365. In the example shown in FIG. 366, 6 bits of data are read from the 4th (= “100b”) bit of the reference address “898Eh” and stored in the B register.

In this way, when reading data continuously from the specified table, the index value is calculated by first executing the index creation process, and then added to the index value by the number of bits of the read data. The index value can be updated sequentially by.

If each record in the table is composed of a combination of data with different bit numbers, data can be acquired for each record by specifying the extraction specification information according to the number of bits that make up the record. It will be possible. For example, when a record is composed of 4-bit, 6-bit, and 10-bit data, data for one record is acquired by sequentially executing bit transfer instructions by designating 4, 6, and 10 as extraction designation information. can do. At this time, when composed of 4-bit, 6-bit, and 10-bit data, the total number (number of bits) of the basic constituent blocks is 20 (= 4 + 6 + 10). In this case, for example, the program configuration is such that the bit transfer instruction is executed in the order of "RBT A, (HL +) .4", "RBT B, (HL +) .6", "RBT DE, (HL) .10". As a result, it is possible to acquire each data constituting the record. With the above configuration, it is not necessary to acquire data while individually creating index values, so that it is possible to simplify the program for acquiring data in record units and speed up the execution time.

[Reading data with a capacity larger than 21-6-3.1 bytes]
367 is a diagram for explaining a bit transfer instruction for data having a size larger than 1 byte of the present embodiment, FIG. 367 is a diagram showing a table to be referred to, and FIG. 3B is a diagram for explaining a procedure. be.

The table shown in FIG. 367 (A) stores values from 0 to 1000, and holds three records (data) “55,258,942” as an example. When these data are converted into hexadecimal numbers, they become "37h, 102h, 3AEh", and when they are converted into binary numbers (bit conversion), they become "0000101111b, 01000000010b, 1110101110b".

However, since the upper limit of the table shown in FIG. 367 (A) is 1000, it can be stored in 10 bits. As described above, since the basic number of units of data handled by the arithmetic unit of the gaming machine is 8, it is necessary to store the data in units of 8 bits (1 byte), and 16 bits to actually store the data. Needed a minute capacity. Therefore, conventionally, the table structure is as shown by the dotted line 4801, and "0" is assigned to the upper 6 bits of each unused record. Therefore, as in the example shown in FIG. 364, the data for 10 bits of each record, that is, the data in the area 4802 is continuously stored, and the data is arranged as shown in 4803. As a result, "37h, 08h, E4h, 3Ah" is stored. In this way, it is possible to similarly compress and hold data having a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte).

For the total number of basic constituent blocks, the number of bits of the maximum value of the configured data may be specified. For example, as in the above example, if the upper limit of the configured data is 1000 (3E8h), the number of bits of 10 is the total number of basic constituent blocks. If the total number of basic constituent blocks is 10, the range of values that can be stored is 0h to 3FFh (1023). Further, as described above, when each record of the table is composed of a combination of data having a different number of bits (for example, the first data, the second data, and the third data), the maximum value of the first data is used. The number of bits, the number of bits of the maximum value of the second data, and the number of bits of the maximum value of the third data are the total number of basic constituent blocks of the first data, the total number of basic constituent blocks of the second data, and the basic configuration of the third data, respectively. It is the total number of blocks.

As described above, FIG. 367 (B) is a diagram illustrating a procedure for executing a bit transfer instruction for data having a size larger than 1 byte, and executes the bit transfer instruction “RBT DE, (HL) .9”. do. The pre-correction index "4C72h" is stored in the HL register. The start address of the referenced table is "898Dh", and an example of transferring the second data of the referenced table is shown. Further, the total number of bits of the basic constituent blocks of the referenced table is 10, and the basic unit is 8. The pre-correction index “4C72h” can be calculated by executing the index creation process (FIG. 363 (B)) based on this information.

The reference destination address is specified in the same manner as in the procedure shown in FIG. 365, and "898Eh" is calculated. Further, the read start position (“010b”) of the reference destination address is specified by the same procedure. Then, “01000000010b” (= 258 (“102h”)) is acquired by extracting 10 (n + 1) bit data from the 2nd (“010b”) bit, which is the read start position of the reference address “898Eh”. be able to. Since the acquired value exceeds the basic number of units (8), the upper 2 bits (“01b”) of the acquired value are extracted from the high-order bits, and “000000” is complemented with the upper 6 bits of the extracted value. (“00000001b”) and store in the D register. Further, the remaining lower 8 bits (“00000010b”) are stored in the E register.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, even data requiring a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be compressed and held, and the data can be read out by a simple procedure. It will be possible.

[21-7. Application example]
Subsequently, an example in which the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment is applied in the game control will be described. Here, a process of extracting a random number and selecting a variation pattern of a symbol variation display (dynamic display) in game control based on the extracted random number will be described as an example. In this process, the extracted random numbers are sequentially compared with the threshold value acquired from the fluctuation pattern table, and when the extracted random numbers are equal to or greater than the threshold value, the fluctuation pattern number corresponding to this threshold value is selected as the lottery result. Hereinafter, description will be made with reference to the drawings of FIGS. 368 to 370.

[21-7-1. Fluctuation pattern table configuration]
First, the variation pattern table in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 368 is a diagram for explaining an application example of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, (A) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the corresponding range, and (B) is a program code showing a fluctuation pattern table. (C) is a figure explaining an example of the structure of the table before compression and the table after compression about the variation pattern table corresponding to (B).

In the present embodiment, the range of the extracted random numbers is 0 to 63 (integer value), and as shown in FIG. 368 (A), when the extracted random numbers are included in the range corresponding to each fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern number corresponding to is selected. In the present embodiment, fluctuation patterns from pattern 1 (PT1) to pattern 5 (PT5) are defined, and patterns 1, 46 to 54 are defined when the random number values are 0 to 32, and patterns 1 and 33 to 45 are defined when the random number values are 0 to 32. The case of is pattern 3, the case of 55 to 60 is pattern 4, and the case of 61 to 63 is pattern 5. In addition, the larger the pattern number, the higher the expectation that the player will be in an advantageous state (the lottery result will be a big hit). It should be noted that the higher the pattern number is, the higher the expectation is, and the smaller the pattern number is, the higher the expectation may be. Also, the pattern number is set based on a standard other than the management expectation. You may do so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 368 (B), the fluctuation pattern table (hp_table) is defined as one record with a set of a random number threshold value and a pattern number. The random number threshold and the fluctuation pattern number are continuously held in the same table.

As mentioned above, the range of random numbers to be extracted is 0 to 63, and the threshold requires a capacity of up to 6 bits. Similarly, since the variation pattern number is defined in the range of 1 to 5, a maximum capacity of 3 bits (0 to 7) is required. When data is stored by the conventional method, the gaming machine of the present embodiment requires a capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) for storing one data, and is therefore shown on the left side of FIG. 368 (C). As described above, if the number of records composed of the random number threshold value and the fluctuation pattern number is 5, a total capacity of 10 bytes is used. On the other hand, as shown on the right side of FIG. 368 (C), by adopting the data compression technique of the present embodiment, it is sufficient to secure a capacity of 6 bits for the threshold value and 3 bits for the fluctuation pattern number, and these data can be continuously stored. If the number of records is 5, the data can be stored with a total capacity of 45 bits (6 bytes), and the capacity can be reduced by 40% or more.

The table shown in FIG. 368 is an example, and the compression rate of the table changes according to the threshold value of random numbers, the range of fluctuation pattern numbers, and the like. For example, if the capacity of the random number threshold is in bytes (8 bits), the data cannot be compressed, but if the capacity of the random number threshold is not in bytes, that is, if there is a fraction of 1 to 7 bits, each data The capacity can be reduced by a fractional bit from 8 bits. In particular, when the data capacity is one bit such as 9 bits or 17 bits, it is possible to reduce the capacity of 7 bits with one data, and the maximum effect can be obtained.

[21-7-2. Procedure for selecting a fluctuation pattern]
Next, the outline of the procedure for selecting the variation pattern in the present embodiment will be described. note that. When a plurality of types of fluctuation pattern tables are defined, the fluctuation pattern tables are selected in advance according to the game state and the like.

First, a random number value in the range of 0 to 63 is extracted as a random number for the lottery of the fluctuation pattern. Next, the random number threshold value and the fluctuation pattern number are sequentially acquired from the fluctuation pattern table in record units from the beginning of the table. Further, the threshold value of the acquired random number is compared with the extracted random number, and if the value of the random number is equal to or greater than the acquired threshold value, the corresponding fluctuation pattern is selected as the lottery result. On the other hand, when the value of the random number is less than the acquired threshold value, the next record is acquired from the variation pattern table and the variation pattern is selected by comparing with the threshold value in the same procedure. In this way, the threshold corresponds to the lower limit of the range of random numbers for selecting the corresponding variation pattern. Further, since the threshold value of the last record of the fluctuation pattern table is 0, the fluctuation pattern is always selected in the last record. To show a numerical example of the fluctuation pattern selection procedure, if the extracted random number is "48", it is less than the threshold value compared to the threshold value "60" corresponding to the first record in the table, so the next record. Compare with the threshold value “54” of. Similarly, when compared with the threshold value “45” of the next record, the extracted random number “45” becomes equal to or higher than the threshold value, so the same pattern “PT3” (variation pattern number 3) on the right side of the corresponding end is selected.

Here, the procedure for acquiring the variation pattern number from the variation pattern table (variation pattern selection process) will be specifically described. FIG. 369 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for selecting a variation pattern in the present embodiment. FIG. 370 is a diagram showing an example of a program for selecting a fluctuation pattern in the present embodiment. The flowchart of FIG. 369 corresponds to the program of FIG. 370. This process is executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310.

The basic procedure of the variation pattern selection process first specifies the variation pattern table for selecting the variation pattern (number). Next, an index is created to acquire data from the specified variation pattern table by the bit transfer instruction in the present embodiment. Then, a random number for selecting a fluctuation pattern is extracted. Finally, the random number threshold value and the corresponding variation pattern number are obtained from the variation pattern table using the bit transfer instruction, and the variation pattern number is selected by comparing the random number threshold value with the random number.

The main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310 first acquires the address (Hp_no_table) of the fluctuation pattern table (step P8021). In the present embodiment, one variation pattern table is defined, but when a plurality of variation pattern tables are defined according to the gaming state or the like, the variation pattern table is specified at this timing.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a parameter for index creation for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT of the present embodiment (step P8022). The procedure for creating the index is performed by the procedure described with reference to FIGS. 361 and 362.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the value obtained by subtracting the start address of the data area from the start address of the fluctuation pattern table specified in the process of step P8021 as the index value in the HL register as the initial value of the index. ("LD HL, Hp_no_table-9000h" and "9000h" correspond to "TP" in the program code shown in FIG. 362 and are values stored in the TP register).

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets a parameter for index creation (step P8022). Specifically, first, the pointer information of the data to be referred to (record of the fluctuation pattern table) is extracted and set as a parameter. Here, since the data is acquired from the beginning of the fluctuation pattern table, the pointer information of the data is 0. Further, the total number of basic constituent blocks is set as a parameter. As described above, the total number of basic constituent blocks corresponds to the data capacity of the area for storing one unit of data (records) stored in the reference table. In this application example, since the threshold value of the random number is 6 bits and the fluctuation pattern number is 3 bits, a capacity of 9 bits is required to store one record, and the total number of basic constituent blocks is 9.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes an index creation process for creating an index for executing the bit transfer instruction RBT based on the set parameters (step P8023). In the index creation process, first, the pointer information (0) of the data to be referred to (variation pattern table) is multiplied by the total number of bits (9) of the basic constituent blocks. The result of multiplication is 0, which is stored in the A register.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register (stores 0) and divides the value of the WA register by the number of basic units (8). At this time, the quotient is stored in the A register (0) and the remainder is stored in the W register (0). Further, the main control MPU 1311 clears the W register and adds the value of the WA register to the HL register. As described above, the value before clearing the W register is saved in the stack area in advance so that it can be used in a later operation. Further, the main control MPU 1311 shifts the value of the HL register to the left (multiplies by 8) by 3 bits. Further, the value of the saved W register is added to the HL register to complete the index creation.

When the index creation is completed and the preparation for acquiring the variation pattern number from the variation pattern table is completed, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number for drawing the variation pattern (step P8024). As described above, the extracted random number is a 6-bit integer from 0 to 63 and is stored in the D register (LD D, (Rnd)).

Subsequently, the extracted random number value is compared with the threshold value stored in the fluctuation pattern table to perform a process of specifying the fluctuation pattern number. First, the main control MPU 1311 acquires a random number threshold value from the fluctuation pattern table based on the index created in the process of step P8023 by the bit transfer instruction (step P8025). Specifically, 6 bits of data are acquired from the position specified by the index and stored in the A register (RBT A, (HL +) .5). Further, the variation pattern number stored in the continuous area is acquired by the bit transfer instruction (step P8026). The variation pattern number is 3 bits and is stored in the W register (RBT W, (HL +) .2).

Next, when the main control MPU 1311 acquires the threshold value of the random number and the fluctuation pattern number from the fluctuation pattern table, it determines whether or not the threshold value is 0 (step P8027). In the present embodiment, since the threshold value of the final record of the fluctuation pattern table is set to 0, the determination of whether or not the threshold value is 0 is to determine whether or not the final record is detected (AND A, FFh). → JR Z, hp_select_2). When the threshold value is 0 (the result of step P8027 is “yes”), the main control MPU 1311 ends this process with the variation pattern number acquired in the process of step P8026 as the lottery result (step P8029).

On the other hand, when the threshold value of the random number is not 0 (the result of step P8027 is “no”), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the threshold value of the random number is smaller than the random number for selecting the variation pattern (step P8028). If the random number threshold is greater than the variation pattern selection random number (the result of step P8028 is "yes"), the process of step P8025 to select the next record and obtain the threshold and the corresponding variation pattern number. Return to.

Further, when the threshold value of the random number is equal to or less than the random number for selecting the variation pattern (the result of step P8028 is "no"), the main control MPU 1311 ends the present process with the variation pattern number acquired in the process of step P8026 as the lottery result. (Step P8029).

In the variation pattern selection process of the present embodiment, by looping the processes from step P8025 to step P8028, the threshold value of the last record from the first record of the variation pattern table is sequentially compared with the acquired random number value to obtain the variation pattern. It is configured to break out of the loop once it has been identified and the variation pattern has been identified. On the program, as shown in FIG. 370, the processing from the tag "hp_select_1" to the tag "hp_select_2" corresponds to this loop.

Further, in the variation pattern selection process of the present embodiment, an index is created with the start address of the table as the data read start position, and the bit transfer instructions "RBT A, (HL +) .5" and "RBT W, (HL +). 2 ”is executed in sequence. As a result, the reading of data is started from the beginning of the table, and the next data can be read continuously without recalculating the index. In this way, even when the data is continuously acquired, the data can be acquired without resetting the parameters, so that the program can be simplified.

[21-8. Other application examples]
Here, in the application example shown in FIG. 368, the bit transfer instruction in the present embodiment is used for the table for selecting the variation pattern, but it is not necessary to limit the use to this, and other applications are required. It is also applicable to the table of use. For example, it is a table for specifying input information from various ports of the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310, and each port is composed of a port address, a logical correction value, a mask value, a data area address, and the like. It can also be applied to those that are. At this time, if all the data constituting the table is not in byte units, the effect of the data transfer instruction in the present embodiment can be obtained.

Further, as another example, it can be applied to data for creating a command to be transmitted to various boards, for example, data for specifying a parameter of the command to be transmitted. Specifically, if the command specifies the number of prize balls in the prize ball command that indicates the number of prize balls to be paid out, if the number of prize balls is 1 to 15, it can be specified with a capacity of 4 bits. At this time, a capacity of 5 bits may be secured so that the number of prize balls of 16 or more can be specified, or the first bit is fixed to "1" to specify the number of prize balls. The number of prize balls may be specified by the lower 4 bits.

As yet another example, it can be applied to a table for specifying an area for storing various data. Specifically, it is a table composed of records including information for specifying data (information for identifying data) and information for specifying the address of an area for storing the data. The information that identifies the address of the area for storing data does not store the address itself, but stores the reference address in another area in advance, and stores the difference value (difference address) from the reference address in the table. You may try to do it. This makes it possible to reduce the capacity for storing the address. In addition, it is possible to flexibly deal with the case where the number of data or the data capacity is large or the data capacity changes.

In addition, as another example of the table for specifying the area for storing various data, the address (2 bytes) of the area for storing data can be specified by combining the upper address (1 byte) and the lower address (1 byte). It may be configured to do so. In this case, the upper address may be stored in another area in advance as the reference address information, and only the lower address may be stored in the table. The data capacity can be reduced by making it possible to store the lower address in an area smaller than 1 byte. Further, since the address for storing the data can be specified without (or by a simple operation) the operation, the process for specifying the address can be simplified. Further, since the address where the data is actually stored can be easily specified by referring to the table, maintenance can be facilitated such as when reviewing the address where the data is stored.

Further, since the data compression technique in the present embodiment makes it possible to acquire data having a specified number of bits as described above, it can be applied even when data of different sizes are continuously stored. However, when data of different sizes are continuously stored, it is necessary to specify the size of each data, and it is not possible to efficiently reduce the data capacity by holding the size of each data individually. there is a possibility. Therefore, by securing an area corresponding to the maximum value of a series of data and storing each data, it is possible to acquire the data without specifying the size for each data, and the entire process is simplified. be able to. As described above, when storing a plurality of types of data as one record in a table, first, the size of each data constituting the record is specified, and then the size of the specified data is used in the table. By acquiring each record, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and simplify the processing at the same time.

Further, if the table structure is the same, data compressed by a common process can be acquired. Therefore, it is preferable that similar tables have a common structure. For example, when a plurality of the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern tables are defined according to the gaming state, a common structure is used even if the data capacity can be reduced for each table due to reasons such as a small number of fluctuation pattern types. By doing so, it is possible to acquire data from the fluctuation pattern table by a common process without depending on the game state, and the entire process can be simplified.

[21-9. Effect, etc.]
As described above, by reading the data by the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, it is possible to delete unnecessary bits to form a compressed table structure, so that the area for holding the data can be minimized. It will be possible. This makes it possible to manage more data and perform more detailed game control.

Further, since the process of creating the index for executing the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment can be made independent, it is possible to suppress the original game control from becoming complicated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in data capacity while suppressing the complexity of conventional game control.

Further, according to the present embodiment, since it is possible to read a plurality of data from a continuous area by continuously executing bit transfer instructions while incrementing the index, the required amount of data having the same number of bits can be read. It is possible to simplify the process of reading only the data or reading a record (data group) composed of data having a plurality of types of bits.

Further, according to the present embodiment, even data requiring a capacity exceeding 8 bits (1 byte) can be compressed and held, and the data is read out in the same procedure as the data having less than 8 bits. This makes it possible to provide a highly versatile data reading means.

The data structure that can be read by the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment is effective when the size of the data is not in bytes, and the larger the number of data, the larger the saved capacity. Therefore, it is particularly useful when there are many types of defined data such as data used for processing related to special symbols and ordinary symbols, for example, fluctuation patterns. When the data is composed of byte units, it is more efficient to use a normal load instruction (“LD”) or the like. On the other hand, in the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment, the procedure for reading data is larger than that in the load instruction. Therefore, when it is necessary to quickly perform routine processing such as power-on processing or power failure processing, or data to be handled. When the number of is small, the load instruction may be preferentially used instead of the bit transfer instruction of the present embodiment. In this way, when controlling the game based on a wide variety of data such as controls related to the variable display of special symbols and ordinary symbols, the data capacity is increased by using a bit transfer instruction that can acquire data in bit units. Can be reduced. On the other hand, if you need to process routine steps quickly, you can simplify the process by using load instructions that allow you to access the data stored directly at the specified address without the need to create an index. Or speed up.

[22. Improvement of instruction to call processing]
The means for reducing the capacity by compressing the area for storing data has been described above. Subsequently, by shortening the word lengths of the instructions (commands) that compose the program, the procedure (number of clocks, number of steps) processed by the arithmetic means (main control MPU1311) is reduced to speed up the processing, or the processing is frequently combined. A means for simplifying a program by collectively executing the instructions to be executed will be described. Here, an instruction obtained by improving an instruction (INV instruction) for executing a predefined process will be described. Since the execution frequency of the INV instruction is very high, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process by speeding up the execution of the INV instruction. In addition, the program can be simplified by implementing an instruction that integrates the processes that are executed in combination when the INV instruction is executed.

[22-1. INV instruction]
First, an outline of a normal INV instruction will be described. The word length of the INV instruction differs depending on the type of MPU (processor), but it is 4 bytes in the main control MPU 1311 mounted on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine in the present embodiment.

The INV instruction specifies the address where the process to be executed is stored. At this time, the return address that is the return destination for returning to the caller's process after the execution of the called process is completed is stored in the stack area. As a result, by executing the return instruction in the called process, the value of the program counter is rewritten to the return address stored in the stack area to return to the caller, and the process is continued from the instruction next to the executed INV instruction. be able to.

Further, since the INV instruction can specify all the addresses of the storage area, it is possible to call all the processes stored in the memory. Therefore, the arrangement of programs and data can be freely set. On the other hand, since the procedure for calling the process (the number of required clocks) may increase due to the high degree of freedom and overhead may occur, it was desired to reduce the load of the entire process by reducing this.

Therefore, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, in order to reduce the load for calling frequently executed processes, a table in which the addresses of the processes to be called are stored is defined in advance, and the processes are arranged based on the table. Prior art has been proposed that makes it possible to call a process while reducing the load for identification (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-174833). Hereinafter, an outline of the INVD instruction having a function similar to that of the prior art will be described.

[22-2. INVD instruction]
In the INVD instruction, as described above, a processing address table including an address in which frequently executed processes are stored is created in advance, and a process to be called when the INVD instruction is executed is specified based on the processing address table. An index (1 byte) is assigned to each process in the processing address table, and it is possible to call a specific process simply by specifying the index (1 byte) without directly specifying the address (2 bytes). Become. As a result, the word length of the instruction can be shortened to speed up the processing, and the program structure can be simplified. In addition, even when the program layout (processing storage destination) in the memory is changed, the data defined in the processing address table may be changed, so that the program layout or configuration is changed. Can be flexibly dealt with, and the efficiency of program development can be improved.

Here, the configuration of the storage area for storing the processing address table will be described. FIG. 371 is a diagram showing an example of an address map showing the configuration of the storage area of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The storage area is provided by the RAM 1312 and the ROM 1313.

Areas accessed by game control on the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment include a RAM area (0000h to 03FFh), an internal function register area (1300h to 13DFh, 1400h to 14DFh), and a ROM area (8000h to C12Fh). ) And the extended ROM area (C130h to FDFFh). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the used areas), and access by the game control program is basically prohibited.

Explaining each area, the RAM area is an area for temporarily storing data to be read / written during program execution. In addition, the internal function register area stores the setting values of various registers for controlling the internal function. In the present embodiment, the internal function register areas are arranged at two places, but they may be one area or may be divided into three or more areas. Although the internal function register area is similar to the RAM area in that it stores information, the value is not stored in the process of calculation of the main control MPU 1311 unlike the RAM area, and the main control MPU 1311 executes it. It identifies the function for. That is, once the value of the internal function register area is set at the timing when the power is turned on, the set information is not changed like the information stored in the RAM area.

The ROM area includes a program / data area (8000h to BFFFh), a ROM comment area (C000h to C07Fh), a processing address table area (C080h to C0FFh), and an HW parameter area (C100h to C12Fh). The program / data area stores read-only data and programs. Data such as the program title and version are set in the ROM comment area. The processing address table area stores data related to a process (subroutine) that is called when a specific process call instruction (for example, an INVD instruction described later) is executed. In the HW parameter area, hardware-related parameters for executing the internal functions of the main control board 1310 are set.

The extended ROM area (C130h to FDFFh) is allocated as an unused (access prohibited) area in a normal (mass production) gaming machine, while it can be allocated as a program / data area in a development gaming machine. The program / data is assigned to a ROM different from the ROM in which it is stored. By doing so, the mass-produced gaming machine does not have the expansion ROM, so that the program / data arranged in the expansion ROM area for development does not function erroneously.

The extended ROM area may be stored in the same ROM as the ROM in which the program / data is stored. In that case, the extended ROM area should be set as an inaccessible area in the mass-produced gaming machine. Therefore, even if the program / data for development is mistakenly left in the extended ROM area, the HW parameter may be set so that the program / data does not function.

Next, the configuration of the processing address table will be described. FIG. 372 is a diagram showing a program implementation example of a processing address table in which processing (subroutine) addresses are stored. In the implementation example shown in FIG. 372, in addition to the INVD instruction processing address table in which the address of the processing executed by the INVD instruction is stored, the interrupt processing address table in which the address of the processing executed when various interrupts occur is also included. May occur. In the following description, unless otherwise specified, the "processing address table" refers to the INVD instruction processing address table used in the INVD instruction.

The processing address table stores the addresses of processes that are frequently executed and are used for general purposes. The processing with high execution frequency is, for example, a timer interrupt processing, a processing executed in the main loop processing of the initialization processing on the main control board, and the like. Further, the process used for general purposes is a process of reading a signal from a designated port, a process of performing a predetermined operation on a designated numerical value, and the like, which will be described in detail later. In order not to impair versatility, these processes are very simplified compared to processes specialized for game control (for example, jackpot determination process and variation pattern selection process) (for example, program capacity). (Small processing, processing with short processing time, etc.).

Further, as shown in FIG. 371, the processing address table is stored in an area different from the area in which the program is stored. As described above, since the process called by the INVD instruction has high versatility, it may be used as a common process even in the development of another gaming machine. By arranging the areas separately in this way, it becomes possible to manage them separately from the processing program depending on the model, and it is possible to improve the development efficiency of the game control program. In addition, since the ROM comment area is arranged between the area where the processing address table is stored and the area where the program is stored, processing can be performed beyond the program / data area due to a problem occurring during program execution. Even if it is executed, unexpected processing is executed without reaching the area stored in the processing address table because data that does not match the program code such as the program title is stored in the ROM comment area. Can be prevented.

In the example shown in FIG. 372, 16 types of processes of INVD0 to INVD15 are defined. For example, INVD0 includes a port read process (PORT_RD), INVD1 includes a data setting process (DAT_SET), and the like. When executing the INVD instruction, the number (processing index) corresponding to the process to be called may be specified.

Here, the processing index will be described with reference to FIG. 373. FIG. 373 is a diagram showing an example of a program code that defines an index that identifies a process stored in an address stored in the process address table. In the program code shown in FIG. 373, a processing index that can be called by the INVD instruction is defined in advance. In the program, the variable corresponding to the process name (function name) may be specified instead of directly specifying the numerical value. For example, when executing the port reading process (PORT_RD), the constant "0" may be specified by the label (_PORT_RD) instead of being directly specified. As a result, the readability of the program can be improved, and the development efficiency of the game control program can be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned prior art (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-174833), the upper address is set in advance and the lower address is specified, and the number (processing index) is specified as in the present embodiment. It's not something to do. Therefore, when the processing address is changed, it is necessary to modify the instruction for executing the processing each time, so that the development efficiency cannot be improved as compared with the case where the number is specified.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the processing index is 0 to 15 and the number of processes defined in the processing address table is 16, the index capacity is 4 bits. As a result, the storage capacity required to specify the process to be executed by the INVD instruction can be reduced as compared with the case of specifying the (lower) address. Further, since the instruction portion (opcode) of the INVD instruction is composed of 4 bits, it can be composed of a total of 8 bits (1 byte) including the capacity (operand) of the index. Therefore, the word length of the INVD instruction is 1 byte, and the number of clocks for the main control MPU 1311 to call the process specified by the INVD instruction is reduced as compared with the case where the process is called by the normal call instruction (INV instruction). In addition, it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

Further, in the present embodiment, the INVD instruction is frequently used in the process executed when the power is turned on and the process during the game (main control side main process, timer interrupt process, etc.), while being used in the process when the power is cut off. The frequency is decreasing. This is to prevent the overhead at the time of processing call from increasing by increasing the number of reference points in the memory while the power is cut off, and to suppress the power consumption as much as possible. In addition, the process when the power is cut off is executed less frequently than the process during the game, the specifications are not changed frequently, and the number of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction is limited. , The processing called when the power is turned off is configured not to be executed by the INVD instruction except for general-purpose processing. As described above, in the power-off processing, the control is simplified and the processing execution load is reduced rather than reducing the program capacity by using the INVD instruction.

Subsequently, a procedure for executing the process by the INVD instruction will be described. FIG. 374 is a diagram illustrating an operation at the time of executing the INVD instruction in the present embodiment. FIG. 374 describes changes in the program counter and the stack pointer when the INVD instruction stored at the address “80A4h” is executed.

When the INVD instruction is executed, first, the address to be the return destination after the processing executed by the INVD instruction is saved on the stack. In the example of FIG. 374, the INVD instruction stored at the address “80A4h” is executed, and since the word length of the INVD instruction is 1 byte, the value saved in the stack is “80A5h”.

Next, the 2-byte length data (call destination address) corresponding to the number (operand, processing index) specified by the INVD instruction is fetched from the processing address table. The extracted 2-byte length data (call destination address) is set in the program counter, and the specified process is called. Here, a procedure for calling the designated process will be described with reference to FIG. 375.

FIG. 375 is a diagram illustrating a procedure for specifying a process called by the INVD instruction in the present embodiment. Here, the procedure for executing the port read process (PORT_RD) will be described. As shown in FIG. 372, the port read process (PORT_RD) is defined at the beginning (0th position) of the process address table.

The number specified by the INVD instruction shown in FIG. 375 is "_PORT_RD", and referring to the INVD instruction processing address number definition, the actual value of "_PORT_RD" is "0". Then, the processing address table is referred to, and the instruction corresponding to the specified number is specified. Specifically, "PORT_RD" is specified. The left column of the processing address table in FIG. 375 corresponds to the number of rows, and is added for explanation. As shown in FIG. 372, it is not included in the actual processing address table. In the INVD instruction, the instruction corresponding to the specified number is specified. “PORT_RD” is a label indicating the processing address (“80D4h”).

When the address of the process specified by the INVD instruction is specified, the program counter is updated to the address of the specified process. Returning to the description of FIG. 374, when the INVD instruction is executed, the program counter is updated to “80D4h” which is the start address of the port reading process “PORT_RD”. At this time, the value of the stack pointer is moved by 2 bytes because the address at the time of returning from the processing of the caller is stored in the stack area, and is updated from "01F8h" to "01F6h".

After that, the process of the callee (port read process "PORT_RD") is executed, and the instructions are sequentially executed from the callee address ("80D4h"). After that, in order to return to the caller by the return instruction, the return address saved in the stack area is returned to the program counter, and the subsequent processing is sequentially executed. At this time, the value of the program counter is updated from the return instruction address "80E8h" to the address "80A5h" saved in the stack area. Further, by changing the stack pointer from "01F6h" to "01F8h", the area in which the return destination address of the stack area is stored can be used again. After returning to the processing of the caller, the processing is sequentially executed from the address "80A5h".

As described above, the INVD instruction in the present embodiment can call the processing with a smaller number of clocks than the normal processing calling instruction, that is, at a higher speed, and can further reduce the program capacity. In particular, as described above, by configuring the frequently called process so that it can be called by the INVD instruction, it is possible to speed up the entire control process. In this embodiment, 16 types of processing are defined as defined in the processing address table (FIG. 372). Specifically, port reading process (PORT_RD), data setting process (DAT_SET), work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD), work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL), 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL), command buffer setting process. 1 (CMBF_SET1), command storage processing (COM_SET), output judgment common processing 1 (OHAN_SUB1), output judgment common processing 2 (OHAN_SUB2), output port data setting processing (PORT_DAT_SET), fluctuation information number search processing (TI_SRK), fraudulent notification The setting process (ILG_OUTSET), the data search process (HLA_SRH), the multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL), and the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA).

Hereinafter, each process executed by the INVD instruction in the present embodiment will be described. 376 to 389 show an example of a program (module) for each process. The comment at the beginning of each program describes the input register, output register, protection register, and caller. The input register is a register that stores the value set by the calling module. The called module is executed using the value set in the input register. The output register is a register that stores the value set in the called module. The execution result of the process is stored. The protection register is a register whose use is restricted by the called module. If the value at the start and end of execution of the called module is the same, it may be used. For example, when the register is destroyed (used), it is temporarily stored in a stack or the like, and then restored after use. If so, you can use it. The caller is a module that calls the module. If the number of modules described here is large, it can be recognized that the frequency of use is high. Since the actual number of executions depends on the call frequency of the calling module itself, even if the number of modules is small, the frequency of use is not necessarily low.

FIG. 376 is a diagram showing a program example of the port reading process (PORT_RD) of the present embodiment. The port read process is a process of reading an input signal of a designated port. Specifically, the port read process (PORT_RD) reads the input signal of the port corresponding to the port address specified in the W register (input register) and outputs the port data to the A register (output register). At this time, the input signal of the port is read a plurality of times, and a predetermined flag (for example, J flag, Z flag) included in the PSW (processor status word, status register; output register) is set depending on whether or not the acquired signals match. Update. This makes it possible not only to read the input signal from the designated port, but also to determine whether or not the signal is normally input.

FIG. 377 is a diagram showing a program example of the data setting process (DAT_SET) of the present embodiment. The data setting process is a process of collectively setting a series of data defined in a table specified by a set data address set in the HL register in a work area (for example, a DE register). In addition, the number of data settings (number of data in the table) is defined in the first data (record) of the table specified in the data setting process, and the subsequent data (records) are (lower) of the work area that stores the set values. It consists of an address and a set value stored in the work area. The set values are sequentially read by calling the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL) described later with the INVD command. As described above, when the data setting process is started, the data is acquired by first acquiring the number of data settings stored at the address specified in the input register, and then acquiring the data (records) for the number of data settings. It is possible to acquire a series of data regardless of the number.

FIG. 378 is a diagram showing a program example of the work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD) of the present embodiment. The work area setting process 1 is a process for setting a work area that is temporarily used when the program is executed. In this embodiment, the address of the work area is stored in the DE register. The address of the work area is determined by the data in the table identified by the address stored in the HL register. The work area setting process 1 (WORK_AD) is also called from a process executed by another INVD instruction. As described above, the process executed by the INVD instruction is composed of a very short program that realizes a general-purpose function, and can be called multiple times. As a result, it is possible to increase the speed of the entire game control by combining and configuring the processes called by the INVD command. Moreover, since duplication of program code can be avoided, the program capacity can be compressed.

FIG. 379 is a diagram showing a program example of the work area setting process 2 (WORK_AD_INC_HL) of the present embodiment. In the work area setting process 2, it is possible to simplify the process of continuously setting the work area by setting the specified setting data address to the next address after executing the work area setting process 1. Become.

Here, in the example of using the data setting process, the work area setting process 1 and the work area setting process 2, the (lower) address of the work area and the work area are set according to the data setting process program shown in FIG. 377. The process of acquiring data from the table consisting of the setting values to be stored and storing it in the work area will be described.

In the data setting process, the number of records stored in the first row of the table specified by the set data address is acquired, the work area is set by the work area setting process 2 for the number of records, and the data in the work area is set. Repeat the setting (loop processing). In the loop process, first, the set data address is updated (incremented) to move to the next line, and then the work area setting process 2 is called by the INVD instruction.

In the work area setting process 2, the work area is set by the address specified by the set data address in the work area setting process 1. Subsequently, the set data address is updated (incremented) to the address of the data storage area. After that, the work area setting process 2 returns to the data setting process, and the data specified by the set data address (value set in the HL register) is stored in the work area (value set in the DE register). When the data for the number of records in the table is set in the corresponding work area, the loop processing is exited and the data setting processing is terminated.

With the above configuration, the structure of the program can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced by calling the data setting process, the work area setting process 2, and the work area setting process hierarchically by the INVD instruction.

FIG. 380 is a diagram showing a program example of the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL) of the present embodiment. The 2-byte data search process is a process of selecting an address set in the data table specified by the HL register (input register) and setting it in the HL register. Since the address value is 2 bytes, the address of the target data table is specified by doubling (adding 2) the A register (input register), which is the selected value, and the address is set to the HL register (output register). Reset the settings. For example, it is used when shifting to various processes in the special symbol / special electric accessory control process, and when executing the process of selecting the migration destination address by the job number (selected value) based on the jump table.

FIG. 381 is a diagram showing a program example of the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET), the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and the command storage process (COM_SET) of the present embodiment. Normally, in the process called by the INVD instruction or the like, a return (BK) instruction or the like is arranged at the end, and the process returns to the process of the caller. Since no command for returning to the caller's process is arranged in the jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) and command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) shown in FIG. 381, after the jackpot information command setting process is completed. , The command buffer setting process 1 is continuously executed, and further, the command storage process is executed. Then, the return instruction placed at the end of the command storage process returns to the caller's process.

If the command buffer setting process 1 is to be called by the INVD instruction in the jackpot information command setting process, as described in FIG. 374, processing such as storing the return destination address in the stack area is required. These processes can be omitted by continuously arranging the above, and the program capacity can be reduced. In addition, since the stack area is not used, the effect of reducing the amount of memory used can be obtained.

The jackpot information command setting process (TDINF_CMBF_SET) is a process of setting a jackpot information command that specifies an operation when a jackpot occurs. Set the corresponding big hit information command according to the situation such as opening and closing operation of the big winning opening in the big hit state. After that, it is transmitted from the transmission buffer to the destination by the command buffer setting process 1 and the command storage process that are continuously executed.

The command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) identifies the command to be actually transmitted by the reference command data (MODE value) and the command addition data for specifically specifying the command, and stores the command in the transmission buffer by the command storage process described later. Store. The commands stored in the transmission buffer are appropriately transmitted to the destination. The "reference command data" is composed of 2 bytes. For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern shown in Special Figure 1, "1001h" (upper 1 byte: fluctuation pattern type, lower 1 byte: command reference value (starting from 01h)). ). When the fluctuation pattern 5 (05h) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1, the result (“1006h”” of adding the value (05h) of the fluctuation pattern 5 to the lower 8 bits of the above reference command “1001h”. ) Is the command to be sent.

The command storage process (COM_SET) is a process for storing a command or the like in a transmission buffer. As a specific procedure, first, the state of the transmission buffer is determined to determine whether or not there is a free space of a predetermined number of bytes or more. If there is no free space in the transmit buffer, the process ends, and if there is free space in the transmit buffer, the status and mode that make up the command stored in the HL register are set in the transmit buffer. Further, the sum value obtained by adding the value of the H register and the value of the L register is set in the transmission buffer. In the case of the command "1006h" in which the fluctuation pattern 5 (05h) is selected as the fluctuation pattern of the above-mentioned special figure 1, "10h" + "06h" = "16h" is the sum value. The sum value does not necessarily have to be set in the transmission buffer.

The command stored in the transmission buffer is composed of 2 bytes (excluding the sum value), and the 1st byte indicates the type of command to be transmitted (variation pattern, symbol stop, hold storage, jackpot, etc.) and 2 bytes. The eye indicates a specific operation for the type (if it is a fluctuation pattern type, a specific fluctuation pattern number).

The transmission buffer is a FIFO memory for serial communication built in the main control MPU 1311, and is a memory different from the RAM 1312. The transmit buffer is configured to be capable of storing multiple bytes of information (having a capacity of 64 bytes). The commands stored in the transmission buffer are serially output to the destination in the order in which they were stored first by the hardware.

FIG. 382 is a diagram showing a program example of the output determination common process 1 (OHAN_SUB1) of the present embodiment. The output judgment common process 1 acquires data from the information judgment output data (value indicated by the HL register), and determines whether or not a flag is set in the work area (lower address) set in the information judgment output data. , If the flag is set, the information set corresponding to the flag (work area) is set in the A register (port output calculation value). By looping the above work for the number of times set in the information judgment output data, the value to be output to the port is stored in the A register. For example, when the information judgment output data is "solenoid information judgment output data", 3 is set as the number of loops, the content of the large winning opening 1 solenoid flag (DSOL1_FG) is first determined, and 1 (flag value) is set to DSOL1_FG. ) Is set, _TDSOL1_PB (large winning opening solenoid 1-bit data) set corresponding to DSOL1_FG is set as an output value (when this value is output, the large winning opening solenoid 1 is set. It is turned on). Such processing is repeated a number of times (three times) set in the solenoid information determination output data.

FIG. 383 is a diagram showing a program example of the output determination common process 2 (OHAN_SUB2) of the present embodiment. The output determination common process 2 acquires data from the state determination output data and processes the LED port output value and the like. The status determination output data has a table structure similar to the information determination output data, acquires the number of records in the table, and processes the data for the number of records.

FIG. 384 is a diagram showing a program example of the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) of the present embodiment. The output port data setting process is a process for setting the information in the I / O area to the output port or the built-in register, and the output destination (output port, built-in register) is set to the output destination set in the table (setting data address). ) Is output.

FIG. 385 is a diagram showing a program example of the variation information number search process (TI_SRH) of the present embodiment. The variation information number search process is a process of searching a predetermined data area for an information number that matches a designated comparison value, and is used when selecting variation pattern information based on a variation pattern random number. For example, the comparison value is stored in the W register, the address of the data area is stored in the HL register, and the search result is written in the A register. Specifically, the contents of the W register (random number value, etc.) are compared with the information set in the table specified by the HL register (value to be compared with the random number (judgment value)), and the condition (for example, random number value < The process is repeated until the determination value) is satisfied, and when the condition is satisfied, the information (search result (for example, fluctuation pattern number, etc.) set corresponding to the determination value is stored in the A register and returned to the caller.

FIG. 386 is a diagram showing a program example of the fraudulent notification setting process (ILG_OUTSET) of the present embodiment. The fraudulent notification setting process is a process for notifying when an abnormality occurs. Specifically, the specified abnormality display command is set by the command storage process, and the time for performing unauthorized notification is set.

FIG. 387 is a diagram showing a program example of the data search process (HLA_SRH) of the present embodiment. The data search process is a process of searching the specified data from the specified search data. In the data search process, first, data matching the comparison value is searched from the area (address) for storing the specified search data. At this time, the data to be searched is the address of the area to be searched next. Further, a search is performed from the area of the searched address based on the specified selection value. The data search process is executed by combining a plurality of search processes, and the subsequent search process is executed based on the search result of the preceding search process. In the present embodiment, the first search is performed by the 2-byte data search process (LD_HLA_HL), and the next search is performed by the variable information number search process (TI_SRH). As a result, it is possible to identify a plurality of defined tables according to the game state in the first search and acquire a specific fluctuation information number in the next search. By implementing in this way, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a multi-step search, and it is possible to reduce the amount of data by holding the data step by step.

As described above, in the present embodiment, one process is configured by combining a plurality of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction whose word length is shorter than that of other call instructions. By calling the process configured in this way with the INVD instruction, it is possible to speed up the entire process while reducing the program capacity. Further, if the process is executed in multiple stages, it can be applied not only to the data search process. For example, if a plurality of arithmetic processes that can be called by the INVD instruction are defined, these are combined to make a more complicated operation. It becomes possible to realize the processing.

FIG. 388 is a diagram showing a program example of the multiplication value addition address acquisition process (MUL_WA_HL) of the present embodiment. Multiplying value addition The address acquisition process is a process of multiplying a designated base value by a multiplying value and adding to the designated base address value. It is a collection of routine operations that are frequently executed, and can simplify the program.

FIG. 389 is a diagram showing a program example of the SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) of the present embodiment. The SPI 2-byte output process is a process for setting the output data in the SPI port when outputting 2-byte data by SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication. SPI communication is used when data is transmitted to a light emitting body such as an LED or a driving body such as a motor / solenoid.

As described above, the process called by the INVD instruction in the present embodiment is more versatile because it is composed of a short process of several to several tens of bytes, and the process can be called by the INVD instruction with a word length of 1 byte. Therefore, the speed of the entire game control program can be increased, and the program capacity can be reduced.

[22-3. INVS instruction]
In the INVD instruction, the procedure for calling a process (subroutine) has been streamlined by storing the address in the process address table in advance. However, since only the predefined processing can be called, when adding or changing the processing to be newly called, the contents of the processing address table and the definition information of the processing address table number must be updated. rice field. In addition, the word length was set to 1 byte by limiting the processing that can be called by the INVD instruction to 16 types, but if it is applied to 17 or more types of processing, the processing speed will deteriorate, and the INVD instruction There was a risk that the effect of using was impaired.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, we propose an INVS instruction having a word length shorter than that of a normal INV instruction but having a higher degree of freedom than an INVD instruction. By storing the process (subroutine) in a specific area, the INVS instruction can reduce the overhead (procedure, number of clocks) for calling the process, and can realize the same process with a smaller word length than the INV instruction. .. Further, if the processes are stored in the specific area, an arbitrary number of processes (subroutines) can be defined, so that the degree of freedom can be increased as compared with the INVD instruction. The specific area (third area) is included in the program / data area of the ROM area described with reference to FIG. 371.

Subsequently, the INVS instruction will be further described. FIG. 390 is an excerpt of a part of a program for calling a process by an INVS command of the present embodiment, (A) is a program excerpting a part for calling a solenoid drive process and a motor drive process, and (B) is an excerpt. A program example (part) of the solenoid drive process and (C) show a program example (part) of the motor drive process. The program example shown in FIG. 390 is composed of an "address", a "program", a "mnemonic", and a "comment". The "address" is the location where the program is stored. "Program" is a so-called machine language (machine language), and is an instruction that can be directly interpreted and executed by the main control MPU 1311. "Nimonic" is a simplified memory symbol that makes it easier to program machine language (a list of numbers) for executing a program. The "program" value corresponds to the "mnemonic" value. The "comment" is a description for making the program easier to read, and is ignored when the process is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 390, the solenoid drive process (“89A6h”) and the motor drive process (“89CCh”) are called by the INVS command. The INVS instruction constitutes an instruction in which the upper 4 bits (“Ch”) access the first area (8000h to 8BFFh) of the specific area, and indicates the address of the process called by the lower 12 bits. Specifically, the lower 12 bits (“9A6h”) of the program “C9A6” that calls the solenoid drive process specifies the address for storing the solenoid drive process, and the upper 4 bits of the first region are fixed and “ Since it becomes "8 *** h", the address of the storage location of the solenoid drive process in combination with the lower 12 bits of the program becomes "89A6h" as shown in FIG. 390 (B). Similarly, in the motor drive process, since the lower 12 bits are "9 CCh", the address of the storage location is "89 CCh". As described above, in the present embodiment, the process (procedure, number of clocks) until the process to be called is specified by storing the process in a specific area is reduced, and the process is stored in the first area by a 2-byte length instruction. It is possible to execute the process.

Further, the second area (8C00h to 93FFh) of the specific area can be accessed, but in that case, unlike the case of accessing the first area, the upper 1 byte becomes the operation code of the INVS instruction, and the lower 2 Since the byte is the call destination address, the instruction is 3 bytes long.

The game control program is designed with the address 8000h as the start address, and the frequency of accessing the first area is much higher than the frequency of accessing the second area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and reduce the processing time (clock number) for the instruction by shortening the word length when accessing the frequently used area.

On the other hand, in the INV instruction that executes the process stored in an arbitrary area in the memory, the upper 2 bytes are the code information (opcode) of the INV instruction and the lower 2 bytes are the call destination address (operand). It is a byte length instruction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by using the INVS instruction that executes the process stored in the specific area, the word length is reduced as compared with the INV instruction that executes the process stored in the arbitrary area in the memory. Can be executed.

In the present embodiment, a process (subroutine) with a high call frequency is arranged in a specific area (particularly, a first area), and a process with a low call frequency (for example, an error process or a test signal) is placed in an area other than the specific area. By arranging (processing for output, etc.) and data, it is possible to speed up the overall processing. If the capacity of the program code is limited by rules or the like, the program is placed with priority given to the first area. If possible, such as when the capacity limit of the program code is smaller than the capacity of the first area, all the processes called by the INVS instruction are stored in the first area. Further, all the processes (programs) called by the INVS instruction may be configured to be stored in the first area, and the program may not be stored in the second area. By clearly defining the area for storing the program, the configuration can be simplified and the management can be facilitated.

Further, at least the processing directly related to the game control is arranged in the first area, and the error processing and the display of the role ratio monitor (base monitor) which are not directly related to the game control are arranged in the second area. As described above, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process by arranging the processes that are frequently called in the first area, but it was developed by improving the readability of the entire program by aggregating the related processes. It may be arranged to increase efficiency. Since the processing that can be called by the INVS instruction can be freely arranged within a specific area, for example, when there are multiple specifications for the same model, the control common to each specification is aggregated in a predetermined area, and for each specification. Processes with different controls (depending on specifications) are aggregated and placed in different areas. Specifically, the special figure-related processing, the special electric accessory-related process, the normal figure-related process, the ordinary electric accessory-related process, and the like are not distributed and arranged, but related processes (for example, fluctuation start processing, variation). Special figure-related processing such as intermediate processing, symbol confirmation processing, and fluctuation stop processing) are aggregated and arranged. Further, the programs may be arranged in an order according to the control executed in a normal game, for example, according to the execution timing even in the aggregated and arranged area. Specifically, in the special figure-related processing, it may be arranged in an order according to the timing such as the start winning prize, the fluctuation start time, and the fluctuation end time.

On the other hand, even game machines of different models can be used for general purposes, and error processing and display processing of the role ratio monitor (base monitor) that are not affected by the game specifications are also centrally arranged. Since these processes may be used in a plurality of types of models, it is convenient to manage them separately. For example, if there is a team that develops multiple types of models in parallel, the processing that depends on the game specifications described above can be shared within the team, while the processing that is common between these models can be shared between the teams. It is possible to improve the development efficiency of the entire game machine development. In addition, the processing that depends on the game specifications may differ depending on the model even if the upper limit of the capacity is set. By arranging them in the two areas, the addresses can be shared even when the processing is called from the game control programs of different models.

As described above, the INVS instruction makes it possible to arrange a program (module) in a specific area according to development efficiency and management efficiency (maintenance efficiency). As a result, in the INVD instruction, in order to limit the number of processes that can be defined, general-purpose processes such as port reading and data reading were defined with priority, but processes that depend on the game content are collectively arranged. It becomes possible to facilitate management such as consolidating processing for each function, and it is possible to improve development efficiency.

It is also possible to execute the process by the INVD instruction in the module called by the INVS instruction. With this configuration, it is possible to further speed up the processing called by the INVS instruction and reduce the program capacity, and further, it is possible to speed up the entire game control program and reduce the program capacity. It becomes. It is also possible to call a module by the INVS instruction in the module called by the INVD instruction. Since the number of processes that can be defined in the processing address table is limited, it is possible to call highly versatile processing that could not be defined in the processing address table by the INVS instruction. In this way, it is configured so that processing can be mutually called within the module called from the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction.

Further, while the processing that is executed at predetermined intervals such as timer interrupt processing and is extremely frequently executed is arranged in a specific area (first area), even if it can be called from the timer interrupt processing such as the processing at the time of setting operation. For processes that are not actually called frequently, it is preferable to place them outside the range of a specific area. With this configuration, it is possible to secure the capacity of a specific area without reducing the processing speed.

Further, the program may be arranged only in the first area where the effect of speeding up by the INVS instruction is more exerted, and may be configured so as not to access the second area from the INVS instruction. This makes it possible to simplify the management of the storage area such as the arrangement of programs. For example, by arranging a program that defines a process that can be shared between different models outside a specific area with few restrictions instead of the second area, the degree of freedom in arranging the program is increased, and the program is shared when the program is shared. It is possible to reduce the restrictions caused by the difference in capacity. Further, even if the specifications of the INVS instruction are changed due to the specification change of the main control MPU 1311, if the area accessible by the INVS instruction is single, the correspondence becomes easy, and the basic configuration of the game control program can be changed. Since there is no need to make major changes, existing programs and data can be utilized and development efficiency can be improved.

[22-4. INVI instruction]
Up to this point, the mode of speeding up the instruction that calls the process has been described, but the means for simplifying the program by implementing the instruction that integrates the processes that are frequently combined and executed will be described.

When a specific program is executed when the game control is executed, if the information in the memory is rewritten by other processes executed in parallel, the progress of the game may be hindered. Therefore, a means for disabling interrupts until the processing is completed is generally used so that the information stored in the area commonly accessed by a plurality of processes is not rewritten. In particular, a procedure of disabling interrupts when executing a specific process and canceling the disabling of interrupts after the specific process is completed is frequently performed.

In game control, procedures such as interrupt prohibition, processing call, and interrupt prohibition cancellation are frequently executed, but since the size of the program area is limited, the common procedure is omitted to reduce the program size. It was desired to make it smaller. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the INV instruction that calls the process is extended, and an INVI instruction that disables interrupts before the process is called is proposed.

Since the INVI instruction specifies and executes the process to be called, the execution procedure is the same as that of the INV instruction. However, as an internal process at the time of executing the INVI instruction, necessary data is stored in the stack area and interrupts are prohibited before the program counter is moved to the specified address. After that, the called process is executed. At the end of the called process, a BKI instruction that returns to the caller's process while returning to the interrupt state before calling the process is executed. That is, if the interrupt state of the INVI instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is maintained as it is, and if the interrupt state of the INVI instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt disabled is released. Hereinafter, a series of procedures of the INVI instruction will be described with reference to FIG. 391.

FIG. 391 is a diagram illustrating a procedure of an INVI instruction in the present embodiment. The procedure at the time of executing the INVI instruction stored in the address "8200h" will be described.

Since the storage destination of the process specified by the INVI instruction is "A800h", the value of the program counter changes from "8200h" to "A800h". At this time, the address "8202h" (the next address of the caller, the return address after the processing of the callee) indicating the position to return after the processing is executed and the PSW (Program Status Word) at the time of the processing call are stored in the stack area. do. Therefore, the stack pointer changes from "01F8h" to "01F5h". In the example of FIG. 391, the return address is stored in "01F6h" and "01F7h", and the PSW is stored in "01F8h".

The PSW is a control word (status register) for controlling the order in which instructions are executed in the main control MPU 1311 and for indicating and holding the state of the computer system related to a specific program, and is the main being executed. It also includes the status of the control MPU 1311. In addition, the contents of the flag register, the interrupt status, and the like are collectively stored in one byte. PSW will be described with reference to FIG. 392.

FIG. 392 is a diagram showing an example of the PSW of the present embodiment, (A) is a configuration of the PSW, and (B) is a description of each configuration. PSW has jump status flag (JF), zero flag (ZF), carry flag (CF), half carry flag (HF), sign flag (SF), overflow flag (VF), register bank flag (RES), interrupt master permission. It is composed of flags (IMF).

The jump status flag (JF) is a flag used to determine the operating conditions of a jump instruction and a subroutine instruction. ZF or CF is set according to the executed instruction.

The zero flag (ZF) is set to 1 when the calculation result or transfer data is "00H (0000H)", and is cleared to 0 in other cases. Further, in the bit / flag operation instruction, 1 is set when the designated bit is 0, and is cleared to 0 when the designated bit is 1.

The carry flag (CF) sets the carry / borrow at the time of the carry flag calculation. Further, in the shift / rotate instruction or the bit / flag operation instruction, the instruction execution content is set. The half carry flag (HF) sets the carry / borrow of the 4th bit in the case of 8-bit operation.

The sine flag (SF) is set to 1 when the MSB (maximum effective number of bits) of the operation result is 1, and is cleared to 0 in other cases. When the most significant bit indicates a positive or negative sign, the sign can be identified by the sine flag. The overflow flag (VF) is set to 1 when an overflow occurs in the calculation result, and is cleared to 0 otherwise.

The register bank flag (RES) indicates the selected bank of the general purpose register. In the case of bank 0, 0 is set, and in the case of bank 1, 1 is set.

The interrupt master enable flag (IMF) disables interrupts when IMF = 0 and enables interrupts when IMF = 1. Further, when the DI (disable interrupt) instruction is executed, IMF = 0 and interrupts are prohibited. Further, when the EI (enable interrupt) instruction is executed, IMF = 1 and interrupts are permitted. An interrupt that can prohibit / allow the generation of an interrupt in this way is called a masqueradable interrupt.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 391. When the INVI instruction is executed, the IMF value included in the PSW is set to "0" to disable interrupts. At this time, the interrupt is prohibited as the INVI instruction is executed without executing the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). Further, the value of the program counter is set to "A800h", and the processing is sequentially executed from the address "A800h". Then, when the process is executed up to the address "A80Eh", the BKI instruction to return to the caller is executed. In the BKI instruction, the return destination address stored in the stack area is set to the value of the program counter, and the contents of the PSW are returned to the contents of the PSW saved in the stack area. Specifically, the value of the program counter is set from "A800h" to "8202h" which is the return destination address. Further, in order to return the contents of the PSW to the contents of the PSW before the execution of the INVI instruction, if the value of the IMF (interrupt master permission flag) before the execution of the INVI instruction is 1 (interrupt permission), the interrupt prohibition is released. Since the value stored in the stack area is deleted when the INVI instruction is executed, the value of the stack pointer is set from "01F5h" to "01F8h".

As described above, when the process is executed by the INVI instruction, it is possible to disable the interrupt until the execution of the specified process is completed without explicitly executing the interrupt prohibition instruction (DI instruction). Further, by returning to the caller by executing the BKI instruction, if the interrupt is enabled before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupt is interrupted without explicitly executing the interrupt prohibition release instruction (EI instruction). The prohibition can be released, and if the interrupt is enabled before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupt disabled state is maintained. It can be used not only for executing the INVI instruction but also for returning to the original processing after executing the processing in a state where interrupts are disabled by the DI instruction or the like. Further, the BKI instruction is not an instruction for directly canceling the interrupt prohibition, but merely returns the interrupt master permission flag (IMF) to the value before the execution of the INVI instruction by returning the PSW to the state before the execution of the INVI instruction. If the interrupt is enabled before the instruction is executed, the interrupt is returned from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. On the other hand, if the interrupt is disabled before the INVI instruction is executed, the interrupt is continuously disabled even after returning. Further, since it is not necessary to execute the interrupt prohibition instruction and the interrupt prohibition release instruction, the control can be simplified and the program capacity can be compressed. As a result, the process can be executed without the data being changed by other processes.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the area (used area, game area) in which the program can be mounted is defined in advance, and it is basically prohibited to execute the program outside the used area. However, since some processing such as test signal processing is not directly related to game control, execution outside the usage area is permitted. In addition, since the role ratio monitor (base monitor) and error processing are not directly related to game control, execution outside the usage area is permitted. When executing such a process, interrupts can be prohibited by the INVI instruction, and the PSW (status register) can be saved and executed to suppress the influence on other processes.

Further, when calling the process stored in the area outside the used area by the INVI instruction, it is possible to specify the storage destination by using the processing address table like the INVD instruction described above, but it is in the used area. Inconvenience may occur because the process is called by directly specifying the address outside the area from the process. Therefore, a temporary area that always passes through for executing the INVI instruction may be set. In this case, the process called from the INVI instruction is defined in a limited temporary area (for example, in the range of "A800h" to "A8FFh"). However, since it is not possible to define all the processes within this limited range, the address in the temporary area is specified from the process of the caller, but the process actually stored outside the used area from the address is specified. Run. Specifically, it moves from the address specified in the used area to the address where the process specified by the jump instruction or the like is stored. A specific example is shown in FIG. 393.

FIG. 393 is a diagram showing a program example for explaining the arrangement of the processing called by the INVI instruction of the present embodiment, (A) is a program example of the area to be read out of the processing, and (B) is the substance of the processing. An example program is shown. Here, the area up to the address "A8FFh" is the used area, and the area after the address "A900h" is outside the area.

As shown in FIG. 393 (A), the process called by the INVI instruction is defined by a pair of a label indicating the process and a jump instruction (JP). For example, when the performance display monitor process is called by the INVI instruction, it is described as "INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT". The label "_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is predefined in another area. The value of "_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is "A900h".

When the instruction "INVI_EX_MONITOR_OUT" is executed, the value of the program counter is updated to the address "A800h" corresponding to the defined label, and the PSW is saved in the stack area. Further, the value of IMF (interrupt master enable flag) of PSW is set to 0 (interrupt disabled). After that, the performance display monitor process (“EX_MONITOR_OUT”) defined at the jump destination address “A900h” set in the operand of the jump instruction is executed.

Since the performance display monitor process is a process outside the used area, the contents of the register are saved so as not to affect the process inside the used area (register save process in the used area). After that, the performance display monitor processing main unit is executed. Finally, the contents of the saved register are restored, and the process of the caller is restored by the BKI instruction, and the interrupt state before the execution of the process is restored.

With the above configuration, it becomes easy to separate the processes outside the used area, and the program management becomes easy. In addition, since interrupts are prohibited when the INVI instruction is executed, interrupts are prohibited while processing outside the used area is being executed, ensuring independence from the processing stored in the used area and ensuring safety. Can be secured. In the example described with reference to FIG. 393, the area for storing the process called by the INVI instruction is limited, but it is not limited to this. This makes it possible to simplify the call of the process executed in the state where interrupts are disabled for the process stored in an arbitrary area.

[22-5. Application example of extended processing call instruction]
Specific application examples of various instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, INVI instruction) for calling the processing (subroutine) described above will be described. Here, it is applied to the timer interrupt processing executed by the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. A specific application example of the processing call instruction will be described together with the program code for the game stop processing included in the timer interrupt processing.

FIG. 394 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing using various processing call instructions of the present embodiment. The basic functions of timer interrupt processing are the same as those described so far.

The main control MPU 1311 first designates the register bank 1 (step P101). As described above, the main control MPU 1311 includes two types of register groups, bank 0 and bank 1, and switches banks to use one of them. Bank 1 is used in timer interrupt processing, and bank 0 is used in main control side main processing. It is not always necessary to switch the bank in the timer interrupt processing. For example, the register value may be saved in the stack area and restored after the processing is completed.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes the switch input process (step P102). In the switch input process, as described above, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1311 are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM 1312. Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 executes a set value confirmation process for determining whether the value in the set state management area is within the normal range (step P103).

When the set value confirmation process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the gaming machine is in a game-enabled state (step P104). When the game is not available (the result of step P104 is "NO"), that is, when the setting operation is performed (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode), the setting operation processing is executed (step P105).

In the setting operation processing, processing for changing or confirming the setting of the gaming machine is executed. Load the setting data for the setting operation and set it in the corresponding output port. Specifically, the power failure clear signal is output OFF and the ACK output port is cleared. Further, the LED common port and the LED cathode port are turned off, the motor port and the solenoid port are cleared, and a security signal is output. After that, the setting display process and the setting confirmation / change process are executed.

On the other hand, when the gaming machine is in a game-enabled state (the result of step P104 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not there is a gaming stop factor (step P106). If there is a game stop factor (the result of step P106 is "YES"), the game stop processing is executed (step P107). In the game stop processing, the processing necessary for stopping the game machine is executed. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 395.

Further, when there is no game stop factor (the result of step P106 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 executes a game-enabled time process in order to advance the game (step P108). The game-enabled time process is a process for performing a normal game. Specifically, switch input special processing, timer update processing, prize ball control processing, frame command reception processing, fraud detection processing, switch pass command output processing, performance display monitor processing, special symbol / special electric accessory control processing , Solenoid drive processing, motor drive processing, output data setting processing, etc. Each process is as described above.

When the game enable time process or the game stop time process is completed, the main control MPU 1311 executes the display LED output process (step P109). Further, after the display LED output process or the setting operation process is completed, the test signal output process is executed (step P110). In the test signal output process, a process for outputting a test signal for output to an inspection device connected to the gaming machine is performed. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes processing such as setting a predetermined value (18H) in the watchdog timer clear register WCL to clear the watchdog timer (step P111) and returning the register bank to 0. , Terminates timer interrupt processing.

The outline of timer interrupt processing has been described above. Subsequently, processing using various processing call instructions will be described. As described above, the game stop processing of the timer interrupt processing will be excerpted and described. First, the procedure for processing when the game is stopped will be described, and application examples of various processing call commands will be appropriately described with reference to the program code.

FIG. 395 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment. FIG. 396 is a program code for the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment. The game stop processing is a process for stopping the game when an abnormality such as a magnetic abnormality or a vibration abnormality is detected or when a setting is changed. In addition to magnetic anomalies and vibration anomalies, there are door / body frame opening, radio wave anomalies, and winning anomalies, and there are cases where settings are being confirmed in addition to setting changes. Depending on the type of gaming machine, only error notification may be given, or the game may be stopped. In particular, in the type in which a big hit can be obtained by passing through a specific area (V area) in the accessory, the big hit can be obtained by illegal winning, so that the game is stopped as a fraudulent act when an abnormality is detected. NS.

When the game stop processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 first sets the game stop command (step P121). The game stop command is a command for notifying the outside that the game machine is stopped. With reference to the program code, in the setting of the game stop command, first, a command addition value (game stop factor; PLAY_STOP_NO) is set in the A register when determining whether or not there is a game stop factor in the process of step P106 described above. In this state, after setting the reference command data (_ILG_MAG2_CM-1) in the HL register, the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) is executed.

The command buffer setting process 1 is a process called by the INVD instruction. The variable "_CMBF_SET1" specified by the INVD instruction is a number corresponding to the address of the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1) defined in the processing address table, and is "4" (INVD4) in the present embodiment. There is. When the number of the processing address table is specified by the INVD instruction, the main control MPU 1311 refers to the processing address table and executes the process corresponding to the specified number. As a result, it is possible to execute the process without directly specifying the address, so that it is possible to speed up the call of the process and reduce the program capacity.

In the command buffer setting process 1, as described above, the game stop command is specified based on the reference command data (HL register value) and the command addition data (A register value, the value corresponding to the game stop factor). It is stored in the transmission buffer by the command storage process, and the game stop command is output.

After storing the game stop command in the transmission buffer, the main control MPU 1311 executes an external output process (GAIB_OUT) for outputting external output information (step P123). The external output information includes, for example, symbol confirmation data, start opening data, large winning opening winning data, main winning ball data, security data, and the like.

The external output process (GAIB_OUT) is executed by the INVS instruction. In the INVS instruction, as described above, by storing the process in a specific area, the process can be called more quickly than when it is stored at an arbitrary address. The external output process (GAIB_OUT) is stored in a specific area because it is frequently executed such as being called from the output data setting process (PORT_SET) during the game (when the game is possible process is executed). In the output data setting process (PORT_SET), in order to speed up the entire process, in addition to the external output process (GAIB_OUT), output determination common process 1 (OHAN_SUB1), output determination common process 2 (OHAN_SUB2), etc. It is configured so that many processes called by INVD instructions defined in the processing address table and processes called by INVS instructions stored in a specific area are called.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 executes SPI communication processing for outputting various signals to be transmitted to a driving body such as a solenoid or the outside by SPI communication (step P124). In the SPI communication process, the data to be output to the WA register is set, the address to output the data set in the WA register is set to the E register, and then the SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) is executed. The SPI2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) is a process called by the INVD instruction like the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and the variable "_SPI_TX__WA" specified by the INVD instruction becomes "14" (INVD14). There is.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets the game stop data for stopping the game (step P125). Further, the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) for setting the set game stop data in the output port is executed (step P126). The game stop data is data for clearing, for example, a power failure clear signal, an LED common port, an LED cathode port, etc., and a motor port, an ACK output port, or the like.

The output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) is a process called by the INVD instruction in the same manner as the command buffer setting process 1 (CMBF_SET1), and the variable “_PORT_DAT_SET” specified by the INVD instruction becomes “10” (INVD10). ing.

Finally, the main control MPU 1311 executes a performance display monitor process for displaying various information related to the game on the performance display monitor (step P127). The performance display monitor process only displays various information, processing directly related to game control is not executed, and the performance display monitor itself is not intended to be referred to by the player. Therefore, the performance display monitor process of the present embodiment is stored outside the used area, and interrupts are prohibited while the process of displaying the performance information on the performance display monitor by the INVI instruction is executed, and the process is independent of the game control process. Can be executed. Since the BKI instruction returns to the caller after returning to the interrupt state before the process call at the end of the performance display monitor process, the caller returns to the caller even if the interrupt state before the process call is the interrupt enable state. There is no need to cancel interrupt prohibition with.

Further, since the test signal output process in the timer interrupt process is not a normal game but a process called at the time of the test to output the game information, it is stored outside the used area. Initialization processing, backup processing, etc. for executing processing when the power is turned off or processing outside the used area may be stored outside the used area.

When executing interrupt processing such as timer interrupt processing, interrupts may be disabled to prevent multiple interrupts, but the timer is designed so that there is no problem even if multiple interrupts occur. In the interrupt processing, the interrupt enabled state may be set. Since the INVI instruction of the present embodiment returns to the interrupt state before the processing is executed, it can be used without any problem regardless of whether or not multiple interrupts are allowed in any case.

[22-6. Placement of programs called from extended processing call instructions]
Subsequently, the arrangement of the program in which the processing executed by various calling instructions in the game control of the gaming machine of the present embodiment is defined will be described in detail. The program is stored in the program / data area (8000h to BFFFh) included in the ROM area of the storage area provided by the main control board 1310.

FIG. 397 is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of the area related to the program / data in the ROM area shown in FIG. 371. The left side of FIG. 397 shows the structure of the area related to the program / data, and the right side of FIG. 397 shows the details of the structure of the first area of the program / data area.

The area related to the program / data in the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes a first area (8000h to 8BFFh) and a second area (A800h to BFFFh) (left of FIG. 397). Areas other than these are unused areas (outside the used areas), and access by the game control program is basically prohibited. Further, 00H data is set as unused data in the area, and 00H is a NOP (non operation instruction) as a CPU instruction, and even if the area is erroneously accessed, unnecessary control is performed. It is not executed. When the area is erroneously accessed, a reset signal is input to the CPU so that the game processing can be returned immediately.

Further, as shown in FIG. 397, the first area is arranged on the start address side of the area related to the program / data, and the second area is arranged on the final address side of the area related to the program / data, and is located between the first area and the second area. An unused area (outside the used area) is placed. As will be described later, a program in which processes for executing main game control including processes related to the result of the game are defined is arranged in the first area, and error processing, test firing test processing, and combination are arranged in the second area. A program that defines processes that are not directly related to the result of the game, such as processes related to the calculation of the object ratio, is placed. By arranging an unused area between the first area and the second area, the independence of each area can be enhanced. For example, even when the first area is expanded, the influence of the specification change can be minimized by sufficiently securing an unused area that does not require the address of the second area to be changed.

Subsequently, each area will be described. In the first area, processes (programs) related to game control including processes (programs) called by various calling commands are stored. As shown in FIG. 397 (right), the start process is arranged at the beginning (8000h) of the address in the first area. The start process is a process that is executed when the gaming machine is started, and is a process that does not depend on the model. Specifically, it corresponds to the power-on processing (FIG. 213, etc.). Further, if the start process is arranged at the head of the area and the initial value of the program counter is set to "8000 h", the start process can be automatically started at the time of initialization. The initialization time is when a reset signal is input to the core of the main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310. Specifically, when a reset signal is input from the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1311 when the power is turned on, a defect detection inside the main control MPU 1311 (execution of an illegal instruction, access outside the specified area of ROM / RAM, watchdog timer) Etc.) when a reset signal is input.

Following the area where the start processing is stored, the processing group called by the INVD instruction is stored in the area. Since the capacity of the area where the start processing is stored is small, the area where the processing group called by the INVD instruction is stored is an area close to the start address of the first area (address of a relatively young address). The processing group called by the INVD instruction is the processing defined in the processing address table, and the substance (program) of the processing defined in the processing address table is stored in this area. It is preferable that the processes called by all INVD instructions are centrally arranged in the area where the process group called by the INVD instruction is stored, but the processes called by other than the INVD instruction are preferably arranged in the area. May be included.

As described above, the processing group called by the INVD instruction is a general-purpose processing, and is a processing that does not depend on the model (it is difficult to depend on it) like the start processing. In the present embodiment, the start address (8000h) of the first area is larger than the area for storing the model-dependent processing such as the game control processing described later for the processing that is difficult to depend on the model such as the start processing and the processing called by the INVD command. By arranging in an area close to, it is possible to make a common arrangement (address) even for different models. As a result, it becomes easy to reuse these general-purpose processes, and it becomes possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine. In addition, by specifying the content and arrangement (address) of general-purpose processing at the initial stage of development of the gaming machine, it is possible to streamline the creation of development materials and accelerate the start time of the gaming control processing for each model. Further, even when a plurality of teams develop a gaming machine, it becomes easy to share each process (program), and the development period can be shortened.

The remaining area of the first area following the area for storing the processing group called by the INVD instruction is the area for storing the program that defines the game control processing, and is the area on the final address side of the first area. ing. The game control process is various processes for controlling the progress of the game, and includes a model-dependent process. Specifically, processing called from timer interrupt processing (FIG. 190, FIG. 394, etc.) that controls the game, for example, processing such as control of symbol variation display (dynamic display) (special symbol / special electric accessory control) Processing (TOK_JOB; step S2089 in FIG. 190), ordinary symbol / ordinary electric accessory control processing (FUT_JOB; step S2090 in FIG. 190), etc.) are included.

The program that defines the process called by the INVS instruction is included in the area in which the program that defines the game control process is stored. As described above, by calling the process based on the program placed in the specific area with the INVS instruction, it is possible to execute with a word length (2 to 3) shorter than the word length (4) of the normal INV instruction. Become. The word length refers to the total length of the opcodes and operands that make up the instruction. The opcode is the part that is decoded by the instruction decoder after being fetched by the processor and that specifies the type of operation to perform. An operand is a part that specifies a value or variable to be operated.

In the second area (A800h to BFFFh), processes that are not directly related to the result of the game (pattern variation display / dynamic display), such as error processing, test firing test processing, and processing related to the calculation of the accessory ratio, are stored. .. Processing that is not directly related to the result of the game includes, for example, outputting a test signal to an inspection device connected to the game machine in the process of controlling the game in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 190, FIG. 191, FIG. 394, etc.). The test signal processing (step S2067 in FIG. 190, step P109 in FIG. 394) for performing the processing and the performance display monitor processing for displaying various information related to the game on the performance display monitor are included. The performance display monitor process is called and executed in the game enable time process (step P108 in FIG. 394) and the game stop time process (step P107 in FIG. 394, step P127 in FIG. 395). Further, the accessory ratio calculation / display process (step S89 in FIG. 23) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 23) is also included in the process that is not directly related to the result of the game. In the bonus ratio calculation / display process, the bonus ratio is calculated with reference to the number of prize balls stored in the bonus ratio calculation area 13128, and the calculated bonus ratio is displayed on the bonus ratio display 1317. This makes it possible to confirm the gambling of the gaming machine. Although there are differences in terms between the performance display monitor processing and the accessory ratio display processing, they are common in that they display information for confirming the gambling of the gaming machine, and are required depending on the type of gaming machine. Information is displayed. For example, a pachinko machine displays the base (total number of prize balls by entering the winning opening during non-time reduction (excluding balls released during big hits) / total number of shots during non-time reduction), and is a rotating body type game machine. Now, let's display the prize ratio.

Further, when calling another process from the process stored in the second area, only the INV instruction is used. The INV instruction (4 bytes) has a longer word length than the extended processing call instruction (INVS instruction (2 bytes), INVD instruction (1 byte), INVI instruction (2 bytes)), but has been extended. While the specifications of the process call instruction may differ depending on the arithmetic unit (main control MPU 1311 of the main control board 1310), the INV instruction that calls the specified process without any special restrictions is reliable even if the arithmetic unit is changed. Compatibility is maintained. Therefore, by configuring the program by using only the INV instruction when calling other processes in the process defined in the second area, the independence of the process defined in the second area is guaranteed. It is possible to facilitate the reuse of the program even when there is a major change in the specifications of the gaming machine such as a hardware update such as a change in the arithmetic unit as well as a model change (update).

On the other hand, the processing stored in the first area is configured by using not only the INV instruction but also the improved processing calling instruction INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction. Further, the processing called by the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction has a program configuration in which it is arranged only in the first area. Therefore, in the processing called by the INVS instruction, it is possible to call the processing by the INVS instruction or the INVD instruction as needed (arbitrary number of times), and further speed up the processing and simplify the program. Can be done.

For example, in the setting operation processing (step P105 in FIG. 394) for executing the processing for changing or confirming the setting of the gaming machine, as described above, the setting data for the setting operation is loaded into the corresponding output port. After setting, the setting confirmation / change process (setting process, SET_PROCESS, FIG. 192) and the setting display process (SET_DISPLAY, FIG. 193) are executed. The program is configured so that the setting confirmation / change processing and the setting display processing are called from the game control processing (timer interrupt processing; FIG. 190, etc.) by the INVS instruction.

In the setting confirmation / change processing (setting processing, SET_PROCESS), when the setting key 971 returns from the ON position to the OFF position without detecting a RAM abnormality, the power is turned on to determine the state at the start of the game by the INVS command. The program is configured to call the setting process (step S2104 in FIG. 192, FIG. 194, etc.).

In the power-on setting process, the program is configured to execute the command buffer setting process (CMBF_SET1, FIG. 381) by the INVD instruction in order to set the power-on operation command (step S2120 in FIG. 194). Subsequently, in order to initially set the work in the game area, the program is configured to collectively set the power-on initial data specified by the data setting process (DAT_SET, FIG. 377) by the INVD command in the work area. (Step S2123 in FIG. 194). Then, in the game start state, the command buffer setting process is performed by designating the data at the start of the game at the time of RAM initialization or the data at the start of the game at the time of power recovery, and by using the INVD command, the power-on state command and the power-on return destination command are executed. The program is configured to be set according to CMBF_SET1, FIG. 381) (steps 2124 and 2125 in FIG. 194). Further, the program is configured to execute the set value command transmission process for transmitting the set value command by the INVS instruction (step 2126 in FIG. 194).

In the setting display process (SET_DISPLAY), first, it is determined whether or not the setting state is abnormal, and if it is normal, the current setting value is set to be displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2111). ), If it is abnormal, the error is set to be displayed on the base display 1317 (step S2112 in FIG. 193). After that, the LED common signal is output to the LED common output port (step S2113 in FIG. 193), and the display data (segment signal) corresponding to the set value or the error display is output to the base display 1317 (step S2114 in FIG. 193). .. In the process of outputting to the base display 1317, first, in order to acquire the LED port output value (LED common signal) based on the LED status determination output data address table, the output determination common process 2 (_OHAN_SUB2; FIG. The program is configured to execute 383). Further, in order to transmit the output data to the base display 1317 by setting the LED common signal to the SPI port (LED common output port) by SPI communication, SPI 2-byte output processing (SPI_TX__WA; FIG. 389) is executed by the INVD instruction. The program is configured to do so.

In the timer interrupt process, in addition to the above-mentioned setting confirmation / change process (setting process, SET_PROCESS) and setting display process (SET_PROCESS), various processes are executed by the extended process call command. The processes called by the timer interrupt process are listed below. Since the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 394 is partially integrated, it will be described in correspondence with the timer interrupt processing of FIGS. 190 and 191.

The processes executed by the INVS instructions include switch input process 1 (SW_INPUT; step S2062), random number update process 1 (R_ATAR_K; step S2063), peripheral board command transmission process (SCM_JOB; step S2070), and setting process (SET_PROCESS; step). S2068), setting display processing (SET_DISPLAY; step S2069), switch input processing 2 (SW_INPUT2; step S2080), timer update processing (TIM_DEC; step S2081), prize ball control processing (PAY_JOB; step S2082), frame command reception processing (S2068) WK_CM_JOB; step S2083), command output processing when the switch passes (SW_COMSET_JOB; step S2085), special symbol / special electric accessory control process (TOK_JOB; step S2089), ordinary symbol / ordinary electric accessory control process (FUT_JOB; step S2090) , Output data setting process (PORT_SET; step S2091) is included. Since these processes are modules with a relatively large amount of processing and cannot be reused due to the specifications of the gaming machine, the program is intentionally configured to be called by the INVS instruction.

In the processing executed by the INVS instruction, as described above, various processing is executed internally by the INVS instruction or the INVD instruction to reduce the program capacity and increase the processing speed.

Further, the process executed by the INVI instruction includes a process of outputting a test signal (KENIG_OUT; step S2067), a fraud detection process (ILG_ACT_JUDG; step S2084), and a base display output process (EX_MONITOR_OUT; step S2087). .. As described above, the program that defines these processes is stored in the second area, and the process based on the program stored in the second area is configured so that it cannot be called by the INVS instruction or INVD instruction. There is. Since these processes are easy to reuse regardless of the specifications of the gaming machine and do not affect the result of the game, the program is intentionally configured to be called by the INVI instruction.

As described above, the program is configured so that the process called by the INVS instruction and the process called by the INVI instruction are mixed in one timer interrupt process. With this configuration, the structure of the program code can be simplified while reducing the program capacity. Further, the call of the process by the INVS instruction and the call of the process by the INVI instruction may be aggregated to form a program. For example, the call of the process by the INVI instruction may be the beginning or the end of the program that defines the timer interrupt process. Alternatively, it may be arranged in a specific place. Since the INVI instruction returns to the interrupt state before execution, the processing calls by the INVI instruction are configured to be aggregated at a specific location in the program, so that the processing aggregated at that specific location is being executed. The interrupt state is maintained, and it becomes easier to grasp the interrupt state, which facilitates debugging. Further, since the process called by the INVI instruction is a process that does not affect the result of the game, the process called by the INVI instruction is configured to be aggregated at a specific place in the program, so that the process called at the specific place is the game. It is possible to easily determine whether or not the processing is related to the result of.

Further, as for the power-on processing (start processing), the program is configured to execute various processing by the extended processing call instruction as in the timer interrupt processing. As the processes called in the power-on processing of FIGS. 213 and 214, the processing executed by the INVS instruction includes a setting value confirmation process (SET_LV_CHK; step S2209) and a power-on setting process (INITIAL_SET; step S2239). .. Further, the process executed by the INVI instruction includes a RAM confirmation process outside the game area when the power is turned on (EX_RWMSUMCK; step S2211) and a process when the RAM is abnormal outside the game area when the power is turned on (EX_INITIAL_RWM; step S2233; FIG. 217). There is.

In this way, the program is configured so that various processes are called by INVS instruction, INVD instruction, and INVI instruction not only in timer interrupt processing but also in power-on processing (start processing). In particular, by using the general-purpose processing called by the INVS instruction in timer interrupt processing etc. in the power-on processing (start processing), it is possible to compress the capacity of the entire game control program, rather than executing it by the INV instruction. Since it can be processed at high speed, it is possible to speed up the startup of the gaming machine. In addition, even when interrupts are disabled to ensure that various initialization processes are executed when the gaming machine is started, it is not necessary to add interrupt control to the program code by the INVI instruction, so the program capacity is compressed. The readability of the program can be improved.

The INV instruction, INVS instruction, and INVD instruction all return to the caller's processing by the BK instruction, but the INVI instruction returns to the caller's processing by the BKI instruction and returns to the interrupt state before the processing is executed. That is, if the interrupt state at the time of executing the INVI instruction is the interrupt disabled state, the interrupt disabled state is maintained as it is, and if the interrupt state at the time of executing the INVI instruction is the interrupt enabled state, the interrupt prohibition is released. The BKI instruction is a return instruction that can also be used when returning from the timer interrupt process, and maintains the interrupt enable / disable state before the timer interrupt process is executed. For example, the out-of-game area RAM error processing (EX_INITIAL_RWM; step S2233) at power-on is called by the INVI instruction during power-on processing, and therefore, as shown in FIG. Is executed, and the process other than the game control is executed by calling the out-of-use RWM initialization process (EX_EXRWMCLR) with the INV instruction. Further, by returning by the RET instruction (corresponding to the BKI instruction) after the processing in step S2289 is executed, it is configured to return to the interrupt state before calling the out-of-game area RAM error processing (EX_INITIAL_RWM) when the power is turned on. There is.

In the processing executed after the start processing (FIG. 221 and the like), the processing is also called by the INVS instruction or the INVI instruction. In the main loop that repeats the process of step S2310 and the process of step S2311, the random number update process (R_OTHER_K; step S2311) is repeatedly executed by the INVS instruction and waits until the next timer interrupt process is started. Further, in the power failure processing (processing after step S2312), the power OFF processing (EX_POWER_DOWN) is executed by the INVI instruction, and the checksum calculation processing (S2317) is called by the INVS instruction. The checksums of the work RAM used for processing outside the game area and the work RAM used for processing inside the game area in the power failure process by calling the process (process when the power is turned off) arranged in the second area and using the INVS instruction. The process of calculating (inspection value of work RAM) (arranged in the first area) can be executed. As described above, in the power failure processing, the processing based on the program arranged in the first area and the processing based on the program arranged in the second area can be called as needed, and thus are related to the game. Since it becomes easy to configure the program by combining the processing and the processing not related to the game, the degree of freedom in arranging the program is increased and the management efficiency can be improved.

Further, the process of calculating the checksum in the game area and the process of calculating the checksum outside the game area are separately provided, and the process of calculating the checksum in the game area is set as the first area, and the process outside the game area is set as the first area. The process of calculating the checksum may be arranged in the second area. In this case, the process of calculating the checksum in the game area arranged in the first area is called by the INVS command, the power OFF processing is called by the INVI command, and then the process is placed in the second area by the INV command. You may call the process of calculating the checksum outside the game area. With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the independence of processing for an area outside the game area.

In addition, the game control process also includes a process of selecting a variation pattern when executing a symbol variation display (dynamic display), and is called by an INVS instruction in the timer interrupt process. In the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select), the variation pattern number is specified by using the bit transfer instruction described above. FIG. 398 is a diagram showing an example of a program code of the variation pattern selection process (Hp_select). The processing by the program code shown in FIG. 398 realizes the same function as the processing by the program code shown in FIG. 370, and uses a processing call instruction extended to some functions. Similar to the program code shown in FIG. 370, it corresponds to the flowchart of the variation pattern selection process shown in FIG. 369.

With reference to FIG. 398, when selecting a variation pattern, it is first necessary to specify a variation pattern table corresponding to parameters such as a special symbol (type of dynamic display result) and a gaming state (step P8021). To explain the process of step P8021 in more detail, first, the identification information (result of dynamic display) of the special symbol is set as the selection value, and the address of the selection data address table is used as the search data address (step P8021-1). The 2-byte data search process (FIG. 380, LD_HLA_HL) is configured to be executed by the INVD instruction (step P8021-2). The selected data address table corresponding to the identification information (dynamic display result) of the special symbol is specified by the 2-byte data search process, and the specified selected data address table is used as the search table (step P8021-3) as the selected value. Set the status flag. After that, the variation pattern selection table can be specified by executing the 2-byte data search process by the INVD instruction (step P8021-4).

Further, an index for using the bit transfer instruction is created by executing an index creation process (step S8023; GEN_IDX) for creating a data transfer index based on the address of the specified variation pattern selection table. At this time, the index creation process is configured to be executed by the INVS instruction. Finally, the bit transfer instruction is used to acquire the variation pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern selection random number extracted from the specified variation pattern selection table (step P8028). In this way, by constructing a program by combining the extended processing call instruction (INVD instruction, INVS instruction) and the bit transfer instruction, it is possible to speed up the processing and reduce the capacity.

The process of using the extended process call instruction and the bit transfer instruction in combination is not limited to the process of selecting the variation pattern, and may be any process stored in the first area. In addition, by defining the index creation process required to execute the bit transfer instruction in the processing address table and configuring the program so that it is called by the INVD instruction, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and speed up the processing at the same time. It becomes. In this way, the bit transfer instruction can be used for general purposes by summarizing the processes required for executing the bit transfer instruction.

On the other hand, it is preferable that interrupts are disabled when the process is called for the process stored in the second area. For example, this is to prevent the progress of the game from being stopped when an error occurs, or to prevent the number of acquired balls from changing during the calculation of the bonus ratio so that the accurate bonus ratio cannot be calculated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by configuring the program so as to call the process stored in the second area by the INVI instruction, interrupt control (interrupts are prohibited at the time of processing execution, and interrupts before processing execution after processing execution). Control to return to the state) is simplified. Further, when the INVI instruction is executed, the PSW including interrupt prohibition / permission information is stored and saved in the stack area, and when returning from the called process, the PSW stored in the stack area is returned to the state before the return. Since it is necessary to use an instruction for individually saving / returning the PSW to the stack area, the control can be simplified. With this configuration, processing that is not directly related to the result of the game (variable display / dynamic display of the symbol) is aggregated and stored in a specific area to simplify the game control while managing the program layout. Can be planned.

[22-7. Frequency of use of programs called from extended processing call instructions]
Although there is a concern that the program capacity will increase as the game control becomes complicated by improving the game entertainment, the program capacity can be compressed by the expanded processing call instruction. In particular, the INVD instruction has a shorter word length than the INVS instruction and the INVI instruction, and the program capacity can be expected to be compressed most by replacing the INV instruction with the INV instruction. However, since the number of processes that can be called by the INVD instruction is limited to 16 that can be defined in the process address table, in the present embodiment, particularly frequently used processes are defined. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the program is configured so as to be used most frequently among the three types of extended processing call instructions. For example, in the game control process in the present embodiment, the frequency of use of the extended process call instruction in the program code (the number of lines of the process call instruction / the total number of lines of the program) is about 8% for the INVD instruction and about 8% for the INVS instruction. The program is composed of 4% and INVI instructions of about 0.3%. The frequency of use of the extended processing call instruction differs depending on the model of the gaming machine and is not limited to the above numerical values, but the frequency of use should be increased in the order of INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the data capacity and speed up the processing.

On the other hand, the frequency of use of the extended process call instruction in the program code (the number of lines of the process call instruction / the total number of lines of the program) and the execution frequency (number of executions) of the extended process call instruction at the time of program execution are different. For example, when it is used in a process with a large number of calls such as a timer interrupt process that is executed periodically, the actual execution frequency is high because it is repeatedly executed periodically even if the frequency of use in the program code is low. .. The timer interrupt process (FIG. 394) of the present embodiment is configured so that the execution frequency of the INVD instruction in one cycle is higher than the execution frequency of the INVS instruction. In this way, by increasing the number of times the INVD instruction, which has a shorter word length than the INVS instruction, is executed, it is possible not only to compress the program capacity but also to speed up the program processing.

As described above, the processing that can be called by the INVD instruction is highly versatile, and is composed of a program having a relatively small number of bytes (short number of steps) as compared with the processing called by the INVS instruction. Since a program having a small number of bytes reduces the overhead at the time of execution by the arithmetic unit, it is possible to speed up the processing. Therefore, it is possible to speed up the entire game control by calling it with the frequently used INVD instruction.

On the other hand, the process called by the INVS instruction has restrictions on the storage area of the program, but the number of processes and the capacity are less restricted than the process that can be called by the INVD instruction. It is a high processing. Since the INVI instruction calls the process stored in the second area, the program is configured so as to be used less frequently than the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction.

[22-8. Summary of processing call instructions]
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the main control MPU (CPU) 1311 of the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game by executing the program stored in the ROM 1313. The program defines processes that realize various functions required for controlling the gaming machine, and is executed by a process call command. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of types (4 types) of processing call commands are implemented.

Unlike other process call instructions, the INVD instruction, which is the first process call instruction (first specific process execution instruction), is not a value that directly indicates the address in which the process to be called is stored, but identification information from 1 to 16. Is set as the operand. The INVD instruction calls the process (first specific process) selected from the process address table based on the identification information set as the operand at the time of execution.

The processing address table used in the INVD instruction is information stored in the same ROM (storage means) as the program / data area, and although it is used as an address table in the program, the program and data are stored. It is stored in an area different from the program / data area. Specifically, it is stored in an area (C080h to C0FFh) having a larger address than the program / data area (8000h to BFFFh).

The INVS instruction, which is the second process call instruction (second specific process execution instruction), is an instruction that calls the process (second specific process) specified in the identification information set as a parameter. Further, the INVS instruction is an instruction in which the word length changes to 2 or 3 depending on the area in which the program defining the process to be called is stored. Specifically, when the area in which the program is stored is addresses 8000h to 8BFFh. Has a word length of 2 bytes, and in the case of addresses 8C00h to 93FFh, the word length is 3 bytes.

The INVI instruction, which is the third process call instruction (third specific process execution instruction), is set to the interrupt prohibit state after the PSW including the interrupt prohibition / permission information is stored and saved in the stack area at the time of instruction execution. , Is an instruction to call the process (third specific process) specified in the identification information set as a parameter.

Further, unlike other process call instructions, the INVI instruction sets the interrupt disable / enable state to the INVI instruction by using the same return instruction (BKI instruction) as when the timer interrupt process is executed when returning from the called process. You can return to the state before execution. Specifically, after saving the interrupt prohibition / authorization information (PSW in FIGS. 391 and 392 (B)) stuck in the stack area when the INVI instruction is executed to the stack area, the IMF value of the PSW is set to 0 (interruption prohibited). By setting to, the interrupt disabled state is set, and by restoring the PSW saved when the BKI instruction is executed, the interrupt disabled / enabled state can be returned to the state before the INVI instruction is executed.

The fourth process call instruction, the INV instruction, is an instruction that calls the process specified in the identification information set as a parameter. The INV instruction is an instruction having a longer word length than the INVS instruction.

At least the first to third processing call instructions (INVD instruction, INVS instruction, INVI instruction) are used in the game control program of the gaming machine in the present embodiment. Further, the word length of the INV instruction is longer than the word length of any of the INVD instruction, the INVS instruction, and the INVI instruction, and the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction (INVI instruction) should be used with priority over the INV instruction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the program capacity, speed up the call of processing, and improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine by simplifying the program code.

The program process (module) called by the INVD instruction, which is the first process call instruction, is arranged on the start address (8000h value) side, which is the relative start address, in the program / data area (8000h to BFFFH). There is. The INVD instruction is a process that does not depend on the model, and by arranging the INVD instruction in an area close to the start address of the program storage area, it is possible to make a common arrangement (address) even for different models. As a result, it becomes easy to reuse these general-purpose processes, and it becomes possible to improve the development efficiency of the gaming machine. In addition, by specifying the content and arrangement (address) of general-purpose processing at the initial stage of development of the gaming machine, it is possible to streamline the creation of development materials and accelerate the start time of the gaming control processing for each model. Further, even when a plurality of teams develop a gaming machine, it becomes easy to share each process (program), and the development period can be shortened.

Further, the program process (module) called by the INVS instruction, which is the second process call instruction, can be arranged at an arbitrary position in the program / data area, unlike the program process called by the INVD instruction. Further, in the INVS instruction, as described above, the word length changes to 2 or 3 depending on the area in which the program that defines the processing to be called is stored, but the processing is shorter and faster than the word length (4) of the INV instruction. Can be done. Therefore, the INVS instruction can be called at a higher speed than the INV instruction while allowing the program to be arranged more flexibly than the INVD instruction, so that the processing speed and the capacity can be reduced.

The program process (module) called by the INVI instruction, which is the third process call instruction, is an instruction for calling a process not related to the result of the game arranged in the second area as described above, and is a game of a different model. By making it possible to divert it to the machine, it is possible to improve the development efficiency at the time of new development of the game machine. Therefore, when the program that defines the process called by the INVI instruction is ported to another model by arranging it relatively on the last address (BFFFh value) side of the program / data area (8000h to BFFFh). Even so, the impact is minimized. In addition, the program is configured to call the process by the INV instruction instead of the extended process call instruction such as the INVD instruction so that the compatibility is maintained even if the hardware configuration of the gaming machine is changed. With this configuration, it is possible to facilitate the reuse of the program even if the specifications of the gaming machine are changed.

On the other hand, in the process stored in the first area (the area on the start address side), not only the INV instruction but also the improved process call instruction INVD instruction, INVS instruction, and INVI instruction can be used. It is possible. Further, the processing called by the INVD instruction and the INVS instruction has a program configuration in which it is arranged only in the first area. Therefore, in the processing called by the INVS instruction, it is possible to call the processing by the INVS instruction or the INVD instruction as needed (arbitrary number of times), and further speed up the processing and simplify the program. Can be done.

In the game control program of the present embodiment, the INVD instruction which is the first process call instruction, the INVS instruction which is the second process call instruction, and the INVI instruction which is the third process call instruction are the INVD instruction, the INVS instruction, and the INVI. The program is configured so that the frequency of use (number of uses; number of executions) increases in the order of instructions. Since the INVD instruction has the shortest word length among these processing call instructions, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and speed up the program processing by configuring it in this way.

From the above, according to the present embodiment, by improving the existing instruction that calls the defined process, it is possible to speed up the entire game control process and reduce the program capacity. Further, the program can be simplified by implementing an instruction such as an INVI instruction that integrates an interrupt control and a processing call instruction.

[23. Arrangement of electronic components on the main control board]
The procedure of SPI communication in the game stop processing has been described above. By the way, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the wiring of the data bus by adopting serial communication such as SPI communication for signal transmission in the main control board 1310. That is, the circuit pattern can be simplified by eliminating a large number of data buses connected to a plurality of parallel interface circuits and performing communication with a small number of signal lines including control lines. This facilitates the arrangement of various electronic components such as the main control MPU 1311 and other connectors for outputting external information and a serial-parallel conversion circuit (first electronic component) for serial communication on the main control board 1310. Can be. Hereinafter, an example of arranging electronic components on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIG. 399.

FIG. 399 is a diagram showing an example of a mounting diagram of the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The mounting diagram shown in FIG. 399 corresponds to the circuit diagram shown in FIGS. 93, 259, and the like, and the reference numerals and explanations of the electronic components are as described above.

In the main control board 1310 of the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1311 is arranged near the center of the board. The main control board 1310 has a first region 6100 centered on the main control MPU 1311 and a second region 6200 other than the first region (outside the first region). The arrangement of the main control MPU 1311 may be such that a predetermined distance is secured from the end of the main control board 1310, and the first region 6100 and the second region 6200 can be secured.

The first region 6100 includes a non-mounting region 6101 in which electronic components other than the main control MPU 1311 such as logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) and discrete components are not arranged, and discrete components that need to be arranged close to the main control MPU 1311. There is a component mounting area 6102 in which is arranged. Discrete components are basically electronic components that have one circuit function. By providing the non-mounting area 6101 around the main control MPU 1311, the heat generated by the operation of the main control MPU 1311 affects other electronic components, or the heat generated by the other electronic components affects the operation of the main control MPU 1311. Can be prevented.

Various logic components (logic ICs, integrated circuits) are arranged in the second region 6200. Parts that need to be placed near the main control MPU 1311 (eg, noise sensitive parts) are placed in the area close to the main control MPU 1311 in the second area 6200, and the other logic parts are further outside. Placed in the area. Hereinafter, typical arrangements of electronic components mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described.

The reset circuit 1335 is arranged in a region of the second region 6200 that is close to the main control MPU 1311 (a region close to the component mounting region 6102 of the first region 6100). Specifically, it is arranged as close as possible to the main control MPU 1311, and the number of electronic components arranged between the main control MPU 1311 and the main control MPU 1311 is reduced so as not to intersect with other wiring. As a result, it is possible to configure the system so that an erroneous signal is not input due to factors such as noise generated by crosstalk, and the erroneous signal is input to the reset circuit 1335, so that the game is interrupted and the game progresses. It is possible to prevent a significant hindrance.

The clock oscillator 1336 (second electronic component) is arranged in the component mounting area 6102 of the first area 6100. If the wiring distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 is long or intersects with other wiring, noise is likely to occur, and the frequency of the clock signal output from the clock oscillator 1336 varies. , There is a risk that the progress of the game will be hindered. On the other hand, if the distance between the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 is too short, the clock oscillator 1336 may not operate normally due to heat generated by the main control MPU 1311 and the like, and the frequency may vary. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 of the present embodiment, the influence of heat generation of the main control MPU 1311 is suppressed by providing the non-mounting region 6101 around the main control MPU 1311, while the clock oscillator is located in the component mounting region 6102 of the first region 6100. By arranging the 1336, it is suppressed that the main control MPU 1311 and the clock oscillator 1336 are separated from each other, and the generation of noise is suppressed.

As described above, the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 includes a game ball detection switch (starting winning opening, large winning opening count switch, ordinary winning opening, specific area switch, ordinary symbol gate switch, game board ejection switch) and a photosensor. A signal such as is input, and a game ball flowing down the game area 5a is mainly detected. Since the switches and sensors that output these input signals are distributed and arranged in the game area, a plurality of parallel-serial conversion circuits 1341 are provided (in the present embodiment, the parallel-serial conversion circuits 1341a). ~ 1341c). Further, these input signals are once input to the buffer and input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341. The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 is arranged in the second region 6200, but since a signal for giving a game value such as winning detection to the starting winning opening and the large winning opening is input, the influence of noise and the like is affected. Arranged so that it is as difficult to receive as possible.

As described above, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 output signals for lighting the LEDs (function display unit 1400, base display 1317). Since the display of the function display unit 1400 and the base display 1317 does not directly affect the result of the game, the position may be relatively far from the main control MPU 1311, and the degree of freedom of arrangement is increased. For example, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 is arranged on the end side of the main control board 1310. Further, a drive circuit 1344 is provided after the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, and the drive circuit 1344 receives a signal once and then outputs the signal to the LED (function display unit 1400, base display 1317).

The base display 1317 is arranged in the outer region of the second region 6200 (on the end side of the main control board 1310), that is, at a position relatively distant from the main control MPU 1311. The base value is displayed on the base display 1317, but even if an incorrect base value is displayed or the base value is not displayed due to the influence of noise, the display of the base value itself affects the result of the game. Does not give. Further, it is possible to output the base value information from the external terminal board 784 to the hall computer installed in the amusement park, or to display the base value on the liquid crystal display device, and it is possible to secure an alternative means. Therefore, in order to prioritize other logic components (first logic components) that may affect the game in the event of a malfunction and arrange them in the vicinity of the main control MPU 1311, the base display 1317 is placed from the main control MPU 1311. Place it in a distant position. Further, the logic components (serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343, second logic component) that are unlikely to affect the game such as outputting a signal to the base display 1317 are located at positions away from the main control MPU 1311. It may be arranged in the vicinity of the base display 1317.

In the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345, as described above, the external terminal plate 784 is connected to the output ports (PA0 to PA7) of channel A, and various solenoids are connected to the output ports (PB0 to PB7) of channel B. .. The various solenoids include a large winning opening solenoid and the like, which affects the game value given to the player. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 is a region close to the first region 6100 of the second region 6200. Is placed in. As a result, the signal line connecting the main control MPU 1311 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit can be shortened. Further, since the solenoid drive signal from the main control board 1310 is transmitted and received to the serial communication (SPI communication), the number of data lines can be reduced, so that the data lines can be easily routed when arranging the electronic components. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction due to the influence of noise or the like.

Since the serial-parallel conversion circuit that outputs a signal that controls a motor other than the solenoid directly outputs the output signal without passing through a buffer, a transistor, or the like, the main control MPU 1311 and the output destination connector (for example, It is necessary to arrange it in the vicinity of the connector 13103).

In the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, as described above, the inspection terminal 1348 is connected to the output port of the channel B, and a signal output from the inspection terminal 1348 (for example, a special electric accessory open signal, a normal electric accessory) An object release signal, etc.) is output. The serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346 is arranged in the inspection component mounting area (inspection circuit arrangement area) 6300, and in addition to the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346, an interface circuit 1347 and an inspection terminal 1348 are provided. The electronic components provided in the inspection component mounting area 6300 are mounted only on the gaming machines that are inspected by the inspection organization, and are not mounted on the gaming machines that are generally on the market. However, although no component is mounted in the inspection component mounting area 6300, a print pattern (for example, a data bus connected to the interface circuit 1347) is provided, so noise may be induced in the data bus and cause a malfunction. Therefore, it is arranged at a position away from other electronic parts (first logic parts) that affect the game. For example, the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1342 and the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1343 that display LEDs are more inspection parts than the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 that outputs a signal to control the solenoid for opening and closing the winning opening. It is arranged at a position close to the mounting area 6300 (serial-parallel conversion circuit 1346).

In the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 399, the setting key 971 is provided on the main control board 1310 and is arranged at the end of the main control board 1310 (outside the second region). Since the setting key 971 is directly operated by an employee of the game, various electronic components such as the main control MPU 1311 and the serial / parallel conversion circuit that performs the main control of the game are used to avoid the influence of vibration during operation. It is arranged at a position away from the first logic component). Further, the control based on the signal input by the operation of the setting key 971 may directly affect the progress of the game because the control based on the signal input by the operation of the setting key 971 includes the setting change of the gaming machine. Therefore, the wiring between the setting key 971 and the main control MPU 1311 is reduced so as not to be affected by noise or the like.

As described above, in the main control board 1310 of the gaming machine in the present embodiment, the basic guideline for circuit design is clarified by specifying the arrangement for each area according to the function and characteristics of each electronic component. Can be. As a result, it is possible to maintain and improve the quality without lowering the development efficiency even if the system is changed due to the design of a new gaming machine or the transfer of developers.

[24. Serial communication (SPI communication) control]
Here, the serial communication function (SPI communication) that outputs a signal from the main control board 1310 in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be further described. The serial communication function is as described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 263, but here, the procedure of SPI communication will be described in more detail with reference to the program code.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, serial communication is used for signal transmission in the main control board 1310. Typical serial communication includes I2C communication and SPI communication. SPI communication has an advantage that the number of signal lines is increased but the communication speed is higher than that of I2C communication. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, SPI communication is used when the main control MPU 1311 receives signals from various switches or when the main control MPU 1311 transmits control signals such as various LEDs and solenoids.

It should be noted that not all signals are input / output by SPI communication, but some signals are mainly transmitted by parallel communication, for example, a signal for detecting fraudulent activity against a gaming machine in the initial setting process when the power is turned on. It is input to the control MPU 1311. For example, signals such as "setting key switch", "main RWM erase / setting change signal", and "power failure warning signal" are directly input from the general-purpose input terminal of the main control MPU 1311 by parallel communication. The "setting key switch", "main RWM erase / setting change signal", and "power failure warning signal" can be confirmed in the initial setting process (for example, the initialization process of FIGS. 21 and 22) when the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Since it is a necessary signal and it takes time to capture and determine the input signal when the input signal is captured via the SPI circuit, it is captured by parallel communication. In this way, since parallel communication can communicate at a higher speed than serial communication, it is possible to speed up the initial setting processing as compared with the case of transmitting and receiving various signals only by serial communication, and the time until the game processing is started. Can be shortened.

In addition, when some signals are input and output by parallel communication and other signals are transmitted by serial communication (SPI communication), when a fraudster tries to acquire a signal for game control. Since it is necessary to acquire signals from a plurality of locations including the main control board 1310 and the input / output board 1351, the deterrence against fraud can be enhanced.

SPI communication outputs a signal based on the information stored in the SPI communication buffer register. For example, in the present embodiment, there is a case where a stop signal is output to the solenoid in the game stop processing in the timer interrupt processing, a case where a signal is output to the LED cathode port or the LED common port in the display LED output processing and the setting display processing. In the game machine, the signal transmitted from the main control MPU 1311 by SPI communication is mainly a signal for controlling a light emitting body such as an LED or a driving body such as a motor / solenoid.

In addition, signals input from various sensors in SPI communication are input to an arithmetic unit such as the main control MPU 1311. For example, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening, the winning is detected by the starting opening switch, and a signal is input to the main control MPU 1311. Hereinafter, a configuration and a procedure for transmitting / receiving signals input / output to / from the main control MPU 1311 by SPI communication will be described.

[24-1. Serial communication (SPI communication) control configuration]
First, a configuration for realizing SPI communication will be described. The basic configuration is as described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 263, and further, with reference to FIGS. 400 to 402, setting of parameters required for each configuration and control will be described, and together with reference to FIG. 403. The procedure at startup such as initialization of various parameters at the start of SPI communication is also supplemented with reference to.

FIG. 400 is a block diagram of a configuration for performing SPI communication to the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the master control MPU 1311 controls communication, and various ICs arranged on the main control board 1310 constitute slaves. Specifically, the slaves are a serial-parallel conversion circuit (1342, 1343, 1346, 1349) and a parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341. A part of the slave may be arranged not on the main control board 1310 but on the relay board connected to the main control board 1310.

In the present embodiment, two types of communication are possible from the master (main control MPU 1311) by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). Communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is performed to slaves 1 to 4. Communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is basically communication for performing normal game control, inputting signals from various switches and sensors, controlling solenoids that open and close the winning opening, and emitting light from various LEDs. A signal for control is output. On the other hand, communication by SPI transmission (CHB) is performed on the slave 5, and is mainly used for communication for outputting a test signal.

In communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA), it is possible to start communication with all slaves (1 to 4) at the same time, and at this time, each slave starts communication in a predetermined order. In this case, the communication start (“1”) is set in the enable setting of all slaves (SPENBan; n corresponds to each slave). If no data is stored in the communication (transmission) buffer, the communication of the next slave is started without the communication of the corresponding slave.

It is also possible to specify slaves individually and start communication. For example, when the LEDs connected to slave 1 and slave 3 are turned on, the enable setting is communicated to slave 1 and slave 3. By setting the enable setting of the slave 2 and the slave 4 to (“0”) while setting the start (“1”), the communication of the slave 3 is started after the communication of the slave 1 is completed.

As described above, each slave can input and output a signal, and takes in the input signal when the output signal is output. Further, each slave may be controlled by limiting (specificing) the function as output-only or input-only, and in the communication in SPI transmission / reception (CHA) of the present embodiment, slaves 1 to 3 are output-only and slave 4 are used. Is for input only. Therefore, the input-only slave is configured to capture the input signal while transmitting dummy data. The procedure for the master (main control MPU 1311) to capture the signal received from the slave will be described later.

Subsequently, the SPI communication of the present embodiment will be further described. As described above, in the SPI communication in the main control MPU 1311 of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are two channels, SPI transmission / reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). The number of SPI transmission / reception (CHA) channels is four. Further, the communication speed can be set for each channel, and a 16-byte transmission / reception buffer is provided for each channel. There are four types of SPI communication operation modes, which are common to each channel. The bit direction can be set to LSB first or MSB first, and can be set for each channel. The LSB first starts communication from the least significant bit, and the LSB first starts communication from the most significant bit. Further, SPI transmission (CHB) is dedicated to transmission, and the number of channels is one. Other settings are the same as SPI transmission / reception (CHA), but all reception-related settings are unused (fixed to "0"). Hereinafter, the operation mode and the registers for setting each parameter will be described with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402.

First, the operation mode of SPI communication will be described. FIG. 401 is a diagram illustrating an operation mode of SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. Four types of operation modes are defined for SPI communication, and as shown in FIG. 401, whether the initial state of the clock is "Low" or "High" and the timing of data change is "at the falling edge" of the clock. It is specified by "at the time of rising" and whether the sampling timing is "at the time of falling" or "at the time of rising". The initial state of the clock is a state in which communication has not been started, and one bit of data is transmitted between the timing of data change and the timing of sampling. The operation mode is set according to the specifications of the slave (serial-parallel conversion circuit), and the master (main control MPU 1311) outputs a signal according to the set operation mode.

Next, the configuration of the register for setting the parameter for controlling the SPI communication in the present embodiment will be described. Here, the case of SPI transmission / reception (CHA) will be described, but the same applies to the case of SPI transmission (CHB). FIG. 402 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of various registers for setting SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 402A is a control register 1 (SPICNA0), and FIG. 402B is a control register 2 (SPICNA1). ), (C) are prescaler registers (SPICPSA0, SPICPSA1, SPIPPSA2, SPIPPSA3).

The control register 1 shown in (A) is composed of 8 bits and includes a bit shift setting (SPBSFAn), an operation mode (SPMODA), and an initialization setting (SPRSTA). The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) and operation mode (SPMODA) are set at power-on (initialization), and the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is set at power-on or when communication cannot be performed normally at each slave. If it is determined, initialization is executed for all slaves. When the initialization is executed, the bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) and the operation mode (SPMODA) are reset. As a result, even if an abnormality occurs in the SPI communication circuit, it is possible to recover from the abnormality at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress that the progress of the game is hindered.

In the bit shift setting (SPBSFAn), it is specified whether to transmit data from the most significant bit (“0”: MSB first) or data from the least significant bit (“1”: LSB first). The bit shift setting (SPBSFAn) can be specified for each slave, and in the present embodiment, 4 bits corresponding to the number of slaves are allocated and can be set individually (bits 6 to 3). Specifically, bit 6 corresponds to slave 4, bit 5 corresponds to slave 3, bit 4 corresponds to slave 2, and bit 3 corresponds to slave 1.

The operation mode (SPMODA) specifies the above-mentioned four types of operation modes, and is set in common for each slave. Since there are four types of operation modes, an area for 2 bits is allocated, and "00" is mode 1, "01" is mode 2, "10" is mode 2, and "11" is mode 4 (). Bits 2, 1).

The initialization setting (SPRSTA) has different functions at the time of reading and at the time of writing, and is set in common for each slave. At the time of reading, the initialization setting indicates that the initialization is completed when the set value is "0", and indicates that the initialization is in progress when the setting value is "1". On the other hand, when "1" is written in the initialization setting, the SPI communication is controlled to be initialized, and when "0" is written, the control is continued without doing anything in particular. For example, when it is determined that communication cannot be performed normally, "1" is written in the initialization setting and initialization is executed. Further, it is possible to initialize the communication circuit by writing "1" in the initialization setting regardless of the communication state such as whether or not communication is in progress. When the communication circuit is initialized, it is necessary to reset various parameters.

The initialization setting (SPRSTA) can determine whether or not it is being initialized at the time of reading, and after confirming whether or not it is being initialized (“1”) based on the value of the bit, it is possible to determine whether or not it is being initialized. Initialization may be executed or communication may be started. The initialization time when the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is initialized (bit 0 is set to (“1”)) can be executed in a shorter period than when one instruction is executed, and is set to initialization. When the next instruction is executed later, the initialization is completed. Therefore, if the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is still being initialized (“1”) even after the initialization setting (SPRSTA) is read after the initialization is set, it is possible that some abnormality has occurred in the SPI communication circuit. Therefore, in that case, the game may be reset to the main control MPU 1311 (reset by the watchdog timer) by forcibly shifting to the game stop, the abnormality notification, and the power interruption processing. As a result, even if the SPI communication circuit becomes abnormal, it can be restored immediately.

Note that each slave does not need to be initialized because it is started in the initialized state when the power is turned on. On the other hand, when resetting by watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, out-of-area access reset, etc., the state before the reset is maintained. Therefore, even if the program is started by any reset factor such as system reset, watchdog timer reset, illegal operation code reset, or out-of-area access reset, it is initialized without setting the initialization for the SPI circuit. Initial settings other than the settings are made. If watchdog timer reset, illegal opcode reset, or out-of-area access reset occurs, it is possible that the game is not being executed normally, and the SPI circuit settings may have been changed. .. Therefore, when the program from the reset is started, it is determined whether the reset of the watch dog timer reset, the illegal operation code reset, or the out-of-area access reset has occurred, and then the watch dog timer reset, the illegal operation code reset, If it is determined that the reset has been performed by any of the out-of-area access resets, the stability of the game control after the reset can be improved by performing the initialization setting of the SPI circuit (writing "1" in SPRSTA). It can be improved and the hindrance to the progress of the game can be suppressed as much as possible.

The control register 2 (SPICNA1) shown in (B) is composed of 8 bits and is set every time communication is started. The control register 2 includes the reception status (SPRVSAn) and enable (SVENBAn) of each slave. The reception status is set for each slave (bits 7 to 4), and is set to "1" if there is received data and "0" if there is no received data.

The enable is set for each slave, and the function differs between reading and writing (bits 3 to 0). At the time of reading, "1" is set if communication is in progress, and "0" is set if communication is completed. On the other hand, when "1" is written to enable, communication of the corresponding slave becomes possible and communication is started. The communication status can be determined by acquiring the enable value at the start of communication. If the value is "0" (communication end), "1" is set to start communication and the value is "". In the case of 1 ”(during communication), it is possible to control such as waiting until the communication is completed.

The prescaler register shown in (C) is composed of 16 bits and is provided for each slave. The prescaler register is composed of a 5-bit transmission buffer status (bits 15 to 11) and a 10-bit baud rate setting (bits 9 to 0) (bits 10 are unused bits).

The number of transmission data is stored in the transmission buffer status. In the case of "00h", there is no transmission data, and in the case of "01h" to "10h", the transmission data in the transmission buffer is 1 to 16 bytes. Is shown. The transmit buffer status can also be used to check the number of data remaining in the transmit buffer. If the value of the transmission buffer status is "10h", all the data is stored in the transmission buffer (full state), so the writing of the data is ignored. Whether or not communication is in progress can be determined by referring to the enable value of the corresponding slave in the control register 2.

The baud rate setting corresponds to the communication speed at the time of communication, and is set once when the power is turned on. The set value can be set from "000h" to "3FFh", and in the present embodiment, the actual baud rate can be calculated by the system clock (20Mhz) / (set value × 4). When the set value is "000h", it is calculated as "001h". When the SPI communication is initialized (when "1" is set in the initialization setting of the control register 1), it is necessary to reset the SPI communication.

[24-2. Control at the start of SPI communication]
Subsequently, the control from the start (initialization) of the gaming machine to the start of SPI communication will be described. FIG. 403 is a time chart showing a state from the initialization of the gaming machine of the present embodiment to the start of SPI communication.

In FIG. 403, a reset signal is input by turning on the power of the gaming machine at time a, and the gaming machine is started (initialized). When the gaming machine is started (initialized), before the user program such as the initial setting process is executed (started), it is checked whether an illegal device is installed or an illegal modification is performed. Perform a security check to be inspected (Period A).

When the security check is completed, the initial setting process, which is a user program, is executed by the main control MPU 1311 (time b). The initial setting process includes processing specific to the model of the gaming machine and executes processing necessary for enabling the game to start (period B).

The initial setting process includes initialization of various parameters set in SPI communication and the like. Specifically, the control register 1 (SPICNA0, SPICNB0) shown in FIG. 402 (A) is set (time c). In the control register 1, as described above, the bit shift setting of each slave and the operation mode common to each slave are set.

In the operation mode setting, the clock initial state is set according to the set operation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 403, the signal level of the clock terminal is set to “1” (High) when the power is turned on. Therefore, when mode 1 and mode 2 are specified, the signal level of the clock terminal is set to “0”. Set to "(Low)". The signal change of the clock terminal of each mode is as shown in FIG. 403. The bit shift setting is set appropriately according to the slave specifications. Since the SPI circuit is automatically initialized when the gaming machine is started, it is not necessary to execute the initialization setting of the SPI circuit (write "1" in SPRSTA) at the time of mode setting by the initial setting process. As a result, it is not necessary to install a process for initializing by a user program, and it is possible to reduce the program capacity and the load at the time of initialization.

After that, when the initialization setting process is completed (time d), the game process is started (period C). The start of the game process corresponds to the start of the main loop process (steps S36 to S40 in FIG. 22) in the initialization process (FIG. 21 and the like), and the timer interrupt process can be executed. When the timer interrupt process is executed (time e), a process for performing SPI communication such as a switch input process is executed (time f).

In addition, reset when the reset signal is not input from the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1311 (user reset, watch dog timer reset, illegal operation code reset, out-of-area access reset "Unless otherwise specified, these resets are performed. In the case of "user reset"), the program starts immediately after the reset is released, and the SPI communication settings are performed by the same process regardless of whether the reset is a system reset or a user reset. ing. As a result, it is possible to reduce the program capacity and the load at the time of initialization by setting the communication related to the same SPI without distinguishing between the system reset and the user reset.

Further, the period from the reset release to the setting of the operation mode (the period from the time a to c) is set to be longer in the case of the system reset than in the case of the user reset. Since there is a high possibility that a security problem will occur when the power is turned on, the function check of various main control MPUs 1311 by restarting after the power is turned on can be surely completed.

[24-3. Control at the time of output signal transmission in SPI communication]
SPI communication is performed by various processes called from timer interrupt processing and initialization processing. For example, in timer interrupt processing, switch input processing for processing signals input from various switch sensors by SPI communication, display LED output processing for outputting signals for controlling lighting of various LEDs by SPI communication, and external output. The game stop processing and the like for outputting the signal of the above to the external output terminal by SPI communication and the like are included. Here, a procedure for outputting a signal by SPI communication in the game stop processing will be described. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the process for executing SPI communication is simplified while using the process call instruction such as the INVD instruction described above.

The outline of the procedure for transmitting a signal by SPI communication sets the data to be transmitted in a predetermined SPI communication buffer register, and executes the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) called by the above-mentioned INVD instruction. Here, the SPI communication process of step P124 of the game stop process (FIG. 395) is taken as a specific example, and the program code of the game stop process (FIG. 396) and the program code of the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) (FIG. 389) are used. The procedure will be explained with reference to it.

As shown in the program code of FIG. 396, when the game stop processing is started, the main control MPU 1311 stores the game stop command in the transmission buffer and performs an external output process (GAIB_OUT) for outputting external output information. It is executed (step P123), and the external output information to be output is set in the A register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 sets the external output information set in the A register in the W register by loading (storing) (“LD W, A”) the value stored in the A register in the W register. Then, by setting the content of the A register to "0" ("XOR A, A"), the solenoid signal output when the game is stopped is set to OFF.

Then, the address value of the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) is set in the E register, and the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) called from the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) and the SPI2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) called by the INVD instruction. ) Sets the external output information set in the WA register and each solenoid signal in the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) indicated by the E register, and is output by SPI transmission (CHB). The contents of the SPI communication B buffer register (_SPIBFB0) will be described with reference to FIG. 404.

The SPI communication B0 port corresponds to the parallel output port of the address DA, and is connected to the external terminal plate 784 and various solenoids via the serial-parallel conversion circuit 1345 (FIG. 257). FIG. 404 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of the SPI communication B buffer register in the present embodiment. The SPI communication B buffer register is 16 bits, and the port for outputting external information (PB0 to PB7) and the port for outputting data (drive signal) to the solenoid (PA0 to PA7) are each composed of 8 bits.

The signal output from the port for outputting external information includes a security signal, a ball payout signal, and the like. Various signals output from the external terminal board 784 are detected by the hall computer. The hall computer accumulates signals received from each gaming machine and monitors the player's game by grasping the number of gaming media and gaming information paid out by the gaming machine.

Further explaining each port that outputs a drive signal to the solenoid, as shown in FIG. 404, the output port PA1 corresponds to the solenoid 1, the output port PA2 corresponds to the solenoid 2, and the output port PA3 corresponds to the solenoid 3. In this embodiment, other ports are not used, and the number of output ports increases or decreases depending on the model. The solenoid includes a solenoid that opens and closes the large winning opening, and in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 16, the solenoid includes a solenoid that opens and closes the first large winning opening 2005 and the second large winning opening 2006. Since the second major winning opening 2006 is composed of two major winning openings, the second upper winning opening 2006a and the second lower winning opening 2006b, which are arranged in one flow path through which the game balls are distributed, 3 These ports are the output destinations of the solenoid drive signal.

Further, although one output port corresponds (connects) to each solenoid, it may be configured with a plurality of bit outputs (for example, 2-bit output). For example, the output ports PA0 and PA1 are solenoids that open and close the first prize opening 2005, the output ports PA2 and PA3 are solenoids that open and close the second upper prize opening 2006a, and the output ports PA4 and PA5 are the second upper prize opening 2006b. It may be configured to correspond to (connect) a solenoid that opens and closes. By outputting the drive current that bundles a plurality of output ports (output terminals) and connects them to one solenoid in this way, it is possible to prevent the drive current from becoming insufficient and to reliably drive the solenoid. On the other hand, when the drive signal is output from one output port (output terminal), the drive signal may be amplified by the amplifier circuit arranged on the main control board 1310 or the relay board.

Returning to the description of the program code for the game stop processing in FIG. 396, when the output destination by SPI communication is specified by setting the SPI communication B buffer register in the E register, the main control MPU 1311 performs SPI 2-byte output processing. (SPI_TX__WA) is called by the INVD instruction to start SPI communication. The SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) is called in each process of the setting display process (SET_DISPLAY), the output data setting process (PORT_SET), and the LED_DISPLAY (display LED output process) in addition to the game stop process (Play_Stop), and is serial. This is a process that is called when communication (SPI communication) is executed.

Subsequently, the details of the SPI2 byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) will be described with reference to FIG. 389. When the SPI 2-byte output process is started, the main control MPU 1311 first outputs the contents of the W register to the SPI communication B buffer set in the E register (“OUT (E), W”). As described above, the W register stores the port output value created in the external output process (step P123) of the game stop processing. Further, the contents of the A register are loaded into the W register (“LD W, A”), and the contents of the W register are output to the SPI communication B buffer (“OUT (E), W”). By the above processing, after setting the data for external information output, the data (drive signal) for the solenoid can be set.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 sets the definition information for performing SPI communication (“LDT HL, LDT HL, SPI_COMTX_B−_OFS_TP”). SPI_COMTX_B is a table (setting data at the time of SPI common output) in which setting data for output by SPI communication is defined, and _OFS_TP is an initial value address of an area in which various tables are defined. Hereinafter, the SPI common output setting data will be described with reference to FIG. 405.

FIG. 405 is a diagram showing an example of SPI common output setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) of the present embodiment. In the SPI common output time setting data (SPI_COMTX_B), it is defined that the number of data settings is defined first, and then communication is possible for SPI transmission / reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB).

The number of data settings is the number of records defined in the table, and data for a total of two records, that is, the setting data for SPI communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) and the setting data for SPI communication by SPI transmission (CHB), are defined. Therefore, the actual number of data settings is 2. The value of the number of data settings is configured to be calculated based on information such as the end address of the table in order to flexibly correspond to the table structure (increase / decrease in the number of records in the table).

SPI communication is started by writing the SPI communication enable bit to the SPI communication control register. The SPI common output time setting data (SPI_COMTX_B) defines the setting data for SPI transmission / reception (CHA) and SPI transmission (CHB). For each setting data, the setting address of the SPI communication control register 1 and the setting value of the SPI communication enable bit are defined. Specifically, for SPI transmission / reception (CHA), the setting address (_SPICNA1) of the SPI communication A control register 1 and the setting value of the SPI communication A enable bit (_SPI_SPECNB_PB), and for SPI transmission (CHB), the SPI communication B control. It is the set address of the register 1 (_SPINB1) and the set value of the SPI communication B enable bit (_SPI_SPECNB_PB). In _SPI_SVENBA_PB, communication start information is set for the slave that executes communication in SPI transmission / reception (CHA). For example, when communication is started for all of slaves 1 to 4, slaves 1 to 1 are set. Since the lower 4 bits corresponding to the slave 4 are "1", "0FH" ("000011111B") is set. In _SPI_SPENB_PB, communication start information for a slave that executes communication in SPI transmission (CHB) is set.

Here, since the slave 4 is used as an input, it is not necessary to start communication with the slave 4 at the timing of the output. However, even if the enable signal of the slave 4 is set to start communication, the communication of the slave 4 is not started as a result because there is no data for communication in the buffer of the slave 4. In this way, the communication start is set including the enable signal of the slave that does not need to start the communication because the table can be commonly used during SPI communication. By doing so, it is possible to set the setting at the start of SPI communication and execute it in one table, and it is possible to reduce the capacity of the program (data). Note that the tables may be divided and configured so that communication is not possible for all slaves, but only slaves that require communication are enabled. By doing so, the program (data) capacity is increased, but it is possible to prevent erroneous communication from being performed by the slave that originally does not need to communicate.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 starts SPI communication by executing the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) by the INVD instruction (“INVD_PORT_DAT_SET”). This will be further described with reference to the program code shown in FIG. 384.

First, the main control MPU 1311 stores the number of data settings in the B register (“LD B, (HL +)”). The HL register stores a table "SPI_COMTX_B" (FIG. 405) containing SPI communication definition information in the SPI 2-byte output process that is the caller of the output port data setting process, and is the number of data settings initially defined. Will be stored in the B register.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 starts SPI communication for SPI transmission / reception (CHA). Specifically, the address corresponding to the SPI communication A control register is set in the W register (“LD W, (HL +)”), and the set value of the SPI communication A enable bit is set in the A register (“LD A,”). (HL +) "). After that, by setting the SPI communication A enable bit in the SPI communication A control register, SPI communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is started (“OUT (W), A”). Further, it is determined whether or not the loop for the number of data settings has been completed (“DJNZ P? ORTDAT_SET_1”), but since SPI communication by SPI transmission (CHB) has not been started, communication by SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is performed. Similarly, after setting the SPI communication B enable bit in the SPI communication B control register, the output port data setting process is terminated.

In the process of "LD B, (HL +)", the data of the address indicated by the HL register is loaded into the B register, and then the value of the HL register is incremented by +1. As a result, when reading the data of the address indicated by the HL register one after another, it is not necessary to execute the process of increasing the HL register by +1 (INC HL), and it is possible to reduce the program capacity.

When the SPI communication process in step P124 is completed, the main control MPU 1311 sets the game stop data for stopping the game (step P125). Further, the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) for setting the set game stop data in the output port is executed (step P126). Finally, the performance display monitor process for displaying various information about the game on the performance display monitor is executed (step P127), and the process returns to the caller's process (timer interrupt process).

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the SPI 2-byte output process (SPI_TX__WA) and the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) are called by the INVD instruction in order to execute the SPI communication. Therefore, the SPI communication It is possible to reduce the overhead for executing and speed up the processing.

[24-4. Control when receiving input signal in SPI communication]
Subsequently, in SPI communication, the configuration and procedure for receiving signals from various sensors and switches will be described. First, a configuration for receiving an input signal by SPI communication will be described. The slave that receives the input signal corresponds to the slave 4 in the block diagram shown in FIG. 400, and corresponds to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 when applied to the specific configuration of the present embodiment. As shown in the main board mounting diagram of FIG. 399, the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 is actually composed of three ICs (1341a to 1341c).

[24-4-1. Configuration for receiving input signals by SPI communication]
FIG. 406 is a circuit diagram centered on a configuration for receiving a signal by SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 receives inputs from the switches and sensors via the connectors at the Q / D terminals 1 to 8. Further, the clock signal output from the SPICK terminal of the main control MPU 1311 which is the master is received from the CK terminal. Further, the signal output from SPITX of the main control MPU 1311 is not taken in, and by outputting "0" data from SPITX, a LOW level signal is input to the CLR / LOAD terminal, and Q / D8 to The signal connected to the Q / D1 terminal is input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341. The specific data acquisition timing is as described with reference to FIG. 401 and the like based on the operation mode.

The parallel signal input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314 is converted into a serial signal and input to the SPIRX terminal of the main control MPU 1311. The signals input to each parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314 are sequentially output (for example, in the order of parallel-serial conversion circuits 1314c, 1314b, 1314a). The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314a outputs the converted signal from the Q8'terminal and inputs it to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314b. The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314b outputs the signal input to the Q / D 1 to 8 terminals from the Q8'terminal, and then outputs the signal input to the SI terminal from the Q8'terminal. The signal output from the Q8'terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314b is input to the SI terminal of the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314c. The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314c outputs the signal input to the Q / D terminals 1 to 8 from the Q8C terminal, and then outputs the signal input to the SI terminal from the Q8C terminal. The signal output from the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314c is input to the SPIRX terminal of the main control MPU 1311.

Subsequently, with respect to each parallel-serial conversion circuit 1341 (1341a to 1341c), signals input from various switches and sensors will be described. In this embodiment, each parallel-serial conversion circuit (1341a to 1341c) has the same hardware.

The parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314a receives the input of the signals output from the normal winning opening switches 1 to 3 and the large winning opening switches 1 to 3 via the connector 13101. Further, the input of the signal output from the start port switch 2 via the connector 13107 and the start port switch 1 via the connector 13108 is received. The signal input from each switch passes through the interface (IF) circuit 13105a before being input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314a.

The interface circuit 13105a can detect a disconnection, a short circuit, a power supply abnormality, or the like with respect to the input signal. When an abnormality is detected, an error signal is output from the E terminal. Further, the interface circuit 13105a receives the input of the signal detected by the proximity sensor. The proximity sensor outputs a voltage of about 9 V when the sensor does not pass (when not detected), and outputs a voltage of about 0.8 V when passing is detected. Therefore, inside the interface circuit 13105a, when the input signal is 0V, it is determined to be a disconnection, and when it is 12V, it is determined to be a short circuit. Since the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105a and the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105b (described later) are directly connected by a wiring pattern, it is not possible to determine whether the abnormality is on the interface circuit 13105a side or the interface circuit 13105b side. It has become. This is because it is not necessary to detect the abnormality individually because it hinders the progress of the game regardless of which sensor causes the abnormality. By connecting the E terminals of each interface circuit, an abnormality may be detected individually for each interface circuit. The error signal is input to the main control MPU 1311 from the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341 like other input signals, and the main control MPU 1311 receives the error signal together with the signals from various sensors in the input processing, and the error signal indicates an error. It is determined by the processing of the program, and if it is determined that an error occurs, a command for notifying the peripheral control board of the switch abnormality is sent, and a switch abnormality occurs in the lamp (LED), voice, liquid crystal display device, etc. It is designed to notify you of what you have done.

The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314b receives the input of the signal output from the out switch and the safe switch via the connector 13104, and receives the input of the signal output from the start port switch 3 via the connector 13106. Further, the input of the signal output from the general-purpose input, the discharge port switch, the specific area switch, the combined operation gate switch, and the normal figure gate switch is received via the connector 13101. The signal input from each switch passes through the interface (IF) circuit 13105b before being input to the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314b. The interface circuit 13105b has the same function as the interface circuit 13105a and receives the input of the signal detected by the proximity sensor. As described above, the wiring from the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105b is connected to the E terminal of the interface circuit 13105a and is input to the main control MPU 1311 via the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314c.

The parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314c receives inputs of signals output from the vibration detection sensor, the magnetic detection switch, the specific area fraud prevention switch, and the start port fraud prevention switches 1 to 3 via the connector 13101. Further, the parallel-serial conversion circuit 1314c receives the input of the error signal (SW-E) input from the E terminals of the interface circuit 13105a and the interface circuit 13105b. The specific area fraud prevention switch and the start port fraud prevention switch 1 to 3 are photo type sensors, and output a voltage of 12V when the sensor does not pass (when not detected) and a voltage of 0V when passing is detected. The vibration detection sensor and the magnetic detection switch are not photo-type sensors, but similarly, when vibration or magnetic abnormality is not detected (when not detected), a voltage of 12V is output and vibration or magnetic abnormality is output. When is detected (at the time of detection), a voltage of 0 V is output. The voltage at the time of detection and the voltage at the time of non-detection may be opposite, and a voltage of 0 V at the time of non-detection and 12 V at the time of detection may be output. Unlike the proximity sensor, the voltage at ON / OFF is different, so the transistor 13109 converts it to 5V and outputs the signal without going through the interface circuit. The transistor 13109 used at this time has a removal circuit (resistor) built in the input stage of the transistor to prevent erroneous detection due to noise or the like at the time of signal input.

A pull-up resistor 13109b is connected between the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109 and the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314. In addition to the pull-up resistor 13109b, a capacitor 13109c is connected between GND and the signal line for noise removal. Further, a pull-up resistor 13109d is connected between the connector 13101, the interface circuit 13105, and the transistor 13109a. These pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitors 13109c, interface circuit 13105 and transistor 13109a are located relatively close to the connector 13101, while the parallel serial conversion circuit 1314 does not need to be located near the connector 13101. .. That is, the electronic components arranged in the vicinity of the connector 13101 are specific circuits (pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d), capacitors 13109c, among the input circuits (circuits of the input section from the connector 13101 or the like to the main control MPU 1311). The interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109a). This is because the output from the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109a has a high drive capability and is not easily affected by noise even if the distance between the interface circuit 13105 and the transistor 13109a is large. Further, when receiving a signal from the outside of the main control board 1310, if the wiring pattern is routed in the board, it may affect the wiring pattern of other signals. Therefore, the interface circuit 13105, the transistor 13109a, and these are used. Electronic components such as the pull-up resistors (13109b, 13109d) and capacitors 13109c to be connected need to be arranged in the vicinity of the connector.

[24-4-2. Procedure for receiving input signals by SPI communication (switch input processing)]
Subsequently, a procedure for inputting data input from various switches provided in the gaming machine to the main control MPU 1311 by serial communication (SPI communication) will be described. Specifically, the switch input process in step S74 in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 23 will be described. Regarding the switch input process, FIG. 353 describes a process of detecting the winning of a game ball such as a start port and storing the switch edge information in the prize ball determination area, but here, it is limited to the prize ball information. The procedure of receiving the input signals from various sensors and inputting the signals to the main control MPU 1311 by SPI communication will be described.

FIG. 407 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a switch input process for acquiring information detected by a sensor or the like provided in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. FIG. 408 is a diagram showing an example of the program code of the switch input process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 407. Hereinafter, the details of the switch input process will be described with reference to FIGS. 407 and 408, and a procedure for receiving the signal input to the main control MPU 1311 by SPI communication will be shown. As described above, in the present embodiment, the input signal is received using the third channel (slave 4, A3 channel) of SPI transmission / reception (CHA). When explaining the processing of the program, "slave 4" will be described as "A3 channel".

When the switch input process is started, the main control MPU 1311 sets transmission dummy data (8 bytes) in the communication buffer (_SPIBFA3) of the A3 channel (step P6001). Specifically, first, the start address of the SPI input setting data (see FIG. 409A) is set in the HL register. At this time, by setting the value obtained by adding the test pointer address (fixed to 9000H; rewritable by the program) + the value of the second operand in the HL register by the LDT instruction, the word length instruction (LD HL) of 3 bytes should be used. , SPI_SWRX_B), the word length can be 2 bytes, and the capacity of the program can be reduced. The value of the second operand is the difference value from the start data address of the data to be set, and the start data address of the data to be set by adding the value of the second operand to the value indicated by the test pointer is the HL register (first operand). ) Is stored. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the input signal is received from the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1314 (slave 4), the input signal is controlled to be taken in every time the dummy data is transmitted. The dummy data set at the time of data reception is defined in the SPI input time setting data, and the contents of the SPI input time setting data will be described below with reference to FIG. 409A.

FIG. 409A is an example of the program code of the setting data (setting data at the time of SPI input; SPI_SWRX_B) at the time of starting the reception of the input signal by the SPI communication of the present embodiment. As the SPI input setting data, data indicating the number of data settings is defined at the beginning, and then the address of the transmission (communication) buffer and the transmission data (dummy data) stored in the transmission buffer are defined. In the example shown in FIG. 409A, dummy data is set in the transmission (communication) buffer (SPIBFA3) for the A3 channel. At this time, the transmission data of the 1st and 5th bytes is used as the load data of the input signal (latch data; SPI reception LOAD signal (_SPI_LOAD_SIG = FEH)), and the others (2nd, 4th, 6th to 8th bytes). The transmission data of is dummy data (SPI general-purpose reception signal (SPI_COMM_SIG = FFH)). This is because the input port of the switch is allocated for 3 bytes and the same amount of transmission data is required. A set consists of a total of 4 bytes of load signal for 1 byte and dummy data for 3 bytes. In the present embodiment, the 8th bit of the load data is set to "0", but since the load data is discarded without being taken in as described later, the 8th bit is not limited to the 8th bit, for example, the 1st bit. May be set to "0". Further, instead of outputting the load signal by serial communication, the load signal may be output from the input / output port.

In the case of the configuration to be transmitted as load data by serial communication, the wiring pattern for outputting the load signal, the configuration for noise removal, the arrangement of the input / output ports, etc. are harder than when the load signal is output from the input / output port. It is possible to reduce software costs such as wear (circuit) costs and program processing for turning on / off load signals. On the other hand, when the load signal is output from the input / output port, the process of transmitting the load data is not required, and it is not necessary to discard the data captured at the timing of the load data without transmitting the load data. The process can be simplified. When data is output by SPI communication, "0" data (LOW level signal) may be output as the SPITX signal. In that case, the input signal is input to the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341. However, since the transmission buffer of the A3 channel is empty, SPI communication on the A3 channel is not started, so the data is taken into the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341 at this timing. The signal is updated when the load signal is output in the input process, and is eventually discarded.

In the SPI communication of the present embodiment, in order to prevent the game from proceeding due to erroneous data due to the influence of noise or the like, the signals input from the switch or the like are read twice, and when they match, normal communication is performed. Communication accuracy is improved by judging that it is. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two sets (8 bytes in total) of data for a total of 4 bytes of a 1-byte load signal and 3 bytes of dummy transmission data are transmitted, and the received data for the two sets are compared. To determine whether communication was successful. Since the 1st and 5th bytes of the transmission data are used as load signals, they are not captured as input signals at the time of transmission, and the input data becomes invalid data. In addition, communication is performed when the input signals captured when transmitting the transmission data of the 2nd and 6th bytes, the 3rd byte and the 7th byte, the 4th byte and the 8th byte correspond to each other, and the corresponding input signals match, respectively. (Read twice) Create edge data as success and control the game.

When the SPI input time setting data is set in the HL register, the main control MPU 1311 executes the output port data setting process (PORT_DAT_SET) by the INVD instruction. As a result, the transmission data for 8 bytes defined in the SPI input setting data is set in the communication buffer of the A3 channel, and then the enable of all slaves used for communication of the CHA control register 2 (SPICNA1) is set to 1. By setting to, 8 bytes of dummy data stored in the communication buffer (_SPIBFA3) of the A3 channel are transmitted.

In addition, when starting communication only for a specific slave such as communicating only with the input slave 4, individual processing and setting data are required, but communication should be started for all slaves. By configuring it, it is possible to standardize processing and data.

Next, the main control MPU 1311 sets the monitoring time until the SPI communication is completed (step P6002). If the communication is not completed by the set start time, it is determined that the communication has failed.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not communication is in progress (communication is continuing) (step P6003). Specifically, first, the value set in the control register 2 (SPICNA1; SPI communication A control register 1; see FIG. 404 (B)) for SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is stored in the A register. Then, the enable bit is referred to from the value stored in the A register, and it is determined whether or not communication is in progress. If communication is in progress (the result of step P6003 is “YES”), the system waits until communication is completed or the monitoring time elapses (step S6004).

When the monitoring time elapses while the A3 channel is communicating (the result of step P6004 is “YES”), the main control MPU 1311 sets the initialization of the communication circuit (step P6005). Further, instead of the input data, the communication abnormality data is set in a predetermined register described later (step P6006). After that, by executing the processing after step P6008, it is controlled so that the edge data in which the signal changes from OFF to ON (the switch is not determined to be ON) is not created.

Here, the initialization setting of step P6005 will be described. FIG. 409B is an example of the program code of the setting data (SPI restart setting data; SPI_RESTART_B) at the time of initializing the communication circuit of the SPI communication of the present embodiment. As the SPI restart setting data, data indicating the number of data settings is defined at the beginning, and then setting data for initializing the communication circuit is defined. First, by setting "00000001B" in the control register 1 (SPICNA0) for SPI transmission / reception (CHA), "1" is set in SPRSTA, and the initialization of the communication circuit is executed. The set value of the control register 1 for SPI transmission / reception (CHA) is as described with reference to FIG. 402. Further, the bit shift settings of the slave 1, the slave 3, and the slave 4 are set to "1" (LSB first), and the operation mode is set to "0" (mode 0). Further, the bollets of slave 1 (_SPIPSA0), slave 2 (_SPIPSA1) and slave 4 (_SPIPSA3) are set. Since the slave 3 (A2 channel) is unused, it is not set in particular.

The "communication abnormality data" set in step P6006 is "FFH" (when the input signal is OFF) so that the edge data is not set when creating the edge data that changes from OFF to ON in the process of step P6008. The same value as the value of) is set. In the present embodiment, since it is determined to be ON when all the signals are Low, the communication abnormality data is the same "FFH" so as to be the case of High. Therefore, for example, if it is determined to be ON when the input signal is High, the communication abnormality data to be set is "00H" instead of "FFH".

On the other hand, when the main control MPU 1311 is not in communication (when the communication of dummy data is completed) (the result of step P6003 is "NO"), the input data captured together with the transmission of the dummy data is input from the SPI communication A3 buffer register. It is taken in as input data and set in a predetermined register (step P6007). Explaining the process of step P6007 in detail, as described above, the data is fetched by 8 bytes ((load data + dummy data x 3) x 2 times = 8 bytes) from the SPI communication A3 buffer register. To do. First, the data of the first byte is fetched, but the fetched data is discarded because of the invalid data fetched when the load data is transmitted, and the captured data of the second byte and the data of the third byte are each pair register (2). It is temporarily stored in the WA register, which can be used as a register for bytes), and then moved to the BC register. Furthermore, the data of the 4th to 6th bytes is taken in. As described above, the 5th byte data is discarded because of the invalid data captured when the load data is transmitted, and the 4th byte captured data and the 6th byte data are temporarily stored in the WA register, respectively, and further. Move to DE register. Finally, the captured data of the 7th byte and the data of the 8th byte are stored in the WA register, respectively.

Subsequently, the main control MPU 1311 creates edge data from the input data stored in a predetermined register (step P6008). In the process of step P6008, edge data is created based on the data captured in each register regardless of whether or not the communication is completed normally. This is because when a communication abnormality occurs, "communication abnormality data" is set in a predetermined register in the process of step P6006, so that the edge data from which the input data is taken in (changes from OFF to ON) is not created. .. As a result, even if the communication is abnormal, the edge data is created by the same processing as when the communication is normal, and the control structure of the program can be simplified.

To specifically explain the process of step P6008, first, the values of the W register and the D register are exchanged, and the start address of the SPI switch input information data is set in the HL register. In this embodiment, three types of SPI switch input information data 1, SPI switch input information data 2, and SPI switch input information data 3 are defined, and a specific configuration is shown in FIG. 410.

FIG. 410 is a diagram illustrating an example of SPI switch input information data of the present embodiment. The SPI switch input information data is composed of adjustment data, mask data, and level area address.

The adjustment data is defined by a bit string for one byte, and is data for adjusting the input data. The adjustment data is intended to be 1 when the captured input signal is ON. In FIG. 410, since the adjustment data is “00h”, when the captured value is “1”, it is turned ON and the switch level data becomes “1”. On the other hand, when it is "0", it is turned OFF and the level data of the switch becomes "0".

Like the adjustment data, the mask data is defined by a bit string for one byte, and is data for specifying the data to be compared as needed. By configuring the mask data with the bit used as the input signal set to "1" and the unused bit set to "0", even if the unused input bit is mistakenly turned ON ("1"), it is turned off by the mask data. It can be set to (“0”).

The level area address is the address of the area for storing the level data created from the input data. Since the edge data is stored after the level data is stored, the edge data is stored in the SPI switch input information data by setting the area for storing the edge data to be a continuous area with the area for storing the level data. The address to store is not set. The area for storing level data and edge data has the same configuration. If the area for storing level data and the area for storing edge data are not stored in a continuous area, the area for storing edge data may be set (held). In this case, if the upper byte of the address of the area that stores the level data and the area that stores the edge data is fixed (common), it is better than holding the address of each area as it is by setting only the lower byte of the address. Data capacity can be reduced.

FIG. 411 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the area for storing the level data and the edge data of the present embodiment. Referring to FIG. 411, the level area address of the SPI switch input information data 1 is “0006h”, the first bit (BIT0) is the start port SW (switch) 1, and the second bit (BIT1) is the start port SW2,3. The bit (BIT2) is the large winning opening SW1, the 4th bit (BIT3) is the large winning opening SW2, the 5th bit (BIT4) is the large winning opening SW3, and the 6th bit (BIT5) is the normal winning opening SW1, 7th bit. (BIT6) is the normal winning opening SW2, and the 8th bit (BIT7) is the normal winning opening SW3. The area (edge area address) for storing the edge data corresponding to the SPI switch input information data 1 is "0007h", which is a continuous area with the area for storing the level data. With this configuration, it is not necessary to redefine the area for storing edge data, so it is possible to reduce the capacity of the program and data, and it is sufficient to read a continuous area when reading data. Processing efficiency can be improved while simplifying.

Here, the description of the process of step P6008 of FIG. 407 (FIG. 408) is returned to. After setting the SPI switch input information data in the HL register, the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) for checking the input data and creating the level data and the edge data is executed. The details of the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) will be described with reference to FIGS. 412 and 413.

FIG. 412 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) of the present embodiment. FIG. 413 is a diagram showing an example of the program code of the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 412.

When the SPI2 reading process is started, the main control MPU 1311 saves the value of the DE register in the stack area because the DE register may be used in the subsequent process (step P6101). Next, the level area address is specified from the address of the SPI switch input information data stored in the HL register that stores the level data, and is stored in the index register (step P6102). After the level data and the edge data are created by the level edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) described later, the data created based on the address stored in the index register is stored. Further, after the processing of step P6102, the value of the HL register is subtracted and adjusted for the subsequent processing. The level edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) is also called to create edge data of a general-purpose IO switch (input signal from a parallel port) that does not depend on SPI communication in addition to input by SPI communication. At this time, since the switch input information data for inputting the signal from the general-purpose IO switch is larger than that for SPI communication, the address of the switch input information data is adjusted by subtracting the value of the HL register (“DEC HL”). doing. The data not included in the switch input information data for SPI communication is, for example, the number of times the data is read or the address of the input port.

The main control MPU 1311 determines whether or not the input data read twice matches (whether the data to be compared matches) (step S6103). The data to be compared is stored in the W register and the A register, and is compared by the CP instruction. As described above, immediately after the input data is fetched from the communication buffer, the second, third, fourth, sixth, seventh, and eighth input data are the B, C, D, E, W, and A registers (predetermined). However, since the values of the W register and the D register are exchanged before the first SPI double reading process is executed, the 4th fetched data and the 8th fetched data are stored. Will be compared. After that, when the SPI2 reading process is executed, the target data is exchanged as necessary by exchanging the value of the register in which the data to be compared is stored in the caller's process (switch input process). It is possible to execute the process without being aware of the number of bytes of the data, and the SPI double reading process (TWICE_SPI) can be a highly versatile process.

When the input data read twice does not match (the result of step P6103 is "NO"), the main control MPU 1311 stores "00H" as edge data in the edge data area (step P6105). Further, the saved DE register is returned from the stack area (step P6106), and this process is terminated.

If the input data read twice match (the result of step P6103 is "YES"), the main control MPU 1311 executes the level edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) by the INVS instruction (step P6104). Create level data and edge data corresponding to the input data. The level edge data creation process will be described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415.

FIG. 414 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the level edge data creation process of the present embodiment. FIG. 415 is a diagram showing an example of the program code of the level edge data creation process of the present embodiment, and corresponds to the flowchart of FIG. 414.

First, the main control MPU 1311 creates level data from the input data based on the adjustment data and the mask data included in the switch input information table (step P6201). Specifically, the value of each bit is adjusted so that the input signal stored in the A register is "1" when the input signal captured based on the adjustment data is ON and "0" when the input signal is OFF. .. Further, the level data is created so that the bits other than the bits used as the input signal by the mask data are not set to ON (“1”). Further, the calculated level data is saved in the E register.

The main control MPU 1311 calculates the level data and the XOR value (intermediate data) at the time of the previous interrupt (step P6203). As a result, 1 is set only in the case of ON or OFF edge. Next, the main control MPU 1311 stores (updates) the current level data in the level data area (address stored in the index register) (step P6204). Further, the AND value between the intermediate data (value of the A register) and the level data created by this interrupt is calculated, and edge data is created (step P6205). At this time, "1" is stored if it is an ON edge, and 0 is stored in other cases. Finally, the main control MPU 1311 stores the edge data stored in the A register in the edge data area (area continuous with the level data area) (step P6206).

After creating the level data and the edge data, the main control MPU 1311 returns the saved DE register from the stack area (step P6106), and ends this process.

Here, the process returns to the switch input process of FIG. 407 (FIG. 408), and the processes after step P6008 will be described. When the creation and storage of the level data and the edge data of the first input data are completed, the main control MPU 1311 exchanges the values of the C register and the E register and stores the value of the DE register in the WA register. As a result, by exchanging the values of the C register and the E register, the input data captured in the 7th register and the input data captured in the 3rd register are stored in the DE register, and by storing this in the WA register. The level data and edge data of the input data are created by comparing the input data captured in the 7th position with the input data captured in the 3rd position. Subsequent processing is the same as the first procedure for processing the fourth input data and the eighth input data. Further, the BC address stores the second input data and the sixth input data, which are stored in the WA register and processed in the same manner to process 3 bytes of input data. It is completed, and the capture of the signal input from the serial port is completed.

After that, the main control MPU 1311 fetches the data input from the parallel port, calls the level edge data creation process (MAKE_LEV_EDG) by the INVS instruction, and creates the edge data of the input signal captured by the parallel port (step P6009). This process ends.

[24-4-3. Procedure for receiving input signals by SPI communication (time chart)]
The procedure for receiving the input signal by SPI communication in the gaming machine of the present embodiment has been described above with reference to the flowchart and the program code. Subsequently, the process of receiving the input signal by SPI communication will be described in chronological order with reference to the time charts of FIGS. 416 and 417.

FIG. 416 is a time chart showing the process from the start of the switch input process of the present embodiment to the completion of data transmission by SPI communication in chronological order. FIG. 417 is a time chart showing the process from the completion of data transmission by SPI communication to the start of the switch input process by the next timer interrupt in the switch input process of the present embodiment in chronological order.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 23 is executed. As described above, the timer interrupt interval (CTC setting) is set at the time of initial setting of the main control MPU 1311, and can be set to an arbitrary value such as "0000h" to "FFFFh", as well as a fixed value (1ms, 1ms, 2ms, 4ms, 1,489ms) can be set. Further, the CTC can set an arbitrary fixed value, and among the arbitrary fixed values, the first setting, the second setting, and the third setting are set so as to have a multiple relationship, and the fourth setting is the first to first setting. It has a function that allows settings that are not related to multiples of the three settings. In the present embodiment, the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms by setting the third set value. A timer interrupt may be generated at any of the first set value, the second set value, and the fourth set value without being limited to the third set value. Period for sampling by the timer interrupt (input signal capture) , The output of the output signal, the update reference time of the timekeeping, the update cycle of the random number, etc.) are set so as to be appropriate values as the specifications of the game machine. In particular, sampling of input signal capture is important, and the timer interrupt cycle is set according to the pulse width at which the ON signal is output when the switch detects the passage of the game ball. When the switch detects the passage of the game ball, the pulse width changes according to the falling speed, and the faster the falling speed, the shorter the pulse width. Therefore, the shorter the pulse width (the faster the falling speed), the shorter the sampling period needs to be. If the sampling cycle is too short, the processing cannot be completed in one timer interrupt cycle. Therefore, the timer interrupt cycle is set according to the processing amount and the shortest pulse width from the switch.

When the switch input process is started, first, 8-byte dummy transmission data is set in the communication buffer (SPIBFA3) for the A3 channel by the SPI input time setting data (SPI_SWRX_B; FIG. 409A) (step P6001). .. As described above, the transmission data includes the load signal for latching (“FEH”; _SPI_LOAD_SIG) at the 1st and 5th bytes, and dummy data (“FFH”; _SPI_COMM_SIG) at the 2nd to 4th bytes and the 6th to 8th bytes. ) Is set. The value of the dummy data is not limited to "FFH" and may be any value.

At the start of SPI communication, the enable terminal (SPECNB3) is updated from OFF (“0”) to ON (“1”), and a clock signal is output from the clock terminal (SPICK) at predetermined intervals. Then, a load signal is output from the transmission terminal (SPITX) of the main control MPU 1311. At this time, since the corresponding input data does not exist in the load signal and is ignored by the receiving side, the state of the receiving terminal (SPIRX) is undefined.

When the load signal is received, it changes from ON (“1”) to OFF (“0”) at the signal of the 8th clock, and this changed signal is input to the LOAD terminal of the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341. The input signal for bytes is latched by the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341, and the main control MPU 1311 sequentially receives the input data from the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341 as a serial signal from the receiving terminal SPIRX. Specifically, the input data of the first byte is received from the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341c at the time of data transmission of the second byte of the transmission data. Subsequently, the input data of the second byte is received from the parallel / serial conversion circuit 1341b at the time of data transmission of the third byte of the transmission data, and finally the parallel / serial conversion circuits 1341a to 3 are received at the time of data transmission of the fourth byte of the transmission data. Receives the input data of the byte. Then, the data for reading (checking) twice (second time) is received. Similar to the first data reception, when the load signal is output first, the input signal for 3 bytes is latched again in the parallel serial conversion circuit 1341, and then the input data for the 4th to 6th bytes is 6 to 8 bytes. The data is sequentially received from the reception terminal (SPIRX) according to the transmission timing of the transmission data of the eye, and then the transmission of the data is terminated. At this time, the reception status of the A3 channel is set to receive (“1”), and the enable (SGENBA3) of the slave 4 of the CHA control register 2 (SPICNA1) is set to end communication (“1”) during communication (“1”). It is updated to "0").

When the main control MPU 1311 receives the next data, it confirms that the SPI communication A enable bit (_SPI_SPENBA_PB) has reached the end of communication (“0”), and starts reading the input data from the communication buffer (SPIBFA3). (Step P6007 or later). At this time, the monitoring time is set, and if it cannot be confirmed that the communication is completed within the monitoring time, the SPI communication circuit is initialized (steps P6002 to P6005). The contents of the communication buffer are designed so that the read data is cleared in order each time the data is read, and the buffer becomes empty when the reading of all the data is completed. After that, the setting of dummy data in the communication buffer and the reception of input data are repeated until the next timer interrupt processing is started. When the next timer interrupt process is started, the switch input process is executed from the beginning.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to reduce the wiring of data on the main control board 1310 by serial communication (SPI communication), and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in board design. Further, by adopting SPI communication, the number of wirings is larger than that of I2C communication, but the communication speed can be increased.

In the present embodiment, electronic components are managed by dedicating slaves (parallel serial conversion circuit 1341, serial parallel conversion circuit 1342, etc.) controlled by the master (main control MPU 1311) to reception (input) or transmission (output). This can be facilitated and the degree of freedom in arranging electronic components can be increased. This makes it possible to shorten the wiring distance between electronic components, and it is possible to eliminate the effects of noise and stabilize communication, such as making it easier to separate the wiring that outputs the clock signal from the wiring that sends and receives data. can.

Further, the main control MPU 1311 enables synchronous serial communication and asynchronous serial communication as serial communication, and has a plurality of channels for synchronous serial communication and asynchronous serial communication. The communication format of asynchronous serial communication is 8 bits. In asynchronous serial communication, each channel is fixed to either reception or transmission, and each channel is provided with a storage means (communication buffer) capable of storing communication data. Multiple types of communication buffer capacities can be defined. For example, among the communication buffers, the one with the largest size (for example, 512 bytes) for sending commands to the peripheral control board 1510, which has a large capacity of data to be transmitted, is used. do. On the other hand, a small size (for example, 128 bytes) may be used for sending commands to the payout control board, and a buffer that can be used for general purposes may be prepared. By performing asynchronous communication, it is possible to send and receive data in parallel with other processing, and it is possible to improve the efficiency of the entire processing.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the embodiment, the one mainly applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a game machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the pachislot machine, a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, etc. In this case, the same action and effect can be obtained.

1 Pachinko machine (game machine)
2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 951 Payout control board (ball information control means)
1310 Main control board (game control means)
1311 Main control MPU (CPU, arithmetic unit, arithmetic unit, control means, master)
1312 RAM
1313 ROM
1314 Main control I / O port 1317 Accessory ratio indicator (base indicator)
1510 Peripheral control board (effect control means)
1600 Main liquid crystal display device 2002 First start port 2004 Second start port 4000 Slot machine (game machine)
4210 Start lever 4211 Reel stop button 4300 Symbol variation display device 4301 Reel 4600 Main board (game control device, game control means)
4601 CPU
4602 ROM
4603 RAM
4700 Production control board 4910 ROM area 4920 RAM area 4930 I / O area 4940 Parameter information setting area 6100 1st area 6101 Non-mounting area 6102 Part mounting area 6200 2nd area 6300 Inspection part mounting area 1341 Parallel / serial conversion circuit (slave) )
1342, 1343, 1345, 1346 Serial-parallel conversion circuit (slave)

Claims (1)

A gaming machine equipped with a main control board that controls the progress of a game.
The main control board
A control means for controlling the progress of the game and
A signal communication means capable of sequentially inputting signals necessary for controlling the progress of the game to the control means in response to a request from the control means, and a signal communication means.
With
The signal communication means inputs the signal requested by the control means to the control means, and then inputs the same signal again.
The control means is a gaming machine characterized in that a signal input first from the signal communication means is compared with a signal input later, and if they match, it is determined that communication has been performed normally.

Images